Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

Microsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/bookofblackbasscOOhensrich 


g 


CTsIsl*/ 


^W-Z*^ 


BOOK 


BLACK  BASS 


COMPRISING  ITS  COMPLETE 


SCIENTIFIC  AND  LIFE  HISTORY 


TOGETHER  WITH   A   PRACTICAL  TREATISE  ON 


ANGLING  AND  FLY  FISHING 


AND   A   rULL  DESCRIPTION  OF 


TOOLS,  TACKLE  AND  IMPLEMENTS 


JAMES  A.  HENSHALL,  M.D 


"  I  am,  Sir,  a  brother  of  the  Angle."—  Izaak  Walton 


%vNhi  %l\mhnteb 

CINCINNATI 
ROBERT  CLARKE  &  CO 

1881 


Copyright,  1881, 

BY 

J.  A.  HENSHALL. 


/¥39£T 


TO   THE 

CUVIEK  CLUB 

OP 
CINCINNATI,  OHIO, 

FOR   ITS   PRAISEWORTHY    EFFORTS    IN   BEHALF   OF  THE    PRESERVATION    OF 
FISH    AND    GAME;      AND    FOR    THE    GREAT    BENEFITS   IT   HAS    BE- 
STOWED   UPON    THE    ANGLER,    THE    SPORTSMAN, 
AND  THE   NATURALIST, 

THIS  BOOK  IS 

RESPECTFULLY  DEDICATED 

BY 

THE  AUTHOR. 


M846464 


PREFACE. 


This  book  owes  its  origin  to  a  long-cherished  desire  on  the 
part  of  the  author,  to  give  to  the  Black  Bass  its  proper  place 
among  game  fishes,  and  to  create  among  anglers,  and  the  public 
generally,  an  interest  in  a  fish  that  has  never  been  so  fully  ap- 
preciated as  its  merits  deserve,  because  of  the  want  of  suitable 
tackle  for  its  capture,  on  the  one  hand,  and  a  lack  of  information 
regarding  its  habits  and  economic  value  on  the  other. 

The  Book  of  the  Black  Bass  is  of  an  entirely  practical 
nature,  both  as  regards  its  subject-matter  and  its  illustrations. 
It  has  been  written  more  with  a  view  to  instruct,  than  to  amuse 
or  entertain  the  reader;  he  will,  therefore,  look  in  vain,  between 
its  covers,  for  those  rhetorical  flights,  poetic  descriptions  or  en- 
tertaining accounts  and  pleasing  illustrations  of  the  pleasures  and 
vicissitudes  of  angling,  which  are  usually  found  in  works  of  this 
character.  Nor  is  it  to  be  regarded,  on  the  other  hand,  as  a  book 
of  a  purely  scientific  nature — far  from  it  —  for  the  author  has 
written  as  an  angler  rather  than  as  a  naturalist.  With  these 
apologies,  I  trust  the  reader  will  not  be  disappointed  in  its  perusal. 

Some  of  its  chapters  are  based  on  articles  heretofore  con- 
tributed by  the  -author  to  Forest  and  Stream,  the  Chicago  Field, 
and  other  journals,  which  have  since  been  re- written,  enlarged 
and  elaborated. 

The  full-page  illustrations  of  the  two  species  of  Black 
Bass  were  drawn  from  life  by  Dr.  E.  R.  Copeland,  and  are  faith- 
ful representations  in  every  particular.  It  was  the  original  in- 
tention of  the  author  to  have  had  these  illustrations  lithographed 

(v) 


Vlll  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  XV.— Artificial  Baits— Trolling  Baits— Spoon  Baits— Arti- 
ficial Minnows— Artificial  Insects— The  Bob,  etc.,        .  .      307. 

CHAPTER  XVI.—  Natural  Baits  —  Minnows  —  Craw-fish  —  Helgram- 
mite — Grasshoppers — Crickets — Shrimps — Frogs,  etc.,  .      318. 

CHAPTER  XVII.— Miscellaneous  Implements  — Fly-Books  — Creels- 
Landing  Nets — Minnow  Seines  and  Nets — Floats — Sinkers — Swiv- 
els— Clearing  Rings — Disgorgers — Minnow  Buckets — Wading  Pants 
and  Stockings — Rod  and  Reel  Cases,  etc.,  .  .  .      327. 


PART    THIRD. 

ANGLING   AND   FLY-FISHING. 

CHAPTER  XVIII.— The  Philosophy  of  Angling— As  an  Art,         349. 

CHAPTER  XIX. —  Conditions  Governing  the  Biting  of  Fish  —  Influ- 
ences of  Wind,  Weather  and  Water — Rain  and  Sunshine— Thunder 
and  Lightning— Changes  of  the  Moon — Signs  of  the  Zodiac — Day 
and  Season,  etc.,      .......      356. 

CHAPTER  XX.— The  Black  Bass  as  a  Game  Fish— The  Coming  Game 
Fish  of  America — The  Extinction  of  the  Brook  Trout,         .      377. 

CHAPTER  XXL— Fly  Fishing  — Tackle— Rigging  the  Cast— Casting- 
How  to  Strike — Playing — Landing — How,  when  and  where  to  Fish 
with  the  Artificial  Fly — General  Instructions  and  Advice,    .      387. 

CHAPTER  XXII.— Bait  Fishing— Casting  the  Minnow— Tackle— Rig- 
ging the  Cast— How  to  Cast— Striking— Playing— Landing— Advi- 
sory Hints  and  Remarks,  etc.,      .....      409. 

CHAPTER  XXIII.— Still  Fishing— Tackle  and  Implements— Bait  and 
Baiting— On  Lake  and  River— General  Instructions— Management 
of  the  Fish  under  various  exigencies,  etc.,         .  .  .      428. 

CHAPTER  XXIV.— Trolling— Trolling  with  the  Rod— With  Flies— 
With  the  Minnow— With  the  Fly  Spoon— With  the  Hand  Line— 
With  the  Spoon  Bait— With  the  Artificial  Minnow,  etc.  433. 

CHAPTER  XXV.— Skittering  and  Bobbing— Tackle  and  Implements— 
Where  to  "Skitter"— How  to  "Bob,"  etc.,      .  .  .      440. 

CHAPTER  XXVI.— Concluding  Remarks  —  Parting  Advice— Care  of 
Rods  and  Tackle,  etc., 444. 


PART  FIRST. 


TERMINOLOGY,  MORPHOLOGY 

AND 

PHYSIOLOGY. 


BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 


CHAPTER  I. 


SCIENTIFIC  HISTORY  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

(MlCROPTERUS.) 

"  For  my  name  and  memory,  I  leave  it  to  men's  charitable  speeches,  to 
foreign  nations,  and  to  the  next  ages."— Bacon. 

The  scientific  history  of  the  Black  Bass  is  a  most  unsat- 
isfactory one.  This  is  owing  to  a  train  of  accidental  cir- 
cumstances, and  to  the  neglect  of  thorough  investigation 
of  its  earliest  history,  as  recorded  by  Lac6pede,  the  re- 
nowned French  naturalist,  in  his  great  work,  "Histoire 
Naturelle  des  Poissons."* 

It  will  be  well,  perhaps,  before  entering  upon  the  minu- 
tiae of  the  subject,  to  present  a  brief  synopsis  of  the  scien- 


•  "  The  great  work  on  the  natural  history  of  fish,  by  the  Count  Lace- 
pede,  was  the  next  publication  after  that  of  Bloch  upon  general  Ichthy- 
ology. .  .  .  It  is  not,  like  others  in  different  branches  of  Zoology,  a 
servile  copy  of  the  Linnsean  divisions,  but  numerous  others  are  defined 
for  the  first  time :  and  when  we  look  back  to  what  systematic  ichthyology 
was  before,  and  what  it  became  by  the  labors  of  Lacepede,  no  one  can 
in  fairness  deny  but  that  a  great  and  important  advance  in  this  science 
had  been  effected.  No  naturalist  can  hope  to  achieve  more  than  this, 
however  great  may  be  his  abilities ;  and  we  do  not,  therefore,  understand 
upon  what  ground  so  much  censure  has  recently  been  cast  upon  the 
works  of  this  distinguished  Frenchman  by  some  of  his  own  country- 
men."—  Swainson,  Nat.  Hist,  and  Class,  of  Fishes,  I.,  58,  1838. 

(11) 


12  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

tific  history  of  the  Black  Bass,  as  heretofore  understood 
and  accepted  in  this  country,  from  its  first  description  by 
Lacepede  down  to  the  present  time. 

This  representative  American  fish  was  first  brought  to 
the  light  of  science  in  a  foreign  land,  and  under  the  most 
unfavorable  auspices.  Its  scientific  birth  was,  like  Mac- 
duff's, untimely ;  it  was,  unhappily,  born  a  monstrosity  ; 
its  baptismal  names  were,  consequently,  incongruous,  and 
its  sponsors  were,  most  unfortunately,  foreign  naturalists. 

It  has  been,  heretofore,  considered  by  American  natural- 
ists that  the  first  scientific  description  of  a  Black  Bass  was 
that  published  by  Lacepede,  about  the  year  1800,  in  the 
work  just  referred  to.  This  description  was  founded  upon 
a  drawing  of  a  Black  Bass,  and  accompanying  manuscript 
notes  sent  to  him  by  M.  Bosc,  from  the  vicinity  of  Charles- 
ton, South  Carolina,  with  the  local  name  of  "trout/'  or 
"trout-perch."  This  figure,  and  its  accompanying  de- 
scription, were  said  to  be  so  uncertain  and  inaccurate,  that 
it  has  been  considered  very  doubtful  which  species  of 
Black  Bass  was  intended  to  be  represented.  However, 
Lacep&de  named  it  Labrus  salmoides  (Labre  salmoide) — 
the  "trout-like"  Labrus  (wrasse) — in  accordance  with  its 
general  appearance  and  vernacular  name. 

It  has  been  held  by  American  ichthyologists  that  it  was 
after  this,  in  1801-2,  that  Lacepede  received  his  first  ex- 
ample of  a  Black  Bass.  This  was  a  fine  adult  specimen 
of  the  small-mouthed  species,  but,  unfortunately,  it  was  an 
abnormal  specimen,  with  a  deformed  dorsal  fin,  the  last 
rays  having  been  bitten  off  and  torn  loose  from  the  others 
when  the  fish  was  young.  In  conformity  with  this  acci- 
dental peculiarity,  Lacepede  named  it  Micropterus  dolo- 
mieu — Dolomieu's  "small-fin" — he  supposing  that  the  little 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS.  13 

fin  was  a  permanent  and  distinctive  feature,  and  of  generic 
value ;  he  accordingly  created  the  new  genus  Micropterus, 
and  named  the  type  in  honor  of  his  friend  Dolomieu. 

In  1817,  Rafinesque,*  another  French  naturalist,  then 
living  in  America,  procured  specimens  of  the  small-mouthed 
Bass  in  the  region  of  Lake  Champlain,  which  he  named  Bodi- 
anus  achigan,  from  the  Canadian  vulgar  name  of  Vachigan. 
He  either  failed  to  recognize,  or  repudiated,  Lacepede's 
former  descriptions  of  Labrus  salmoides  and  Micropterus 
dolomieu.  During  the  next  few  years,  from  1818  to  1820, 
while  fishing  in  the  Ohio  River  and  its  tributaries,  in 
Kentucky,  Rafinesque  took  and  described  specimens  of 
the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass,  at  different  stages  of  its 
growth,  as  Calliurus  punctulatus,  Lepomis  trifasciata,  Lepo- 
mis  flexuolaris,  Lepomis  salmonea,  Lepomis  notata,  and 
Etheostoma  calliura,  and  specimens  of  the  large-mouthed 
Bass  he  described  as  Lepomis  pallida. 

In  1822,  Le  Sueur,  also  a  French  naturalist,  while  in  this 
country  described  and  named  specimens,  of  various  ages, 
of  the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass,  as  Cichla  variabilis, 
(this  name  was  never  published  by  Le  Sueur,  but  specimens 
sent  by  him  and  thus  labeled,  are  still  preserved  in  the 
Museum   D'Historie   Naturelle  at  Paris,)    Cichla  fasciata, 


*  "  If  I  have  dwelt  too  long  upon  this  subject,  I  hope  the  benevolent 
and  candid  reader  will  excuse  me;  it  has  originated  in  my  desire  to  do 
adequate,  though  tardy,  justice  to  one  whose  whole  life  has  been  devoted  to 
science,  and  who  has  been  singularly  unfortunate  in  his  worldly  concerns; 
who,  notwithstanding  his  eccentricities,  has  a  kind  and  benevolent  heart ; 
and  whose  labors  have  never  been  appreciated  as  I  think  they  deserve. 
But  for  this,  M.  Rafinesque  would  not,  in  advancing  life,  have  to  contend 
with  pecuniary  difficulties,  from  which  a  small  pension  from  the  Ameri- 
ican  Government,  proverbially  generous  to  her  scientific  sons,  would  set 
him  free."— Swainson,  Nat.  Hist,  and  Class,  of  Fishes,  I.,  62,  1838. 


14  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

Cichla  ohiensis  and  Cichla  minima,  and  the  large-mouthed 
Bass  from  Florida  as  Cichla  floridana,  thus  dissenting  from, 
or  entirely  ignoring,  Rafinesque. 

In  1828,  the  great  Cuvier  and  his  coadjutor,  Valenci- 
ennes, received  from  Lake  Huron  a  specimen  of  the  large- 
mouthed  Black  Bass,  and  which,  as  in  the  case  of  the  first 
small-mouthed  Bass  sent  to  France,  was  an  abnormal  or 
monstrous  specimen,  having  likewise  a  deformed  dorsal  fin. 
In  this  instance,  the  last  three  or  four  rays  of  the  spinous 
dorsal  fin  were  torn  off,  thus  leaving,  apparently,  two  sep- 
arate and  distinct  dorsal  fins,  the  first  composed  of  six 
spines,  and  the  second  of  two  spines  and  twelve  or  thirteen 
soft  rays.  This  specimen  was  sent  to  them  under  the  local 
name  of  "Black  Bass,"  or  "Black  Perch;"  and  not  sus- 
pecting 'the  mutilation  of  the  specimen,  they  named  it 
Huro  nigricans  —  the  "  Black  Huron." 

In  the  following  year,  1829,  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes 
obtained  two  specimens  (the  largest  of  which,  at  least,  was 
a  large-mouthed  Bass)  from  New  York,  under  the  name 
of  "  Growler,"  and  four  specimens  of  the  small-mouthed 
Bass  from  the  Wabash  River,  in  Indiana,  all  of  which 
they  identified  with  Lac6pede's  Labrus  salmoides,  and  Le 
Sueur's  Cichla  variabilis,  and  which  they  named  Grystes 
salmoides;  subsequently  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes  announced 
that  Lacepede's  Micropterus  dolomieu  was  also  identical 
with  their  Grystes  salmoides. 

In  1842,  Dr.  DeKay,  in  his  "  Fishes  of  New  York,"  after 
reproducing  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes'  figures  and  descrip- 
tions of  Iluro  nigricans  and  Grystes  salmoides,  described 
specimens  of  the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass  under  two  ad- 
ditional names :  Centrarchus  fasciatus  and  Centrarchus  ob- 
scurus,  claiming  the  latter  as  a  new  species. 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS.  15 

III  the  same  year,  Dr.  Kirtland  adopted  Centrarchus 
fasciatus  as  synonymous  with  Le  Sueur's  and  Rafinesque's 
numerous  descriptions  of  the  small- mouthed  species. 

In  1850,  Prof.  Agassiz  recognized  the  generic  identity 
of  the  former  descriptions  of  the  Black  Bass  by  Le  Sueur, 
Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  and  DeKay,  and  retained  the 
name  Grystes  for  the  same. 

In  1854,  Prof.  Agassiz  obtained  specimens  of  the  large- 
mouthed  Bass  from  the  Tennessee  River,  near  Huntsville, 
Ala.,  which  he  named,  provisionally,  Grystes  nobilis.  In 
the  same  year,  Messrs.  Baird  and  Girard  described  speci- 
mens of  the  same  species  from  Texas,  as  Grystes  nueeensis. 

In  1857,  Dr.  Garlick  described  the  small-mouthed  Black 
Bass  as  Grystes  nigricans,  and  the  large-mouthed  species 
as  Grystes  megastoma. 

In  1858,  Girard  described  the  large-mouthed  Bass  as 
Dioplites  nueeensis. 

In  1860,  Prof.  Theo.  Gill  restored  Rafinesque's  earliest 
name  for  the  small-mouthed  form  of  the  Black  Bass,  call- 
ing it  Lepomis  achigan;  which,  however,  he  changed  in 
1866  to  Micropterus  achigan;  and  still  later,  in  1873, 
he  adopted  Lacepede's  name,  Micropterus  salmoides,  for 
the  same  species. 

In  1866,  Prof.  Gill  named  the  large-mouthed  Bass, 
Micropterus  nigricans,  which  name  was  also  adopted  by 
Prof.  E.  D.  Cope  about  the  same  time. 

In  1874,  when,  apparently,  the  oldest  generic  and  specific 
names  had  been  restored ;  after  Prof.  GilPs  masterly  review 
of  the  species  in  the  previous  year  (when  the  tangled  web 
had  been,  seemingly,  straightened),  when  dry  land  was 
thought  to  have  been  reached  at  last; — then  came  the 
French  naturalists,  again.       MM.  Yaillant  and  Bocourt, 


16  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

of  Paris,  instead  of  profiting  by  the  experience  of  their 
predecessors  in  this  matter,  tried  to  show  that  we  had  four 
species  of  Black  Bass,  where  but  two  really  existed,  and 
this  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  Gallic  misnomer  of  the 
type  species  still  existed  as  a  terrible  warning  to  them, 
of  the  folly  of  indulging  their  national  love  of  novelty 
where  so  grave  a  matter  as  science  was  concerned.  They 
proposed  the  title  Dioplites  variabilis  for  the  small-mouthed 
form,  and  Dioplites  treculiiy  Dioplites  nuecensis  and  Dio- 
plites  salmoides,  for  the  large-mouthed  form,  under  several 
unimportant  varietal,  or  individual,  differences. 

In  1876,  Professor  G.  Brown  Goode  restored  Le  Sueur's 
name,  and  called  the  large-mouthed  Black  Bass  Micropterus 
floridanus. 

In  1877,  Professor  David  S.  Jordan  restored  the  still 
older  name  of  Rafinesque  for  this  species,  and  with  the 
full  concurrence  of  Professor  Theo.  Gill,  designated  it 
Micropterus  pallidus. 

In  1878,  Professor  Jordan  divided  the  small-mouthed 
species  into  two  geographical  varieties,  distinguishing  the 
Northern  form  as  M.  salmoides  var.  achigan,  and  the 
Southern  form  as  M.  salmoides  var.  salmoides. 

Finally,  MM.  Vaillant  and  Bocourt  (Miss.  Sci.  au 
Mexique :  ined.)  adopted  the  generic  title  Micropterus, 
biyt  recognized  four  provisional  species:  M.  dolomieu  and 
M.  variabilis  for  the  small-mouthed  form  and  M.  salmoides 
and  M.  nuecensis  for  the  large-mouthed  form,  under  cer- 
tain, evidently,  unimportant  variations.  As  they  have  not 
yet  published  these  names,  they  may  conclude  to  suppress 
or  change  some  or  all  of  them. 

Thus,  it  will  be  seen  that,  from  the  first,  the  nomen- 
clature of  the  Black  Bass  species  had  been  involved  in 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS.  17 

great  doubt,  uncertainty,  and  confusion ;  and  while  much 
of  the  complexity  had  been,  apparently,  dissipated,  there 
still  existed  among  ichthyologists  some  difference  of  opinion 
as  to  the  proper  differentiation  of  the  species.  Even  the 
generally  accepted  nomenclature  of  the  past  few  years — 
unfortunately  and  unavoidably  established,  as  it  was,  on 
an  insecure  basis — was  liable,  at  any  time,  to  fall  to  the 
ground,  while  the  said  differences  among  the  authorities 
existed. 

It  was  the  earnest  hope  of  the  writer,  however,  that  the 
generic  and  specific  names  and  distinctions  as  proposed  by 
Professors  Gill  and  Jordan  would  be  found  correct,  and 
their  position  prove  impregnable ;  and  that,  in  good  time, 
all  naturalists,  to  avoid  further  confusion,  would  finally 
agree  to  accept  and  adopt  the  same,  and  so  set  the  vexed 
question  at  rest  forever;  for  these  eminent  ichthyologists 
had  really  investigated  the  matter  more  thoroughly  and 
intelligently,  and  had  had  larger  opportunities  and  greater 
facilities  for  doing  so  than  all  other  ichthyologists  com- 
bined. They  labored  faithfully  and  well,  with  strict  fair- 
ness, and,  with  the  light  afforded  them,  in  perfect  accord- 
ance with  the  established  principles  of  nomenclature,  and 
had,  at  least,  placed  the  anglers  of  America  under  a  lasting 
debt  of  gratitude. 

But  these  very  differences  among  the  authorities  showed 
that  the  end  was  not  yet ;  that  the  problem  had  not  been 
solved ;  that  there  was  still  something  hidden  that  should 
be  brought  to  the  light;  some  flaw  in  the  chain  that 
would  eventually  destroy  it;  some  stone  in  the  foundation 
that  would  yet  crumble  and  work  the  destruction  of  the 
superimposing  pile. 

And,  now,  with  much  hesitation,  and  I  hope  with  be- 


18  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

coming  modesty  (for  I  do  not  wish  to  be  thought  presump- 
tuous), and  with  feelings  akin  to  regret — much  like  that  of 
tearing  down  an  old  homestead  endeared  by  many  tender 
associations  and  fond  remembrances,  to  make  room  for  a 
more  substantial  structure — but  at  the  same  time  feeling 
that  I  am  doing  an  act  that  is  simply  right  and  just,  I 
feel  constrained  to  make  a  radical  change  in  the  nomen- 
clature of  the  Black  Bass  as  it  is  at  present  understood 
in  America. 

But  in  order  to  arrive  at  a  clear  understanding  of  the 
subject,  I  propose,  in  the  first  place,  to  present  to  the 
angler,  as  well  as  to  the  student  of  ichthyology,  all  that  is 
really  worth  knowing  of  the  scientific  literature  of  the 
Black  Bass;  in  doing  which  it  becomes  a  matter  of  neces- 
sity, as  well  as  of  choice,  to  draw  liberally  upon  the 
writings  of  Professors  Gill  and  Jordan. 

The  following  disquisitional  resume  is  from  Professor 
GilPs  admirable  monograph,  entitled,  "On  the  Species  of 
the  Genus  Micropterus  (Lac.)  or  Grystes  (Auct.),"*  and  is 
the  most  able,  concise  and  original  paper  ever  written  upon 
the  subject;  and,  so  far  as  it  goes,  presents  the  whole 
matter  clearly  and  succinctly,  and  according  to  the  views 
of  most  of  our  best  naturalists. 

The  nomenclature  of  the  species  has  become  involved  in  much 
doubt,  and,  if  we  may  judge  from  the  literature  and  the  distinctions 
insisted  on  by  Prof.  Agassiz  and  others,!  at  least  four  or  five  species 


*On  the  Species  of  the  Genus  Micropterus  (Lac.)  or  Grystes  (Auct.). 
By  Theodore  Gill,  of  Washington,  D.  C.  <  Proceedings  of  the  American 
Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  XXII,  1873,  pp.  B.  55-72. 


t  In  the  nominal  (1)  "Grystes  fasciatus  Agass.,"  it  is  said,  "  the  scales  are  a 
little  smaller,  but  of  the  same  form  as  in  (2)  G.  salmoides  ;  the  radiating  striae 
are  perhaps  less  marked.    They  cover  the  opercular  apparatus  and  the  cheeks, 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF    THE    BLACK   BASS.  19 

are  supposed  to  exist  in  our  waters ;  but  it  is  evident  from  a  perusal 
of  the  descriptions  that  the  distinctions  hitherto  made  are  of  very 
doubtful  value. 

Having  been  requested  by  the  United  States  Commissioner  of 
Fish  and  Fisheries  (Prof.  S.  F.  Baird)  to  determine  the  number  of 
species  represented  in  the  fresh  waters  of  the  United  States,  and  the 
earliest  names  respectively  assigned  to  them,  all  the  specimens  in  the 
collections  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution  were  examined,  as  well 
as  a  large  series  from  many  other  localities  kindly  transmitted  for 
that  purpose  by  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  (Prof.  Agassiz, 
Director).     Study  and  comparison  of  those  specimens  clearly  demon- 


but  at  this  latter  place  their  [the  scales1]  smaller  size  is  quite  remarkable ;  this 
latter  character  is  very  striking  when  we  compare  both  species." — Agass., 
Lake  Superior,  p.  296. —  The  italicized  portion  (not  italicized  in  original) 
indicates  that  the  G.  salmoides  Agass.  was  a  large-mouthed  form.  (3)  "Huro 
nigricans  Cuv.  is  another  species  of  the  lower  Canadian  lakes,  which  occurs 
also  in  Lake  Champlain  ....  I  shall,  therefore,  call  it  in  future  Grystes 
nigricans  ....  Dr.  DeKay  describes  it  as  Centrarchus  fasciatus,  although 
he  copies  also  Cuvier's  description  and  figure  of  Huro  nigricans,  but  without 
perceiving  their  identity."  Agass.,  Lake  Superior,  p.  297.— Huro  nigricans 
Cuv.  and  Val.  and  Centrarchus  fasciatus  DeKay  are  unquestionably  distinct, 
the  former  being  the  large-mouthed  species,  and  the  latter  the  small- 
mouthed  one.  It  is  probable,  however  (thus  giving  him  the  benefit,  of  the 
doubt),  that  Prof.  Agassiz  based  his  idea  of  the  species  on  the  large-mouthed 
form. 

"  The  species  of  this  group  [Grystes  Cuv.]  are  indeed  very  difficult  to  char- 
acterize. They  differ  chiefly  in  the  relative  size  of  their  scales,  the  presence 
or  absence  of  teeth  on  the  tongue,  ....  etc.  There  are,  besides,  marked 
differences  between  the  young  and  adults.  These  circumstances  render  it 
impossible  to  characterize  any  one  species  without  comparative  descriptions 
and  figures.  (4)  The  species  from  Huntsville  [Ala.]  .  .  .  differs  equally  from 
[G.  fasciatus  Agass.  and  G.  "salmoneus"  Agass.].  I  call  this  species  pro- 
visionally Grystes  nobilis  Agass."— Am.  Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts  (2),  xvii,  p.  297, 
298,  1854. 

Prof.  Agassiz  thus  recognized  four  species  (besides  indeterminate  ones), 
viz:— 

1.  G.  fasciatus  Agass.  =  M.  salmoides. 

2.  G.  salmoides  Agass.  (not  Cuv.  and  Val.  nor  G.  salmoneus  Agass.,1854)  = 
M.  nigricans. 

3.  G.  nigricans  Agass.  =  M.  nigricans  f 

4.  G.  nobilis  Agass.  =  M.  nigricans. 

Judging  by  the  comparisons,  Prof.  Agassiz  had  in  view,  in  1854,  in  the 
"G.  salmoneus,"  the  true  M.  salmoides. 

Baird  and  Girard  added  to  these  species,  also,  in  1854,  (5)  their  G.  nuecensis  = 
{M.  nigricans). 


20  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

strated  that  two  perfectly  distinct  types  of  the  genus  were  repre- 
sented in  most  of  the  waters  of  the  cismontane  (east  of  the  Rocky 
Mountain)  slope  of  the  United  States,  except  those  of  the  New 
England  States  and  the  Atlantic  seaboard  of  the  Middle  States.  In 
limitation  of  this  general  statement  it  need  only  at  present  be  re- 
marked that  but  one  of  those  types,  the  small-mouthed,  appears  to 
have  been  an  original  inhabitant  of  the  hydrographic  basin  of  the 
Ohio  Eiver. 

In  order  to  obtain  as  clear  and  unprejudiced  ideas  as  possible 
respecting  the  species,  the  specimens  from  all  the  localities  were  in 
the  first  place  examined  without  reference  to  their  names  but  only 
with  the  view  to  ascertain  their  relations  to  each  other.  This  ex- 
amination confirmed  the  previous  experience  of  the  author  for  a 
more  limited  range,  and  led  to  the  combination  of  all  into  the  two 
groups  just  referred  to :  between  these  many  differences  existed, 
but  none  were  discovered  which  permitted  further  definite  sub- 
division. The  differences  thus  ascertained  may  be  tabulated  as 
follows : 


Contrasted  Differential  Characteristics. 

Small-Mouthed.  Large-Mouthed. 

Scales  of  trunk 

Small  (e.  g.  lat.  line,  72-75 ;  be-  Moderate  (e.  g.  lat.  line,  65-70 ; 

tween  lateral  line,  and  back,  11      between  lateral  line  and  back, 
rows).  7h  or  8  rows). 

Scales  on  nape  and  breast 

Much  smaller  than   those  of  Scarcely   (on    nape),    or    not 

sides.  much  (on  breast)   smaller  than 

those  of  sides. 

Scales  of  cheeks 

Minute   (e.  g.,  between  orbit  Moderately  small  (e.  g.,  between 

and  preoperculum,  about  17  rows  orbit  and  preoperculum,  about  10 

in  an  oblique  line  and  about  9  rows  in  an  oblique  line  and  about 

in  a  horizontal  one).  5-6  in  a  horizontal  one). 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS.  21 

Scales  of  interoperculum  uniserial 

Covering  only  about  half  the  Covering  the  entire  width  of 

width  of  the  bone.  the  bone. 

Scales  of  preopercular  limb 

None.  Developed  in  an  imperfect  row 

(e.  (jr.,  3-5  in  number). 

Scales  on  dorsal 
Developed  as  a  deep  sheath  (in-  Developed  as  a  low  (obsolete) 

volving  last  spine)  of  small  scales  shallow  sheath,  and  with  series 
differentiated  from  those  on  the  ascending  comparatively  little 
back,  and  with  series  advancing  on  membrane  behind  the  rays 
high  up  the  membrane  behind  (none  behind  the  last  five  or 
each  ray  (except  last  two  or  six), 
three). 

Scales  on  anal 

Ascending   high  behind  each         None  (or  very  few), 
ray. 

Mouth 
Moderate.  Large. 

Supramaxillary 

Ending  considerably  in  front  of  Extending  considerably  behind 

hinder  margin  of   orbit  (about      the  posterior  margin  of  orbit, 
under  hinder  border  of  pupil). 

Bays 

Dorsal,  articulated,  13.  Dorsal,  articulated,  12  (I.  11). 

Anal  III,  10-11.  Anal  III,  10. 

Pectoral,  1  -16-117.  Pectoral,  1*14  (M3). 

Dorsal  fin  in  front  of  soft  portion 

Little  depressed,  the  ninth  spine  Much  depressed,  the  ninth  spine 

being  only  about  a  half  shorter  being  only  about  a  fourth  as  long 

than  the  longest  (3,  4,  5)  and  a  as  the  longest  and  half  as  long 

fourth  shorter  than  the  tenth.  as  the  tenth. 


22  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

Thus  numerous  and  well  marked  are  the  differences  between  the 
two  groups;  within  the  limits  of  neither  of  these  groups  were  found 
differences  in  the  slightest  degree  comparable  with  them,  or  that 
suggested  the  differentiation  of  the  forms  into  distinctly  marked 
subordinate  types:  in  other  words,  no  differences  were  found  of 
specific  value,  and,  although  a  renewed  examination  may  possibly 
result  in  the  discovery  of  some,  their  value  must  be  very  slight  in 
comparison  with  those  distinguishing  the  two  groups  indicated: 
these  groups  may  therefore  be  considered  as  specific.  The  question 
now  arises,  What  are  the  names  to  which  they  are  respectively  en- 
titled? In  order  to  ascertain  this,  it  is  advisible  to  enter  quite  fully 
into  the  very  complicated  history  of  the  genus.  Bearing  strictly  in 
mind  the  differential  features  of  the  two  species,  we  may  now 
proceed  to  an  analysis  of  the  successive  descriptions  of  forms  of  the 
genus  and  endeavor  to  refer  them  to  their  respective  types. 

The  first  scientific  allusions  to  any  species  of  the  genus  are  found 
in  the  great  work  on  fishes  by  Comte  de  Lacepede.* 

In  1800,  in  the  third  volume  (pp.  716,  717),  LacepSde  introduced 
into  his  system,  under  the  name  Labrus  salmoides,  a  species  based  on 
a  description  and  figure  sent  him  by  Bosc  from  South  Carolina, 
which,  according  to  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  relate  to  the  small- 
mouthed  type. 

In  1801,  in  the  fourth  volume  (p.  325),  Lacepede  described,  as  a 
new  generic  type,  named  Micropterus  Dolomieu,-\  a  fish  concerning 
which  no  particulars  were  given  as  to  habitat  or  station,  and  which 
could  not  have  been  positively  identified  from  the  description  :  the 
original  specimen  having  been  preserved,  however,  Cuvier  and  Val- 
enciennes ascertained  that  it  belonged  to  the  genus  Grystes,  and  was, 


*Eac£p£de  (Bernard  Germain  Etienne  de  la  Ville-sur-Illon,  Comte  de). 
Histoire  Naturelle  des  Poissons,  .  .  .  Paris,  .  .  .  [1798-1803,  4to,  5  v]. 
t"  121e  genre.  Les  Micropores. 

"  Un  ou  plusieurs  aiguillons,  et  point  de  dentelure  aux  opercules ;  un  bar- 
billon,  ou  point  de  barbillon  aux  machoires;  deux  nageoires  dorsales;  la 
seconde  tres-basse,  tres-courte,  et  comprenant  au  plus  cinq  rayons. 
"  Espece.  Le  Microptere  Dolomieu. 

"  Caracteres.  Dix  rayons  aiguillonngs  et  sept  rayons  articul6s  a  la  premiere 
nageoire  du  dos ;  quatre  rayons  a  la  seconde ;  deux  rayons  aiguillonnfis  et 
onze  rayons  articulSs  a  la  nageoire  de  l'anus ;  la  caudale  en  croissant ;  un  ou 
deux  aiguillons  a  la  seconde  piece  de  chaque  opercule."  [Br.  5;  p.  16 ;  v.  i,  5; 
C.  17J." 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS.  23 

in  fact,  identical  with  the  species  described  by  Lacepede  from  the 
notes  and  figures  of  Bosc  as  Labrus  salmoides. 

In  1817,  C.  S.  Rafinesque  *  described  a  form  of  the  same  genus 
under  the  name  Bodianns  achigan  which  evidently  belonged  to  the 
small-mouthed  type :  while  most  of  the  characters  noted  are  common 
to  all  the  species  (or  erroneous),  the  number  of  rays.  (D.  IX  I,  14  f ; 
A.  Ill,  11  %)  and  the  absence  of  scales  on  the  preoperculum  (gill 
covers  "all  scaly  except  the  second")  indicate  the  pertinence  of  the 
species  to  the  group  in  question  :  the  number  of  rays  (15)  attributed 
to  the  pectoral  does  not  confirm  this  identification,  but  the  number 
(admitting  even  the  accuracy — very  doubtful — in  the  case  of  the 
very  careless  observer)  is  within  the  range  of  variation  of  the  type. 
The  exact  locality  from  which  Rafinesque  derived  his  types  was  not 
specified,  but  they  were  probably  observed  by  him  at  Lake  Cham- 
plain,  where  he  had  shortly  before  collected  (See  Am.  Month.  Mag. 
and  Crit.  Rev.,  ii.  p.  202,  Jan.,  1818). 

In  1820,  the  same  naturalist  described,  in  his  way,  various  speci- 
mens which  appear,  almost  without  doubt,  to  be  referrible  to  the 
same  type.  These  descriptions  appeared  originally  in  the  "  Western 
Review  and  Miscellaneous  Magazine,"  published  at  Lexington,  Ken- 
tucky, and  were  reprinted  (from  the  same  types)  for  the  "  Ichthyo- 
logia  Ohiensis."§  No  less  than  six  generic  and  subgeneric  names 
appear  to  have  been  based  primarily  on  a  species  of  this  type  and  as 
many  as  seven  nominal  species,  viz.: 


*Rafinesque-Schmai/tz  (Constantine  Samuel).  Museum  of  Natural 
Sciences.  By  C.  S.  Rafinesque,  Esq.  First  Decade  of  New  North  American 
Fishes.  <  The  American  Monthly  Magazine  and  Critical  Review.  Vol.  ii, 
New  York,  .  .  .  1817  (pp.  120, 121). 

t"The  dorsal  depressed  in  the  middle  and  with  twenty-five  rays,  whereof 
ten  are  spinescent."  It  is  assumed  that  the  last  or  double  branched  ray  is 
counted  as  two. 

t"  Anal  fin  with  fifteen  rays  whereof  three  are  spinescent  and  short."  The 
last  ray  was  also  in  this  case  probably  counted  as  two. 

g  Ichthyologia  Ohiensis,  or  Natural  History  of  the  Fishes  inhabiting  the 
River  Ohio  and  its  tributary  streams.  .  .  .  Lexington,  Kentucky ;  printed  for 
the  author  by  W.  G.  Hunt.  (Price  one  dollar.)  1820.  (Pp.  26-36).  Reprinted 
(with  separate  pagination  and  adjustment  for  form)  from  the  Western  Re- 
view and  Miscellaneous  Magazine,  Lexington,  Ky.  Vols,  i,  ii  and  iii  (Dec. 
1819  to  Nov.,  1820). 


24  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 


Genera  and  Subgenera. 

1.  Calliurus  (n.  g.). 

2.  Lepomis  (n.  g.). 

Aplites  (n.  s.  g.). 
Nemocampsis  (n.  s.  g.  prov.). 
Dioplites  (n.  s.  g.). 

3.  [Etheostoma]. 

Aplesion  (n.  s.  g.). 

Species. 

1.  Calliurus  punctulatus. 

2.  Lepomis  pallida  (s.  g.  Aplites). 

3.  Lepomis  trifasciata  (s.  g.  Aplites). 

4.  Lepomis  flexuolaris  (s.  g.  Aplites,  or  n.  s.  g.  Nemocampsis). 

5.  Lepomis  salmonea  (s.  g.  Dioplites). 

6.  Lepomis  uotata  (s.  g.  Dioplites). 

7.  Etheostoma  calliura  (s.  g.  Aplesion). 

Of  these,  it  need  here  only  be  in  general  remarked  that  the  differ- 
ential characters  employed  result  (1)  partly  from  erroneous  observa- 
tion, and  (2)  partly  from  erroneous  assumptions :  that  is,  because  the 
author  had  not  signalized  certain  characters  in  specimens  previously 
examined,  but  which  were  noticed  in  others  examined  later,  he  as- 
sumed that  they  did  not  exist  in  the  former,  and  therefore  the  two 
differed.  Inasmuch,  however,  (1)  as  all  the  descriptions  cited,  best 
(and  decidedly  so)  agree  with  species  of  the  genus  Micropterus,  and 
(2)  as,  in  those  respects  in  which  they  differ,  they  equally  deviate 
from  all  known  forms  in  the  waters  from  which  they  were  obtained, 
and  (3)  as  it  is  in  the  highest  degree  improbable  that  forms  better 
agreeing  with  them  have  been  overlooked,  the  names  in  question  are 
all  relegated  to  the  synonymy  of  Micropterus.  Within  that  genus  in 
almost  every  case  some  specification  (chiefly  as  to  the  number  of 
rays)  indicates  that  the  several  descriptions  were  based  on  individ- 
uals of  the  small-mouthed  type.  This  probability  is  greatly  en- 
hanced by  the  fact  that  (so  far  as  known  or  recorded)  the  small- 
mouthed  species  was  the  only  one  known  from  the  localities  where 
Rafinesque  observed. 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS.  25 

The  description  of  Galliurus  punctulatus,  however,  it  has  been 
thought  by  Prof.  Agassiz,  was  based  on  a  form  of  the  sunfish  type 
with  large  mouth.  But  such  could  not  have  been  the  case,  as  is  quite 
evident  from  the  armature  of  the  operculum  ("opercule  with  an 
acute  and  membranaceous  appendage,  before  which  stands  a  flat 
spine"),  the  contour  of  the  dorsal  ("  depressed  iu  the  middle"),  aud 
above  all  the  number  of  the  rays  of  that  fin  ("dorsal  fin  yellow  witli 
twenty-four  rays,  of  which  ten  are  spiny");  in  all  these  respects  (as 
well  as  others),  the  description  is  inapplicable  to  a  Pomotid  and  only 
applicable  to  a  Mlcropterus. 

A  couple  of  years  later  (in  1822),  a  much  more  reliable  natural- 
ist* published  descriptions  of  five  supposed  new  species  of  the  genus 
Cichla  of  Bloch  (as  supposed  to  have  been  adopted  by  Cuvier).  All 
except  one  (C.  cenea  —  Ambloplites  rupestris)  really  belong  to  the 
genus  Micropterus,  and  all  the  northern  forms  (C./asciata,  C.  ohiensis, 
C.  minima),  as  is  evident  from  the  allusions  to  the  number  of  rays, 
squamation,  or  size  of  mouth,  belong  to  the  small-mouthed  type, 
while  the  description  of  the  Floridian  species  (C.  floridana)  is  as  ap- 
plicable to  the  same  as  to  the  large-mouthed  type.  The  descriptions 
are  not  sufficiently  contrasted,  and  are  too  general  and  therefore 
vague ;  nor,  on  comparison  with  specimens,  are  the  differences  sug- 
gested by  the  mention  of  characters  in  one  case  and  their  neglect  in 
another  apparent.  As  no  reference  was  made  to  the  forms  of  the 
same  type  previously  described,  although  the  author  was  doubtless 
acquainted  with  Kafinesque's  memoir,  it  is  presumable  that  the  neg- 
lect was  intentional  (and  doubtless  provoked  by  the  character  of  that 
author's  work)  and  not  without  strong  suspicion  that  the  species 
named  had  already,  perhaps,  received  designations,  but  with  unrec- 
ognizable descriptions. 

In  the  great  "  Histoire  Naturelle  des  Poissons,"f  Cuvier  and 
Valenciennes  described  the  two  species  of  the  genus,  but,  deceived 
by  the  state  of  their  specimens — in  one  case  at  least  (Huro  nigricans), 


*Le  Sueur  (Charles  A.  .  .  ).  Descriptions  of  the  [sic]  five  new  species  of 
the  genus  Cichla  of  Cuvier.  By  C.  A.  Le  Sueur.  Read  June  11, 1822.  jour- 
nal of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia.    Vol.  ii,  Part  i. 

Philadelphia, 1821.    [Pp.  214-221]. 

t  Cuvier  (Georges  Chretien  Leopold  Dagobert  baron)  and  Achille  Valen- 
ciEy^ES.    Histoire  Xalurelle  des  Poissons, ....  Paris,  ....  1S28-1849.    [t.  11, 
182S,  pp.  121-126 ;  t.  iii,  1829,  pp.  54-58]. 
3 


26  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

completely  failed  to  recognize  the  relations  of  the  two.  (1)  In  1828 
(tome  second,  pp.  124—126)  they  described  the  large-mouthed  species 
as  a  new  generic  type  (under  the  name  Hiiro  nigricans),  but,  misled 
by  an  injury  to  the  spinous  portion  of  the  dorsal  fin  (and  apparently 
the  loss  of  the  seventh  spine),  they  ranked  it  in  their  group  of  Per- 
coidi  with  two  dorsal  fins,  attributing  to  it  a  first  dorsal  with  six 
spin3S,  and  a  second  with  two  spines  in  front  (instead  of  ten  dorsal 
spinss).  (2)  In  the  following  year  (1829)  and  volume  (tome  troisieme, 
pp.  54—58),  they  described  the  small-mouthed  species,  identifying  it 
with  the  Labrus  salmoides  of  Lacepede,  and  forming  for  it  (and  at 
the  same  time  associating  with  it  an  Australian  fish)  the  genus  Grys- 
tes:  this  was  referred  to  the  section  of  Percoids  with  a  single  dorsal 
fin  and  placed  after  Centropristes  and  before  Rhypticus.  The  de- 
scriptions of  both  species  (after  making  allowance  for  the  error  in- 
duced by  the  state  of  the  dorsal  in  Huro)  were  quite  good,  and  es- 
pecially in  the  case  of  Orystes  salmoides,  much  better  than  any  sub- 
sequently published,  and  they  can  consequently  be  identified  without 
difficulty. 

Subsequently,  Dr.  DeKay,  in  his  "Zoology  of  New  York,"  *  re- 
produced the  figures  and  (in  a  modified  form)  the  descriptions  of 
the  two  species  from  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes'  work ;  but,  failing  to 
identify  them,  redescribed  and  refigured  one  of  them  {Grystes  sal- 
moides) under  two  names  (Centrarchus  fasciatvs=Cichla  fasciata 
Le^.,  and  Centrarchus  obscurus  DeKay,  n.  sp.).  Of  course  all  were 
adopted  by  Dr.  Storer  in  his  "  Synopsis  of  the  Fishes  of  North  Amer- 
ica."! In  those  works,  therefore,  the  species  stand  under  three  generic 
and  four  specific  names. 

In  1850,  Prof.  Agassiz,  in  his  "  Lake  Superior/'^  decidedly  advanced 


*  DeKay  (James  E. . .).  Zoology  of  New  York,  or  the  New  York  Fauna; 
comprising  detailed  descriptions  of  all  the  animals  hitherto  observed  within 
the  State  of  New  York,  with  brief  notices  of  those  occasionally  found  near  its 
borders,  and  accompanied  by  appropriate  illustrations.  By  James  E.  DeKay. 
Part  IV.  Fishes.— Albany ;  printed  by  W.  &  A.  White  &  J.  Visscher.  1842. 
[4to,  xiv  [1,  errata],  415  pp.;  atlas,  1  p.  1.,  79  p.  1]. 

t  Storer  (David  Humphreys).  A  Synopsis  of  the  Fishes  of  North  America. 
<Memoirs  of  the  American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  New  series. 
Vol.  ii.    (Cambridge,  1846),  pp.  253-550. 

A  synopsis  of  the  Fishes  of  North  America.  . . .  Cambridge :  Metcalf  and 

Company,  printers  to  the  University.    1846.    [4to,  1  p.  1.  (=  title  ),  298  pp.] 

I  Agasbiz  (Louis).     Lake  Superior;  its  Physical  Character;  Vegetation 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF    THE    BLACK   BASS.  27 

beyond  his  predecessors,  (1)  recognizing,  for  the  first  time,  the  generic 
identity  of  the  forms  described  by  LeSueur,  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes, 
and  DeKay,  (2)  retaining  for  the  genus  thus  enlarged  the  name 
Grystes,  and  (3)  recognizing  two  species  as  inhabitants  of  the  north  ; 
he  was,  however,  less  fortunate  in  his  appreciation  of  their  specific 
relations,  (1)  his  Grystes  fasciatus  being  the  small-mouthed  form,  (2) 
his  "  Grystes  salmoneus  "  (as  is  evident  from  the  contrasted  charac- 
ters noticed  in  his  comparison  of  G.  fasciatus  with  it)  being  the 
large-mouthed  southern  form,  and  (3)  his  Grystes  nigricans  being 
differentiated  without  statement  of  reasons  and  the  Centrarchus  fas- 
ciatus of  DeKay  identified  with  it. 

At  a  later  period  (1854),  Prof.  Agassiz  distinguished  specimens 
of  the  genus  obtained  from  Huntsville,*  Alabama,  as  Grystes  nobilis, 
which  evidently  belongs  to  the  large-mouthed  type ;  the  brief  notice 
is  only  comparative,  contrasted  with  the  small-mouthed  type,  and 
contains  no  specific  peculiarities. 

In  the  same  year  and  month  (March,  1854),  Messrs.  Baird  and 
Girardf  described  specimens  of  the  same  type  from  the  "  Rio  Frio 
and  Rio  Nueces,  Texas,"  under  the  name  Grystes  nuecensis.  This 
form  was  subsequently  described  in  greater  detail  and  illustrated  by 
Dr.  Charles  Girard,  in  the  Report  on  the  Mexican  boundary  Survey. 

In  1857,  Dr.  Theodatus  Garlicky  of  Cleveland,  Ohio,  in  a  treatise 
on  the  propagation  of  fish,  described  and  published  rough  woodcut 
figures  of  the  two  forms  of  the  genus:  (1)  the  small-mouthed  species 
under  the  name  ''Grystes  nigricans  ;  or  black  bass;"  (2)  the  other, 
as  a  new  species,  designated  "Grystes  megastoma ;  or  large-mouth 


and  Animals,  compared  with  those  of  other  and  similar  regions. . . .  Boston ; 
1850.    (p.  295.) 

*  Agassiz  (Louis).  Notice  of  a  collection  of  Fishes  from  the  southern  bend 
of  the  Tennessee  River,  Alabama. . .  <The  American  Journal  of  Science  and 
Arts,  second  series.  Vol.  xvii. . .  .  1854.  [pp.  297-308 ;  353-365= Grystes,  pp.  297, 
298]. 

t  Baird  (Spencer  Fullerton)  and  Charles  Girard.  Descriptions  of  a  new 
species  of  Fishes  collected  in  Texas,  New  Mexico,  and  Sonora,by  Mr.  John  H. 
Clark,  on  the  U.  S.  and  Mexican  Boundary  Survey,  and  in  Texas  by  Capt. 
Stewart  Van  Vliet,  U.  S.  A. . .  .<Proceedings  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sci- 
ences of  Philadelphia.    Vol.  vii,  1854, 1855.     [pp.  24-29 ;  Grystes,  p.  25], 

X  Garlick  (Theodatus).  A  treatise  on  the  Artificial  Propagation  of  certain 
kinds  of  Fish,  with  the  descriptions  of  such  kinds  as  are  the  most  suitable  for 
pisciculture. . . .  Cleveland,  Tho.  Brown,  publisher,  Ohio  Farmer  office,  1857. 
[12mo,  142  pp.    Grystes,  pp.  105-110.] 


28  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

black  bass."*  The  species  are  quite  well  distinguished  by  the  size 
of  the  mouth  and  the  comparative  size  of  the  scales :  his  Grystes  ni- 
gricans is,  however,  not  the  true  Grystes  nigricans  {Huro  nigricans, 
Cuv.  &  Val.),  as  that  name  really  belongs  to  his  Grystes  megastoma. 

In  1859,  Dr.  Giintherf  described  specimens  of  the  small-mouthed 
species  under  the  name  Grystes  salmoides,  and  first  restricted  the 
genus  to  that  species  (having  removed  the  Australian  species  as  the 
type  of  a  new  genus — Oligorus).  Having  overlooked  the  rectifica- 
tions by  Prof.  Agassiz,  he  continued  the  errors  of  his  predecessors, 
admitting  as  nominal  species  (1)  Huro  nigricans,  (2)  Centrarchus 
fasciatus,  and  (3)  Centrarchus  obscurus,  and  also  the  same  species 
as  doubtful  forms  (in  foot-notes)  of  Grystes,  i.  e.,  G.  nuecensis  and 
G.  fasciatus. 

For  the  present,  the  notices  and  descriptions  of  the  several  forms 
of  the  genus  by  other  authors  may  be  passed  over  in  silence,  as  they 
do  not  involve  any  questions  of  nomenclature.  It  may  be  added, 
however,  (1)  that  the  author  had  long  recognized  the  existence  and 
differences  of  the  two  species  of  the  genus,  one  under  the  name  Mi- 
cropterus  achigan,  the  other  as  Micropterus  nigricans,  and  (2)  that 
Prof.  Cope,  under  the  names  Micropterus  fasciatus  (which  he  at- 
tributed to  the  present  author  through  some  misapprehension)  and 
Micropterus  nigricans  has  signalized  the  same  species  from  widely 
distant  regions  (e.  g.,  Michigan,  Virginia,  North  Carolina"),  and  has 
evidently  understood  their  relations. 

Analysis  of  all  the  published  descriptions  and  comparison  with  the 
fishes  themselves,  led  to  the  following  conclusions : 

Section  1. — Morphological. 

After  an  examination  and  comparison  with  each  other  of  specimens 
from  the  great  lakes  (Champlain  to  Michigan),  the  states  of  New  York, 
Pennsylvania,  Ohio,  Michigan,  Illinois,  Iowa,  Kentucky,  Missouri, 
Tennessee,  Alabama,  Texas,  Wisconsin,  West  Virginia,  Virginia,  North 


*  "  This  fish  has  been  identified  with  the  common  black  bass  {Grystes  fasci- 
atus), but  is  by  no  means  the  same  fish,  differing  in  many  respects,  both  in  its 
habits  and  physical  structure,  and  has  not  been  described  in  any  work  on 
American  fishes,  so  far  as  I  can  learn  "  (op.  tit.  p.  108). 

f  Gunxhee  (Albert).  Catalogue  of  the  Acanthopterygian  Fishes  in  the 
Collection  of  the  British  Museum,  . .  .  Vol.  i, . .  .  London, .  . .  1859  [pp.  253-255J. 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS.  29 

and  South  Carolina,  and  Georgia,  no  differences  could  be  found 
much,  if  any  greater,  than  such  as  could  be  detected  among  numer- 
ous individuals  from  any  given  locality.  There  are  differences  result- 
ing from  age  and  condition  ;  the  fins  may  be  (slightly)  more  or  Jess 
developed,  and  the  colors  may  be  more  or  less  intense,  but  no  devia- 
tions have  been  found,  from  the  ordinary  standard,  of  such  a  charac- 
ter as  at  all  to  compare,  for  example,  with  the  differences  between  the 
large-mouthed  and  small-mouthed  forms,  or  to  indicate  that  there 
are  any  specific  differences  among  the  small-mouthed  or  large-mouthed 
forms.  The  natural  course,  then,  appears  to  be  to  recognize  only  the 
two  forms  whose  differences  are  so  obvious  as  species,  and — at  least 
till  differences  may  be  detected,  of  which  none  have  yet  been  found — 
to  consider  all  the  other  forms,  and  from  all  localities,  however  dis- 
tant they  may  be,  as  representatives  or  varieties  of  those  species. 

Section  2. — Nomenclature. 

A  critical  analysis  of  the  numerous  notices  and  descriptions  of 
the  forms  of  the  genus  indicates  that  the  differences  between  the 
respective  species  have  been  very  imperfectly  apprehended,  and 
mostly  confined  to  the  size  of  the  mouth  and  in  vague  terms  to  the 
size  (comparatively  large  or  small)  of  the  scales:  most  of  the  other 
differences  signalized  are  either  non-existent  or  individual  and*  de- 
pendent on  the  condition  of  the  specimens.  The  charge  of  vague- 
ness and  insufficiency  of  diagnosis  is  especially  applicable  to  the 
first  descriptions  of  species  of  the  genus;  guided,  however,  by  a 
knowledge  of  the  geographical  distribution  of  the  genus  and  hints 
furnished  by  the  radial  formulas,  etc.,  it  may  be  safely  concluded, 

(1)  that  most  of  the  names  referred  to  in  the  historical  introduction 
may  be  relegated  to  the  synonymy  of  the  small-mouthed  species; 

(2)  that  the  first  name  applied  to  that  species  was  Labrvs  salmoides  ; 

(3)  that  only  the  names  Hum  nigricans,  (and  most  of  its  derivatives), 
Grystes  megastoma,  Grystes  nobilis,  and  Dioplites  nuecensis  belong 
to  the  large-mouthed  species ;  (4)  that  the  name  nigricans  is  there- 
fore the  first  specific  term  applicable  to  it ;  (5)  that  the  name  Micro- 
pterus  was  the  first  applied  to  the  genus;  and  (6)  that  therefore,  if  we 
only  take  into  consideration  the  priority  of  the  names  (irrespective 
of  the  applicability  or  erroneousnessof  the  description),  and  combine 
the  first  specific  names  applied  to  the  respective  species  with  the  first 


30  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

generic  name  given  to  a  representative  of  the  genus,  the  two  species 
should  be  designated  as  (a)  Micropierus  sahnoides,  the  small-mouthed 
black  bass,  and  (6)  Micropierus  nigricans, ,[*]  the  large-mouthed 
bla^ck  bass. 

In  1873,  Professor  Gill  traced  back  the  large-mouthed 
Black  Bass  only  to  Huro  nigricans  Cuv.  &  Val.,  and 
named  it  Micropierus  nigricans  (C.  &  V.)  Gill,  as  shown  in 
the  foregoing  review. 

But  in  1874,  Professor  G.  Brown  Goode,  while  collect- 
ing in  Florida,  found  this  species  exceedingly  abundant, 
and  the  only  species  of  the  Black  Bass  represented  in  that 
State;  consequently,  in  1876,  he  restored  the  name  be- 
stowed on  this  species,  from  the  same  locality,  by  Le  Sueur, 
in  1822  (Cichla  floridana) ,  and  in  accordance  with  the  law 
of  priority,  called  it  Micropterus  floridanus  (Le  Sueur) 
Goode. 

In  the  following  year  (1877),  however,  Professor  Jordan 
found  that  the  same  species  was  very  numerous  in  the 
tributaries  of  the  Ohio  River,  in  Kentucky,  where  Rafin- 
esque  fished  in  1818-20,  and  after  a  thorough  investigation, 
he  an^  Prof.  Gill  identified  this  species  as  Lepomis  pallida 
Raf.;  whereupon,  in  obedience  to  the  same  law  of  pre- 
cedence, they  gave  to  it  its  present  name,  Micropterus 
pallidus  (Raf.)  Gill  and  Jordan ;  which,  by  the  way,  is  as 
appropriate  as  all  other  synonyms  are  incongruous,  and 
which  might  be  expected  from  its  having  been  the  name 
by  which  the  species  was  designated  by  a  naturalist  who 
took  his  specimens,  alive  and  kicking,  from  nature's  book.f 


*  Profs.  Gill  and  Jordan  subsequently  substituted  Micropterus  pallidus  for 
Micropterus  nigricans,  for  reasons  which  will  appear  later  in  this  chapter. — 
J.  A.  H. 


t"  In  further  justification  of  the  opinions  here  advanced,  it  may  be 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS.  31 

In  order  to  make  it  perfectly  clear  why  this  change  of 
name  was  considered  necessary,  I  can  not  do  better  than 
to  reproduce  the  following  characteristic  communication 
from  the  pen  of  Prof.  David  S.  Jordan  to  the  anglers  of 
America : — * 

Since  the  publication  of  the  name  Micropterus  pallidus  (Eaf.), 
Gill  and  Jordan,  as  a  substitute  for  Micropterus  nigricans  for  the 
scientific  name  of  the*  large-mouthed  Black  Bass,  I  have  received 
numerous  congratulations,  verbal  and  written,  from  brother  fisher- 
men on  the  appropriateness  of  the  name  "selected,"  and  I  presume 
that  my  colleague  in  this  matter,  Professor  Gill,  has  had  a  similar 
experience.  Lately,  a  correspondent  of  Foeest  and  Stream  sug- 
gests that  the  name  Micropterus  salmoides  be  likewise  "stamped  out" 
to  make  room  for  some  more  appropriate  appellation.  It  seems 
timely,  therefore,  that  we  should  "  rise  and  explain." 

The  name  Micropterus  pallidus  is  not  a  name  of  our  own  selection, 
but  a  name  which  by  the  laws  of  scientific  nomenclature  we  are 
bound  to  use.  By  the  operation  of  these  laws  every  genus  must 
bear  the  oldest  (generic)  name  bestowed  on  any  of  its  members, 
unless  this  name  has  been  previously  used  for  something  else,  or  is 
glaringly  false  (not  simply  irrelevant  or  inappropriate),  or  is  other- 
wise ineligible ;    every  species  must  bear  the  first  (specific)  name 


proper  for  me  to  state  that  I  had  the  pleasure  of  M.  Rafinesque's  society, 
during  the  three  years  of  my  official  residence  in  Sicily,  from  1807  to 
1810,  and  again  in  1812,  when  we  were  both  at  Palermo,  prosecuting  our 
botanical  and  ichthyological  researches  together.  .  .  .  M.  Rafinesque, 
unfortunately,  was  unable  to  publish  more  than  a  synopsis  of  his  ichthy- 
ological discoveries;  and  his  figures,  being  very  slight,  are  often  not 
calculated  to  clear  up  those  doubts  which  the  brevity  of  his  descriptions 
sometimes  creates ;  nevertheless,  to  one  who  examines  the  species  on  the 
spot,  in  a  fresh  state,  there  are  few  which  may  not  be  identified.  M. 
Cuvier  often  asserts  that  all  M.  Eafinesque's  species  were  described  from 
preserved  specimens ;  but  this  is  an  error — they  were  all  taken  from  the 
life."— Swainson,  Nat.  Hist,  and  Class,  of  Fishes,  I,  62,  1838. 

*  Scientific  Names  of  the  Black  Bass.     By  David  S.  Jordan,  M.  D. 
<  Forest  and  Stream,  XI,  1878,  p.  340. 


32  BOOK    OP   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

imposed  upon  it  (unless,  as  before,  it  be  for  one  reason  or  another 
ineligible),  and  the  proper  name  of  any  species  must  be  made  by- 
combining  the  above-mentioned  specific  and  generic  names. 

This  is  the  la-st  on  the  subject,  and,  as  elseAvhere,  the  law  is  usually, 
though  not  always,  simply  right.  We  accept  many  meaningless  or 
even  objectionable  names  to  avoid  the  confusion  attendant  upon 
arbitrary  changes.  Were  it  not  for  these  rules  science  would  ever 
suffer,  as  it  has  much  suffered  in  the  past,  from  the  efforts  of  the 
improvers  of  nomenclature — men  who  invent  new  names  for  old 
objects  for  the  purpose  of  seeing  their  own  personal  designations: 
Smith,  Jones,  Brehm,  Reichenow,  or  what  not,  after  them.  In  the 
words  of  "a  right  Sagamann,"  John  Cassin :  "There  is  not,  evi- 
dently, any  other  course  consistent  with  justice  and  the  plainest 
principles  of  right  and  morality,  and,  in  fact,  no  alternative,  unless, 
indeed,  an  operator  is  disposed  to  set  himself  up  for  the  first  of  all 
history,  as  is  said-  of  an  early  Chinese  emperor.  The  latter  course, 
in  a  degree,  singular  as  it  may  appear,  is  not  entirely  unknown  to 
naturalists,  especially  to  those  who  regard  science  as  a  milch  cow 
rather  than  as  a  transcendent  goddess,  a  distinction  in  classification 
first  made  by  the  great  poet  Schiller." 

Now,  as  to  the  names  of  our  species  of  bass,  I  take  it  for  granted 
that  the  reader  knows  (a)  what  a  Black  Bass  is  and  what  it  is  not  (b); 
that  there  are  two  species  of  Black  Bass,  the  large-mouthed  and  the 
small-mouthed,  the  latter  being  with  most  anglers  the  Black  Bass^ar 
excellence,  the  other  the  off  horse,  and  (c)what  the  difference  between 
them  is.  In  any  event  you  will  find  it  all  written  in  Professor  Gill's 
most  excellent  paper,  "On  the  Species  of  the  Genus  Micropterus," 
in  the  "  Proceedings  of  the  American  Association  for  the  Advance- 
ment of  Science  in  1873." 

TJie  earliest  published  notice  of  a  Black  Bass  with  a  scientific  name 
was  of  one  of  the  small-mouthed  kind,  sent  to  Lacepede  from  South 
Carolina.  This  specimen  bore  with  it  the  name  of  "  trout,"  after 
the  abominable,  contemptible,  pernicious  and  otherwise  detestable 
custom  of  our  erring  Southern  brethren  of  calling  a  Black  Bass  in 
the  river,  or  a  weak  fish  in  the  sea,  a  "trout."  Now,  we  may  pre- 
sume that  the  great  French  naturalist  was  puzzled  by  this  name, 
and  put  on  his  spectacles  to  see  what  in  the  world  could  be  "  trout- 
like "  about  such  a  fish,  with  its  coarse  scales  and  spinous  fins.     To 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS.  33 

him  it  looked  more  like  a  wrasse  or  cunner,  Labrus,  than  a  trout; 
but  no  matter,  it  must  .resemble  a  trout  somehow  or  the  Americans 
would  not  call  it  so.  So  he  put  it  down  in  his  great  work  as  Labrus 
salmoides,  the  trout-like  Labrus,  to  the  everlasting  injury  of  the 
fish.  The  name  is  not  only  senseless,  but  bad  Latin,  the  proper 
form  of  the  word  being  Salmonoides. 

LacSpede  had  another  specimen  of  the  Black  Bass,  without  label, 
and  from  an  unknown  locality.  This  one  had  the  last  rays  of  the 
dorsal  broken  and  torn  loose  from  the  rest,  and  was  otherwise  in  a 
forlorn  condition.  This  specimen  he  considered  as  a  genus  distinct 
from  the  other,  and  he  gave  it  the  name  of  Mlcropterus  dolomieu — 
"  Dolomieu's  small-fin."  Dolomieu  was  a  friend  of  Lacepede,  who 
had  had  about  as  much  to  do  with  the  fish  as  George  Washington  or 
Victor  Hugo.  No  one  could  tell,  either  from  figure  or  description, 
what  this  Mlcropterus  dolomieu  was;  but  Cuvier,  thirty  years  later, 
found  the  original  type  and  pronounced  it  a  Black  Bass,  in  poor  con- 
dition, and  declared  that  "the  genus  and  species  of  Mlcropterus  ought 
to  disappear  from  the  catalogue  of  fishes." 

Then  the  versatile  and  eccentric  Professor  Rafinesque  appeared 
upon  the  scene,  and  in  rapid  succession  gave  the  small-mouthed 
Black  Bass  names  enough  for  a  whole  family.  First  he  called  it 
Bodianus  achigan,  being  told  that  the  Canadian  voyageurs  knew  the 
fish  as  Vachigan.  Then  afterward  specimens  of  different  sizes  ap- 
peared as  Calliurus  punctulatus,  Lepomis  trifasciata,  Lepomis  flexuolaris, 
Lepomis  salmonea,  Lepomis  notata,  and  Etheostoma  calliura.  Soon 
after  Le  Sueur,  with  a  lofty  scorn  for  Rafinesque  and  his  doings, 
named  specimens  of  different  sizes,  Cichla  fasciata,  Cichla  ohiensis, 
and  Cichla  minima.  Lastly,  DeKay,  in  1842,  called  it  Centrarchus 
obscurus,  and  we  hope  this  may  be  the  last. 

Now,  the  name  salmoides,  being  the  oldest,  is,  of  course,  the  one 
to  be  adopted.  But  suppose  we  "stamp  it  out."  Is  Mlcropterus 
dolomieu  any  better?  Out  with  it!  Mlcropterus  achigan?  Just  as 
bad.  I  fear  that  the  "stamping  out"  process  would  have  to  be 
continued  too  long.  You  may  spell  it  salmonoides  if  you  like,  but 
you  can  not  get  rid  of  it. 

Now  for  the  large-mouthed  Bass.  The  oldest  description  we  find 
is  that  of  a  young  specimen  from  the  Ohio  by  Rafinesque,  in  1820, 
as    Lepomis  pallida.      The    description    is    poor   enough,   and    not 


34  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

altogether  correct,  but  the  name  is  a  happy  inspiration,  as  gopd  as 
salmoides  is  bad.  Soon  after  (1822)  Le  Sueur  described  the  same  fish 
from  Florida  as  Ciclila  floridana,  a  name  which  would  be  well  enough 
if  it  were  confined  to  the  streams  of  the  orange  groves,  but  it  seems 
rather  narrow  in  view  of  the  fact  that  the  fish  is  found  in  Mexico 
and  Manitoba,  and  every-where  between. 

Next,  a  specimen  came  to  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  under  the 
title  of  "  Black  Bass  of  Lake  Huron."  To  their  eyes  the  fish  was 
black  enough,  but  not  a  Bass  (i.  e.  Labrax),  and  they  called  it  Huro 
nigricans,  the  "  Black  Huron,"  making  a  new  genus  for  it  because 
their  specimen  had  but  six  dorsal  spines,  the  last  four  having  been 
broken  off,  leaving  two  dorsal  fins.  The  colored  figure  which  they 
published  remained  a  standing  puzzle  for  some  time. 

In  Dr.  Kirtland's  private  copy  of  his  own  fishes  of  Ohio  he  had 
carefully  drawn  off  and  colored  a  copy  of  Cuvier's  figure  of  his  Black 
Huron,  and  had  all  his  life  sought  for  such  a  fish  in  the  lakes  and 
never  found  it.  About  a  year  before  his  death,  Dr.  Kirtland  asked 
me  if  I  had  ever  seen  that  fish  or  could  tell  him  what  it  was,  and  I 
had  the  pleasure  of  informing  him  that  it  was  a  demoralized  Black 
Bass.  Next,  in  1854,  Professor  Agassiz,  thinking  that  this  fish  in  the 
Tennessee  River  could  not  be  the  same  as  in  Lake  Huron,  called  it 
Grystes  nobilis,  a  good  name  enough,  but  34  years  too  late.  In  the 
same  year,  specimens  from  Texas  were  named  Grystes  nuecensis  by 
Baird  and  Girard,  but  the  fish  is  found  in  other  streams  than  the 
Rio  Nueces.  Then  a  meaty  and  excellent  name,  Grystes  megastoma, 
was  given  by  Dr.  Garlick  in  1857,  which  closes  the  American  synony- 
my, but  the  disease  has  broken  out  in  France  again,  and  Messrs. 
Vaillant  and  Bocourt,  of  Paris,  who  ought  to  know  better,  have  again 
described  it  as  Dioplites  treculii  and  Dioplites  variabilis.  The  poorest 
business  a  French  naturalist  can  engage  in  is  that  of  describing  new 
species  of  American  fishes.  A  good  share  of  our  cumbersome  and 
confusing  synonymy  is  due  to  Gallic  assistance. 

Now,  in  1873,  Prof.  Gill,  in  his  masterly  review  of  these  species, 
followed  the  thread  back  only  to  Huro  nigricans  in  1828,  and  so 
called  the  big-mouthed  Black  Bass,  as  he  was  bound  to  do,  Microp- 
terus  nigricans.  The  names  jioridanus  and  pallidus  were  presumed  by 
him  to  refer  to  the  other  species,  for  the  reason  that  he  had  never 
seen  a  big-mouthed  Black  Bass,  either  from  the  Ohio  River  or  from 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS.  35 

Florida.  In  1876,  Prof.  Goode  had  collected  it  in  Florida,  and  so 
felt  bound  to  restore  Le  Sueur's  name  and  to  call  it  Micropterus  fior- 
idanus.  In  1877,  I  called  Professor  Gill's  attention  to  the  fact  that 
there  were  big-mouthed  as  well  as  small-mouthed  Black  Bass  in  the 
streams  where  Rafinesque  fished,  and  he  agreed  with  me  at  once  that 
the  Lepomis  pallida  of  Rafinesque  was  the  big-mouth,  which  is  why 
the  big-mouthed  Black  Bass,  Oswego  Bass,  Grass  Bass,  and  Bayou 
Bass  is  Micropterus  pallidus  (Rafinesque)  Gill  and  Jordan,  at  present 
date,  and  such  may  it  ever  remain. 

Now,  as  to  the  name  of  the  genus  itself,  the  difficulty  is  just  as 
great.  The  name  Micropterus  is  unquestionably  the  oldest.  But  (a) 
we  are  perhaps  not  absolutely  certain  that  the  original  Micropterus 
dolomieu  was  a  Black  Bass  at  all ;  (b)  it  was  described  as  distinct 
under  the  erroneous  impression  that  it  had  a  little  adipose  fin  behind 
the  dorsal,  and  (c)  the  name  (small  fin)  refers  to  this  imaginary  pe- 
culiarity, and  is  therefore  incorrect. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  Black  Bass  really  has  smaller  fins  than 
any  of  its  relatives,  and  the  name  has  therefore  a  certain  appropri- 
ateness. I  think,  with  Professor  Gill,  that  it  should  be  retained,  al- 
though Professor  Cope  and  ethers,  as  good  authority  as  we  are,  are 
inclined  to  demur. 

Next  comes  Calliurus  (beautiful  tail),  not  a  bad  name,  for  the 
young  Bass  have  the  tail  ornamented  with  black,  white,  and  yellow, 
but  not  a  very  good  name.  Then  comes  Lepomis  (scaly  opercles), 
previously  applied  to  the  sunfishes,  and  therefore  not  usable  for  a 
Bass.  Then  come  Rafinesque's  Aplites,  Nemocampsis,  Diopiites,  and 
Aplesion,  unworthy  of  any  attention,  although,  for  some  reason,  Dio- 
piites has  kept  up  a  sort  of  life,  while  the  other  three  have  wholly  died. 

Next  come  the  name  Huro  for  the  large-mouthed,  and  Grystes  for  the 
small-mouthed.  Of  course  the  two  do  not  belong  to  separate  genera. 
The  name  Grystes  was  given  as  a  translation  of  the  name  Growler, 
under  which  name  the  Black  Bass  was  sent  to  the  museum  at  Paris. 
Thus  our  two  species  are  often  called  in  foreign  books  the  Black 
Huron  {Huro  nigricans),  and  the  Salmon-formed  Growler  (Grystes 
salmoides).  The  name  Grystes  is  a  graceful  one,  and  has  been  used 
more  frequently  than  any  other,  but  there  are  seven  names  ahead  of 
it  on  the  record,  and  first  come  first  served  and  synonymy  take  the 
hindmost. 


36  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

The  names  Labrus,  Bodianus,  Clchla,  and  Centrarchus  belong  to 
wholly  different  fishes,  and  were  given  by  different  authors  through 
mistakes  as  to  the  relationship  of  the  Black  Bass. 

I  trust  that  this  hasty  and  rather  rambling  account  will  be  of  some 
service  to  the  numerous  class  of  my  fishing  brethren  who  like  to  be 
right  in  their  use  of  names,  and  who  want  to  know,  you  know,  but 
who,  l;ke  Wilhelm  Tell,  can  not  "  lange  priifen  oder  w'ahlen." 

In  the  summer  of  1877,  while  investigating  the  fish 
fauna  of  the  Alleghany  region  of  South  Carolina,  Georgia, 
and  Tennessee,  Professor  Jordan  became  impressed  with 
the  fact  that  the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass  of  the  South- 
ern States  differed  constantly  in  some  features  from  the 
Northern  form  of  the  same  species ;  consequently,  he  sep- 
arated the  species  into  two  varieties,  designating  the  North- 
ern form  as  Micropterus  salmoides  var.  achigan,  and  the 
Southern  form  as  Micropterus  salmoides  var.  salmoides. 
His  views  and  arguments  are  detailed  in  the  following 
extract : — * 

The  small-mouthed  Black  Bass  or  "  Trout "  of  the  Southern 
streams  (i.  e.,  Savanah,  Altamaha,  Chattahoochee,  Alabama)  differs 
so  constantly  from  Northern  representatives  of  the  same  species  that 
the  two  fcrms  may  be  taken  as  geographical  varieties  of  one  species, 
and  it  is  probably  worth  while  to  distinguish  each  by  name.  The 
Labrus  salmoides  of  Lacepede  was  collected  by  Bosc,  near  Charleston, 
S.  C.  It  was  therefore,  presumably,  the  Southern  variety  which 
should  be  designated  as  var.  salmoides.  The  oldest  name  known  to 
apply  to  the  Northern  form  is  that  of  Bodianus  achigan  Rafinesque. 
The  Northern  form  may  therefore  be  designated  as  Micropterus  sal- 
moides var.  achigan,  whenever  it  is  deemed  desirable  to  call  attention 
to  these  variations. 

The  body  is  appreciably  longer  and  slenderer  in  var.  salmoides 
than  in  var.  achigan,  the  head  being  about  3£  in  length  instead  of 


•  Contributions  to  N.  A.  Ichthyology,  No.  3,  p.  30.     <Bulletin  U.  S. 
National  Museum,  XII,  1878. 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS.  37 

about  2f.  The  anal  rays  in  salmoides  are  usually  10  instead  of  11 J 
the  dorsal  formula  X,  1, 12,  instead  of  X,  I,  13.  The  scales  are  larger 
in  salmoides,  there  being  about  70  in  the  lateral  line  instead  of  77. 
The  coloration  of  salmoides  is  uniformly  unlike  that  of  achigan.  The 
lower  part  of  the  sides  is  marked  by  pretty  regular  lines  of  dark 
olive-green  spots  along  the  series  of  scales.  The  lower  fins  are  usu- 
ally more  or  less  red,  and  the  black,  yellow,  and  white  coloration  of 
the  caudal  fin,  so  conspicuous  in  young  specimens  of  the  Northern 
form — in  the  Western  States,  at  least — is  not  noticeable  in  the  South- 
ern variety. 

And  now,  if  we  could  feel  perfectly  confident  and  rea- 
sonably sure  that  the  premises  adopted  by  our  American 
naturalists  were  correct,  to  wit :  that  Labrus  salmoides  La- 
ce pede,  was  the  first  scientific  description  of  the  small- 
mouthed  Bass,  we  could  then  leave  this  subject  here,  with 
the  firm  conviction  that  this  matter  was  settled  for  all  time, 
and  could  thus  feel  assured  of  the  ultimate  and  universal 
adoption  and  perpetuity  of  the  American  nomenclature  of 
the  Black  Bass,  viz :  Micropterus  salmoides  (Lacepede) 
Gill,  for  the  small-mouthed  species,  and  Micropterus  pallidus 
(Rafinesque)  Gill  &  Jordan,  for  the  large-mouthed  species. 
In  this  event,  I  say,  we  could  rest  content;  for,  although 
the  generic  appellation,  and  the  specific  title  of  the  small- 
mouthed  Black  Bass,  as  proposed,  are  misnomers  (the 
generic  name  is  not  very  inappropriate,  inasmuch  as  the 
fins  are  really  smaller  than  in  other  centrarchids,  though 
not  in  the  sense  intended  by  Lacepede ;  and  the  specific 
name,  though  not  in  any  degree  descriptive,  was  conferred 
by  reason  of  its  being  called  "  Trout "  in  its  native  waters), 
they  are  the  only  names  that  could  rightly  be  bestowed, 
under  the  circumstances,  and  we  could  well  afford  to  sub- 
mit gracefully  to  what  could  not  be  bettered,  or  helped. 

But  now  come  our  Gallic   friends,  MM.  Vaillant  and 


38  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

Bocourt,  "  once  more  unto  the  breach/'  to  tell  us  what 
they  know  about  the  Black  Bass.  In  their  work  (Mis- 
sion Scientifique  au  Mexique:  ined.),  they  propose  once 
more  to  split  up  our  genus  Micropterus,  this  time  into 
four  species,  viz  : — 

M.  variabilis  (Le  S.)  V.  &  B.  (=M.  salmoides  var.  achigan  Jordan.) 
M.  dolomieu  (Lac.)  V.  &  B.  (-M.  salmoides  var. salmoides  Jordan.) 
M.  salmoides  (Lac.)  V.  &  B.  (-M.  pallidas  (Raf.)  Gill  &  Jordan.) 
M.  nuecensis  (G'rd)  V.  &  B.     {=M.  pallidus,  with  lingual  teeth.) 

Dr.Vaillant,  however,  has  only  proposed  these  species 
provisionally,  and  acknowledges  that  upon  examining  a 
considerable  number  of  specimens  these  specific  distinctions 
shade  into  each  other  : 

"  Au  premier  abord,  on  reconnait  sans  peine  plusieurs  types,  en 
ayant  egardaux  proportions  du  corps,  au  nombre  des  ecailles  et  a 
diverses  autres  particularites.  mais  si  on  examine  un  certain  nombre 
d'individus,  les  differences  s'attenuent  par  des  transitions  gradu- 
elles."* 

Perhaps  Dr.  Vaillant's  views  can  not  be  better  expressed 
than  by  the  annexed  analytical  table  ("tableau  dichoto- 
mique")  of  provisional  species  as  defined  by  him,  and 
which  explains  itself: 


7  to   8^ 


\fiO  to  70  scales  along/ With  lingual  teeth M.  nuecensis  G'rd. 


15  to 20 J  the  lateral  line.    ^Without  lingual  teeth-  -  M.  salmoides  Lac. 

low  the  lateral  ]     9  to  11 )  (69  to  75  scales X.  variabilis  Le  S. 

lino                        •    r  Lateral  line  :      <                                                ,,    .  ,      .      , 

nne-  L  25  to30j  1**°  t0  86  scale9 M.  dolomieu  Lac. 


It  will  be  observed  that  Dr.  Vaillant  proposes  the  title 


*  Mission  Scientifique  au  .Mexique,  Zool.  iv:  ined. 
/ 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS.  39 

Mic7%opterus  salmoides  for  the  large-mouthed  Bass ;  and  as 
we  call  the  small-mouthed  Bass  by  the  same  name,  it 
would  produce  endless  confusion  were  this  state  of  things 
to  continue.  If  the  Black  Bass  of  Europe  were  always  to 
be  confined. to  a  few  preserved  specimens  and  plaster  casts 
in  the  museums,  it  would  not  matter  so  much;  but  as  this 
desirable  game  fish  has  been  already  introduced  into  Eng- 
lish waters,  and  will  no  doubt,  in  time,  be  transplanted 
into  those  of  the  Continent,  it  would  seem  to  be  a  matter 
of  some  interest  to  obtain  a  correct,  uniform,  and  universal 
nomenclature  of  the  species.  Even  at  the  present  day, 
Dr.  Giinther,  the  great  English  authority,  in  a  work  re- 
cently issued  (Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Fishes,  1880), 
nails  Grystes  and  Huro  to  the  mast-head  as  valid 
genera. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  Dr.  Vaillant  adopts  the  north- 
ern and  southern  varieties  of  the  small-mouthed  Bass  as 
provisional  species,  and  likewise  separates  the  large- 
mouthed  Bass  into  two  species,  one  being  distinguished 
by  teeth  on  the  tongue,  the  other  by  their  absence.  I  have 
often  noticed  this  peculiarity  of  the  presence  or  absence  of 
lingual  teeth  in  the  large-mouthed  species  in  fish  from 
various  waters,  (and  am  not  sure  but  I  have  observed  it 
in  the  small-mouthed  species  occasionally),  but  I  have 
always  considered  it  as  developed,  possibly,  by  the  char- 
acter of  the  food  in  certain  localities,  or  merely  a  phase 
of  individual  variation.  Prof.  Jordan  takes  this  same 
view  of  it,  as  the  following  extract  will  show :  * 


*  Notes  on  a  Collection  of  Fishes  from  East  Florida,  obtained  by  Dr. 
J.  A.  Henshall.  By  David  S.  Jordan,  M.D.  <Proceedings  of  United 
States  National  Museum,  III,  1880,  pp.  17-22. 


40  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


12.  Micropterus  pallidus  (Bof.)  Gill  &  Jordan. 

Dr.  Leon  Vaillant  (Mission  Scientifique  au  Mexique:  ined.) 
divides  this  species  provisionally  into  two,  adopting  the  name  "  Mi- 
cropterus salmoides  "  for  the  ordinary  form,  and  that  of  Micropterus 
nuecensis  (Baird  &  Girard)  for  the  south-western  form  (Texas  and 
Mexico).  According  to  him  the  two  are  externally  identical,  but 
M.  nuecensis  is  distinguished  by  the  presence  of  a  small  patch  of 
teeth  on  the  tongue,  the  tongue  being  entirely  smooth  in  the  ordi- 
nary form. 

I  have  examined  a  number  of  specimens  in  regard  to  this  point. 

I  find  lingual  teeth  in  the  following  specimens: 

(1.)  Two  specimens,  one  large,  one  small,  from  the  Falls  of  the 
Ohio. 

(2.)  One  small  specimen  from  a  tributary  of  White  River  at 
Bloomington,  Ind. 

(3.)  One  specimen  (in  the  museum  at  Paris)  from  Texas. 

I  find  them  absent  in  the  following : 

(1.)  Several  specimens  in  Henshall's  collection  from  Indian  River, 
[Fla.]. 

(2r)  Specimen  from  Neuse  River. 

(3.)  Specimens  from  White  River  at  Indianapolis. 

(4.)  Specimens  from  Lake  Erie. 

The  presence  of  these  teeth  evidently  does  not  depend  on  age,  and 
apparently  not  on  sex.  It  may  be  a  specific  feature,  but  I  am  in- 
clined at  present  to  think  it  only  a  feature  of  individual  variation. 
I  have  not  seen  such  teeth  in  the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass. 

In  1878,  Professor  Jordan,  while  in  Europe,  gave  great 
attention  to  the  investigation  of  the  Black  Bass  from  the 
Paris  standpoint.  He  examined,  with  the  greatest  care, 
Lacepede's  original  type  specimen,  and  the  specimens  of 
Ctivier  and  Valenciennes,  which  are  still  preserved  in  the 
Museum  of  Natural  History  at  Paris.  He  was  deter- 
mined to  get  to  the  bottom  of  the  matter,  if  possible,  and 
to  this  end  consulted  freely,  and  compared  notes,  with  the 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTOEY    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS.  41 

French  ichthyologists,  who  aided  him  in  every  possible 
way. 

Professor  Jordan  afterwards  published  the  result  of  his 
researches,  which  forms  one  of  the  most  valuable  papers 
yet  added- to  the  literature  of  the  Black  Bass,  and  which  I 
take  great  pleasure  in  reproducing  here:* 

In  a  recent  visit  to  Europe  the  writer  has  had  the  privilege  of  ex- 
amining the  original  types  of  certain  species  of  American  fishes  de- 
scribed by  Dr.  Albert  Giinther  from  specimens  in  the  British 
Museum,  and  by  Cuvier,  Valenciennes,  and  others  from  examples  in 
the  Museum  at  Paris.  Notes  on  some  of  these,  the  proper  identifi- 
cation of  which  may  affect  our  nomenclature,  are  here  presented. 

1.   MlCROPTERlTS  DOLOMIEU  LacepMe. 
Lacepede,  Histoire  Naturelle  des  Poissons  iv,  324. 

The  original  type  of  this  species  is  a  large  specimen,  still  in  good 
condition.  Its  peculiarity,  which  led  to  its  separation  from  "Labrus" 
by  Lacepede,  is  that  the  last  rays  of  the  dorsal  are  detached  from 
the  others,  and  somewhat  distorted,  the  result  of  some  accident  to 
the  fish  while  young.  The  injury  to  the  specimen  is  therefore  not  a 
museum  mutilation,  as  I  had  heretofore  understood,  but  a  healed 
wound.  This  specimen  belongs  to  the  southern  variety  of  the  small- 
mouthed  Black  Bass,  recognized  by  me  (Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xii, 
1878,  p.  30)  as  Micropterus  salmoides  var.  salmoides.  Prof.  Vaillant 
recognizes  this  form  provisionally  (MSS.  Mission  Scientifique  au 
Mexique)  as  a  distinct  species  (Micropterus  dolomieu  Lac.)  from  the 
northern  form,  but  the  differences  seem  to  me  to  have  no  more  than 
varietal  value.  # 

As  shown  below,  there  is  little  doubt  that  the  specific  name  dolo- 
mieu is  che  first  ever  distinctly  applied  to  our  small-mouthed  Black 


*  Notes   on   Certain   Typical   Specimens  of   American   Fishes  in  the 
British  Museum  and  in  the  Museum  D'Histoire  Naturelle  at  Paris.     By 
David    S.    Jordan,    M.  D.     <  Proceedings   of    United   States    National 
Museum,  II,  1879,  pp.  218-226.. 
4 


42  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

Bass,  as  the  name  Micropterus  is  its  earliest  generic  appellation. 
Unless  we  adopt  the  earlier  salmoides,  its  name  should,  therefore,  be 
Micropterus  dolomieu. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  true  that  the  name  Micropterus  dolomieu 
was  applied  to  a  deformed  specimen,  which  was  considered  as  a  dis- 
tinct genus  and  species  solely  on  account  of  its  deformity. 

It  is  an  established  rule  of  nomenclature  (Dall,  Rept.  Coram. 
Zool.  Nomenc,  .48)  that  "  a  name  should  be  rejected  .  .  .  when 
it  expresses  an  attribute  or  character  positively  false  in  the  majority 
or  the  whole  of  the  group  in  question,  as  in  cases  (among  others) 
when  a  name  has  been  founded  on  a  monstrous,  abnormal,  immature, 
artificial  or  mutilated  specimen." 

The  name  Micropterus  was  founded  on  a  monstrous  specimen ;  in 
the  sense  intended  by  its  author  it  expresses  a  false  character, 
although  the  species  really  have  smaller  fins  than  are  found  in  re- 
lated genera.  In  the  opinion  of  some  writers  it  should  be  set  aside 
and  the  next  name  in  order  (Calliurus  Raf.)  should  be  adopted  in  its 
stead.  The  species  might  then  stand  as  Calliurus  dolomieu.  The 
specific  name  "  dolomieu  "  is  also  open  to  objection,  as  it  is  a  French 
noun  having  neither  a  Latin  nor  a  genitive  form,  but  being  an  un- 
modified name  of  a  person.  This  hardly  seems  to  me  a  reason  for 
rejecting  the  name,  although,  if  retained,  it  should  receive  a  genitive 
form,  as  dolomii  or  dolomiei. 

The  question  of  the  adoption  of  the  name  Micropterus  is  still  an 
open  one.  The  weight  of  authority  is,  however,  at  present  in  favor 
of  its  retention,  and  the  writer  sees  no  sufficient  reason  for  setting  it 
aside. 

2.  Grystes  salmoides  Cuvier  &   Valenciennes. 

Labrus  salmoides  LaeSp&de,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  Ill,  716. 
Grystes  salmoides  Cuv.  &  Val.,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  Ill,  54,  pi.  46. 

It  seems  rather  a  thankless  task  to  reopen  the  question  of  the 
proper  nomenclature  of  the  Black  Bass,  but  it  is  evident  that  we 
have  not  yet  reached  the  bottom.  The  name  Micropterus  salmoides 
is  now  generally  adopted  in  America  as  the  proper  name  of  the 
small-mouthed  Black  Bass,  not  only  among  naturalists  but  among 
anglers  and  sportsmen  as  well.     In  the  Museum  at  Paris,  however, 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS.  43 

the  same  name  is  fully  adopted  for  the  large-mouthed  Black  Bass. 
Let  us  inquire  into  the  history  of  the  use  of  the  name  salmoides. 

In  1800,  the  name  Labrus  salmoides  was  given  by  Lac£pede  to  a 
fish  inhabiting  the  waters  of  Carolina,  and  known  to  Americans  as 
"  Trout."  This  fish  was  known  to  Lacepede  only  through  a  drawing 
and  manuscript  description  by  Bosc.  Both  species  of  Black  Bass 
occur  in  Carolina,  the  large-mouth  most  abundantly.  Neither  draw- 
ing nor  description  is  exact  enough  to  enable  us  to  tell  with  certainty, 
or  even  with  reasonable  probability,  which  species  was  meant  by 
Bosc  and  Lacepede.  It  is  unlikely  that  Bosc  discriminated  between 
them  at  all,  both  being  alike  "Trout"  to  the  Carolina  fishermen. 
In  the  figure  the  mouth  is  drawn  large,  and  if  we  must  choose,  the 
large-mouth  is  best  represented. 

The  specific  name  salmoides  next  appears  in  the  great  work  of 
Cuvier  and  Valenciennes  (III,  p.  54)  as  Grystes  salmoides.  The  descrip- 
tion here  given  is  for  the  most  part  applicable  to  both  species;  the 
small  size  of  the  scales  ("il  y  en  a  quatre-vingt-dix  sur  une  ligne 
longitudinale  et  trente-six  ou  quarante  sur  une  verticale."  *)  and  the 
naked  preoperculum  render  it  evident  that  at  least  that  part  of  the 
description  was  takeu  from  a  small-mouth,  while  the  accompanying 
figure  more  resembles  the  large-mouth. 

We  are,  however,  not  here  left  in  doubt.  The  original  material 
of  the  French  naturalists  is  still  preserved  in  the  museum.  It  con- 
sists of  the  following  specimens  as  described  by  Cuvier  and  Valen- 
ciennes: 

1.  "Nous  avons  recu,  par  M.  Milbert,  un  individu  de  huit  a  neuf 
pouces  et  un  de  six  a  sept.  C'est  ce  dernier  qui  a  six  rayons  a  la 
membrane  des  ouies  et  quatorze  rayons  mouse  a  la  dorsale." 

From  one  of  these  specimens  the  figure  in  the  Histoire  Naturelle 
des  Poissons  (pi.  46)  was  taken. f  This  specimen  is  unquestionably 
a  large-mouthed  Black  Bass. 

2.  "  Plus  tard,  M.  Lesueur  nous  en  a  envoye  de  la  riviere  Wabash 
un  individu  long  de  seize  pouces,  et  trois  autres  qui  n'en  ont  guere 
que  cinq.  Les  jeunes  sont  d'un  vert  plus  pale,  et  ont  sur  chaque 
flanc  vingt-cinq  a  trente  lignes  longitudinales  et  paralleles  brunes, 
qui  paraissent  s'effacer  avec  Page." 


*The  very  small  precaudal  scales  are  doubtless  here  included. 
^Fide  Vaillaut. 


44  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

These  specimens  are  still  preserved,  bearing  the  MSS.  name  of 
Cichla  variabilis  Le  Sueur,  and  belong  to  the  small-mouthed  species. 
This  name,  which,  so  far  as  I  know,  was  never  published  by  Le 
Sueur,  is  thus  noticed  by  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes: 

"  M.  Lesueur,  croyant  l'espeee  nouvelle,  en  a  publie  une  descrip- 
tion dans  le  Journal  des  sciences  a  Philadelphie,  sous  le  nom  de 
cichla  variabilis;  mais  nous  avons  tout  lieu  de  croire  que  c'est  ce 
poisson  qui  est  represente  et  decrit  par  M.  de  Lacepede  (t.  iv,  p.  716 
et  717,  et.  pi.  5,  fig.  2),  sous  le  nom  de  labre  salmoide,  d'apres  des 
notes  et  une  figure  fournies  par  M.  Bosc  qui  le  nommait  perca  trutte. 
La  figure  en  est  un  peu  rude,  mais  la  description  s'accorde  avec  ce 
que  nous  avons  vu,  sauf  quelques  details,  qui  tiennent  peut-etre 
moins  au  poisson  meme  qu'a  la  maniere  dont  il  a  ete  observeV' 

Later  (vol.  v,  p.  v),  the  type  of  Micropterus  dolomieu  was  re- 
examined and  fully  identified  by  Cuvier  as  a  Grystes  salmoides. 

It  is  thus  evident  that  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes  completely  con- 
founded the  two  species  under  the  name  Grystes  salmoides,  and  that 
the  uncertain  salmoides  of  Lacepede  became  in  their  hands  a  com- 
plex species.  We  may  perhaps  say  that  their  salmoides  must  be  the 
fish  described  by  them,  and  that  the  figure  is  to  be  taken  into  consid- 
eration only  when  other  evidence  is  wanting.  M.  Vaillant,  how- 
ever, maintains  that  the  large-mouthed  species  should  be  considered 
as  the  salmoides  of  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  inasmuch  as  one  of  that 
species  served  as  the  type  of  their  published  figure. 

The  next  writers  who  use  the  name  salmoides  (De  Kay,  Storer, 
etc.),  have  merely  copied  or  echoed  the  description  of  Cuvier  and 
Valenciennes,  and  have  in  no  way  given  precision  to  the  name. 

Later  Agassiz  uses  the  name  "  salmoneus"  (slip  of  the  pen  for 
salmoides"  f)  apparently  referring  to  the  large-mouthed  species. 

The  description  given  by  Dr.  Giinther  of  Grystes  salmoides  in  the 
Catalogue  of  the  Fishes  of  the  British  Museum,  I,  252,  adds  nothing 
to  the  precision  of  our  knowledge  of  the  species,  the  characters 
given  being  either  taken  from  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  or  else 
common  to  both  species. 

Next  a  description  is  given  of  Grystes  salmoides  by  Holbrook  (Ich. 
S.  Car.,  p.  28,  pi.  4,  f.  2),  accompanied  by  an  excellent  figure,  which 
leaves  no  possible  doubt  of  the  species  intended.  This  is  the  large- 
mouthed  Bass. 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF   THE    BLACK  BASS.  45 

Omitting  papers  of  lesser  importance,  we  come  finally  to  the  very- 
able  discussion  of  these  questions  by  Professor  Gill  (Proc.  Am.  Ass. 
Adv.  Sci.,  1873,  p.  55-72),  in  which  the  whole  subject  is  exhaustively 
treated,  and  the  name  Mlcropterus  salmoides  is  definitely  adopted  for 
the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass.  This  arrangement  has  been  followed 
by  most  recent  ichthyologists.  In  an  important  paper  just  now  pass- 
ing through  the  press  (Mission  Scientifique  au  Mexique),  however, 
Messrs.  Vaillant  and  Bocourt  have  adopted  the  name  Mlcropterus  sal- 
moides for  the  large-mouthed  species,  for  the  reasons  indicated  above. 

This  question  resolves  itself  into  two.  Is  the  specific  name  sal- 
moides available  for  either  species  ?  and  if  so,  for  which  ? 

Between  the  publication  of  the  works  of  Lncepede  and  Cuvier 
both  species  had  been  more  than  once  described  under  different 
names  by  Rafinesque  and  Le  Sueur.  Of  these  names,  Lepomis  pal- 
lida Raf.  for  the  large-mouthed  Black  Bass,  W/'ropterus  dolomieu  Lac. 
for  the  southern,  and  Bodianus  achigan  Raf.  for  the  northern  variety 
of  the  small-mouth  have  priority  over  the  others.  All  these,  there- 
fore, antedate  any  precise  definition  of  the  name  salmoides. 

The  question  as  to  whether  a  specific  name,  at  first,  loosely  applied 
and  afterwards  precisely  fixed,  shall  claim  priority  from  its  first  use 
or  not,  has  been  differently  answered  by  different  writers,  and  has 
perhaps  never  been  settled  by  general  usage.  I  suppose  that  the 
amount  of  doubt  or  confusion  arising  from  its  use  or  rejection  enters 
with  most  writers  as  an  element.  The  name  salmoides,  left  unsettled 
by  Lacepede,  has  been  generally  received  by  writers,  in  consequence 
of  the  supposed  precision  given  to  it  by  Cuvier.  We  have  seen, 
however,  that  both  species  were  included  by  Cuvier  under  one  name, 
and  that  we  must  look  farther  for  real  restriction  of  the  species. 
The  first  distinct  use  of  the  name  salmoides  for  any  particular  species 
is  by  Holbrook,  for  the  large-mouthed  form.  On  the  basis  of  the 
first  unquestionable  restriction,  the  name,  if  used  at  all,  must  be 
applied  to  that  species.  Forty  years  previous  to  this  restriction, 
however,  the  specific  name  pallidus  was  conferred  on  the  same  fish 
by  Rafinesque. 

In  the  writings  of  nearly  all  the  older  naturalists,  as  well  as  in 
many  of  the  later  ones,  we  find  descriptions  of  species  which  are 
really  generic  in  their  value,  and  which,  as  our  knowledge  of  species 
becomes  greater,  can  not  be  disposed  of  with  certainty  or  even  with 


46  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

any  high  degree  o"  probability,  for  absolute  certainty  rarely  accom- 
panies any  identification. 

In  the  absence  or  impossibility  of  any  general  rule  regarding  such 
cases,  the  following  supposed  examples  will  illustrate  what  seems  to 
the  present  writer  a  fair  method  of  treating  them. 

Let  us  suppose  that  the  genus  Mlcropterus  contains  two  well- 
marked  species;  that  to  one  of  these  the  name  salmoides  was  early 
applied ;  that  next  the  names  dolomiel  and  pallidus  were  applied  to 
the  two  respectively,  and  that  subsequently  the  name  salmoides  was 
restricted  to  the  one  called  pallidus. 

Now  if  (1 )  the  original  salmoides  were  definitely  a  complex  species, 
distinctly  including  both,  we  may  hold  its  author  to  be  a  "  conserva- 
tive" writer,  and  that  the  subsequent  restriction,  like  the  restriction 
of  a  genus,  is  a  change  of  view  or  the  elimination  of  an  error.  In 
this  case,  the  name  salmoides  should  be  retained,  dating  its  priority 
from  its  original  use,  and  applying  to  the  species  pallidus. 

If  (2)  the  original  salmoides  be  not  complex,  but  simply  uncertain, 
the  probabilities  being  undeniably  in  favor  of  its  identity  with 
pallidus  rather  than  with  dolomiei,  it  should  be  adopted  instead  of 
pallidus.  Absolute  certainty  of  identification  can  not  be  expected 
of  many  names  older  than  the  present  generation*  and  each  writer 
must  judge  for  himself  of  the  degrees  of  probability.  If  we  may 
express  it  numerically,  a  probability  of  75  per  cent,  should  perhaps 
be  sufficient,  and  this  probability  should  be  unquestionable — that  is, 
not  merely  subjective  and  varying  with  the  mental  differences  of  the 
different  writers. 

If  (3)  the  original  salmoides  be  evidently  a  Mlcropterus,  but  hope- 
lessly uncertain  as  to  the  species  intended,  it  should  claim  priority 
from  its  first  use  for  a  definite  species  of  Mlcropterus.  If  the  name 
pallidus  intervene  between  its  first  use  and  its  final  precise  use,  sal- 
moides should  become  a  synonym  of  pallidus,  and  should  not  be 
available  for  the  other  species.  This  rule  is  followed  more  or  less 
consistently  by  most  writers,  and  it  seems  to  me  a  fair  one.  The 
revival  of  hopelessly  uncertain  ancient  specific  names  in  place  of 
well-defined  modern  ones  is  productive  only  of  confusion,  and  is 
open  to  gross  abuse.  The  revival  even  of  well-defined  but  forgotten 
names  is  confusing  enough,  and  it  has  been  strongly  objected  to  by 
many  writers. 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS.  47 

If  (4)  the  name  salmoides,  left  hopelessly  uncertain  by  its  author, 
should  have  been  definitely  used  for  some  species  to  which  it  might 
not  improbably  have  referred  before  the  use  of  the  name  pallidus  for 
the  same  species,  it  should  be  retained,  dating  its  acceptance  from 
its  second  use,  and  the  name  pallidus  should  be  considered  as  a 
synonym  of  salmoides. 

If  (5)  the  name  salmoides  should  have  been  adopted  by  the  second 
author  supposed  in  (4)  for  some  species  not  a  Micropterus,  or  for 
some  species  which  could  not  reasonably  be  identical  with  the 
original  salmoides,  the  identification  should  be  taken  as  an  erroneous 
one,  and  should  not  be  considered  in  our  nomenclature. 

The  actual  state  of  the  name  salmoides  is  that  supposed  under  (3) 
above.  I  do  not  consider  the  name  salmoides  as  rightfully  entitled  to 
priority  over  either  pallidus  or  dolomiei  as  the  specific  name  of  a 
species  of  Black  Bass.  If  it  must  be  used,  however,  I  think  it  wisest 
to  retain  it,  with  Professor  Gill,  for  the  small-mouthed  species.  For 
this  purpose,  we  must  consider  the  salmoides  of  Lacep&de  as  complex, 
including  both  species.  The  case  would  then  be  that  supposed  by 
(1)  above.  We  must  hold  further  that  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes 
restricted  the  name  to  the  small-mouthed  form.  No  possible  settle- 
ment of  the  case  can  be  free  from  question  or  objection.  I  propose 
to  adopt  the  following  view  of  the  case,  proposed  by  Dr.  Gill  (in 
lit.),  to  whom  I  have  submitted  the  evidence  above  given. 

Dr.  Gill  remarks : 

"  I  think  we  can  retain  our  old  names  {i.  e.,  Micropterus  salmoides 
and  Micropterus  pallidus)  on  the  following  grounds : 

"(1)  Let  us  admit  that  Labrus  salmoides  Lac.  may  be  the  small- 
mouthed. 

"(2)  The  name  salmoides,  it  may  be  considered,  was  re-established 
by  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes  for  the  largest  specimen  (the  small- 
mouthed,  according  to  your  observations).  The  description  was 
evidently  based  on  that,  as  appears  from  the  number  of  scales,  the 
absence  of  any  on  the  preopercular  limb  ('  le  limbe  de  son  preoper- 
cule  [etc.]  en  manquent'),  and  the  form  of  the  dorsal.  Even  if  it 
is  certain  that  the  figure  was  taken  from  a  large-mouthed  specimen, 
this  would  not  affect  the  question,  inasmuch  as  we  must  accept  the 
description  when  that  is  definitive,  and  such  is  the  case  here. 

"  (3)  It  may  be  held  that  the  name  is  further  specialized  by  Cuvier 


48  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

and  Valenciennes  by  its  use  to  supersede  the  name  of  Le  Sueur 
(p.  55),  and  as  a  substitute  for  M.  Dolomieu  (vol.  v,  p.  5). 

"(4)  The  majority  of  the  C.  &  V.'s  specimens  belonged  to  the 
small-mouthed  Bass. 

"  (5)  The  figure  was  based  on  a  large-mouth  simply  through  acci- 
dence of  size  and  condition,  not  selected  on  account  of  exhibition 
of  characters.  In  the  same  way,  we  might  maintain  that  the  type 
of  Pomotis  vulgaris  C.  &  V.  (although  the  description  plainly  points 
to  Eupomotis  aureus)  was  Lepomis  pallidus  [rather  auritus~],  for  the 
figure  apparently  represents  such." 

3.  Micropterus  variabilis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt. 

Ciehla  variabilis  Le  Sueur,  MSS. 

Micropterus  variabilis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,    MSS.,   Mission   Scientifique  au 
Mexique. 

This  is  the  ordinary  Northern  small-mouthed  Black  Bass,  Micro- 
pterus achigan,  or  var.  achigan  of  authors,  Micropterus  salmoides  achigan 
of  the  present  writer. 

The  conclusions  of  Professor  Gill  at  the  close  of  the 
paper  just  quoted,  are  based,  apparently,  on  his  faith  in 
Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  superinduced,  perhaps,  by  a 
reluctance  to  re-open  the  question,  and  a  desire  to  retain 
our  present  nomenclature  of  the  Black  Bass  species, 
for  the  sake  of  peace  and  harmony.  If  Dr.  Gill's 
conclusions  could  be  sustained,  and  our  nomenclature  of 
the  species  become  universally  adopted,  no  one  would  be 
more  gratified  than  the  writer ;  but  we  can  not  expect 
peace  or  security  until  the  matter  is  definitely,  positively, 
and  indisputably  settled,  or,  at  least,  so  far  as  this  can  be 
done,  consistently,  with  the  facts. 

After  a  careful  reading  of  the  foregoing  review,  it  would 
seem  that  the  estimate  of  the  Black  Bass  species,  as  enter- 
tained by  Dr.  Vaillant,  should  have  great  weight,  and 
meet  with  profound  consideration;  and  it  might  be  ques- 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS.  49 

tioned  whether  Micropterus  dolomieu  for  the  small-mouthed 
Bass,  and  Micropterus  salmoides  for  the  large-mouthed  Bass, 
are  not  more  in  accordance  with  the  evidence  set  forth  in 
Professor  Jordan's  clear  and  exhaustive  paper,  than  our 
own  view  of  the  matter,  based,  as  the  latter  is,  upon  the 
conflicting  testimony  of  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  who 
embraced  every  thing  known  of  the  Black  Bass,  in  their 
day,  in  their  Grystes  salmoides,  except  Huro  nigricans;  and 
had  it  not  been  for  the  gap  in  its  dorsal  fin,  the  inference 
is,  they  would  have  included  that  also.  I  do  not  make 
this  statement  unguardedly,  or  disrespectfully;  for  while  I 
venerate  the  name  of  Cuvier,  I  am  convinced  that  he  failed 
to  discriminate  between  the  two  species  of  Black  Bass.* 

I  incline  to  the  belief  that  Professor  Jordan,  with  his 
usual  acumen,  is  disposed  to  take  some  such  view  as  this, 
for  he  says : — 

"  As  shown  below,  there  is  little  doubt  that  the  specific 
name  dolomieu,  is  the  first  ever  distinctly  applied  to  our 
small-mouthed  Black  Bass,  as  the  name  Micropterus  is  its 
earliest  generic  appellation.  Unless  we  adopt  the  earlier 
salmoides,  its  name  should,  therefore,  be  Micropterus 
dolomieu" 

But  why  adopt  scdmoides  for  the  small-mouthed  Black 
Bass  at  all  ?  It  is  only  synonymous  with  dolomieu  on  the 
authority  of  Cuvier   and    Valenciennes.       Does   not   the 


*"We  are  again  obliged  to  advert  to  the  partial  and  often  the  super- 
ficial examination  with  which  nearly  allied  species  have  too  often  been 
regarded  by  the  authors  of  the  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poissons;.  an  imperfection 
which  we  can  only  account  for  by  nearly  all  their  descriptions  having 
been  made  from  preserved  specimens;  and  by  supposing  that  these 
eminent  writers,  not  unfrequently,  have  been  absolutely  overwhelmed 
with  their  materials." — Swainson,  Nat.  Hist,  and  Class,  of  Fishes,  II,  407, 

1839. 

5 


50  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

weight  of  evidence  favor  the  adoption  of  salmoides  for  the 
large-mouthed  Black  Bass  ?  We  certainly  must  take  this 
view  of  it  if  we  set  aside  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes'  de- 
scription of  Grystes  salmoides,  whether  we  retain  their 
figure  (which  was  taken  from  a  large-mouthed  Bass)  or 
not,  and  we  would  be  justified  in  excluding  their  descrip- 
tion, for,  as  Professor  Jordan  truly  says : — 

"It  is  thus  evident  that  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes  com- 
pletely confounded  the  two  species  under  the  name  Grystes 
salmoides,  and  that  the  uncertain  salmoides  of  Lacepede 
became  in  their  hands  a  complex  species." 

Now,  if  we  discard  both  the  description  and  figure  of 
Cuvier  and  Valenciennes'  Grystes  salmoides,  we  have  left 
(ignoring  for  the  time  both  Rafinesque  and  Le  Sueur) 
only  Lacepede's  Labrus  salmoides  and  Mieropterus  dolomieu. 

Then,  let  us  take  Bosc's  figure  of  Labrus  salmoides,  first. 
Of  this,  Professor  Jordan  says  : — 

"  In  the  figure  the  mouth  is  drawn  large,  and  if  we 
must  choose,  the  large-mouth  is  best  represented." 

Now,  if  we  conclude  from  this  that  Labi*us  salmoides  is 
the  large-mouthed  Black  Bass,  then  the  small-mouthed 
Black  Bass  claims  its  birthright  of  Mieropterus  dolomieu, 
which  unquestionably  belongs  to  it. 

This,  in  short,  seems  to  be  the  view  of  Dr.  Vaillant, 
and  it  seems  to  me  to  be  the  correct  one,  though  he  takes 
the  figure  of  Grystes  salmoides  as  additional  evidence. 

There  is  but  one  contingency  that  could  prove  the 
right  of  the  small-mouthed  Bass  to  the  name  Mieropterus 
dolomieu  in  a  stronger,  or  absolute  manner,  and  it  would 
be  stronger,  because  incontrovertible,  namely:  the  priority 
of  Lac6pede's  description  of  Mieropterus  dolomieu  to  his 
description  of  Labrus  salmoides. 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS.  51 

Now,  the  writer  proposes  to  show  that  this  is  the  actual 
state  of  the  case,  and  that  Lacepede  really  described  and 
named  Micropterus  dolomleu,  from  the  specimen  which  is 
still  preserved  in  the  Museum  D'Histoire  Naturelle  at 
Paris  (and  which  Professor  Jordan  examined  and  declared 
to  be  a  small-mouthed  Black  Bass),  before  he  described  and 
named  Labrus  salmoides  from  M.  Bosc's  drawing  and  de- 
scription of  the  Carolina  "  Trout." 

After  reading  Professor  Jordan's  paper,  so  often  referred 
to  here,  and  from  my  personal  knowledge  of  the  Carolina 
Black  Bass  or  "  Trout,"  I  became  convinced,  in  my  own 
mind,  that  the  name  Micropterus  dolomleu  should  be  re- 
stored to  the  small-mouthed  Bass,  and  that  the  name  Labrus 
salmoides  should  be  adopted  for  the  large-mouthed  Bass ; 
and  entertaining  these  heretical  views,  I  scanned  closely 
the  literature  relating  to  the  early  history  of  the  species. 

In  collating  the  bibliography  of  the  Black  Bass  for  the 
present  work,  I  discovered  an  apparent  discrepancy,  which, 
if  it  really  existed,  had  an  important  and  significant  bear- 
ing on  the  proper  nomenclature  of  the  species.  I  noticed 
that  most  American  authors,  in  referring  to  Lac6pede's  de- 
scription of  Labrus  salmoides,  gave  the  reference  as  "  La- 
cepede, Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  Vol.  Ill,  p.  716,  1800?", 
and  that  of  Micropterus  dolomleu  as  "  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat. 
des  Poiss.  Vol.  IV,  p.  325, 1800?";  thus,  of  course,  giving 
the  priority  to  Labrus  salmoides,  as  we  have  always  un- 
derstood and  accepted  it. 

On  the  other  hand,  I  noticed  that  Cuvier  and  Valen- 
ciennes* gave  the  reference  to  Labrus  salmoides  in  La- 
cepede's  work  as  "  Vol.  IV.  p.  716,  717,"   and  that  of 

•  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  Vol.  Ill,  p.  55,  1829,  and  Vol.  V, 
p.  v,  1830. 


52  BOOK   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

Micropterus  dolomieu  as  "  Vol.  IV.  p.  325."  I  noticed 
further  that  all  references  to  the  figure  of  Lacepede's  Mi- 
cropterus dolomieu  were  given  as  "  Vol.  IV,  pi.  3,  fig.  3," 
and  that  of  Labrus  salrnoides  as  "Vol.  IV,  pi.  5,  fig.  2." 
I  was  at  once  struck  with  this  discrepancy,  for  if  Cuvier 
and  Valenciennes'  reference  of  Labrus  salrnoides  Lacepede 
(Vol.  IV.  p.  716,  717)  was  correct,  it  would  give  the  pri- 
ority of  description  to  Micropterus  dolomieu  Lacep&de 
(Vol.  IV.  p.  325).  The  numerical  sequence  of  the  plates 
also  gave  it  priority. 

While  revising  this  chapter  of  the  present  book  for  the 
press,  I  learned  from  Professor  Jordan  that  he  had  just 
received  from  France,  a  copy  of  Lacepede's  original  edition 
of  his  great  work.  I  at  once  wrote  to  him  to  ascertain 
which  reference  to  Labrus  salrnoides  was  the  correct  one. 
His  characteristic  reply  was: — 

"In  answering  your  questions  I  have  struck  a  mare's 
nest;  M.  dolomieu,  Vol.  IV,  325,  1802;  L.  salrnoides,  Vol. 
IV,  716,  1802;  the  latter  being  in  a  supplement,  which,  in 
some  of  the  reprints,  is  restored  to  its  proper  place  in  the 
genus  Labrus  in  Vol.  III.  From  this  you  will  see  that 
dolomieu  has  priority  over  salrnoides.  I  still  believe  that 
salrnoides  was  intended  for  the  large-mouthed  Bass,  but 
don't  know  that  I  can  prove  it." 

Thus,  after  the  lapse  of  four-fifths  of  a  century,  the 
small-mouthed  Black  Bass  has  recovered  the  name  to  which 
it  is  clearly  entitled,  Micropterus  dolomieu;  truth  and 
justice  have  prevailed;  Lacepede  and  his  illustrious  friend 
Dolomieu  have  been  vindicated. 

And  now  let  us  inquire  as  to  Labrus  salrnoides*     This, 


"Certain  it  is,  however,  that  Lacepede's  Ichthyology  will  always  be  a 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS.  53 

as  we  know,  was  the  name  applied  by  Lacepede  to  Bosc's 
drawing  and  description  of  the  Carolina  u  Trout." 

It  has  never  been  definitely  settled  which  species  of 
Black  Bass  was  best  represented  by  the  drawing  or  its  de- 
scription ;  but  I  think  this  vagueness  existed  more  in  the 
imagination  than  in  realty,  and  that  "  the  wish  was  father 
to  that  thought ;  "  or,  in  other  words,  that  we  were  willfully 
blind  in  deference  to  authority ;  for,  as  Cuvier  had  identi- 
fied it  with  his  Grystes  salmoides  (which  we  have  supposed 
to  be  the  small-mouthed  Bass,  inasmuch  as  he  included, 
also,  Cichla  variabilis  Le  Sueur,  and  Micropterus  dolomieu 
as  synonyms),  Labrus  salmoides  must,  therefore,  either  be 
pronounced  a  small-mouthed  Bass,  or  be  invested  with  suf- 
ficient ambiguity  to  admit  of  its  becoming  synonymous 
with   Grystes  salmoides. 

On  the  other  hand,  Dr.  Vaillant,  as  we  have  seen,  main- 
tains that  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes'  Grystes  salmoides  is 
the  large-mouthed  Bass,  and  therefore  truly  synonymous 
with  Labrus  salmoides,  he  claiming  the  latter  to  be  the 
large-mouthed  Black  Bass.  Viewed  in  either  light,  Grystes 
salmoides  Cuv.  and  Val.  is  a  crux  criticorum;  but  fortu- 
nately it  is  not  essential  to  us  now. 

Let  us  take  Lacepede's  figure  and  description  of  Labrus 
salmoides,  just  as  they  are,  on  their  own  merits,  without 
any  reference  to  Cuvier's  valuation  of  them  ;  and  to  render 


standard  authority,  even  for  his  supposed  errors ;  and  it  will  be  found  by 
those  who  have  occasion  to  consult  them,  that  he  is  by  no  means  charge- 
able with  several  that  have  been  of  late  attributed  to  him.  The  figures, 
on  the  other  hand,  although  well  engraved,  are,  in  general,  very  deficient 
in  accuracy ;  the  major  part  being  either  copies,  or  drawn  by  artists  who 
were  totally  ignorant  of  the  scientific  details  of  their  subject." — Swain- 
SON,  Nat.  Hist,  and  Class,  of  Fishes,  I,  59,  1838. 


54  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

the  matter  plain,  I  have  reproduced,  at  the  close  of  this 
chapter,  facsimile  representations  of  Lacepede's  plates  of 
both  Labrus  salmoides  and  Micropterus  dolomieu,  with  his  de- 
scriptions, from  the  original  edition  of  his  "  Histoire  Nat- 
urelle  des  Poissons." 

In  the  first  place,  as  Professor  Jordan  says  of  the  figure 
of  Labrus  salmoides :  "  if  we  must  choose,  the  large-mouth 
is  best  represented."  This  is  reasonably  correct,  for  no 
one  could  mistake  this  figure  for  a  small-mouthed  Black 
Bass.  Then,  Lacepede's  description  says  the  opening  of 
the  mouth  is  very  large  ("  Pouverture  de  la  bouche  fort 
large  ").  The  radial  formula  of  the  dorsal  fin  is  given  as 
nine  spinous  rays  and  thirteen  soft  rays  ("  neuf  rayons 
aiguillon6s  et  treize  rayons  articules  a  la  nageoire  du 
dos").  This  number  of  dorsal  spines  will  hold  good 
in  seventy-five  per  cent,  of  cases,  in  the  large-mouthed  Bass 
of  the  South ;  sometimes  there  will  be  found  but  eight. 
The  rest  of  the  description  will  apply  to  either  species. 
Then,  again,  Lacepede,  on  the  authority  of  M.  Bosc,  says  the 
species  is  very  abundant  in  the  rivers  of  Carolina,  where 
they  are  called  "Trout,"  and  are  caught  with  the  hook 
baited  with  a  minnow  ("  On  trouve  un  tres-grande  nombre 
d'indivdus  de  cette  espece  dans  toutes  les  rivieres  de  la 
Caroline ;  on  leur  donne  le  nom  de  traut  ou  truite.  On  les 
prend  a  Phamecon ;  on  les  attire  par  le  moyen  de  morceaux 
de  cyprin"). 

Now,  if  we  had  not  been  trying  to  reconcile  Labrus 
salmoides  with  the  small-mouthed  Bass,  contrary  to  the 
evidence  of  our  own  senses,  so  as  to  accord  with  Cuvier's 
creation  of  the  complex  Grystes  salmoides — becoming  blind 
to  the  points  of  difference  and  enlarging  upon  the  vague- 
ness and  inaccuracy  of  the  drawing  and  its  description — we 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS  55 

might  have  discovered  that  this  figure  had,  as  Lacepede 
says,  a  "  very  large  mouth ;  "  and  that  while  the  large- 
mouthed  Black  Bass,  or  "  Trout "  is  "  very  abundant n  in 
Carolina  waters,  the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass  is  appar- 
ently unknown,  at  least  in  the  vicinity  of  Charleston, 
where  Bosc  collected. 

As  an  angler,  I  have  fished  for  the  Black  Bass  in  all  the 
South  Atlantic  States,  from  Maryland  to  Florida;  and 
while  I  have  found  the  large-mouthed  Bass  "  very  abun- 
dant "  in  all  parts  of  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  and 
Georgia,  I  never  took  a  single  small-mouthed  Bass  in  either 
of  these  latter  states  within  a  hundred  miles  of  the  coast. 
I  have  taken  it  in  the  hill-country  of  each  of  these  states, 
about  the  head-waters  of  the  rivers  flowing  into  the  At- 
lantic, but  I  doubt  very  much  if  it  is  found  anywhere  in 
the  lowland  region  of  that  section  of  country. 

Professor  E.  D.  Cope,  who  fished  the  streams  of  North 
Carolina,  in  the  autumn  of  1869,  from  the  Cumberland 
Mountains  to  the  sea,  found  the  large-mouthed  Bass, 
"abundant  in  all  the  rivers  of  the  state,"  but  failed  to  find 
the  small-mouthed  Bass,  except  in  the  Alleghany  region  of 
the  extreme  western  part  of  the  state  ;  and  says  that  it  is 
"  apparently  not  found  east  of  the  great  Water-shed."* 

If  the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass  inhabits  the  Atlantic 
slopes  of  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  or  Georgia,  Dr. 
Holbrook  would  have  known  it;  for  there  has  been  no 
ichthyologist  before  or  since  his  time,  who  understood  the 
structure  and  habits  of  the  "  Carolina  Trout "  so  well,  or 
caught  more  of  them.     The  best  description,  and  the  best 


*  A  Partial   Synopsis  of  the  Fresh  "Water  Fishes  of  North  Carolina. 
By  E.  D.  Cope,  A.M.     <Pro.  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  p.  450, 1870. 


56  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

figure  of  the  large-mouthed  Bass  (Trout)  ever  published,  is 
found  in  his  work  (Ichthyology  of  South  Carolina). 

In  order  to  show  that  he  clearly  understood  the  relations 
of  the  Black  Bass  species,  I  will  quote  as  follows: — "The 
Trout  has,  however,  its  representatives  both  in  the  North 
and  West,  with  which  it  is  closely  allied :  as  Grystes  Ni- 
gricans (Huro  nigricans)  of  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  and 
Grystes  fasciatus  (Cychla  fasciata)  of  Le  Sueur,  both  of 
which  have  been  referred  by  Agassiz  to  the  genus  Grystes."* 
Dr.  Holbrook  knew  that  the  southern  Trout  (large-mouthed 
Black  Bass)  was  neither  Huro  nigricans  (with  its  two  dis- 
tinct dorsal  fins),  nor  Cichla  fasciata  (the  small-mouthed 
Bass).  He  called  the  "  Trout  M  Grystes  salmoides  Lace- 
pede,  for  he  knew  that  Lacepede's  Labrus  salmoides,  or 
Bosc's  Perca  trutta  could  be  nothing  else  but  the  "  Caro- 
lina Trout "  (large-mouthed  Black  Bass) ;  and,  moreover, 
he  distinctly  repudiated  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes'  complex 
Grystes  salmoides. 

Professor  Agassiz  clearly  recognized  the  complex  char- 
acter of  Cuvier's  Grystes  salmoides,  saying  he  "probably 
mistook  specimens  of  our  Grystes  fasciatus  for  the  south- 
ern species."f  Professor  Agassiz  regarded  Grystes  sal- 
moides as  the  proper  name  for  the  southern  large-mouthed 
Black  Bass  (Trout),  and  in  comparing  with  it  Grystes  fas- 
ciatus Agassiz,  says:  "The  mouth  is  less  opened  and  the 
shorter  labials  do  not  reach  a  vertical  line  drawn  across 
the  hinder  margin  of  the  orbits,  whilst  they  exceed  such 
a  line  in  G.  salmoides."  J 


*  Ichthyology  of  South  Carolina.     By  John  Edwards  Holbrook,  M.D. 
25,  1855.  * 

t  Agassiz,  Lake  Superior,  p.  295,  1850. 
%  Agassiz,  Lake  Superior,  p.  295,  1850. 


SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS.  57 

And  yet  we  have  deceived  ourselves,  with  all  this  evi- 
dence staring  us  in  the  face,  with  the  flimsy  delusion  that 
Bosc's  drawing  of  the  "Carolina  Trout"  was  a  small- 
mouthed  Bass,  simply  because  Cuvier  pronounced  it  sy- 
nonymous with  Cichla  variabilis  Le  Sueur  and  Micropterus 
dolomieu  Lacep&de. 

Presuming  that  I  have  proved  the  names  Micropterus 
dolomieu  for  the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass,  and  Micropterus 
salmoides  for  the  large-mouthed  Black  Bass  to  be  rightly 
bestowed,  and  the  names  by  which  the  two  species  should 
hereafter  be  designated,  perhaps  it  will  be  well  to  refer  to 
some  objections  heretofore  raised  to  the  generic  appellation 
Mic/ropterus,  and  the  specific  titles  salmoides  and  dolomieu, 
on  the  score  of  irrelevancy.  I  can  do  no  better  than  to 
refer  the  reader  to  Professor  Jordan's  paper  on  this  sub- 
ject, on  page  31.  I  might  add,  however,  that  priority,  like 
charity,  covers  a  multitude  of  sins.* 

Micropterus  (little-fin)  is  really  less  objectionable  than 
any  of  the  names  yet  proposed  for  the  genus,  for  it  has, 
comparatively,  smaller  fins  than  any  of  the  related  genera. 

Calliurus  (beautiful  tail)  is  not  at  all  characteristic  of 
the  genus,  though  the  young  of  the  small-mouthed  species, 
in  certain  localities,  has  the  tail  marked  as  described  by 
Rafinesque :  "  base  yellow,  middle*  blackish,  tip  white.*' 

Grystes  (growler)  is  certainly  not  applicable  in  this  sense. 


*  To  those  anglers  who  are  better  posted  in  the  technical  terms  of  the 
great  American  "game"  introduced  to  the  nobility  of  England  by  Gen- 
eral Schenck,  than  in  the  technical  terms  introduced  here  in  .reference  to 
the  nomenclature  of  the  great  American  "  game-fish,"  I  need  only  say 
that  Micropterus,  and  the  specific  names  dolomieu  and  salmoides,  "  hold  the 
age"  over  all  other  synonyms  that  have  taken  a  hand,  from  time  to  time, 
in  the  "  little  game."    This  comparison  may  be  more  striking  than  ana- 


58  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

I  have  never  met  an  angler  who  had  heard  a  Black  Bass 
"  growl,"  yet  it  was  on  the  supposition  that  it  did  so, 
that  Cuvier  gave  it  this  name.  We  had  better  stop  here, 
for  if  we  go  farther  we  shall  fare  worse.  We  will  there- 
fore now  refer  to  the  objectionable  features  of  the  specific 
names  dolomieu  and  salmoldes. 

Salmoides  (trout-like;  literally,  salmon-like).  LacSpede 
conferred  this  name  simply  (and  appropriately,  so  far  as  he 
was  concerned)  because  the  figure  was  sent  to  him  as  the 
"Trout,"  or  "Trout-Perch"  of  Carolina;  (he  might  have 
called  it  boscii.  It  is  my  belief  that  if  he  had  received 
Bosc's  drawing  prior  to  his  specimen — M.  dolomieu — he 
would  have  named  it — the  drawing — Labrus  dolomieu.)  If 
we  take  its  game  qualities  into  consideration,  there  is  no 
fish  that  is  so  "  salmon-like  "  as  the  Black  Bass ;  none  that 
exhibits  so  nearly  the  characteristic  leap,  the  pluck,  and 
the  endurance  of  the  "  king  of  the  waters."  The  name  is, 
therefore,  not  altogether  inappropriate. 

Dolomieu  being  a  French  proper  noun,  without  a  Latin 
or  genitive  form,  might  be  considered  objectionable. 
Lac6pede  used  the  name,  however,  in  this  form,  advisedly; 
not  through  ignorance,  nor  by  accident,  but  for  the  sake  of 
euphony,  and  to  perpetuate  the  name  of  his  friend  in  its 
integrity.  In  the  original  edition  of  his  work  he  uses  the 
French  form  dolomieu,  but  has  the  Latin  form  as  a  foot- 
note under  each  specific  heading ;  while  in  many  of  the  re- 
prints the  editor  has  left  out  these  Latin  names  as  irrelevant. 

In  order  to  recognize  and  respect  Lac§pede's  motive,  it 
is  best  to  let  the  name  stand  just  as  he  wrote  it,  dolomieu. 


logical,  but  as  Jack  Bunsby  would  say,  its  force  "  lies  in  the  application 
of  it." 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS.  59 

As  Dr.  Vaillant  adopts  this  form,  and  doubtless  for  the 
same  reason,  it  is  important  for  the  sake  of  uniformity  to 
allow  it  to  stand.  There  is  no  lack  of  precedents  for  this 
form  of  specific  title.  I  will  merely  mention  as  an  exam- 
ple: Icterus  baltimore — the  Baltimore  oriole.  The  title 
baltimore,  as  here  used,  is  a  proper  noun,  and  was  bestowed 
in  honor  of  Lord  Baltimore,  whose  livery  was  black  and 
orange,  the  colors  of  the  oriole  or  hanging-bird.  Let  the 
name  of  the  small-mouthed  Bass,  then,  stand  as  dolomieu — 
the  name  of  a  brave  man  for  a  brave  fish. 


60 


BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 


MICROPTERE    DOLOMFEU. 

(This  engraving  is  a  facsimile  of  that  in  Lacep&de's  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poissons, 
Vol.  IV,  pi.  3,  fig.  3.) 

Le  Microptere  dolomieu.* 


Je  desire  que  le  nom  de  ce  poisson,  qu'aucun  naturaliste  n'a  encore 
decrit,  rappelle  ma  tendre  amitie  et  ma  profonde  estime  pour  l'illus- 
tre  Dolomieu,  dont  la  victoire  vient  de  briser  les  fers.  En  ecrivant 
mon  Discours  sur  la  duree  des  especes,  j'ai  exprime  la  vive  douleur 
que  m'inspiroit  son  affreuse  captivite,  et  l'admiration  pour  sa  con- 
stance  heroique,  que  PEurope  meloit  a  ses  voeux  pour  lui.  Qu'il 
m'est  doux  de  ne  pas  terminer  l'immense  tableau  que  je  tache 
d'esquisser,  sans  avoir  seute  le  bonheur  de  le  serrer  de  nouveau  dans 
mes  bras ! 

Les  micropores  ressemblent  beaucoup  aux  scienes:  mais  la  peti- 
tesse  tres-remarquable  de  leur  seconde  nageoire  dorsale  les  en  s£pare ; 
et  c'est  cette  petitesse  que  designe  le  nom  generique  que  je  leur  ai 
donne.f 

La  collection  du  Museum  national  d'histoire  naturelle  renferme 
un  bel  individu  de  l'espece  que  nous  decrivons  dans  cette  article. 
Cette  espece,  qui  est  encore  la  seule  inscrite  dans  le  nouveau  genre 
des  micropteres,  que  nous  avons  cru  devoir  etablir,  a  les  deux 


*  Micropterus  dolomieu. 

f  Mixpos,  en  grec,  signifie  pet  it. 


SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY    OF   THE   BLACK   BASS.  61 

machoires,  le  palais  et  la  langue,  garnis  d'un  tres-grand  nombre  de 
rangees  de  dents  petite,  crochues  et  serrees;  la  langue  est  d'ailleurs 
tres-libre  dans  ses  inouvemens;  et  la  machoire  inferieure  plus  avan- 
cee  que  celle  d'en-haut.  La  membrane  branchiale  disparoit  entiere- 
ment  sous  l'opercule,  qui  presente  deux  pieces,  dont  la  premiere  est 
arrondie  dans  son  contour,  et  la  seconde  anguleuse.  Cet  opercule 
est  couvert  de  plusieurs  ecailles;  celles  de  dos  sont  assez  grandes  et 
arrondies.  La  hauteur  du  corps  proprement  dit  excede  de  beaucoup 
celle  de  Porigine  de  la  queue.  La  ligne  laterale  se  plie  d'abord  vers 
le  bas,  et  se  releve  ensuite  pour  suivre  la  courbure  du  dos.  Les 
nageoires  pectorales  et  celle  de  Panussont  tres-arrondies;  la  premiere 
du  dos  ne  commence  qu'a  une  assez  grande  distance  de  la  queue. 
Elle  cesse  d'etre  attachee  au  dos  de  Fanimal,  a  Fendroit  ou  elle  par- 
vient  au-dessus  de  l'anale ;  mais  elle  ce  prolonge  en  bande  pointue  et 
flottante  jusqu'au-dessus  de  la  seconde  nageoire  dorsale,  qui  est  tres- 
basse  et  tres-petite,  ainsi  que  nous  venons  de  le  dire,  et  que  Ton 
croiroit  au  premier  coup  d'ceil  entitlement  adipeuse.* — (Lacepede, 
Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  Vol.  IV,  325,  1802.) 


*  5  rayons  a  la  membrane  branchiale. 

16  rayons  a  chaque  pectorale. 

1  rayon  aiguillonne  et  5  rayons  articules  a  chaque  thoracine. 

17  rayons  a  la  nageoire  de  la  queue. 
— [D.  X,  7-4;  A.  II,  11.] 


62 


BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


Labre  salmoTde 


(This  engraving  is  a  facsimile  from  Lacgpede's  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poissons,  Vol. 
IV,  pi.  5,  fig.  2.) 


Le  Labre  salmo'ide.* 

On  devra  au  citoyen  Bosc  la  connoissance  du  labre  salmo'ide  et  du 
labre  iris,  qui  tous  les  deux  habitent  dans  les  eaux  de  la  Caroline. 

Le  salmo'ide  a  une  petite  elevation  sur  le  nez;  l'ouverture  de  la 
bouclie  fort  large ;  la  machoire  iuferieure  un  peu  plus  longue  que  la 
superieure:  l'une  et  Fautre  gamies  d'une  grande  quantite  de  dents 
tres-menues;  la  langue  charnue;  le  palais  herisse  de  petites  dents 
que  l'on  voit  disposees  sur  deux  rangees  et  sur  une  plaque  triangu- 
laire ;  le  gosier  situe  au-dessus  et  au-dessous  de  deux  autres  plaque 
egalement  herissees;  l'oeil  grand;  les  cotes  de  la  tete,  rev&tus  de 
petite  ecailles;  la  ligne  laterale  parallele  au  dos;  une  fossette 
propre  a  recevoir  la  par  tie  anterieure  de  la  dorsale ;  les  deux  tho- 
racines  reunies  par  une  membrane;  l'iris  jaune,  et  le  ventre  blanc. 

On  trouve  un  tres  grand  nombre  d'individus  de'cette  espece  dans 
toutes  les  rivieres  de  la  Caroline ;  on  leur  donne  le  nom  de  traut  ou 
truite.  On  les  prend  a  l'hamecon ;  on  les  attire  par  le  moyen  de 
morceaux  de  cypriii.  lis  parviennent  a  la  longueur  de  six  ou  sept 
decimetres;  leur  chair  est  ferme,  et  d'un  gout  tres-agreable. — [Br.  6; 
D.  IX,  13;  A.  13;  P.  13;  V.  G;  C.  18.]— (Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  des 
Poiss.  Vol.  IV,  716,  1802.) 


*  Labrus  salmoi'des. 
Perca  trutta.    Marmscrits  communiques  par  le  citoyen  Bosc. 


CHAPTER  II. 

NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY. 


Class  PISCES. 

Subclass  TELEOSTEI. 

Order  ACANTHOPTERI. 

Suborder  PERCAMORPHI. 

Family    CENTRARCHID^E. 

Subfamily  MICROPTERIN^E. 

Genus  MICROPTERUS  LacSpEde. 

SYNOXOMY. 

Mcropterus  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.   IV,   325,  1802. 
(Type  M.  dolomieu  Lac.) 

Labrus  species,  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  IV,  716,  1802. 
(L.  salmoides  Lac.)     (Not  of  Linnaeus,  the  type  Labrus 
m&tus  L.  belonging  to  the  family  of  Labridce,  the  com- 
mon wrasse-fish  of  the  coasts  of  Europe.) 
6  (65) 


66  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

Bodianus  species,  Kafinesque,  Am.  Mo.  Mag.  and  Crit.  Rev. 

II,  120,  1817.     (B.  aekigan  Raf.)     (Not  of  Bloch,  the 

type  of  Bodianus,  being  a   marine  fish   of  the  family 

of  Serranidce.) 
Calliurus  Rafinesque,  Jour,  de  Phys.  V,  88,  420,  June,  1819, 

and   Ich.    Ohi.  26,  1820.      (Not  of  Agassiz,  Girard, 

et  at.)     (Type  C.  punctulatus  Raf.) 
Lepomis  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  30,  1820.     (Not  Lepomis  Raf. 

Jour,  de  Phys.  II,  50,  1819,  the  original  type  Labrus 

auritus  L.  being  a  fresh  water  sunfish.) 
Aplites  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  30,  1820.     (As  subgenus  of  Le- 
pomis.    Type  L.  pallidus  Raf.) 
Nemocampsis  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Oh*  31,  1820.     (As  subgenus 

of  Lepomis.     Type  L.  flexuolaris  Raf.) 
Dioplites  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  32,  1820.      (As  subgenus  of 

Lepomis.     Type  L.  salmonea  Raf.) 
Aplesion  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  36,  1820.      (As  subgenus  of 

Etheostoma.     Type  E.  milium  Raf.) 
Cichla  species,  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.   Sci.  Phil.  II,  216,- 

1822.     (C.  fasciata  Le  S.)     (Not  of  Cuvier,  the  type 

Cichla  oeellaris  Bloch,  being  a  South  American  fresh 

water  fish  of  the  family  of  Ciehlidce.) 
Huro  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  II,  124, 

1828.     (Type  H.  nigricans  C.  &  V.) 
Grystes  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.   Nat.  des  Poiss.  Ill, 

54,  1829.     (Type  Labrus  salmoides  Lac.) 
Huro  Swainson,  Nat.   Hist,   and  Class.   Fishes,  etc.,  II,  200, 

1839. 
Grystes  Swainson,  Nat.  Hist,  and  Class.  Fishes,  etc.,  II,  202, 

1839. 
Centrarchus  species,  Kirtland,  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.  V,  28, 

1842.     (G.  faseiatus  K.)     (Not  of  Cuvier,  the   type 

Labrus  irideus  Lac,  being  a  fresh  water  sunfish.) 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.         67 

Centrarchus  species,  DeKay,  Fishes  N.  Y.  28,  1842.     (C  fas- 

ciatus  DeK.) 
Grystes  Agassiz,  Am.  Jour.   Sci.  and  Arts.    (2),  XVII,   297, 

1854. 
Dioplites  Girard,  U.  S.  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.  X,  Fishes,  4,  1858. 
Micropterus  Cope,  Pro.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  83,  1865.     (Name 

only.) 
Micropterus  Gill,  Ann.  Rep.  Dept.  Agric.  407,  1866. 
Micropterus  Gill,  Pro.   Am.   Asso.   Adv.    Sci.   XXII,  B.  55, 

1873. 
Dioplites  Vaillant  &  Bocourt  MSS.  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mexique, 

1874. 
Huro  Bleeker,  Syst.  Perc.  Revis.     <Ext.  des  Arc.  Neer.  XI, 

15,  1875.  * 

Micropterus  Bleeker,  Syst.  Perc.  Revis.     <Ext.  des  Arc.  Neer. 

XI,  15,  1875. 
Micropterus  Jordan,  Ann.   N.  Y.   Lye.   Nat.  Hist.  XI,  313, 

1877. 
Micropterus  Jordan,  Man.  Vert.  E.  U.  S.  229,  1876 ;  and  2d 

ed.  232,  1878. 
Micropterus  Jordan,  Pro.  U.  S.  Nat,  Mus.  II,  218,  1880. 
Micropterus  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci.  au  Mexique :  ined. 

Etymology:  ^isepds  (raiAros),  small;    nttpov  (pteron),  fin. 
Type  :  Micropterus  dolomieu  Lacepede. 

Head  well  developed,  its  length  varying  from  3  to  3 J 
times  in  length  of  body  ;  compressed  ;  rather  full  between 
the  eyes;  snout  rounded;  profile  straight;  lower  jaw 
prominent  and  projecting.  Scales  on  cheek,  opercle, 
subopercle,  and  interopercle,  but  none,  or  few,  on  the  pre- 
opercle.  Eye  moderately  large,  nearly  median,  but  rather 
nearer  the  snout  than  the  preopercle.  Nostrils  round  and 
normal. 


68  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

Mouth  large,  with  the  cleft  oblique ;  the  posterior  ex- 
tremity of  the  upper  jaw  extends  nearly  to,  or  beyond,  the 
posterior  border  of  the  eye.  Lips  but  slightly  developed. 
Preoperele  smooth  and  rounding  at  its  angle.  Opercle 
nearly  triangular,  emarginate  behind,  ending  in  two  flat 
points.  Subopercle  extends  beyond  the  opercle,  ending  in 
a  membranous  point.  Interopercle  rounded  below.  Gill 
openings  large.  Branchiostegals  six  on  each  side.  Scales 
on  all  of  the  opercular  apparatus,  except  on  the  preoper- 
cular  limb,  where  there  are  none,  or  very  few. 

Both  jaws  are  armed  with  pointed,  sharp,  card-like  teeth, 
curving  backward.  Patches  of  villiform  teeth  on  vomer, 
palatine  and  pharyngeal  bones.  Gill-rakers  long  and 
stout,  and  armed  with  teeth.  Tongue  moderate  and  free ; 
thick  behind,  narrow  in  front ;  its  surface  usually  smooth. 

Body  elongate,  ovate-fusiform, .  somewhat  compressed  ; 
deepest  just  behind  the  ventrals.  Scales  moderate ;  smaller 
on  breast  and  nape.  Lateral  line  following  curve  of  the 
back. 

Dorsal  fin  with  ten  spines ;  a  deep  notch  between  the 
spinous  and  soft  portions.  Anal  fin  with  three  spines. 
Caudal  emarginate. 

Pyloric  coeca  fourteen  or  more.  Air-bladder  simple, 
slightly  notched  behind. 

Generic  Characterizations. 

Micropterus  Lacepede,  1802. — "  Un  ou  plusiers  aiguillons, 
et  point  de  dentelure  aux  opercules;  un  barbillon,  ou  point  de 
barbillon  aux  machoires;  deux  nageoires  dorsales;  la  seconde 
tres-basse,  tres-courte,  et  comprenant  au  plus  cinq  rayons." — 
(Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  IV,  325, 1802.) 

Caeliurus  Rafinesque,  1819. — ''Corps  obloug  comprime. 
T6te  et  opercules  ecailleux,  preopercule  lisse,  a  3  sutures  care- 


NOMENCLATURE   AND    MORPHOLOGY.  69 

nees  re*unies  en  angle  supe>ieurement,  opercule  posterieur  a, 
6pine  sur  un  appendice  membraneux  anguleux.  Bouche  tres- 
fendue,  machoires  a  grandes  dents,  sans  levres,  l'inferieure  pro- 
longed. Une  nageoire  dorsale  deprimee  au  confluent  des  rayons 
epineux.  Nageoires  thoraciques  a  5  rayons  dont  1  epineux. 
Anus  au  mileu.  A  genre  differe  principalement  du  genre  Ethe- 
ostoma  par  la  forme  du  corps  de  la  bouche  et  l'opercule  ecailleux. 
C.  punctulatus.  Olivatre,  parseme  de  points  noirs  tres,  rap- 
proches,  ligne  laterale  peu  courbee;  queue  bilobee,  Jaune  a  la 
base  noire  au  milieu,  blanche  au  bout.  D.  -J-J,  A.  T3^,  P.  15, 
C.  24.  Noms  vulgaires  de  l'Ohio,  Black-perch  et  Fine-tail." — 
(Rafinesque,  Jour,  de  Physique,  V,  88,  420,  June,  1819.) 

Calliurus  Rafinesque,  1820. — "  Body  elongate,  compressed, 
scaly ;  fore  part  of  the  head  without  scales,  neck  and  gill-covers 
scaly  ;  mouth  large  with  strong  teeth  in  both  jaws,  and  without 
lips.  Gill-cover  double,  preopercule  divided  downwards  into 
three  curved  and  carinated  sutures,  without  serrature ;  opercule 
with  an  acute  and  membranaceous  appendage,  before  which 
stands  a  flat  spine.  One  dorsal  fin,  spiny  anteriorly,  depressed 
in  the  middle.  Anal  fin  with  spiny  rays,  thoracic  with  none, 
and  only  five  soft  rays.     Vent  nearly  medial. 

The  generic  name  means  fine-tail.  It  differs  principally  from 
the  genus  Holocentrus,  by  the  head,  scaly  gill-cover  and  singular 
preopercule:  genus  12  of  my  70  new  genera  of  American  ani- 
mals."—(Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  26,  1820.) 

Lepomis  Rafinesque,  1820. — "This  genus  differs  from  Holo- 
centrus by  having  the  opercule  scaly,  from  Calliurus  by  the 
opercule  only  being  such,  while  the  preopercule  is  simple  and 
united  above  with  a  square  suture  over  the  head,  besides  the 
thoracic  fins  with  6  rays.  Perhaps  the  Calliurus  ought  only  to 
be  a  subgenus  of  this.  From  the  G.  Icthelis  it  differs  by  the 
large  mouth  and  spines  on  the  opercule. 

The  name  means  scaly  gills.  The  species  are  numerous 
throughout  the  United  States.  They  are  permanent ;  but  ram- 
blers in   the  Ohio  and  tributary  streams.     They  are  fishes  of 


70  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

prey,  and  easily  caught  with  the  hook.  I  shall  divide  them 
into  two  subgenera.  I  had  wrongly  blended  this  genus  and  the 
Ictheli  under  the  name  Lepomis.  13.  G.  of  my  Prodr.  N.  G." 
—(Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  30,  1820.) 

Aplites  Rafinesque,  1820. — "  Only  one  flat  spine  on  the 
opercule  decurrent  in  a  small  medial  opercule :  first  ray  of  the 
thoracic  fins,  soft  or  hardly  spiny.  Meaning,  single  weapon." 
—(Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  30,  1820.) 

Nemocampsis  Rafinesque,  1820. — "This  fish  [Lepomis  flexuo- 
laris]  might  perhaps  form  another  subgenus,  By  the  large  month, 
head  without  upper  sutures,  spine  hardly  decurrent,  nearly 
equal  jaws,  gill-covers,  lateral  line,  etc.  Its  tail  and  pre- 
opecule  are  somewhat  like  Galliums.  It  might  be  called  Ne- 
mocampsis,  meaning  flexuose  line."— (Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  31, 
1820.) 

Dioplites  Rafinesque,  1820. — "Opercule  with  two  spines 
above.  First  ray  of  the  thoracic  fins  spiny.  Lateral  line 
curved  as  the  back.  Meaning  two  weapons." — (Rafinesque, 
Ich.  Ohi.  32,  1820.) 

Etheostoma  Rafinesque,  1820. — "  Body  nearly  cylindrical 
and  scaly.  Mouth  variable  with  small  teeth.  Gill  cover 
double  or  triple  unserrate,  with  a  spine  on  the  opercule  and 
without  scales.  Six  branchial  rays.  Thoracic  fins  with  six 
rays,  -one  of  which  is  spiny.  No  appendage.  One  dorsal  fin 
more  or  less  divided  in  two  parts,  the  anterior  one  with  entirely 
spiny  rays.     Vent  medial  or  rather  anterior. 

A  singular  new  genus,  of  which  I  have  already  detected  five 
species,  so  different  from  each  other  that  they  might  form  as 
many  subgenera  Yet  they  agree  in  the  above  characters,  and 
■differ  from  the  genus  Sciena  by  the  shape  of  the  body  and 
mouth,  and  the  divided  dorsal  fin.  The  name  means  different 
mouths.  I  divide  it  into  two  subgenera.  They  are  all  very 
small  fishes,  hardly  noticed,  and  only  employed  for  bait;  yet 
they   are   good   to  eat,  fried,   and  may  often   be   taken   with 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        71 

baskets  at  the  falls  and  mill  races.  They  feed  on  worms  and 
spawn." — (Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  35,  1820.) 

Aplesion  Rafinesque,  1820. — (As  subgenus  of  Etheostoma.) 
"Dorsal  fin  single,  split  in  the  middle.  Meaning  nearly 
simple."— (Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohi.  36,  1820.) 

Huro  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  1828. — "Nous  croyons  pou- 
voir  donner  ce  nom  a  un  poisson  que  M.  Richardson  a  pris  re- 
cemment  dans  le  lac  Huron,  et  qui  aurait  tous  les  caracteres  de 
la  perche,  s'il  ne  manquait  de  dentelures  aux  os  de  la  t£te  et  de 
l'epaule,  et  specialement  au  preopercule,  qui  n'en  manque 
presque  dans  aucune  espece  de  cette  famille. 

"  Less  Anglais  des  environs  de  ce  lac  l'appellent  black-bass  ou 
perche  noire,  parce  qu'il  ressemble  en  effet  assez  pour  le  port  et 
pour  les  teintes  a  un  autre  poisson  qui  porte  le  meme  nom  aux 
Etats-Unis,  et  que  nous  decrirons  plus  loin  dans  notre  genre 
centropriste,  auquel  il  appartient." — (Cuvier  and  Valen- 
ciennes, Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  II,  124,  1828.) 

Grystes  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  1829. — "  Comme  il  y  a 
des  poissons  qui,  avec  tous  les  caracteres  des  serrans,  manquent 
de  dentelures  au  preopercule,  il  y  en  a  aussi  qui  joignent  cette 
integrity  de  preopercule  a  tous  les  caracteres  des  centropristes. 
lis  sont  a  ces  derniers  ce  que  les  bodians  de  Bloch  etaient  a  ses 
holocentres ;  et  si  nous  ne  reunissons  pas  les  Grystes  et  les  cen- 
tropristes en  un  seul  genre,  comme  nous  avons  reuni  les  bftdians 
et  les  holocentres  dans  notre  genre  serran,  c'est  que  nous  ne 
trouvons  pas  entre  eux  les  memes  passages  insensibles." — 
(Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  Hist  Nat.  des  Poiss.  Ill,  54, 
1829.) 

Huro  Swainson,  1839. — "  Preoperculum  entire;  body  fusi- 
form, but  broad  in  the  middle  ;  head  large  ;  mouth  oblique,  sub- 
vertical,  large;  lower  jaw  longest;  chin  projecting;  dorsal  fin, 
distinct,  the  first  smallest;  caudal  emarginate." — (Swainson, 
Nat.  Hist,  and  Class.  FisJies,  II,  200,  1839.) 

Grystes  Swainson,  1839. — "Dorsal  fin  almost  divided  into 


72  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

two,  the  anterior  or  spinous  division  shortest,  the  posterior 
lobed ;  preoperculum  smooth  ;  mouth  large,  sub-vertical ;  lower 
jaw  largest ;  caudal  emarginate ;  sides  of  the  head  scaled  ;  pec- 
toral and  ventrals  small ;  anal  fin  shorter  than  the  hind  part  of 
the  dorsal.  Representing  Huro  in  the  circle  of  Percinse." — 
(Swainson,  Nat.  Hist,  and  Class.  Fishes,  II,  202,  1839.) 

Grystes  Agassiz,  1854. — "  I  have  already  shown  in  my 
'  Lake  Superior '  that  the  genera  Grystes  and  Huro  of  Cuvier 
do  not  differ  essentially  one  from  the  other,  and  must  therefore 
be  united  into  one  natural  group ;  moreover,  when  the  fishes  of 
Kentucky  shall  be  better  known,  it  may  become  necessary  to 
substitute  for  either  of  them  the  name  of  Lepomis,  introduced  in 
ichthyology  by  Rafinesque,  as  early  as  the  year  1820,  for  the 
western  species  of  this  genus.  If  I  hesitate  to  make  the  change 
now,  it  is  simply  because  I  have  not  the  means  of  deciding 
upon  the  value  of  his  many  species.  The  species  of  this  group 
are  indeed  very  difficult  to  characterize.  They  differ  chiefly  in 
the  relative  size  of  their  scales,  the  presence  or  absence  of  teeth 
upon  the  tongue,  though  Cuvier  denies  the  presence  of  teeth  on 
the  tongue  of  any  of  them,  etc.  There  are,  besides,  marked 
differences  between  the  young  and  the  adults.  These  circum- 
stances render  it  impossible  to  characterize  any  one  species 
without  comparative  descriptions  and  figures." — (Agassiz,  Am. 
Jour.'Sci.  and  Arts,  (2),  XVII,  297,  1854.) 

Grystes  Holbrook,  1855.—"  Dorsal  fin  single,  though  deeply 
notched;  intermaxillary,  maxillary,  vomerine  and  palatine 
teeth  small  and  thickly  set,  or  card-like ;  preopercle.  not  ser- 
rated ;  branchiostegal  rays,  seven."  * — (Holbrook,  Ichtky.  Sou. 
Car.  25,  1855.) 

Dioplites  Girard,  1858.— "  Body  elongated,  sub-fusiform  in 
profile,  compressed.  Head  well  developed.  Preopercle  smooth 
and  entire.     Mouth  large ;  lower  jaw  longest.     Velvet-like  teeth 


*  "  Sometimes  there  are  only  six  rays." — Holbrook. 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.         73 

on  the  jaws,  front  of  vomer,  and  palatine  bones.  Tongue 
smooth.  Cheeks  and  opercular  apparatus  scaly.  Branchial 
apertures  continuous  under  the  throat.  Two  dorsal  fins  contig- 
uous upon  their  base.  Three  small  anal  spines.  Insertion  of 
ventrals  on  a  line  immediately  behind  the  base  of  pectorals. 
Caudal  fin  posteriorly  sub-cresentic.  Scales  well  developed  and 
posteriorly  ciliated." — (Girard,  U.  S.  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.  X, 
Fishes,  4,  1858.) 

Grystes  Giinther,  1859. — "  Six  or  seven  branchiostegals. 
All  the  teeth  villiform  without  canines ;  teeth  on  the  palatine 
bones ;  tongue  smooth.  One  dorsal,  with  ten  spines,  the  anal 
fin  with  three.  Operculum  with  two  points,  prseoperculum  with 
a  single  smooth-edged  ridge.  Scales  moderate.  The  number 
of  the  pyloric  appendages  increased.  Air-bladder  simple, 
slightly  notched  behind." — (Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes  Brit.  Mus.  I, 
252,  1859.) 

Huro  Giinther,  1859. — "  Six  branchiostegals.  All  the  teeth 
villiform,  without  canines;  palatine  bones  ?;  tongue  ?  Two 
dorsals,  the  first  with  six,  the  anal  fin  with  three  spines.  No 
denticulations  on  the  bones  of  the  head;  operculum  with  two 
flat  obtuse  points.  Scales  moderate."— (Gunther,  Cat.  FisJws 
Brit.  Mus.  I,  252,  1859.) 

Micropterus  Gill,  1873.—"  Body  ovate-fusiform,  compressed, 
deepest  behind  the  ventrals,  with  the  caudal  peduncle  elongated, 
scarcely  contracted  towards  the  base  of  the  fin. 

"Scales  small  or  moderate;  quadrate,  rather  higher  than 
long,  with  the  exposed  portion  densely  muricated,  rounded 
behind  and  about  twice  as  high  as  long ;  with  the  fan  with  few 
(4-9)  folds ;  extending  to  the  nape  and  throat. 

"Lateral  line  regularly  parallel  with  the  back,  in  scales 
nearly  like  but  smaller  than  the  adjoining  ones. 

"Head  compressed  and  oblong  conic,  with  the  lower  jaw 
prominent  and  the  profile  rectilinear ;  with  scales  (more  or  less 
smaller  than  those  of  the  trunk)  on  the  cheeks,  operculum,  sub- 
7 


74  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

operculum  and  interoperculum  (  (1)  none  or  (2)  few  on  the  pre- 
operculum);  operculum  ending  in  a  flattened  point  (spine)  and 
with  the  border  above  it  emarginated;  suboperculum  with  a 
pointed  membrane  extending  beyond  (behind  and  above)  the 
opercular  spine;  preoperculum  entire.  Eyes  moderate,  about 
equidistant  from  the  snout  and  preoperculum;  notrils  normal; 
anterior  with  a  posterior  lid ;  posterior  patulous. 

"  Mouth,  with  the  cleft  moderately  oblique,  large  (the  supra- 
maxillary  (1)  nearly  to  or  (2)  beyond  the  vertical  of  the  pos- 
terior border  of  the  eye).  Supramaxillary  with  the  accessory 
ossicle  well  developed.  Lips :  upper,  little  developed ;  lower, 
moderate  on  the  sides,  but  separated  by  a  very  wide  isthmus. 

"  Tongue  moderate  and  free. 

"  Teeth  on  the  jaws  in  a  broad  band,  acute,  curved  back- 
wards, and  increasing  in  size  towards  inner  rows ;  on  the  vomer, 
palatines  and  pterygoids,  villiform. 

"  Branchiostegal  rays  six  (exceptionally  seven)  on  each  side. 

' 'Dorsal  with  its  origin  behind  the  axil  of  the  ventral;  (1) 
its  spinous  portion  longer  but  much  lower  than  the  soft  portion, 
with  ten  spines  more  or  less  graduated  before  as  well  as  behind, 
and  the  ninth  much  shorter  than  the  tenth  ;  (2)  the  soft  portion 
well  developed. 

"Anal  with  its  base  shorter  than  the  soft  portion  of  the 
dorsal,  nearly  coterminal  with  it,  with  three  spines,  of  which  the 
third  is  much  the  longest. 

"  Caudal  emarginated  and  with  obtuse  lobes. 

11  Pectorals  and  ventrals  normal. 

'  'This  enumeration  of  the  characters  common  to  the  known 
forms  of  the  genus  has  been  drawn  up  with  a  view  to  exhibit 
the  features  differentiating  the  genus  from  the  other  representa- 
tives of  the  family  Pomotidse.  The  difference  indicated  by  the 
general  expression  is  coordinated  with  the  greater  distance  of 
the  eye  from  the  preoperculum,  the  armature  of  the  operculum, 
the  peculiar  form  of  the  dorsal  and  the  relatively  small  size  of 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        75 

the  anal  fin.  The  elucidation  of  the  anatomical  characters  of 
the  genus  and  comparison  thereof  with  those  of  other  genera 
are  reserved  for  a  future  occasion  when  the  distinctive  features 
can  be  illustrated." — (Gill,  Proc.  Am.  Asso.  Adv.  Sci.  XXII, 
B.  55,  1873.) 

Phalanx  Grysteini  (—Micropterince  Gill.)  Bleeker,  1875. — 
"  Percae formes  corpore  oblongo  vel  subelongato,  capite  superne 
squamato  vel  laevi ;  dentibus  maxillis ;  vomerinis  et  pakitinis 
parvis ;  praeoperculo  edentulo  inermi ;  squamis  strunco  parvis 
vel  mediocribus  sessilibus ;  anali  spini  3."  (Bleeker,  Systema 
Percarum  Revisum  <^Extrait  des  Archives  Neerlandaises,  XI,  15„ 
1875.) 

Huro  Bleeker,  1875. — "  Corpus  oblongum.  Caput  vertice, 
regione  temporali,  genis  ossibusque  opercularibus  tantum  squama- 
tum.  Squamae  trunco  cycloideae  ?  65  circ.  in  serie  longitudinali. 
Pinnae  dorsales  non  continuae,  anterior  radiosa  brevior  spinis  6." — 
(Bleeker,  Syst.  Perc.  Bevis.  <^Ext.  des  Archiv.  Neerland.  XI, 
15,  1875.) 

Micropterus  Bleeker,  1875. — "  Corpus  oblongum.  Caput 
genis  ossibusque  opercularibus  tantum  squamatum.  Squamae 
trunco  ctenoideae  90  circ.  in  serie  longitudinali.  Pinna  dorsalis 
parte  spinosa  et  parte  radiosa  continuis  subaequilongis,  spinis  9 
vel  10."  —  (Bleeker,  Syst.  Perc.  Bevis.  <^Ext.  des  Archiv. 
Neerland.  XI,  15,  1875.) 

Micropterus  Jordan,  1878. —  "Body  elongate,  not  greatly 
compressed ;  spines  little  developed,  those  of  the  anal  fin,  three 
in  number,  small  and  weak ;  those  of  the  dorsal,  ten,  low,  the 
eighth  and  ninth  quite  short,  so  that  there  is  a  deep  notch  be- 
tween the  spinous  and  soft  parts  of  the  dorsal,  almost  breaking 
the  continuity  of  the  fin ;  caudal  emarginate  ;  operculum  emar- 
ginate  behind,  ending  in  two  flat  points ;  mouth  very  large,  the 
lower  jaw  longest;  palatine  teeth  well  developed;  tongue  and 
pterygoids  toothless ;  gill-rakers  long  and  stout,  armed  with 
teeth;  supplemental  maxillary  bone  well  developed." — (Jordan, 
Man.  Vert.  E.  U.  S.,  2d  ed.,  233,  1878.) 


76  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

Micropterus  Vaillant  &  Bocourt :  ined. 

"Percoides  a  ventrales  thoraciques;  six  ou  sept  rayons, 
branchiosteges,  une  seule  dorsale,  occupant  la  plus  grande  partie 
de  la  longueur  du  dos,  avec  la  portion  epineuse  munie  normale- 
ment  de  dix  Opines ;  anales  presentant  trois  epines  croisant  en 
longeur  de  la  premiere  a  la  troisieme  et  a  peu  pres  d'egal  force ; 
toutes  les  dents  en  velours;  preopercule  a  bord  lisse,  angle 
operculaire  en  pointe  arrondie  ne  formant  pas  une  veritable 
epine.  Ecailles  mediocrement  nombreuses,  cteno'ides,  polys- 
tiques. 

*'  Ce  genre,  ainsi  delimite,  ne  comprend  qu'un  petit  nombre 
d'especes  propres  aux  cours  d'eau  de  l'Amerique  septentrionale. 

"Les  ecailles  sont  cteno'ides,  mais  en  general  les  spinules  sont 
ou  rudimentaires  ou  incompletement  developpes ;  les  variations, 
que  nous  avons  pu  saisir,  sont  les  suivantes.  Tantot  les  spinu- 
les ne  sont  nettement  calcifiees  que  sur  une  zone  plus  ou  moins 
etroite,  bordant  la  portion  libre  de  l'ecaille  et  le  reste  de  l'aire 
Spinigere  n'est  qu'  indistinctement  hispide.  Cette  zone  peut  se 
reduire  sur  ses  parties  laterales  et  n'occuper  que  l'extremite 
de  l'ecaille.  D'autre  fois  le  bord  libre  est  sans  spinules  et  celle 
ci  ne  ce  rencontrent  que  vers  le  foyer  dans  un  espace  triangu- 
laire  formant  la  partie  centripete  d'un  secteur;  c'est  sur  le 
Micropterus  variabilis,  Le  Sueur,  que  nous  avons  particulierement 
observe  cette  disposition.  Enfin,  les  spinules  peuvent  etre  a 
peine  perceptibles  et  il  faut  y  regarder  de  bien  pr&s  pour  ne  pas 
croire  les  ecailles  de  la  ligne  laterale  sont  toujours  depourvues 
de  spinules,  ieur  canal  est  a  deux  ouvertures  comme  chez  les 
centropomes. 

Ces  variations,  auxquelles  on  serait  tente  d'attribuer  une 
certaine  valeur  dans  la  distinction  des  especes,  ne  nous  ont  mal- 
heureusement  pas  presenti  une  assez  grande  Constance  pour 
pouvoir  etre  mises  un  usage,  les  observations  devraient  porter 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        77 

sur  un  plus  grand  nombre  de  sujets  que  ceux  que  nous  avons 
eus  a  notre  disposition. 

La  denomination  de  Micropterus  parait  devoir  &tre  adoptee 
preferablement  a  cell  de  Grystes,  etablie  par  Cuvier  dans  son 
Begne  animal  ou  a  celle  de  Dioplites  Rafinesque,  reprise  par 
M.  Girard.  C'est  sans  doute  une  application  en  quelque  sorte 
exagiree  du  droit  de  priorite,  car  les  caracteres  du  genre  sont 
tres-imparfaitement  donnes  par  Lacepede  et  la  denomination 
merae  est  fondee  sur  une  anomalie  evidente,  cependant,  l'individu 
type  etant  parfaitment  connu,  il  peut  y  avoir  a  vantage  a  re- 
prendre  ce  nom,  comme  l'ont  dega  fait  plusieurs  auteurs  con- 
temporains. 

S'il  est  ainsi  possible  de  li miter  le  genre,  il  n'est  pas  aussi  aise 
d'en  distinguer  les  differentes  especes,  lesquelles,  aujourd'hui 
comme  a  l'epoque  ou  l'ecrivit  L.  Agassiz,  sont  excessivement 
difficiles  a  caracteriser.  Au  premier  abord,  on  reconnait  sans 
peine  plusieurs  types,  en  ayant  egardaux  proportions  du  corps, 
au  nombre  des  ecailles  et  a  diverses  autrcs  particularites,  mais 
si  on  examine  un  certain  nombre  d'individus,  les  differences  s'at- 
tenuent  par  des  transitions  graduelles. 

D'une  maniere  generale,  le  Micropterus  variabilis  Le  Sueur, 
a  le  corps  le  plus  eleve"  et  le  Micropterus  salmoides  Lacep.,  le 
plus  bas,  les  Micropterus  nueeensis  Grd.,  et  Micropterus  dolomieu 
Lacep.,  etant  intermediaires  sous  ce  rapport.  L'epaisseur  donne 
des  differences  peu  sensibles ;  on  sait  d'ailleurs  que  ces  varia- 
tions, pouvant  dependre  de  la  sajson  et  du  sexe,  leur  importance 
est  moindre  dans  des  especes  aussi  voisines.  La  longueur  de  la 
tete  rapportee  a  la  longueur  totale  donne  les  nombres  extremes 
29  et  25,  peu  differents  Tun  de  l'autre  et  qui  de  plus  se  ren- 
contrent  tous  deux  sur  une  des  especes,  la  mieux  caracterisee 
peut-etre,  le  Micropterus  nueeensis  Grd.,  Le  museau  et  la 
largeur  de  l'espece  interorbitaire  varient  dans  une  assez  grande 
mesure,  35  et  26  pour  l'un,  29  et  20  pour  l'autre;  mais  il  y  a 


78  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

melange  entre  les  differentes  especes,  que  nous  croyons  pouvoir 
distinguer,  en  sorte  qu'il  est  assez  difficile  d'en  faire  emploi. 

L'ecart  considerable  que  presente  la  formula  de  la  ligne  later- 
ale  est  un  des  fait  les  plus  importants,  corame  indiquant  la  dis- 
tinction necessaire  de  plusieurs  types,  puisque  cette  formule  peut 
varier  de  60  a,  86.  II  existe,  il  est  vrai,  un  grand  nombre 
d'intermediaires,  dont  le  tableau  peut  faire  juger  au  premier 
coup  d'ceil.  La  formule  de  la  ligne  transversale  suit  une  marche 
analogue,  puisqu'au  dessus  de  ligne  laterale  les  chiffres  varient 
de  7  a  11  et  au-dessous,  de  15  a  30.  II  est  aussi  important  de 
remarquer  que  la  progression  dans  les  deux  formules  est  la 
meme,  c'est-a-dire  que  les  ecailles  sont  beaucoup  plus  petites 
pour  les  especes  citees  les  premieres  dans  le  tableau  que  pour  les 
suivantes. 

Quant  aux  formules  des  nageoires,  la  seule  exception  con- 
statee  pour  les  epines  de  la  dorsale  sur  le  premier  exemplaire  doit 
etreconsideree  comme  une  anomalie.  Les  rayons  mous  ne  nous 
donnent  que  des  differences  peu  significatives. 

Enfin  les  dent  linguales,  par  leur  presence  ou  leur  absence, 
four  nissent  un  caractere  specifique  de  premier  ordre,  d'autant, 
comme  le  montre  le  tableau,  qu'il  a  pu  etre  abserve  sur  des  in- 
dividus  de  tailles  tres-variees  et  paraitrait  par  consequent  ne 
pas  subir  de  modifications  avec  l'age. 

En  ayant  6gard  a  la  combinaison  de  ces  caract&res  on  peut, 
croyons-nous,  d'apres  les  exemplaires  de  la  collection  de  museum, 
distinguer  quatre  especes,  que  ne  sont  toutefois  proposees  qua 
titre  provisoire,  vu  l'insumsance  des  materiaux  dont  nous  avons 
pu  disposer.  Le  tableau  dichotomique  suivant  donnera  une  idee 
de  leur  comprehension  :  " 

f     7&8     )  jjgne  laterale;  (   Des  dents  linguales  -  -  M.  nueeensis  Grd. 
Ligne    transversale    j    ,5  k  20  >  60  k  70  ecailles.  (  Pas  de  dents  linguales  -  M.  ealmoides  Lacep. 

h  75  Ecailles M.  variabilis  Le  S. 

h,  86  ecailles -  M.  doloviieu  Lacep. 

(Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  Mission  Scientifique  au  Mexique,  IV, 
Zool.:  ined.) 


ayant  ■( 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY 


81 


CHRONOLOGICAL  CATALOGUE 

Of  the  Nominal  Species  of  Micropterus  as  noticed  by  various  Authors,  with 
Identifications. 


NOMINAL   SPECIES. 


Micropterus  dolomieu  LacepSde 

Labrus  salmoides  Lacepede 

Bodianus  achigan  Rafinesque 

Calliurus  punctulatus  Rafinesque 

Lepomis  pallida  Rafinesque 

Lepomis  trifasciata  Rafinesque 

Lepomis  flexuolaris  Rafinesque 

Lepomis  salmonea  Rafinesque 

Lepomis  notata  Rafinesque 

Etheostoma  calliura  Rafinesque 

Cichla  variabilis  Le  Sueur,  MSS 

Cichla  fasciata  Le  Sueur 

Cichla  ohiensis  Le  Sueur 

Cichla  minima  Le  Sueur 

Cichla  floridana  Le  Sueur 

Huro  nigricans  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes 

Grystes  salmoides  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes 

Centrarchus  obscurus  DeKay  

Centrarchus  fasciatus  Kirtland 

Grystes  nigricans  Agassiz 

Grytes  fasciatus  Agassiz 

Grystes  nobilis  Agassiz 

Grystes  nuecensis  Baird  &  Girard 

Grystes  salmoides  Holbrook 

Grystes  megastoma  Garlick 

Grystes  nigricans  Garlick 

Dioplites  nuecensis  Girard . 

Grystes  salmonoides  Gunther 

Grystes  nigricans  Herbert 

Lepomis  achigan  Gill 

Micropterus  nigricans  Cope 


1802 
1802 
1817 
1819 
1820 
1820 
1820 
1820 
1820 
1820 
1822 
1822 
1822 
1822 
1822 
1828 
1829 
1842 
1842 
1850 
1850 
1854 
1854 
1855 
1857 
1857 
1858 
1859 


IDENTIFICATIONS. 


Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 
Micropterus 


1859|Micropterus 
I860.  Micropterus 
1865 [Micropterus  sal 


dolomieu. 
salmoides. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
salmoides. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
dolomieu. 
salmoides. 
salmoides. 
dolomieu? 
dolomieu. 
dolomie  u. 
salmoides. 
dolomieu. 
salmoides. 
salmoides. 
salmoides. 
salmoides. 
dolomieu. 
salmoides. 
dolomieu. 
salmoides. 
dolomieu. 
moides. 


82 


BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 


NOMINAL   SPECIES. 


Micropterus  fasciatus  Cope 

Micropterus  achigan  Gill 

Micropterus  salmoides  Gill 

Dioplites  treculii  Vaillant  &  Bocourt 

Dioplites  nuecensis Vaillant  &  Bocourt 

Dioplites  variabilis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt 

Dioplites  salmoides  Vaillant  &  Bocourt 

Micropterus  floridanus  Goode 

Micropterus  pallidus  Gill  &  Jordan 

Micropterus  sahnoides  var.  salmoides  Jordan. 
Micropterus  salmoides  var.  achigan  Jordan. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Vaillant  &  Bocourt... 
Micropterus  nuecensis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt... 
Micropterus  variabilis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt.. 
Micropterus  dolomieu  Vaillant  &  Bocourt... 


IDENTIFICATIONS. 


1865  Micropterus  dolomieu. 

1866  Micropterus  dolomieu. 

1873  Micropterus  dolomieu. 

1874  Micropterus  salmoides. 
1874  Micropterus  salmoides. 


1874 
1874 
1876 
1877 
1878 
1878 
ined. 
ined. 
ined- 
ined. 


M.  dolo.  var.  achigan. 
Micropterus  salmoides. 
Micropterus  salmoides. 
Micropterus  salmoides. 
M.  dolomieu  var.  dolo. 
M.  dolo.  var.  achigan. 
Micropterus  salmoides. 
Micropterus  salmoides. 
M.  dolo.  var.  achigan. 
M.  dolomieu  var.  dolo. 


SYNOPSIS   OF   SPECIES   OF   MICROPTERUS. 

Common  Characters. — Body  elongated,  ovate-fusiform;  slightly 
0  compressed ;  arched  and  thick  along  the  back,  thinner 

and  straight  along  the  belly ;  lower  jaw  longest ;  both 
jaws  armed  with  broad  bands  of  small,  pointed,  re- 
curved, card-like  teeth  of  uniform  size ;  villiform  teeth 
on  vomer,  palatine  and  pharyngeal  bones;  teeth  on 
gill-rakers;  spinous  and  soft  portions  of  dorsal  fin 
partly  divided  by  a  notch;  anal  fin  with  three  spines; 
caudal  fin  emarginate;  opercule  emarginate  behind, 
ending  .  in  two  flat  points ;  supplemental  maxillary 
bone  well  developed. 

*  Mouth  large ;  angle  of  mouth  anterior  to  the  posterior  border 
of  the  eye. 

f  Third  dorsal  spine  only  one-half  higher  than  the  first. 

a.  Notch  between  spinous  and  soft  rays  of  dorsal  comparatively 
shallow. 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        83 

b.  Scales  small  on  body,  much  smaller  on  breast  and  back  of 

neck,  and  quite  small  on  cheeks;  eleven  rows  of  scales 
between  lateral  line  and  dorsal  fin ;  70  to  80  scales 
along  the  lateral  line  (exclusive  of  small  pre-caudal 
scales). 

c.  No  scales  on  preopercular  limb. 

d.  Anal  fin  almost  without  scales.   (?) 

e.  Head  moderate  in  size ;  slightly  convex  between  the  orbits. 

/.  Color,  slaty  or  dusky  green  on  back  and  sides,  shading  to 
white  on  belly  and  lower  jaw;  young  brighter  green, 
and  more  or  less  spotted  and  marked  with  vertical 
bars;  tail  in  young  (in  some  localities),  yellow  at 
base,  middle  black,  tip  white ;  opercle  with  several 
oblique  olivaceous  streaks;    D.  X,   13;    A.   Ill,  11. 

DOLOMIEU. 

**  Mouth  very  large ;  angle  of  mouth  extends  beyond  the  pos- 
terior border  of  the  eye. 

ft  Third  dorsal  spine  twice  (at  least)  as  high  as  the  first. 

aa.  Dorsal  notch  deep,  almost  dividing  the  fin  into  two. 

bb.  Scales  moderate;  not  much  smaller  on  cheeks,  nape  or 
breast ;  eight  rows  of  scales  between  lateral  line  and 
dorsal  fin ;  65  to  70  scales  along  lateral  line  (exclusive 
of  small  pre-caudal  scales). 

cc.  A  single  row  of  scales  on  preopercular  limb. 

dd.  Anal  fin  somewhat  scaly.   (?) 

ee.  Head  large ;  flat  between  the  orbits. 

ff.  Color,  olive  green,  darker  on  back  and  shading  to  white  on 
belly  and  under  side  of  lower  jaw ;  more  or  less  spotted 
when  young ;  not  barred,  though  sometimes  an  irreg- 
ular dark  lateral  band;  three  oblique  streaks  on 
cheeks ;  these  markings  grow  obscure  with  age  ;  D.  X, 
12;  A.  Ill,  10 SALMOIDES. 


84  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

MICROPTERUS  DOLOMIEU  Lacepede. 
THE  SMALL-MOUTHED  BLACK  BASS. 

SYNONOMY. 

1802 — Micropteras   dolomieu  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss., 

IV,  325. 

Micropterus  dolomieu  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci. 
ail  Mex.,  Zool.:  ined. 
1817 — Bodianus  achigan  Rafinesque,  Am.  Mo.  Mag.  and  Crit. 
Rev.  II,  120. 
Lepomis  achigan  Gill,  Pro.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  20,  1860. 
Micropterus  achigan  Gill,  Rept.  Com.  Agri.  407,  1866. 
Micropterus  achigan  Goode  &  Bean,  Bull.  Essex  Inst. 
XI,  19,  1879.'* 
1820 — Calliurus  punctidatus  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohiensis,  26. 
1820 — Lepomis  trifasciata  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohiensis,  31. 
1820— Lepomis  flexuolar is  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohiensis,  31. 
1820 — Lepomis  salmonea  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohiensis,  32. 
1820 — Lepomis  notata  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohiensis,  32. 
1820 — Etheostoma  calliura  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohiensis,  36. 
1822 — Cichla  variabilis  Le    Sueur,  MSS.,   in  Museum  d'Hist. 
Nat.  Paris. 
Dioplites  variabilis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  MSS.   Miss. 

Sci.  au  Mexique,  1874. 
Micropterus  variabilis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci. 
au  Mexique:  ined. 
1822 — Cichla fasciataljB  Sueur,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  II,  216. 
Cichla  fasciata  Kirtland,  Zoology  Ohio  (2d  An.  Rept. 

Geol.  Surv.  Ohio),  191,  1838. 
Centrarchus  fasciatus  Kirtland,  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist. 

V,  28,  1842. 


*  Used  on  the  supposition  that  the  name  "  Labre  scdmoide"  as  used  by 
Lacepede  was  vernacular  (French),  unaccompanied  by  a  classical  form, 
and  therefore  not  available. 


NOMENCLATURE    AND    MORPHOLOGY.  85 

Centrarchus  fasciatus  DeKay,  Fishes  N.  Y.  28,  1842. 
Centrarchus  fasciatus  Storer,  Syn.  Fishes  N.  A.  38,  1846. 
Grystes  fasciatus  Agassiz,  Lake  Superior,  295,  1850. 
Centrarchus  fasciatus  Thompson,  Hist.   Vt.   131,  1853. 
Grystes  fasciatus  Eoff,  Smithsonian  Report,  289,  1854. 
Grystes  fasciatus  Gill,  Smithsonian  Report,  257,  1856. 
Centrarchus  fasciatus  Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes  Brit.  Mus.  I, 

258,  1859. 
Grystes  fasciatus  Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes  Brit.  Mus.  I.  252, 

1859.     (Name  only.) 
Centrarchus  fasciatus   Roosevelt,  Game  Fish  of  North, 

217,  1862. 
Micropterus  fasciatus  Cope,  Pro.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  83, 

1865.     (Name  only.) 
Grystes  fasciatus  Putnam,  Storer's  Fish  Mass.  278,  1867. 
Micropterus  fasciatus  Cope,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  VI, 

216,  1868. 
Micropterus  fasciatus  Cope,  Pro.  Am.  Phil.  Soc.  450, 1870: 
1822 — Cichla  ohiensis  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  II, 

218. 
Cichla  ohiensis  Kirtland,  Rept.   Zool.  Ohio :    2d  Geol. 

Rept.  Ohio,  191,  1838. 
1822 — Cichla  minima  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  11,220. 
Cichla  minima  Kirtland,  Rept.   Zool.  Ohio:  2d  Geol. 

Rept.  Ohio,  191,  1838. 
1829 — t Grystes  salmoides  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat. 

des  Poiss.  Ill,  54. 
Grystes  salmoides  Jardine,   Nat.  Lib.  I,  Perches,  158, 

1835. 
Grystes  salmoides  DeKay,  Fishes  N.  Y.  26,  1842. 
Grystes  salmoides  Storer,  Synopsis  Fishes  N.  A.  36, 1846. 
Gristes  salmoeides  Herbert,  Fish  and  Fishing,  197,  1859. 
Grystes  salmonoides  Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes  Brit.  Mus.  I, 

252,  1859. 


86  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

Micropterus  salmoides  Gill,  Pro.  Am.  Asso.   Adv.   Sci. 

B  55,  1873. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  Ind.  Geol.  Surv.  214,  1874. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  Man.  Vert.  E.  U.  S.  230, 

1876. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Uhler  &  Lugger,  Fishes  of  Md. 

Ill,  1876. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  Ann.   N.   Y.   Lye.  Nat. 

Hist.  XI,  314,  1877. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  IX, 

and  X,  1877. 
Micropterus  salmoides    Hallock,  Sportsman's  Gazetteer, 

373,  1877.     (In  part.) 
Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  Man.  Vert.  E.  U.  S.  2d 

ed.,  236,  1878. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,   Bull.    U.  8.  Nat.   Mus. 

XII,  30,  1878. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Henshall,  Kept.  Ohio  Fish  Com. 

31,  1879. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  Pro.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  II, 

218,  1880. 
1842 — Centrarchus  obscurus  DeKay,  Fishes  New  York,  30. 

Centrarchus  obscurus  Storer,  Syn.  Fishes  N.  A.  40,  1846. 
Centrarchus  obscurus  Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes  Brit.  Mus. 

I,  258,  1859. 
1857 — Grystes  nigricans  Garlick,  Treat.  Art.  Prop.  Fish,  105. 
Grystes  nigricans  Norris,  Am.  Anglers'  Book,  103,  1864. 

Etymology:  Dolomieu,  proper  name  (m  honor  of  M.  Dolomieu). 
Habitat:  Canada  to  Alabama;  along  the  Appalachian  Chain  and  west- 
ward ;  introduced  eastward. 

Specific  Descriptions. 

Micropterus    dolomieu   Lacepede,    1802. — "Dix   rayons 
aiguillones  et  sept  rayons  articules  a  la  premiere  nageoire  du  dos ; 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.         87 

quatre  rayons  a,  la  seconde ;  deux  rayons  aiguillones  etonze  rayons 
articules  a  la  nageoire  de  l'anus ;  la  caudale  en  croissant ;  un 
ou  deux  aiguillons  a  la  seconde  piece  de  chaque  opercule." — 
[Br.  5;  P.  16;  V.  I,  5;  C.  17].— (Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  des 
Paiss.,  IV,  325,  1801). 

Bodianus  achigan  Rafinesque,  1817.  —  "Lower  jaw  much 
longer,  gill-covers  with  two  flat  and  short  thorns,  lateral  line 
nearly  straight,  base  ascending  diagonal ;  blackish  with  round 
scattered  fulvous  spots,  belly  gray,  fins  brown,  the  dorsal  de- 
pressed in  the  middle  and  with  twenty-five  rays,  whereof  ten  are 
spinescent,  tail  lunulated,  with  a  gray  edge. — Obs.  vulgar  names 
in  the  United  States  Black  Bass,  Lake  Bass,  Big  Bass,  Oswego 
Bass,  Spotted  Bass,  etc.,  and  in  Canada  Achigan  or  Achigan  verd 
or  Achigan  noir;  but  many  species  are  probably  blended  under 
those  names,  this  is  probably  the  Achigan  of  Charlevoix.  It  is  a 
fine  fish,  from  one  to  three  feet  long,  and  weighing  sometimes  eight 
to  twelve  pounds,  affording  a  good  food,  etc.  It  is  found  in  all 
the  large  lakes  of  New  York  and  Canada.  It  has  many  rows 
of  small  teeth,  and  is  voracious;  eyes  blue,  iris  gilt-brown;  anal 
fin  with  fifteen  rays,  whereof  three  are  spinescent  and  short, 
pectoral  fins  fulvous  dotted  of  brown  at  the  base,  and  with  fif- 
teen rays,  thoracic  fins  with  six  rays,  whereof  the  first  is  spines- 
cent, caudal  fins  with  twenty  rays.  This  species  and  the  forego- 
ing have  six  branchial  rays,  and  the  gill-covers  are  composed  of 
four  pieces,  all  scaly  except  the  second.  Body  more  cylindrical 
than  in  the  foregoing."  —  (Rafinesque,  Amer.  Mon.  Mag.  and 
Crit  Rev.  II,  120,  1817.) 

Calliurus  punctulatus  Rafinesque,  1820.  —  "Lower  jaw 
longer;  body  olivaceous,  crowded  with  blackish  dots;  head 
brownish,  flattened  above;  lateral  line  hardly  curved  upward 
at  the  base ;  tail  unequally  bilobed,  lower  lobe  larger,  base  yel- 
low, middle  blackish,  tip  white ;  dorsal  fin  yellow,  with  24  rays, 
of  which  ten  are  spiny. 

An  uncommon  fish  from  four  to  twelve  inches  long.  I  ob- 
served it  at  the  Falls;  rare  in  the  Ohio,  more  common  in  some 


88  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

small  streams.  Vulgar  names,  Painted  Tail  or  Bridge  Perch ;  tail 
with  two  lobes,  slightly  unequal,  base  flexuose  ;  belly  and  lower 
fins  pale,  anal  fin  with  13  rays,  the  three  anterior  spiny  and 
shorter,  behind  rounded  and  far  from  the  tail,  although  nearer 
than  the  dorsal  fin ;  thoracic  fin  with  five  rays,  none  of  which 
appear  spiny,  and  no  appendage;  pectoral  fins  short,  trapezoidal, 
with  15  rays  ;  branchial  rays  concealed." — (Rafinesque,  Ich. 
Ohi.  26,  1820.) 

Lepomis  tpjfasciata  Rafinesque,  1820. — "Whitish,  crowded 
with  unequal  and  irregular  specks  of  gilt  olive  color,  none  on 
the  belly ;  gill  covers  with  three  large  oblique  streaks  of  the  same 
color ;  opercule  without  appendage,  spine  acute,  a  taint  brown 
spot  below  the  lateral  line ;  lower  jaw  longer  ;  dorsal  fin  streaked 
behind;  tail  forked,  yellow  at  the  base,  brown  in  the  middle, 
tip  pale. 

"Found  in  the  Ohio  and  many  other  streams;  reaches  over  a 
foot  in  length  sometimes ;  vulgar  names,  Yellow  Bass,  Gold  Bass, 
Yellow  Perch,  Streaked  Head,  etc.  Fins  olivaceous;  dorsal 
hardly  depressed  in  the  middle  with  24  rays  whereof  10  are 
spiny,  hind  part  with  three  brownish  and  longitudinal  streaks ; 
anal  fin  rounded  with  13  rays,  3  of  which  are  spiny,  2  short  and 
a  long  one ;  pectoral  fins  nearly  triangular  and  acute,  16  rays ; 
thoracics  6,  tail  2,  very  broad,  forks  divaricate  nearly  lunulate ; 
eyes  small  black,  iris  brown ;  lateral  line  following  the  back ; 
diameter  less  than  one-fourth  of  the  length." — (Rafinesque,  Ich. 
OH.  31,  1820.) 

Lepomis  flexuolaris  Rafinesque,  1820. — "  Olivaceous  brown 
above,  sides  with  some  transversal  and  flexuose  olive  lines,  belly 
white;  lateral  line  nearly  straight  flexuose;  spine  broad  acute, 
behind  the  base  of  the  opercule,  no  appendage  nor  spot,  pre- 
opercule  forked  downwards ;  upper  jaw  slightly  longer ;  tail  bi- 
lobed,  base  olive,  middle  brown,  tip  white. 

"A  fine  species,  reaching  the  length  of  two  feet,  and  affording 
an  excellent  food.     Common  all  over  the  Ohio  and  tributary 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        89 

streams ;  vulgar  names,  Black  Buss,  Brown  Bass,  Black  Perch, 
etc.;  fins  olivaceous,  dorsal  with  23  rays,  whereof  9  are  spiny 
and  rather  shorter ;  anal  with  12  rays,  whereof  2  are  spiny ; 
pectorals  trapezoidal,  16  rays ;  branchial  rays  uncovered ;  iris 
brown.  This  fish  might  perhaps  form  another  subgenus,  by  the 
large  mouth,  head  without  upper  sutures,  spine  hardly  decur- 
rent,  nearly  equal  jaws,  gill  covers,  lateral  line,  etc.  Its  tail 
and  preopercule  are  somewhat  like  CaUiurus.  It  might  be  called 
Nemocampsis,  meaning  flexuose  line.  Diameter  one-fourth  of  the 
length."— (Rafinesque,  Ich,   Old.  31,  1820.) 

Lepomis  salmonea  Rafinesque,  1820. — "Olivaceous  brown 
above,  sides  pale  with  some  round  yellowish  spots,  beneath 
white ;  preopercule  simple,  head  without  sutures,  lower  jaw 
hardly  longer,  spines  flat,  short,  acute,  and  decurrent  above  and 
beneath,  opercule  acute  beneath  the  spines;  tail  lunulate,  tip 
blackish ;  vent  posterior. 

"  Length  from  6  to  24  inches.  Vulgar  names  White  Trout, 
Brown  Trout,  Trout  Pearch,  Trout  Bass,  Brown  Bass,  Black 
Bass,  Black  Pearch,  etc.  Common  in  the  Kentucky,  Ohio, 
Green  and  Licking  rivers,  etc.  It  offers  a  delicate  white  flesh, 
similar  to  the  Perm  salmonea.  It  is  a  voracious  fish,  with  many 
rows  of  sharp  teeth  on  the  jaws  and  in  the  throat.  It  bites 
easily  at  the  hook,  and  eats  suckers,  minnows  and  chubs. 
Diameter  one-fifth  of  the  length.  Fins  olivaceous  brown ;  dorsal 
with  25  rays,  whereof  10  are  spiny,  slightly  depressed  between 
them;  anal  rounded  small,  3  and  11  rays.  Pectoral  acute  trap- 
ezoidal 18  rays.  Thoracic  1  and  5,  spiny  ray  half  the  length. 
Tail  with  24  rays.  Iris  silvery." — (Rafinesque,  Ich.  Old.  32, 
1820.) 

Lepomis  not  at  a  Rafinesque,  1820. —  "This  species  differs 
merely  from  the  foregoing  [Lepomis  salmonea~\  by  having  a  black 
spot  on  the  margin  of  the  opercule,  two  diagonal  brown  stripes 
on  each  side  of  the  head  below  the  eyes,  and  all  the  fins  yellow, 
except  the  tail,  which  is  black  at  the  end,  with  a  narrow  white 
8 


90  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

tip.  It  is  also  smaller,  from  3  to  8  inches  long.  It  bears  the 
same  vulgar  names,  and  is  found  along  with  it,  of  which  some 
fishermen  deem  that  it  is  the  young.  But  I  have  seen  so  many 
false  assertions  of  the  kind  elsewhere  that  I  am  inclined  to  doubt 
this  fact,  as  it  would  be  very  strange  that  the  gradual  changes 
should  be  so  great.  Yet  this  ought  to  be  inquired  into,  since 
many  vulgar  opinions  are  often  found  to  be  correct." — (Rafin- 
esque,  M.  OH.  32,  1820.) 

Etheostoma  calliuka  Rafinesque,  1820. — "Body  slightly 
fusiform  and  compressed,  silvery,  olivaceous  above,  some  flexuose 
transversal  brownish  lines  on  the  sides;  lower  jaw  longer,  preop- 
ercule  double,  opercule  with  an  angular  appendage  and  an 
obtuse  spine  behind  it ;  scales  smooth,  lateral  line  flexuose ;  tail 
forked,  tricolored,  and  with  a  brown  spot  at  the  base. 

"The  largest  species  of  the  genus  from  3  to  9  inches  long. 
It  has  some  similarity  with  the  Lepomis  flexuolaris,  and  some 
other  river  Bass,  wherefore  it  is  called  Minny  Bass,  Little  Bass, 
Hog  Bass,  etc.  Common  in  the  Ohio,  Salt  River,  etc.  It  has 
sharp  teeth.  The  head  is  large,  rugose  above ;  iris  large,  gilt 
brown ;  branchial  rays  uncovered.  Diameter  one-seventh  of 
the  length.  Lateral  line  curved  upwards  at  its  base.  Fins 
olivaceous.  Dorsal  with  9  and  14  rays,  beginning  behind  the 
pectorals  and  ending  far  from  the  tail,  like  the  anal,  which  has 
12  rays,  whereof  one  is  spiny.  Pectoral  fins  short,  trapezoidal, 
16  rays.  Tail  24,  fine,  base  with  a  yellow  curved  ring,  followed 
by  a  forked  band  of  a  pale  violaceous  color,  tip  hyalin.  Mouth 
straight."— (Rafinesque,  Ich.  OH.  36,  1820.) 

Cichla  fasciata  Le  Sueur,  1822.  — "  Fourteen  or  fifteen 
transverse  brown  bands  on  each  side  of  the  body,  and  two  or 
three  oblique  ones  on  the  opercula,  scaly  margined  with  black ; 
spinous  and  soft  parts  of  the  dorsal  fin  equal  in  length,  the  fin 
less  arquated  upward  than  the  posterior  one. 

"Body  elongated,  compressed,  tapering  at  the  two  extremi- 
ties, three  and  one-half  times  the  length  of  head,  by  one  length 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        91 

in  depth ;  head  of  moderate  size,  narrow,  destitute  of  scales  be- 
tween the  eyes,  and  upon  the  snout,  which  is  short;  mouth  ex- 
tending beneath  the  eye ;  jaw  large,  truncated  posteriorly,  inter- 
maxillary long  and  narrow  ;  teeth  very  small,  numerous  pointed, 
curved  and  serrated  in  the  manner  of  a  card  on  the  jaws,  palate 
and  extremity  of  the  vomer ;  inferior  jaw  hardly  longer  than  the 
superior  jaw,  mandible  strong,  enlarged,  spoon-shaped ;  eye 
small  and  round ;  iris  white,  brown  and  red ;  pupil  small  and 
of  a  deep  color;  dorsal  fin  high,  rounded  behind,  arquated 
before,  and  very  low  at  its  junction  with  the  soft  part,  the 
spinous  rays  imbricated  and  reclined  into  the  longitudinal  cavity 
of  the  back ;  anal  rounded,  shorter  than  the  soft  part  of  the 
dorsal,  with  three  spinous  rays  anteriorly ;  pectorals  moderate, 
rounded ;  thoracics  truncated,  hardly  longer  than  the  pectorals, 
distant  from  the  anal,  and  armed  with  a  strong  spinous  ray; 
caudal  slightly  emarginate,  lobes  rounded  with  17  principal 
rays,  including  the  lateral  flat  ones,  beyond  which  are  8  small 
ones;  scales  rounded,  not  denticulated,  sub-irregularly  placed, 
large  on  the  sides,  smaller  on  the  back,  small  upon  the  back  of 
the  neck,  very  small  under  the  belly,  throat  and  cheek,  and  a 
little  larger  on  the  preoperculum  and  suboperculum ;  there  are 
also  very  small  ones  between  the  rays  of  the  anal  and  caudal 
fins;  general  color  brownish-olivaceous,  deep  and  fuliginous 
upon  the  back,  lighter  on  the  sides,  the  middle  of  the  scales 
browned  with  a  black  margin  ;  anal  fin  greenish  ;  posterior  part 
of  the  dorsal  and  the  caudal  violaceous,  abdomen  and  throat 
bluish  and  violaceous,  the  13,  14  and  sometimes  15  bands  with 
which  this  species  is  ornamented  are  a  little  deeper  than  the 
general  tint;  they  are  more  perceptible  in  the  fresh  state  of 
the  fish,  when  but' recently  taken  out  of  the  water;  the  opercula 
are  also  traversed  with  many  olivaceous  bands,  the  lateral  line  is 
undulated  oblique:  the  color  changes  in  the  dying  fish,  it  is 
then  sometimes  all  blue  or  bluish,  or  entirely  black,  and  the 
transverse  bands  disappear.     Length  18  or  20  inches. 


92  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

'  'This  is  one  of  the  best  fish  of  Lake  Erie  for  the  table,  and 
with  that  which  the  fishermen  call  Herring  Salmon  (Coregonus 
Artedi  Le  Sueur,  Vol.  I,  par.  II,  p.  231),  it  is  salted  to  preserve 
it  till  sold.  They  are  taken  at  all  seasons  of  the  year  by 
the  seine,  and  hook  and  line.  We  observed  them  at  Erie  in  the 
month  of  July,  1816,  and  at  Buffalo,  at  which  latter  place  we 
captured  many  with  the  seine.  A  variety  occurred  in  Lake 
George,  of  which  the  specimens  appeared  to  us  to  have  the  lower 
jaw  more  advanced.  The  fishermen  name  them  Black  Bass. 
B.  6;  P.  18  to  20;  T.  5;  D.  10,  15;  A.  3,  12;  C.  17f."— (Le 
Sueur,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat  Sei.  Phil.  II,  216,  1822.) 

Cichla  ohiensis  Le  Sueur,  1822.— "  Extremity  of  the  anal 
fin  sensibly  more  remote  from  the  head  than  that  of  the  dorsal ; 
scales  more  regular  than  in  the  preceding  species. 

"  The  larger  of  the  two  individuals,  which  were  brought  from 
the  Ohio  River  by  Mr.  Thomas  Say,  and  deposited  in  the 
cabinet  of  the  Academy,  is  22  inches  long  by  5  deep,  and 
about  3  in  thickness ;  the  skin  of  these  two  specimens  is 
stronger  in  its  texture  than  in  specimens  from  Lake  Erie  ;  the 
scales  are  more  uniformly  disposed  and  equal ;  the  anterior  por- 
tion of  the  dorsal  fin  is  not  so  much  elevated,  less  arquated,  but 
also  furnished  with  10  spinous  rays;  the  soft  part  is  equally  long 
with  the  first,  but  is  more  elevated,  rounded  and  composed  of 
14  branched  rays;  the  anal  fin  is  rounded,  short  with  14  rays, 
of  which  the  3  anterior  ones  are  spinous ;  the  extremity  of  this 
fin  extends  beyond  that  of  the  dorsal,  in  these  individuals, 
further  than  in  the  species  of  Lake  Erie.  If  this  character  is 
constant,  we  must  regard  it  as  belonging  to  a  distinct  species, 
but  I  think  it  is  proper  to  wait  for  further  observations  for  con- 
firmation. 

"The  scales  are  in  the  same  progression;  large,  rounded  on 
the  sides,  moderate  on  the  back  towards  the  spinous  portion  of 
the  dorsal  fin,  small  upon  the  neck;  upon  the  middle  of  the 
abdomen  they  are  a  little  more  elongated ;  very  small  between 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        93 

the  thoracic  and  pectoral  fins,  on  the  throat,  the  cheek,  and 
larger  on  the  preoperculum  and  suboperculum ;  the  teeth  also 
differ  little  from  the  preceding  species ;  the  pectoral  and  thoracic 
fins  are  equal  and  similarly  situate ;  lateral  line  near  the  back, 
a  little  undulated,  originating  from  the  angle  of  the  opening  of 
the  operculum,  passing  on  the  middle  of  the  tail ;  color  in  the 
dried  specimens,  yellowish  brown;  the  scales  did  not  appear  to 
me  to  be  margined  with  black  as  in  the  preceding  species. 
B.  6 ;  P.  18 ;  T.  5  ;  D.  10,  14 ;  A.  3,  11 ;  C.  16f ."— (Le  Sueur, 
Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  II,  218,  1822.) 

Cichla  minima  Le  Sueur,  1822. — "  Dorsal  long,  spinous  and 
soft  parts  of  equal  length,  the  former  straight  and  very  low; 
anal  long,  equal  to  the  soft  part  of  the  dorsal ;  eye  large. 

"Body  very  long  and  subcompressed,  more  elevated  towards 
the  dorsal  anteriorly ;  head  arquated ;  eye  very  large ;  pupil 
and  iris  very  large;  dorsal  fin  long,  divided  into  two  equal 
parts,  the  anterior  part  of  9  spinous  rays,  and  much  lower  than 
the  soft  part,  which  is  rounded,  with  14  divided  rays;  anal 
equal  to  the  posterior  part  of  the  dorsal  and  of  13  rays,  of  which 
3  are  spinous,  caudal  of  15  to  18  rays;  pectorals  large,  placed 
very  low  near  the  operculum  ;  thoracic  fin  much  smaller  than 
the  pectoral,  and  placed  exactly  beneath  them ;  anal  large ; 
scales  very  small ;  color  deep  gray,  tinted  with  bluish  on  the 
back,  with  metallic  reflections  on  the  sides  and  abdomen  and 
back,  and  a  spot  upon  the  neck,  lateral  line  straight,  on  the 
middle  of  the  body;  caudal  fin  subtruncated  of  17  or  18  rays; 
teeth  very  small,  in  many  ranges  on  the  jaws  and  palate ;  mouth 
deeply  divided, 

"Lives  in  the  small  lagoons  of  tranquil  water,  which  dis- 
charge by  narrow  channels  into  Lake  Erie.  Length  is  9  lines." 
— (Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil  II,  220,  1822.) 

Grystes  salmoides  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  1829. — "Tel 
est  le  growler  de  New  York,  dont  nous  devons  la  connaissance  a 
M.  Milbert,  mais  qui  n'a  point  ete  decrit  par  M.  Mitchill. 


94  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

"  Ce  nom  de  growler,  qui  signife  grogneur,  vient  peut-etre  de 
quelque  bruit  qu'il  fait  entendre  com  me  les  scienes  ou  les  trigles, 
mais  nous  n'avons  a  cet  egard  aucun  renseignement  positif. 
Grystes  en  est  l'equivalent  grec. 

"M.  Le  Sueur,  croyant  l'espece  nouvelle,  en  a  public  une 
description  dans  le  Journal  des  sciences  de  Philadelphie,  sous  le 
nom  de  cichla  variabilis;  mais  nous  avons  tout  lieu  de  croire  que 
c'est  ce  poisson  qui  est  represente  et  decrit  par  M.  de  Lacepede 
(t.  IV,  p.  716  et  717,  et  pi.  5,  fig.  2)  sous  le  nom  de  labre  sal- 
mo'ide,  d'apres  des  notes  et  une  figure  fournies  par  M.  Bosc,  qui 
le  nommait  perca  trutta.  La  figure  en  est  un  peu  rude,  mais  la 
description  s'accorde  avec  ce  que  nous  avons  vu,  sauf  quelques 
details,  qui  tiennent  peut-etre  moins  au  poisson  meme  qu'a  la 
maniere  dont  il  a  ete  observe. 

"  Ce  pretendu  labre,  au  rapport  de  M.  Bosc,  est  tres-commun 
dans  les  rivieres  de  la  Caroline,  ou  on  lui  a  transports  le  nom 
de  trout  (c'est- a-dire  truite).  II  atteint  deux  pieds  de  longueur. 
C'est  un  excellent  manger;  sa  chair  est  ferme  et  savoureuse. 
On  le  prend  aisement  a  l'hamecon,  surtout  en  mettant  un  mor- 
ceau,  de  cyprin  pour  appat. 

1 '  Le  growler  a  a  peu  pres  la  forme  d'un  serran.  Sa  plus  grande 
hauteur,  qui  est  vers  le  milieu,  ne  fait  pas  tout-a-fait  le  quart 
de  sa  longueur,  et  son  epaisseur  ne  fait  pas  moitie"  de  sa  hauteur. 
La  longueur  de  sa  tete  n'est  que  trois  fois  et  demie  dans  sa 
longueur  totale.  Son  profil  descend  tres-peu.  Sa  machoire 
inferieure  est  un  peu  plus  longue  que  l'autre,  et  a  quatre  ou  cinq 
pores  sous  chacune  de  ses  branches.  De  larges  bandes  de  dents 
en  velours  les  garnissent  toutes  les  deux,  ainsi  que  le  devant  de 
son  vomer  et  ses  palatins.  Le  bord  de  son  preopercule  est  par- 
faitement  entier,  et  a  Tangle  un  peu  arrondi.  L'opercule  osseux 
se  termine  par  deux  pointes  peu  aigues,  dont  la  superieure  est 
la  plus  courte.  La  membrane  branchiale  a  six  et  quelquefois 
sept  rayons,  variation  qui  est  assez  singuliere,  mais  que  nous 
avons   constatee.      Les  os  de  l'epaule  sont  lisses,  mais  entiers, 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.         95 

comnie  le  preopercule.  Le  sous-orbitaire  a  quelqups  rides.  Les 
ecailles  sont  mediocres :  il  y  en  a  quatre-vingt-dix  sur  une  ligne 
longitudinale,  et  trente-six  ou  quarante  sur  une  verticale.  Son 
front,  son  museau,  ses  machoires,  le  limbe  de  son  preopercule, 
la  membrane  des  ou'ies  en  manquent ;  mais  il  y  en  a  sur  sa  joue 
et  ses  pieces  operculaires.  •  II  en  porte  de  petites  sur  les  parties 
molles  de  sa  dorsale  et  de  son  anale,  et  sur  la  caudale.  Toutes 
sont  fiuement  ciliees  et  poin  til  lees  a  leur  partie  visible,  et  ont 
huit  crenelures  a  leur  base.  La  ligne  laterale,  un  peu  arqu6e 
vers  le  bas,  a  son  origine,  suit  du  reste  a  peu  pr&s  la  courbure 
du  dos.  La  dorsale  ne  commence  que  sur  le  milieu  des  pector- 
ales.  Les  epines  sont  faibles  ;  la  plus  haute,  qui  est  la  quatrieme, 
n'a  pas  le  tiers  de  la  hauteur  du  tronc  sous  elle.  L'echancrure 
entre  la  penultieme  et  la  derniere  est  prononcee ;  l'anale  ne 
commence  que  sous  sa  partie  molle.  Les  deux  nageoires  finis- 
sent  vis-a-vis  Tune  de  1'autre,  etvlaissent  entre  elles  et  la  caudale 
un  espace  qui  fait  presque  le  quart  de  la  longueur  totale.  La 
caudale  se  termine  un  peu  en  croissant;  les  pectorales  et  les 
ventrales  sont  petites  ou  mediocres. 

D.  10,  13  ou  14;  A.  3,  11  ou  12;  C.  17;  P.  16;  V.  1,  5. 

"Tout  ce  poisson,  devenu  adulte,  est  d'un  brun-verdatre  fonce\ 
avec  une  tache  d'un  noir  bleuatre  a  la  pointe  de  l'opercule. 

"Nous  avons  recu,  par  M.  Milbert,  un  individu  de  huit  a 
neuf  pouces  et  un  de  six  a  sept.  C'est  ce  dernier  qui  a  six 
rayons  a  la  membrane  des  ouies  et  quatorze  rayons  mous  a  la 
dorsale. 

"Plus  tard,  M.  Le  Sueur  nous  en  a  envoy e  de  la  riviere  Wa- 
bash un  individu  long  de  seize  pouces,  et  trois  autres  qui  n'en 
ont  guere  que  cinq.  Les  jeunes  sont  d'un  vert  plus  pale,  et  ont 
sur  chaque  flanc  vingt-cinq  a  trente  lignes  longitudinales  et 
paralleles  brunes,  qui  paraissent  s'effacer  avec  l'age. 

"  Le  foie  du  growler  est  tres-petit,  presque  entierement  place" 
dans  le  cote  gauche ;  l'cesophage,  tres-court,  se  dilate  en  un  esto- 
mac  ovale  assez  grand,  a  parois  minces  et  sans  plis.     Le  pylore, 


96  BOOK   OF    THE   BLACK   BASS. 

pres  du  cardia,  est  large  et  entoure"  de  quatorze  appendices 
coecales,  dont  dix  a  gauche  et  quatre  a  droite,  assez  grasses  et 
assez  longues.  L'intestin  remonte  j  usque  sous  le  diaphragme, 
descend  jusqu'aupres  de  l'anus,  puis  retourne  jusqu'aupres  du 
pylore,  d'ou  il  va  droit  a  l'anus.  Son  dernier  repli  a  deux 
6tranglemens  assez  marques.  La  rate  est  petite,  au  milieu  de 
l'abdomen,  pres  de  la  pointe  de  l'estomac.  La  vessie  natatoire, 
tres-grande,  mince,  peu  argentee,  s'etend  depuis  le  diaphragme 
jusqu'aupres  de  l'anus.  Tout  le  peritoine  auu  bel  eclat  d'argent. 
L'estomac  etait  rempli  d'une  grande  quantite  de  fourmis  ailees, 
de  tipules  de  cousins  et  autres  petits  insectes  volans,  communs 
sur  les  eaux  donees." — (Cuvier  and  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat. 
des  Poiss.  Ill,  54,  1829.) 

Grystes  salmoides  Jardine,  1835. — "D.  10,  13  or  14;  A. 
3,  11  or  12;  C.  17;  P.  16;  V.  1,  5. 

"  Growler  is  the  provincial  American  name  for  this  fish,  which 
Cuvier  thinks  has  been  given  from  some  noise  or  croaking  sound 
uttered  by  it.  Two  fish  only  have  yet  been  discovered  which 
will  rank  under  its  character ;  the  present  a  native  of  North 
America  and  another  produced  from  the  New  Holland  seas. 
In  form  of  the  body  they  somewhat  resemble  the  last,  but  are 
at  once  distinguished  from  them  and  the  preceding  forms,  by 
the  smoothness  and  the  want  of  any  covering  on  the  head ;  the 
opercle  and  preopercle  having  neither  spines  nor  teeth  on  their 
margins.  The  present  species,  a  native  of  the  North  American 
waters,  and  abundant  in  the  neighborhood  of  New  York,  has 
been  named  Salmoides,  from  its  resemblence  to  the  salmon  or 
trout,  being  in  some  parts  termed  '  Trout.'  It  reaches  a  length 
of  two  feet,  is  of  excellent  flavor,  and  is  much  esteemed  as  an 
article  of  food ;  and  it  affords  sport  to  the  angler,  taking  the 
hook  readily.  The  general  colors,  an  unobtrusive  tint  of  olive, 
lightening  towards  the  under  parts  where  it  becomes  grayish 
white.  The  first  dorsal  fin  is  weaker  in  proportion  than  most  of 
the  forms  we  have  already  seen,  but  the  last  rises  high  behind 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        97 

and  assumes  a  shape  somewhat  like  that  of  some  of  the  Grey- 
lings.  The  tail  is  shaped  a  good  deal  like  the  Salmoidw,  and  in 
this  fish  has  a  dark  bar  across  the  center." — (Jardlne,  Nat.  Lib. 
I,  Perches,  158,  1835.) 

Cichla  fasciata  and  Cichla  ohiensis  Kirtland,  1838. — 
"The  Black  Bass  of  the  Lake  and  of  the  Ohio  River.  Le  Sueur 
has  described  them  as  distinct  species.  I  have  no  doubt  they 
are  specifically  identical.  They  differ  in  form  and  color  at  differ- 
ent seasons  and  in  different  localities,  and  even  the  same  in- 
dividual will  change  its  color  repeatedly  in  a  short  space  of  time 
if  confined  in  a  vessel  of  water. 

"Rafinesque  has  described  that  from  the  Ohio  under  the 
generic  name  of  Lepomis,  and  taken  these  changings  of  color  as 
a  distinction  upon  which  he  has  founded  several  of  his  species. 
His  Lepomis  notata  is  no  other  than  the  young  of  the  common 
Black  Bass.     Their  appearance  varies  at  different  ages. 

"This  fish  readily  bites  at  a  hook,  and  is  valued  as  an  article 
of  food."— (Kirtland,  Rept.  Zool.  Ohio,  191,  1838.) 

Cichla  minlma  Kirtland,  1838. — "Le  Sueur  describes  this 
as  an  inhabitant  of  Lake  Erie.  I  am  suspicious  it  is  only  the 
young  of  the  preceding  species,  as  I  have  never  been  able  to  find 
it,  though  I  have  searched  repeatedly  in  the  lake  and  its  trib- 
utaries."— (Kirtland,  Rept.  Zool.  Ohio,  in  2d  Geol.  Rept.  Ohiot 
191,  1838.) 

Centrarchus  fasciatus  Kirtland,  1842. — "  This  species 
presents  such  a  variety  of  forms,  colors  and  habits,  and  is  so 
much  influenced  by  age,  sex,  seasons  and  locality,  it  is  not  re- 
markable that  its  varieties  should  have  been  described  as  dis- 
tinct species.  Still  I  am  convinced  that  the  synonyms  I  have 
enumerated  embrace  only  one  true  species  (these  are  Lepomis 
pallida,  trifasciata  and  flexuolaris  Raf.,  Icth.  Ohiensis,  p.  30,  31; 
Etheostoma  calliura  Raf.,  Icth.  Ohiensis,  p.  36;  Cichla  fasciata 
Le  Sueur,  J.  A.  N.  S.;  C.  fasciata  Kirtland,  Report  Zool. 
Ohio;  C.  Ohiensis  Le  Sueur,  J.  A.  N.  S.);  and  I  am  inclined  to 


98  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

add  to  them  C.  minima  of  Le  Sueur,  as  I  have  never  been  able 
to  find  in  the  lagoons  about  our  rivers  and  the  lake  any  fish 
that  answers  to  his  description,  except  the  young  of  the  Black 
Bass  at  a  certain  stage  of  growth. 

"This  species  is  found  universally  in  our  western  waters.  It 
frequently  is  taken  by  hooks  and  in  seines, and  also  gives  amuse- 
ment to  our  marksmen  in  the  spring,  when  it  runs  into  shallow 
water  for  the  purpose  of  spawning.  At  this  time  it  is  often 
shot  with  rifles.  Its  flesh  resembles  in  flavor  that  of  the  Black 
Fish  (Tautoga  Americana  Cuv.)  and  by  many  persons  is  es- 
teemed as  the  best  fish  for  the  table  that  our  western  waters  af- 
ford. "--(Kirtland,  Bost.  Jour.  Nat.  Hist.  V,  28,  1842.) 

Grystes  salmoides  DeKay,  1842. — "Greatest  depth,  to  its 
length  as  one  to  four  nearly ;  its  thickness  not  quite  half  of  its 
depth.  Profile  not  very  declivous.  Lower  jaw  longest  with  4 
or  5  pores  under  each  of  its  branches.  Minute  teeth  in  broad 
bands.  Opercle  terminates  in  tw7o  moderate  points,  of  which 
the  uppermost  is  short.  Branchial  rays  six  and  occasionally 
seven;  a  notable  variation,  but  which  is  positively  established. 
Humeral  bone  smooth.  Scales  ciliate,  moderate;  ninety  in  a 
longitudinal  series  and  36-40  in  a  vertical  line.  Scales  only  on 
opercular  bones  and  cheek ;  small  ones  on  the  soft  portions  of 
dorsal,  anal  and  caudal  fins.  Lateral  line  concurrent  with  the 
back.  Dorsal  fin  commences  about  the  middle  of  the  pectorals; 
the  fourth  ray  highest.  Pectoral  and  ventral  fins  small.  Cau- 
dal fin  slightly  crescent  shaped. 

"The  adult,  deep  greenish  brown,  with  a  bluish  black  spot  on 
the  point  of  the  opercle;  young  with  from  25-30  brownish  longi- 
tudinal bands,  which  appear  to  become  effaced  with  age.  Length 
6'0-24'0.  (Copied  from  Cuvier.)  Fin  rays :  D.  10,  13  or  14; 
P.  16;  V.  1,  5;  A.  3,  11  or  12;  C.  17."— (DeKay,  Fishes 
N.  Y.  26,  1842.) 

Centrarchus  fasciatus DeKay,  1842. — "  Body  compressed; 
back  arched  gibbous ;  profile  descending  obliquely  to  the  rostrum, 


NOMENCLATURE    AND    MORPHOLOGY.  99 

which  :s  moderately  prolonged  ;  scales  large,  truncate  and  with 
radiating  plaits  at  the  radical  portion  ;  the  free  portion  small, 
rounded,  concentrically  striate,  minutely  denticulate  on  the  mar- 
gin; scales  on  the  opercle  large,  with  a  single  series  on  the  sub- 
opercle,  much  smaller  on  the  preopercle,  and  ascend  high  up  on 
the  membrane  of  the  soft  dorsal  and  caudal  fins ;  the  intraorbital 
region  and  the  jaw  scaleless;  lateral  line  concurrent  with  the 
back;  eyes  moderate;  nostrils  double,  vertical,  contiguous;  the 
anterior  on  its  posterior  border  with  a  membranous  valve,  near 
these  a  few  open  pores;  opercles  pointed  with  a  loose  membrane; 
lower  jaw  somewhat  advanced  with  a  single  series  of  from  eight 
to  ten  distant  pores  beneath ;  both  jaws  armed  with  a  broad  patch 
of  minute  conic  acute  recurved  teeth ;  an  oblong  patch  of  rasp- 
like teeth  on  the  vomer,  and  a  long  band  of  similar  teeth  on 
the  palatines;  a  transverse  membrane  on  the  anterior  part  of 
both  jaws ;  a  small  patch  of  minute  teeth  on  the  center  of  the 
tongue,  which  is  free  and  thin  on  the  margins ;  branchial  arches 
minutely  toothed  ^n  the  upper  surface  near  the  tongue,  with 
long  serrate,  spinous  processes  above;  pharyngeal  teeth  in  rounded 
patches;  branchial  rays  six.  Dorsal  fin  commences  slightly  be- 
hind the  pectorals;  the  anterior  portion  consists  of  nine  stout 
spines,  received  into  a  sheath  below;  the  first  is  shorter  than 
the  second,  which  again  is  not  so  long  as  the  third,  and  this 
latter  is  subequal  with  the  remainder ;  a  small  and  not  very  evident 
depression  separates  it  from  the  other  portion,  which  consists  of 
1  spinous  and  14  branched  rays;  it  terminates  above  the  end  of 
the  anal;  this  portion  of  the  dorsal  fin  is  high,  and  somewhat 
rounded;  the  second  simply  articulated,  not  branched,  and  the 
three  posterior  rays  successively  shorter ;  the  pectorals  under  the 
posterior  angle  of  the  opercle  broad  and  obtusely  pointed;  it 
contains  18  rays,  of  which  the  5,  6,  and  7  are  the  longest; 
ventral  fins  placed  slightly  behind  the  pectorals  and  composed 
of  5  robust  branched  rays;  anal  fin  higher  than  long,  commenc- 
ing under  the  third  soft  ray  of  the  dorsal  and  composed  of '3 


100  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

spinous  and  12  articulated  rays,  of  which  latter  the  4,  5,  6,  7 
are  longest ;  the  first  spinous  ray  very  short,  the  second  slightly 
longer,  and  the  third  double  the  length  of  the  preceding ;  caudal 
fin  emarginate,  tips  rounded,  and  composed  of  16  flat  robust, 
multifid  and  six  accessory  rays  on  each  side;  length  13.5;  of 
head,  4.0;  greatest  depth,  4.2;  fin  rays,  D.  9.1,14;  P.  18;  V.  5; 
A.  3,  12;  C.  16f 

This  species  is  common  in  the  great  lakes  and  in  the  numer- 
ous smaller  ones  in  this  state,  where  it  is  generally  known  under 
the  name  of  Black  Bass.  This  species  appears  to  differ  very 
much  in  different  localities,  not  only  in  color  but  in  form,  and 
according  to  Dr.  Kirtland,  the  same  individual  will  change  its 
color  repeatedly  in  a  short  space  of  time  if  confined  in  a  vessel  of 
water."— (DeKay,  Fished  N.   Y.  28,  1842.) 

Centrarchus  obscurus  DeKay,  1842. — "  Body  compressed, 
regularly  arched  above,  not  gibbous,  highest  along  the  spinous 
portion  of  the  dorsal  fin ;  scales  small,  orbicular,  concentrically 
striate  on  their  free  surfaces,  covering  the  head  and  body  and 
rising  very  slightly  on  the  base  of  the  dorsal ;  lateral  line  tubular 
above  the  upper  margin  of  the  opercle ;  makes  a  curve  down- 
wards over  the  point  of  the  opercle,  then  rises  a  little  anterior 
to  the  first  spinous  ray  of  the  dorsal,  and  then  becomes  concur- 
rent with  the  line  of  the  back ;  head  moderately  small,  and  some- 
what pointed,  sloping  gradually  to  the  nape,  thence  ascending  more 
rapidly  to  the  dorsal  ray;  eyes  very  large;  nostrils  double,  dis- 
tant, the  posterior  largest;  a  small  mucous  pore  below  the  an- 
terior nostril ;  lower  jaw  longest ;  numerous  fine  teeth  in  both 
jaws,  very  acute  and  recurved,  forming  many  rows  in  front  and 
fewer  on  the  sides  of  the  jaw ;  still  more  minute  teeth  on  the 
vomer  and  palatines;  opercular  bones  scaly;  the  opercle  with  a 
membranous  margin,  and  terminating  in  a  flat  point,  which  is 
occasionally  double ;  the  dorsal  fin  arises  behind  the  base  of  the 
.pectorals,  composed  of  9  spinous  and  13  simple  rays;  the  first 
spinous  is  shortest;  the  firstjof  the  soft  portion  simple,  the  re- 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.       101 

raainder  articulated  and  much  higher  than  the  spinous  portion ; 
it  is  coterminal  with  the  anal  fin ;  pectorals  oblong  and  composed 
of  16  rays ;  the  upper  ray  subspinous,  simple ;  ventral  fin 
pointed,  contiguous,  composed  of  1  spinous  and  5  branched  rays; 
anal  rounded  of  3  spinous  and  12  branched  rays,  the  first  spine 
short,  the  others  gradually  longer  ;  caudal  fin  emarginate  of  17 
entire  and  3  accessory  rays  on  each  side.  All  the  rays  of  this 
fin  are  broad  and  compressed,  with  scales  ascending  high  up  to- 
wards their  extremities  ;  a  general  greenish  brown  or  dark  olive 
with  a  faint  metallic  bronze  on  the  upper  parts,  beneath  lighter ; 
length,  6.0-8.0;  fins,  D.  9.1,  12;  P.  16;  V.  1,  5;  A,  3,  12;  C. 
17 J.  This  species  was  obtained  from  Onondaga  creek,  there 
called  Black  Bass."— (DeKay,  Fishes  N.  Y.  30,  1842.) 

Grystes  salmoides  Storer,  1846. — "The  adult  fish  is  of  a 
deep  greenish  brown  color,  with  bluish  black  spot  at  the  angle 
of  the  operculum;  the  posterior  portion  of  the  dorsal  fin  rises 
high,  and  resembles  somewhat  that  of  some  of  the  Greylings; 
the  tail  is  shaped  much  like  that  of  the  Salmonidse,  and  has  a 
dark  brown  band  crossing  its  center.  The  young  are  marked 
with  numerous  longitudinal  bands.  D.  10,  13  or  14;  P.  16; 
V.  1,  5;  A.  3,  11  or  12  ;  C.  17 ;  length,  2  ft."— (Storer,  Syn- 
opsis Fish.  N.  A.  36,  1846.)     (Copied.) 

Centrarchus  fasciatus  Storer,  1846. — "Body  compressed; 
back  arched  and  gibbous ;  of  a  dusky  bluish  color,  often  with 
transverse  bands;  anal  fin  with  three  spines.  D.  9,  1,  14;  P. 
18 ;  V.  5  ;  A.  3,  12  ;  C.  16f ;  length,  18  to  20  in."— (Storer, 
Synopsis  Fish.  K  A.  38,  1846.)     (Copied.) 

Centrarchus  obscurus  Storer,  1846. — "Body  not  gibbous, 
of  a  general  greenish  brown  or  dark  plive  color,  with  faint 
metallic  bronze  on  upper  parts;  beneath  lighter.  D.  9,  1,  12; 
P.  16;  V.  1,  5;  A.  3,  12;  C.  17f;  length,  6  in."— (Storer, 
Synopsis  Fishes  N.  A.  40,  1846.)     (Copied.) 

Grystes  fasciatus  Agassiz,  1850. —  "This  species  is  very 
closely   allied  to  the  Grystes  salmoides  of  the  Southern  States-, 


102  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

from  which  it  is,*  however,  distinguished  by  the  profile  of  the 
more  raised  back,  and  of  course  by  a  broader  body.  The  sur- 
face of  the  skull  is  uniformly  rounded  and  not  depressed,  as  in 
G.  salmoides;  the  proportions  of  the  head  compared  with  the 
body  are  the  same  as  in  this  latter,  but  the  mouth  is  less 
opened,  and  the  shorter  labials  do  not  reach  a  vertical  line 
drawn  across  the  hinder  margin  of  the  orbits,  whilst  they  exceed 
such  a  line  in  0.  salmoides;  the  teeth  are  arranged  like  cards, 
and  are  similar  in  both  species.  The  fins  upon  the  whole  seem 
to  be  cut  on  the  same  pattern  as  in  G.  salmoides,  but  when  we 
examine  them  attentively,  wre  see  that  they  are  all  stabbed  like 
the  body  itself;  the  ventrals  and  pectorals  shorter  and  more 
widened;  the  dorsal  and  anal  lower.  As  for  the  other  details 
of  their  structure  they  are  about  the  same,  as  we  may  see  from 
the  following  formula: 
Br.  6;  D.X,  14;  A.  111,10;  C.  7,  1,  8,  7,  1,  6 ;  V.  1,5;  P.  16. 

"The  scales  are  a  little  smaller,  but  of  the  same  form  as  in 
G.  salmoides;  the  radiating  strise  are  perhaps  less  marked;  they 
cover  the  opercular  apparatus  and  the  cheeks,  but  at  this  latter 
place  their  smaller  size  is  quite  remarkable ;  this  latter  charac- 
ter is  very  striking  when  we  compare  both  species. 

"Our  specimens  are  from  Lake  Huron ;  one  of  them  measures 
twelve  inches,  and  the  other  seven.  I  have  also  received  two 
specimens  from  Lake  Michigan,  through  the- care  of  Mr.  Samuel 
C.  Clarke,  the  largest  of  which  measures  eighteen  inches. 
Professor  Baird  forwarded  to  me  specimens  from  Lake  Champ- 
lain.  Dr.  DeKay  has  found  it  in  Lake  Oneida.  Finally,  this 
species  extends  to  Pennsylvania,  as  I  was  able  to  convince 
myself  by  two  specimens  collected  at  Toxburg,  and  for  which 

•  "  Grystes  scdmoneus  does  not  occur  in  the  Northern  nor  in  the  Middle 
States,  although  Dr.  DeKay  mentions  it  upon  the  authority  of  Cuvier,  who 
probably  mistook  specimens  of  our  Grystes  fasciatus  for  the  southern  spe- 
cies. Having,  however,  failed  to  discover  this  confusion,  Dr.  DeKay  de- 
scribes the  same  fish  again,  under  the  name  of  Qentrarchus  ohscurud." — 
(Agassiz,  Lake  Superior,  295,  1850.) 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.       103 

I  am  under  obligation  to  Professor  Baird."— (Agassiz,  Lake 
Superior,  295,  1850.) 

Centrarchus  fasciatus  Thompson,  1853. — "Form  some- 
what elliptical  compressed,  a  little  convex  on  the  sides  and 
pointed  forwards;  color  dark  greenish  above,  lighter  and  faintly 
mottled  on  the  sides,  and  grayish  white  beneath;  sides  of  the 
head  fine  light  green ;  scales  firm,  moderate  on  the  sides  and 
operculum,  but  very  small  on  the  cheeks,  back  of  the  neck, 
throat,  and  belly;  preoperculum  with  its  upper  limb  nearly 
vertical  and  nearly  at  right  angles  with  the  lower,  without 
spines  or  serratures ;  inter  and  suboperculum  upon  the  upper 
side  and  smooth  below;  operculum  triangular,  with  a  mem- 
branous prolongation  posteriorly,  and  the  bony  part  terminating 
posteriorly  in  two  thin  lobes  with  a  deep  notch  between  them, 
the  lower  lobe,  wrhich  is  the  largest,  ending  in  several  short 
spines;  teeth  small,  sharp,  and  numerous  in  both  jaws,  on  the 
lower  anterior  edges  of  the  palatine  bones,  and  on  the  vomer, 
with  a  small  cluster  near  the  base  of  the  triangular  tongue,  all 
standing  like  the  pile  on  velvet,  but  looking  a  little  inward,  those 
on  the  jaws  largest;  fins  small  brownish  and  their  soft  parts 
covered  with  a  rather  thick  mucous  skin;  the  dorsal  rounded 
behind,  low  at  the  junction  of  the  spinous  and  soft  parts,  and 
the  spinous  rays  capable  of  being  reclined,  imbricated,  and'con- 
cealed  in  a  longitudinal  groove  along  the  back  ;  ventrals  a  little 
behind  the  pectorals;  the  anal  under  the  posterior  portion  of  the 
dorsal,  and  extending  a  little  further  back ;  tail  slightly  emar- 
ginate,  with  the  lobes  rounded,  vent  a  trifle  nearest  the  posterior 
extremity;  eyes  moderately  large;  lower  jaw  a  trifle  longer  than 
the  upper,  with  several  visible  pores  along  its  margin;  length 
of  the  specimen  before  me,  19  in.  The  greatest  depth  equals 
one-third  of  the  length,  exclusive  of  the  tail. — Rays:  Br.  6;  P. 
17;  B.  1,  5;  D.  10,  15;  A.  3,  11;  C.  17. 

"The  Black  Bass,  by  which  name  this  fish  is  here  generally 
known,  ranks  as  one  of  the  best  fishes  taken  from  our  waters, 


104  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

but  as  is  apt  to  be  the  case  with  good  fishes,  it  is  much  less 
abundant  than  several  other  species  which  are  greatly  its  inferior 
in  point  of  quality.  It  is  usually  taken  with  the  seiue  and  its 
weight  varies  from  one  to  five"\>r  six  pounds." — (Thompson,  Hist. 
Vermont,  131,  1853.) 

Grystes  nigricans  Garlick,  1857. — "The  body  is  com- 
pressed, oval,  back  arched;  of  a  dusky  greenish  color,  often 
with  transverse  bands,  with  3  oblique  stripes  on  the  operculum 
or  cheek.  .  .  .  The  Black  Bass,  when  full  grown,  measures 
from  12  to  18  inches  in  length.  The  largest  one  by  far  that  I 
have  ever  seen  was  caught  last  summer  by  Prof.  Ackley  in  the 
Cuyahoga  Biver :  its  length  was  a  little  over  22  inches,  and  must 
have  weighed  8  pounds  or  more. 

"  This  fish  is  found  from  the  St.  Lawrence  to  the  tributaries 
of  the  Ohio,  and  perhaps  still  further  south ;  it  is  quite  common 
in  all  the  rivers  and  lakes  of  Ohio  and  all  the  Western  States. 

"  He  is  a  bold  biter,  and  when  hooked  fights  with  the  most  de- 
termined fury  to  the  very  last,  affording  the  best  of  sport  to  the 
angler,  and  is  excelled  but  by  a  very  few  fish  when  placed  upon 
the  table."— (Garlick,  Treat.  AH.  Prop.  Fish,  105,  1857.) 

Gristes  salmoiedes  Herbert,  1859. — "  This  fish,  in  general 
form,  closely  corresponds  with  that  last  described  \_0.  nigricans']. 
It  has  the  same  gibbous  back,  with  the  lateral  line  following  the 
dorsal  curve,  and  the  same  protruded  lowTer  jaw.  Its  teeth  are 
set  minutely  in  broad  bands  or  patches.  The  operculum  has 
two  moderate  points. 

"  Its  color  is  deep  greenish  brown,  with  a  bluish  black  spot  on 
the  point  of  the  operculum.  AVhen  young  it  has  25  or  30  longi- 
tudinal brownish  bands,  which  become  effaced  by  age. 

"The  first  dorsal  has  10  spines,  the  second  13  or  14  soft 
rays ;  the  pectorals  16  soft  rays ;  the  ventrals  1  spine  and  5  soft 
rays;  the  anal  3  spines  and  11  or  12  soft  rays;  the  caudal  fin, 
which  is  slightly  lunate,  has  17  soft  rays." — (Herbert,  Fish  and 
Fishing,  197,  1859.) 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        105 

Grystes  salmonoides  Gunther,  1859. — "B.  6-7;  D.  T1J.TT; 
A.  -yi?yj;  L.  Lat.  90..  Ciec.  Pylor,  14  and  more.  The  height 
of  the  body  is  nearly  one-fourth  of  the  total  length;  the  length 
of  the  head  is  contained  3J  therein.  Lower  jaw  prominent. 
Preoperculum  and  suprascapular  entire.  Operculum  with  two 
spines.  Praeorbital  with  or  without  some  slight  denticulations; 
pectoral  and  ventral  fins  short.  The  fourth  dorsal  spine  longest; 
the  second  of  the  anal  much  shorter  than  the  third.  Caudal  is 
slightly  notched.  Uniform  greenish  brown,  with  a  black  spot  at 
the  posterior  angle  of  the  operculum.  Young  with  indistinct 
longitudinal  streaks." — (Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes  Brit.  Mus.  I,  252, 
1859.) 

Centrarchus  fasciatus  Gunther,  1859. — "D.  |f ;  A.  T%. 
Body  gibbous;  the  height  is  3J  in  the  total  length.  Dusky 
bluish,  often  with  transverse  bands." — (Gunther,  Cat.  F'ishes 
Brit.  Mus.  I,  258,  1859.) 

Centrarchus  obscurus  Gunther,  1859. — "~D.  -f| ;  A.  T\. 
Body  rather  elongate,  not  gibbous ;  the  height  is  one-fourth  of 
the  total  length.  Uniform  greenish  brown." — (Gunther,  Cat. 
Fishes  Brit.  Mus.  I,  258,  1859.) 

Lepomis  achigan  Gill,  1860. — "  Rafinesque  first  indicated 
the  Cichla  fasciata  of  Le  Sueur,  or  Centrarchus  obscurus  of 
DeKay  under  the  name  of  Bodianus  achigan.  His  specific 
name  must  be  preserved." — (Gill,  Pro.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  20, 
1860.) 

Centrarchus  fasciatus  Roosevelt,  1862. — "  The  gill  cover 
has  two  flat  points,  the  teeth  are  minute,  while  the  back  fin, 
though  single,  is  partly  divided  into  2.  It  contains  10  hard 
and  14  soft  rays,  the  ventral  6,  the  first  one  almost  spinous,  the 
anal  3  spines,  the  first  very  short,  and  12  soft  rays,  and  the  tail 
16  soft  rays."— (Roosevelt,  Game  Fish  of  the  North,  218,  1862.) 

Grystes  nigricans  Norris,  1864. — "The  color  of  this  fish, 
which  appears  to  vary  with  the  locality  or  the  season,  is  gener- 
ally dark  olive  green  on  the  back,  shading  gradually  into  a 


106  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

brownish  yellow  on  the  sides;  belly  opaque  white.  Body  com- 
pressed oval,  back  arched,  belly  less  curved  than  the  superior 
outlines;  breadth  as  2  to  7.  Lateral  line  concurrent  writh  the 
back.  Head  small,  little  less  than  J  the  length  of  body;  pre- 
opercle  covered  with  small  scales,  scales  larger  on  opercle.  The 
eye  is  on  a  line  between  the  snout  and  posterior  angle  of  the 
opercle,  J  distant  from  snout,  and  is  about  f  of  an  inch  in 
diameter;  the  irides  are  dark  brown  above  and  pale  yellow 
below.  Nostrils  small,  double.  Tongue  toothless;  both  jaws 
with  small  brush-like  teeth,  small  patches  of  the  same  on  each 
side  the  pharynx  as  well  as  on  the  branchial  arches.  Branchial 
rays  7.  The  first  dorsal  fin  has  10  sharp  spines,  the  anterior  ray 
being  short.  The  second  dorsal  is  covered  at  its  base  with 
scales,  and  has  15  rays,  preceded  by  an  obtuse  spine  of  \  their 
length  ;  this  fin  is  arched  and  rounded  posteriorly.  The  pec- 
torals beginning  immediately  beneath  the  point  of  the  opercle 
are  yellow,  nearly  obovate  in  shape,  and  have  18  rays.  Ventrals 
commencing  slightly  posteriorly  have  5  branched  rays.  The 
anal  terminating  beneath  the  posterior  point  of  the  second  dorsal 
has  2  sharp,  and  1  longer  obtuse  spine,  and  12  branched  rays. 
The  caudal  is  very  slightly  forked  and  has  18  rays.  .  .  .  This 
fish  differs  from  the  Oswego  Bass,  to  which  it  has  so  close  a  re- 
semblance, in  having  a  smaller  head,  and  its  belly  less  protuber- 
ant, though  the  position  of  the  fins,  their  shape,  and  number  of 
spines  and  rays,  are  almost  identical." — (Norms,  Am.  Angler's 
Book,  103,  1864.) 

Microptertjs  achigan  Gill,  1866. — "The  common  small- 
mouthed  species  (Micropterus  achigan)  is,  in  truth,  well  entitled 
to  command  the  efforts  of  the  pisiculturist,  and  could  be  intro- 
duced most  advantageously  into  many  sheets  of  water  at  present 
affording  fishes  of  inferior  quality." — (Gill,  Rept.  Com.  Agric. 
408,  1866.) 

Grystes  fasciatus  Putnam,  1867. — "This  species,  which  is 
the  common  Lake  Bass  and  Black  Bass  of  the  great  lakes,  Lake 


NOMENCLATIVE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.       107 

Champlain  and  several  lakes  in  New  York,  and  which  also  ex- 
tends further  south,  has  been  introduced  into  Great  Sandy  Lake 
in  Wareham.  In  the  summer  of  1862  a  specimen  of  this  fish 
was  caught  in  Massachusetts  Bay  by  one  of  the  members  of  the 
state  legislature,  and  is  now  in  the  state  cabinet.  The  fish  had 
evidently  found  the  salt  water  not  much  to  its  liking,  as  it  was 
much  emaciated,  and  had  changed  so  in  its  general  appearance 
as  at  first  sight  hardly  to  be  recognized." — (Putnam,  Stover's 
Fishes  Mass.  278,  1867.) 

Micropterus  fasciatus  Cope,  1868. — ''This  specimen  is 
abundant  in  Holston  River;  individuals  are  identical  with  others 
from  Miami  River;  Indiana;  Wabash;  Kiskiminitas ;  from 
Michigan  and  Lake  George,  N.  Y.  It  grows  to  a  considerable 
size  and  is  much  valued  for  food. 

"The  absence  or  rarity  of  this  species  and  the  Ambloplites 
rupestris  in  the  Kanawha  River,  in  Giles  County  and  above  is 
remarkable.  During  a  residence  of  six  weeks  on  its  banks,  I 
never  caught  or  saw  a  specimen  of  either,  and  they  are  not 
clearly  known  to  the  fishermen." — (Cope,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci. 
Phil.  VI,  216,  1868.) 

Micropterus  salmoides  Gill,  1873. — "Scales  small,  in  about 
70  to  80  oblique  rows  between  the  head  and  caudal,  and  11  long- 
itudinal ones  between  the  back  and  lateral  line,  decreasing  very 
much  towards  the  nape  and  (especially)  the  breast;  forming  a 
sheath  encroaching  considerably  upwards  upon  the.  soft  portion 
and  last  spine  of  the  dorsal.  .  Head  transversely  (slightly) 
convex  between  the  orbits,  with  (1)  scales  on  the  operculum 
larger  than  those  of  the  nape,  (2)  on  the  suboperculum  (in 
front)  in  two  rows,  (3)  on  the  interoperculum  narrow,  mostly  in- 
vested in  the  membrane  (in  one  row),  (4)  on  the  cheeks  very 
small  (in  about  17  to  20  rows),  and  (5)  on  the  preoperculum 
none.  Mouth  moderate,  the  gape  from  the  symphysis  to  the 
angle  being  little  more  than  one-third  (1 :  2J-)  of  the  head's 
length.     Supra  maxillary  ending  in  advance  of  vertical  from  the 


108  BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

hinder  margin  of  the  orbit  (about  under  the  posterior  border  of 
the  pupil). 

"Dorsal  fin  with  its  anterior  spines  rapidly  graduated  (1=1 ; 
11=1-5;  111=1-90;  IV=2-05;  V=2-30)  to  the  fifth;  fifth, 
sixth  and  seventh  longest  and  about  equal  to  the  space  between 
the  back  and  lateral  line ;  the  succeeding  ones  very  gradually 
diminishing  to  the  ninth  which  is  shortest  (three-fourths — 1 : 
1*25 — of  fifth)  the  tenth  being  about  as  long  as  the  eighth  and 
about  a  third  shorter  than  the  longest,  i.  e.}  fifth. 

"  Dorsal  fin  with  scales  differentiated  from  those  of  the  sheath, 
and  advancing  high  up  on  the  membrane  behind  each  soft  ray 
(except  the  last  two  or  three). 

"  Anal  fin  with  scales  ascending  high  on  the  membrane  behind 
the  several  rays. 

"  Color,  in  young  and  adolescent,  bronzed  grayish,  with  (1) 
irregular  darker  spots,  tending  to  arrangement  in  three  series 
alternating  with  each  other  above  the  lateral  line,  and  (2)  indis- 
tinctly maculated  with  darker  and  yellow  below ;  head  dark 
above,  gray  on  sides,  with  three  oblique  or  horizontal  bands,  viz.: 

(1)  from  margin  of  upper  jaw  to  below  angle  of  preoperculum, 

(2)  from  lower  angle  of  orbit  to  margin  of  preoperculum,  (3) 
from  hinder  border  of  orbit  to  angle  of  operculum*  and  with  a 
crescentiform  band  (curved  forwards)  in  front  of  the  forehead 
between  the  eyes  ;  spinous  dorsal  simply  punctulated  with  dark  ; 
the  soft  with  a  series  of  bronzed  spots  between  the  respective 
rays;  and  greenish  with  a  marginal  band  of  grayish-white;  in 
adults  the  markings  are  more  or  less  obliterated  and  the  color  a 
uniform  dead  green." — (Gill,  Pro.  Am.  Asso.  Adv.  Sci.  XXII, 
B.  69,  1873.) 

Micropterus  salmoides  Uhler  and  Lugger,  1876. — "Elon- 
gated oval,  arched;  thick  and  rounded  along  the  back;  thinner 
and  nearly  straight  at  the  belly.  Head  very  large  and  thick, 
especially  between  the  eyes ,  snout  full  and  rounded ;  eyes  very 
large.     Head  and  body  dusky  above,  with  a  greenish  or  bronzed 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.       109 

tint-;  lower  jaw  and  belly  white ;  along  the  flanks  runs  a  dusky- 
band,  more  or  less  distinct  according  to  the  age  of  the  fish;  a 
bluish-black  spot  on  the  point  of  the  opercle.  Total  length  14 
inches,  but  occasionally  24  inches. 

«  Fin  rays :— D.  9,14;  P.  14;  V.  1,5;  A.  3,12;  C.  19."— 
(Uhler  &  Lugger,  Fishes  of  Md.  <^Bept.  Fish  Com.  Md. 
Ill,  1876.) 

Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  1877. — "In  the  Etowah, 
Oostanaula,  and  Coosa  Rivers  [Ga,],  .  .  .  The  yellow  and 
black  caudal  markings,  so  striking  in  young  specimens  from  the 
Ohio  River,  and  which  suggested  to  Rafinesque  the  name  of 
Calliurus,  are  not  well  shown  by  my  specimens.  The  lower  fins 
are  unusually  red,  and  there  is  a  tendency  to  the  formation  of 
parallel  lines  of  dusky  spots  along  the  rows  of  scales.  These 
peculiarities  perhaps  indicate  a  permanent  variety." — (Jordan, 
Ann.  N.  Y.  Lye.  Nat.  Hist.  XI,  315,  1877.) 

Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  1877. — "The  peculiar  col- 
oration of  the  caudal  fin  which  suggested  the  name  of  Galliums, 
1  base  yellow,  middle  blackish,  tip  white,'  belongs  among  Ohio 
fishes  only  to  the  young  of  the  Black  Bass.  Calliurus,  therefore, 
as  shown  by  Professor  Gill,  is  a  synonym  of  Micropterus,  and 
can  not  be  applied  to  a  distinct  genus." — (Jordan,  Contrib.  N. 
A:  Ich.  No.  1.     <Bidl.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  IX,  18,  1877.) 

Micropterus  salmoides  Hallock,  1877. — "Head  and  body 
dusky  above,  often  with  a  greenish  or  bronzed  tint;  lower  jaw 
and  belly  white ;  opercle  with  a  bluish-green  spot  at  its  angle. 
Along  the  flanks  runs  a  dusky  band,  which  is  more  or  less  ap- 
parent according  to  the  age  of  the  fish.  It  is  most  remarked  in 
the  young.  Fins  yellowish." — (Hallock,  Sportsman's  Gazetteer, 
373,  1877.) 

Micropterus  salmoides  Jordan,  1878. — "Dark  green;  young 
brighter  and  more  or  less  barred  and  spotted,  but  without  lateral 
band ;  tail  yellow  at  base,  then  black,  and  edged  with  white ; 
opercle  with  oblique  olivaceous  streaks ;  third  dorsal  spine  half 


110  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

larger  than  first;  dorsal  notch  rather  shallow;  scales  smaller 
than  in  M.  pallidus — eleven  rows  between  lateral  line  and  dorsal; 
mouth  smaller;  anal  nearly  scaleless ;  D.  X,  13;  A.  HI,  11; 
lat.  1.  70  to  80.  Great  lakes  and  streams  from  L.  Champlain 
S.  and  W.;  common  in  New  York  and  in  most  regions  west  of 
the  Alleghanies;  introduced  eastward."  —  (Jordan,  Manual 
Vertebrates  E.   U.  S.  2d  ed.  236,  1878.) 


MICROPTERUS    SALMOIDES  (Lac.)    Henshall. 
THE  LARGE-MOUTHED  BLACK  BASS. 

SYNONYMY. 

1802 — Labrus  salmoides  Lacepede,  Hist.  Nat.  des  Poiss.  IV, 
.     716. 

Grystes  salmoides  Agassiz,  Lake  Superior,  295,  1850. 
Grystes  salmoides  Holbrook,  Ich.  So.  Car.  25,  1855,  and 

2d  ed.  28,  1860. 
Grystes  salmoides  Norris,  Am.  Angler's  Book,  99,  1864. 

(In  part.) 
Dioplites  salmoides  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  MSS,  Miss. 

Sci.  au  Mexique,  1874. 
Micropterus  salmoides  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci. 

au  Mexique:  ined. 
1820 — Lepomis  pallida  Rafinesque,  Ich.  Ohiensis,  30. 

Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,  Ann.  N.  Y.  Lye.  Nat.  Hist. 

XI,  314,  1877. 
Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  IX 

and  X,  1877. 
Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  XII, 

1878. 
Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,   Hayd.   Geol.   Surv.    Ter. 

Bull.  IV,  No.  2,  435,  1878. 


NOMENCLATURE    AND   MORPHOLOGY.  Ill 

Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,    Man.  Vert.   E.  U.  S.  2d 

ed.,  236,  1878. 
Mleropterus  pallidus  Goode,   Pro.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.   II, 

115,  1879. 
Micropterus  pallidus  Goode  &  Bean,  Bull.  Essex  Inst. 

XI,  19,  1879. 
Micropterus  pallidus   Goode  &  Bean,  Pro.  U.  S.  Nat. 

Mus.  II,  138,  1879. 
Micropterus  pallidus  Hexshall,  Rept.  Fish  Cora.   Ohio, 

31,  1879. 
Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,  Pro.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  Ill, 

17,  1880. 
1822 — Cichla  floridana  Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  II, 

219. 
Micropterus  floridanus  Goode,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  VI, 

63,  1876.     (Name  only.) 
1828 — Huro  nigricans  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist.  Nat.  des 

Poiss.  II,  124. 
Huro  nigricans  Jardine,  Nat.  Lib.  I,  Perches,  108,  1835. 
Huro  nigricans   Richardson,   Fau.   Bor.    Am.    Ill,    4, 

1836. 
Huro  nigricans  DeKay,  Fishes  N.  Y.  15,  1842. 
Huro  nigricans  Storer,  Syn.  Fishes  N.  A.  25,  1846. 
Grystes  nigricans  Agassiz,  Lake  Superior,  297,  1850. 
Grystes  nigricans  Herbert,  Fish  and  Fishing,  195,  1859. 
Huro  nigricans  Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes  Brit.  Mus.  I,  255, 

1859. 
Huro  nigricans  Roosevelt,  Game   Fish  of  the  North, 

219,  1862. 
Micropterus  nigricans  Cope,  Pro.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  83, 

1865.     (Name  only.) 
Micropterus  nigricans  Gill,  Rept.  Com.  Agric.  407, 1866. 
Micropterus  nigricans  Cope,  Pro.   Am.   Phil.   Soc.   451, 

1870. 


112  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

Micropterus  nigricans  Gill,  Pro.    Am.  Asso.   Adv.    Sci. 

B.  70,  1873. 
Micropterus    nigricans  Jordan,    Ind.    Geo!.    Surv.   214, 

1874. 
Micropterus  nigricans  Jordan,  Man*.  Vert  E.  U.  S.  229, 

1876. 
Micropterus  nigricans  Hallock,  Sportsman's  Gazetteer, 

273,  1877.     (In  part.) 
1854 — Grystes    nobilis  Agassiz,   Am.    Jour.    Sci.   Art,  XVII, 

298. 
Grystes  nobilis  Putnam,  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.   Zool.  I,   6, 

1863.     (Name  only.) 
1854 — Grystes  nuecemis  Baird  &  Girard,  Pro.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci. 

Phil.  VII,  25. 
Dioplites  nuecensis  Girard,  U.  S.  Pac.  R.  R.  Surv.  X, 

Fishes,  4,  1858. 
Grystes   nuecensis   Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes  Brit.   Mus.  I, 

252,  1859.     (Name  only.) 
Dioplites  nuecensis  Girard,  U.  S.  Mex.  Bound.  Surv.  II, 

3,  1859. 
Dioplites  nuecensis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  MSS.  Miss. 

Sci.  au  Mexique,  1874. 
Micropterus  nuecensis  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  Miss.  Sci. 

au  Mexique :  ined. 
1857 — Grystes  megastoma  Garlick,  Treat.  Art.  Prop.  Fish,  108, 

1857. 
1874 — Dioplites  treculii  Vaillant  &  Bocourt,  MSS.  Miss.  Sci. 

au  Mexique,  1874.     (Zoologie,  pt.  IV,  plate  IV,  f.  2. 

No   description ;    the    species   since    identified   by  its 

authors  with  M.  nuecensis.) 

Etymology:   Salmoides,  trout-like;  salmon-like. 
Habitat  :  Red  River  of  the  North  to  Florida ;  Virginia 
to  Mexico;  introduced  eastward. 


NOMENCLATURE    AND    MORPHOLOGY.  113 


Specific  Descriptions. 

Labrus  salmoides  Lacepede,  1802. — "  Neuf  rayons  aiguil- 
lones  et  treize  rayons  articules  a  la  nageoire  du  dos ;  treize  rayon 
a  la  nageoire  de  l'anus ;  l'opercule  compose  de  quatre  lames,  et 
termine  par  une  prolongation  anguleuse ;  deux  orifices  a,  chaque 
narine;  la  couleur  generate  d'un  brun  noiratre."  [Br.  6;  P. 
13;  V.  6;  C.  18.]— (Lacepede,  Hist  Nat  des  Poiss.  IV,  716, 
1802.) 

Lepomis  pallida  Rafinesque,  1820. — "  Olivaceous  above, 
white  beneath,  a  brown  spot  at  the  base  of  the  lateral  line,  an 
obtuse  appendage  on  the  opercnle,  spine  behind  it :  3  faint 
obliqual  streaks  on  the  gill-covers ;  lower  jaw  longer :  tail  forked, 
pale  yellow,  tip  brown. 

"Not  uncommon  in  the  Ohio,  Miami,  Hockhocking,  etc.  Vul- 
gar name,  Yellow  Bass ;  Common  Bass,  etc.  Length  from  4 
to  12  inches.  Shape  elliptic,  diameter  one-fourth  of  the  total 
length.  Fins  olivaceous,  without  streaks,  dorsal  depressed  or 
interrupted  in  the  middle,  9  spiny  rays  to  the  fore  part,  the 
medial  longer,  1  spiny  ray  and  14  soft  rays  to  the  hind  part. 
Anal  fin  rounded  13  rays,  whereof  2  are  spiny  and  short.  Pec- 
torals rounded  with  14  rays ;  tail  with  18 ;  thoracics  with  6. 
Eyes  large,  black,  iris  brown  with  a  gold  ring.  Lateral  line 
following  the  back,  straight  near  the  tail."— (Rafinesque,  Ich. 
Ohi.  30,  1820.) 

Cichla  floridana  Le  Sueur,  1822. — "Dorsal  fin  with  9 
spinous  rays  anteriorly,  and  15  soft  ones  posteriorly ;  anal  with 
3  spinous  rays  and  twelve  divided  soft  ones. 

"  The  total  length  of  this  fish  is  one  foot  five  inches,  in  depth 
5  in.  towards  the  dorsal  fin;  the  body  is  attenuated;  more  ob- 
tuse anteriorly ;  snout  short ;  inferior  jaw  a  little  longer  than 
superior  one  ;  mouth  deeply  divided  ;  intermaxillary  bo»e  long; 
maxillary  bone  prolonged  unto  the  end  of  the  eye ;  teeth  very 
small,  equal,  approximate ;  card  like  before,  smaller  and  more 
10 


114  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

delicate  at  the  angles  of  the  mouth,  on  the  vomer  and  on  the 
wings  of  the  palate  they  are  small  and  like  velvet ;  eye  round, 
near  the  summit  of  the  head ;  scales  rounded,  large  upon  the 
sides  near  the  pectoral  fins,  diminishing  towards  the  back,  and 
in  approaching  the  tail  and  the  abdomen,  smaller,  and  subequal 
on  all  the  pieces  of  the  operculum;  the  snout  and  the  upper 
part  of  the  head  are  destitute  of  scales;  mandible  and  post 
mandible  very  strong  and  broad  ;  dorsal  fin  divided  into  two 
nearly  equal  parts,  the  anterior  spinous,  elevated  before,  very  low 
behind  and  but  little  arquated ;  the  posterior  part  more  elevated 
and  rounded ;  the  anal  fin  short,  extending  beyond  the  dorsal 
as  in  the  species  of  the  Ohio,  so  that  its  middle  corresponds 
with  the  posterior  base  of  the  dorsal ;  the  rays  of  the  fins  are 
also  much  divided  and  articulated ;  pectorals  small  and  rounded  ; 
thoracic  fins  subtriangular,  as  long  as  the  pectorals;  operculum 
without  any  denticulation,  or  spine ;  lateral  line  oblique,  undu- 
lated ;  the  color  of  this  dried  specimen  is  black  on  the  back  and 
lighter  towards  the  abdomen. 

"  We  are  indebted  for  this  species  to  the  researches  of  Messrs. 
Maclure,  Ord,  Say,  and  Peale,  who  brought  it  from  East  Flor- 
ida."— (Le  Sueur,  Jour.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  II,  219,  1822.) 

Huro  nigricans  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  1828. — "II  a  le 
corps  un  peu  plus  haut  a  proportion  que  la  perche ;  le  museau 
un  peu  plus  court ;  le  front  moins  concave ;  sa  machoire  inf'eri- 
eure  se  porte  un  peu  plus  en  avant.  Sur  son  front  se  voient  des 
stries  fines  et  nombreuses,  mais  toutes  dirigees  vers  le  bord  de 
l'orbite.  II  a  des  dents  en  velours  aux  memes  endroits  que  la 
perche ;  son  maxillaire  a  le  bord  superieur  dilate ;  son  front,  son 
museau,  ses  machoires,  n'ont  point  d  ecailles;  mais  il  y  en  a  sur 
son  crane,  sa  tempe,  toute  sa  joue  et  toutes  ses  pieces  operculai- 
res,  leurs  bords  exceptes.  Le  limbe  de  l'opercule  en  est  depour- 
vu,  et  son  bord  parfaitement  entier  et  sans  dentalures  s'arrondit 
dans  le  bas,  apres  avoir  fait  un  tres-leger  arc  rentrant.  L'oper- 
cule osseux  se  termine  en  deux  pointes  plates,  separees  par  une 


NOMENCLATURE   AND   MORPHOLOGY.  115 

petite  £nchancrure  aigue  et  oblique.  Aucune  des  pieces  de 
l'epaule  n'a  de  dentelure.  La  premiere  dorsale,  beaucoup  plus 
petite  qu'a  la  perche,  n'a  que  six  rayons,  et  demeure  assez 
eloignee  de  la  seconde,  qui  est  plus  elevee,  et  peut  avoir  avec  ses 
deux  epines  douze  ou  treize  rayons  mous.  (Elle  est  en  partie 
mutilee  dans  notre  individu.)  L'auale  a  trois  epines  et  onze 
rayons  mous;  elle  est  aussi  un  peu  plusgrande  a  proportion  qu'a 
la  perche.  Quant  aux  pectorales  et  aux  ventrales,  elles  sont  a 
peu  pres  pareilles  a'celles  de  la  perche,  et  la  caudale  aussi. 

B.  7;  D.  6.-2,12?     A.  3,  11;  C.  17;  P.  15;  V.  1,5. 

"On  compte  soixante  et  quelques  ecailles  entre  l'ouie  et  la 
caudale,  et  vingt-cinq  ou  vingt-six  entre  la  premiere  dorsale  et  le 
ventre.     Elles  paraissent  toutes  lisses  et  entieres. 

"La  couleur  de  ce  poisson,  que  nous  n'avons  vu  que  desseche, 
parait  avoir  approche  de  celle  de  la  carpe.  Son  dos  est  d'un 
brun  verdatre,  qui  s'affaiblit  sur  les  cotes,  et  passe  sous  le  ventre 
au  blanc-jau  natre  argente ;  une  ligne  grisatre  suit  le  milieu  de 
chaque  rangee  longitudinale  d'ecailles. 

"  L'individu  que  nous  avons  eu  sous  les  yeux,  etait  long  de 
seize  pouces. 

"Nous  laisserons  a  l'espece  l'epithete  qu'elle  porte  dans  son 
pays  natal,  Huro  nigricans." — (Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  Hist. 
Nat.  des  Poiss.  II,  124,  1828.) 

Huro  nigricans  Jardine,  1835. — "The  first  is  the  Black 
Bass  or  Black  Perch  of  the  English  residents  on  the  banks  of 
the  Huron.  Its  flesh  is  firm  and  white,  and  it  is  much  esteemed 
during  the  summer.  The  upper  parts  of  the  fish  are  of  an  olive 
brown,  changing  into  yellowish  wThite  on  the  belly,  and  along 
the  central  ridge  of  each  scale  is  a  line  of  the  same  color  with 
the  upper  parts,  giving  it  a  striped  appearance  on  the  sides; 
the  body  is  rather  deep  in  proportion  ;  the  under  jaw  slightly 
projects,  and  the  head,  cheeks  and  opercles  are  scaled;  the  teeth 
are  nearly  similar  to  those  of  the  perch  ;  the  first  dorsal  is  much 
less,  contains  only  six  rays,  and  is  placed  at  a  considerable  dis- 


116  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

tance  in  front  of  the  second  ;  the  anal  fin  is  again  considerably 
larger  in  proportion  and  has  three  spiny,  with  eleven  soft  rays ; 
the  others  are  very  similar  to  those  of  the  perch.  Cuvier's  spec- 
imen was  16  in.  in  length,  and  although  the  flesh  is  esteemed, 
and  seems  abundant  in  its  native  country,  little  is  yet  known 
regarding  it." — (Jardine,  Nat.  Lib.  I,  Perches,  108,  1835.) 

Huro  nigricans  Richardson,  1836. — "  Profile  elliptical,  the 
ellipsis  commencing  acutely  in  the  somewhat  pointed  chin  and 
conical  head,  but  passing  gradually  into  the  thickish  tail;  the 
depth  of  the  body  is  greatest  under  the  first  dorsal  and  appears  to 
be  about  equal  to  the  length  of  the  head,  or  one-third  of  the 
total  length,  excluding  the  caudal ;  head  flat  above,  covered  with 
scales  as  far  as  the  posterior  margin  of  the  orbit ;  the  forehead 
shows  a  slight  median  ridge  with  a  more  prominent  lateral  one, 
and  there  are  many  fine  streaks  on  the  upper  margin  of  the 
orbit;  the  anterior  suborbital  bone  is  marked  by  some  short  di- 
verging ridges,  and  the  under  and  posterior  margin  of  the  orbit 
is  more  distinctly  roughened  by  many  small  irregular  promi- 
nences ;  the  orbit  is  circular,  situated  close  to  the  forehead,  and 
two  of  its  own  diameters  and  one-half  above  the  articulation  of 
the  lower  jaw  ;  it  is  also  a  diameter  and  one-half  behind  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  upper  jaw,  and  four  diameters  from  the  point  of 
the  suboperculum  or  most  posterior  part  of  the  gill  cover ;  the 
mouth  acquires  a  somewhat  vertical  aspect  from  the  chin  or  tip 
of  the  lower  jaw,  projecting  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  beyond 
it,  and  from  its  opening  descending  from  the  plane  of  the  fore- 
head, at  a  considerable  angle  as  it  runs  backwards ;  the  articula- 
tion of  the  lower  jaw  is  opposite  the  posterior  margin  of  the 
orbit;  the  labials  have  a  lengthened  triangular  form,  the  narrow 
apex  only  passing  under  the  edge  of  the  suborbital  bone ;  the 
posterior  dilated  and  truncated  extremity  projects  considerably 
beyond  the  tip  of  the  intermaxillary  and  extends  further  back 
than  the  orbit;  it  is  further  widened  by  the  addition  of  a  superior 
piece,  or  apoplysis  whose  corner  is  rounded ;  there  are  no  pores 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.       117 

in  the  lower  jaw,  but  two  circular  openings  of  canals  in  the 
bone  are  visible  through  the  dried  skin  which  covers  them. 
The  opposing  surfaces  of  the  intermaxillaries  and  lower  jaw  are 
covered  with  densely-crowded,  curved,  fine  card-like  teeth,  or 
as  they  ought,  perhaps,  to  be  called,  in  conformity  with  Cuvier's 
nomenclature,  rather  coarse  "dents  en  velours;"  the  dental  sur- 
face being  broad  anteriorly  and  narrowing  to  a  point  behind  ; 
the  transverse,  anterior,  projecting  extremity  of  the  vomer  and 
the  outer  edges  of  the  palate  bones  are  armed  with  fine  teeth  "  en 
velours;"  the  dental  surface  of  the  latter  narrowing  to  a  point, 
posteriorly,  like  those  of  the  mandibles ;  there  is,  however,  a  de- 
tached but  contiguous  patch  just  beyond  this  point  on  the  edge  of 
the  palate ;  the  whole  vault  of  the  palate  is  smooth ;  the  tongue,  as 
we  have  already  mentioned,  has  been  removed,  and  if  Mr.  Todd's 
account  of  the  pharyngeal  teeth  be  correct,  they  are  not  distributed 
into  the  same  number  of  patches  as  in  the  perch.  Preoperculum 
having  a  narrow  upright  limb,  covered  with  smooth  skin,  there 
being  a  single  scale  only  just  above  its  angle ;  the  lower  limb  is 
wider  and  has  three  scales  in  a  single  row  which  does  not  cover 
half  its  surface  ;  the  whole  edge  of  the  bone  is  smooth  and  even, 
with  the  exception  of  a  very  shallow,  wide  notch  at  the  base  of 
the  upper  limb.  The  interoperculum  is  comparatively  broad,  its 
depth  exceeding  that  of  either  the  preoperculum  or  suboperculum, 
it  is  covered  by  a  row  of  ten  scales,  which  leave  its  under  border 
naked ;  the  bony  operculum  has  an  acute  oblique  notch  in  its 
posterior  margin,  producing  two  thin  points ;  the  lower  point  is 
closely  applied  to  the  apex  of  the  suboperculum,  forming  with  it 
one  obtuse  thin  plate,  which,  together  with  the  upper  point, 
are  concealed  by  the  membrane  which  borders  them ;  the  under 
margin  of  the  suboperculum  is  slightly  waved,  forming  two  ob- 
scure lobes ;  as  in  many,  or  perhaps  in  most  of  the  percoidese 
with  scaly  gill  covers,  the  margins  of  the  pieces  composing  them 
are  covered  with  a  smooth  skin;  there  is  even  a  wider  naked 
place  than  usual  behind  the  points  of  the  operculum,  and  the 


118  BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

anterior  border  of  that  bone  is  as  wide  and  prominent  as  the 
limb  of  the  preoperculum  to  which  it  adjoins ;  the  forehead, 
snout,  infraorbital  bones,  and  margins  of  the  orbits,  mandibles, 
labials,  branchiostegous  membranes  and  edges  of  the  different 
opercular  bones,  are  covered  with  a  smooth  skin ;  the  rest  of 
the  head,  including  the  temples  and  the  top  of  the  cranium  as 
far  as  the  "  linea  rostri  bnsalis,"  are  clothed  with  tiled  scales; 
the  bones  lining  the  posterior  edge  of  the  gill  openings  are  like- 
wise scaleless,  and  their  edges,  though  undulated,  are  destitute 
of  spines  or  serratures;  the  nape  is  supported  by  a  median  ridge 
of  the  cranium  and  a  thin  lateral  one  on  each  side  equally  high  ; 
there  are  also  several  interspinous  bones  anterior  to  the  first 
dorsal;  the  branchiostegous  membrane  contains  6  curved  rays, 
the  anterior  ones  cylindrical,  the  posterior  ones  becoming  more 
and  more  flat  and  wider.  Br.  6;  D.  6-2,  8  ?:  P.  15 ;  V.  1,  5; 
A.  3,  11 ;  C.  17f 

"  The  pectorals  consist  of  fifben  rays,  the  first  of  which  is  short 
and  its  articulations  very  obscure,  being  visible  only  at  the  tip 
and  with  a  lens;  the  ventrals  are  attached  directly  under  the 
pectorals  and  contain  6  rays,  of  which  the  first  is  spinous  and 
one-third  shorter  than  the  succeeding  ones;*  the  first  dorsal  con- 
sists of  6  acute  spinous  rays,  having  the  connecting  membrane 
notched  between  them ;  the  first  ray  is  one-third  shorter  than  the 
third,  which  is  the  longest  and  stands  about  an  inch  behind  the 
insertion  of  the  pectorals  and  ventrals,  the  fourth  and  fifth  are 
nearly  as  long  as  the  third ;  the  second  dorsal  is  one-third  higher 
than  the  first,  and  commences  nearly  an  inch  behind  the  posterior 
insertion  of  the  membrane  of  the  latter,  the  2  anterior  rays 
are  spinous  and  separated  by  membrane — the  first  of  them  equal 
in  height  to  the  corresponding  ray  of  the  first  dorsal,  the  first 
ray  is  simple  but  articulated ;  the  succeeding  ones  are  branched 
at  the  tips,  and  nearly  equal  to  each  other,  the  seventh  being, 
however,  rather  the 'highest;  the  fifth  ray  is  opposite  the  anus, 
and  the  tenth  ....  is  opposite  to  the  fifth  of  the  anal; 


NOMENCLATURE    AND    MORPHOLOGY.  119 

the  anal  contains  15  rays,  the  two  first  of  them  shorter,  spinous, 
and  very  acute,  the  branched  rays  equal  those  of  the  dorsal  in 
height;  the  first  dorsal  ray  stands  half  an  inch  behind  the  anus. 
If  the  fish,  exclusive  of  the  caudal  fin,  be  divided  into  three 
parts,  the  head  will  form  one,  and  the  first  spine  of  the  anal 
will  stand  at  the  commencement  of  the  third  ;  the  space  between 
the  anal  and  the  caudal  considerably  exceeds  that  occupied  by 
the  attachment  of  the  former;  the  caudal  is  somewhat  rounded 
and  very  slightly  emarginated,  its  base  is  covered  with  small 
scales,  which  terminate  by  an  even  line  rounded  off  on  the  three 
exterior  rays,  while  they  cover  the  accessory  short  rays  above 
and  below  to  their  tips,  thus  producing  a  notch  at  each  end  of 
the  line.  The  scales  are  rather  large,  the  exterior  edge  forming 
a  segment  of  a  circle,  and  being  quite  smooth,  the  sides  almost 
parallel,  and  the  base  truncated  and  crenated  in  correspondence 
with  10  or  11  furrows  which  diverge  from  the  center,  like  the 
sticks  of  a  fan ;  there  are  60  scales  on  the  lateral  line  exclusive 
of  jfbout  9  smaller  ones,  forming  a  continuation  of  the  same 
row  on  the  base  of  the  caudal,  and  26  in  a  vertical  row  beneath 
the  first  dorsal,  of  which  7  are  above  the  row  which  forms  the 
lateral  line;  a  linear  inch- measured  along  the  sides  includes  5 
scales  and  one-half;  the  scales  on  the  gill  covers  are  a  little 
smaller  than  those  on  the  body,  those  on  the  cheeks  are  still 
less,  and  the  scales  on  the  caudal  and  on  the  space  before  the 
ventrals  are  the  smallest  of  all;  a  scale  taken  from  the  lateral 
line  under  the  first  dorsal  is  4|  lines  wide  and  3J  lines  long; 
the  lateral  line  runs  parallel  to  the  curvature  of  the  back  and 
is  distant  from  the  belly — it  is  marked  by  a  tubular  elevation 
on  each  scale  ;  back  and  sides  dark,  with  a  faint  longitudinal 
streak  through  the  center  of  each  row  of  scales ;  belly  yellowish 
white." — (Richardson,  Faun.  Bor.  Am.  Ill,  4,  1836.) 

Huro  nigricans  DeKay,  1842.— "General  form  that  of  the 
Perch ;  greatest  depth  of  body  under  the  first  dorsal,  and  equal 
to  one-third  the  length  of  body;  scales  large,  smooth,  covering 


120  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

the  head  as  far  as  the  orbit,  and  extending  also  on  the  opercles ; 
lateral  line  tubular,  concurrent  with  the  dorsal  outline;  head 
flattened  above  with  striae  diverging  to  the  orbits.  Lower  jaw 
directed  obliquely  upwards  and  projecting  0.25  beyond  the  upper; 

velvet-like  teeth  on  the  jaws,  vomer,  and  palatines ;  tongue ; 

the  bony  opercle  has  an  acute,  oblique  notch  on  its  posterior 
margin,  producing  two  thin  points  ;  the  branchial  membrane,  ac- 
cording to  Cuvier,  with  7  rays.  Richardson  enumerates  but  6. 
The  first  dorsal  small ;  its  third  ray  longest,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
nearly  as  long;  the  second  dorsal  an  inch  behind  the  first  and 
one-third  higher;  the  two  first  rays  spinous,  short;  the  first  ray 
articulated,  simple,  the  remainder  branched.  In  the  only  spec- 
imen hitherto  examined  the  rays  of  this  fin  were  injured,  but 
Cuvier  supposes  there  must  have  been  12  or  13,  only  8 
were  visible;  pectorals  with  the  first  ray  very  short;  ventrals 
immediately  beneath  them ;  anal,  with  its  branched  rays,  equal 
in  height  to  those  of  second  dorsal ;  caudal  slightly  emarginate, 
with  its  tips  rounded.  Color,  taken  from  a  dried  specimen,  back 
and  sides  dark,  with  a  faint  longitudinal  streak  through  the 
center  of  each  row  of  scales;  belly  yellowish  white.  Length  17.5; 
Fins,D.  6-2,  8,  or  12;  P.  15;  V.  1,  5 ;  A.  3,  11 ;   C.  17f 

"This  is  a  remarkably  firm  and  well  flavored  fish,  taken 
readily  with  the  hook  during  the  summer  months  in  Lake 
Huron,  where  it  is  called  Black  Bass.  It  will  probably  be  found 
in  Lake  Erie,  and  of  course  within  the  limits  of  the  State.  As 
I  have  not  seen  it,  I  have  availed  myself  of  the  descriptions  and 
figure  given  by  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes.  Its  history  is  yet 
imperfect,  nor  with  our  present  knowledge  can  we  assign  it  pos- 
itively its  proper  place  in  the  family." — (DeKay,  Fishes  N.  Y. 
15,  1842.) 

Huro  nigricans  Storer,  1846. — "Above  of  an  olive  brown, 
changing  into  yellowish  white  on  the  belly  and  along  the  central 
ridge  of  each  scale  is  a  line  of  the  same  color  with  the  upper 
parts,  giving  it   a  striped  appearance  on   the   sides;   the   first 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        121 

dorsal  fin  is  smaller  than  that  of  the  Perch,  and  is  placed  at  a 
considerable  distance  in  front  of  the  second ;  the  anal  fin  is  some- 
what larger  in  proportion.  D.  6-2,  12;  P.  15;  V.  1,  5;  A.  3,  11 ; 
C.  17 ;  Cuv.  &  Val.  D.  6-2,  8 ;  P.  15 ;  V.  1,  5 ;  A.  3,  11  ;  C. 
17f  Rich."— (Stoker,  Synopsis  Fish.  K  A.  25,  1846.)    (Copied.) 

Grystes  nigricans  Agassiz,  1850. — "  Huro  nigricans  Cuv. 
is  another  species  of  the  lower  Canadian  lakes,  which  occurs  also 
in  Lake  Champlain.  The  generic  distinctions  from  Grystes  does 
not,  however,  rest  upon  sufficient  characters  to  warrant  its  pres- 
ervation in  the  system  of  fishes;  I  shall,  therefore,  call  it  in 
future  Grystes  nigricans.  It  is  a  very  common  fish  in  some  of 
the  lakes,  and  highly  esteemed  as  an  article  of  food.  Through- 
out the  lake  region  it  is  known  under  the  name  of  Black  Bass, 
and  may  be  seen  in  large  numbers  in  the  enclosure  under  the 
gallery  of  the  Cataract  Hotel  at  Niagara.  Dr.  DeKay  describes 
it  as  Centrarchus  fasciatus,  although  he  copies  also  Cuvier's  de- 
scription and  figure  of  Huro  nigricans,  but  without  perceiving 
their  indentity. 

"In  the  northern  lakes  there  is  only  one  species  of  true  Cen- 
trarchus found,  the  Centrarchus  ceneiis;  but  it  does  not  occur  as 
far  north  as  Lake  Superior,  though  it  is  common  in  Lake  Huron 
and  the  other  great  lakes." — (Agassiz,  Lake  Superior,  297, 1850.) 

Grystes  nobilis  Agassiz,  1854. — "The  species  from  Hunts- 
ville,  known  there  under  the  name  of  trout,  differs  equally  from 
the  northern  species  mentioned  in  my  '  Lake  Superior,'  and 
from  that  of  the  Southern  States  described  by  Cuvier  and  Valen- 
ciennes as  Grystes  salmoneus.  Its  snout  is  shorter,  the  posterior 
end  of  the  upper  maxillary  extends  beyond  the  hinder  border  of 
the  eye,  the  head  is  higher,  and  the  scales  much  larger  in  the 
dorsal  as  well  as  in  the  ventral  regions.  No  teeth  on  the  tongue. 
I  call  this  species  provisionally  Grystes  nobilis  Ag.  It  reaches  a 
large  size,  and  weighs  occasionally  from  10  to  14  pounds." 
—(Agassiz,  Am.  Jour.  Sci.  Arts,  XVII,  297,  1854.) 

Grystes  nueoensis  Baird  &  Guard,  1854. — •  •  Head  forming 
11 


122  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

T4g-  of  the  entire  length.  Mouth  deeply  cleft ;  its  angle  reach- 
ing a  vertical  passing  backwards  of  the  eye;  lower  jaw  longer 
than  upper.  Eyes  rather  large;  their  diameter  contained  six 
times  in  the  length  of  side  of  head.  Scales  on  the  cheeks  a 
little  smaller  than  those  on  the  opercular  apparatus.  First 
dorsal  lower  than  the  second,  caudal  subcrescentic  posteriorly. 
Anal  extended  a  little  further  behind  the  second  dorsal,  though 
shorter  and  less  deep.  D.  X,  13;  A.  Ill,  11;  C.  4,  1,  8,  8, 
1,  3;  V.  1,5;  P.  15. 

"Ground  color  of  back,  black  clouded  with  greyish  brown. 
Sides  dull-yellow  gray,  with  an  interrupted  darker  band.  Be- 
neath light  yellow.  Rio  Frio  and  Rio  Nueces,  Texas." — (Baird 
&  Girard,  Pro.  Ac.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil.  VII.  25,  1854.) 

Grystes  salmoides  Holbrook,  1855. — "Head  and  body 
dusky  above,  often  with  a  greenish  or  bronzed  tint ;  lower  jaw 
and  belly  white ;  opercle  with  a  bluish-green  spot  at  its  angle. 
D.  9,  14;  P.  14;  V.  1,  5;  A.  3,  12;  C.  19. 

"This  fish  is  of  an  elongated  oval  form,  arched;  thick  and 
rounded  along  the  back,  thinner  and  nearly  straight  at  the 
belly.  The  head  is  very  large  and  thick,  especially  between  the 
eyes,  and  the  snout  is  full  and  rounded ;  the  facial  outline  is 
nearly  straight,  though  the  prominence  of  the  intermaxillary 
bone  gives  it  an  incurved  appearance.  The  eye  is  very  large ;  it 
is  placed  one  diameter  and  a  quarter  of  the  orbit  from  the  snout, 
and  two  and  a  quarter  diameters  from  the  posterior  extremity  of 
the  opercle,  with  its  lower  margin  slightly  above  the  medium 
plane  of  the  head.  The  nostrils  are  round ;  the  anterior  and 
smaller  is  rather  nearer  to  the  eye  than  to  the  snout,  and  both 
are  on  a  line  within  the  orbit. 

"The  mouth  is  very  large;  the  posterior  extremity  of  the 
upper  jaw  extending  behind  the  orbit;  the  lower  jaw  is  the 
longest,  and  so  projects  as  to  make  a  part  of  the  facial  line  when 
the  mouth  is  shut.  Both  jaws  are  armed  with  numerous  small 
'conical,  pointed  recurved  card-like  teeth ;  they  are  all  nearly  of 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.        123 

the  same  size,  except  some  in  the  upper  jaw,  which  are  directed 
inwards  and  backwards.  The  vomer  has  in  front  a  large  arrow- 
headed  group  of  minute  villiform  teeth;  and  the  palate-bones 
have  on  each  side  a  long  and  rather  broad  patch  of  similar 
teeth.  The  pharyngeal  teeth  resemble  those  of  the  jaws  in  size 
and  form.  The  tongue  is  large  and  thick  behind ;  thin,  narrow 
and  rounded  in  front,  smooth  and  tolerably  free. 

"  The  preopercle  is  nearly  semicircular  at  its  angle,  which  is 
smooth  or  not  serrated,  but  the  ascending  border  is  slightly 
emarginate  above  the  angle.  The  opercle  is  subtriangular,  with 
its  base  before  and  apex  behind,  and  emarginate.  The  sub- 
opercle  is  quadrilateral,  and  extends  as  far  back  as  the  opercle. 
The  interopercle  is  rounded  below,  and  ascends  for  some  distance 
between  the  preopercle  and  the  opercle.  The  head  is  covered 
with  scales  above  and  at  the  sides  as  far  as  the  posterior  margin 
of  the  orbit,  but  the  superior  maxillary  bone  is  naked.  The  gill 
openings  are  very  large ;  there  are  7  branched  rays. 

"The  dorsal  fin  is  very  large  and  long;  it  begins  rather 
behind  the  base  of  the  pectoral,  and  is  single,  though  deeply 
emarginate;  its  anterior  portion  has  9  spines,  partially  received 
in  a  groove ;  the  posterior  or  soft  portion  of  the  dorsal  fin  is 
more  elevated  and  has  14  articulated  rays.  The  pectoral  is 
broad,  but  short  and  rounded  behind ;  it  arises  rather  before  the 
termination  of  the  opercle,  and  has  14  rays.  The  ventral  begins 
nearly  even  with  the  pectoral  fin  and  is  shorter ;  it  has  1  spine 
and  5  soft  rays,  the  internal  of  which  is  bound  to  the  belly  for 
half  its  length.  The  anal  arises  nearly  in  a  line  vertical  with 
the  root  of  the  third  dorsal  ray,  and  has  3  spines  and  12 
branched  rays.  The  caudal  is  large,  broad,  slightly  crescentic, 
and  has  19  rays. 

"The  scales  are  nearly  semicircular  in  shape,  with  the 
diameter  in  front.,  straight  and  marked  with  12  radiating  lines. 
The  lateral  line  is  concurrent  with  the  back,  and  runs  along  the 
superior  fourth  of  the  body ;  its  scale  is  narrower  behind  than 
the  others,  and  its  excretory  duct  is  placed  obliquely. 


124  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

"The  head  is  dusky  above,  and  silvery  though  slightly 
clouded  on  the  sides,  with  a  bluish  green  blotch  at  the  opercle ; 
the  body  is  also  dusky  above  or  of  a  bronzed  color  {sic)  with  a 
greenish  tint;  the  belly  is  silvery,  and  along  the  flanks  runs  a 
dusky  band  more  or  less  evident  according  to  the  age  of  the 
animal ;  it  is  remarkable  in  the  young.  The  dorsal  fin  is  trans- 
parent, with  only  here  and  there  dusky  shades ;  the  membrane 
of  the  pectoral  is  transparent,  but  the  rays  have  a  yellowish  tint; 
the  ventral  is  yellowish,  and  the  anal  is  slightly  tinted  with  the 
same  color ;  the  caudal  is  dusky,  with  a  very  obscure  yellowish 
shade. 

"  The  entire  length  from  the  opercle  to  the  tip  of  the  tail  is 
equal  to  two  heads  and  a  half;  the  greatest  elevation  is  seven 
eights  of  a  head ;  total  length  14  inches ;  specimens  have  been 
observed  nearly  2  feet  in  length. 

"The  peritoneum  is  silvery.  The  liver  is  large,  and  of  a  very 
pale  color ;  it  consists  of  a  single  rhomboidal  mass,  as  there  are 
no  marks  of  lobes ;  it  is  placed  mostly  in  the  left  side,  and  pro- 
jects but  slightly  into  the  right.  The  gall  bladder  is  large, 
round,  and  is  in  great  measure  uncovered  by  the  right  margin  of 
the  liver.  The  oesophagus  is  large  and  broad.  The  stomach  is 
large,  and  has  thick,  firm  muscular  walls,  with  deep  folds  of  its 
mucous  membrane  within  ;  the  pyloric  portion  is  short,  thick, 
stout,  and  departs  at  a  right  angle  at  its  posterior  third.  The 
intestine  runs  to  the  vent  whence  it  is  reflected  to  the  pylorus, 
and  then  it  turns  backwards  to  end  in  the  rectum ;  its  walls  are 
remarkably  thick  and  firm,  and  its  mucous  membrane  is  beauti- 
fully reticulated,  and  presents  numerous  small  areolae  for  two- 
thirds  of  its  length,  and  beyond  this,  longitudinal  folds  begin 
which  are  continued  into  the  rectum.  There  are  11  primitive 
coecal  appendages,  which  soon  divide  into  2  or  3  others,  so  that 
as  many  as  28  may  at  times  be  counted.  The  spleen  is  rather 
small,  very  pale,  and  is  situated  so  far  back  that  its  anterior  ex- 
tremity scarcely  reaches  the  stomach.     The  air-bladder  is  large, 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.       125 

and  extends  throughout  the  abdominal  cavity ;  it  is  full  in  front, 
but  is  partially  subdivided  into  two  small  pouches  behind ; 
within  it  is  bright  yellow  at  its  superior  and  posterior  part.  The 
ovaries  are  suboval,  rather  broad,  and  unite  in  substance  behind 
before  they  open." — (Holbrook,  Ieh.  So.  Car.  25,  1855,  and  2d 
ed.  1860.) 

Grystes  megastoma  Garlick,  1857. — "This  fish  has  been 
identified  with  the  common  Black  Bass  (Grystes  fasciatus) ,  but  is 
by  no  means  the  same  fish,  differing  in  many  respects,  both  in  its 
habits  and  physical  structure,  and  has  not  been  described  in  any 
work  on  American  fishes,  so  far  as  I  can  learn. 

"  The  great  distinguishing  feature  of  this  Bass  is  its  immense 
mouth,  which  has  induced  me  to  call  it  Grystes  megastoma,  or 
large-mouthed  Bass. 

"In  its  general  form  it  resembles  the  common  Black  Bass, 
though  somewhat  thicker.  The  head  is  much  larger  in  propor- 
tion to  its  size,  and  if  a  vertical  line  be  drawn,  passing  through 
the  center  of  the  eye,  we  shall  find  that  the  end  of  the  upper 
jaw  projects  back  or  behind  the  line  quite  a  distance ;  whereas, 
in  the  common  Bass  the  jaw  will  not  reach  as  far  back  as  the 
line.  The  scales  are  much  larger,  and  thickly  set  over  the  gill 
covers.  Back,  of  a  dark  greenish,  olive  color,  fading  gradually 
to  white  underneath.  If  found  in  dark-colored  water,  the  white 
will  be  tinged  with  a  pinkish  hue.  A  darkish  mottled  band,  of 
about  half  an  inch  in  width,  embracing  the  lateral  line,  traverses 
the  whole  length  of  the  body. 

"Br.  rays,  6;  Dor.  23:  Sp.  9,  Soft  14;  A.  14:  Sp.  3,  Soft 
11;  C.  20;  V.  6:  Sp.  1,  Soft  5;  P.  13."— (Garlick,  Treat. 
Art.  Prop.  Fish.  108,  1857.) 

Dioplites  nueceNvSIS  Girard,  1858. — "Body  elongated,  sub- 
fusiform  ;  head  constituting  a  little  less  than  the  third  of  the 
entire  length ;  posterior  extremity  of  maxillary  extending  to  a 
vertical  line  drawn  posteriorly  to  the  orbit ;  scales  on  the  cheeks 
nearly  equal  in  size  to  those  on  the  gill  covers ;  origin  of  ventrals 


126  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

posterior  to  the  base  of  pectorals ;  upper  regions,  reddish  brown, 
maculated ;  a  lateral  dark  baud  ;  inferior  regions  whitish,  uni- 
color. 

"It  is  closely  related  to,  if  not  identical,  with  Grystes  nobilis 
Agassiz,  from  the  southern  bend  of  the  Tennessee  River.  It  has, 
also,  much  greater  affinities  with  D.  fasciatus  than  with  D.  sal- 
moides"— (Girard,  U.  S.  Pac.  R.  R.  Exp.  and  Surv.  X,  Fishes, 
4,  1858.) 

Huro  nigricans  Giinther,  1859. — "D.  6^;  A.  T3T ;  L.  lat. 
60-65.  Height  of  body  equal  to  one-third  of  the  total  length, 
excluding  the  caudal;  cleft  of  the  mouth  obliquely  running  up- 
wards towards  the  plane  of  the  forehead ;  caudal  slightly  notched ; 
coloration  uniform." — Gunther,  Cat.  Fishes,  Brit.  Mus.  I,  255, 
1859.) 

Dioplites  nuecensis  Girard,  1859. — "Body  elongated  sub- 
fusiform  ;  head  constituting  a  little  less  than  the  third  of  the 
entire  length  ;  posterior  extremity  of  maxillary  extending  to  a 
vertical  line  drawn  posteriorly  to  the  orbit ;  scales  on  the  cheeks 
nearly  equal  in  size  to  those  on  the  gill  covers;  origin  of  the 
ventrals  placed  posteriorly  to  the  base  of  the  pectorals ;  upper 
regions  reddish  brown,  maculated;  a  lateral  dark  band;  inferior 
regions  whitish  uni-color. 

"  This  species  is  more  closely  related  to  D.  fasciatus  than  to  D. 
salmoides,  and  probably  identical  with  Gnjstes  nobilis  (Ag.). 
At  any  rate  the  latter  has  greater  affinities  with  D.  fasciatus  than 
with  D.  salmoides,  the  latter  being  restricted  to  its  proper  limits. 

"The  body  is  proportionally  more  elongated  than  in  D.  fas- 
ciatus, resembling  more  in  that  respect  D.  salmoides.  It  is  com- 
pressed and  sub-uniform  when  seen  in  profile.  The  greatest 
depth  is  somewhat  less  than  the  fourth  of  the  total  length,  in 
which  the  head  enters  a  little  less  than  three  times ;  the  mouth 
is  more  deeply  cleft  than  in  any  other  of  the  known  species  of 
the  genus,  and  its  gap,  is  as  usual,  oblique  upwards,  owing  to 
the  constant  protrusion  of  the   lower  jaw   beyond   the  upper, 


NOMENCLATURE    AND    MORPHOLOGY.  127 

which  it  does  very  prominently  in  this  species.  The  posterior 
extremity  of  the  maxillary  is  very  much  dilated,  extending,  to 
a  vertical  line  drawn  considerably  back  of  the  whole  orbit;  the 
tongue  is  large  and  stout  at  its  base,  thinning  and  tapering 
towards  its  apex,  which  is  broadly  rounded ;  it  is  smooth  ante- 
riorly, being  provided  posteriorly  and  upon  its  middle  with  a 
narrow  band  of  velvet-like  teeth  ;  both  nostrils  are  nearer  the 
anterior  rim  of  the  orbit  than  the  extremity  of  the  snout;  the 
anterior  one  is  a  little  smaller  than  the  posterior,  and  placed 
more  outwardly  with  reference  to  the  middle  of  the  snout ;  the 
eye  is  of  moderate  development,  sub -circular  in  shape,  reaching 
to  the  summit  of  the  cranium,  its  diameter  enters  about  six  times 
and  one-half  in  the  length  of  the  side  of  the  head,  twice  in  ad_ 
vance  of  the  anterior  rim  of  the  orbit ;  the  opercular  apparatus 
is  perfectly  smooth  and  deprived  of  either  spines  or  serratures; 
the  scales  upon  the  cheeks  are  but  slightly  smaller  than  those 
covering  the  opercular  pieces;  the  gill  openings  are  wide  and 
continuous  under  the  throat.  The  base  of  the  first  or  spiny 
dorsal  is  longer  than  that  of  the  second,  but  the  fin  itself  is  lower 
and  more  arched  in  its  outline  ;  the  first  and  second  spines  are 
shorter  than  the  third,  which  is  the  highest,  the  remaining  ones 
diminishing  gradually  posteriorly;  the  tenth  spine  by  its  position 
belongs  rather  to  the  second  than  the  first  dorsal ;  the  second 
dorsal  is  higher  than  long,  sub- trapezoid,  its  upper  edge  being 
but  slightly  convex  and  the  posterior  rays  almost  as  high  as  the 
anterior  ones;  the  posterior  margin  of  the  caudal  is  sub-cres- 
centic  or  sub-concave;  the  fin  itself  is  contained  5^  times  in 
the  total  length ;  the  origin  of  the  anal  corresponds  to  a  vertical 
line  intersecting  the  anterior  third  of  the  second  dorsal ;  its  base 
extends  a  little  further  back  than  that  of  the  latter,  although 
the  tips  of  the  posterior  rays  of  both  fins  are  nearly  even,  the 
anal  being  not  quite  so  deep  as  the  second  dorsal  is  high ;  its 
whole  base,  including  the  three  small  and  slender  spines  at  its 
anterior  margin,  is  shorter  than  that  of  the  second  dorsal;  the 


128  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

origin  of  the  ventrals  corresponds  to  a  vertical  line  drawn  imme- 
diately behind  the  base  of  the  pectorals;  the  fins  themselves  are 
broad  and  short,  since  their  posterior  margin  does  not  reach  the 
vent,  which  is  situated  a  little  way  in  advance  of  the  anterior 
margin  of  the  anal  fin  and  under  a  vertical  line  drawn  between 
the  two  dorsal  fins ;  the  pectorals  are  of  moderate  development, 
not  extending  quite  as  far  back  as  the  ventrals. 

Br.  VI;  D.  X,  13;  A.  Ill,  11;  C.  4,  1,  8,  8,1,  3;  V.  I, 
5;  P.  15.     (RioCibolo.) 

Br.  VI;  D.  X,  13;  A.  Ill,  12;  C.  4,  1,  9,  8,  1,  3;  V.  I, 
5;  P.  15.     (Rio  Blanco.) 

"The  scales  are  of  moderate  development,  sub-oblique,  deeper 
than  long,  provided  w7ith  radiating  grooves  on  their  anterior 
section  only,  and  pectinated  posteriorly ;  the  pectinations  of  the 
scales  of  the  dorsal  region  are  either  obsolete  or  else  deciduous, 
and  easily  removed  with  the  epidermis.  As  a  whole,  the  fish 
has  a  rather  smooth  appearance,  reminding  us  more  of  a  Trout 
than  a  Perch  were  it  not  for  its  anterior  spiny  dorsal  fin.  From 
29  to  30  longitudinal  rows  of  scales  may  be  counted  upon  the 
line  of  the  greatest  depth,  19  below  and  9  above  the  lateral  line ; 
the  scales  under  the  throat  are  quite  reduced  in  size,  those  on 
the  cheeks  being  nearly  as  large  as  those  on  the  opercle;  minute 
scales  may  be  observed  on  the  caudal  fin  to  almost  three-fourths 
of  the  length  of  its  rays,  and  a  few  scattered  ones  upon  the  base 
of  the  second  dorsal ;  the  lateral  line  itself  from  the  upper  region 
of  the  gill  covers  is  slightly  arched  upwards  until  under  the 
second  dorsal  fin,  hence  runs  nearly  straightway  along  the  middle 
of  the  peduncle  of  the  tail  to  the  base  of  the  caudal  fin.  The 
upper  regions  are  reddish  brown,  of  a  more  or  less  deep  hue. 
and  maculated  with  dark  brown  or  black,  while  the  inferior  re- 
gions are  whitish  or  yellowish  and  uni-color;  a  lateral,  more  or 
less  interrupted  dark  band  may  be  traced  from  the  black  patch 
at  the  posterior  margin  of  the  opercle  to  the  base  of  the  caudal 
fin ;    three  obsolete  streaks  may  be  seen  upon  the  cheeks  diverg- 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  MORPHOLOGY.       129 

ing  from  the  orbit;  the  fins  are  uni-color  except  the  second  dorsal, 
which  exhibits  two  longitudinal  bars  upon  its  base;  the  upper 
ones  are  greenish  olive,  the  lower  ones  are  yellowish  olive." — 
(Girard,  U.  S.  Mex.  Bound.  Surv.  II,  3,  1859.) 

Gristes  nigricans  Herbert,  1859. —  "In  color,  this  fish  is 
of  a  dusky  bluish  black,  sometimes  with  bronze  reflections,  the 
under  parts  bluish  white,  the  cheeks  and  gill-covers  nacreous,  of 
a  bluish  color. 

4 'The  body  is  compressed;  back  arched  and  gibbous;  profile 
descending  obliquely  to  the  rostrum,  which  is  moderately  pro- 
longed; scales  large,  truncated;  scales  on  the  operculum  large; 
a  single  series  on  the  suboperculum,  much  smaller  on  the  pre- 
operculum,  ascending  high  up  on  the  membrane  of  the  soft 
dorsal  and  caudal  fins;  eyes  large;  nostrils  double;  operculum 
pointed,  with  a  loose  membrane;  the  lower  jaw  is  somewhat  long- 
est; the  jaws  are  smooth  and  scaleless;  both  jaws  are  armed  with 
a  broad  patch  of  minute  conic  acute  reserved  teeth ;  an  oblong 
patch  of  rasp-like  teeth  on  the  vomer,  and  a  band  of  the  same 
kind  on  the  palatines;  branchial  arches  minutely  toothed; 
pharyngeal  teeth  in  rounded  patches.  The  dorsal  fin  is  com- 
posed of  9  stout  spines ;  the  second  dorsal  of  1  spine  and  14  soft 
rays ;  the  pectorals  have  18  soft  rays,  the  ventrals  1  spine 
and  5  soft  rays,  the  anal  3  spines  and  12  soft  rays,  and  the 
caudal  16  soft  rays." — (Herbert,  Fish  and  Fishing,  195,  1859.) 
— (I  think  this  description  more  applicable  to  the  large-mouthed 
Black  Bass  than  the  small-mouthed  form,  although  Herbert 
copied  it  from  DeKay's  C.  fasciatus;  but  I  think  he  considered 
the  latter  the  same  as  H.  nigricans  C.  &  V.,  on  the  strength  of 
Professor  Agassiz's  estimate  of,  and  statement  concerning,  the 
same  species,  viz:  "Dr.  DeKay  describes  it  [Huro  nigricans]  as 
Centrarchus  fasciatus,  although  he  copies  also  Cuvier's  description 
and  figure  of  Hiiro  nigricans,  but  without  perceiving  their  iden- 
tity."*    It  is  also  evident  from  the  context  of  Herbert's  descrip- 


Lake  Superior,"  p.  287,  1850. 


130  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

tion  that  he  means  the  large-mouthed  Bass,  though  I  am  of  the 
opinion  that  he  knew  very  little  about  either  species  of  Black 
Bass.  Accordingly,  I  have  used  Gristes  nigrimns  Herbert,  as  a 
synonym  of  M.  salmoides  (Lac.)  Henshall.     J.  A.  H.) 

Grystes  salmoides  Norris,  1864.  —  "The  following  is  an 
abridgment  of  Holbrook's  description,  connected  with  a  few 
observations  of  the  writer :  Head  and  body  dusky,  olive  above, 
sometimes  with  a  yellowish  tint,  lighter  on  the  sides;  belly 
white ;  opercles  light  green  or  greenish  yellow ;  first  dorsal  fin, 
9  spines  and  15  soft  rays ;  pectorals  15 ;  ventrals  1  spine  and  5 
rays;  anal  3  spines  and  12  rays;  caudal  19  rays;  body  elon- 
gated, oval,  straight  on  the  belly;  eye  large;  mouth  very  large, 
lower  jaw  longer  ;  the  vomer  has  brush-like  teeth  in  front ;  teeth 
on  the  palatines  and  pharyngeal  bones ;  tongue  smooth,  without 
teeth  in  front." — (Norris,  Am.  Angler's  Book,  99,  1864.) 

Micropterus  nigricans  Cope,  1870. —  "The  Green  Bass  is 
abundant  in  all  rivers  of  the  State  [N.  C]  I  have  it  from  the 
Neuse,  Yadkin,  Catawba,  upper  and  lower  French  Broad,  and 
from  the  Clinch  in  Tennessee.  Specimens  from  the  Neuse  and 
from  near  Norfolk,  Virginia,  six  in  number,  differ  from  those 
of  the  other  rivers,  in  having  a  deeper  body,  and  generally 
longer  and  more  prominent  mandible.  The  depth  enters  the 
length  2.75  times;  in  the  more  western  forms  always  3.25  times; 
in  the  former  it  is  greater  than  the  length  of  the  head,  in  the 
latter  it  is  considerably  less.  Other  differences  are  not  discover- 
able, and  I  regard  it  as  a  marked  variety  only." — (Cope,  Pro. 
Am.  Phil.  Soc.  451,  1870.) 

Micropterus  nigricans  Gill,  1873. — "Scales  moderate,  in 
about  sixty-five  oblique  rows  between  the  head  and  caudal,  and 
eight  (or  seven  and  a  half)  longitudinal  ones  between  the  back 
and  lateral  line,  decreasing  little  towards  the  nape  but  more 
towards  the  throat ;  with  the  sheath  enveloping  the  base  of  the 
soft  portion  of  the  dorsal  very  low  and  developed  towards  the 
end  of  the  fin.     Head  flat  between  the  orbits,  with  (1)  scales 


NOMENCLATURE   AND    MORPHOLOGY.  131 

on  the  operculum  about  the  size  of  those  of  the  nape,  (2)  on 
the  suboperculum  broad  and  in  one  row,  (3)  on  the  interoper- 
culum  broad,  conspicuous  and  regularly  imbricated,  in  one  row, 
(4)  on  the  cheeks  moderate  (in  about  ten  rows  in  an  oblique 
line,  and  five  or  six  in  a  horizontal  one),  and  (5)  on  the  pre- 
operculum  (two  to  five)  in  an  incomplete  row.  Mouth  large,  the 
gape  from  the  symphysis  to  the  angle  of  suprarnaxillary  equal- 
ing nearly  a  half  of  the  head's  length.  Suprarnaxillary  not  con- 
tinued backwards  decidedly  beyond  the  vertical  from  the  hinder 
border  of  the  orbit. 

"  Dorsal  fin  with  the  anterior  spines  slowly  graduated  (the 
first  being  comparatively  long)  to  the  third  (1  =  1;  II  =  1.30 ; 
III  =  1.50) ;  fourth  longest  (but  little  more  so  than  the  third) 
and  equal  to  or  exceeding  the  interval  between  the  back  and 
lateral  line;  succeeding  ones  successively  and  in  increased  ratio 
abbreviated  to  the  ninth,  which  is  very  short  (two-sevenths — 
1:3.5 — of  fourth),  the  tenth  being  longer  than  the  eighth 
(shorter  than  the  seventh)  and  about  two-thirds  as  long  as  the 
longest  (i.  e.,  fourth). 

"Dorsal  fin  with  scales  ascending  comparatively  little  behind 
on  the  membrane  behind  the  soft  rays  (none  behind  last  five  or 
six).   . 

"Anal  fin  with  no  (or  very  few)  scales. 

"Color,  in  young  and  adolescent,  greenish-black,  verging  to 
yellowish-white  on  lower  sides  and  abdomen,  with  (1)  a  series 
of  large  blotches  arranged  in  a  regular  line,  from  shoulder  to 
caudal,  on  the  middle  of  sides,  the  posterior  third  of  which  be- 
comes a  continuous  stripe  and  (2)  below  this  middle  series, 
rather  irregular,  small  blotches,  with  tendency  to  become  a  con- 
tinuous stripe  on  posterior  third  of  body.  Head  dark  above, 
white  from  lower  half  of  maxillary  bone,  and  suboperculum  to 
chin  and  throat,  and  with  three  oblique  and  horizontal  bands 
upon  cheek,  viz.:  (1)  one  from  angle  of  upper  jaw  to  margin 
of  preoperculum,  (2)  one  from  lower  edge  of  orbit  to  angle  of 


132  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

operculum,  and  (3)  one  radiating  slightly  upward  from  posterior 
margin  of  orbit  to  operculum.  Apex  of  operculum  with  large 
dark  spot,  upper  fins  dusky,  lower  yellowish-white. 

"  The  stripes  on  the  body  frequently  continue  until  the  fish  is 
well  grown,  though  gradually  becoming  obsolete;  black  spots 
upon  the  scales  remain  more  or  less  permanently,,  giving  the 
appearance,  in  old  fish,  of  fine  lines  or  stripes.  (Color  fide  J. 
W.  Milner,  MSS.)  "—(Gill,  Pro.  Am,  Asso.  Adv.  Sci.  XXII, 
B.  71,  1873.) 

Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,  1877.— " Rafinesque's  de- 
scription of  his  Lepomis  pallida  seems  to  have  been  drawn  from 
this  species.  His  specific  name  should  therefore  be  adopted. 
This  change  is  especially  desirable,  as  it  does  away  with  the  ob- 
jectionable local  name  floridanus  for  this  widely  distributed 
species."— (Jordan,  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mm.  X,  43,  1877.) 

Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,  1878. — "Dull  olive  green, 
more  or  less  spotted  when  young,  but  not  barred ;  usually  with 
an  irregular  dark  lateral  band,  and  three  oblique  stripes  on 
opercules;  ends  of  caudal  fin  blackish,  these  markings  growing 
obscure  with  age ;  third  dorsal  spine  twice  as  high  as  first;  notch 
between  spines  and  soft  rays  deep  ;  eight  rows  of  scales  between 
lateral  line  and  dorsal;  anal  fin  somewhat  scaly;  mouth  very 
wide;  D.  X,  12;  A.  Ill,  10;  lat.  1.  65  to  70.  Great  lakes  and 
rivers  of  the  West  and  South,  abundant  in  most  regions,  and 
highly  valued  as  a  food  fish." — (Jordan,  Manual  Vertebrates,  E. 
U.  S.  2d  ed.  236,  1878.) 

Micropterus  pallidus  Goode  &  Bean,  1879. — "According 
to  Mr.  Stearns  this  species  enters  the  brackish  and  salt  waters 
of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  whence  he  sends  a  specimen,  No.  21,311, 
12  inches  in  length.  D.  IX,  I,  13  ;  A.  Ill,  10;  P.  II,  12;  V. 
I,  5;  C.-f  17+.  L.  lat.  65;  L.  trans.  ^."— (Goode  &  Bean, 
Pro.  U.  S,  Nat.  Mus.  138,  1879.) 


©  d 
£  s 

ft  a 

o 


.  © 

■St 


c8    d   2 

M     3    CO 


49  S 


g 

eS    d  « 

9 

w      g 

id 

-d  "3  ^ 

o 

d  d     . 

Si 

*  3  -2 

m 

O    •  o 

5m 

*&  d 

o 

*f     .  CO  e5 

■ 

et  Agen 
tral  fin. 
ale.    11. 
■  9  and  I 

M 

Q 

•*    ?    R    ? 

d 

o    ©    ©    O 

pq 

T5 

•3  ^  ig  © 

© 

1 

.,  Gei 

fin. 

0.  In 

lis  ar 

o 

o"3  ^   taO 

s 

A.  B.  Leet,  Es 
fin.    3.  Pectori 

9.  Subopercle. 

he  Branchioste 

"3 

d  by 
orsal 
sle. 
.)    T 

©    «     C     © 

rnish 
Soft  « 
reope 
duncl 

p     •  CLi   © 

h  «  w   ft 

w       #      ©    --" 

d  5  S 

rsal  fl 
8  is  t 
16.  Ta 

^  a  © 

oo  ■  a 

inou 

n   7 
ralli 

ft  ©  s 

cc  ©  ■*> 

-22 

CHAPTER    III. 

GENERAL  AND  SPECIFIC  FEATURES. 

"  Like— but  oh !  how  different !"— Wordsworth. 

As  has  been  shown  in  the  preceding  chapter,  the  genus 
Micropterus  includes  but  two  species,  viz :  Micropterus 
dolornieu  Lacepede,  the  small-mouthed  Black  Bass,  and 
Micropterus  salmoides  (Lacepede)  Henshall,  the  large- 
mouthed  Black  Bass,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  the 
Oswego  Bass.  The  small-mouthed  Bass,  however,  ex- 
hibits some  minor  points  of  difference  between  its  North- 
ern and  Southern  forms,  which  are  now  regarded  as  of 
varietal  importance,  and  this  species  has  consequently  been 
divided  into  Micropterus  dolornieu  var.  achigan,  the  small- 
mouthed  Bass  of  the  North,  and  Micropterus  dolornieu  var. 
dolornieu,  the  small-mouthed  Bass  of  the  South ;  the  differ- 
ences, however,  are  not  of  much  moment,  as  they  shade 
into  each  other,  and  are  to  be  regarded  as  merely  geo- 
graphical variations. 

Possibly  no  genus  of  fishes  has  been  the  occasion  of  so 
much  confusion,  scientifically  and  popularly,  as  the  Black 
Bass.  This  is  owing,  no  doubt,  to  its  extensive  habitat 
and  wide-spread  distribution ;  the  original  habitat  of  the 
species  being  the  great  basin  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  the 
whole  Mississippi  Valley — or  nearly  the  entire  range  of 
country  lying  between  the  Appalachian  Chain  and  the 
Rocky  Mountains — and   the   South  Atlantic  States   from 

(135) 


1.36  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

Virginia  to  Florida;  including  also  the  widely-separated 
sections  of  the  Red  River  of  the  North  and  East  Mexico. 

It  would  naturally  be  expected,  in  view  of  this  extra- 
ordinary and  expansive  habitat,  to  find  differences  in  color, 
habits  and  conformation  ;  indeed,  it  is  surprising  that  the 
variations  are  not  more  marked,  and  the  number  of  species, 
consequently,  greater,  when  one  considers  the  great  natural 
differences  and  conditions  of  the  numerous  waters,  and  the 
varieties  of  climate  to  which  this  genus  is  native.  To  the 
careless  observer,  however,  there  is  but  little  to  determine 
the  differences  between  the  two  species  of  Black  Bass.  I 
have  known  anglers  who  had  "slain  their  thousands"  of 
both  species,  but  who  had  never  suspected  that  there  was 
any  difference  except  in  color,  until  I  pointed  out  to  them 
the  specific  characteristics.  Even  those  of  more  attentive 
observation,  but  who  have  never  seen  the  two  species 
together,  find  it  difficult  to  readily  comprehend  the  differ- 
ence. To  the  trained  observer,  however,  it  is  an  easy 
task  to  distinguish  the  variations;  and  when  specimens 
of  equal  weight,  of  both  species,  are  placed  side  by  side, 
the  difference  is  at  once  apparent. 

As  widely  distributed  as  the  Black  Bass  is,  we  find  that 
the  most  striking  variation,  in  either  species,  is  in  color, 
which  will  run  from  almost  black  through  all  the  shades 
of  slate,  green,  olive  and  yellow  to  almost  white ;  and  in- 
deed these  variations  in  color  can  be  found  in  almost  any 
one  State,  and  to  a  great  extent  in  any  one  stream,  or  lake, 
at  different  seasons  of  the  year.  In  some  sections  of  the 
country  one  species  may  be  more  or  less  spotted  or  barred, 
while  the  other  species  may  exhibit  well-defined  lateral 
bands  of  dark  spots,  though  these  peculiarities  are  more 
likely  to  occur  in  young  or  adolescent  specimens. 


GENERAL    AND   SPECIFIC   FEATURES.  137 

The  fins  will  also  be  found  to  vary  somewhat  in  color- 
ing, while  the  scales  and  fin-rays  may  differ  slightly  in 
number,  as  a  variation  of  one-sixth,  more  or  less,  from 
established  formulas  is  not  unusual.  Slight  dissimilarities 
of  contour,  and  some  diversities  of  habits,  also,  exist.  But 
all  of  these  differences  obtain,  not  only  with  regard  to  the 
Black  Bass,  but  to  most  other  species  of  fresh  water  fishes, 
and  depend  on  well-known  natural  causes. 

I  resided  for  ten  years  in  Wisconsin,  where  there  were 
twenty  lakes,  abounding  in  Black  Bass,  within  a  radius  of 
eight  miles  of  my  residence ;  and  from  close  and  constant 
observation  of  the  characteristics  of  the  Bass  inhabiting 
them,  I  could  almost  invariably  tell,  upon  being  shown  a 
string  of  Black  Bass,  in  what  particular  lake  they  had  been 
caught. 

Where  both  species  co-exist  in  the  same  waters,  the 
small-mouthed  Bass  is  generally  of  a  darker  or  more 
somber  hue  than  the  large-mouthed  Bass,  whose  color  is 
more  inclined  to  shades  of  green.  The  coloration  of  the 
small-mouthed  Bass,  however,  in  some  localities,  approaches 
shades  of  olive  or  yellow,  and  there  will  often  be  more  or 
less  red  in  the  iris  of  the  eye,  in  some  instances  shading 
down  to  orange  or  yellow ;  this  latter  distinction,  though, 
like  the  double  curve  at  the  base  of  the  caudal  fin,  and  the 
more  forked  tail — which  have  been  regarded  by  some 
anglers  as  distinguishing  characteristics  of  this  species — 
can  not  be  depended  on,  as  one  or  all  of  these  distinctions 
are  often  lacking. 

The  most  distinctive  feature,  as  between  the  two  species, 

is  the  gape  of  the  mouth,  which  in  the  large-mouthed  Bass 

seems  simply  enormous  to  those  who  have  previously  seen 

but  the    small-mouthed   species.      The  contrast  in  build, 
12 


138  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

and  external  conformation,  of  the  two  species,  is  at  once 
striking  and  characteristic.  The  large-mouthed  Bass  is 
thicker,  especially  through  the  shoulders,  deeper  in  the 
body,  with  a  more  pendulous  abdomen,  and  seems  a 
heavier  fish  for  its  length  than  the  other  species,  convey- 
ing the  impression  that  it  is  the  stronger  and  more  power- 
ful fish,  as,  indeed,  it  is ;  while  the  small-mouthed  Bass, 
owing  to  its  trim,  slender  and  more  graceful  shape,  truly 
convinces  one  that  it  is  the  more  active  and  agile. 

The  relative  size  of  the  scales  is  all  important  in  the 
differentiation  of  the  two  species.  In  the  large-mouthed 
Bass  these  are  much  larger,  there  being  but  from  sixty- 
five  to  seventy  scales  along  the  lateral  line,  running  from 
the  head  to  the  tail;  while  in  the  small-mouthed  species 
there  are  from  seventy  to  eighty.  Between  the  lateral  line 
and  the  base  of  the  dorsal  fin  there  are  but  eight  horizontal 
rows  of  scales  in  the  large-mouthed  Bass,  while  there  are 
eleven  similar  rows  in  the  small-mouthed  Bass.  The  scales 
on  the  nape  and  breast  in  the  large-mouthed  species  are 
not  much  smaller  than  those  of  the  sides;  but  in  the 
other  species  they  are  very  much  smaller ;  and  while  the 
scales  on  the  cheeks  and  gill-covers  of  the  large-mouthed 
Bass  are  small,  those  of  ^  corresponding  situations  in  the 
small-mouthed  Bass  are  quite  minute,  with  a  small  por- 
tion of  the  gill-covers  (preopercular  limb)  entirely  bare. 

The  size  and  shape. of  the  fins  also  differ  somewhat, 
especially  the  dorsal,  which  in  the  small-mouthed  Bass 
has  the  rays  of  the  spinous  portion  higher  and  more  uni- 
form in  size,  rendering  this  fin  higher,  not  so  arching,  and 
with  a  shallower  notch  than  in  the  large-mouthed  form. 

The  differences,  then,  in  the  form,  gape  of  mouth,  and 
size  of  scales  and  fins  of  the  two  species  of  Black  Bass, 


GENERAL   AND   SPECIFIC    FEATURES.  139 

without  reference  to  color,  are  sufficiently  pronounced  to 
enable  the  angler  to  readily  determine,  by  comparison,  the 
small-mouthed  from  the  large-mouthed  Bass;  for  these 
differences  are  constant  wherever  the  Black  Bass  exists, 
from  Maine  to  Mexico,  or  from  Canada  to  Florida.  To 
the  specialist  there  are  other  points  of  differentiation  as 
detailed  in  the  preceding  chapter. 

In  preparing  tables  of  exact  measurements  of  the  species, 
as  also  tables  showing  the  relative  weight  as  to  length,  I 
found  so  much  discrepancy  in  these  respects,  in  the  same 
species  from  different  localities,  owing  to  slight  variations 
of  shape  and  conformation,  that  I  concluded  they  would 
not  subserve  the  purposes  of  a  general  guide,  and  so 
omitted  them. 

Both  species  are  remarkably  active,  muscular  and  vora- 
cious, with  large,  hard  and  tough  mouths;  are  very  bold 
in  biting,  and  when  hooked  exhibit  gameness  and  endur- 
ance second  to  no  other  fish.  Both  species  give  off  the 
characteristic  musky  odor  when  caught. 

Both  species  generally  inhabit  the  same  waters,  and 
there  is  a  slight  diversity  in  their  habits  where  they  co- 
exist together.  Naturally,  the  small-mouthed  Bass  prefers 
rocky  streams  or  the  gravelly  shoals  and  bottom  springs 
of  lakes  and  ponds,  while  its  large-mouthed  congener 
lurks  about  the  submerged  roots  of  trees  or  sunken  logs  in 
rivers,  and  delights  in  the  beds  of  rushes  and  aquatic 
plants  of  lacustrine  waters ;  but  they  readily  adapt  them- 
selves to  waters  of  various  conditions,  when  transplanted, 
easily  accommodating  themselves  to  their  surroundings, 
and  have  a  happy  faculty  of  making  themselves  at  home 
wherever  placed,  so  that  in  some  localities  their  habits  are 
as  anomalous  as  their  colors. 


140  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

There  is  a  wide-spread  and  prevalent  notion  that  the 
small-mouthed  Bass  is  the  "  game  "  species  par  excellence, 
but  I  doubt  if  this  distinction  is  well  founded.  In 
common  with  most  anglers  I  at  one  time  shared  this  belief, 
but  from  a  long  series  of  observations  I  am  now  of  the 
opinion  that  the  large-mouthed  Bass,  all  things  being 
equal,  displays  as  much  pluck,  and  exhibits  as  untiring 
fighting  qualities  as  its  small-mouthed  congener. 

Fish  inhabiting  swiftly  running  streams  are  always  more 
vigorous  and  gamy  than  those  in  still  waters,  and  it  is 
probable  that  where  the  large-mouthed  Bass  exists  alone 
in  very  shallow  and  sluggish  waters,  of  high  temperature 
and  thickly  grown  with  algae,  it  will  exhibit  less  com- 
bative qualities,  consequent  on  the  enervating  influences 
of  its  surroundings;  but  where  both  species  inhabit  the 
same  waters,  and  are  subject  to  the  same  conditions,  I  am 
convinced  that  no  angler  can  tell  whether  he  has  hooked  a 
large-mouthed  or  a  small-mouthed  Bass,  from  their  resist- 
ance and  mode  of  fighting,  provided  they  are  of  equal 
weight,  until  he  has  the  ocular  evidence. 

I  use  the  expression  "  equal  weight "  advisedly,  for  most 
anglers  must  have  remarked  that  the  largest  Bass  of  either 
species  are  not  necessarily  the  hardest  fighters;  on  the 
contrary,  a  Bass  of  two  or  two  and  a  half  pounds  weight 
will  usually  make  a  more  gallant  fight  than  one  of  twice 
the  size,  and  this  fact,  I  think,  will  account  in  a  great 
measure  for  the  popular  idea  that  the  small-mouthed  Bass 
is  the  "  gamest "  species  for  this  reason  : 

Where  the  two  species  co-exist  in  the  same  stream  or 
lake,  the  large-mouthed  Bass  always  grows  to  a  larger  size 
than  the  other  species,  and  an  angler  having  just  landed  a 
two  pound  small-mouthed  Bass  after  a  long  struggle,  next 


GENERAL   AND   SPECIFIC   FEATURES.  141 

hooks  a  large-mouthed  Bass  weighing  four  or  five  pounds, 
and  is  surprised,  probably,  that  it  "  fights "  no  harder  or 
perhaps  not  so  hard  as  the  smaller  fish — in  fact,  seems 
"  l°gy "  >  ne>  therefore,  reiterates  the  cry  that  the  small- 
mouthed  Bass  is  the  gamest  fish. 

But,  now,  if  he  next  succeeds  in  hooking  a  large- 
mouthed  Bass  of  the  same  size  as  the  first  one  caught,  he 
is  certain  that  he  is  playing  a  small-mouthed  Bass  until  it 
is  landed,  when  to  his  astonishment  it  proves  to  be  a  large- 
mouthed  Bass;  he  merely  says,  "  he  fought  well  for  one  of 
his  kind,"  still  basing  his  opinion  of  the  fighting  qualities 
of  the  two  species  upon  the  first  two  caught. 

Perhaps  his  next  catch  may  be  a  small-mouthed  Bass  of 
four  pounds,  and  which,  though  twice  the  weight  of  the 
large-mouthed  Bass  just  landed,  does  not  offer  any  greater 
resistance,  and  he  sets  it  down  in  his  mind  as  a  large- 
mouthed  Bass;  imagine  the  angler's  surprise,  then,  upon 
taking  it  into  the  landing  net,  to  find  it  a  small-mouthed 
Bass,  and  one  which,  from  its  large  size  and  the  angler's 
preconceived  opinion  of  this  species  should  have  fought 
like  a  Trojan. 

Now,  one  would  think  that  the  angler  would  be  some- 
what staggered  in  his  former  belief;  but  no,  he  is  equal  to 
the  occasion,  and  in  compliance  with  the  popular  idea,  he 
merely  suggests  that  "  he  is  out  of  condition,  somehow,"  or 
"  was  hooked  so  as  to  drown  him  early  in  the  struggle ; " 
and  so,  as  his  largest  fish  will  necessarily  be  big-mouthed, 
and  because  they  do  not  fight  in  proportion  to  their  size, 
they  are  set  down  as  lacking  in  game  qualities — of  course, 
leaving  the  largest  small-mouthed  Bass  out  of  the  calcula- 
tion. 

Gentle  reader,  this  is  not  a  case  of  special  pleading,  nor 


142  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

is  the*  angler  a  creation  of  the  imagination  lugged  in  as  an 
apologist  for  the  large-mouthed  Bass ;  he  is  a  veritable 
creature  of  flesh  and  blood,  of  earth  earthy,  and  with  the 
self-conceit,  weaknesses  and  shortcomings  characteristic  of 
the  genus  homo  ;  I  have  met  him  and  heard  his  arguments 
and  sage  expressions  scores  of  times,  and  if  you  will  think 
a  moment  I  am  sure  you  have  met  him  yourself. 

Icthyologists  have  at  various  times  given  to  the  genus 
Micropterus  numerous  appellatives,  and  to  the  species  more 
than  fifty  specific  names,  while  laymen  in  different  sections 
of  the  country  have  contributed  their  quota  of  vernacular 
names,  among  which  may  be  mentioned  :  Bass,  Black  Bass, 
Green  Bass,  Yellow  Bass,  River  Bass,  Bayou  Bass,  Slough 
Bass,  Lake  Bass,  Moss  Bass,  Grass  Bass,  Marsh  Bass,  Os- 
wego Bass,  Perch,  Black  Perch,  Yellow  Perch,  Trout 
Perch,  Jumping  Perch,  Welshman,  Salmon,  Trout,  Black 
Trout,  White  Trout,  Chub,  Southern  Chub,  Roanoke 
Chub,  etc.,  etc. 

In  addition  to  this  formidable  and  perplexing  array  of 
names,  there  are  other  evils  which  add  very  much  to  the 
confusion  attending  the  nomenclature  of  the  Black  Bass. 
Among  them  is  the  careless  habit  of  many  correspondents 
of  our  sportsmen's  journals,  who  write  of  Bass,  Bass  tackle, 
Bass  fishing,  etc.,  meaning  Black  Bass  in  each  instance, 
but  leave  it  to  the  imagination  of  the  readers  of  those 
journals  as  to  what  particular  kind  of  "Bass"  is  meant. 

Now  this  is  all  wrong,  and  is  owing  to  gross  carelessness, 
or  perhaps  in  some  instances  to  a  want  of  proper  informa- 
tion, and  is  a  habit  that  ought  to  be  reformed.  We  should 
learn  to  call  things  by  their  right  names.  A  rose  by  any 
other  name  may  smell  as  sweet,  but  as  there  are  many  va- 
rieties of  roses  they  must  be  distinguished  by  correct  and 


GENERAL   AND   SPECIFIC   FEATURES.  143 

specific  names,  and  not  by  their  odors.  It  is  just  as  easy 
to  write  the  distinctive  name  "  Black  Bass  "  as  the  general 
name  "  Bass." 

Bass  is  a  very  vague  term  at  best,  meaning  one  thing  in 
one  part  of  the  country,  and  a  totally  different  thing  in 
another.  Along  the  eastern  coast  it  means  a  Striped  Bass 
(Roccus  lineatus),  or  a  Sea  Bass  (Centropristes  atrarius);  in 
Florida  it  means  a  Channel  Bass  (Scicenoj)s  ocellatus) ;  in 
the  west  it  may  be  either  a  Black  Bass  (MicrojAerus),  a 
Rock  Bass  (Ambhplites  rupestris),  a  White  Bass  (Roccus 
chrysops),  or  a  Calico  Bass  (Pomoxys  nigromaculatus) ; 
while  in  Otsego  County,  New  York,  it  means  an  Otsego 
Bass  (Coregonus  clupeiformis  var.  otsego),  which  is  not  a 
Bass  at  all  but  a  white  fish. 

Then,  again,  some  of  these  correspondents  write  of  the 
real  Black  Bass,  meaning  usually  M.  dolomieu,  the  small- 
mouthed  species,  seeming  to  imply  that  the  other  species  is 
not  real,  or  at  least  is  not  the  Black  Bass,  but  something 
else — a  kind  of  pseudo  variety.  Others  in  writing  of  the 
large-mouthed  species,  M.  salmoides — owing  to  its  former 
name,  M.  nigricans — have  called  it  the  real  Black  Bass, 
under  the  impression  that  as  it  was  named  nigricans — i.  e.y 
black — the  other  species  must  be  some  other  Color,  and 
could  not  be  the  simon-pure  article.  Now,  one  species  is 
not  more  real  than  the  other;  the  small-mouthed  Bass  is 
regarded  as  the  type  species  because  it  was  the  first  to  be 
described  by  a  naturalist,  and  given  a  specific  and  generic 
name. 

The  term  "Black  Bass,"  then,  is  distinctive,  and  should 
always  be  used  when  alluding  to  the  genus  generally. 
The  different  species  should  be  mentioned  as  the  small- 
mouthed  Black  Bass  or  the  large-mouthed  Black  Bass,  as 


144  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

the  case  may  be,  no  matter  whether  the  color  be  black, 
green  or  yellow.  Every  one  will  then  know  exactly  what 
is  meant,  and  much  of  the  confusion  and  uncertainty  that 
now  prevail  in  connection  with  the  nomenclature  of  the 
Black  Bass  will  be  cleared  away. 

"  Not  chaos-like,  together  crush'd  and  bruis'd, 
But,  as  the  world,  harmoniously  confus'd, 
Where  order  in  variety  we  see, 
And  where,  though  all  things  differ,  all  agree."— Pope. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

COLORATION  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

"And  it  is  so  with  many  kinds  of  fish,  and  of  trouts  especially ;  which 
differ  in  their  bigness  and  shape,  and  spots  and  color."— Izaak  Walton. 

The  external  appearance  of  the  Black  Bass,  as  exhibited 
in  the  colors  and  markings,  differs  so  greatly  and  con- 
stantly in  different  sections  of  our  country,  that  it  would 
be  useless  to  describe  them  minutely  in  a  specimen  from 
any  given  locality ;  for  as  the  vernacular  names  of  fishes 
are  usually  bestowed  with  reference  to  the  outward  pecu- 
liarities of  coloring,  this  has  already  given  rise  to  much 
confusion  in  naming  the  species.  Thus  they  are  called 
black,  green,  or  yellow  Bass,  respectively,  in  different  sec- 
tions of  the  United  States,  and  not  without  reason,  for 
black,  green  and  yellow  are  the  predominating  primary 
colors  of  the  two  species,  though  these  colors  are  often 
toned  down  to  any  of  the  intermediate  shades,  with  plum- 
beous, olivaceous  or  ochreous  tints. 

The  color,  however,  is  always  darkest  on  the  back,  with 
a  gradual  shading  or  paling  towards  the  belly  or  abdomen, 
which  is  always  white  or  whitish.  Where  the  two  species 
of  Black  Bass  are  common  to  the  same  stream  or  lake, 
the  small-mouthed  Bass  is  generally  the  darkest  in  color, 
though  this  is  by  no  means  an  invariable  rule;  for  in 
other  waters  the  small-mouthed  Bass  may  be  of  a  lighter 
or  paler  hue  than  the  other  species — usually  yellowish- 
13  (145) 


146  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

olive  or  yellowish-white,  but  often  pale  green — while  the 
large-mouthed  Bass  will  be  of  a  dark  green  coloration, 
and  sometimes  quite  dusky. 

Then,  again,  in  some  waters,  no  distinct  coloring  is 
apparent,  the  fish  presenting  merely  a  pale  or  faded  ap- 
pearance; especially  is  this  likely  to  be  the  case  in  large 
streams  much  subject  to  overflow,  and  whose  waters  are 
often  muddy  or  discolored.  Hence,  as  may  be  surmised, 
color  is  not  an  important  factor  in  the  differentiation  of 
the  Black  Bass  species. 

While  some  have  no  distinct  markings,  others  are 
marked  by  dark,  maculated,  transverse  or  vertical  bars; 
some,  again,  by  longitudinal  or  lateral  bands;  and  still 
others  by  mottled  lines,  dusky  spots,  or  finger  marks. 
Usually  when  Bass  are  so  marked,  the  mottled  bands  run 
lengthwise  in  the  large-mouthed  species,  while  the  small- 
mouthed  Bass  is  marked  by  transverse  bars  or  finger 
marks;  but  these  distinctions  are  not  infallible,  for  the 
small-mouthed  Bass  of  the  Southern  States  often  exhibits 
well-defined  mottled  lines  running  lengthwise  along  the 
series  of  scales. 

After  being  taken  out  of  the  water,  the  colors  and 
markings  change  materially  ;  generally,  the  brighter  colors 
fade  rapidly,  while  the  dusky  spots,  bars,  or  bands  become 
more  distinct;  this  change  of  color  is  more  frequently  ob- 
served in  the  small-mouthed  species.  Sometimes,  how- 
ever, the  markings  will  disappear,  and  the  sides  of  the 
fish  will  assume  a  uniform  coloration. 

Then,  again,  the  colors  of  the  Black  Bass  frequently 
change  with  each  season  of  the  year;  and  there  is,  more- 
over, always  a  marked  difference  in  the  colors  and  mark- 
ings of  the  fish  at  different  stages  of  its  growth.     In  the 


COLORATION   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS.  147 

young,  the  colors  are  brighter  and  the  markings  more 
distinct  than  in  the  adult  fish,  and  it  is  my  opinion  that 
the  latter  become  entirely  obsolete  with  age. 

The  fins  are  likewise  subject  to  variation  in  coloring 
and  markings ;  they  may  be  either  dusky  or  greenish  ; 
reddish  or  yellowish ;  and  are,  usually,  more  or  less  punc- 
tulated  or  spotted.  The  tail  is  often  lighter  in  color  at 
the  base  and  outer  edge,  and  dark  or  dusky  between;  thus 
one  of  the  names  proposed  by  Rafinesque  for  the  small- 
mouthed  species — Calliurus  punctulatus,  i.  e.,  "dotted 
painted-tail" — was  founded  upon  the  peculiar  coloration 
of  the  tail  of  a  young  Bass,  his  description  of  the  caudal 
fin  being:  "base  yellow,  middle  blackish,  tip  white." 
Sometimes,  however,  especially  in  mature  specimens,  the 
tail  has  a  dark  border,  while  the  middle  is  of  a  lighter 
tinge ;  and  often  the  entire  caudal  fin  will  have  a  uniform 
coloration. 

There  are  commonly,  several — usually  three — dusky  or 
olivaceous  streaks  along  the  cheeks  and  gill-covers. 

Inconstancy  of  coloration  is  not  exceptional  with  the 
Black  Bass,  for  all  other  genera  of  fresh  water  and  ana- 
dromous  fishes  exhibit  this  peculiarity  in  a  greater  or  less 
degree.  Among  the  causes  assigned  for  this  phenomenal 
feature,  and  which  have  been  either  proven  true  or  made 
tenable  by  actual  experiment  and  careful  observation,  are: 
(1)  character  of  food ;  (2)  condition,  depth  and  tempera- 
ture of  water;  (3)  color  and  character  of  beds  of  streams, 
lakes  or  ponds;  (4)  atmospheric  conditions;  (5)  age; 
(6)  season  of  the  year;  and  (7)  the  changes  incident  to 
the  breeding  season;  while  some  assume  that  (8)  the 
power  of  changing  color  is  voluntary  with  some,  if  not 
all,  fishes. 


148  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

Professor  Richard  Owen,  in  his  admirable  work,  "Anatr 
omy  of  the  Vertebrates, "  Vol.  I,  says : — 

"  The  varied,  and  often  brilliant  colors  of  fishes,  are  due 
to  pigment  cells  at  different  depths  of  the  skin,  but  chiefly 
in  the  active  or  differentiating  area.  Those  of  silvery  or 
golden  luster  are  mostly  on  the  surface  of  the  scales.  The 
silvery  pigment  called  i  argentine '  is  an  article  of  com- 
merce used  for  the  coloring  of  fictitious  pearls,  and  offers  a 
crystalline  character  under  the  microscope.  The  blue, 
red,  green,  or  other  bright-colored  pigment  is  usually  asso- 
ciated with  fine  oil,  and  occupies  areolae  favoring  accumu- 
lation at,  or  retreat  from,  the  superficies,  and  thus  effecting 
changes  in  the  color  of  the  fish,  harmonizing  their  exterior 
with  the  hue  of  the  bottom  of  their  haunts." 

From  the  nature  of  the  pigment  cells,  as  portrayed  in 
this  description,  it  is  easy  to  imagine  how  susceptible 
they  are  to  the  influences  of  such  causes  as  those  above 
enumerated. 

The  Salmonidce  have  been  more  studied,  perhaps,  than 
any  other  family  of  fishes,  and  yet  in  none  has  there  been 
more  confusion  in  classification,  owing  in  a  great  measure 
to  the  differences  of  external  appearance,  as  caused  by 
these  various  influences. 

The  eminent  German  naturalist,  Seibold,  says : — "  In 
none  of  our  native  [German]  fish  is  there  such  variety  of 
color,  according  to  the  different  influences  of  food,  water, 
light  and  temperature,  as  in  the  toothed  salmons." 

Another  able  German  scientist,  Carl  Peyrer,  says  of  the 
common  brook  trout  of  Germany  ( Trutta  fario) : — "  The 
color,  and  partly  also  the  size  which  it  reaches,  vary  ac- 
cording to  its  location,  the  influences  of  light,  the  season, 
water,  and  food,  and  therefore  several  varieties  are  dis- 


COLORATION   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS.  149 

tinguished,  such  as  the  forest  or  stone  trout,  the  alpine  or 
mountain  trout,  the  gold  or  pond  trout,  the  lake  trout,  and, 
according  to  the  lighter  or  darker  coloring,  the  white 
trout,  the  black  trout,  etc."  Truly  almost  as  polyonomous 
as  our  Black  Bass. 

That  difference  in  food  produces  difference  in  coloration 
does  not  admit  of  a  doubt.  Those  of  the  Salmonidce  which 
feed  upon  Crustacea  and  larvae  exhibit  the  most  brilliant 
colors,  while  those  which  live  upon  insects,  minnows, 
worms,  etc.,  are  much  duller  in  hue. 

Sir  Humphrey  Davy,  in  his  familiar  work,  "Salmonia," 
says :  "  I  think  it  possible  when  trout  feed  much  on  hard 
substances,  such  as  larvae  and  their  cases,  and  the  ova  of 
other  iish,  they  have  more  red  spots  and  redder  fins.  This 
is  the  case  with  the  gillaroo  and  the  char,  who  feed  on 
analogous  substances;  and  the  trout  that  have  similar 
habits  might  be  expected  to  resemble  them.  When  trout 
feed  on  small  fish,  as  minnows,  and  on  flies,  they  have 
more  tendency  to  become  spotted  with  small  black  spots, 
and  are  generally  more  silvery/' 

The  wrell-known  artist  and  angler,  Charles  Lanman, 
states :  "  Various  causes  have  been  assigned  for  the  great 
variety  in  the  color  of  the  brook  trout.  One  great  cause 
is  the  difference  of  food;  such  as  live  upon  fresh  water 
shrimps  and  other  Crustacea,  are  the  brightest ;  those  which 
feed  upon  May-flies  and  other  aquatic  insects  are  the  next; 
and  those  which  feed  upon  worms  are  the  dullest  and  dark- 
est of  all." 

Dr.  A.  T.  Thompson,  the  author  of  a  Treasury  of  Nat- 
ural History,"  observes:  aThat  each  species  of  trout  has 
its  peculiarities  of  color,  but  the  common  trout  is  the  most 
beautiful  of  its  class ;  the  variations  of  its  tints  and  spots, 


150  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

from  golden-yellow  to  crimson  and  greenish-black,  are 
almost  infinite,  and  depend  in  a  great  measure  on  the 
nature  of  its  food,  for  the  colors  are  always  the  most 
brilliant  in  those  fish  that  feed  on  the  water  shrimp." 

Near  Waterville,  Waukesha  County,  Wisconsin,  is  the 
extensive  trout  hatching  establishment  of  Mr.  H.  F.  Dous- 
man,  Avhere  a  number  of  fine  springs  form  a  considerable 
stream  after  leaving  the  ponds  and  flumes,  and  into  which 
a  number  of  brook  trout  have  escaped  at  various  times, 
so  that  finally  it  became  well  stocked  with  trout,  which 
propagate  naturally  in  the  stream.  The  trout  which  are 
reared  artificially  are  kept  in  covered  plank  flumes,  and  in 
open  ponds,  and  are  fed  principally  on  chopped  liver; 
those  in  the  ponds  getting  some  addition  to  this  fare,  how- 
ever, in  aquatic  flies,  insects,  etc.  The  stream  contains  a 
great  many  crawfish,  which  often  do  much  damage  to  the 
dams  and  ditches  of  adjacent  cranberry  marshes.  Upon 
visiting  this  establishment,  I  was  at  once  struck  with  the 
remarkable  difference  in  the  colors  of  the  trout  in  the 
flumes,  in  the  ponds,  and  in  the  stream.  Those  in  the 
flumes  were  quite  dull  in  appearance ;  those  in  the  ponds 
were  brighter;  while  those  in  the  stream  were  the  most 
brilliantly  colored  trout  I  ever  saw,  caused,  no  doubt,  by 
their  feeding  upon  the  Crustacea  with  which  the  stream 
abounded.  The  dull  color  of  the  trout  in  the  flumes  was 
partly  owing  to  their  shaded  condition. 

Not  only  does  the  character  of  the  food  influence  the 
external  coloring  of  the  Salmonidce,  but  the  tint  of  the 
flesh,  if  I  may  so  call  it,  is  also  affected  by  the  same  cause; 
thus  Professor  Agassiz  states  that  the  most  beautiful  salmon- 
trout  are  found  in  waters  which  abound  in  Crustacea,  direct 
experiments  having    shown   to   his   satisfaction   that    the 


COLORATION   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS.  151 

intensity  of  the  red  colors  of  their  flesh  depends  upon  the 
quantity  of  Gammaridce  which  they  have  devoured. 

A  striking  instance  of  the  difference  in  coloring  of  the 
flesh  from  the  influence  of  age  or  season,  is  related  by  the 
well-known  European  ichthyologist,  Dr.  Erie,  in  regard 
to  the  salmon  of  Bohemia.  He  says  that  there  are  three 
different  ascents  of  the  salmon  during  the  year:  The  first 
ascent  begins  in  February  or  March  under  the  ice,  and 
lasts  till  May.  These  salmon  weigh  from  twenty-five  to 
fifty  pounds,  and  are  famous  under  the  name  of  "  Violet- 
salmon."  The  second  ascent  begins  in  June  and  lasts  till 
August.  These  fish  have  a  reddish  flesh,  and  weigh  from 
twelve  to  twenty-two  pounds,  and  are  known  as  "  Rose- 
salmon."  The  third  ascent  is  from  September  until  De- 
cember. These  fish  are  mostly  weak,  weighing  from  three 
to  fifteen  pounds.  Their  flesh  is  pale,  and  they  are  usually 
called  "  Silver-salmon." 

The  trout  of  the  mountain  lakes  of  the  Alps  (Salmo 
salvelinus),  according  to  the  season  and  the  nature  of  the 
water  they  inhabit,  have  their  flesh  whitish  or  reddish. 

The  color  and  condition  of  the  water  has  likewise  a  very 
marked  effect  upon  the  external  appearance  of  the  Salmon- 
idce.  Agassiz  found  that  the  color  of  brook  trout  of 
neighboring  streams  was  influenced  by  the  color  and 
quantity  of  the  water,  and  that  even  trout  of  the  same 
stream  differed  in  color  as  they  frequented  the  shady  or 
sunny  side.  He  also  found  that  fish  in  clear,  sunny  waters, 
with  gravelly  bottoms,  were  highly  and  brightly  colored; 
while  those  in  shady  streams,  or  where  the  bottom  was 
dark  or  muddy,  and  the  water  not  so  clear,  were  corre- 
spondingly dusky  in  hue ;  and  that  bright  fish  taken  from 
waters  of  the  former  character  and  placed  in  those  of  the 


152  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

latter,  would  begin  to  fade  in  a  few  hours,  and  in  a  few 
days  or  weeks  would  become  entirely  changed  in  hue. 

The  great  lake  trout  (Cristlvomer  namaycush)  exists  in 
three  different  states  of  color,  according  to  situations  in 
which  it  is  found,  and  were  thought  by  the  French  hab- 
itans  of  the  great  lakes  to  be  three  distinct  fishes,  known 
as  Truite  de  Greve,  or  trout  of  the  muddy  bottom ;  Truite 
des  Battures,  or  trout  of  the  rocky  shores ;  and  'Truite  du 
Large,  or  trout  of  the  deep,  open  waters ;  the  first  being 
dull-colored,  the  second  bright  and  handsomely  mottled, 
and  the  last  bluish  and  silvery. 

Charles  Lanman  truly  observes,  that  the  fish  of  streams 
rushing  rapidly  over  pebbly  beds,  are  superior  both  in 
appearance  and  quality  to  those  of  ponds  or  semi-stagnant 
brooks.  But  this  may  arise,  not  so  much  from  any  par- 
ticular components  of  the  waters  themselves,  as  from  the 
fact  that  rapidly  running  and  falling  water  is  more  highly 
aerated,  the  atmosphere  being  more  freely  intermingled 
with  it,  and  therefore  more  conducive  to  the  health  and 
condition  of  all  that  inhabit  it. 

The  influence  of  light  in  producing  color  in  fishes  is  very 
evident  when  we  reflect  that  fishes  are  always  colored 
upon  the  back,  which  is  exposed  to  the  direct  rays  of  light, 
and  pale  underneath,  usually  being  quite  white  on  the 
abdomen.  This  fact  is  especially  pronounced  in  the  flat 
fishes,  which  swim  upon  the  side;  thus  the  flounder,  the 
sole,  the  turbot,  the  halibut,  etc.,  are  dark  and  variously 
colored  upon  the  side  presented  to  the  light,  while  they 
are  quite  pale  or  white  on  the  under  side.  Fishes  which 
inhabit  dark  caves,  owing  to  the  absence  of  light,  are 
entirely  colorless. 

That  the  age  of  fish  has  much  to  do  with  their  color  is 


COLORATION   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS.  153 

well  known ;  a  familiar  example  being  the  common  gold- 
fish, which  in  early  youth  is  black  or  dark  colored,  and 
only  assumes  its  beautiful  golden  hue  at  maturity. 

During  the  breeding  season  of  fishes  their  colors  become 
much  heightened,  but  they  lose  their  brightness  and 
brilliancy  in  many  cases  when  the  season  is  over.  A  sal- 
mon fresh-run  from  the  sea  is  justly  considered  the  most 
beautiful  of  fishes,  but  after  the  spawning  season  there  is 
none  more  sorry  and  ill-looking.  Darwin  mentions  some 
very  interesting  particulars,  among  which,  that  the  pike, 
especially  the  male,  during  the  breeding  season,  exhibits 
colors  exceedingly  intense,  brilliant  and  iridescent. 

Another  striking  instance  out  of  many  is  afforded  by 
the  male  stickleback,  which  is  described  by  Mr.  Warring- 
ton (England)  as  being  then  beautiful  beyond  description : 
"The  back  and  eyes  of  the  female,  on  the  other  hand,  are 
the  most  splendid  green,  having  a  metallic  luster  like  the 
green  feather  of  humming-birds.  The  throat  and  belly 
are  of  a  bright  crimson,  the  back  of  an  ashy  green,  and 
the  whole  fish  appears  as  though  it  was  somewhat  trans- 
lucent, and  glowed  with  an  internal  incandescence.  After 
the  breeding  season,  these  colors  all  change;  the  throat 
and  belly  become  of  a  paler  red,  the  back  more  green,  and 
the  glowing  tints  subside." 

The  well-known  and  beautiful  spring,  or  breeding 
dresses  of  many  of  our  darters  and  minnows,  are  common 
illustrations  of  the  influence  of  the  breeding  season  upon 
the  change  of  color  in  fishes. 


CHAPTER  Y. 

GEOGRAPHICAL    DISTRIBUTION. 

"You  may  remember  that  I  told  you,  Gesner  says  there  are  no  pikes 
in  Spain;  and  doubtless,  there  was  a  time,  about  a  hundred  or  a  few  more 
years  ago,  when  there  were  no  carps  in  England."— Izaak  Walton. 

The  Black  Bass  is  wholly  unknown  in  the  Old  World, 
except  where  recently  introduced,  and  exists,  naturally, 
only  in  America.  The  original  habitat  of  the  species  is 
remarkable  for  its  extent,  for,  with  the  exception  of  the 
New  England  States  and  the  Atlantic  seaboard  of  the 
Middle  States,  it  comprises  the  whole  of  the  United  States 
east  of  the  Eocky  Mountains,  Ontario  (Canada),  and  East 
Mexico.  So  far,  but  one  species,  the  large-mouthed  Bass, 
is  known  to  inhabit  Florida,  but  it  is  my  opinion  that  the 
small-mouthed  species  will  also  be  found  in  some  of  the 
streams  in  the  western  part  of  that  State. 

Of  late  years  the  range  of  the  Black  Bass  has  been  ex- 
tended through  the  efforts  of  public-spirited  individuals, 
and  by  the  Fish  Commissioners  of  various. States ;  so  that 
at  the  present  time  this  noble  fish  may  be  said  to  have  a 
"  local  habitation  and  a  name  "  in  every  State  of  the  Union. 
It  has  also  been  successfully  introduced  into  England. 

The  following  account,  by  the  late  James  W.  Milner, 
Assistant  U.  S.  Fish  Commissioner,  of  the  introduction 
of  the  Black  Bass  into  new  waters,  will  be  found  very  in- 
teresting and  instructive,  and  is  taken  from  the  Report 
of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commissioner  for  the  years  1872-73: — 
(154) 


GEOGRAPHICAL    DISTRIBUTION.  155 

"Among  numerous  records  of  their  introduction,  in 
very  few  instances  discriminating  properly  between  the 
two  species,  we  give  the  following:  In  1850,  twenty-seven 
live  Bass  were  brought  by  Mr.  Samuel  Tisdale,  of  East 
Wareham,  Mass.,  from  Saratoga  Lake  and  put  into  Flax 
Lake,  near  his  home.  In  the  years  1851  and  1852,  others 
were  brought  to  the  number  of  two  hundred  and  reared 
in  ponds  in  the  vicinity.  The  matter  was  kept  quiet  and 
fishing  discouraged  for  five  years,  when  the  fish  were  found 
to  have  increased  very  rapidly.  Some  twenty-five  ponds 
were  stocked  in  the  same  county  after  Mr.  Tisdale  had 
initiated  the  experiment.  Afterward,  Black  Bass  from 
Mr.  Tisdale's  ponds  were  supplied  to  a  lake  in  New 
Hampshire  in  1867,  and  to  waters  Ln  Connecticut  and 
Massachusetts.  In  1866  the  Cuttyhunk  Club,  of  Massa- 
chusetts introduced  Black  Bass  into  a  pond  in  their  grounds. 
In  the  year  1869  the  Commissioners  of  the  State,  together 
with  private  parties,  stocked  several  ponds  and  the  Concord 
River  with  Black  Bass,  and  in  the  following  year  other 
waters  were  stocked. 

"In  Connecticut,  in  the  winter  of  1852-53,  the  Black 
Bass  was  introduced  into  Waramang  Lake,  in  Litchfield 
County.  They  were  brought  from  a  small  lake  in  Dutchess 
County,  New  York.  A  few  years  later  they  were  said  to 
have  increased  greatly.  Another  lake  in  the  same  county 
was  stocked  not  long  afterward. 

u  Salstonstall  Lake,  near  New  Haven ;  East  Hampton 
Pond,  in  Chatham ;  Winsted  Pond,  in  Winchester,  and 
many  ponds  and  lakes  of  the  State,  particularly  in  the 
northwest  portion,  were  stocked  with  the  Black  Bass 
previous  to  the  year  1867. 

"  In  the  years  1869,  1870,  1871,  and  1872,  thirty-seven 


156  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

lakes  and  ponds  in  different  parts  of  the  State  were  sup- 
plied with  Black  Bass. 

"As  early  as  1864  or  1865  Black  Bass  had  been  put 
into  Rust's  Pond,  near  Wolfoorough,  New  Hampshire;  in 
1868  a  few  were  brought  to  Charlestown  and  Lakes  Mas- 
sabesic,  Sunapee,  Pennacook,  and  Echo,  and  Enfield, 
Wilson's  and  Cocheco  Ponds  were  well  stocked;  in  1870 
and  1871  the  New  Hampshire  Commissioners  introduced 
the  Black  Bass  from  Lake  Champlain  into  the  waters  of 
the  State  at  Meredith,  Canaan,  Webster,  Canterbury,  Har- 
risville,  Mnnsonville,  Hillsborough,  Warner,  Sutton,  New 
London,  Andover,  Loudon,  Concord,  and  in  Croydon.  In 
Massabesic  and  Sunapee  Lakes,  where  they  had  been  in- 
troduced, in  1868  and  1869,  they  were  found  to  have 
increased,  and,  on  the  authority  of  Dr.  W.  W.  Fletcher, 
they  have  become  exceedingly  numerous  in  Sunapee 
Lake. 

"  The  Commissioners  of  the  State  of  Rhode  Island,  since 
1870,  have  stocked  thirty  ponds  or  small  lakes  in  different 
parts  of  the  State  with  the  Black  Bass. 

"  In  Maine,  in  the  fall  of  1869,  the  State  Commissioners 
and  the  Oquossoc  Angling  Association  introduced  from 
Newburgh,  New  York,  a  quantity  of  Black  Bass.  The 
waters  of  Duck  Pond,  at  Falmouth;  Fitz  Pond,  in  Ded- 
ham ;  Newport  and  Philips  Ponds,  Cochnewagan  Pond,  in 
Monmouth ;  Cobbosseecontee  Lake,  in  Winthrop  and  ad- 
joining towns,  were  stocked,  and  a  few  years  afterward 
were  reported  to  have  increased  largely  in  numbers. 

"Since  the  year  1871,  Black  Bass  (Micropterus  salmoides) 
and  Oswego  Bass  (3ficropterus  nigricans)  have  been  put 
into  seventy  lakes,  ponds,  or  streams  of  the  State  of  New 
York  by  the  Commissioners.    They  had  made  their  way  of 


GEOGRAPHICAL  DISTRIBUTION.  157 

their  own  accord  through  the  canals  connecting  Lake  Erie 
with  the  Hudson,  into  that  stream. 

"  Private  citizens  of  Pennsylvania  introduced  the  Black 
Bass  (31icropterus  salmoides)  into  the  Susquehanna  about 
1869,  at  Harrisburg.  In  1873  the  tributaries  of  the  Sus- 
quehanna, the  Potomac,  and  Delaware  Rivers  were  sup- 
plied with  Black  Bass  by  the  Commissioners  at  thirty-five 
different  points. 

"  In  the  year  1854,  Mr.  William  Sh river,  of  Wheeling, 
Virginia,  planted  in  the  canal  basin  at  Cumberland,  Mary- 
land, his  former  home,  a  number  of  the  Black  Bass  (Mi- 
cropterus  salmoides)  ;  from  the  basin  they  escaped  into  the 
Potomac  River,  where  they  have  increased  immensely  at 
the  present  day.  They  were  moved  from  the  waters  of 
the  Ohio  River  to  their  new  locality  in  the  tank  of  a  loco- 
motive. Numerous  cases  have  also  occurred  of  transfer 
from  one  locality  in  the  Southern  States  to  another. 

"  There  have  been  very  many  transfers  of  these  valuable 
species  that  have  not  been  recorded,  as  they  are  easily  kept 
alive  while  being  moved  from  one  place  to  another,  and 
propagate  surely  and  rapidly  in  ponds,  lakes,  and  rivers. 

"  These  details  are  given  because  they  show  the  facility 
with  which  comparatively  barren  waters  may  be  stocked 
to  a  considerable  extent  with  good  food-fishes,  and  they 
exhibit  the  general  interest  and  attention  that  have  been 
given  to  this  mode  of  propagation." 

In  the  account  above  given,  reference  is  made  to  the 
stocking  of  the  Potomac  River  with  Black  Bass  by  Gen- 
eral W.  W.  Shriver,  of  Wheeling,  West  Virginia.  As 
this  matter  is  often  alluded  to  on  account  of  the  marvelous 
increase  of  the  fish  from  so  small  a  beginning — less  than 
thirty  Bass  having  been  originally  transplanted — and  as 


158  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

other  parties  have  been  accredited  with  the  praiseworthy- 
act  who  had  nothing  whatever  to  do  with  it,  and  whom  I 
will  not  even  mention  here,  it  may  not  seem  out  of  place 
to  give  the  subject  a  little  more  space  in  this  connection. 

The  earliest  reference  to  the  matter,  of  which  I  have 
any  knowledge,  is  contained  in  a  letter  describing  the  hab- 
its of  the  Black  Bass,  written  by  Mr.  John  Eoff,  of  Wheel- 
ing, West  Virginia,  and  published  in  the  Report  of  the 
Smithsonian  Institution  for  1854,  and  is  as  follows : — 

"  Mr.  William  Shriver,  a  gentleman  of  this  place,  and 
son  of  the  late  David  Shriver,  Esq.,  of  Cumberland,  Mary- 
land, thinking  the  Potomac  River  admirably  suited  to  the 
cultivation  of  the  Bass,  has  commenced  the  laudable  un- 
dertaking of  stocking  that  river  with  them;  he  has  already 
taken,  this  last  season,  some  twenty  or  more  in  a  live  box, 
in  the  water-tank  on  the  locomotive,  and  placed  them  in 
the  canal  basin  at  Cumberland,  where  we  are  in  hopes  they 
will  expand  and  do  well,  and  be  a  nucleus  from  which  the 
stock  will  soon  spread." 

General  Shriver,  himself,  in  a  letter  to  Philip  T.  Tyson, 
of  Baltimore,  Agricultural  Chemist  of  Maryland,  in  Sep- 
tember, 1860,  says: — 

"  *  *  *  The  enterprise  or  experiment  was  contemplated 
by  me  long  before  the  completion  of  the  Baltimore  and 
Ohio  Railroad  to  the  Ohio  River  at  Wheeling,  but  no 
satisfactory  mode  of  transportation  presented  itself  to  my 
mind  until  after  the  completion  of  the  great  work  (in,  I 
believe,  the  year  1853),  and  in  the  following  year  I  made 
my  first  trip  (although  I  made  several  afterwards  in  the 
same  year),  carrying  with  me  my  first  lot  of  fish  in  a  large 
tin  bucket,  perforated,  and  which  I  made  to  fit  the  open- 
ing in  the  water-tank  attached  to  the  locomotive,  which 


GEOGRAPHICAL   DISTRIBUTION.  159 

was  supplied  with  fresh  water  at  the  regular  water  stations 
along  the  line  of  the  road,  and  thereby  succeeded  well  in 
keeping  the  fish  (which  were  young  and  small,  having 
been  selected  for  the  purpose)  alive,  fresh,  and  sound. 

"This  lot  of  fish,  as  well  as  every  subsequent  one,  on 
my  arrival  at  Cumberland,  were  put  into  the  basin  of  the 
Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Canal,  from  which  they  had  free  egress 
and  ingress  to  the  Potomac  River  and  its  tributaries^  both 
above  and  below  the  dam.  *  *  *  "  B 

General  Shriver  also  states  in  a  subsequent  letter  to  Dr. 
Asa  Wall,  of  Winchester,  Virginia,  dated  September  17, 
1867  :— 

"  The  number  of  these  Black  Bass  taken  to  the  Potomac 
River  by  me,  as  well  as  I  can  now  recollect,  was  about 
thirty.  *  *  *  " 

Mr.  Edward  Stabler,  a  well-known  and  reliable  gentle- 
man of  Baltimore,  in  a  letter  to  G.  T.  Hopkins,  of  the 
Board  of  Water  Commissioners  of  Baltimore  City,  dated, 
"Baltimore,  10th  Mo.,  28,  '65,"  and  published  in  the 
Baltimore  Sun  during  the  same  month,  says : — 

"  After  much  delay  and  frequent  disappointments  and 
loss,  from  the  lack  of  suitable  transportation,  I  have  suc- 
ceeded in  taking  in  the  Upper  Potomac,  and  safely  trans- 
porting to  Baltimore,  a  fine  lot  of  ' Black  Bass'  (Grystes 
nigricans  Agassiz),  with  which  to  stock  i  Swan  Lake/  and 
also  those  in  Druid  Hill  Park. 

"As  a  brief  history  of  the  introduction  of  this  superior 
fish  into  the  tributaries  of  the  Chesapeake,  and  east  of 
the  Alleghanies — for  they  are,  in  my  opinion,  before  the 
Trout,  both  for  sport  and  the  table — may  not  be  without 
interest  to  some,  it  may  be  stated  that  some  thirteen  years 
since,   my   son,  A.  G.  Stabler,  then    a  conductor  on   the 


160  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad,  in  connection  with  two  pub- 
lic-spirited gentlemen  of  Wheeling  (Forsythe  and  Shriver), 
brought  from  Wheeling  Creek,  West  Virginia,  a  small  lot 
of  Bass  in  the  water-tank  of  his  tender.  They  were  placed 
in  the  Potomac,  near  Cumberland,  and  from  this  stock, 
the  Potomac,  for  more  than  two  hundred  miles,  and  all  its 
large  tributaries — the  Seneca,  Shenandoah,  Cherry  Creek, 
Sleepy  Creek,  Great  and  Little  Cacapon,  Patterson's  Creek, 
South  and  North  Branch,  etc. — afford  fine  fishing. 

"  They  are,  I  know,  from  the  Great  Falls  to  a  consid- 
erable distance  west  of  Cumberland,  for  I  have  recently  so 
taken  them,  and  often  weighing  from  five  to  seven  pounds 
— from  four  to  five  pounds  is  not  unusual.  *  *  *  n 

The  Baltimore  American  in  June,  1874,  in  an  article  on 
Fish  Culture,  remarked  incidentally  : — 

"  It  was  twenty  years  ago,  that  Alban  G.  Stabler  and 
J.  P.  Dukehart,  together  with  Forsythe  and  Shriver, 
brought  a  small  lot  of  Black  Bass  in  the  tender  of  a  loco- 
motive from  Wheeling  Creek,  West  Virginia,  and  put 
them  in  the  Potomac.  From  this  small  beginning,  sprang 
the  noble  race  of  fish  which  now  swarm  in  the  river." 

It  is  certain  from  the  above  evidence,  that  General 
Shriver  was  the  leading  spirit  in  the  enterprise,  assisted, 
no  doubt,  by  Mr.  Forsythe,  of  Wheeling,  and  Mr.  A.  G. 
Stabler,  of  Baltimore.  The  latter  gentleman,  being  the 
conductor  of  the  train  which  carried  the  Bass — and  there 
is  no  evidence  showing  that  more  than  one  lot  was  taken — 
certainly  had  some  share  in  the  transaction ;  and  if  he  was 
a  "  chip  off  the  old  block  " — for  his  father,  above-men- 
tioned, was  an  enthusiastic  angler — it  would  naturally  be 
expected  that  he  would  have  taken  a  lively  interest  in  the 
affair. 


GEOGRAPHICAL    DISTRIBUTION.  161 

The  circumstance  is  one  in  which  I  have  always  felt  the 
greatest  interest,  for  it  occurred  at  the  time  when  I  first 
left  my  native  city  of  Baltimore  for  a  home  in  the  West ; 
and  I  have  a  distinct  impression  of  the  matter,  made  at 
the  time  of  its  occurrence,  either  from  having  heard  it  fre- 
quently spoken  of,  or  from  reading  accounts  of  it  in  the 
public  prints  of  the  day ;  and  my  early  impressions  have 
always  connected  the  name  of  Mr.  Stabler,  then  a  con- 
ductor of  the  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad  Company,  with 
the  praiseworthy  act. 

At  all  events,  it  excited  my  curiosity  as  to  the  Black 
Bass,  which  I  had  then  never  seen,  and  prompted  me  to 
seek  the  acquaintance  of  that  grand  game-fish,  which  I  very 
soon  afterwards  proceeded  to  do,  in  the  Miami  River,  near 
Cincinnati.  It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  say  that  I  have 
ever  since  been  on  terms  of  the  closest  intimacy  with  him, 
he  having  entirely  supplanted,  in  my  affections,  the  love 
I  once  bore  my  former  piscatorial  friends,  the  Striped  Bass, 
the  Blue  Fish,  and  the  White  Perch  of  the  Chesapeake 
and  the  Patapsco  ;  but  I  must  confess  to  an  occasional 
retrospective  weakness,  and  a  kindly  yearning  for  the  old- 
time  friends  of  my  boyish  days,  not  excepting  the  diminu- 
tive, but  delicious  "Gudgeon"  of  the  Upper  Patapsco  and 

Herring  Run. 
14 


CHAPTER  VI. 

HABITS  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

"  •  •  *  they  mutually  labor,  both  the  spawner  and  the  melter,— to  cover  their 
spawn  with  sand,— or,  watch  it,— or  hide  it  in  some  secret  place,  unfrequented 
by  vermin  or  by  any  fish  but  themselves."— Izaak  Walton. 

Spawning  and  Hatching. 

Black  Bass  are  very  prolific,  the  females  yielding  fully 
one-fourth  of  their  weight  in  spawn.  The  period  of  spawn- 
ing extends  from  early  Spring  to  Midsummer,  according 
to  the  section  of  country,  and  temperature  of  the  water 
and  without  regard  to  species ;  in  the  Southern  States  oc- 
curring as  early  as  March,  and  in  the  Northern  States  and 
Canada,  from  the  middle  of  May  until  the  middle  of  July, 
always  earlier  in  very  shallow  waters,  and  somewhat  later 
in  those  of  great  depth. 

In  Waukesha  County,  Wisconsin,  I  have  observed  a 
difference  of  from  one  to  four  weeks  in  the  time  of  spawn- 
ing, in  the  numerous  lakes  of  that  locality,  owing  to  the 
difference  in  temperature  of  said  lakes,  caused  by  their 
varying  depths. 

The  Bass  leave  their  Winter  quarters  in  deep  water 
about  a  month  or  six  weeks  previous  to  the  spawning 
season,  at  which  times  they  can  be  seen  running  up  streams 
and  in  the  shallow  portions  of  lakes,  in  great  numbers. 
Soon  afterwards,  the  males  and  females  pair  off  and  pre- 
pare for  breeding. 

They  select  suitable  spots  for  their  nests,  usually  upon  a 
(162) 


HABITS   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS.  163 

gravelly  or  sandy  bottom,  or  on  rooky  ledges,  in  water 
from  eighteen  inches  to  three  feet  deep  in  rivers,  and  from 
three  to  six  feet  deep  in  lakes  and  ponds ;  and,  if  possible, 
adjacent  to  deep  water,  or  patches  of  aquatic  plants,  to 
which  the  parent  fish  retire  if  disturbed. 

The  nests  are  circular,  saucer-like  depressions,  varying 
from  one  to  three  feet  (usually  about  twice  the  length  of 
the  fish)  in  diameter,  which  are  formed  by  the  Bass,  by 
fanning  and  scouring  from  the  pebbles  all  sand,  silt,  and 
vegetable  debris,  by  means  of  their  tails  and  fins,  and  by 
removing  larger  obstacles  with  their  mouths.  This  gives 
to  the  beds  a  bright,  clean,  and  white  appearance,  which 
in  clear  water  can  be  seen  at  a  distance  of  several  score 
yards.  I  have  seen  hundreds  of  such  nests,  in  groups,  al- 
most touching  each  other,  in  the  clear-water  lakes  of  Wis- 
consin, Michigan,  and  Minnesota. 

Sometimes  the  nests  are  formed  upon  a  muddy  bottom, 
with  a  pavement  or  foundation  of  small  sticks  and  leaves, 
from  which  the  mud  and  slime  have  been  washed  and 
scoured ;  and  as  this  often  seems  to  be  a  matter  of  choice, 
there  being  beds  upon  gravelly  situations  in  the  same 
waters,  I  have  sometimes  thought  that  this  discrimination 
in  the  location  of  the  nests,  might  be  owing  to  some  differ- 
ence of  habits  in  this  respect,  in  the  two  species  of  Black 
Bass ;  but  of  this  I  am  by  no  means  sure. 

The  females  deposit  their  eggs  on  the  bottom  of  the 
nests,  usually  in  rows,  which  are  fecundated  by  the  male 
and  become  glued  to  the  pebbles  or  sticks  contained  therein. 
The  eggs  are  hatched  in  from  one  to  two  weeks,  depend- 
ing on  the  temperature  of  the  water,  but  usually  in  from 
eight  to  ten  days. 

When    hatched,  the   young  Bass    are  almost  perfectly 


164  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

formed,  from  one-fourth  to  one- half  of  an  inch  in  length, 
and  cover  the  entire  bed,  where  they  can  be  easily  detected 
by  their  constant  motion.  After  hatching,  the  young  fry 
remain  over  the  bed  from  two  to  seven  days,  usually  three 
or  four,  when  they  retire  into  deep  water,  or  take  refuge 
in  the  weeds,  or  under  stones,  logs,  and  other  hiding-places. 

During  the  period  of  incubation  the  nests  are  carefully 
guarded  by  the  parent  fish,  who  remain  over  them,  and  by 
a  constant  motion  of  the  fins,  create  a  current  which  keeps 
the  eggs  free  from  all  sediment  and  debris.  After  the 
eggs  are  hatched,  and  while  the  young  remain  on  the  nests, 
the  vigilance  of  the  parent  fish  becomes  increased  and  un- 
ceasing, and  all  suspicious  and  predatory  intruders  are 
driven  away. 

Their  anxiety  and  solicitude  for  their  eggs  and  young, 
and  their  apparent  disregard  of  their  own  safety  at  this 
time,  is  well-known  to  poachers  and  pot-fishers,  who  take 
advantage  of  this  trait  and  spear  or  gig  them  on  their 
nests.  I  have  known,  also,  some  who  call  themselves 
anglers — Heaven  save  the  mark! — who  take  the  Bass  at 
this  time  in  large  numbers,  with  the  minnow  or  crawfish. 
Of  course  the  Bass  do  not  "  bite  n  at  this  season,  volun- 
tarily, but  when  the  bait  is  persistently  held  under  their 
noses,  they  at  first  endeavor  to  drive  it  away  or  remove  it 
from  the  nests,  and  finally,  I  think,  swallow  it  in  sheer 
desperation. 

Food  and  Growth. 

After  the  young  Bass  leave  the  spawning  beds  their 
food  at  first  consists  of  animalculse,  larvae,  insects,  and  the 
ova  of  other  fish  ;  as  they  grow  older  and  larger  they  de- 
vour worms,  tadpoles,  small  fish,  etc.;  and,  in  later  life, 


HABITS   OF   THE  BLACK    BASS.  165 

they  Vary  their  diet  with  crawfish,  frogs,  mussels,  and 
water-snakes,  until,  attaining  a  weight  of  two  pounds,  they 
will  bolt  any  thing  from  an  angle-worm  to  a  young  musk- 
rat. 

Where  food  is  plentiful  they  grow  rapidly,  reaching  a 
length  of  two  inches  in  a  few  months  after  hatching,  and 
at  a  year  old,  will  measure,  at  least,  four  inches.  At  two 
years  of  age,  they  will  be  found  from  eight  to  twelve 
inches  in  length,  weighing  about  a  pound,  and  will  grow 
nearly  or  quite  a  pound  a  year  thereafter,  until  they  attain 
their  maximum  weight. 

They  arrive  at  maturity  in  from  twro  to  three  years,  ac- 
cording as  the  conditions  for  their  growth  were  favorable 
or  otherwise.  The  maximum  weight  of  the  small-mouthed 
form  of  the  North  and  West  may  be  said  to  be  four  or 
five  pounds,  and  of  the  large-mouthed  form,  from  six  to 
eight  pounds,  though  there  are  rare  exceptions  to  this 
rule. 

An  instance,  showing  the  rapid  growth  of  Black  Bass, 
is  related  by  Mr.  Charles  J.  Pearson,  at  that  time  Fish 
Warden  for  Morris  County,  New  Jersey  :  He  states  that 
in  the  fall  of  1876,  fifty  Black  Bass,  measuring  from  two 
and  a  half  to  four  inches  in  length,  were  placed  in  D.  L. 
Miller's  pond  at  Madison,  Morris  County,  New  Jersey. 
On  October  17th,  1877,  about  one  year  from  the  time  of 
putting  them  in,  Mr.  Miller  had  occasion  to  draw  the 
water  down,  for  some  repairs.  He  had  the  flume  so  ar- 
ranged as  to  take  any  fish  that  might  run  out.  Eleven 
Bass  were  caught.  They  measured  from  ten  to  thirteen 
inches  in  length,  and  were  undoubtedly  the  same  fish 
which  were  put  in  the  year  before,  as  none  of  this  species 
of  fish  were  ever  known  in  the  pond  before. 


166  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

There  is  not  an  absolute  uniformity  of  growth  in  fishes, 
any  more  than  in  other  creatures ;  thus,  some  fish  will  out- 
grow others  of  the  same  hatching  until  double  their  size, 
a  fact  made  very  apparent  in  the  artificial  culture  of  brook 
Trout,  Salmon,  etc. ;  but  Black  Bass  will  grow  with  wonder- 
ful rapidity  where  an  equable  temperature  of  water  and  an 
abundance  of  food  obtain.  As  an  instance  of  the  influence 
of  an  abundant  supply  of  food  upon  the  growth  of  Black 
Bass,  A.  N.  Cheney,  Esq.,  of  Glens  Falls,  New  York,  re- 
lated to  me  the  following  circumstance,  and  presented  me 
with  a  fine  photograph  of  the  two  fish  alluded  to : — 

"  I  send  you  a  photograph  of  two  large-mouthed  Bass 
caught  by  myself.  They  are,  or,  rather,  one  of  them  is, 
the  largest  Bass  ever  caught  in  any  waters  about  here, 
weighing  seven  pounds  and  fourteen  ounces,  and  the  other 
six  and  a  quarter  pounds.  The  most  remarkable  fact  is, 
perhaps,  the  effect  of  food  upon  the  growth  of  fish.  The 
two  fish  in  question  were  caught  in  Long  Pond,  near  here, 
August  1,  1877.  Long  Pond  was  stocked  with  six  small 
Bass  from  Lake  George,  New  York,  in  1866,  they  having 
been  put  into  a  stream  emptying  into  the  Pond  by  some 
gentlemen,  who,  on  their  way  from  camping  a  week  at 
Lake  George,  had  to  cross  this  stream  to  reach  home ;  and 
the  putting  the  fish  into  the  stream  was  suggested  by  their 
catching  a  number  of  small  Bass  during  the  last  day  in  camp. 

"  The  fact  of  their  deposit  was  almost  forgotten,  when, 
in  1874-^75,  quantities  of  Bass  was  discovered  in  the 
Pond,  which  had  hitherto  been  inhabited  by  Pickerel, 
Perch,  and  quantities  of  bait  fish,  minnows,  silver  and  gold 
shiners,  etc.  While  Lake  George  had  never  been  known 
to  yield  a  Bass  over  six  and  a  half  pounds,  Long  Pond  has 
turned  out  at  least  a  dozen  over  that  weight. 


HABITS    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS.  167 

"The  largest  small-mouthed  Bass  ever  caught  in  this 
region,  was  a  five  pound  fish  from  the  Hudson  River, 
taken  by  Colonel  Jeptha  Garrard,  of  Cincinnati,  with  a  fly, 
while  fishing  with  me.  Two  years  later,  I  caught  one  of 
equal  weight,  near  the  same  place." 

The  following  very  interesting  account  of  the  food  and 
growth  of  the  Black  Bass,  and  which,  at  the  same  time, 
exhibits  its  voracity  and  pugnacity,  was  contributed  to 
the  columns  of  Forest  and  Stream,  by  William  A.  Mynster, 
of  Council  Bluffs,  Iowa.  Mr.  Mynster  is  an  exceptionally 
close  observer,  and  takes  especial  delight  in  watching  and 
tending  his  "  finny  pets  :" 

I  had  a  dam  constructed  in  my  spring  branch,  immediately 
below  my  fish  ponds,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  form  a  small  body  of 
pure,  clear  water.  In  this  I  placed  some  seven  or  eight  hundred 
native  fish  of  different  varieties,  embracing  the  black  bass,  sheeps- 
heads,  buffaloes,  and  pickerel.  From  the  banks  of  this  body  of  clear 
water  I  was  enabled  to  see  every  movement  of  my  finny  pets,  and 
many  moments  of  leisure  have  I  spent  in  watching  their  habits. 
The  Black  Bass  {Micropterus  pallidus)  would  usually  swim  into  the 
current,  where  he  would  sport  about  on  the  gravelly  bottom,  while 
the  buffalo  would  retire  into  stiller  water  and  browse  in  the  grass 
and  water-cress  growing  on  the  bottom. 

Thus  I  ascertained  their  habits  of  feeding,  and  was  enabled  to 
determine  what  growth  they  would  make  in  a  given  time  without 
being  fed  artificially.  Hence  I  seldom,  if  ever  gave  them  any  food. 
The  Buffalo  (Bubalichthys  bubalus),  in  a  few  weeks  became  attenuated, 
and  began  dying.  This  I  attributed  to  their  being  in  cold  spring 
water  with  a  current  too  rapid,  and  their  not  being  able  to  procure 
sufficient  food.  The  Black  Bass,  on  the  other  hand,  thrived  amaz- 
ingly well,  and  were  making  a  most  marvelous  growth.  This  I 
attributed  to  the  fact  that  they  were  in  pure  water  of  a  uniform 
temperature.  The  Bass,  although  found  in  all  kinds  of  water,  un- 
doubtedly thrive  best  in  clear,  pure,  spring  brooks  with  gravelly 
bottom.     The  size  of  these  Bass  when  I  first  put  them  in  this  place 


168  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

was  from  four  to  six  inches  in  length,  and  in  less  than  three  weeks 
had  grown  upwards  of  an  inch. 

This,  I  must  confess,  notwithstanding  I  had  implicit  confidence 
in  their  making  a  rapid  growth,  astonished  me  much.  I  had  always- 
been  a  believer  in  heavy  feeding,  and  felt  satisfied  that  the  amount 
of  growth  that  would  be  derived  in  a  certain  time  depended  mainly 
upon  the  quantity  of  feed  that  had  been  consumed.  This  led  me 
to  speculate  where  these  Bass  obtained  their  food,  confined  as  they 
were  in  a  very  small  body  of  water  containing  some  eight  hundred 
fish,  and  immediately  below  my  pOnds  containing  some  40,000  sal- 
mon, young  and  older.  For  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  this,  I 
made  my  Bass  frequent  visits,  and  by  remaining  quietly  secreted 
on  the  banks,  soon  discovered  the  source  of  their  food  supply. 

One  day  as  I  was  thus  occupied,  in  company  with  my  eldest  boy, 
he  called  my  attention  to  the  fact  that  a  snake  (  Tropidonotus  grahami) 
was  leisurely  swimming  through  their  midst.  At  first  I  felt  inclined 
to  pursue  the  snake,  fearing  that  he  might  in  some  manner  injure, 
if  not  destroy,  a  large  portion  of  my  native  stock.  My  fears  were, 
however,  speedily  terminated  by  one  of  my  larger  Bass  making  a 
rapid  dart  at  the  snake  with  open  mouth,  and  nearly  severing  its 
head  quite  close  to  the  body.  The  scene  that  then  ensued  beggared 
description.  Never  shall  I  forget  it — such  a  floundering  and  splash- 
ing! The  surface  of  the  water  for  an  instant  seemed  literally  cov- 
ered with  perpendicular  tails  enveloped  in  foam.  So  great  was  the 
commotion  that  we  were  compelled  to  retire  to  a  greater  distance 
in  order  to  avoid  being  thoroughly  drenched. 

After  the  disturbed  waters  had  become  somewhat  calmed,  we 
resumed  our  former  position  in  order  to  make  further  observations, 
and  found  our  large  Bass  hero,  with  one  end  of  the  -snake  in  its 
mouth,  rapidly  making  away  with  it,  and  a  smaller,  but  not  less 
pretentious  brother,  at  the  other  end,  endeavoring  with  all  his  might 
and  main  to  eat  even  with  him.  Thus  these  gamey  lads  continued 
for  some  time,  swimming  up  and  down  the  stream,  like  two  boys 
running  with  a  rope.  The  distance  between  them,  however,  rapidly' 
diminished. 

This  had  continued  for  some  time,  when  we  saw  emerging  from 
under  a  log  at  the  edge  of  the  banks  one  of  my  pike  {Esox  lucius). 
At  first  he  came  slowly  but  steadily,  when  he  made  a  rapid  dart, 


HABITS   OP   THE    BLACK    BASS.  169 

with  open  mouth,  at  my  smaller  Bass,  and,  at  a  single  gulp,  placed 
himself  outside  of  it!  Then  he  came  face  to  face  with  our  hero. 
It  was  an  awful  moment  of  suspense  for  some  time.  Our  finny- 
gladiators  remained  motionless,  eyeing  each  other,  measuring  the 
dimensions  of  each  other's  mouth,  as  it  were.  The  crisis  at  length 
came.  The  Bass,  by  force  of  digestion,  had  made  way  with  his 
part  of  the  snake  rope,  and  making  one  mighty  effort,  stretching 
maxillary  and  dental  to  their  utmost  capacity,  soon  enveloped  the 
pike  to  a  point  just  below  the  operculum.  At  this  point  we  de- 
parted, feeling  perfectly  satisfied  that  our  hero  would  take  care  of 
himself. 

I  presume  it  is  unnecessary  to  say  that  T  no  longer  entertain  any 
doubts  as  to  the  ability  of  the  Bass  to  take  care  of  himself,  and  that 
heavy  feeding  is  indispensable  to  a  rapid  growth. 

The  above  may,  perhaps,  seem  somewhat  fishy  to  a  great  many, 
but  when  we  consider  the  structure  of  the  Bass,  our  doubts  will  be, 
in  a  great  measure,  abated.  The  variety  above-mentioned  has  a 
very  large  mouth — in  fact,  they  seem  all  mouth,  thus  enabling  them 
to  envelop  any  thing  not  exceeding  their  own  circumference,  with 
ample  room  for  respiration  through  the  gills.  The  oesophagus  is 
very  large  (about  the  size  of  the  stomach)  and  short.  This  enables 
them  to  take  into  the  stomach  all  that  may  be  embraced  by  the 
mouth. 

In  the  warm  waters  of  the  extreme  South,  which  pre- 
serve a  more  equable  temperature  than  those  of  the  North- 
ern States,  the  Black  Bass  grow  to  an  immense  size,  their 
maximum  weight,  in  Florida,  being  from  twelve  to  four- 
teen pounds;  but  while  I  have  seen  them  of  these  weights, 
I  never  took  one,  there,  weighing  more  than  nine  pounds, 
with  the  artificial  fly,  but,  doubtless,  I  could  have  done  so 
with  live  bait  or  the  trolling  spoon. 

In  Northern  waters  they  do  not  grow  nearly  so  large, 
six  to  eight  pounds  being  the  limit.  Under  conditions 
and  circumstances  favorable  to  their  growth  they  will  in- 
crease in  weight,  as  before  stated,  about  a  pound  a  year ; 
15 


170  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

but  under  adverse  circumstances  or  unfavorable  condi- 
tions their  growth  is  much  slower;  therefore,  no  rule  of 
general  application  can  be  established  from  any  single 
instance,  or  as  the  result  of  any  exclusively  local  test  or 
experiment. 

The  growth  of  Black  Bass  is  affected  not  only  by  the 
supply  of  food  and  temperature  of  water,  but  also  by  the 
extent  of  range.  Bass  in  small  ponds  do  not  thrive  so 
well,  nor  grow  so  fast;  the  smaller  the  extent  of  their 
range,  the  slower  will  be  their  growth,  and,  indeed, 
this  is  true  of  any  other  fish ;  for  it  is  well  known  that 
fish  confined  in  aquaria,  in  springs  or  wells,  grow  so 
very  slowly,  that  their  increase  in  size  is  hardly  appre- 
ciable from  year  to  year,  even  though  their  supply  of  food 
be  abundant. 

An  equally  well-attested  fact  is,  that  the  largest  Bass 
are  found  in  the  largest  bodies  of  water,  or  where  the 
range  is  extensive;  extreme  depth  of  water  seeming  to  be 
more  favorable  to  their  growth  than  mere  extent  of  sur- 
face. For  example,  I  know  of  several  shallow  lakes  in 
Wisconsin,  where  the  Bass  seldom  grow  to  exceed  two 
pounds,  while  in  deeper  lakes  in  the  same  vicinity  they 
attain  the  usual  maximum  weight  of  four  or  five  pounds; 
and  in  Green  Lake,  a  large  and  deep  lake  near  Ripon,  in 
the  same  State,  I  once  caught  a  string  of  thirty  Black  Bass, 
mostly  of  the  large-mouthed  species,  weighing  from  four 
to  eight  pounds  each,  and  fully  averaging  six  pounds. 

Hibernation. 

Black  Bass  undoubtedly  hibernate,  except  in  the  ex- 
treme  Southern   and   South-western   States;    but    in   the 


HABITS   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS.  171 

colder  climate  of  the  North  and  West,  it  has  been  proven 
in  numerous  instances,  that  they  bury  themselves  in  the 
mud,  in  the  crevices  of  rocks,  under  masses  of  weeds,  or 
sunken  logs,  in  the  deepest  water,  and  remain  dormant 
until  spring. 

This  habit  has  been  doubted  by  some,  inasmuch  as  an 
occasional  Bass  has  been  caught  through  the  ice;  though 
such  instances  are  rare  indeed,  and  all  those  of  which  I 
have  any  knowledge  occurred  late  in  the  winter,  or  early 
in  the  spring.  As  one  swallow  does  not  make  a  summer, 
these  unusual  cases  must  be  considered  as  merely  excep- 
tions to  the  general  rule. 

During  a  residence  of  ten  years  in  Wisconsin,  where 
fishing  through  the  ice  was  constantly  practiced  during 
the  winter,  and  where  tons  of  pickerel,  pike-perch  and 
yellow-perch  were  so  taken  in  a  single  season,  I  never 
knew  of  a  single  Black  Bass  being  so  taken  except  very 
late  in  the  winter,  or  in  early  spring,  say  in  March,  just 
before  the  breaking  up  of  the  ice ;  and  even  those  instances 
were  of  rare  occurrence,  and  happened  only  during  un- 
usually mild  weather ;  and  these  same  waters,  be  it  remem- 
bered, afforded  the  finest  Black  Bass  fishing  during  the 
summer  and  fall. 

Dr.  D.  C.  Estes,  of  Lake  City,  Minnesota,  an  accom- 
plished angler  and  naturalist,  records  a  similar  experience 
in  regard  to  Lake  Pepin  ;  he  says  : — 

"The  Pike  and  Pickerel  are  the  only  fish  taken  here  in 
the  winter.  It  is  strange  to  many  what  becomes  of  the 
countless  numbers  of  other  game  fish  that  throng  these 
waters  in  the  summer  season.  Bass,  which  are  so  numer- 
ous then,  are  never  seen  in  winter.  I  am  quite  sure  that 
not  a  single  Bass  was  ever  caught  here  through  the   ice. 


172  BOOK   OF  THE   BLACK   BASS. 

I  have  for  years  tried  all  depths  of  water  to  raise  one,  or 
to  discover  one,  but  have  thus  far  failed.  I  must  believe, 
then,  that  they  hibernate." 

Genio  C.  Scott,  in  "  Fishing  in  American  Waters," 
quotes  an  intelligent  and  veteran  Black  Bass  angler  of 
Central  New  York,  in  regard  to  this  habit,  and  who  fur- 
nishes the  following  conclusive  evidence  : — 

"  I  have  never  known  them  [Black  Bass]  to  be  taken  in 
winter,  and  I  think  they  seek  a  particular  location  and 
remain  torpid  during  winter.  My  attention  was  directed 
to  this  fact  about  thirty  years  since.  At  that  time  I  was 
in  the  habit  of  spearing  fish  in  a  mill-dam  on  the  outlet  of 
Seneca  Lake,  at  Waterloo,  Seneca  County,  New  York. 
From  April  to  November  I  found  numbers  of  Bass;  from 
December  to  March  I  found  all  other  varieties,  but  no 
Bass. 

"  In  the  winter  of  1837,  the  water  was  shut  off  at  the 
lake  for  the  purpose  of  deepening  the  channel  to  improve 
the  navigation.  This  was  considered  a  favorable  time  to 
quarry  the  limestone  in  the  bed  of  the  river ;  and  upon 
moving  the  loose  rock  in  the  above-named  mill-dam,  where 
the  ledges  cropped  out,  there  were  found  hundreds  of  Bass 
imbedded  in  their  slime,  and  positively  packed  together  in 
the  crevices  and  fissures  of  the  rocks.  My  subsequent 
experience  has  done  much  to  convince  me  that  my  theory 
is  correct." 

On  this  point,  A.  N.  Cheney,  Esq.,  of  Glens  Falls,  New 
York,  related  to  me  the  following  incidents : — 

aA  few  years  ago  a  man,  Seth  Whipple,  living  on  the 
Hudson  River,  near  Glens  Falls,  in  drawing  some  sunken 
logs  from  the  river,  during  the  winter,  for  firewood,  found 
in  the  hollow  of  one  of  the  logs,  six  Black  Bass  (small- 


HABITS   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS.  173 

mouthed),  weighing  from  a  half  to  two  pounds;  they  were 
nearly  dormant. 

"  The  father  of  Pension  Commissioner  Bentley,  who  lives 
at  Glens  Falls,  and  has  some  Trout  ponds  on  his  place,  to 
gratify  a  boy  bought  of  him  a  Black  Bass,  and  placed  the 
fish  in  a  spring.  When  autumn  came  the  fish  was  missing, 
and  was  supposed  to  be  stolen.  During  the  succeeding  winter 
the  spring  partly  dried  up,  and  to  restore  the  water  supply 
the  spring  was  dug  deeper.  During  the  operation  it  was 
found  necessary  to  remove  an  old  stump  in  the  side  of  the 
spring,  when  to  his  surprise  the  Bass  was  found  under- 
neath the  stump,  in  a  hole,  evidently  prepared  for  winter 
burro  w." 

Mr.  John  Eoff,  of  Wheeling,  West  Virginia,  a  remark- 
ably close  observer,  says,  in  the  "  Report  of  the  Smithsonian 
Institution,"  for  1854  : — 

"  In  the  winter  season  they  retire  to  deep  and  still  water, 
and  apparently  hide  under  rocks,  logs,  etc.,  and  remain 
there  until  the  first  of  April." 

I  could  multiply  evidence  on  this  point,  if  necessary, 
but  these  several  opinions,  founded  upon  observations 
made  in  the  widely  separated  States  of  Wisconsin  and 
Minnesota  in  the  northwest,  New  York  in  the  north, 
and  West  Virginia  in  the  middle  section  of  our  country 
must  suffice. 

That  Black  Bass  do  not  hibernate  in  the  extreme  South, 
is  well-known ;  and  to  this  circumstance,  perhaps,  may  be 
attributed,  in  a  measure,  their  larger  growth.  Still  it  is 
not  unreasonable  to  suppose,  that  the  Black  Bass  of  that 
section  have  a  period  of  repose  and  seclusion,  analogous 
to  hibernation,  at  some  other  season  of  the  year,  possibly 
during  the  fervid  heat  of  the   summer  solstice ;  for  it  is 


174  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

usual  for  the  Bass  of  the  North-west  to  cease  biting  and 
retire  to  the  deepest  water  during  an  unusually  heated 
term  in  summer. 

The  fact  that  the  best  season  for  Black  Bass  fishing 
varies  in  different  sections — in  the  North  being  from  July 
till  October;  in  the  West  and  most  northerly  of  the  South- 
ern States  in  the  spring  and  fall ;  and  in  the  extreme  South 
during  the  winter  season — would  naturally  lead  one  to 
suppose  that  the  period  of  dormancy  in  the  Black  Bass 
occurs  at  different  seasons  in  different  localities,  and  is 
influenced  by  climatic  conditions,  or  the  supply  of  food. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

INTELLIGENCE  AND  SPECIAL  SENSES. 

Venator.    But,  master !  do  not  trouts  see  us,  in  the  night  ? 
Piscator.    Yes;  and  hear,  and  smell,  too,  both  then  and  in  the  day-time.— 
Izaak  Walton. 

The  brain  of  fishes  differs  so  materially  in  size,  con- 
formation, substance  and  analogy  from  that  of  other  ani- 
mals, that  it  has  been  the  rule  of  specialists  to  attribute  to 
this  class  of  vertebrates  a  very  low  order  of  intelligence. 
In  opposition  to  this  theory,  however,  Dr.  F.  Day  recently 
read  a  paper  before  the  Linnsean  Society  of  London,  En- 
gland, in  which  he  endeavored  to  show  that  fishes  possessed 
a  far  higher  order  of  intelligence  than  is  usually  accorded 
them. 

He  claimed  that  the  experience  of  himself  and  others 
indicated  that  they  possessed  emotions  and  affections,  and 
in  support  of  that  view  he  showed  that  they  constructed 
nests,  transported  and  defended  their  eggs,  protected  their 
young,  manifested  their  affections  for  each  other,  recognized 
human  beings,  could  be  tamed,  exhibited  the  emotions  of 
fear,  anger,  and  revenge,  uttered  sounds,  hid  from  danger, 
sought  protection  by  attaching  themselves  to  the  bodies  of 
other  animals,  and  had  peculiar  modes  of  defense ;  that 
they  left  the  water  in  search  of  food,  and  that  they  some- 
times combined  for  attack  and  defense. 

Every  observant  angler  and  naturalist  has,  in  his  own 

(175) 


176  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

experience,  proved  the  truth  of  many  of  the  above  asser- 
tions, and,  no  doubt,  some  have  observed  traits  of  intelli- 
gence still  more  convincing. 

The  wonderful  faculty  of  anadromous  fishes,  seeking  out 
and  ascending  their  native  streams  during  the  breeding 
season,  even  after  being  purposely  carried  hundreds  of 
miles  away,  has  commanded  the  admiration  of  biologists, 
yet  tlTey  can  see  nothing  in  the  small  and  jelly-like  brain 
of  the  fish  to  account  for  the  marvelous  habit,  but  instinct; 
on  the  same  principle,  perhaps,  that  Coleridge  accounts 
for  the  blindness  of  Love : 

"  His  eyes  are  in  his  mind." 


Sense  of  Sight. 

We  are  led  to  believe,  from  the  investigations  of  anato- 
mists, that  the  organs  of  special  sense  in  fishes  are  very 
imperfectly  developed;  but  while  this  may  be  true,  in  the 
main,  as  regards  the  special  senses  of  touch  and  taste,  I  am 
constrained  to  believe,  from  the  observations  of  myself 
and  many  others,  that  fishes,  in  general,  have  the  senses 
of  sight,  hearing,  and  smell  developed  in  a  much  greater 
degree  than  is  generally  supposed. 

The  diversities  in  form  and  position  of  the  eyes  of 
different  fishes,  prove  that  they  are  of  the  greatest  use 
to  them,  in  procuring  food,  and  in  escaping  from  their 
enemies;  and  are  placed  "where  they  will  do  the  most 
good." 

In  the  majority  of  fishes,  which  are  constantly  moving 
about,  and  frequent  alike  the  surface  and  bottom  of  streams, 
the  eyes  are  placed  in  the  usual  position   of  most  other 


INTELLIGENCE   AND   SPECIAL   SENSES.  177 

animals,  one  on  each  side  of  the  head.  In  those  which 
stay  more  constantly  in  the  lower  depth  of  waters,  the  eyes 
are  placed  on  top  of  the  head,  as  in  the  star-gazers ;  while 
in  the  flat  fishes,  which  recline  or  swim  on  one  side  near  the 
bottom,  both  eyes  are  placed  on  the  same  side  of  the  head, 
enabling  them  to  obtain  the  benefit  of  both  eyes  while  in 
that  position.  In  the  Pike-perch,  which  is  nocturnal  in  its 
habits,  the  eyes  are  unusually  large,  as  is  the  case  with 
other  animals  who  seek  their  food  mostly  at  night. 

It  is  a  popular  idea  that  fish  are  necessarily  near-sighted 
on  account  of  the  conformation  of  the  eye,  which  is  large, 
round  and  prominent;  and  the  main  argument  adduced  to 
support  this  theory,  is  the  readiness  with  which  they  will 
take  an  artificial  fly,  trolling  spoon  or  other  artificial  bait, 
which  resemble  in  but  slight  degree  the  natural  objects 
of  food  that  they  are  intended  to  represent,  if,  indeed, 
they  are  intended  to  represent  any  thing. 

It  is  very  often  the  case  that  those  anglers  who  are  most 
strenuous  in  their  theory  that  fish  are  near-sighted,  stultify 
themselves  by  carrying  a  large  and  most  varied  assort- 
ment of  artificial  flies,  of  all  shapes  and  colors,  in  order 
to  meet  the  "fastidious  taste"  of  the  fish,  that  often  refuse 
one  pattern  or  color,  and  rise  eagerly  to  another,  which 
could  not  be  the  fact  were  they  so  near-sighted  as  many 
believe.  The  consistency  of  these  anglers  would  be  more 
apparent,  if  they  would  adopt  Mr.  Cholmondely  PennelPs 
theory  of  artificial  flies,  and  confine  themselves  exclu- 
sively to  his  three  typical  flies — brown,  yellow,  and  green 
hackles. 

Now,  I  am  not  of  those  who  believe  that  our  brave 
game  fishes  possess  such  extreme  gullibility,  as  to  mistake 
an  artificial  lure   for  the   genuine  article,  upon  the  hypo- 


178  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

thesis  of  near-sightedness.  My  opinion,  founded  upon 
numerous  experiments,  is,  that  fishes  see  and  hear  as 
well  in  and  -through  the  medium  of  the  water,  for  all 
practical  purposes,  as  the  angler  does  through  the  medium 
of  the  atmosphere ;  the  clearer  and  more  rarified  the  me- 
dium, the  clearer  and  greater  the  range  of  vision  in  both 
instances. 

In  muddy  or  turbid  waters  the  sight  of  fishes  is  neces- 
sarily limited,  as  ours  would  be  in  hazy  or  foggy  weather. 
It  is  neither  fair  nor  logical  to  presume  that  fishes,  in 
water,  ought  to  discern  objects  in  the  atmosphere  above, 
any  clearer  or  plainer  than  we  can  perceive  objects  in  the 
water,  while  standing  on  the  brink. 

We  are  altogether  too  prone  to  judge  every  thing  from 
our  own  standpoint,  and  to  attribute  to  our  own  clever- 
ness results  that  in  all  probability  depend  upon  other  and 
extraneous  circumstances.  Who,  of  us,  could  tell  a  skill- 
fully tied  artificial  fly  from  a  real  one,  beneath  the  water, 
when  its  surface  was  ruffled  by  a  brisk  breeze,  shadowed 
by  drifting  clouds,  covered  with  the  froth  and  suds  of 
an  eddy,  or  surmounted  by  the  foam  and  bubbles  of  a 
rapid  ? 

Yet,  there  are  those  who  contend,  because  fish  fail  to 
detect  this  difference  through  the  same  obstacles  to  clear 
vision,  that  they  are  of  a  verity  near-sighted,  and  easily 
fooled  by  the  very  poorest  semblance  of  a  fly  or  feathery 
nondescript;  but  let  one  of  these  persons  try  a  cast  of  the 
best  flies  upon  a  bright,  still  day,  when  the  water  is  per- 
fectly clear  and  the  surface  like  a  mirror,  and  if  he  expects 
to  get  a  rise  under  such  conditions,  he  himself  must  be 
very  near-sighted  indeed. 

On  the  other  hand,  any  one  who  has  seen  a  Black  Bass 


INTELLIGENCE   AND   SPECIAL   SENSES.  179 

dart  like  an  arrow  and  seize  a  minnow  swimming  quietly 
thirty  feet  away,  or  a  Brook  Trout  flash  like  a  meteor  for 
a  dragon  fly  hovering  near  the  water  at  the  same  distance, 
must  admit  that  their  visual  powers  are  sufficient  for  all 
practical  purposes. 

It  is  quite  amusing  to  hear  an  angler  expatiate  learnedly 
on  the  dimness  of  sight  and  dullness  of  hearing  in  fishes, 
and  in  the  next  breath  caution  the  tyro  to  have  his  cloth- 
ing conform  as  nearly  as  possible  with  the  hues  of  the 
foliage  skirting  the  stream ;  to  keep  out  of  sight,  tread 
lightly,  and  make  as  little  noise  as  possible;  and  to  assure 
him,  that,  even  then,  the  chances  are  that  the  fish  will  see 
the  novice  before  he  sees  the  fish. 

It  is  a  curious  contradiction  of  theory  and  practice,  a 
fishy  illustration  of  the  abstract  and  concrete.  The  expla- 
nation I  conceive  to  be  this:  Our  Piscator  would  be 
considered  a  scientific  angler,  which,  in  his  case,  be- 
comes a  contradiction  of  terms;  for  while  blindly  holding 
to  the  opinions  of  some  closet  naturalist,  he  is  practically 
following  the  dictates  of  his  own  experience  and  common 
sense. 

Now,  it  is  possible  to  be  scientific  and  an  angler,  too, 
but  our  science,  like  our  angling,  must  be  practical,  and 
must  of  necessity  be  learned  by  close  observation  and  study 
of  the  habits  of  the  fishes  as  they  exist  in  nature,  and  not 
alone  from  the  study  of  the  physical  construction  of  a 
preserved   specimen. 

I  am  well  aware  that  scientists  consider  fish  myopic,  or 
near-sighted;  not,  however,  on  account  of  excessive  con- 
vexity of  the  cornea,  as  is  popularly  supposed,  for  it  is  an 
exploded  theory  in  medical  science  that  myopia  depends 
necessarily    upon    this   condition;    indeed,    in    fishes   the 


180  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

cornea  is  almost  flat,  while  in  birds  of  prey,  which  have  a 
very  extended  range  of  vision,  the  cornea  is  quite  convex. 

From  the  lack  of  analogy,  from  the  great  difference  in 
construction  of  the  ocular  and  auditory  apparatuses  of 
fishes  and  terrestrial  animals,  and  from  the  wide  difference 
in  the  properties  of  the  media  of  air  and  water,  I  am  con- 
vinced that  the  organs  of  the  special  senses  of  sight  and 
hearing  in  tishes  are  not  well  understood  at  the  present 
day ;  and  I  am  confident  that  future  investigations  will 
prove  them  to  be  possessed  of  much  greater  acuteness  of 
vision  and.  hearing,  than  is  now  accorded  them. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  fishes  are  attracted  by  any 
gay,  bright,  or  glittering  substance,  as  a  finger-ring,  a 
sleeve-button,  or  a  coin,  and  have  deliberately  swallowed 
them  when  dropped  in  the  water.  I  have  caught  Brook 
Trout  with  wintergreen  and  partridge  berries,  the  bright 
scarlet  color  seeming  to  allure  them,  and  I  have  even 
caught  them  with  a  naked  bright  fish-hook  ;  but  all  this 
does  not  prove  that  they  were  the  victims  of  a  myopic 
mistake,  or  that  in  their  near-sightedness  they  mistook 
these  various  articles  for  something  else ;  neither  does  it 
prove  that  a  Black  Bass  will  grab  at  a  trolling  spoon,  a 
Bluefish  snap  at  a  bone  squid,  or  a  Spanish  Mackerel 
seize  a  metal  or  pearl  troll  under  the  delusion  that  they 
are  really  choice  shiners,  or  delicate  piscatorial  tidbits. 

A  camel,  it  is  said,  will  bolt  all  sorts  of  substances,  as 
metal,  glass,  stones,  leather,  etc.,  but  when  were  his  short- 
comings attributed  to  short-sightedness?  Our  dogs  will 
often  refuse  good,  clean  food  and  hunt  up  an  old  dry  bone, 
a  stone,  an  old  shoe,  or  a  stick,  and  will  gnaw  them  with 
delight,  and  even  swallow  them  with  evident  gratification. 
Birds  will   peck   at   and   swallow   bright   beads,    colored 


INTELLIGENCE   AND   SPECIAL   SENSES.  181 

threads,  etc.,  and  kittens  will  seize,  claw  and  bite  almost 
any  moving  small  object;  but  these  vagaries  are  attributed 
to  the  idiosyncracies  of  the  animals  mentioned,  while  in 
fishes  they  are  ascribed  to  defective  sight. 

But  what  are  a  fish's  eyes  for?  According  to  our 
present  knowledge  they  are  to  enable  him  to  become  "  a 
snapper-up  of  unconsidered  trifles"  with  hooks  attached 
to  them ! 

Now,  so  far  as  the  artificial  fly  is  concerned,  when  it  is 
cast  lightly  upon  a  fretted  surface,  I  think  it  is  generally 
taken  by  a  fish  under  the  impression  that  it  is  a  natural 
insect ;  but  with  regard  to  trolls  of  all  kinds,  as  spoons, 
squids,  spinners,  propellers,  etc.,  and  very  often  with  re- 
gard to  the  artificial  fly,  I  am  of  the  opinion  that  they  are 
taken  through  a  spirit  of  mere  bravado,  curiosity  or  wan- 
tonness, and  not  with  the  idea  that  they  are  living  objects 
of  prey.  They  are  seized  by  the  fish  because  they  are 
bright,  attractive  and  in  motion ;  not  because  they  are 
hungry,  but  because  they  are  in  a  biting  mood,  for  we 
often  find,  nay,  most  always  find,  that  fish  so  taken  are 
already  gorged  with  food. 


Sense  of  Hearing. 

There  is  no  external  ear  in  fishes,  the  internal  ear  alone 
existing,  and  which  is  extremely  delicate  in  its  construc- 
tion. 

Dr.  John  Hunter  observed  that  it  varied  much  in  the 
different  genera  of  fishes,  but  that  in  all  it  consisted  of  three 
curved  tubes,  which  united  one  with  another.  The  whole 
organ  is  composed  of  a   kind  of  cartilaginous  substance, 


182  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

and  in  some  fishes  is  crusted  over  with  a  thin  lamella  to 
keep  it  from  collapsing. 

The  canals  terminate  in  a  cavity,  in  which  cavity  there 
is  a  bone  or  bones.  These  ear-bones  are  familiar  to  most 
anglers,  and  are  sometimes  very  beautiful,  resembling 
porcelain,  and  are  often  called  "  brain-ivory ; "  those  of 
the  sheepshead  (Haploidonotus  grunniens)  of  our  Western 
waters  are  known  as  "lucky  stones,"  and  are  highly 
prized  by  boys  as  pocket  pieces. 

A  remarkable  instance,  demonstrating  the  acuteness  of 
the  sense  of  hearing  in  fishes,  has  recently  occurred  in 
California.  As  it  is  an  exceedingly  interesting  and  well- 
authenticated  fact,  and  one  so  totally  at  variance  with  pre- 
conceived notions,  I  feel  justified  in  reproducing  it  here. 
The  account  was  published  in  the  San  Francisco  Chronicle, 
upon  the  authority  of  Mr.  B.  B.  Redding,  one  of  the  Fish 
Commissioners  of  California  : 

In  Siskiyou  County  there  is  a  caravansary  kept  by  George  Camp- 
bell, and  known  as  the  Upper  Soda  Springs  Hotel,  which  is  situated 
on  a  semicircle  of  land  formed  by  a  bend  in  the  Sacramento  River. 
Wishing  to  have  a  supply  of  fresh  Trout  close  at  hand,  Mr.  Camp- 
bell had  a  supply  of  water  conducted  through  a  board  flume  from 
the  river  to  a  natural  depression  in  the  ground,  thereby  creating 
an  excellent  fish  pond  of  about  half  an  acre  in  extent,  which  he 
supplied  with  full-grown  Trout  caught  in  the  river.  The  supply 
flume  is,  for  some  distance,  raised  about  four  feet  above  the  ground. 
About  four  hundred  feet  from  the  pond,  a  small  rivulet,  which  is  an 
outlet  for  irrigating  water,  flows  under  the  flume,  crossing  it  at  right 
angles  and  about  four  feet  below  it,  and  empties  into  the  river. 

The  fall  of  water  from  the  end  of  the  flume  to  the  surface  of  the 
pond  is  two  feet,  the  water  in  the  flume  flowing  with  a  velocity  of 
three  miles  an  hour.  The  pond  has  an  outlet,  which  is  screened  to 
prevent  the  escape  of  the  Trout.  Shortly  after  the  pond  was  estab- 
lished., the  discovery  was  made  that  numbers  of  fish  were  missing 


INTELLIGENCE   AND   SPECIAL   SENSES.  183 

from  it.  Mr.  Campbell  instituted  an  investigation,  which  resulted 
in  discovering  that  the  fish,  dissatisfied  with  their  new  quarters, 
had  leaped  through  the  waterfall  two  feet  into  the  flume,  and,  swim- 
ming against  the  strong  current  until  they  reached  where  the  stream 
crosses  under  the  flume,  they  had  leaped  out  of  the  latter  to  the 
stream  four  feet  beneath. 

Upon  discovering  the  method  of  flight  adopted  by  his  finny  acrobats, 
Mr.  Campbell  prevented  further  escape  by  placing  a  screen  at  the 
mouth  of  the  flume.  Up  to  last  accounts  the  dissatisfied  fish  had 
discovered  no  other  method  of  getting  into  their  favorite  Sacramento. 
The  questions  immediately  suggest  themselves :  How  could  the  fish 
know  that  a  stream  flowed  under  the  flume,  the  sides  of  which  were 
considerably  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  if  they  possessed 
that  knowledge,  how  were  they  to  know  that  they  were  immediately 
over  it  ?  Mr.  Bedding  examined  the  ground  carefully  along  the 
flume,  and  could  not  discover  a  single  instance  of  a  Trout  having 
jumped  out  at  any  other  place. 

Mr.  Redding  subsequently  communicated  to  the  Forest 
and  Stream  the  following  solution  of  the  matter: — 

The  attention  of  Prof.  E.  D.  Cope,  the  eminent  naturalist,  hav- 
ing been  called  to  the  above  facts,  he  has  given  me  an  explanation 
which  seems  entirely  satisfactory.  He  tells  me  that  at  the  base  of 
every  scale  of  the  Trout,  at  a  point  where  the  scale  is  united  with 
the  skin,  is  a  nerve ;  that  all  these  nerves,  from  the  base  of  every 
scale,  lead  to  a  large  ganglion  situated  on  the  center  of  the  forehead 
of  the  fish  below  the  eyes ;  and  that  nerves  from  this  ganglion  com- 
municate to  the  internal  ear.  These  nerves,  at  the  base  of  each 
scale,  are  formed  to  receive  vibrations  in  water.  Any  vibration  in 
water  reaching  the  scales  of  the  fish  is  thus  communicated  to  the 
internal  ear.  If,  as  was  the  fact,  one  of  the  timbers  that  supported 
the  flume  rested  in  the  running  water  on  the  ground,  the  vibrations 
of  this  running  water  on  the  ground  would  be  carried  by  this  timber 
to  the  flume  and  to  the  water  in  it,  four  feet  above,  and  the  ear  of 
the  fish  would  separate  and  take  cognizance  of  the  difference  in  the 
vibrations,  as  the  human  ear  in  the  air  distinguishes  the  difference 
between  the  voices  of  friends. 


184  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

It  has,  generally,  been  conceded  that  fish  can  hear 
sounds  or  vibrations  produced  on,  or  in,  the  water,  but 
that  they  can  hear  sounds  produced  in  the  air  is  doubted 
by  many ;  but  every  observant  angler  can  recall  instances 
where  this  doubt  has  been  refuted. 

It  is  well  known  to  many,  though  still  doubted  by  some, 
that  fish  can  be  tamed  and  taught  to  come  to  the  surface 
of  the  water  to  be  fed,  answering  promptly  to  the  sounds 
of  the  voice,  a  bell,  or  a  whistle.  I  have  observed  in- 
stances of  this  kind,  myself,  and  under  such  circumstances 
as  rendered  it  impossible  for  the  fish  to  see  the  person 
producing  the  sounds  mentioned. 

I  .have  frequently  observed  fish  exhibit  symptoms  of 
great  fright  or  alarm  at  the  report  of  fire-arms,  or  other 
loud  noises,  and  to  be  scared  and  dart  away  at  the  sound 
of  the  human  voice,  or  the  barking  of  a  dog,  when  the 
fish  could  not  see  the  originators  of  the  noises. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

ON  STOCKING  INLAND  WATERS  WITH  BLACK  BASS. 

"And  it  is  observed,  that  in  some  ponds  Carps  will  not  breed,  especially  in 
cold  ponds;  but  where  they  will  breed,  they  breed  innumerably."— Iz a ak 
Walton. 

The  Black  Bass  is  peculiarly  adapted,  in  every  respect, 
for  stocking  inland  waters.  There  is  no  fish  that  will 
give  more  abundant  and  satisfactory  returns,  and  none  in 
which  the  labor  and  expense  attending  its  introduction  is 
so  very  slight. 

As  a  food  fish,  there  are  very  few  more  palatable  fresh- 
water fishes,  its  flesh  being  firm,  white,  and  flaky,  and 
when  cooked,  nutty,  tender,  and  juicy ;  it  has  few  bones 
and  little  offal,  and  as  a  pan-fish  is  unexcelled.  Its  game 
qualities  are  second  to  none,  and  it  will  thrive  and  multi- 
ply in  waters  where  the  Sulmonidce  can  not  exist. 

There  are  few  fish  more  prolific,  while  there  is  none 
more  hardy,  healthy,  and  better  able  to  take  care  of  itself, 
and  none  that  protects  or  cares  more  tenderly  for  its  young ; 
consequently,  there  is  no  limit  to  its  production  and  in- 
crease in  suitable  waters,  save  from  a  lack  of  natural  food. 

In  view,  then,  of  its  many  good  qualities,  there  is  no 
fish  more  worthy  of  cultivation ;  none  that  can  be  so  easily 
transplanted,  and  none  that  is  so  well  adapted  to  the  vari- 
ous waters  of  our  country,  for  there  is  no  game-fish  that 
has  such  an  extensive  original  habitat. 

16  (185) 


186  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

Every  attempt  that  has  been  made,  intelligently,  to  stock 
suitable  waters  with  the  Black  Bass,  has  been  crowned 
with  signal  success,  which,  unfortunately,  has  not  been 
the  case  with  the  introduction  ef  other  game  and  food- 
fishes.  The  praiseworthy  efforts  that  have  hitherto  been 
made  to  introduce  the  Salmon  and  Brook  Trout,  even  in 
streams  formerly  inhabited  by  them,  have  either  totally 
failed,  or  the  results,  in  a  majority  of  instances,  have  not 
been  at  all  satisfactory ;  nor  does  it  seem,  now,  as  though 
these  efforts  will  ever  prove  successful,  owing  to  causes 
which  I  have  mentioned  elsewhere. 

Streams  which  are  necessarily  obstructed  by  dams — even 
when  the  most  approved  fishways  are  provided — or  whose 
waters  are  polluted  by  the  refuse  of  manufactories,  can 
never  be  successfully  stocked  with  the  salmonids ;  but  the 
Black  Bass  seems  to  thrive  wonderfully  well  in  spite  of 
these  and  other  disadvantages. 

From  what  has  been  said  in  regard  to  their  habits,  it 
will  readily  be  seen  that  there  is  no  necessity  for  hatching 
Black  Bass  artificially,  in  the  manner  practiced  with  the 
Salmon,  Trout,  or  Shad,  nor  would  the  method  be  as  suc- 
cessful, for  reasons  well  known  to  fish  culturists. 

The  Salmonidce  of  the  Eastern  United  States,  with  the 
exception  of  the  grayling,  prepare  their  beds  and  deposit 
their  spawn  late  in  the  fall,  or  early  winter.  This  being 
accomplished,  all  further  interest  in  the  procreation  of 
their  species,  for  the  time,  ceases;  the  eggs  are  left  to  them- 
selves, and  such  as  escape  being  devoured  by  their  nu- 
merous enemies  are  hatched  in  from  two  to  four  months, 
according  to  species  and  temperature  of  water.  The 
young  are  provided  with  a  yolk-sack,  which  nourishes 
them  for  a  period  of  from  twenty-five  to  forty-five  days, 


ON   STOCKING    INLAND    WATERS.  187 

varying  with  the  species,  when  they  begin  to  look  for  other 
means  of  subsistence. 

During  all  this  time,  from  spawning  until  the  absorption 
of  the  yolk-sac — from  three  to  six  months,  as  the  case  may 
be  —  the  eggs  and  young  are  helplessly  exposed  to  the 
ravages  of  predatory  fish,  reptiles,  and  birds.  Under  these 
circumstances,  comparatively  few  fish  arrive  at  maturity, 
and  streams  are  soon  depopulated  by  seining,  injudicious 
angling,  and  natural  vicissitudes;  hence  arises  the  necessity 
for  their  artificial  cultivation  and  the  re-stocking  of  such 
waters. 

The  eggs  of  the  salmonids  are  of  a  separate  and  non- 
adhesive  character,  which  admits  of  their  being  easily 
handled  and  managed  for  the  purposes  of  artificial  repro- 
duction, while  those  of  the  Black  Bass  are  glutinous  and 
adhesive,  which  renders  them  very  difficult  to  manipulate 
for  similar  purposes. 

The  Black  Bass  being  hatched  with  but  a  rudimentary 
or  very  small'  umbilical  vesicle  or  yolk-sack,  needs  the 
fostering  care  and  attention  of  the  parent  fish,  who  teaches 
it  how  and  where  to  find  its  food,  and  protects  it  from 
its  enemies  in  the  same  way  that  a  hen  cares  for  her 
brood.- 

All  that  is  required,  then,  to  stock  a  stream  or  pond 
with  Black  Bass,  is  to  procure  a  small  number  of  the  fish, 
at  least  a  year  old,  and  place  them  in  the  waters.  If  the 
water  is  of  a  suitable  character,  and  possesses  a  sufficient 
supply  of  natural  food,  the  Bass  will  propagate  naturally, 
and  rapidly  increase  in  numbers. 

The  only  considerations  to  be  looked  after  are  the  char- 
acter and  conditions  of  the  waters  to  be  stocked — sufficient 
depth  and  extent  of  surface  being  more  important  than 


188  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

quality  of  water  —  and  the  supply  of  food  contained  in 
them.  It  is  useless  to  attempt  to  stock  very  small  and 
confined  ponds  of  less  than  three  acres  in  extent ;  for  in 
such  ponds,  without  communication  with  running  water, 
the  Bass  will  not  increase  beyond  a  certain  limited  num- 
ber, which  will  usually  be  the  number  of  fish  originally 
planted;  for  the  supply  of  natural  food  will  soon  become 
exhausted,  and  the  old  fish  will  prey  upon  the  young, 
should  any  be  hatched,  until  a  certain  average,  propor- 
tionate to  the  supply  of  food,  is  established  and  main- 
tained. 

In  the  case  of  newly  formed  ponds,  they  should  be  well 
stocked  with  minnows,  Crustacea,  frogs,  etc.,  at  least  a  year 
before  the  Bass  are  introduced.  It  is  also  necessary  that 
there  should  be  in  all  ponds,  deep  holes  of  not  less  than 
twelve  feet  in  depth,  to  which  the  Bass  can  retire  in  very 
hot  weather,  and  where  they  can  also  hibernate. 

In  some  waters,  one  species  of  Black  Bass  may  prosper 
better  than  the  other ;  for  instance,  in  large  ponds  or 
shallow  lakes,  with  a  sluggish  current,  muddy  bottom,  and 
abounding  in  fresh-water  algse,  the  large-mouthed  Bass 
will  thrive  better,  perhaps,  than  the  small-mouthed  species. 
But  in  streams,  and  ponds  with  a  good  supply  of  running 
water,  either,  or  both  species  may  be  introduced. 

The  Black  Bass  has  been  successfully  acclimatized  in 
England ;  and  at  the  proper  season  advertisements  may 
now  be  found  in  English  papers  of  young  Bass  from  Amer- 
ica for  sale  at  high  prices,  for  stocking  English  waters. 
Mr.  Silk,  fish-culturist  to  the  Marquis  of  Exeter,  has  taken 
over  two  lots  of  young  Bass  from  the  Delaware  River,  the 
first  in  1878,  and  the  second  in  1879.  In  a  letter  to  the 
late  Frank  Buckland,  Mr.  Silk  says : — 


ON   STOCKING    INLAND    WATERS.  189 

.  In  1879  I  went  again,  and  started  from  America  with  1,200 
Black  Bass,  and  on  arriving  home  I  had  812,  having  done  better  than 
I  did  on  the  previous  occasion.  All  of  the  Black  Bass  were  for  the 
Marquis  of  Exeter,  he  having  borne  all  the  expense  of  the  experi- 
ment. Most  of  the  fish  were  placed  in  a  lake  belonging  to  his  lord- 
ship, called  Whitewater,  near  Stamford.  Not  any  of  them  have 
been  caught  yet,  but  two  of  them  were  found  dead  in  a  pipe,  where 
they  had  got  jammed.  The  pipe  supplied  a  filterer,  and  they  had 
got  in  and  could  not  get  out  again.  From  what  I  could  learn  they 
would  be  about  half  a  pound  each  in  weight,  so  that  they  had  done 
very  well.  The  first  lot  that  were  put  in  will  be  three  years  old  in 
April,  when  they  are  expected  to  commence  breeding. 

In  transporting  Black  Bass  for  the  purpose  of  stocking 
new  waters,  great  foresight,  care,  and  judgment  must  be 
used.  The  size  and  number  of  the  fish,  the  distance  they 
are  to  be  carried,  and  the  length  of  time  to  be  consumed 
in  the  journey,  must  all  be  taken  into  consideration.  The 
size  and  number  of  the  fish  will  determine  the  size  and 
number  of  the  containers;  thus,  while  a  common  wash- 
tub  would  be  a  safe  receptacle  to  transport  twenty-five 
Bass,  six  inches  in  length,  for  a  long  distance,  it  would 
not  be  sufficient  for  half  the  number  of  double  the  size, 
for  it  would  require  a  vessel  that  would  contain  at  least 
one  and  a  half  times  the  quantity  of  water.  This  is  a  safe 
rule  to  follow,  and  calculations  can  be  made  accordingly. 

For  small  fish,  six  to  eight  inches  long,  the  largest  size 
wash-tubs  are  well  adapted,  but  for  larger  fish  the  carrier 
must  be  much  deeper.  If  barrels  are  used  they  should  not  be 
perfectly  new,  nor  should  they  retain  any  vestige  of  their 
former  contents,  as  vinegar,  oil,  whisky,  etc.,  if  old  ones. 
The  very  best  ones  would  be  those  that  had  been  used  to 
hold  water  for  a  long  time.  Wooden  tanks,  constructed 
for  the  purpose,  are  best,  if  they  have  been  soaked  in  run- 


190  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

ning  water  a  sufficient  length  of  time  to  take  up  and  re- 
move all  the  soluble  matter  of  the  wood,  as  tannic  acid, 
etc.  Metal  tanks,  constructed  of  galvanized  iron,  heavy 
tin,  etc.,  though  more  expensive,  are  to  be  preferred,  but 
they  must  be  rendered  perfectly  clean  before  the  fish  are 
put  into  them. 

If  the  number  of  fish  to  be  carried  is  large,  it  is  much 
better  to  provide  a  sufficient  number  of  containers  than  to 
crowd  the  fish.  There  is  no  good  plan  yet  devised  for 
aerating  water,  while  in  transit,  by  forcing  air  into  it,  for 
most  of  it  escapes  at  once,  as  the  numerous  bubbles  that 
appear  on  the  surface,  testify.  The  better  way  is  to  expose 
the  water  to  the  air  in  finely  divided  particles,  in  the  form 
of  spray  or  small  drops,  as  by  forcing  or  pouring  it  through 
a  fine  rose.  I  have  seen  it  successfully  accomplished  by 
dipping  the  water  out  of  the  container  with  a  common 
sprinkling-can,  or  watering-pot,  and  pouring  it  back  again 
through  the  rose,  or  sprinkler,  from  a  considerable  height; 
this  is  as  simple  and  effectual  a  wray  as  any  yet  devised. 

It  is  a  bad  plan  to  change  the  water  frequently,  as  is 
often  done,  for  the  change  in  the  character  and  temper- 
ature of  the  water  thus  produced,  affects  the  fish  unfavora- 
bly. The  best  plan,  by  far,  is  to  aerate  the  original  water. 
If  in  warm  weather,  the  temperature  of  the  water  should 
be  noted,  occasionally,  and  kept  at  its  original  temperature, 
or  a  little  lower,  by  the  addition  of  small  pieces  of  ice, 
from  time  to  time. 

These  instructions  are  only  general,  and  must  be  varied 
to  suit  particular  circumstances.  Sometimes,  for  short 
distances,  double  the  number  offish  may  be  safely  carried, 
in  the  space  I  have  designated.  Moreover,  it  is  possible 
to  be  too  attentive,  and  kill  the  fish  with  kindness.     If  the 


ON    STOCKING    INLAND    WATERS.  191 

number  of  fish  to  be  transported  is  large  enough  to  justify 
the  experiment,  the  best  and  safest  plan  would  be  to  carry 
one  vessel,  with  its  allotted  number,  first,  and,  according 
to  the  operator's  best  judgment;  then,  as  the  experiment 
proved  successful,  or  not,  would  depend  the  transportation 
of  the  balance,  on  the  same,  or  some  other  plan  of  pro- 
ceeding. 


PART  SECOND. 


TOOLS,  TACKLE,  AND  IMPLEMENTS. 


17 


CHAPTER  IX. 

FISHING  RODS. 

"And  now,  scholar !  I  think  it  will  be  time  to  repair  to  our  angle-rods."— 
Izaak  Walton. 

The  first  and  most  important  article  in  the  angler's 
outfit  is  the  rod  ;  it  takes  precedence  of  every  other  tool  or 
implement  in  his  armamentarium.  A  thoroughly  good 
and  well-balanced  rod  is  the  angler's  especial  joy  and 
pride.  A  true  and  tried  rod  of  graceful  proportions  and 
known  excellence,  which  has  been  the  faithful  companion 
on  many  a  jaunt  by  mountain  stream,  brawling  river,  or 
quiet  lake,  and  has  taken  its  part,  and  shared  the  victory 
in  many  a  struggle  with  the  game  beauties  of  the  waters, 
at  last  comes  to  be  looked  upon  as  a  tried  and  trusty 
friend,  in  which  the  angler  reposes  the  utmost  confidence 
and  reliance,  and  which  he  regards  with  a  love  and  aifec- 
tion  that  he  bestows  upon  no  other  inanimate  object. 

I  doubt  if  rifle,  shot-gun,  or  fowling-piece  ever  becomes 
so  dear  and  near  to  the  sportsman  as  the  rod  to  the  an- 
gler, for  the  rod  really  becomes  a  part  of  himself,  as  it  were, 
through  which  he  feels  everv  motion  of  the  fish  when 
hooked,  and  which,  being  in  a  measure  under  the  control 
of  his  will,  and  responsive  to  the  slightest  motion  of  his 
wrist,  seems  to  be  imbued  with  an  intelligence  almost  life- 
like. 

The    essential    qualities  of  a   fishing-rod    are   balance, 

(195) 


196  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

strength,  elasticity,  pliancy,  and  lightness,  and  in  its  con- 
struction such  a  wood,  or  combination  of  woods,  must  be 
used  as  will  best  subserve  these  conditions.  The  natural 
cane,  or  reed  pole,  when  it  is  of  good  and  true  taper,  is 
the  primitive  model  for  a  fishing  rod,  but  it  is  not  adapted 
to  all  kinds  of  angling,  being  too  long  for  one  mode,  too 
stiff  for  another,  and  not  well  balanced  for  a  third. 

The  nearest  approach  to  a  perfect  rod,  in  theory,  and 
composed  entirely  and  alone  of  any  one  variety  of  wood 
proper,  is  a  red  cedar  rod,  made  entirely  of  one  piece  from 
butt  to  tip.  It  combines  all  of  the  essential  qualities  of  a  rod, 
and  can  be  made  suitable  for  any  method  of  angling,  long 
or  short,  stiff  or  pliant,  and  withal,  is  extremely  light ; 
but  in  practice  it  is  not  tough  or  strong  enough  for  the 
ordinary  angler.  And  so  each  and  every  kind  of  wood 
has  some  objections  when  used,  alone,  in  the  construction 
of  a  rod ;  most  kinds  of  wood  making  a  rod  too  heavy, 
when  other  qualities  are  all  right. 

The  next  best  thing  is  to  use  a  combination  of  woods, 
and  this  plan  has  been  found  by  experience  to  be  the  best. 
Another  plan  is  to  alter  the  natural  conditions  of  a  wood 
by  mechanical  skill,  as  in  the  split  bamboo  rod,  by  which 
the  original  natural  good'qualities  are  not  only  preserved, 
but  improved  upon  by  the  skill  of  the  workman. 

Material  for  Rods. 

In  order  to  get  proper  and  desired  action  of  combined 
woods,  and  for  convenience,  portability,  and  ease  of  being 
repaired,  rods  are  very  properly  made  in  several  pieces,  or 
joints.  The  fewer  pieces  used,  however,  the  better  will 
be  the  action  of  the    rod,  and,  in   fact,  two,  or  at  most, 


'  FISHING-RODS.  197 

three  pieces,  are  sufficient  for  all  kinds  of  rods  except 
Salmon-rods,  which  are  of  a  necessity  the  longest  rods 
made. 

In  the  selection  of  woods  for  a  rod,  such  kinds  must  be 
used  as  possess  the  principal  attributes  of  a  fishing-rod, 
which  are  toughness  and  elasticity;  and  when  these  qual- 
ities are  combined  with  lightness,  there  is  nothing  more 
to  be  desired,  for  proper  modeling  will  insure  perfect  bal- 
ance and  pliancy. 

Many  kinds  of  native  and  foreign  woods  have  been 
tried  and  experimented  with  to  produce  a  rod  perfect 
in  action,  such  as  cane,  ash,  hickory,  maple,  basswood, 
ironwood,  hornbeam,  cedar,  barberry,  bamboo,  memel, 
lancewood,  mahoe,  greenheart,  bethabara,  or  wasahba,  etc. 

Ash. — For  butts  of  rods  there  is  no  wood  so  suitable 
as  good,  close-grained,  second-growth  white-ash.  It  is 
straight-grained,  light,  springy,  and  strong,  and  in  some 
kinds  of  rods  it  is  also  available  for  second  pieces  or  joints, 
having  a  springy  "snap''  possessed  by  no  other  wood. 

Lancewood. — For  second  pieces  and  tips,  lancewood, 
when  of  good  quality,  stands  pre-eminent,  being  close- 
grained,  tough,  and  extremely  elastic,  with  sufficient  spring 
and  snap  for  small  joints.  It  is  used  for  tops,  or  tips, 
more  universally  than  any  other  wood,  on  account  of  its 
superiority  over  all  other  varieties  for  this  purpose.  It  is 
rather  heavy  for  butts,  though  often  used  for  this  purpose, 
some  fly-rods  being  constructed  entirely  of  this  fine  wood, 
making  very  durable  and  beautiful  rods,  with  a  delightful 
action,  but  still  rather  heavy  for  most  anglers.  Mr.  Orvis, 
of  Manchester,  Vermont,  however,  makes  lancewood  fly- 
rods  with  a  short  hand-piece  of  other  material,  which  are 
most  excellent  and  serviceable  rods.     I  have  used  one  with 


198  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

the  utmost  pleasure  and  satisfaction,  and  can  fully  recom- 
mend it.  m 

Greenheart  is  next  to  lancewood  for  tips,  and  for 
second  joints  is  preferred  by  many;  it  is  somewhat  heavy, 
and  quite  tough  and  springy.  Many  rods  are  made  entirely 
of  this  wood,  and  are  excellent,  too,  by  the  way,  but  most 
too  heavy  for  the  admirers  of  light  rods.  It  certainly 
forms  very  handsome  rods,  when  nicely  polished,  and 
which  are  capable  of  good  and  hard  service.  In  England 
it  is  a  favorite  wood  for  fly-rods,  where,  as  a  rule,  much 
heavier  rods  are  used  than  in  our  own  country. 

Bethabara,  or  Wasahba. — This  wood  was,  I  believe, 
introduced  several  years  ago  by  A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son,  of 
Philadelphia,  who  make  a  specialty  of  rods  of  this  hand- 
some material.  It  is  very  dark  in  color,  resembling,  some- 
what, black- walnut  in  this  respect.  It  is  extremely  hard 
and  close-grained,  almost  like  bone  in  density,  though  it 
is  rather  heavy,  except  for  second  pieces  and  tips.  Messrs. 
Shipley  say  that  no  other  wood  can  equal  it  for  great 
strength,  toughness,  and  elasticity.  It  is  susceptible  of  a 
beautiful  polish,  and  I  know  of  no  other  wood  that  makes 
so  handsome  a  rod  in  its  natural  color.  Never  having 
tried  a  rod  of  this  material,  I  can  not  speak  of  its  action, 
though  I  am  sure,  from  its  inherent  qualities,  as  exhibited 
in  some  specimens  of  the  wood  which  I  have  examined, 
that  it  is  eminently  serviceable  for  the  smaller  joints.  I 
have  seen  some  rods  of  this  material,  made  by  George  B. 
El  lard,  of  Cincinnati,  which  have  done  good  service,  and 
are  much  admired. 

Cedar. — As  before  stated,  red  cedar  makes  a  perfect  rod, 
except  in  its  lack  of  toughness  or  strength.  For  Trout 
fly-rods,  in  the  hands  of  an  expert  with  light  rods,  it  is 


FISHING-RODS.  199 

all  that  can  be  desired,  but  it  needs  to  be  handled  with  the 
skill  of  a  master,  and  by  one  who  loves  his  rod  next  to  his 
wife,  de  facto,  or  intended. 

Hickory. — This  wood  was  formerly  much  used,  espe- 
cially in  the  construction  of  certain  parts  of  Salmon-rods, 
but  its  use  has  been  entirely  discontinued,  in  this  country, 
at  least.  It  is,  of  course,  the  toughest  of  woods,  but  lacks 
spring  and  elasticity,  having  a  tendency  to  warp  and  be- 
come permanently  bent,  by  the  continual  strain  to  which 
a  rod  is  subjected. 

Hornbeam  has  been  used  to  some  extent  in  the  manu- 
facture of  rods,  and  is  well  spoken  of  by  those  who  have 
used  it.  It  is  very  difficult,  however,  to  procure  it  straight- 
grained,  which  it  should  be  to  make  it  available  for  fishing- 
rods.  It  is  quite  tough,  but  pretty  heavy,  and  is  in  no 
way  equal  to  lancewood  for  tips  or  second  joints,  for  which 
purposes  it  has  been  mostly  used,  though  there  have  been 
a  few  fly-rods  constructed  entirely  of  this  wood.  If  per- 
fectly straight-grained,  ikno  doubt  answers  a  good  purpose. 

Mahoe  is  a  foreign  wood  now  coming  into  vogue  for  rods, 
and  more  especially  for  fly-rods.  It  resembles  ash  some- 
what in  its  qualities,  being  not  very  heavy,  and  quite 
springy  and  elastic.  It  is  much  used  in  Havana  for  springs 
of  that  queer  looking,  high-wheeled  vehicle,  the  volante. 
It  is  much  praised  by  some  for  producing  rods  of  a  su- 
perior action,  but  as  I  have  had  no  personal  experience 
with  them,  I  am  unable  to  say  any  thing  for  or  against 
them. 

Maple  and  Basswood  are  used  only  in  the  construc- 
tion of  cheap  and  common  rods,  and  need  no  further 
mention  here,  except  that  curly  maple  is  sometimes  used 
for  short  and  ornamental  butts,  or  hand-pieces. 


200  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

Cane,  or  Reed. —  Native  and  foreign  cane  poles  are 
much  used  for  fishing-rods,  especially  in  certain  kinds  of 
angling  where  no  "reel  is  required,  and  for  such  service  an- 
swer a  good  purpose.  The  native  canes  are  the  lightest, 
though  not  so  strong  and  durable  as  the  Chinese  or  Jap- 
anese canes. 

Calcutta  Bamboo. — The  East  Indian,  or,  as  it  is  gen- 
erally termed,  the  Calcutta  bamboo,  is  the  best  of  all  ma- 
terial for  the  construction  of  a  perfect  rod  when  carefully 
made  by  a  skillful  and  master  workman.  In  its  natural 
state  it  is  almost  perfect  in  its  action,  and  possesses  all  the 
desired  qualities  for  certain  modes  of  angling,  but  for 
methods  that  require  a  shorter  and  lighter,  or  more  pliant 
rod,  these  additional  features  can  be  secured  by  altering 
the  original  conditions  of  the  cane,  by  sawing  it  into  strips 
and  accurately  fitting  and  gluing  them  together;  thus  re- 
ducing the  caliber,  and,  at  the  same  time,  preserving  and 
enhancing  all  the  essential  and  desirable  qualities  in  a 
more  compact  form. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  Calcutta  bamboo,  known  to  the 
trade  as  "male"  and  "female"  canes.  The  former  is 
nearly  solid,  hard,  and  very  tough,  with  large  and  protuber- 
ant knots  or  joints,  where,  when  growing,  are  attached  the 
leaves  and  tendril-like  branches,  which  are  so  tough  as  to 
render  it  necessary  to  burn  them  off;  this  gives  to  these 
canes  the  peculiar  clouded  and  burnt  appearance,  which 
adds  so  much  to  the  beauty  of  the  split  bamboo  rod.  The 
female  cane  is  hollow  through  its  entire  length,  except  just 
at  the  joints  or  bulges,  which  are  not  so  prominent  as  in 
the  male  cane.  The  male  cane  is  the  best  to  use  in  its 
natural  state,  but  for  split  bamboo  rods,  the  selected  female 
cane  is  to  be  preferred,  as  it  makes  the  most  perfect  rod. 


fishing-rods.  201 

Origin  of  the  Split  Bamboo  Rod. 

The  split  bamboo  rod  being  an  American  institution, 
and  there  being  no  reliable  record  of  its  early  manufacture, 
I  may  be  pardoned  for  giving  a  brief  space  to  its  consid- 
eration. I  consider  it  the  greatest  invention  ever  made  per- 
taining to  the  art  of  angling,  equaling  the  invention  of 
the  breech-loading  rifle  and  shot-gun  for  field  sports. 

The  history  of  the  "  split  bamboo,"  "  section  bamboo," 
or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  the  "  rent  and  glued  bamboo  " 
rod,  although  of  recent  origin  —  dating  back  only  some 
thirty  years — is  somewhat  obscure.  Several  persons  have 
laid  claim  to  the  invention,  though  with  what  justice,  it 
has,  heretofore,  never  been  clearly  determined. 

There  is  no  important  mechanical  invention  that  has,  in 
its  inception  and  principle,  sprung  entirely  and  spontane- 
ously from  the  brain  of  any  single  individual,  and  this 
will  apply  to  the  split  bamboo  rod  as  well ;  for  though 
purely  an  American  invention,  as  now  constructed,  the 
idea,  or  principle,  is  really  of  English  origin.  Rods  formed 
of  several  pieces  of  wood,  that  is,  from  two  to  four  longi- 
tudinal sections  mitred  and  glued  together,  were  made  in 
England  many  years  ago;  and  Aldred,  of  London,  made 
rod  tips,  or,  as  they  are  called  in  England,  "  tops,"  of  split 
bamboo,  long  before  the  split  bamboo  rod,  proper,  was 
made  in  this  country.  Aldred's  tops,  however,  were  nec- 
essarily a  failure,  from  the  faulty  method  of  their  construc- 
tion. He  made  them  of  many  short  pieces,  sawn  from  be- 
tween the  knots,  or  leaf-ridges,  of  the  male  cane,  and 
spliced,  to  form  continuous  lengths.  So  much  for  the 
original  idea. 

It  is  not  my  province,  nor  desire,  to  detract  one  iota 


202  BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

from  the  credit  or  just  due  of  any  one  in  this  matter,  but 
rather  to  render  unto  Caesar  those  things  that  belong  to 
Caesar.  I  will  present  only  such  evidence  as  is  entirely 
trustworthy,  having  been  obtained  from  authentic  sources, 
and  put  it  on  record  here  as  reliable  data  in  regard  to  the 
early  history  of  the  American  split  bamboo  rod;  and  in 
so  doing  I  hope  to  do  justice  to  an  obscure,  but  worthy 
brother  of  the  angle. 

The  first  split  bamboo  rods  were  made  by  Mr.  Samuel 
Phillippi,  a  gunsmith  of  Easton,  Pennsylvania,  about  the 
year  1848.  Mr.  Phillippi  was  an  angler  of  some  local 
repute,  and  died  about  1878.  Mr.  Charles  H.  Luke,  a 
veteran  angler  of  Newark,  New  Jersey,  formerly  lived  in 
Easton,  and  was  a  near  neighbor  of  Phillippi,  with  whom 
he  fished  and  hunted  on  many  occasions.  He  naturally 
spent  much  of  his  spare  time  at  Phillippi's  gun-shop,  where, 
about  1850,  he  watched  him  for  hours  at  a  time  making 
split  bamboo  trout  fly-rods,  in  which,  being  a  fine  and  exact 
workman,  he  took  great  pride. 

Mr.  Charles  F.  Murphy,  of  Newark,  New  Jersey,  famous 
as  one  of  the  best  makers  of  split  bamboo  rods,  and  who 
has  few,  if  any,  superiors  as  a  fly-fisher,  corroborates  Mr. 
Luke's  testimony,  and  says  that  Phillippi  used  split  bamboo 
for  fly-rods,  certainly  as  far  back  as  1848,  and  further 
says:  "I  am  certain  you  can  give  Phillippi  credit  for  the 
discovery  of  split  bamboo  for  fly-rods,  without  fear  of  con- 
tradiction." 

Dr.  W.  W.  Bowlby,  of  New  York  City,  a  gentleman 
well  known  as  an  angler,  says :  "  My  earliest  recollection 
of  the  split  bamboo  rod  dates  back  to  about  the  year  1852. 
At  that  time  I  lived  in  New  Jersey,  near  Easton,  Penn- 
sylvania, and  fished  in  the  same  waters  in  New  Jersey  and 


FISHING-RODS.  203 

Pennsylvania  with  an  old  gunsmith,  of  Easton,  known 
among  us  as  i(  Old  Sam  Phillippi."  It  was  about  the  year 
above  named  that  I  saw  a  split  bamboo  rod  in  his  posses- 
sion, and  he  informed  me  at  that  time,  that -he  was  the 
originator  of  the  idea;  and  to  him,  I  earnestly  believe, 
belongs  the  credit  of  having  first  conceived  the  idea  of 
constructing  a  rod  from  such  material.  Phillippi's  rods 
were  three  joints,  second  joint  and  tip  split  bamboo ;  butt 
was  made  of  ash." 

I  have  similar  statements  from  other  gentlemen,  whose 
names  I  do  not  feel  at  liberty  to  disclose,  but  their  testi- 
mony is  to  the  same  effect,  qualified  in  some  instances  by 
the  remark  that  Phillippi's  rods  were  crude  affairs;  and 
which,  though  true,  does  not  detract  in  any  degree  from 
the  credit  due  him.  Phillippi's  rods  were  made  in  three 
joints,  or  pieces,  two  of  which,  only,  were  of  split  bamboo, 
the  butt  being  ash,  and  stained  to  imitate  bamboo  ;  but 
the  bamboo  joints  were  made  on  the  same  principle  as 
those  of  to-day,  though  Gomposed  of  but  four  strips. 
Phillippi's  rods  seem  poor  things  now,  but  at  that  time 
they  seemed  wonderful. 

The  first  complete  split  bamboo  rod,  that  is,  all  of  the 
joints  being  of  this  material,  seems  to.  have  been  made  by 
Mr.  E.  A.  Green,  of  Newark,  New  Jersey,  about  1860, 
though  some  claim  that  the  late  Mr.  Thaddeus  Norris,  of 
Philadelphia,  is  entitled  to  this  honor ;  however  this  may 
be,  they  were  both  subsequent  to  Mr.  Phillippi,  and  their 
rods  were  merely  improvements  on  his  more  primitive 
efforts.  Whether  either  or  both  of  these  gentlemen  had 
any  knowledge  of  Mr.  Phillippi's  rods,  or  whether  the  idea 
was  original  with  them,  is  not  material,  and  does  not  affect 
Phillippi's  claim  of  priority.     Mr.  Green  being  a  skillful 


204  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

and  ingenious  mechanic,  and  a  thorough  and  expert  angler, 
produced  excellent  rods,  though  for  his  own  use,  only. 

The  first  perfect  split  bamboo  rods  for  the  trade  were 
made  by  Mr.  Charles  F.  Murphy,  of  Newark,  who,  after 
seeing  Mr.  Green's  rods,  saw  a  chance  for  still  greater  im- 
provement; and  Mr.  Green,  knowing  him  to  be  an  artistic 
and  skillful  wood-worker,  encouraged  him  to  undertake 
their  manufacture,  which  he  did  about  1863-'64. 

Mr.  Murphy  made  the  first  split  bamboo  Salmon-rod  in 
1865,  which  Dr.  Andrew  Clerk  took  to  Scotland,  where  it 
proved  a  success.  Subsequently,  Genio  C.  Scott  took  the 
same  rod  to  the  St.  Lawrence,  and,  on  his  return,  published 
an  interesting  account  of  his  trip,  and  the  use  of  the  rod,  in 
Wilkes7  "  Spirit  of  the  Times,"  in  the  same  year.  The 
first  split  bamboo  Black  Bass  rod  was  made  by  Mr.  Mur- 
phy, in  1866. 

Up  to  this  time  all  split  bamboo  rods  were  composed  of 
but  four  strips  or  sections.  About  1870,  Mr.  H.  L.  Leon- 
ard, of  Bangor,  Maine,  began  making  the  six-strip  bamboo 
rod,  and  Dr.  A.  H.  Fowler  soon  followed  him.  Mr.  Leon- 
ard is  one  of  the  most  skillful  makers  of  split  bamboo  rods 
in  the  country ;  the  angler  who  is  the  fortunate  possessor  of 
one  of  his  best  rods  ought  to  be  a  happy  man ;  I  speak 
from  experience.  Although  Leonard's  rods  were  the  first 
six-strip  rods  put  in  the  market,  Mr.  Murphy  had  perfected 
one  some  time  before. 

To  Andrew  Clerk  &  Co.,  and  their  successors,  Abbey  & 
Imbrie,  48  Maiden  Lane,  New  York  City;  however,  be- 
long the  credit  and  honor  of  bringing  this  rod  to  its  present 
state  of  perfection  and  prominence.  They  were  the  first 
patrons  of  Phillippi,  Murphy,  and  Leonard,  and  gave  them 
every  assistance  and  encouragement. 


FISHING-RODS.  205 

This  firm  was  the  first  to  make  a  specialty  of  the  manu- 
facture of  the  split  bamboo  rod,  and  was  the  first  to  in- 
troduce the  six-section  rod,  those  previously  made  for 
them  by  Phillippi  and  Murphy  being  four-section  rods. 
They  subsequently  trained  skilled  mechanics  to  this  branch 
of  their  business,  and  until  they  had  made  a  success  of  the 
split  bamboo  rod,  they  stood  alone  in  the  enterprise,  being 
ridiculed  by  other  manufacturers  and  dealers  for  pursuing 
a  phantom  and  a  false  idea. 

They  persisted  in  their  course,  however,  in  spite  of 
opposition  and  ridicule,  and  to-day  enjoy  the  fruits  of 
their  devotion  to  the  idea  of  producing  "the  best  rod 
in  the  world."  And  by  their  pluck  and  commenda- 
ble enterprise  and  persistent  endeavors,  notwithstanding 
the  repeated  failures  and  petty  annoyances  incident  to 
their  experiments,  they  have  at  last  the  satisfaction  of 
knowing  that  their  efforts  have  been  appreciated  by 
anglers,  and  that  their  large  experience  has  put  them 
far  in  the  advance  as  manufacturers  of  this  unexcelled 
rod;  and  the  fact  that  other  manufacturers  have  since 
taken  up  the  making  of  this  rod  as  an  important  part 
of  their  business,  proves  that  the  original  position  and. 
faith  of  Andrew  Clerk  &  Co.,  and  their  successors, 
Abbey  &  Imbrie,  in  regard  to  the  merits  of  the  split 
bamboo  rod,  were  well  founded. 

The  best  form  of  the  split  bamboo  rod,  as  proved  by 
actual  service,  is  the  round,  six-section  rod.  Many  ex- 
periments have  been  made  to  improve  upon  this  method, 
but  they  have  resulted  in  failure.  The  hexagonal  rod  is 
claimed  by  its  supporters  to  be  preferable  to  the  round 
rod,  inasmuch  as  there  is  no  cutting  away  of  the  sur- 
face  enamel   or   outside   siliceous  coating,  at  the  angles. 


206  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

as  in  the  formation  of  the  round  rod,  and  therefore  is  a 
stronger  rod. 

While  this  looks  plausible  enough  to  the  superficial 
reasoner,  it  has  no  foundation  in  fact.  The  hexagonal 
rod  is  not  a  true  six-sided  figure,  but  rather  a  round 
figure  with  six  angles;  for  the  face  of  each  section  is 
of  course  slightly  rounded,  or  convex,  as  it  originally 
existed  in  the  cane,  and  the  extremely  small  amount  of 
outside  surface  that  is  taken  off  at  the  angles  to  make 
the  rod  perfectly  round  does  not  amount  to  any  thing  in 
reality,  or  weaken  the  rod  a  particle.  On  the  contrary, 
it  lessens  the  liability  of  the  sections  becoming  separated 
by  use,  from  the  prominence  of  the  jointed  angles  or 
seams,  as  in  the  hexagonal  rod,  which  are  liable  to 
become  bruised  or  chipped  off  by  striking  or  rubbing 
against  hard  substances,  as  rocks,  trees,  boats,  etc.,  and 
so  exposing  the  seams  to  the  action  of  air  and  moisture, 
which  softens  the  glue  and  causes  the  strips  to  separate. 

Another  plan  has  been  advocated,  to  reverse  the  pro- 
cess in  sawing  the  strips,  and  place  the  enamel  or  outside 
coating  at  the  interior  of  the  rod.  And  still  another, 
and  somewhat  better  plan,  by  the  way,  has  been  proposed, 
more  especially  for  tips,  as  follows : 

□  n 

n  ci 

The  shaded  sides  of  the  sections  represent  the  outer 
coating.  The  sections  are  to  be  pressed  together,  and 
glued  in  the  position  in  which  they  are  drawn  in  the 
figure,  which  brings  the  enamel  of  each  strip  partly  in- 
side and  partly  outside;    the  piece  is  then  worked  down 


FISHIXG-RODS.  207 

to  a  round  form,  having  the  center  of  enamel,  and  the 
circumference  of  alternate  strips  of  inside  and  a  small 
portion  of  the  siliceous  or  outside  layer. 

Then  these  rods  have  been  made  of  eight  and  nine 
strips;  but  there  is  no  real  merit  in  any  of  these  last- 
mentioned  plans,  and  the  six-section,  outside  enamel, 
hexagonal  or  round,  is  the  only  common-sense,  practical 
plan. 

The  following  table  of  relative  weights  and  measure- 
ments of  section-bamboo  fly-rods,  which,  however,  can 
only  be  approximate,  is  furnished  by  Messrs.  Abbey  & 
Imbrie,  No.  48  Maiden  Lane,  New  York  City : 

LENGTH   OF  ROD.  WEIGHT  OF  REEL  PLATE.  TOTAL  WEIGHT. 

11  feet If  ounces.  9  ounces. 

11^  feet 2        "  10    " 

12  feet 2\      "  12     " 

14  feet 2£      "  18    " 

16  feet 2f  "     .  28  " 

16J  feet 2f  "  81  " 

17  feet 3  "  36  " 

171  feet Si  "  40  " 

18  feet Si  "  44  " 

19  feet 3|  "  50  " 

20  feet 4  "  54  " 


Black  Bass  Bait  Rods. 

The  Black  Bass  and  his  mode  of  capture  has  hitherto 
been  altogether  too  much  neglected,  if  not  entirely 
ignored,  by  most  of .  our  writers  upon  the  gentle  art, 
either  from  a  lack  of  interest,  or  a  want  of  proper  in- 
formation, upon  the  subject.  Some  works,  that  have 
been  held  in  the  highest  esteem,  contain  the  least  infor- 


208  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

mation  upon  Black  Bass  angling,  and  even  that  little  is 
totally  unreliable  and  unsatisfactory.  As  a  rule,  our 
angling  authors  have  damned  the  Black  Bass  with  faint 
praise,  and  have  given  but  the  most  primitive  methods 
for  its  capture. 

Most  writers  have  devoted  their  attention  exclusively 
to  the  Salmon  and  Brook  Trout,  among  the  fresh-water 
game  fishes,  or  to  the  Striped  Bass,  Blue  Fish  and  Weak 
Fish,  among  the  salt-water  species.  While  acknowledg- 
ing the  game  qualities  and  fine  sport  afforded  the  angler 
by  these  different  species,  and  which  acknowledgment  is 
founded  upon  ample  personal  experience  with  them  all  — 
excepting  the  Salmon — I  regard  the  Black  Bass  as  one  of 
our  gamest  fishes ;  and  an  experience  of  twenty-five 
years  has  convinced  me  that  the  sport  afforded  by  it 
is  not  surpassed  by  the  pursuit  of  any  other  member  of 
the  finny  tribe,  excepting  possibly  the  Salmon,  with  which 
"King  of  the  waters,"  as  I  have  just  stated,  I  have  had 
no  experience. 

But  in  order  to  realize  Black  Bass  fishing  in  its  per- 
fection, suitable  tackle  must  be  employed.  Fishing  for 
Brook  Trout  with  a  bean-pole  for  a  rod,  and  a  piece  of 
raw  meat  for  bait,  would  not  be  considered  sport  in  the 
true  meaning  of  the  term,  nor  should  the  pursuit  of  the 
Black  Bass,  under  similar  conditions,  be  so  regarded ; 
yet  the  methods  of  Black  Bass  angling  heretofore  de- 
scribed by  our  angling  authors,  and  practiced  by  most 
anglers,  are  open  to  the  same  objections. 

Until  within  the  past  few  years  .such  primitive  rods  as 
the  cane-pole  of  the  South,  the  alder  or  hemlock  of  the 
Middle  States,  or  the  tamarack  pole  of  the  North-west, 
were,  when  wTell   selected,  light,  and  of  true  taper,  equal 


FISHING-RODS.  209 

to  or  superior  to  any  thing  offered  by  the  dealers.  Ten 
years  ago,  a  person  entering  a  tackle  shop  in  a  Western 
town,  and  inquiring  for  Bass  tackle,  would  be  presented 
with  a  rod  from  twelve  to  sixteen  feet  long,  weighing 
from  one  to  two  pounds ;  a  large  brass  reel,  with  a 
handle  like  a  coffee-mill  crank ;  a  line  like  a  chalk  lin  ?, 
and  a  large  ungainly  hook  with  a  side  bend — and  all  this 
formidable  array  of  clumsy  apparatus  to  do  battle  with 
such  a  thoroughbred  and  noble  foe  as  the  Black  Bass! 
Combination  rods,  general  rods,  perch  rods,  cheap  striped 
bass  tackle,  et  hoe  genus  omne,  had  been,  as  a  rule,  manu- 
factured for  the  Western  market,  and  sold  for  Black  Bass 
fishing. 

This  was  the  more  surprising,  as  the  Black  Bass  in- 
habited so  many  of  the  waters  of  the  Union,  from  New 
England  to  Florida,  and  from  Maryland  to  Missouri. 
He  was,  moreover,  the  acknowledged  peer  of  the  Brook 
Trout  for  gameness  by  those  who  knew  him  best ;  and  it 
was  ua  consummation  devoutly  to  be  wished tf  that  as 
much  skill  should  be  displayed  in  his  capture,  and  as 
elegant  and  as  suitable  tackle  employed  for  the  purpose 
as  in  the  case  of  his  speckled  rival. 

Those  enthusiastic  and  observant  anglers,  who  learned 
from  experience  that  there  was  a  want  not  supplied  in 
Black  Bass  rods,  as  offered  by  the  trade,  and  who  pos- 
sessed sufficient  ingenuity,  constructed  their  own  rods, 
and  fished  in  their  own  way;  and  as  these  worthy  souls 
were  generally  regarded  as  authority  in  their  respective 
localities  on  the  subject  of  Black  Bass  fishing,  and  not 
without  reason,  their  particular  style  of  rod  was  adopted 
in    their   particular   locality   as   the   "perfect   bass   rod." 

This  will  account  for  the   marked  difference  of  opinion 
18 


210  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

upon  this  subject  in  different  sections  of  the  country* 
for  each  such  rod  was  made  in  accordance  with  the  style 
of  fishing,  and  the  character  of  the  waters  to  be  fished. 

Some  years  ago,  while  residing  in  Wisconsin,  I  con- 
ceived the  idea  of  writing  a  book  on  the  Black  Bass,  in 
order  to  do  justice  to  a  fish  that  seemed  to  be  but  little 
understood;  and  likewise  to  divest  the  sport  of  Black 
Bass  angling — as  it  then  existed — of  some  of  its  primi- 
tive and  disagreeable  features,  and  give  it  a  higher  place 
in  the  catalogue  of  noble  sports. 

I  was  convinced  that  it  was  only  necessary  to  present 
the  claims  of  the  Black  Bass  in  a  proper  light,  and  to 
give  a  description  of  the  most  suitable  tackle  for  its 
capture,  to  induce  the  angling  fraternity  to  accord  full 
justice  to  a  noble  fish,  wThich  I  was  satisfied  was,  for 
many  reasons,  destined  to  become  the  leading  game  fish 
of  America. 

Accordingly,  I  began  making  notes  of  my  observations 
of  the  habits  of  the  Black  Bass,  and  was  collecting  data 
for  the  intended  treatise,  when,  fortunately  and  opportunely, 
Mr.  Charles  Hallock  founded  and  established  that  excel- 
lent journal  Forest  and  Strearn,  which  came  just  when  it 
was  most  needed.  Here  then  was  my  opportunity  to  reach 
the  anglers  of  the  country,  and  I  was  not  slow  to  embrace 
it,  and  at  once  began  to  champion  the  cause  of  the  Black 
Bass. 

I  prepared  a  series  of  articles  on  the  Black  Bass  and 
Black  Bass  angling,  and  described  at  some  length  the 
proper  rod,  reel,  line,  hook,  etc.,  and  mode  of  using  them, 
to  render  it  not  only  feasible,  but  practicable,  to  convince 
the  angler  of  the  high  order  of  game  qualities  inherent  to 
the  Black  Bass ;  and  that  by  the  use  of  suitable  tackle  it 


FISHING-RODS.  211 

would  not  suffer  by  a  comparison  with  other  game  fishes. 
The  seed  of  these  articles  was  sown  in  good  ground,  and 
yielded  abundantly.  I  received  letters  from  hundreds  of 
Black  Bass  anglers,  in  all  parts  of  the  country,  thanking 
and  complimenting  me  for  the  ideas  suggested,  and  for 
espousing  the  cause  of  their  favorite  fish,  the  Black  Bass. 
The  result  proved  far  beyond  my  most  hopeful  anticipa- 
tions, and  I  have  the  satisfaction  of  knowing  that  to-day 
there  is  no  game  fish  more  eagerly  sought  for,  and  none 
that  is  being  more  rapidly  introduced  into  new,  inland 
waters  by  the  advocates  and  admirers  of  this  truly  game 
fish. 

In  February,  1875,  I  published  an  article,  entitled, 
"The  Coming  Black  Bass  Rod,"  in  Forest  and  Stream, 
which  gave  a  description  of  my  idea  of  a  proper  rod  for 
Black  Bass  angling,  founded  on  many  years  experience, 
and  the  use  of  many  different  rods  for  this  purpose.  Mr. 
C.  F.  Orvis,  of  Manchester,  Vermont,  an  expert  angler, 
as  well  as  a  maker  of  fine  fishing-rods,  at  once  began  the 
manufacture  of  a  Black  Bass  rod  from  those  suggestions, 
and  they  are  to-day  to  be  found  in  all  parts  of  the  country, 
he  having  been  remarkably  successful  in  introducing  them, 
for  they  supplied  a  want  long  felt. 

Other  manufacturers,  seeing  the  necessity  for  a  new  de- 
parture from  the  old  beaten  path,  soon  began  to  make 
short  and  light  Black  Bass  rods,  more  in  accordance  with 
the  spirit  of  the  age,  and  the  demands  of  their  customers, 
which  they  called  the  "Forest  and  Stream"  Black  Bass 
rod,  thus  honoring  and  doing  justice  to  the  admirable 
journal  to  whose  columns  are  due  the  credit  of  completely 
reconstructing  the  Black  Bass  rod,  and  of  replacing  the 
former    long,    heavy   and   clumsy   affair,   by  the  elegant, 


212  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

short,  light  and  pliant  rod  of  the  present  day.  And  not 
only  has  the  length  and  weight  of  bait  rods  been  reduced, 
but  fly-rods  of  all  patterns  have  been  reduced  at  least  a 
foot  in  length,  during  the  past  five  years,  to  their  great 
advantage. 

The  Henshall  Black  Bass  Minnow  Rod. 

While  a  rod  may  vary  somewhat,  according  to  the  mode 
of  angling,  there  is  no  good  reason  for  such  a  wide  diver- 
sity of  opinion  as  obtains  on  the  question  of  Black  Bass 
rods.  For  instance :  Fishing  from  the  bank  of  a  swift 
and  narrow  stream,  wading  the  bars  of  a  wide  river,  or 
fishing  from  a. boat  on  a  quiet  lake,  seem  in  themselves 
apparently  very  different  processes;  but  in  reality  they 
are  only  slightly  different  means  of  securing  the  same  end, 
viz :  the  capture  of  the  Black  Bass  with  a  minnow  for 
bait — for  my  remarks  apply  only  to  bait  fishing — and  a 
properly  constructed  rod  would  answer  in  either  place 
and  fulfill  either  condition,  when  accompanied  by  a  light, 
freely  rendering  reel,  together  with  a  fine  trout  line.  An 
artistic  angler,  fishing  for  Trout  or  Black  Bass  with  the 
fly,  would  use  his  fly-rod  in  either  place ;  from  a  boat, 
from  the  bank,  or  while  wading  the  stream ;  he  would 
use  the  same  rod  under  any  and  every  circumstance,  wher- 
ever he  had  room  to  make  a  cast.  The  Black  Bass  bait 
fisher  will  in  time  become  as  consistent  as  the  fly  fisher, 
but  it  will  only  be  when  he  adopts  the  proper  rod,  which 
rod  I  will  now  endeavor  to  describe. 

I  start  out  with  the  proposition  that  a  first-class  Amer- 
ican, single-handed  Trout  fly-rod  is,  per  se,  the  very  per- 
fection of  rods  and  the  chef  ydouvre  of  the  rod-maker's  art. 


FISHING-RODS.  213 

Such  a  rod  is  about  eleven  feet  long,  and  is  made  of  split 
bamboo,  or  a  combination  of  ash  and  lancewood,  and  should 
weigh  from  seven  to  nine  ounces.  With  such  a  rod,  prop- 
erly handled,  either  line,  leader  or  hook  may  part,  but  the 
rod  will  remain  intact.  It  combines  all  the  essential  qual- 
ities of  a  good  rod,  viz :  balance,  lightness,  strength,  elas- 
ticity, and  pliancy.  A  Salmon  rod  is  only  a  Trout  rod 
enlarged,  proportionately,  in  every  particular,  and  made  to 
be  used  with  two  hands  instead  of  one. 

Now,  if  all  fish  were  caught  with  the  fly,  there  would 
be  no  need  for  other  rods  than  the  Trout  and  Salmon  fly- 
rods;  but  as  such,  unfortunately,  is  not  the  case,  we  are 
compelled  to  adopt  other  rods  in  accordance  with  the  mode 
of  fishing,  the  character  of  the  fish  to  be  caught,  and  the 
kind  of  bait  to  be  used.  But  whatever  may  be  the  nature 
of  the  rod  that  is  to  be  made,  let  this  general  rule  or  prin- 
ciple be  followed  in  its  construction :  Let  the  rod  conform 
as  nearly  as  possible  to  the  typical  rod,  i.  e.,  the  Trout  fly- 
rod,  as  is  consistent  with  the  manner  of  service  required 
of  it.  If  we  follow  this  rule  we  can  not  go  very  far 
astray. 

Acting  upon  this  principle,  then,  I  have  found  in  my 
experience  that  the  essential  qualities  or  attributes  of  a 
good  Black  Bass  rod  for  bait  fishing,  are  just  the  same  as 
the  typical  rod  for  balance,  weight,  strength,  and  elasticity, 
with  a  happy  medium  of  pliancy,  between  a  Trout  fly-rod 
and  a  Trout  bait-rod,  which  can  hardly  be  expressed  in 
words.  But  this  slight  stiffening  of  the  rod  makes  it  cor- 
respondingly heavier,  and  in  order  to  maintain  the  same 
relative  weight,  we  must  cut  down  the  length  of  the  rod 
by  taking  oif  from  two  to  three  feet,  thus  reducing  the 
rod  to  eight  or  nine  feet  in  length,  which  is  found  by  ex- 


214  BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

perience  to  be  far  superior  to  longer  rods  for  Black  Bass 
fishing. 

As  a  long,  withy,  willowy  rod  is  best  for  casting  a  fly, 
so  is  a  short,  stiffish  rod  best  for  casting  a  minnow.  With 
a  rod  of  this  character,  and  a  light-running,  multiplying 
reel,  it  is  an  easy  matter  to  cast  from  thirty  to  forty  yards. 
The  situation  of  the  reel  upon  the  butt  must  be  a  com- 
promise between  the  single  and  double-handed  fly-rods; 
for  though  the  rod  is  used  almost  entirely  with  one  hand, 
yet  there  are  emergencies  when  both  hands  must  be  used, 
for  occasionally  a  six-pound  Bass  or  a  fifteen-pound  Pick- 
erel, Pike-perch,  or  Catfish  will  be  hooked ;  or  an  unusu- 
ally bold  or  fierce  fighting  Bass  may  get  the  advantage 
of  one  and  take  to  the  weeds  or  rocks.  It  is  also  essen- 
tial to  have  plenty  of  room  for  the  hand  below  the  reel 
in  casting,  as  the  thumb  must  control  the  running  off 
of  the  line,  and  prevent  the  reel  from  overrunning,  as  in 
Striped-bass  fishing.  The  rod  must  have  light,  standing 
guides,  instead  of  rings,  as  in  the  fly-rod. 

The  rod  from  which  my  original  description  of  the 
"  Coming  Black  Bass  Rod  w  was  taken  is  eight  feet  and  three 
inches  long,  and  is  in  three  joints ;  the  first  joint  or  butt  is 
composed  of  white  ash,  and  the  second  joint  and  tip  of 
lancewood;  it  weighs  just  eight  ounces;  it  is  finely  bal- 
anced, and  has  a  true  bend  from  butt  to  tip;  with  it  I 
have  killed  hundreds  of  Black  Bass,  weighing  from  two 
to  four  pounds,  and  occasionally  heavier,  and  Pickerel 
from  five  to  twelve  pounds,  with  an  occasional  one  scaling 
fifteen  pounds.  I  have  used  it  many  seasons,  and  do  not 
see  where  it  can  be  improved;  it  is  as  firm  and  elastic 
as  when  first  made.  I  have  oftentimes  cast  out  my 
entire  line    of  fifty  yards,  when   casting  with    the  wind. 


FISHING-RODS.  215 

I  feel  justly  proud  of  the  merits  of  this  rod,  for  I  made 
it  myself. 

Messrs.  Abbey  &  Imbrie,  of  48  Maiden  Lane,  New 
York  City,  made  me  a  rod  from  designs  and  specifica- 
tions furnished  by  myself,  which  comes  as  near  the  embodi- 
ment of  my  ideas  of  a  Black  Bass  minnow  rod  as  any  I 
have  seen.  After  a  season  of  hard  usage  and  thoroughly 
practical  tests,  I  am  prepared  to  say  that  I  do  not  see 
how  it  can  well  be  improved.  It  is  fully  the  equal  of 
my  own  pet  rod  (which  I  made  myself),  and  is  of  course 
more  highly  finished ;  indeed,  in  this  latter  respect  it  can 
not  be  excelled. 

The  materials  and  mountings  of  this  rod  are  of  the 
highest  quality.  The  butt  is  prime  white  ash,  and  the 
second  piece  and  tip  are  of  selected  Cuba  lancewood.  The 
mountings  are  German  silver,  solid  and  strong.  The  fer- 
rules are  milled,  capped  and  banded,  and  the  guides  solid, 
light,  and  of  a  very  graceful  and  new  pattern,  and  are 
lashed  on.  The  butt  has  a  wound  grip,  or  hand-piece, 
and  the  reel-bands  and  cap  are  very  finely  finished.  The 
metal  tip  is  of  the  four-ring  pattern,  light  and  strong. 

The  joints  are  made  solid  and  flush,  without  tenons  or 
dowels,  or  mortising.  This  I  have  found  to  be  the  best 
way  for  fitting  the  joints,  for  the  boring  not  only  weakens 
the  joint,  but  the  tapering  tenon,  acting  like  a  wedge,  will 
cause  the  joint  to  separate  by  the  continual  springing  of 
the  rod.  Mr.  C.  F.  Orvis,  one  of  the  best  and  most  honest 
tackle  makers  living,  also  constructs  the  joints  of  his  rods 
in  this  way. 

The  dimensions  of  the  rod  made  by  Abbey  &  Imbrie 
are  as  follows  : — 

Total  length,  when  put  together,  8  feet  3  inches. 


216 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 


vjfc* 


J 


of 


^ 


•' 


ifft       if' 


^ 


>/* 


/ 


\X  V 

The  Henshall  Black  Bass  Rod.— (Specifications.) 
(Abbey  &  Iuibrie.) 


Standing  Guides,  to  wrap. 


Bod  Tips. 


♦ 


Standing  Guides,  with  bands. 


FISHING-RODS.  217 

Length  of  each  piece,  34 \  inches. 

Butt :    Extreme  end  of  butt,  j  inch  in  diameter. 
Small  end  of  butt,  \  inch  in  diameter. 
Grip  or  hand-piece,  \fa  inch  in  diameter. 
Reel-seat,  1  inch  in  diameter. 

Second  piece:  Large  end,  fa  inch  in  diameter. 
Small  end,  ^  inch  in  diameter. 

Tip :     Large  end,  \  inch  in  diameter. 
Small  end,  -^  inch  in  diameter. 

Reel-seat,  4  inches  long. 

From  extreme  butt  to  reel -seat,  7  (from  6  to  8)  inches. 

The  weight  of  a  rod  made  from  these  dimensions  will 
be  about  nine  ounces,  depending  upon  the  material  em- 
ployed in  its  construction.  Its  weight  can  be  reduced  to 
eight  ounces  by  taking  off  a  sixty-fourth  of  an  inch  from 
the  several  diameters,  and.  can  be  increased  to  ten  or 
eleven  ounces  by  enlarging  the  diameters  in  the  same 
ratio ;  but  it  must  be  remembered,  that  in  altering  the 
conditions  of  this  rod,  at  all,  in  order  to  preserve  its  ad- 
mirable balance  and  fine  action,  it  is  imperative  that  the 
diameters  be  increased  or  diminished,  uniformly,  through- 
out the  entire  length  of  the  rod,  from  the  extreme  butt  to 
the  tip. 

To  attempt  to  secure  lightness  by  reducing  the  caliber 
of  the  butt-piece  alone,  would  result  in  spoiling  the  rod ; 
and  as  Messrs.  Abbey  &  Imbrie  truly  say:  "The  angler 
who  seeks  lightness  in  a  rod  at  the  expense  of  any  thing 
else  is  worse  than  an  infidel."  While  this  rod  may  be 
reduced  to  even  six  ounces,  if  its  proper  proportions  are 
observed  in  the  modeling,  and  still  be  a  good  rod  for 
Rock  Bass,  Croppies  and  White  Bass,  it  would  be  too 
light  for  Black  Bass  angling. 
19 


218  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

This  rod  has  a  true  and  gradual  taper  from  the  reel- 
seat  to  the  tip,  which  gives  it  a  back,  which,  while  just 
stiff  enough  for  casting  a  minnow,  is  sufficiently  pliable 
and  yielding  to  give  a  correct  working  to  the  rod  under 
the  play  of  a  lively  fish.  And  just  here  is  where  so  many 
rods  fail.  Many  rods  are  made  too  weak  in  the  butt,  or 
the  upper  two-thirds  of  it,  usually  by  a  rapid  and  concave 
taper  to  reduce  the  caliber  of  the  rod  at  this  point,  in 
order  to  gain  lightness.  But  this  can  only  be  done  at 
the  expense  of  weakening  the  rod,  and  spoiling  its  action. 

When  a  rod  has  too  weak  a  back,  or  too  slender  a  butt 
at  this  point,  it  causes  the  rod  to  be  top-heavy,  and  pro- 
duces what  is  known  as  a  "  double  action  "  in  the  rod,  or 
a  "kick  in  the  handle;"  qualities  which  were  sought  for 
in  some  Salmon  fly-rods  in  the  old  country,  as  it  was  sup- 
posed that  a  fly  could  be  cast  farther  with  rods  of  this 
character.  But  it  was  necessary  that  the  angler  should 
become  thoroughly  educated  in  the  handling  of  a  rod  with 
this  peculiarity,  to  be  enabled  to  use  it  with  any  degree 
of  satisfaction. 

However  much  this  principle  may  have  been  desired  by 
British  Salmon  fishers,  it  becomes  the  very  worst  feature 
in  a  Black  Bass  minnow  rod.  With  this  defect  in  a  bait 
rod,  it  is  impossible  to  cast  with  any  accuracy,  or  to  any 
great  distance.  And,  moreover,  it  produces  in  the  angler 
a  lack  of  confidence  in  his  rod,  for  it  "  feels  weak"  to  him 
at  the  very  point  where  it  should  feel  the  strongest,  and 
really  the  rod  would  give  way  at  just  this  very  point  under 
a  heavy  strain. 

But,  to  refer  to  my  rod  again  :  I  can  easily  cast  a  min- 
now from  forty  to  fifty  yards,  and  with  great  accuracy, 
with    this   rod,    the    back    being   just   stiff  and   yielding 


FISHING-RODS.  219 

enough  for  this  purpose.  The  bend  from  the  last  third 
of  the  butt  piece  to  the  tip  forms  a  true  and  perfect  arch 
under  the  strain  of  a  hard-pulling  fish,  which  is  the  bend 
so  desirable,  and  so  hard  to  obtain  in  a  fishing-rod.  The 
strain  falls  equally  upon  the  entire  rod,  so  that  it  is  im- 
possible for  me  to  tell  just  where  it  would  break  under  a 
sufficient  strain.  The  weak  part  of  an  imperfect  rod  can 
always  be  felt  by  an  expert  angler,  and  he  knows  perfectly 
well,  while  playing  a  fish,  just  where  the  rod  is  weakest, 
and  just  where  it  would  fail. 

In  giving  a  description  of  this  rod,  I  have  given  the 
description  of  what  I  call  a  perfect  Black  Bass  minnow 
rod,  and  the  reader  can  rely  upon  it  as  being  correct  in 
principle,  and  satisfactory  in  practice.  And  should  he  ever 
become  possessed  of  such  a  treasure,  he  will,  in  the  fullness 
of  his  heart,  be  prepared  to  hold  up  both  hands  for  me. 

This  same  style  of  rod  can  be  procured  from  any  first- 
class  maker,  as  Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson,  No.  65  Ful- 
ton Street,  New  York ;  Charles  F.  Orvis,  of  Manchester, 
Vermont ;  or  S.  W.  Goodridge,  of  Grafton,  Vermont,  all 
of  whom  make  excellent  rods,  from  specifications  furnished 
by  myself.  I  have  examined  and  tested  rods  made  by  all 
of  them,  and  know  whereof  I  speak. 

Mr.  Orvis  informs  me  that  some  of  his  customers 
ordered  rods  with  the  butt  extending  below  the  reel 
clamps  a  foot  or  more,  so  as  to  reach  under  the  elbow, 
and  thus  form  a  point  d'appui.  This  demand  is  founded 
upon  laziness,  carelessness,  or  "pure  cussedness,"  which  was 
first  induced  by  using  the  old-style  rods,  which  were  so 
heavy  and  long  as  to  require  either  this  support,  or,  what 
was  worse,  the  holding  of  the  rod  with  both  hands. 

Now,  the  object  of  the  modern  Black  Bass  rod  is  to  dis- 


220  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

pense  entirely  with  this  ungraceful  and  clumsy  style,  and 
enable  the  rod  to  be  used  with  the  hand  alone,  as  in  fly 
fishing.  I  sincerely  hope  that  my  brother  anglers  will  not 
thus  handicap  their  skill,  nor  encourage  this  needless  exten- 
sion of  butt.  It  will  be  well  to  remember,  in  this  connec- 
tion, that  no  excellence  is  gained  but  by  great  labor,  and 
no  skill  attained  but  by  careful  practice.  There  may  be 
born  poets,  but  I  doubt  if  there  are  born  fishermen ;  the 
love  may  be  innate,  but  its  confirmation  requires  patience, 
perseverance  and  elbow-grease. 

The  novice  will  be  sometimes  told  by  theoretical  anglers 
that  he  must  procure  a  rod  which  accords  with  his  size, 
strength,  and  general  build ;  that  a  rod  which  suits  one 
angler,  will  be  too  long,  too  short,  too  heavy,  or  too  light 
for  another.  Now,  this  is  all  gammon ;  a  rod  must  be 
made  to  suit  the  kind  of  fish,  and  the  mode  of  fishing, 
without  any  reference  whatever  to  the  angler  himself. 

In  ordering  a  shot-gun  that  is  to  be  used  on  all  kinds 
of  game,  from  the  lordly  buck  to  the  dainty  quail,  it  is  of 
the  highest  importance  that  the  gun  should  be  built  to  fit 
the  sportsman  in  every  particular,  and  he  then  varies  the 
charge  according  to  the  game.  But  there  is  no  analogy 
between  a  shot-gun  and  a  fishing-rod;  the  latter  weighs 
but  ounces,  where  the  former  weighs  pounds,  and  the 
weight  of  a  rod  for  Black  Bass  angling  will  suit  a  weakly 
youth,  or  the  strongest  man,  as  well.  A  half-pound  in 
weight  is  of  no  moment  as  compared  to  the  strength  of  a 
man ;  and  it  is  all  stuff,  and  the  sheerest  nonsense,  to  talk 
of  making  a  rod  of  this  weight  conform  to  the  muscular 
requirements  of  any  individual.  A  well-balanced  rod  feels 
the  same  to  the  weakest  man  or  strongest,  the  tallest  man 
or  shortest;  while  a  rod  that  lacks  this  quality  will  feel 


FISHING-RODS.  221 

right  to  no  one.  I  have  no  patience  or  sympathy  with 
those  visionary  book-anglers,  who  talk  or  write  such  ridic- 
ulous nonsense,  or  spin  such  fine-drawn  theories. 

A  Home-made  Black  Bass  Rod. 

As  the  Black  Bass  anglers  of  Ohio,  Kentucky,  Ten- 
nessee, Northern  Alabama,  and  the  South-west  generally 
are  extremely  partial  to  a  natural  cane  or  bamboo  rod,  I 
desire  to  tell  them  how  to  make  a  good  one  of  this  ma-* 
terial  at  little  cost,  and  which,  though  not  a  "thing  of- 
beauty,"  will  prove  itself  a'  "joy  forever,"  in  comparison 
with  the  cane-rod,  as  generally  used.  After  using  such  a 
rod  as  I  am  about  to  describe  for  one  season,  the  angler 
will  be  ready  to  advance  another  step,  and  adopt  a  good 
ash  and  lancewood  rod,  which  contingency,  I  am  free  to 
admit,  is  the  principal  motive  for  this  information. 

A  natural  bamboo-cane,  as  it  is  procured  at  the  tackle 
stores,  is  from  fifteen  to  twenty  feet  in  length;  and  it  is 
the  custom,  in  the  localities  named,  to  use  from  ten  to 
twelve  feet  of  the  smaller  or  upper  end  of  such  a  cane  for 
a  Black  Bass  rod,  after  attaching  standing' guides  and  a  reel 
fastening.  While  such  a  rod  is  strong  and  light,  with  a 
moderate  degree  of  pliancy  and  elasticity,  it  entirely  lacks 
the  great  desideratum,  balance,  being  decidedly  top-heavy, 
and  is  too  small  at  the  butt  to  allow  of  a  firm  grasp  of  the 
hand,  generally  necessitating  the  use  of  both  hands  to  hold 
it.  Now,  to  obtain  the  greatest  amount  of  good  and  pleas- 
ure from  a  rod  of  this  character,  proceed  as  follows  : 

Select  a  genuine  Calcutta  bamboo-cane,  which  may  be 
known  by  its  dark,  mottled  markings,  caused  by  its  having 
been  burnt  about  the  leaf-ridges,  or  knots.    Select  one  that 


222  BOOK   OF    THE   BLACK    BASS. 

is  hard  and  elastic,  with  a  good  taper,  and  quite  small  at 
the  tip ;  those  known  as  "  male  "  canes  are  the  best,  having 
larger  bulges,  or  leaf-ridges,  and  being  much  tougher  than 
the  "  female  "  canes.  Having  chosen  a  good  one,  cut  off 
six  and  a  half  feet  of  the  smaller  end  for  the  rod,  the  re- 
maining larger  portion  of  the  cane  will  make  a  good  han- 
dle for  a  landing-net. 

Now  make  a  wooden  butt  of  white-ash  or  black-walnut, 
from  eighteen  to  twenty  inches  long,  of  the  following  di- 
ameters: At  the  extreme  butt  end,  seven-eighths  of  an 
.  inch ;  now  increase  the  diameter  by  a  gradual  taper  to  an 
inch  and  one-eighth  at  a  distance  of  five  inches  from  the 
extreme  butt ;  then  decrease  the  taper  to  an  inch  at  a  dis- 
tance of  seven  inches  from  extreme  butt.  The  next  four 
inches  forms  the  reel  seat,  and  is  one  inch  in  diameter 
throughout  its  length;  now  decrease  the  diameter  by  a 
rapid,  concave  taper  for  a  distance  of  two  inches,  to  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch,  and  thence  a  gradual  taper  to  the 
smaller  end  of  the  butt,  which  must  exceed  the  diameter 
of  the  large  end  of  the  cane  about  one-sixteenth  of  an 
inch ;  the  diameter  of  the  large  end  of  the  cane-joint — 
where  cut  in  two — will  be  from  half  an  inch  to  five- 
eighths  of  an  inch. 

Having  proceeded  according  to  the  instructions  just 
given,  we  have  a  cane-joint  six  feet  and  six  inches  long, 
and  a  wooden  butt  say  twenty  inches  long,  with  the  grip 
of  one  and  one-eighth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  the  reel 
seat  of  one  inch  diameter.  Now  procure  a  set  of  reel 
bands  one  inch  inside  diameter;  a  pair  of  ferrules  for  the 
joint — the  inside  diameter  of  the  smaller  or  male  ferrule 
being  of  the  same  diameter  as  the  large  end  of  the  cane 
piece,  which  can  readily  be  ascertained  with  a  pair  of 


FISHING-RODS.  223 

calipers ;  five  standing  guides,  graduated  sizes,  and  a  solid 
metal  tip.  These  mountings  should  be  brass  or  German 
silver.  The  guides  should  be  attached  at  equal  distances 
from  the  reel  seat  to  the  tip;  and,  having  properly  fitted 
the  ferrules  and  reel  bands,  give  the  rod  two  coats  of  shel- 
lac or  coach  varnish.  When  dry,  the  rod  is  ready  for  use, 
and  will,  be  about  eight  feet  in  length,  and  weighing  not 
more  than  eight  ounces — a  single-handed  rod  equal  to  any 
rod  made  for  casting,  will  be  well-balanced  and  strong, 
but  will  lack  the  pliancy,  elasticity  and  perfect  working 
of  a  good  ash  and  lancewood  rod,  yet  it  will  be  such  a 
great  improvement  on  the  cane-rod,  as  generally  used, 
that  it  has  only  to  be  tried  to  be  appreciated. 

A  rod,  similar  to  the  above,  originated,  in  Milwaukee, 
in  1874,  in  this  way:  At  that  time  I  was  the  only  one,  of 
a  large  number  of  anglers,  who  frequented  the  lakes  in  the 
vicinity  of  Oconomowoc,  Wisconsin,  who  used  a  shor*t  and 
light  Black  Bass  minnow  rod,  and  which  was  often  the 
subject  of  many  jokes  on  the  part  of  my  fellow-anglers. 
But,  as  it  was  not  always  "the  longest  pole  that  got  the 
persimmons,"  some  of  them,  at  length,  became  convinced 
of  the  superiority  of  the  short  rod  in  casting  and  general 
convenience,  though  they  were  loath  to  alter  their  hand- 
some ten  and  twelve  feet  rods. 

I  suggested  to  several  to  have  short  rods  made  of  native 
cane,  in  the  manner  above  described,  and  which  I  had 
formerly  experimented  with.  I  referred  them  to  John  C. 
Welles,  of  Milwaukee,  as  the  proper  person  to  make  them. 
Accordingly,  he  got  up  several,  and,  for  convenience, 
made  them  in  three  pieces— two  cane-joints,  of  about 
three  feet  each,  and  a  short  wooden  butt  or  handle.  The 
result  was,  that  the  owners  used  them  afterward  in  prefer- 


224  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

ence  to  all  other  rods,  and  a  demand  at  once  sprang  np  for 
the  "  Welles'  rod/'  and  they  are  still  made  and  used  to 
some  extent.  Other  Western  manufacturers  afterward 
adopted  the  idea,  and  offered  them  to  anglers  in  lengths 
of  from  seven  to  ten  feet. 

But  while  such  a  rod  is  cheap,  light,  and  eminently 
serviceable,  it  has,  to  my  mind,  some  very  serious  objec- 
tions. In  the  first  place,  it  is  very  homely  and  unsym- 
metrical  in  form ;  the  short,  stubby  butt  tapering  so  sud- 
denly and  abruptly  to  the  cane-joint,  gives  the  rod  a  very 
awkward  and  unfinished  appearance,  and  entirely  destroys 
the  balance  of  the  rod.  Now,  as  remarked  at  the  begin- 
ning of  this  article,  "  a  thing  of  beauty  is  a  joy  forever," 
and  one  can  appreciate  this  quality  in  a  fishing-rod,  as  well 
as  in  a  horse,  a  yacht,  or  a  gun.  In  the  next  place,  it  is 
too  stiff  and  unyielding,  except  at  the  extreme  tip ;  the 
bend  not  being  equally  distributed  along  the  entire  rod,  as 
it  should  be :  and  this  fault,  from  the  nature  of  the  rod, 
can  not  well  be  obviated.  This  I  consider  an  insuperable 
objection,  for  it  precludes  that  nice  discrimination  in  feel- 
ing your  fish  when  he  is  taking  the  bait,  and  that  delicate 
manipulation  of  him  after  he  is  hooked.  The  owners  of 
this  rod,  however,  are  very  enthusiastic  in  its  praise,  and  it 
is,  at  least,  a  step  in  the  right  direction  for  a  more  perfect 
Black  Bass  rod. 

The  Cuvier  Black  Bass  Eod. 

The  most  complete  rod  of  this  character  which  I  have 
seen,  is  made  by  Mr.  George  B.  Ellard,  of  Cincinnati.  It 
is  made  in  two  pieces  of  choice,  short-jointed  Japanese 
bamboo,  with  an  adjustable*  handle,  which  can  be  detached 


FISHING-RODS.  225 

at  pleasure.  It  is  light,  well  balanced,  honestly  made,  and 
can  be  handled  all  day  without  fatigue.  The  arrangement 
of  the  handle  is  a  special  feature;  it  can,  with  little 
trouble,  be  adjusted  to  any  other  rod.  With  it  and  a  reel 
in  his  satchel,  a  dozen  hooks,  half  a  dozen  guides,  a  solid 
metal  tip,  and  a  piece  of  wound  silk  thread  in  his  pocket, 
an  angler  is  never  at  a  loss  for  the  materials  to  enjoy  a 
day's  sport  at  any  little  fishing  town,  where  he  may  by 
accident  find  himself,  during  the  season,  and  where  he  can 
buy  a  bamboo  or  other  cane  for  fifty  cents. 

Mr.  Ellard  calls  his  rod  the  "  Cuvier  Bass  Rod,"  after 
the  well-known  club  of  that  name  in  Cincinnati.  It  has 
been  thoroughly  tested  during  the  past  season  on  Lake 
Erie,  and  in  the  smaller  waters  of  Wisconsin,  Minnesota, 
and  Michigan,  and  has  given  universal  satisfaction.  Its 
moderate  price  is  not  the  least  of  its  merits. 


Section  Bamboo  Minnow  Rod. 

"While,  in  my  opinion,  ash  and  lancewood,  or  some  such 
suitable  woods  are  to  be  preferred  for  a  Black  Bass  min- 
now rod — the  desired  action  of  such  a  rod  being  more 
easily  obtained  from  these  materials — there  are  some  an- 
glers who  prefer  a  rod  of  split  bamboo  to  any  other  ma- 
terial, and  for  any  kind  of  rod.  And  while  it  is  possible 
to  make  as  good  a  rod  for  action,  and  a  superior  one  for 
strength  and  beauty  from  this  material,  the  cost  is  neces- 
sarily very  much  greater — at  least  three  times  as  great — 
for  a  perfect  minnow  rod  of  split  bamboo. 

For  those  who  desire  the  best,  at  whatever  cost,  I  can 
recommend  a  rod  of  this  material  when  made  by  a  first- 


226  BOOK   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

class  workman.  But,  at  the  same  time,  I  would  caution 
the  angler  to  take  the  most  jealous  and  unceasing  care  of 
such  a  rod,  for  it  is  not  so  serviceable  as  a  wooden  rod 
when  subject  to  the  same  conditions  of  usage. 

In  order  to  give  the  reader  an  idea  of  the  construction 
of  a  split  bamboo  rod,  I  can  not  do  better  than  to  repro- 
duce here  the  following  extract  from  a  letter,  written  to 
me  on  this  subject  by  Mr.  T.  S.  Morrell,  an  accomplished 
and  finished  angler,  of  Newark,  New  Jersey — relating  to 
the  construction  of  a  split  bamboo  Black  Bass  minnow  rod, 
as  made  by  himself: — 

I  have  just  finished  a  rod  patterned  after  that  described  by  you 
in  "  Hallock's  Sportsman's  Gazetteer  " — a  one-hand  bait- rod  for  Black 
Bass.  I  will  briefly  describe  my  method  of  manufacture,  as  I  learned 
it  from  Mr.  E.  A.  Green  : 

The  rod  is  eight  and  a  half  feet  long,  in  three  joints,  of  six-strip 
bamboo.  The  ferrules,  reel-bands,  butt-cap,  and  guides,  I  had  made 
to  order,  not  being  an  expert  in  working  metals.  The  bamboo  I  got 
from  Mr.  C.  F.  Murphy,  and  is  as  tough  as  bone. 

I  first  sawed  the  piece  in  two  strips  with  a  fine,  sharp  hand-saw; 
then  I  took  a  board  with  a  perfectly  straight  slit  sawed  the  length 
of  a  joint  of  the  proposed  rod.  Laying  the  flat  part  of  one  of  the 
strips  (I  had  just  sawn  asunder)  on  this  board  over  the  slit,  I  carefully 
placed  it  so  as  to  get  the  requisite  taper,  and  then  tacked  it  at  the 
edge§  firmly  to  the  board. 

Then,  with  rule  and  pencil  I  drew  on  the  bamboo  a  straight  line, 
being  careful  to  taper  it  right,  and  sawed  it  out — six  pieces  exactly 
alike  in  size  and  taper — for  a  joint.  The  manner  of  getting  the  size 
correctly,  is  to  take  the  male  ferrule  for  the  thick  end  of  the  joint, 
and  the  female  ferrule  for  the  small  end ;  stand  each  on  end  on  a 
piece  of  paper,  and  mark  a  circle  outside;  then,  with  a  pair  of  small 
compasses  measure  the  circle  into  six  parts,  and  draw  a  line  from 
point  to  point  across  the  circle,  so  that  all  the  lines  meet  in  the 
center.  This  will  show  the  size  and  taper  of  each  piece,  and  the  ex- 
act shape. 


FISHING-EODS.  227 

The  board  on  which  I  sawed  out  my  strips  has  grooves  cut,  so  that 
I  easily  plane  the  inside  of  the  strips  for  each  joint ;  any  inequality 
I  finish  off  with  a  file.  I  now  place  my  six  strips  together,  winding 
twine  around  tightly,  but  some  distance  apart,  so  that  I  can  get  my 
thumb  and  finger  between,  so  that  I  can  see  the  joints,  and  how  they 
come  together.  If  they  appear  loose,  and  I  can  not  get  them  to- 
gether with  thumb  and  finger,  I  mark  the  spots  with  a  pencil,  and 
unwinding,  file  away  until  they  come  well  together. 

For  the  butt,  I  draw  a  plan  on  paper,  that  is,  enough  of  it  to  rep- 
resent the  hand-hold,  measure  with  compasses  the  distance  across 
each  strip,  or  cut  a  pattern  of  paper,  lay  it  on  the  bamboo  and  mark 
it  out.  For  the  tip  and  middle  joint,  when  I  glue  the  strips  to- 
gether, I  wind  hard  and  tight  and  closely  with  twine;  now  I 
straighten  them  carefully  (as  the  hot  glue  has  made  them  pliant), 
and  lay  away  for  twenty-four  hours  on  a  shelf.  I  never  stand  them 
on  end,  as  they  are  likely  to  warp  out  of  shape. 

For  the  butt,  I  have  iron  rings  of  many  sizes ;  when  the  strips  are 
glued  together,  I  force  on  these  rings,  driving  on  hard,  and  close  to- 
gether. This  brings  the  glued  strips  so  tightly  together  that  the 
joints  can  not  be  seen.  Twenty-four  hours  after  gluing,  I  take  off* 
the  rings  and  wrappings  of  twine,  and  finish  off  with  a  file  and 
sand-paper;  then  fit  on  the  ferrules,  which  I  fasten  on  with  cement. 

Before  putting  on  the  guides  and  metal  tip,  I  joint  the  rod  to- 
gether, and  turn  it  in  the  ferrules  until  I  get  it  perfectly  straight ; 
then  mark  the  places  for  the  guides  and  tip,  so  that  they  are  all  in 
a  straight  line,  so  that  the  fishing-line  may  have  as  little  friction  as 
possible.  I  now  cement  on  the  metal  tip,  and  lash  on  the  guides 
with  a  string,  simply  to  hold  them  in  place  for  the  silk  lashings. 

The  rod  is  now  ready  for  the  silk  lashings,  for  which  I  use  fine  red 
spool-silk.  I  wind  the  guides  first ;  winding  on  smoothly  and  closely. 
When  one  side  of  the  guide  is  wound,  I  cut  off  the  silk,  leaving  half 
a  yard,  which  I  thread  in  a  needle,  and,  pushing  the  latter  under 
the  lashings,  draw  it  through  tightly  and  cut  off  close.  Then  finish 
the  other  side  of  the  guide  in  the  same  way. 

I  now,  with  a  pencil,  mark  the  places  for  the  lashings  the  whole 
length  of  the  joint,  tip,  or  butt,  on  which  I  am  working.  I  draw  off 
from  the  spool  about  four  feet  of  silk,  cut  it  off  and  thread  the 
needle ;  this  is  enough  for  several  lashings  of  the  tip.     I  make  not 


228  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

more  than  a  half-dozen  turns  on  the  end  of  the  tip,  and  place  the 
lashings  about  a  half-inch  apart,  increasing  the  number  of  turns  and 
the  distance  apart,  so  that  at  the  butt  of  the  rod  the  lashings  are  an 
eighth  of  an  inch  wide  and  one  inch  apart. 

When  the  lashings,  guides,  reel-bands,  butt-cap,  etc.,  are  all  on,  I 
give  the  rod  its  first  coat  of  varnish,  putting  it  on  very  thin  and 
evenly ;  it  is  quite  an  art  to  varnish  well.  I  give  the  rod  at  least 
four  coats,  each  as  thin  as  T  can  spread  it,  and  each  well  dried  before 
the  next  is  put  on.  I  do  not  use  shellac,  but  varnish  of  the  best 
gum. 

I  have,  at  some  length,  thus  described  my  method  of  making  a 
split  bamboo  rod,  as  taught  me  by  Mr.  Green.  There  are  several 
other  ways  of  doing  it,  and  it  must  be  understood  that  this  is  amateur 
work.  A  circular  saw  is  a  great  help,  and  indispensable  to  those 
who  make  rods  to  sell. 


4  ► 
<  ► 


Details  of  Split  Bamboo  Bod. 
(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 
Cut  No.  1  shows  a  transverse  section  of  the  cane,  and  the  dotted  lines  where 
a  piece  is  split  out.    It  is  then  planed  down  to  the  white  line,  leaving  only  the 
hard  enamel. 
No.  2  shows  the  strips  ready  for  cementing. 


L=0=Jl'iT.n,n'vn,i'ni^ 


g=fc 


Split  Bamboo  Fly-Kod. 
(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


fishing-rods.  229 

The  Black  Bass  Fly-Rod. 

A  few  pages  back,  I  made  the  statement  that  the  Amer- 
ican Trout  fly-rod  was  the  very  perfection  of  fishing-rods, 
and  that  all  other  rods  should  conform  as  nearly  as  possi- 
ble to  said  model  or  typical  rod,  commensurate  with  the 
manner  of  service  required  of  them.  Upon  this  principle, 
an  honest  and  well-made  Trout  fly-rod,  about  eleven  feet 
in  length,  and  weighing  from  eight  to  nine  ounces,  answers 
admirably  for  Black  Bass  fly-fishing ;  and,  fortunately,  a 
suitable  rod  of  this  character  can  be  procured  from  any 
first-class  maker ;  but  I  would  caution  the  new  hand  against 
the  many  cheap  rods  now  in  the  market.  A  good  rod  can 
only  be  obtained  at  a  fair  price. 

At  the  same  time,  I  would  here  enter  my  protest  against 
the  lightest,  and  "  withiest,"  Trout  fly-rods,  weighing  from 
six  to  seven  ounces,  being  used  or  recommended  for  Black 
Bass  fishing.  Such  rods  are  but  toys  at  the  best,  and  only 
admissible  for  fingerlings,  or  Trout  weighing  from  a  half- 
pound  downwards.  I  know  that  some  anglers  make  a 
boast  of  using  such  rods,  but  it  is  on  a  par  with  some 
gunners  who  rush  to  the  extreme  in  light  shot-guns,  and 
claim  that  a  sixteen  or  twenty-bore  is  capable  of  as  good 
general  execution  as  the  larger  gauges.  Now  these  are 
both  palpable  fallacies,  as  great  as  that  of  "  sending  a  boy 
to  mill "  in  the  "  History  of  the  Four  Kings,"  as  many 
have  found  to  their  cost. 

I  am  a  great  stickler  for  extreme  lightness  in  rods  when 
compatible  with  strength  and  action,  but  there  is  a  certain 
limit  in  weight  that  must  be  observed,  so  as  to  conform  to 
and  preserve  other  and  equally  essential  qualities  in  a  good 
working  rod.     Now,  while  I  will  guaranty,  in  open  water, 


230 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS, 


a 

hi 

I 

■d 

o 

w 

h 

N 

o 
o 


CO 
3 


FISHING-RODS.  231 

to  land  any  Black  Bass  that  swims  with  a  well-made  six 
ounce  split  bamboo  fly-rod,  I  will  not  undertake  to  say 
how  much  time  would  be  consumed  in  the  operation;  nor 
do  I  envy  the  general  demoralization  and  used-up  condi- 
tion of  the  flexors  and  extensors  of  my  arms  that  would 
ensue  at  the  close  of  the  contest.  With  a  rod  of  suitable 
weight,  the  largest  Bass  can  be  safely  and  pleasantly  han- 
dled, and  it  is  worse  than  useless  to  make  a  toil  of  a  pleas- 
ure by  using  inadequate  means. 

I  have  an  H.  L.  Leonard  split  bamboo  fly-rod,  weigh- 
ing eight  ounces,  which  I  find  "  fills  the  bill "  exactly  in 
all  ordinary  Black  Bass  fly-fishing;  but,  two  years  since, 
in  Florida,  I  used  a  twelve  feet,  twelve  ounce  ash  and 
lance  wood  fly-rod,  made  by  Abbey  &  Imbrie,  or  at  least 
by  their  predecessors,  Andrew  Clerk  &  Co.,  ten  years  ago, 
which  I  found  none  too  heavy  for  the  large  Bass  of  the 
waters  of  that  State,  and,  in  fact,  there  were  times  when 
I  wished  for  an  additional  ounce  or  two  in  weight. 

A  Trout  fly-rod,  then,  weighing  eight  or  nine  ounces, 
and  not  more  than  eleven  feet  long,  is  just  about  right  for 
ordinary  Black  Bass  fly-fishing ;  but  where  the  Bass  run 
large,  averaging  nearly  or  quite  three  pounds,  a  somewhat 
heavier  rod,  say  ten  ounces,  will  be  found  a  more  suitable 
and  pleasanter  rod  to  handle,  though  the  eight  ounce  rod 
will  do  even  here,  for  one  who  is  an  expert  fly-fisher,  and 
who  does  not  mind  a  little  extra  straining  of  the  brachial 
muscles. 

But  while  an  ounce,  more  or  less,  hardly  seems  an  ap- 
preciable quantity  in  the  abstract,  yet  when  added  to  or 
taken  from  a  fly-rod,  like  the  fraction  of  an  inch  as  applied 
to  a  man's  nose,  it  makes  a  very  great  difference  in  prac- 
tice and  reality  ;  and  in  the  former  case,  it  is  better  to  have 


232 


BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


Reel  Plate,  Ferrules,  and  Butt-Cap. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


0 


Rings,  Guides,  and  Tip. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


FISHING-RODS.  233 

an  ounce  too  much,  than  a  half  ounce  too  little ;  for, 
like  the  Winchester  repeating  rifle  when  tackling  a  grizzly, 
it  gives  one  a  confidence  in  his  resources  which  adds  ma- 
terially to  the  zest  of  his  sport. 

In  the  construction  of  a  Black  Bass  fly-rod  various  ma- 
terials are  employed ;  the  best  and  handsomest  is,  of  course, 
section  bamboo,  but  as  I  have  before  remarked,  it  is  im- 
perative to  take  the  greatest  care  of  such  rods  to  preserve 
their  usefulness.  By  rough  usage  or  careless  handling, 
the  lashings  are  apt  to  become  loosened,  the  varnish  worn 
off,  and  the  strips  to  become  eventually  separated;  in  which 
event  the  rod  is  worthless,  for  it  soon  goes  to  pieces. 
With  proper  care,  however,  and  a  due  attention  to  the 
lashings,  and  a  frequent  varnishing  of  the  rod,  it  will  last 
a  prudent  angler  his  life-time.  It  is  a  tool,  believe  me, 
only  to  be  used  by  an  artiste. 

But  for  every  day  fishing,  on  all  sorts  of  waters,  and 
under  all  circumstances,  in  the  hands  of  a  careful  angler 
or  a  rough-and-tumble  fisher,  a  good  wooden  rod  is  the 
best  for  service  and  wear,  day  in  and  day  out;  and,  if 
made  of  good  stuff,  its  action  is  not  excelled,  even  by  the 
graceful  section  bamboo. 

My  choice  of  materials  for  such  a  rod  is  ash  and  lance- 
wood,  which  can  not,  I  think,  be  excelled  for  a  prime  rod. 
But  others  may  think  differently,  and  prefer  greenheart, 
mahoe,  or  bethabara,  all  of  which  woods  are  said  to  pro- 
duce most  satisfactory  rods ;  and  far  be  it  from  me  to  dis- 
sent from,  or  acquiesce  in,  their  opinions,  without  a  prac- 
tical knowledge  of  the  working  of  such  rods,  for,  as  I 
have  before  remarked,  I  have  had  no  personal  experience 
with  these  woods. 

The  fly-rod  has  the  reel-seat  at  the  extreme  end  of  the 
20 


234  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

butt,  and  the  hand  piece,  or  grip,  of  course,  above  it ;  for 
the  click-reel,  which  is  used  for  fly-fishing,  is  a  reel  that  is 
intended  to  "take  care  of  itself"  in  the  rendering  of  the 
line,  and,  therefore,  is  very  properly  placed  where  it  is  out 
of  the  way,  and  where  it  adds  very  much  to  the  balance 
and  general  working  of  the  rod. 

The  reel-seat  in  fly-rods  is  often  made  entirely  of  metal 
and  called  a  "  reel-plate,"  and  which,  while  much  admired 
by  many,  only  adds  to  the  weight  of  the  rod,  without  be- 
ing of  material  service.  For  myself,  I  prefer  a  plain  reel- 
seat,  simply  a  depression,  or  groove,  cut  in  the  butt  of  the 
rod,  with  reel-bands,  as  in  the  minnow  rod.  This  answers 
every  purpose,  and  to  my  mind  there  is  nothing  that  can 
improve  the  beauty  of  a  handsomely  finished  wooden  butt; 
and  on  this  account,  I  am  also  prejudiced  against  the  hand- 
piece, or  grip,  being  wound  with  cord,  or  ratan.  The 
self-wood,  of  which  the  butt  is  composed,  seems  to  me  to 
be  the  best  and  most  appropriate  finish  for  the  grip,  both 
as  regards  utility  and  beauty ;  for  the  cord,  or  ratan,  with 
which  the  grip  is  usually  wound,  in  fine  rods,  is  extremely 
liable  to  become  loosened  and  worn  off. 

The  wound  hand-piece  and  the  metal  reel-plate  look 
very  attractive,  but  are  not  proof  against  wear  and  tear ; 
and  for  my  own  use,  and  in  accordance  with  my  idea  of 
the  fitness  of  things,  I  think  the  less  a  rod  is  encumbered 
with  fanciful  and  ornamental  appendages,  the  better.  We 
should  ever  bear  in  mind  the  original  primitive  cane  fish- 
ing-pole, upon  which  model  all  rods  are  founded,  more  or 
less,  and  remember  that  simplicity  and  utility  usually  go 
hand  in  hand. 

A  very  good  friend  of  mine,  with  whom  I  have  spent 
many  pleasant  angling  days,  once  owned  a  very  handsome 


FISHING-RODS.  235 

minnow  rod,  gotten  up  to  his  order  in  Boston,  which  was 
to  eclipse  all  other  rods  for  style  and  stunning  appearance. 
Each  piece,  from  butt  to  tip,  was  spirally  wound  with 
ratan  strips  and  silk,  while  the  ferrules,  reel-bands,  reel- 
plate,  and  guides  were  marvels  of  brightness  and  finish ; 
but  in  its  action,  the  rod,  of  course,  was  a  complete  failure. 

My  friend  always  carried  with  him  an  extra  rod,  to  be 
used  "  in  case  of  an  accident "  to  his  nobby  rod.  This 
extra  rod  was  a  short  and  common,  jointed,  natural  cane 
rod,  made  after  the  plan  of  the  "  Home-made  rod,"  described 
on  a  previous  page.  And  I  noticed  that  the  emergency 
for  using  the  common  rod,  always  arose  very  soon  after 
making  a  few  casts,  with  a  great  display  and  flourish  with 
the  fine  rod,  or  so  soon  as  we  were  out  of  sight  of  other 
anglers ;  for,  as  my  friend  often  remarked,  the  flashy  rod 
was  all  very  well  for  "  dress-parade,"  but  for  real  work  it 
"  wasn't  there; "  and  the  homely,  but  serviceable  cane-rod, 
or,  as  he  termed  it,  "old  business,"  was  invariably  substi- 
tuted. 

While  asking  the  reader's  pardon  for  this  digression, 
which,  however,  was  made  more  to  point  a  moral  than  to 
adorn  a  tale,  I  will  simply  add  that  a  fishing-rod  should 
be  made  for  "  business,"  and  not  for  display. 

A  Black  Bass  fly-rod  should  be  made  in  three  pieces; 
the  butt,  we  will  say,  of  ash,  and  the  second  piece  and  tip 
of  lancewood,  or  if  the  reader  please,  of  greenheart,  mahoe, 
or  bethabara.  The  ferrules,  reel-bands  and  butt-cap  are 
of  the  same  pattern  as  those  used  in  the  minnow-rod,  and 
should  be  either  solid  brass,  or  German  silver,  without 
plating  of  any  kind ;  let  us  have  the  real  thing  at  all 
events,  for  I  despise  affectation,  or  deception,  in  any  matter 
or  thing  whatever.     Brass   is  a  good,  honest,  and  bright 


236  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

metal ;  will  not  rust  or  tarnish,  and  if  it  is  used  at  all,  let 
us  use  it  on  its. merits;  and  for  decency's  sake,  avoid  the 
common  practice  of  plating  it  with  nickel,  or,  what  is 
.worse,  silver — for  the  plating  soon  wears  off  and  exposes 
the  cheat. 

Rings,  instead  of  standing  guides,  are  used,  as  they  are 
lighter,  and  on  the  fly-rod  answer  just  as  well;  they  are 
lashed  on  with  spool-silk  by  means  of  small  metal  strips, 
known  as  "  keepers."  The  rings  should  graduate  in  size 
from  the  butt  to  the  tip,  and  should  be  of  the  same  metal 
as  the  ferrules.  The  metal  tip  of  the  fly-rod  is  a  single 
ring,  which  is  preferable  to  a  solid  tip,  or  the  three-ring 
style,  on  account  of  its  extreme  lightness,  for  it  will  be 
remembered  that  the  tip,  or  top,  of  a  fly-rod  is  of  very 
small  caliber. 


CHAPTER  X. 

FISHING-REELS. 

And  to  that  end,  some  use  a  wheel  about  the  middle  of  the  rod,  or  near 
their  hand  ;  which  is  to  be  observed  better  by  seeing  one  of  them,  than  by  a 
large  demonstration  of  words."— Izaak  Walton. 

A  fishing-reel  is  made  in  accordance  with  the  special 
service  required  of  it,  the  objects  of  said  service  being 
twofold.  The  first  and  most  important  is  the  proper 
delivery  of  the  bait  in  a  manner  and  at  a  distance  com- 
mensurate with  the  mode  of  fishing ;  and  the  second  is  to 
play  and  land  the  fish  after  he  is  hooked,  or  to  reel  the 
line  for  another  cast.  The  reel  which  practically  fulfills 
these  conditions  with  the  greatest  ease  and  facility — in  the 
method  of  fishing  practiced — is  the  best  reel  to  use. 

The  two  modes  of  angling  in  which  the  reel  is  em- 
ployed are  bait-fishing  and  fly-fishing,  and  as  the  two 
methods  diifer  so  essentially,  they  require  reels  of  widely 
different  functions.  Thus  in  bait-fishing  the  multiplying 
reel  is  used,  while  in  fly-fishing  the  click-reel  is  indis- 
pensable. 

The  multiplying  reel  must  be  very  rapid  in  its  action  so 
as  to  deliver  the  bait  as  far  as  possible  at  a  single  cast,  the 
thumb,  meanwhile,  controlling  the  rapid  rendering  of  the 
line,  so  as  to  prevent  back-lashing  of  the  spool ;  but  in 
fly-fishing   the  line  is    lengthened   gradually,   a  few  feet 

(237) 


238  BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

being  taken  from  the  reel  by  the  hand  before  each  subse- 
quent cast,  while  the  click  offers  the  necessary  resistance 
to  the  rendering  of  the  line  to  permit  this  to  be  done 
without  overrunning. 

As  the  multiplying  reel  is  made  wide,  so  as  to  allow  for 
the  thumbing  of  the  spool,  and  as  this  necessity  is  not 
required  in  the  click-reel,  the  latter  is  made  quite  narrow, 
thus  permitting  the  line  to  be  reeled  without  bunching, 
and,  at  the  same  time,  allow  of  its  being  reeled  rapidly 
enough  for  all  practical  purposes,  without  a  multiplying 
action;  for  the  main  object  of  a  multiplying-reel,  is  for 
rapidity  of  action  in  casting,  and  not  in  retrieving  the  line, 
as  is  often  erroneously  supposed. 

After  a  fish  is  hooked,  a  click-reel  answers  the  purpose 
of  playing,  and  landing  it,  as  well  as  the  best  triple  or 
quadruple  multiplier  made — if  not  better;  for  often  a  fish 
is  reeled  in  by  main  strength  with  a  rapid  multiplier,  and 
an  attempt  made  to  land  it  before  it  has  been  killed  on 
the  rod,  thus  curtailing  the  real  sport  of  angling,  and  at  a 
great  risk  to  the  angler's  tackle.  I  speak  of  this  now,  for 
I  have  heard  anglers  praising  a  rapid-working  quadruple 
multiplying-reel,  because  they  could  reel  in  a  fish  "so 
fast,"  basing  all  of  its  merits  upon  this  one  quality;  the 
desire  to  get  possession  of  the  fish  seeming  to  be  paramount 
to  the  real  sport  of  hooking  and  playing  it. 

The  Click-Reel. 

The  click-reel  is  a  single-action  reel,  and,  consequently, 
is  the  simplest  form  of  reel,  from  the  fact  that  the  service 
required  of  it  is  simply  a  slow  and  gradual  lengthening  of 
the  line  with  each  subsequent  cast ;  the  delivery  of  the  fly 


FISHING-REELS.  239 

being  accomplished  by  pulling  off  from  the  reel  a  few 
additional  feet  of  the  line  after  each  cast,  until  the  desired 
or  maximum  distance  is  reached,  while -the  click  offers  just 
enough  resistance  to  the  rendering  of  the  line  to  allow  this 
to  be  done  without  confusion  or  overrunning.  The  han- 
dle, or  crank,  is  connected  directly  with  the  axle,  or  shaft, 
and,  consequently,  "reeling  in"  the  line  would  be  slow 
work  were  it  not  obviated  by  the  reel  being  made  very 
narrow,  so  that  the  coil  of  line  upon  the  shaft  enlarges 
rapidly,  and  the  reeling  is  thus  accomplished  with  greater 
facility. 

The  click-reel  is  placed  at  the  extreme  butt  of  the  fly- 
rod,  below  the  hand-grip,  where  it  adds  much  to  the 
balance  and  general  working  of  the  rod.  As  the  click 
regulates  the  rendering  of  the  line,  and  as  the  narrowness 
of  the  reel  obviates  the  necessity  for  guiding  the  line  in 
reeling,  it  is  placed  out  of  the  way,  at  the  extreme  butt, 
and  "  where  it  will  do  the  most  good."  A  reel  should 
always  be  placed  underneath  the  rod,  and  not  on  top,  as 
is  often  done. 

Click-reels  are  all  constructed  upon  the  same  general 
principle,  but  are  of  various  patterns  and  composed  of 
various  materials,  being  made  of  hard  rubber,  celluloid, 
brass,  bronze,  and  German  silver;  their  weight  depends  on 
the  material  used,  and  the  angler  has  a  large  assortment 
of  styles  and  prices  to  select  from.  Any  good  Trout  click- 
reel  is  suitable  for  Black  Bass  fly-fishing,  and  can  be 
furnished  by  any  of  the  first-class  dealers. 

In  the  choice  of  a  click-reel,  the  angler  should  select 
the  lightest,  when  it  is  compatible  with  strength,  and  one 
in  which  there  is  the  least  probability  of  fouling  the  line 
on  any  prominent  points,  as   projecting   screws  and  caps, 


240 


BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


German  Silver  Click-Reel. 
(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


FISHING-REELS.  241 

unprotected  handles,  etc.  Metal  reels  are  the  strongest, 
and  not  so  liable  to  injury  as  rubber  or  celluloid,  in  case 
of  accidentally  dropping,  or  striking  them  against  rocks, 
etc.;  though  the  latter  are  much  lighter,  and  with  ordinary 
care  are  just  as  serviceable.  . 

There  #has  been  a  very  marked  improvement  in  click- 
reels  during  the  past  few  years,  the  manufacturers  seeming 
to  vie  with  each  other  to  produce  the  lightest,  neatest, 
comeliest,  and  most  serviceable  reel. 

Abbey  &  Imbrie  make  a  superb  reel,  the  "Abbey," 
composed  of  hard  rubber,  with  German  silver  spool,  rim 
and  fittings ;  it  is  extremely  light  and  has  a  protected 
handle  to  prevent  fouling  of  the  line  in  casting,  and  is 
first-class  in  every  respect.  Nos.  3  and  4,  the  latter  being 
the  smaller,  are  the  proper  sizes.  The  H  Imbrie "  reel, 
also  made  by  this  firm,  although  a  multiplier — and  a 
most  excellent  one,  by  the  way — has  an  adjustable  click 
which  allows  of  its  being  used  also  for  fly-fishing^  And 
the  angler  who  is  the  fortunate  possessor  of  one  of  these 
reels,  Nos.  4  or  5,  can  use  it  in  Black  Bass  fishing  for 
either  his  minnow-rod  or  fly-rod. 

Mr.  C.  F.  Orvis,  of  Manchester,  Vermont,  has  patented, 
and  manufactures,  a  simple,  durable,  and  inexpensive 
click-reel.  It  is  very  narrow,  consequently  takes  up  line 
quite  rapidly,  while  the  frame  and  disks  of  the  spool  are 
freely  perforated,  which  renders  it  quite  light,  and  assists 
very  much  in  drying  the  line,  and  in  keeping  it  free  from 
sand  and  grit.  Its  low  price,  brings  a  good  reel  within 
the  reach  of  the  most  impecunious  angler. 

Wm.  Mills  &  Son's  (7  Warren  Street,  New  York)  reels 

are  unexcelled,  either  brass, German  silver  or  rubber;  they 

are  fitted  with  protecting  bands  to  prevent  the  line  from 
21 


242 


BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


German  Silver  Click-Reel.— 40  yards. 
(Wm.  Mills  &  Son.) 


Pat.  June  12, 1877. 

The  Leonard  Click-Reel. 
(Wm.  Mills  &  Son.) 


4^ 

The  Orvis  Click-Reel. 
(Charles  F.  Orvis.) 


FISHING-REELS.  243 

catching  on  the  handle.  Their  thirty  or  forty  yards  reels 
are  the  correct  sizes  for  Black  Bass  fly-fishing. 

The  "  Leonard  reel,"  sold  by  this  firm,  is  probably  the 
lightest  metal  click-reel  manufactured,  and  holds  a  great 
deal  of  line  for  its  size,  being  of  good  width.  It  also  has 
a  flush  handle  to  prevent  fouling  of  the  line ;  two  and  a 
half  inch  diameter  is  the  preferred  size  for  Black  Bass 
angling. 

Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson,  of  New  York,  A.  B.  Ship- 
ley &  Son,  of  Philadelphia,  and  Bradford  &  Anthony,  of 
Boston,  also  furnish  the  best  reels  and  other  tackle  for 
fly-fishing.  I  think  it  but  simple  justice  that  all  of  these 
houses,  who  are  by  an  honorable  competition  doing  so  much 
for  the  angler  in  the  way  of  producing  the  most  elegant 
and  suitable  tackle,  should  be  brought  to  the  notice  of  the 
angling  fraternity. 

On  this  point  a  veteran  angler,  the  editor  of  the  Rich- 
mond (Va.)  Whig,  becoming  "  impressed  with  the  vast 
amount  of  industry,  skill,  talent,  enterprise  and  genius, 
and  philanthropy  (emphatically)  devoted  to  this  task  of 
supplying  the  needs  and  luxuries,  and  augmenting  the 
pleasures  of  the  sporting  community,"  further  says: 
"  We  say  philanthropy,  with  emphasis — for  those  who  thus 
toil  for  the  enjoyment  and  happiness  of  their  fellow-beings 
can  not  be  enemies  of  their  kind.  But  admit  that  self 
enters  as  an  element  of  the  motive,  in  an  enlarged  sense, 
it  may  be  truly  affirmed  that  self,  if  not  a  virtue  in  itself, 
is  next  kin  to  it,  and  is  the  basis  and  prompter  of  all  the 
virtues." 

Multiplying  Reels. 
The  multiplying  reel  is  a  decided  improvement  on  the 


244  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

old  single-action  English  reel  or  winch.  It  is  made  of 
metal  or  hard  rubber,  and  of  various  styles  or  sizes,  from 
a  Striped  Bass-reel  to  a  Perch-reel.  In  shape  and  con- 
struction it  differs  necessarily  from  the  click-reel,  having  a 
different  office  to  perform,  or  rather  the  same  object — the 
delivery  of  the  bait — to  perform  in  a  different  manner. 
Being  intended  for  natural  bait-fishing,  it  requires  an  easy- 
running  and  freely-rendering  action  in  order  to  deliver  the 
bait  as  far  as  possible  at  a  single  cast.  As  there  is  no 
click  to  control  the  running  off  of  the  line,  the  thumb 
must  be  used  for  this  purpose,  by  effecting  a  gentle  and 
uniform  pressure  upon  the  spool,  and  for  this  reason  the 
multiplier  is  made  much  wider  than  the  click-reel,  or  of 
the  barrel  or  drum  shape. 

In  its  construction,  a  small  cog  or  spur  wheel  is  placed 
at  one  extremity  of  the  axis  or  shaft,  into  which  a  larger 
cog-wheel  is  fitted,  and  to  the  latter  is  attached  the  handle 
or  crank.  One  revolution  of  the  handle  produces  two  or 
more  revolutions  of  the  central  shaft.  The  reel  most  gen- 
erally known  and  used  is  the  "New  York  Multiplier," 
which  is  manufactured  for  the  trade  in  large  quantities, 
with  the  retailer's  name  stamped  on  one  end.  It  is  called, 
by  some,  the  "  balance  reel,"  from  the  fact,  I  presume,  that 
it  has  a  balanced  handle,  which,  by  some,  is  thought  to  add 
to  the  rapid  working  of  the  reel ;  but  this  fancied  advan- 
tage exists  in  the  imagination  only — a  simple  crank  handle 
is  better. 

As  with  the  click-reel,  there  has  been  great  improve- 
ments made  in  the  multiplying  reel  within  a  few  years 
past.  Most  of  the  manufacturers  have  given  special 
attention  to  reels  of  this  character,  more  especially  for 
Black  Bass  fishing,  and  the  result  has  been  most  grati- 


FISHING-REELS.  245 

fying  to  the  angling  fraternity.  It  is  now  an  easy  matter 
to  procure  a  first-class  reel  at  a  moderate  price,  consider- 
ing the  admirable  manner  in  which  they  are  gotten  up; 
for,  by  comparison  with  the  click-reel,  the  former  is  about 
double  in  price,  and  this  is  necessarily  so,  on  account  of 
the  great  difference  in  construction  of  the  two  reels. 

Among  the  many  excellent  multiplying  reels  now  manu- 
factured, the  "Frankfort  Reel"  still  takes  the  lead,  and 
is  the  reel  par  excellence  for  Black  Bass  angling.  It  is 
known  among  expert  anglers,  in  various  portions  of  the 
country,  as  the  "  Meek,"  "  Meek  &  Milam/'  "  Frankfort," 
and  "  Kentucky"  reel.  It  is  now  made  exclusively  by 
B.  C.  Milam,  of  Frankfort,  Kentucky;  and,  as  it  is  not 
so  universally  known  as  its  merits  deserve,  I  will  give  a 
brief  history  of  it : 

Some  thirty  years  ago,  there  being  a  demand  among  the 
anglers  of  Kentucky  and  Ohio  for  a  better  reel  than  was 
furnished  by  the  trade,  Mr.  Meek,  a  watchmaker,  of 
Frankfort,  Kentucky — to  whom  Mr.  Milam  was  then  an 
apprentice — determined  to  produce  a  reel  which  would 
meet  the  requirements  and  solicitations  of  his  fishing 
friends;  so,  after  considerable  study  and  many  experi- 
ments, the  "Frankfort  Reel"  was  produced,  as  perfect 
then  as  it  is  to-day.  Mr.  Milam  was  soon  afterward  taken 
into  partnership  by  Mr.  Meek,  and  the  firm  of  Meek  & 
Milam  soon  became  famous  throughout  the  West  for  their 
excellent  reel.  The  demand  continued  to  increase,  until 
they  found  a  ready  sale  for  all  they  could  manufacture. 

The  reel  is  made  by  hand,  from  the  finest  materials,  and 
as  carefully  and  correctly  in  its  fittings  as  the  movement 
of  a  watch.  The  bearings  and  pivots  are  of  the  finest 
temper,  and  the  entire  reel  is  as  perfect  in  workmanship, 


246 


BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 


The  Frankfort  Reel.— No.  3. 
(B.  C.  Milam,  Frankfort,  Ky.) 


The  "Imbrie"  Black  Bass  Reel— No.  3. 
(Abbey  &  Imbrie.) 


FISHING-REELS.  247 

and  as  finely  adjusted,  as  is  possible  for  skill  to  render  it. 
Contrary  to  a  current  opinion,  this  reel  is  not  more  com- 
plicated than  the  ordinary  multiplying  reel,  and  contains 
but  the  same  number  of  wheels,  viz:  two;  but,  by  a  pe- 
culiar construction  of  the  two  wheels,  it  multiplies  four 
times,  while  the  ordinary  reel  multiplies  but  twice.  It 
runs  so  perfectly  and  smoothly  that  a  smart  stroke  of  the 
finger  upon  the  handle  will  cause  it  to  make  about  fifty 
revolutions,  and  this  without  a  balance  handle. 

It  is  made  with  or  without  an  alarm  or  click,  and  a  drag 
or  rubber;  and,  where  one  or  both  of  these  adjuncts  are 
used,  it  does  not  at  all  complicate  the  working  of  the  reel, 
as  they  are  operated  by  small  sliding  disks  on  the  side  of 
the  reel,  and  are  hot  in  the  wTay  in  the  least.  The  reel  is, 
in  fact,  so  simple  and  perfect  in  its  details,  that  it  has  not 
been  improved  upon  since  it  was  first  invented.  They  are 
made  of  German  silver  or  brass,  in  six  sizes,  No.  6  being 
the  largest.  The  best  sizes  for  Black  Bass  fishing  are 
Nos.  2  and  3. 

The  cost  of  this  reel  is  necessarily  high — in  comparison 
with  ordinary  reels — from  its  mode  of  construction  and 
materials  employed,  but  it  wTill  last  a  life-time  with  ordi- 
nary care.  There  are  reels  that  have  been  in  use  for  thirty 
years — among  the  first  ones  made — which  are  as  good  as 
new  to-day.  I  can  not  express  my  admiration  for  this 
reel  more  strongly,  or  truly,  than  by  affirming  that  its 
invention  has  been  as  great  a  boon  to  the  angler  as  the 
split  bamboo  rod ;  in.  fact,  they  are  "  boon  "  companions. 

It  is  as  great  an  improvement  on  all  other  multiplying 
reels,  as  they  are  on  the  old  single-action  English  winch. 
With  it,  an  angler  can  cast  a  minnow  from  thirty  to  forty 
yards  with  the  greatest  ease,  though  it  is  necessary  that  he 


248 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


The  "  Conroy  "  Multiplying  Reel.— No.  3%. 

(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


The  " Conroy "  Black  Bass  Reel— No.  3%. 

Combined  Multiplying  and  Click-Reel. 

(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


FISHING-REELS.  249 

should  be  quite  dextrous  in  the  art  of  using  a  multiplier, 
and  an  fait  in  the  matter  of  controlling  the  rendering  of 
the  line  with  the  thumb,  otherwise  the  extreme  rapidity 
of  this  reel's  action  will  get  him  into  trouble  by  its  over- 
running or  back-lashing,  and  the  consequent  tangling  of 
the  line  upon  the  spool. 

But,  in  justice  to  the  reel,  I  will  say  to  those  who  can 
not  cast  without  tangling  or  snarling  the  line,  or  who  can 
not  reel  the  line  evenly  upon  the  spool,  that  they  must 
look  for  the  fault  in  themselves,  and  not  in  the  reel.  Me 
judice,  I  consider  it  the  best  reel  in  the  world.  The 
"  alarm  "  is  intended  for  an  alarm  only,  and  should  not  be 
used  as  a  click  to  retard  the  rapidity  of  the  reel's  action, 
for  this  it  can  do  to  a  very  limited  extent  only,  and  that  to 
the  eventual  detriment  of  the  reel. 

As  these  reels  are  mostly  made  to  order,  I  would  advise 
the  angler  who  designs  procuring  one  to  order  it  made 
with  the  spring  of  the  alarm  stiff  enough  to  act  as  a 
"click,"  in  which  case  the  reel  will  answer  for  either  bait 
or  fly-fishing  ;  and,  in  my  opinion,  they  should  all  be  made 
so,  considering  their  high  price.  The  "  alarm  "  originated 
in  the  days  of  heavy  rods  and  lazy  anglers,  when,  by  stick- 
ing the  butt  of  the  rod  in  the  bank  (there  often  being  a 
spike  in  it  for  this  purpose),  the  angler  could  lie  under  the 
shade  of  a  tree  until  the  singing  of  the  alarm  gave  notice  of 
the  biting  of  a  Bass.  It  has  outlived  its  usefulness,  and 
should  either  be  dispensed  with  entirely,  or  changed  to  a 
click.  I  would  further  advise  the  placing  of  the  handle 
of  the  reel  next  to  the  reel-plate,  instead  of  opposite  to 
it  (as  Mr.  Milam  usually  affixes  it),  for  obvious  reasons. 

Abbey  &  Imbrie  make  a  remarkably  fine  reel  especially 
for  Black  Bass  angling,  and  which  they  style  the  "Imbrie" 


250  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

reel.  It  is  constructed  with  a  hard  rubber  frame,  German- 
silver  spool  and  fittings,  steel  pivot  and  cap,  center  action, 
and  with  an  adjustable  click.  It  is  very  light  and  of  a 
graceful  and  practicable  shape,  and  multiplies  three  times. 
By  using  the  click  it  answers  well  for  fly-fishing. 

It  is  a  very  easy-running  and  rapid-working  reel,  being 
second,  only,  in  this  respect  to  the  famous  Frankfort  reel, 
though  unlike  the  latter,  is  not  so  likely  to  overrun,  and, 
on  this  account,  is  to  be  preferred  by  many  anglers,  who 
find  it  difficult  to  control,  with  the  thumb,  the  very  free 
action  of  that  reel.  Besides  it  is  furnished  at  about  half 
the  price  of  the  Frankfort  reel,  and  is,  withal,  lighter. 
Nos.  3  and  4  are  the  best  sizes  for  the  Black  Bass  angler. 

No  Reel. 

Those  who,  from  any  cause,  can  not  manage  a  multiply- 
ing reel,  might  adopt  the  "  Nottingham  "  style  of  angling, 
which  is  much  in  vogue  in  England,  in  which  the  reel  is 
dispensed  with.  The  line  is  made  fast  to  the  butt  of  the 
rod,  and  carried  through  the  guides  or  rings.  "When  ready 
for  a  cast,  the  line  is  prulled  back  through  the  guides,  and 
laid  in  coils  at  the  feet  of  the  angler,  leaving  twelve  or 
fifteen  feet  of  line  hanging  from  the  tip  of  the  rod.  Our 
angler  then  grasps  the  line  a  few  feet  from  the  sinker  and 
bait,  gives  it  a  few  rapid  whirls  around  his  head,  and  casts 
it  as  far  as  he  can,  the  rod  in  the  meantime  being  held 
firmly  in  the  left  hand,  and  pointing  toward  the  water. 
Long  casts  can  be  made  in  this  manner,  and  the  line  re- 
trieved more  rapidly  than  by  the  aid  of  any  reel,  but  to 
the  expert  reel  angler  the  game  would  not  be  worth  the 
candle. 


FISHING-REELS.  251 

Position  of  the  Reel  on  the  Rod. 

In  order  to  allow  the  thumb  to  be  used  in  controlling 
the  cast,  a  multiplying  reel  should  never  be  placed  less 
than  six  inches  from  the  extreme  butt  of  the  rod,  and 
should  be  so  placed  as  to  be  underneath  when  reeling  up 
the  line.  I  am  aware  that  some  prefer  it  on  top,  but  the 
former  mode  is  preferable  for  the  following  reasons :  The 
weight  of  the  reel  naturally  takes  it  under  the  rod,  enabling 
the  rod  to  be  held  steadier  when  reeling  the  line,  or  play- 
ing the  fish  ;  the  strain  of  the  line  falls  upon  the  guides, 
causing  a  uniform  working  of  the  rod ;  the  line  is  more 
easily  reeled  up,  and  it  was  intended  to  be  used  in  this 
manner. 

The  left  hand  should  grasp  the  rod  immediately  over  the 
reel,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  embracing  the  rod  above 
the  reel  and  as  close  to  it  as  possible,  the  ring  and  little 
fingers  clasping  the  under  surface  of  the  reel,  while  the 
middle  finger  is  left  free  to  guide  the  line  on  the  spool,  and 
prevent  bunching.  I  have  noticed  that  all  anglers  who 
prefer  to  have  the  butt  of  the  rod  extending  a  foot  or  more 
below  the  reel,  always  use  the  reel  on  top,  and  when  reel- 
ing in  a  fish,  they  invariably  rest  the  butt  against  the 
stomach. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

FISHING-LINES. 


"  I  will  lose  no  time,  tout  give  you  a  little  direction  how  to  make  and  order 
your  lines,  and  to  color  the  hair  of  which  you  make  your  lines,  for  that  is 
very  needful  to  be  known  of  an  angler."— Iz a ak  Walton. 


No  doubt  but  many  of  my  readers  have  often  wondered, 
as  I  have  done,  where  all  the  fine  fishing-lines  were  made. 
Inquiries  of  the  dealers  failed  to  elicit  any  definite  in- 
formation, only  such  answers  being  obtained,  as  "We  make 
them  ourselves,"  or, "  They  are  manufactured  expressly  for 
us,"  or,  "They  are  imported  for  our  trade." 

There  has  ever  seemed  to  be  some  mystery  connected 
with  it,  though  why,  I  can  not  imagine.  The  real  manu- 
facturers are  certainly  not  generally  known  outside  of 
the  trade,  and  their  goods  are  seldom  marked  with  their 
own  names.  I  do  not  remember  ever  to  have  seen  an  ad- 
vertisement of  a  fish-line  manufacturer.  Perhaps  it  is  not 
necessary,  as  the  angler  is  supplied  through  the  dealer,  and 
the  wholesale  dealers  are  comparatively  few. 

Thinking  that  an  account  of  one  of  the  best  manufac- 
tories of  fishing-lines  in  this  country,  if  not  in  the  world, 
would  not  prove  uninteresting,  I  reproduce  the  following 
description  of  the  factory  of  Henry  Hall  &  Sons,  at  High- 
land Mills,  Orange  County,  New  York,  from  the  New 
York  Times  of  June  6,  1880  :— 
(252) 


FISHING-LINES.  253 


How  Fish-Lines  are  Made. 

American  fish-lines  are  the  best  in  the  world,  because  we  use  the 
most  perfect  machinery  and  materials  in  their  manufacture.  There 
are  in  this  country  five  or  six  large  establishments  devoted  exclu- 
sively to  this  production.  They  represent  a  capital  of  about  $250,000, 
and  produce  about  $100,000  worth  of  lines  per  year.  The  fish-line 
is  an  object  of  contempt  to  a  certain  class  of  closet  philosophers,  but 
its  production  at  least  employs  money  and  brains  with  the  same 
earnestness  that  marks  our  manufacture  of  more  weighty  objects. 
The  largest  fish-line  factory  in  the  world  is  the  Highland  Mills, 
Orange  County,  in  this  State,  and  if  our  anglers  were  only  capable  of 
boasting  a  little  they  might  brag  of  our  beating  the  world  in  the  quality 
as  well  as  in  the  quantity  of  our  lines.  In  visiting  this  establishment 
I  learned  many  interesting  facts  about  the  materials  and  the  processes 
of  making  fish-lines.  We  all  feel  a  certain  awe  and  curiosity  about 
the  slender,  tapered  line  that  flies  through  the  air  so  gracefully,  yet 
has  the  amazing  strength  to  hold  a  Salmon,  a  Trout,  or  a  Bass  in  his 
most  frantic  efforts  to  escape.  And  the  feeling  is  well  justified,  for 
not  only  is  a  fine  line  a  proper  object  for  respect  and  interest,  but 
many  of  the  processes  of  its  creation  are  secrets  veiled  from  the  eye 
of  even  the  elect.  Lines  are  made  of  three  substances,  either  cotton, 
linen,  or  silk,  and  they  are  either  twisted  or  braided.  The  twisted 
lines  may  be  made  by  hand,  but  braided  lines  are  always  made  by 
machines  devised  especially  for  the  purpose.  For  fine  lines,  only  the 
finest,  strongest,  and  longest  fibers  can  be  used.  The  selection  of  the 
material  is,  therefore,  made  with  great  care.  It  is  spun  to  order  in 
sizes  to  suit  different  kinds  of  lines.  The  bleaching  of  the  yarn  has 
to  be  very  carefully  done  to  prevent  any  loss  of  strength  by  chemical 
action  on  the  fiber,  and  only  vegetable  dyes  are  used  in  coloring. 

In  the  storeroom  are  piles  of  flax  in  skeins,  which  has  been  spun 
to  order  in  Ireland,  France,  Belgium,  and  Germany.  A  variety  of 
flax  is  needed,  because  that  of  one  country  is  most  desirable  for  its 
durability  and  that  of  another  for  its  strength,  so  that  the  union  of 
several  kinds  of  thread  in  a  line  gives  it  greater  general  excellence. 
The  exact  size  must  be  maintained  throughout  the  thread.  And  the 
exact  amount  of  twist,  varying  from  two  to  nine  turns  to  the  inch, 
must  be  given ;  for  if  the  threads  be  either  too  loosely  or  too  tightly 


254  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

twisted  the  strength  of  the  line  is  impaired.  The  cotton  is  spun  ex- 
pressly from  selected  stock  in  this  country,  and  the  silk,  also,  is  spun 
here.  The  best  silk  isTsatlee  machine  twist;  the  genuineness  of  the 
stock  can  not  be  doubted,  if  judged  by  the  foreign  character  of  its 
tickets : 

"  Hung  yu  Silk  Hong.  Yuekee  chop.  By  selecting  No.  1,  Fine  re-reeled 
Tsatlee  silk.  When  obliged  to  Merchants  best  owing  their  regards,  please  to 
notice  carefully  of  our  sign,  are  without  mistaken.  This  chop  is  myself  reeled 
true  Tsatlee  Thown  Silks." 

More  can  not  be  asked.  This  silk  is  spun  at  silk  factories  and  de- 
livered on  bobbins.  The  fineness  of  some  of  it  may  bs  judged  by  the 
fact  that  3,200  yards  of  a  thread  weighs  only  one  ounce,  and  yet  the 
threads  run  sometimes  2,000  yards  without  a  break.  The  grass  lines, 
sold  under  the  names  of  Japanese  grass,  sea  grass,  and  catty  grass, 
are  all  male  of  raw  silk.  The  yarns  of  flax  are  wound  on  bob- 
bins, and  thos3  of  cotton  are  "beamed  "  or  wound  on  a  cylinder  in 
such  a  way  that  they  can  be  run  off  it  without  tangling. 

The  twisted  lines  are  made  in  a  "  walk,"  a  narrow  shed  about  400 
feet  long.  At  the  head  of  the  walk  are  two  machines,  driven  by  steam. 
They  consist  of  pulleys,  with  long  ropes  for  belts  running  off  to  the  foot 
of  the  shed ;  also  of  a  lot  of  spindles,  turning  very  rapidly,  and  lines 
running  overhead  along  the  walk  enable  men  at  any  point  to  move 
levers  or  stop  and  start  the  machinery  at  will.  Two  cars  run  on  tracks 
down  the  walk ;  they  carry  the  beams  or  cylinders  of  thread  or  the  bob- 
bins. The  operator  places  the  bobbins  on  pins  on  the  cars,  so  that  the 
threads  may  unwind  ;  the  car  is  brought  up  to  the  machine ;  he 
gathers  up  the  threads  in  groups  of  three,  and  ties  each  group  to  a 
spindle  in  the  machine.  When  all  the  24  spindles  are  furnished 
with  threads,  he  starts  the  machine,  the  spindles  turn  and  twist  each 
group  of  three  threads  into  a  strand  ;  at  the  same  time  the  car  moves 
slowly  along  to  unwind  the  threads  from  the  bobbins  as  fast  as  the 
twist  takes  them  up.  The  operator  walks  behind  or  beside  the  car 
to  watch  the  yarns,  remove  lumps,  and  impurities  from  them,  or  to 
break  off  defective  portions  of  a  thread.  The  car  at  intervals  passes 
under  a  frame  hanging  over  the  track  ;  this  frame  is  provided  with 
wire  hoops  or  fingers  that  descend  automatically  and  hook  under  the 
strands  after  the  car  has  passed,  to  sustain  them,  so  that  the  weight 
of  the  long  strings  may  not  interfere  with  their  twisting  evenly  in 


FISHING-LINES.  255 

all  parts.  By  the  time  the  car  has  reached  the  foot  of  the  walk  each 
of  the  24  strands  has  received  the  proper  twist,  so  many  turns  to 
the  inch.  The  strands  are  then  gathered  up  in  groups  of  three  and 
tied  to  spindles  on  a  tender  or  second  car  at  the  foot  of  the  walk. 
This  tender  is  operated  by  rope-belts  from  the  machine  at  the  head 
of  the  walk.  When  the  strands  are  secured  to  the  eight  spindles  of 
the  tender  the  car  starts  back  to  the  head  of  the  walk,  leaving  the 
tender  to  twist  the  strands  into  cords.  It  follows  them  up,  very 
slowly,  to  allow  the  cords  to  contract  in  length  as  they  are  twisted. 

If  this  twisting  of  the  cord  as  a  whole  were  all  the  twist  given,  the 
cord  would  only  be  a  string,  the  strands  would  be  simply  collected 
in  a  round  form,  and  would  have  but  little  power  to  resist  an  un- 
twisting tendency  when  wet  or  cut  into  pieces.  But  after  a  strand 
is  formed,  if  some  additional  twist  be  given  it,  the  fibers  are  bent  and 
stretched  until  they  acquire  a  strong  reactionary  force.  They  seek 
continually  to  straighten  and  contract  themselves,  and  if  the  ends  of 
the  strand  be  kept  from  untwisting  while  it  is  given  some  slack, 
the  strand  will  double  up  on  itself,  and  then  twist  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection from  that  of  the  first  twist.  In  the  cords  thus  formed  the 
strands  have  lost  as  much  of  their  twist  as  was  required  to  form  the 
cord;  hence,  they  have  lost  the  most  of  their  reactionary,  spiral 
tendency.  But  if  the  strands  be  given  some  additional  twist  to  com- 
pensate for  this  loss,  while  the  whole  line  is  given  its  twist,  the  re- 
actionary force  of  each  strand  will  make  it  intertwine  closely  with 
the  others,  and  hold  them  together  in  a  compact,  permanent  twist. 

A  fish-line  diners  from  a  string  in  having  just  this  additional  twist 
of  the  strands.  For  this  object,  the  machine  at  the  head  of  the  walk 
continues  to  twist  the  strands,  while  the  tender  twists  the  line.  The 
line  is  given  a  little  superfluous  twist  merely  for  the  sake  of  forcing 
the  strands  to  assume  a  smooth,  compact  service  ;  some  of  this  super- 
fluous twist  comes  out  when  the  line  is  wet,  but  the  line  can  not  be 
opened  or  untwisted  without  removing  and  untwisting  each  strand. 
It  is  readily  seen  that  the  amount  of  twist  has  a  great  effect  on  the 
strength  of  a  line,  for  too  little  twist  fails  to  bind  the  fibers  together, 
and  too  much  subjects  them  to  uneven  and  destructive  strain. 
Hence,  machinery,  by  securing  the  utmost  accuracy,  makes  the  most 
perfect  lines  in  this  respect.  And  it  also  makes  them  rapidly  and 
cheaply.     If  the  threads  were  perfectly  even  and  clean  the  lines 


256  BOOK   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

would  be  perfect.  But  impurities  and  irregularities  are  unavoidable 
in  even  the  best  yarns,  and  the  operator  can  not  always  see  these  nor 
take  the  time  to  remove  all  he  perceives.  Formerly,  lines  of  600 
feet  were  twisted  all  in  one  piece,  but  in  so  long  a  line  the  amount  of 
twist  was  necessarily  uneven  in  different  parts.  Hence,  it  is  now 
considered  a  better  method  to  make  long  lines  by  joining  300-feet 
lengths  by  what  is  known  among  sailors  as  the  "  long  splice." 

Hand-made  lines  are  still  more  perfect  than  those  twisted  by  any 
machine.  The  machine,  of  course,  secures  the  utmost  accuracy  in 
the  twist ;  but  the  hand,  through  the  delicate  sense  of  the  touch,  de- 
tects imperfections  in  the  thread  that  are  invisible  to  the  operator 
of  the  machine.  The  man  who  makes  the  Cuttyhunk  and  other 
hand-made  lines  carries  nine  bobbins  of  silk  or  linen  on  a  frame 
hanging  in  front  of  him.  Having  fastened  the  threads  in  threes  to 
spindles  at  the  head  of  the  walk,  he  walks  slowly  backward  while  the 
threads  pass  between  his  fingers  and  are  twisted  into  a  strand.  He 
feels  every  thread  as  it  goes,  and  detects  with  surprising  certainty 
every  bunch,  knot,  or  weak  place  ;  he  picks  or  bites  off  the  bunches, 
or  stops  the  spindles  by  pulling  a  cord  at  his  side,  and  takes  out  any 
defective  part  of  the  thread,  and  joins  the  ends  again  by  twisting,  not 
by  tying  them.  When  the  three  strands  are  sufficiently  twisted,  he 
ties  them  together  to  a  little  swivel  on  a  string  drawing  a  drag-weight, 
to  allow  for  the  contraction  of  the  line.  He  passes  the  three  strands 
through  grooves  on  opposite  sides  of  a  cone  called  the  "  top,"  and 
as  he  walks  back  to  the  head  of  the  walk  and  moves  the  top  along 
the  strands,  the  grooves  allow  the  continued  twisting  of  the  strands 
to  pass  by  the  "  top  "  and  unite  them  at  its  apex,  while  the  swivel 
allows  the  line  to  be  twisted  up  by  the  strands.  Thus,  although  the 
twist  of  hand-made  lines  is  not  quite  so  uniform  as  that  of  machine- 
made  lines,  yet  the  former  are  the  better  in  having  more  perfect 
threads. 

The  braided  line  is  the  most  perfect  of  all.  No  inferior  threads  are 
used  in  its  manufacture,  and  the  machines  secure  a  very  uniform 
tension  of  the  strands.  The  cotton,  linen,  or  silk  threads  are  wound 
on  bobbins  that  are  mounted  on  a  small  table.  The  table  is  fur- 
nished with  serpentine  slots,  through  which  the  bobbins  travel,  and 
cross  one  another's  course  in  such  a  way  as  to  pass  now  outside,  now 
inside,  of  one  another,  and  thus  weave  or  braid  the  strands  in  a  reg- 


FISHING-LINES.  257 

ular  manner.  If  a  strand  break,  the  bobbins  all  stop,  and  delicate 
weights,  sustained  by  the  strands  as  they  are  braided,  give  them  a 
uniform  tension.  From  eight  to  sixteen  strands  are  put  in  a  line, 
each  strand  being  composed  of  three  threads.  As  the  line  is  formed 
it  is  reeled  up,  so  that  the  braiding  is  not  done  in  a  long  walk,  but 
in  a  room  filled  Avith  compact  machines  clicking  like  looms.  One 
girl  tends  several  lines,  picking  off  with  nippers  any  lint  or  bunch, 
and  removing  poor  strands.  It  is  real  satisfaction  to  an  angler  to 
see  such  beautiful  silks  going  into  a  line.  It  looks  like  braiding 
cobwebs;  but  these  fine  threads,  evenly  and  compactly  braided, 
make  a  fine  line  of  amazing  strength.  The  tapered  lines  are  all 
braided,  because  if  one  part  of  a  twisted  line  be  smaller  than  the  rest, 
that  part  yields  to  the  twisting  force  and  gets  too  much  twist.  The 
tapering  is  done  by  simply  dropping  out  a  strand  at  regular  intervals; 
but  the  machine  has  to  be  readjusted  each  time  to  secure  a  regular 
braid.  Fine  braided  lines  hitherto  have  often  been  weak,  from  de- 
fective manufacture ;  but  recent  improvements  in  the  Highland 
Mills  in  the  methods  of  working  up  the  fiber  have  produced  a  line 
of  wonderful  strength  for  its  size.  Thus,  I  found  that  although  one 
of  the  threads  of  a  line  would  lift  but  14  ounces,  yet  the  line  of  8 
threads,  braided  to  a  diameter  of  1-40  of  an  inch,  would  lift  9£  to  10 
pounds.  The  union  of  the  threads  in  a  twist  or  braid  seems  to  aug- 
ment their  strength  about  30  per  cent.  This  fine  line,  100  yards 
long,  weighs  but  150  grains ;  it  requires  934  yards  of  prepared  twist 
to  make  it,  and  as  each  thread  or  twist  contains  three  strands,  the 
lines  contains  2,802  yards  of  strands. 

The  celebrated  Cuttyhunk  line  is  made  of  four  different  kinds  of 
flax,  Irish,  French,  Belgian,  and  German,  spun  to  order  for  this  pur- 
pose. Line  No.  9,  having  12  threads  in  a  diameter  of  about  1-30  of 
an  inch,  lifts  25  pounds.  They  are  all  hand-made  twisted  lines,  so 
are  the  various  grass  lines  and  the  relaid  grass  lines. 

The  finishing  of  lines  is  generally  done  by  some  secret  process  that 
each  house  wishes  to  monopolize.  The  fine  lines  are  soaked  in  vari- 
ous compounds  of  oils  and  gums  to  fill  them  with  a  preservative 
water-proof  substance.  The  well-known  enamel  finish  gives  the  line  a 
glossy  surface  that  excludes  the  water  and  keeps  the  line  of  a  uniform 
weight  and  stiffness  in  casting,  and  also  makes  it  run  very  smoothly 
through  the  rings  or  guides  of  a  rod.  Of  course,  there  are  many 
22 


258  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

inferior  lines  made  up  by  second-rate  factories ;  but  it  is  difficult  to 
imagine  that  cotton,  linen,  or  silk  can  be  better  put  together  than 
they  are  now  by  our  first-class  establishments.  Perhaps  some  better 
fiber  will  be  discovered.  The  inner  bark  of  the  alloa  tree  was  made 
into  lines  many  years  ago ;  and  they  were  found  to  be  almost  imper- 
ishable even  under  the  most  unreasonable  neglect.  But  the  material 
is  too  costly  for  general  use. 

The  Forest  and  Stream  has  this  to  say  concerning  this 
manufactory : 

This  establishment,  since  its  introduction  of  machinery,  and  its 
transfer  to  more  commodious  quarters  at  "Highland  Mills,"  possi- 
bly turns  out  more  goods  than  all  others  of  a  like  business  in  the 
State  combined,  and  of  such  superior  excellence  as  to  defy  com- 
petition. 

The  Henry  Hall  goods  are  made  the  standard  by  the  trade. 
Every  sort,  kind  and  description  of  fish-line  is  made  at  this  now 
world-wide  renowned  factory,  as  the  Hall  goods  swept  the  deck 
at  the  Centennial  Show,  and  wherever  they  have  come  in  compe- 
tition with  foreign  goods  of  decided  reputation,  the  Henry  Hall 
goods — cotton,  linen  and  silk — have  at  all  times  asserted  their  dis- 
tinct superiority. 

Reel,  Lines  for  Bait-fishing. 

The  perfect  line  for  Black  Bass  bait-fishing  is  yet  in  the 
future.  The  best  manufactured  at  present  is  the  smallest 
size — letter  G,  or  No.  5 — hard-braided  raw  silk  line ;  and 
if  it  were  made,  say,  of  just  one-half  the  caliber,  and  as 
tightly  and  closely  braided,  and  as  firm  and  hard  as  the 
twisted,  or  laid  Japanese  grass  line,  it  would  be  all  that 
could  de  desired  for  a  bait  line.  I  have  great  hopes  that 
a  line  of  this  description  will  soon  be  made,  as  I  have  in- 
vited the  attention  of  Henry  Hall  &  Sons  to  this  subject. 

A  bait  line  for  casting  a  mirfhow  should,   in  the  first 


FISHING-LINES.  *    259 

place,  be  composed  of  the  very  best  material,  which,  in 
this  case,  is  raw  silk.  It  should  be  of  very  small  caliber, 
the  smallest  that  can  be  made  consistent  with  strength,  and 
raw  silk  fulfills  this  condition  better  than  any  other  mate- 
rial. It  should  be  very  hard,  compact,  and  closely  braided. 
These  conditions  secure  a  line  that  renders  freely  and  easily, 
is  quite  elastic,  and  at  the  same  time  absorbs  but  little  water, 
and  will  not  kink  or  snarl  in  casting.  The  line  should, 
moreover,  be  tinted  some  suitable  color,  to  render  it  as 
nearly  invisible  as  possible,  for  it  must  be  remembered  that 
we  can  not  use  a  gut  leader  in  casting  the  minnow. 

The  braided  or  plaited  raw-silk  line,  as  now  made,  ful- 
fills all  of  the  above  conditions,  except  in  caliber,  and  the 
manufacturers  above  referred  to  assured  me  that  it  could 
be  made  one-half  less  in  size,  were  there  a  demand  for 
such  a  line.  There  has  been  no  inquiry  for  such  a  line, 
because  it  is  known  that  there  is  none  to  be  had ;  but  the 
Black  Bass  anglers,  who  fish  the  streams  of  the  South  and 
West,  almost  universally  use  the  relaid  Japanese  grass- 
line  (which  is  made  of  raw  silk),  nothwith/standing  its 
kinking  propensities,  for  in  every  other  particular  it  is  a 
good  line.  For  lake-fishing,  where  the  Bass  are  larger,  the 
braided  silk  and  linen  lines  are  used  almost  exclusively. 

The  best  line,  then,  we  will  say,  is  the  braided,  or  plaited 
raw-silk  line — letter  G,  or  No.  5 — for  ordinary  fishing;  but 
where  the  Bass  average  fully  three  pounds,  the  next  largest 
size — letter  F,  or  No.  4 — may  be  used,  though  I  would 
advise  the  smaller  line  even  here  to  be  employed  in  prefer- 
ence. Raw  silk  lines  require  the  greatest  care  to  preserve 
their  usefulness.  They  should  be  carefully  dried  after 
use,  as  soon  thereafter  as  possible,  for  without  this  caution 
they  soon  become  weak  and  rotten.      And,   moreover,  a 


260 


BOOK   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

SIZES  OF  LINES. 


12  3  4 

Taper  "Waterproof  Braided  Silk  Lines. 

fi^The  smaller  illustration  of  each  Cut  represents  the  M  Taper  "  point ;  the 

larger,  the  body  of  the  Line. 


5  4  3  2  1 

Braided  Linen  and  Hard  Braided  Linen  and  Braided  Cotton. 


G 


D 


F  E 

Oiled  Silk,  Braided  Silk. 
B^The  above  cuts  are  the  exact  sizes  of  the  lines  they  represent.    They  ap- 
pear, on  paper,  somewhat  larger,  as  the  cuts  are  "  flat,"  while  the  Lines,  from 
being  "  round,"  appear  smaller  to  the  eye. 

(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


FISHING-LINES.  261 

reel-line,  for  bait-fishing,  should  never  be  waterproofed 
with  any  preparation,  or  by  any  means  whatever,  for  this 
can  only  be  done  with  great  detriment  to  the  line,  as  re- 
gards casting,  besides  increasing  its  caliber. 

Next  best  to  the  raw  silk-line  is  the  braided  boiled  silk- 
line,  or,  as  sometimes  called,  the  dressed  silk-line.  This  is 
a  good  line  when  plaited  hard  and  closely,  but  most  of 
them  are  too  loosely  braided;  in  which  case  they  absorb 
water  quite  freely,  which  develops  an  annoying  propensity 
of  clinging  to  the  rod  in  casting,  and  interferes  somewhat 
with  the  free  rendering  of  the  line.  They  are  made  of 
good  stock,  however,  and  are  quite  strong,  and  nicely 
tinted.  Sizes  F  and  G,  or  Nos.  4  and  5,  are  the  only 
ones  to  be  used;  and,  for  ordinary  Bass-fishing,  the  lat- 
ter, or  smallest — letter  G,  or  No.  5 — is  the  proper  size. 
The  boiled  silk-line  should  be  as  well  cared  for,  and  as 
carefully  dried,  after  use,  as  the  raw  silk-line,  and  for  the 
same  reasons. 

The  braided  linen-line  is  a  very  good  one,  in  one  re- 
spect better  than  the  silk,  being  quite  hard  and  closely 
plaited,  but  the  caliber  is  too  large.  The  smallest  size 
now  made  is  too  great  for  a  reel-line  for  Black  Bass  bait- 
fishing.  Where  the  Bass  run  very  large,  however,  as  in 
lake-fishing,  or  in  the  extreme  South,  the  smallest  size 
may  be  employed  with  satisfaction.  It  will  last  longer 
than  the  silk-line,  and  will  bear  rougher  and  more  careless 
usage.  It  is  much  heavier,  however,  and  is  not  so  elastic; 
and,  therefore,  not  so  desirable  a  line,  in  these  respects,  as 
the  silk-line.     The  only  size  to  use  is  G,  or  5. 

The  above  are  the  only  lines  that  I  can  recommend  for 
bait-fishing  for  Black  Bass,  where  much  casting  is  prac- 
ticed, for  braided   lines  are  the  only  lines  that  will  not 


262 


BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 


Braided  Linen  Keel-Line. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


Twisted  Silk-Line. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


FISHING-LINES.  263 

kink  and  curl.  No  twisted  or  cable-laid  line  earn  be  profit- 
ably employed  for  this  purpose,  on  account  of  this  kink- 
ing propensity,  which,  to  the  angler,  is  a  source  of  great 
trouble,  vexation  and  perplexity;  and  there  is  no  method 
by  which  the  kink  can  be  entirely  removed  or  eradicated 
from  twisted  lines.  Some  anglers  maintain  that  this  kink- 
ing quality  can  be  taken  out  of  a  line  by  trailing  it  in  the 
water  behind  a  boat,  without  sinker  or  hook ;  but  this  is  a 
delusion  and  a  snare,  for  after  casting  a  line  a  few  times 
in  succession  that  has  been  treated  in  this  manner  for 
hours,  it  will  kink  and  snarl  as  badly  as  ever,  and  this  is 
to  be  naturally  expected,  from  the  mode  of  manufacturing 
such  lines.  It  is  unreasonable,  moreover,  to  expect  a 
twisted  line  to  perform  the  functions  of  a  braided  line,  for 
this  it  can  not  do. 

Use  small-sized  lines;  they  are  strong  enough  with  a 
pliant  rod.  A  line  that  will  hold  up  two  pounds,  dead 
weight,  will  land  the  largest  Black  Bass  that  swims,  when 
used  with  a  proper  rod.  Indeed,  I  have  often  used  a  line, 
which,  toward  the  end  of  the  season,  when  tested,  would 
scarcely  hold  a  pound  dead  weight,  but  which  would  safely 
land  the  largest  Bass,  or  even  Pickerel  of  fifteen  pounds 
or  more. 

Rod-Lines. 

The  twisted  line  has  its  proper  place  in  fishing,  and 
sometimes  answers  a  good  purpose,  as  I  will  now  explain. 
There  are  many  anglers  who,  from  choice  or  necessity, 
dispense  with  the  reel  in  Black  Bass  fishing.  Oftentimes 
the  character  of  the  stream  is  such  that  a  reel  can  not  be 
used  to  advantage ;  for  instance,  on  streams  that  are  nar- 
row, and  much  choked  with  snags,  roots,  and  other  obstruc- 


264  BOOK   OF  THE   BLACK   BASS. 

tions,  that 'preclude  the  playing  of  a  fish,  a  reel  is  not  nec- 
essary, for  the  fish  must  be  killed  within  a  few  feet  of  where 
hooked,  and  must,  of  a  necessity,  be  landed  as  soon  as 
possible. 

In  this  case,  a  .long,  light,  and  pliable — but  not  too 
limber — rod  must  be  used,  say  a  natural  cane-pole,  twelve 
or  even  fifteen  feet  long,  with  the  finest  and  smallest  line 
that  can  be  procured,  which,  in  this  case,  is  the  twisted 
silk-line.  This  line  is  made  of  very  small  caliber,  nicely 
tinted,  of  a  suitable  color,  and  is  quite  strong.  It  is  manu- 
factured by  Henry  Hall  &  Sons,  in  connected  lengths  of 
fifteen  feet,  which  is  about  the  right  length  of  line  for  this 
kind  of  angling.  The  sizes  run  from  No.  1,  the  smallest, 
up  to  No.  5,  the  largest.  The  smallest,  or  No.  1,  is  the 
size  to  use,  always,  when  fishing  on  streams ;  but  for  pond 
or  lake  fishing,  where  Pickerel  abound,  No.  2  or  3  may 
be  substituted. 

Next  to  the  silk-line,  in  order  of  merit,  comes  the  twisted 
or  relaid  sea-grass  line,  domestic  or  Japanese,  the  latter 
being  the  best.  They  are  numbered  in  the  same  way 
as  the  silk-line,  No.  1  being  the  smallest  size,  and  the  pref- 
erable size  to  use.  Many  anglers,  notably  in  the  border 
and  Southern  States,  use  the  sea-grass  line  for  a  reel-line, 
in  preference  to  all  others,  because  it  is  strong,  of  small 
caliber,  quite  hard  and  elastic;  and,  as  they  do  not  cast 
very  frequently,  it  answers  pretty  well,  but,  as  stated  be- 
fore, will  kink  when  much  casting  is  practiced.  The  sea- 
grass  line  is  both  twisted  and  relaid,  the  latter  being  the 
best,  as  it  does  not  kink  quite  so  badly  as  the  twisted  line. 
In  relaid  lines,  the  strands  are  three  in  number,  each  strand 
being  twisted  from  left  to  right,  and  the  strands  twisted 
together  in  the  opposite  direction,  or  from  right  to  left. 


FISHING-LINES.  265 

On  the  score  of  economy,  twisted  flax  and  cotton  lines 
are  sometimes  used  for  rod-lines;  but  they  are  beneath  the 
notice  of  the  Black  Bass  angler,  as  the  sizes  are  too  large 
to  be  used  for  this  purpose. 

Reel-Lines  for  Fly-fishing. 

The  reel-line  for  fly-fishing  must  necessarily  be  heavier 
than  the  line  used  in  bait-fishing,  the  greater  weight  of 
the  former  being  required  to  cast  objects  so  light  and  deli- 
cate as  artificial  flies ;  while  in  the  case  of  the  small  and 
light  bait-line,  the  minnow,  swivel  and  sinker  give  the 
required  weight  for  casting.  Increased  weight  is  ob- 
tained by  increase  of  the  caliber  of  the  line,  so  a  fly-line 
is  consequently  of  a  larger  size  than  a  bait-line. 

Formerly  the  twisted  or  plaited  hair,  and  hair  and  silk- 
lines  were  employed  altogether  by  the  best  anglers  for  fly- 
lines,  but  they  have  been  almost  entirely  superseded  by 
the  really  elegant  tapered  and  enameled  waterproof  braided 
silk-line.  The  latter  is  the  line  par  excellence  for  all  kinds 
of  fly-fishing,  being  smooth,  round,  polished  and  perfectly 
waterproof,  and  is  just  stiff  and  heavy  enough  to  favor  a 
perfectly  straight  cast,  without  looping  or  kinking,  quali- 
ties that  are  peculiarly  essential  to  this  mode  of  angling. 
Those  who  have  used  the  old-fashioned  fly-lines,  are  pre- 
pared to  speak  feelingly  and  appreciatively  concerning  the 
great  superiority  and  excellence  of  this  line. 

They  are  made  in  several  sizes  for  Salmon,  Black  Bass 
and  Trout  fishing;  are  very  strong  and  serviceable,  and, 
for  Black  Bass  angling,  can  be  purchased  in  lengths  of 
from  twenty-five  to  thirty  yards.  They  are  usually  fash- 
ioned with  a  regular  and  gradual  taper  for  several  yards  to 
23 


266  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

the  fly-end,  the  fly-end  being  only  about  one-half  the  cali- 
ber of  the  reel-end.  Hall  &  Son's  lines,  which  is  the  best 
way,  taper  both  ways  from  the  middle.  They  are  usually 
stained  of  a  greenish-olive  hue,  which  harmonizes  well 
with  the  tints  of  the  water,  sky  and  foliage.  From 
twenty-five  to  thirty  yards  is  the  right  length,  and  the 
size  should  be  either  E  or  F,  which  corresponds  with  Nos. 
3  and  4,  some  dealers  designating  the  sizes  by  letters, 
others  by  numerals. 

The  silk  and  hair-line  is  still  used  to  some  extent,  but 
it  is  open  to  many  objections.  At  best,  it  is  a  weak  line, 
and  soon  rots  and  becomes  worthless  by  use,  even  with 
good  care.  The  ends  of  the  hairs  become  frayed,  and 
separate  after  a  time,  and  are  a  constant  source  of  annoy- 
ance, by  sticking  out  at  various  places  on  the  line,  pre- 
venting it  from  working  smoothly  and  freely  through  the 
rings  of  the  rod.  When  used  for  Black  Bass  angling,  the 
size  suitable  for  Trout  fishing  will  answer,  and  the  length 
should  be  about  thirty  yards. 

Next  best  to  the  tapered  enameled  silk-line  is  the  oiled 
braided  silk-line ;  though  this  is  not  tapered,  it  is  a  good, 
strong  and  useful  line,  and  is  used  by  many  anglers  in 
preference  to  all  others.  It  is  tinted  of  a  similar  shade  to 
the  enameled  line,  and  altogether  is  a  very  satisfactory  fly- 
line,  being  heavy  enough,  and,  withal,  cheaper  than  the 
tapered  line.  Letters  E  and  F,  or  Nos.  3  and  4,  are  suit- 
able sizes. 

Next  in  order  is  the  braided  linen-line,  either  water- 
proof or  plain.  Where  economy  in  price  is  the  necessary 
object,  this  is  the  best  line  to  select,  though  the  angler 
should  bear  in  mind  that  the  best  is  the  cheapest,  for  he 
knows  full  well  that  to  no  other  class  of  goods  does  this 


FISHING-LINES.  267 

maxim  apply  with  more  force  than  to  fishing-tackle.  This 
line  is  strong,  firm  and  round,  and  is  capable  of  long  and 
hard  service,  if  proper  care  is  taken  to  dry  it  thoroughly 
always  after  using.  It  is  well  adapted  for  making  a  nice, 
straight  cast,  and  will  not  curl  or  kink.  It  is  usually 
stained  a  light  shade  of  slate,  or  a  grayish  drab.  Letter 
F,  or  No.  4,  is  about  the  right  size. 

Some  fly-fishers  use  the  ordinary  braided  raw  or  boiled 
silk-lines,  which,  while  being  the  very  best  lines  for  bait- 
fishing,  are  not  so  well  adapted  for  fly-lines,  on  account  of 
their  light  weight;  the  medium  sizes,  however,  answer 
tolerably  well.  Letter  E,  or  No.  3,  is  the  correct  size, 
when  used  for  Black  Bass  fly-fishing. 

All  fishing-lines  that  are  not  absolutely  waterproof 
should  be  carefully  dried  after  use;  and  even  waterproof 
lines  would  be  much  benefited  by  an  airing  previous  to 
putting  away.  Even  the  best  lines  become  weak  and 
worthless  through  want  of  proper  and  judicious  treat- 
ment. It  is  impossible  to  make  a  line  that  is  indestruc- 
tible, or  proof  against  mildew  or  rot,  though  many  anglers 
seem  to  think  to  the  contrary,  judging  from  the  shiftless 
and  reprehensible  manner  in  which  they  use  them;  then, 
when  the  line  fails,  they  blame  the  manufacturer. 

Hand-Lines  foe  Trolling. 

There  are  many  persons  who  can  not,  or  will  not,  use  a 
fishing-rod,  but  who  greatly  enjoy  trolling  with  the  hand- 
line  and  spoon-bait  for  Black  Bass.  For  the  benefit  of 
these  unfortunates,  I  will  describe  the  proper  line  to  be 
employed  for  this  mode  of  fishing. 

The  only  line  that  is  suitable  for  the  purpose  is  a  braided 


268 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


Braided  Linen  Trolling- Line. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


FISHING-LINES.  269 

or  plaited  linen  or  cotton  line,  size  C  or  D  (1  or  2).  Such 
lines  are  large  enough  to  preclude  cutting  the  hands,  and 
they  will  not  kink  or  twist,  qualities  that  are  peculiarly- 
essential  for  this  kind  of  fishing.  A  twisted  line,  of  any- 
material,  is  inadmissible  here,  for  the  revolving  of  the 
spoon,  if  a  swivel  is  not  used,  will  cause  even  a  braided 
line  to  twist  on  itself  and  kink ;  therefore,  one,  or  even 
two,  swivels  should  always  be  attached  to,  and  near  the 
spinning-bait.  A  trolling  hand-line  should  be  from 
seventy-five  to  a  hundred  yards  long. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

SILK-WORM  GUT. 

"  But  if  you  can  attain  to  angle  with  one  hair,— you  shall  have  more  rises, 
and  catch  more  fish."— Izaak  Walton. 

The  material  of  which  leaders  and  snells  are  composed 
is  a  mystery  to  many  anglers.  It  is  eminently  fitted  for 
the  purposes  mentioned,  being  as  nearly  invisible  as  any 
substance  can  well  be,  and  at  the  same  time  is  quite 
strong  and  impermeable  to  water. 

It  is  really  the  "fluid  silk"  of  the  silk-worm,  drawn  out 
into  a  continuous  length.  This  fluid  silk,  which  in  its 
natural  state  resembles  colorless  varnish,  is  contained  in 
long  cylindrical  sacks,  many  times  the  length  of  the  worm, 
and  which  are  capable  of  being  unfolded  by  immersion  in 
water,  and  the  fluid  silk  can  be  drawn  out  into  threads, 
longer  or  shorter,  coarse  or  fine,  as  may  be  desired. 

Mr.  Wm.  Gray,  of  Davenport,  Iowa,  in  an  article  in 
the  Forest  and  Stream,  gives  some  very  interesting  in- 
formation concerning  the  process  of  drawing  out  the 
threads,  which,  to  many  anglers,  will  be  new.     He  says : — 

In  all  my  reading  I  have  never  seen  a  sentence  in  reference  to 
that  most  essential  article  to  the  sportsman  angler,  viz.:  silk-worm 
gut ;  what  it  was  and  how  prepared.  I  know  that  many  skillful 
fishers  know  nothing  about  where  it  comes  from.  Others  think  that 
because  it  is  called  silk-worm  gut,  therefore  it  is  the  intestines  of 
the  silk-worm,  just  as  catgut  (violin  strings)  are  made  from  the 
(270) 


SILK-WORM   GUT.  271 

intestines  of  a  cat  (?)  or  a  sheep,  after  the  mucous  membrane  has 
been  removed  from  it.  But  such  is  not  the  case.  It  is  true  that  it 
comes  from  the  inside  of  the  silk-worm,  but  it  is  not  what  we  would 
call  the  gut. 

More  than  forty  years  ago  I  was  curious  to  know  what  this  article 
was,  but  not  until  within  four  years  ago  did  I  ascertain.  Inside  of 
the  silk-worm  there  are  two  lobes  or  sacs  lying  together,  somewhat 
like  the  two  lobes  of  eggs  in  a  fish.  When  these  lobes  are  fully 
developed  they  consist  of  a  viscid  fluid,  and  if  the  worm  were 
allowed  to  live  this  would  all  be  spun  out  of  its  mouth  as  a  cocoon 
of  silk.  But  if  silk- worm  gut  is  wanted,  the  worms  are  taken  when 
the  lobes  are  mature  (or  ripe,  as  they  term  it,)  and  thrown  into 
strong  vinegar  for  about  two  hours.  The  effect  of  this  immersion 
in  vinegar  kills  the  worms,  makes  the  external  part  of  their  bodies 
very  tender,  and  thickens  the  fluid  in  the  lobes  into  a  soft,  tough 
pulp. 

The  next  process  is  to  remove  it  from  the  vinegar  and  remove  the 
outer  part  carefully,  and  one  at  a  time,  these  lobes  are  caught  by 
the  thumb  and  finger  by  the  ends,  with  each  hand,  and  stretched 
apart  to  the  length  required,  and  given  two  or  three  twists  around 
a  small  pin  placed  in  each  end  of  a  frame,  where  they  remain  till 
dry  enough  to  be  bunched  up  ready  for  market.  That  this  is  the 
way  that  gut  is  finished  we  have  some  evidence  by  examining  a 
thread  of  it  in  the  bunch  as  commonly  sold.  At  each  end  you  will 
see  where  it  has  been  twisted  around  the  pin,  and  beyond  that, 
where  the  piece  held  in  the  fingers  has  been  stripped  out,  which  is 
usually  flat. 

That  there  are  other  insects  than  the  common  silk-worm  (how 
many  I  do  not  know)  who  have  this  lobe  of  fluid  matter  that  is 
utilized  into  fishing  gut  I  am  satisfied.  More  than  forty  years  ago 
I  got  a  quantity  of  gut  (how  or  from  whom  I  do  not  remember), 
but  it  was  different  from  any  I  had  ever  seen  before  or  since.  It 
was  heavy  and  long.  Some  of  the  threads  were  nearly  three  feet, 
perfect  in  smoothness  and  equal  in  thickness,  and  as  thick  as  good 
salmon  gut.  The  color,  however,  differed  from  the  ordinary  gut, 
being  brown-colored,  as  if  soaked  in  tea,  but  I  am  satisfied  it  was 
the  natural  color.  I  still  have  a  few  threads  of  it  in  my  tackle- 
book,  which  have  been  there  about  forty-five  years.     I  have  just 


272  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

looked  at  them,  and  find  that  the  longest  yet  remaining  is  twenty- 
three  and  a  half  inches;  a  good,  clear  thread;  one  of  the  lightest 
of  the  lot. 

About  as  long  ago  as  I  can  remember  there  was  an  article  sold 
called  sea-weed,  which  was  used  by  fly-fishers.  It  was  from  three 
to  four  feet  in  length,  round,  smooth,  and  tapered  from  the  root 
to  the  point,  but  was  not  reliable  as  to  its  strength.  I  have  not 
seen  any  of  it  for  nearly  fifty  years  past. 

The  long  and  heavy  gut  to  which  Mr.  Gray  alludes,  is, 
possibly,  the  product  of  one  of  our  native  silk-worms,  as 
Dr.  T.  Garlick,  of  Bedford,  Ohio,  one  of  the  fathers  of 
pisciculture  in  the  United  States,  states  that  he  has  drawn 
silk  gut  from  four  to  six  feet  long,  sufficiently  strong  for 
Salmon  fishing,  from  the  larva  of  the  Atticus  cecropia,  the 
largest  of  our  native  silk-worms. 

Dr.  Garlick  describes  the  process,  in  the  Forest  and 
Stream,  as  follows: — 

I  have  drawn  silk  gut  not  only  from  the  Atticus  cecropia  and  A. 
prometheus,  but  also  from  the  Italian  silk-worm.  I  have  never  killed 
the  worm,  nor  put  it  in  vinegar  for  this  purpose,  which  may  be  the 
best  method.  Soon  after  the  larva  ceases  to  feed  he  begins  to  spin 
his  cocoon,  which  is  the  right  time  to  draw  the  silk  gut.  I  pin  the 
worm  to  a  board,  putting  one  pin  in  his  caudal  extremity,  and 
another  pin  about  one-third  of  his  length  back  from  his  head.  I 
then,  with  a  sharp  knife,  cut  off  the  forepart  of  the  worm  far 
enough  back  to  cut  off  a  very  little  of  the  sac  containing  the  silk, 
which  is  a  fluid  of  about  the  consistency  of  the  white  of  an  egg.  I 
then  take  a  large  pin,  and  dipping  it  into  the  fluid  silk,  which 
adheres  to  the  pin,  I  draw  out  the  silk  slowly  (the  more  slowly  the 
larger  will  be  the  gut),  until  I  have  drawn  out  all,  or  nearly  all,  of 
the  silk  contained  in  the  sacs.  I  then  take  another  pin,  and  attach 
it  to  the  other  extremity  of  the  gut,  at  the  point  where  I  divided 
the  worm.  The  two  pins  are  then  stuck  into  a  board,  drawing  the 
gut  taut,  which  soon  becomes  hard  and  fit  for  use.     The  fluid  silk 


SILK-WORM   GUT.  273 

hardens  to  some  extent  immediately  on  coming  in  contact  with  the 
air. 

Leaders,  or  Casting  Lines. 

The  silk-worm  gut  imported  into  the  United  States, 
and  used  for  leaders  and  snells,  is  usually  in  short  lengths 
of  from  twelve  to  fifteen  inches.  In  forming  leaders, 
these  are  knotted  together  to  the  desired  length.  There 
are  many  grades  of  gut,  and  the  angler  will  do  well  to 
remember  that  the  best  is  the  cheapest. 

Black  Bass  leaders  should  be  from  six  to  nine  feet  long, 
and  composed  of  the  best  single  Spanish  silk-worm  gut, 
heavy  and  strong,  hard  and  round.  The  gut  lengths 
should  be  perfectly  clear  and  sound,  quite  smooth,  and 
without  inequalities  or  rough  places.  The  rod-end  of  the 
leader  should  be  composed  of  a  large-sized  gut,  the  next 
length  a  trifle  smaller,  and  so  diminish  by  a  gradual  taper 
to  the  fly-end.  The  several  lengths  should  be  neatly  and 
firmly  knotted  together  by  what  is  technically  known  as 
the  double  water-knot.  The  ends  should  be  cut  off 
closely;  or,  if  the  single  water-knot  is  used,  the  ends 
should  be  first  wrapped  with  silk,  waxed  and  varnished, 
and  then  cut  off  neatly  and  closely. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  it  is  necessary  to  soak 
and  soften  the  ends  of  the  gut-lengths  previous  to  tying. 
The  water-knot,  if  correctly  tied,  can  be  easily  slipped 
apart  and  the  snell  of  a  fly  inserted,  when  it  is  to  be  se- 
curely drawn  together  again,  the  snell  having  a  knot  tied 
on  the  end  to  prevent  its  pulling  out;  but  more  of  this 
anon. 

Some  leaders  are  now  made  with  loops  for  attaching  the 


274 


BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


SILK-WORM   GUT.  275 

flies,  which  is  a  very  convenient  and  expeditious  way,  but 
the  old  method  is  still  much  in  vogue,  and  both  plans 
have  their  advocates. 

Too  much  care  can  not  be  exercised  in  selecting  the 
leader,  for  upon  its  soundness  and  excellence  depend  much 
of  the  pleasure  and  success  of  fly-fishing.  It  should  be 
carefully  examined  in  every  inch  of  its  length,  and  the 
knots  closely  inspected.  The  leader  should  always  be 
stained  some  suitable  neutral  tint ;  either  a  slightly  green- 
ish, grayish,  or  smoky  hue  will  answer.  Strong  green 
tea,  diluted  black  ink,  or  a  weak  solution  of  indigo,  make 
good  stains.  The  leader  should  have  a  loop  at  each  end, 
for  attaching  the  reel-line  and  stretcher-fly. 

I  will  not  enter  into  the  details  of  making  leaders,  as 
they  can  now  be  purchased  so  cheaply,  and  of  such  superior 
excellence,  that  the  amateur  can  hardly  hope  to  equal  them, 
even  were  it  necessary.  The  leaders  known  as  "mist- 
colored"  are  all  that  can  be  desired,  and  the  angler  can 
have  them  sent  by  mail  from  any  first-class  dealer,  who 
will  select  them  "  upon  honor."  I  will  only  add,  beware 
of  double  or  twisted-leaders ;  they  are  an  abomination  to 
the  Black  Bass  fly-fisher. 

Snells,  or  Snoods. 

For  utility  and  convenience,  hooks  are  tied  on  short 
pieces  of  gut,  gimp,  or  sea-grass,  called  snells,  or  snoods. 
The  best  material  for  snells  is  silk-worm  gut,  as  it  is  light, 
strong,  and  nearly  invisible.  It  should  be  stained  of  a 
similar  color,  and  in  the  same  manner  as  the  leader. 

The  length  of  snells  for  Black  Bass  angling  should  be 
from  six  to  eight  inches ;  and  they  should  be  composed  of 


276 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


Leader,  or  Casting  Line. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  <fe  Son.) 


Shipley's  Self-hooking  Elastic  Snood. 

(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


Snell  and  Hook. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


SILK-WORM   GUT.  277 

single,  heavy  gut,  though  they  may  be  made  double  if  the 
gut  is  very  light  or  fine. 

The  hooks  should  be  neatly,  carefully,  and  securely  tied 
on  with  waxed  silk,  and  varnished ;  and  a  strong  and  firm 
loop  must  be  formed  on  the  other  end  of  the  snell,  for  at- 
taching to  the  reel  line.  The  ends  of  the  gut  should  be 
softened  by  soaking  in  warm  water  before  tying  on  the 
hook  and  forming  the  loop. 

Gut  snells,  or  loops,  are  always  used  for  artificial  flies  ,\ 
when  snells  are  used,  they  should  be  from  three  to  six 
inches  in  length,  and  should  always  be  formed  of  single 
gut,  with,  or  without  loops  in  the  ends,  according  to  the 
style  of  leader  used,  whether  with  loops  for  the  attachment 
of  the  fly-snells,  or  not. 

Messrs.  A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son,  of  Philadelphia,  manufac- 
ture a  patent,  self-hooking,  elastic  snell,  formed  by  tying 
a  short  piece  of  silk  rubber  cord  across  a  bight  of  the  gut- 
snell,  giving  it  a  spring  or  play  of  two  inches  or  more. 
Messrs.  Shipley  say  that  it  has  proved  very  successful,  and 
describe  its  modus  operandi  as  follows  : — 

"The  fish,  on  biting  and  attempting  to  let  go  the  bait, 
is  at  once  caught;  as  when  the  tension  of  its  biting  or 
pulling  at  the  bait  ceases,  the  snood  flies,  or  springs  imme- 
diately, and  fastens  the  hook,  itself,  thus  saving  the  setting 
of  the  wrist,  or  loosing  the  fish  by  inattention." 

In  fishing  for  Black  Bass  in  waters  where  Pickerel  or 
Pike-Perch  abound,  it  becomes  necessary  to  substitute 
gimp,  for  the  gut  of  the  snell,  as  the  sharp,  long,  and  nu- 
merous teeth  of  these  species  would  make  short  work  of 
the  delicate  gut,  by  fraying  it  or  cutting  it  in  two,  and 
thus  subject  the  angler  to  the  great  annoyance  and  aggra- 
tion  of  often  loosing  both  hook  and  fish. 


278 


BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


SILK-WORM   GUT.  279 

N    Knots. 

In  angling,  as  in  sailing,  there  is  no  accomplishment  so 
necessary,  or  that  proclaims  the  finished  angler  or  sailor 
so  well,  as  his  ability  to  tie  a  good  knot.  The  beginner 
should  study  the  plate  of  "knots"  thoroughly,  and  by 
practice  learn  to  tie  each  and  all  of  them  readily  and  prop- 
erly. I  have  seen  otherwise  good  anglers  who  could  not 
tie  a  correct  or  graceful  knot,  and  the  knife  was  always 
brought  into  requisition  to  "untie"  their  clumsy  efforts; 
in  this  way  their  lines  become  shorter  daily,  and  "  beauti- 
fully less." 

There  is  always  a  right  way  and  a  wrong  way  to  do 
every  thing ;  and  though  a  knot  may  seem  an  unimportant 
thing,  it  is  really  often  a  most  vital  one,  many  times  caus- 
ing the  angler  to  lose  a  good  fish,  and  might  result  in  the 
loss  of  his  life  to  the  sailor.  The  new  hand  will  please 
remember  that  whatever  is  worth  doing  at  all,  is  worth 
doing  well. 

Fig.  1  is  the  "  common  "  knot  for  forming  a  loop  at  the 
end  of  a  line,  or  snell.     It  has  its  uses. 

Fig.  2  is  the  best  knot  for  tying  such  a  loop ;  it  looks  a 
little  intricate,  but  can  be  learned  by  practice,  and  once 
learned,  will  be  a  "  well-spring  of  pleasure." 

Fig.  3  is  a  good  and  simple  method  of  attaching  the 
reel-line  to  the  loop  of  the  leader,  or  snell.  It  is  the 
"  tiller-hitch,"  or  "  helm-knot,"  so-called  because  it  can  be 
instantly  cast  off  by  a  jerk  on  the  end;  being  thus  the 
safest  hitch  for  the  main-sheet  in  sailing. 

Fig.  4  is  a  more  secure  knot  for  attaching  the  end  of 
the  line  to  loop  of  leader,  or  snell ;  it  makes  a  small  and 
neat  knot,  and  is  easily  untied.     It  is  the  "  becket-hitch," 


280  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

with  a  small  round  knot  in  the  end  of  the  line  to  prevent 
its  working  loose. 

Fig.  5  is  another  method  of  fastening  reel-line  to  loop 
of  leader,  or  snell;  it  is  a  very  safe  and  secure  knot,  and 
is  a  modification  of  the  "reef-knot,"  (fig.  10). 

Fig.  6  is  similar  to  fig.  5,  with  the  end  of  line  fastened 
on  itself  by  a  half-hitch;  it  is  very  secure,  but  a  little 
more  difficult  to  untie  than  fig.  5.  Figs.  3,  4,  5,  and  6  are 
all  good  knots  for  bending  the  line  to  loop  of  leader,  or 
snell ;  they  draw  up  close  and  snug,  will  not  slip,  and  are 
easily  loosened.  The  angler  can  take  his  choice,  but  he 
should  never  tie  his  line  and  leader  together  by  the"  com- 
mon knot  (similar  to  fig.  1),  or  the  square  knot  (fig.  10). 
The  leader  should  always  be  provided  with  a  loop  in  each 
end,  neatly  seized  with  good  sewing  silk,  and  varnished. 
In  bait-fishing,  a  loop  may  be  formed  on  the  end  of  the 
reel-line,  by  which  it  may  be  fastened  to  one  ring  of  the 
swivel,  when  it  is  desired  to  pass  the  loop  of  the  snell 
through  the  opposite  ring. 

Fig.  7  is  the  "  single  water-knot,"  for  tying  lengths  of 
gut  together  to  form  the  leader ;  it  consists  in  half-hitches 
at  the  ends  of  the  gut-lengths,  which  are  formed  around 
the  opposing  gut- lengths,  as  shown  in  the  figure;  this  forms 
a  sliding  knot  for  securing  the  end  of  the  snell  of  a  drop- 

fly. 

Fig.  8  is  the  "  double  water-knot "  for  the  same  purpose 
as  fig.  7;  it  is  more  secure,  but  not  so  neat,  as  double 
hitches  are  used  in  its  construction,  as  plainly  shown  in 
the  figure. 

Fig.  9,  shows  the  method  of  fastening  the  snell  of  a 
dropper  by  the  single  or  double  water-knots.  After  the 
two  parts  of  the  water-knot  are  drawn  tight,  as  shown  in 


SILK-WORM    GUT.  281 

the  figure,  a  round  knot  is  made  in  the  end  of  the  snell 
of  the  fly,  and  is  put  through  the  open  loop  between  the 
two  halves  of  the  water-knot,  which  latter  are  then  drawn 
together  close  and  snug,  holding  the  snell  tightly  and  se- 
curely. By  using  this  mode  of  attaching  droppers  to  the 
leader,  they  stand  at  right  angles  to  it,  and  may  be  changed 
as  often  as  desired,  and  with  but  little  trouble,  by  simply 
sliding  the  water-knots  apart,  taking  out  the  snell  of  one 
fly  and  inserting  another.  The  flies  can  not  pull  out,  as 
might  be  supposed,  for  the  strain  and  struggles  of  a  fish 
only  serve  to  make  the  knot  draw  more  closely  together. 

Fig.  10  is  the  "  reef-knot,"  or  common  square  knot,  and 
is  a  very  safe  and  strong  knot  for  many  purposes ;  it  never 
slips  or  jams,  when  properly  tied,  and  is  easily  loosened; 
but  in  tying  this  knot,  if  the  second  turn  or  hitch  is  not 
made  exactly  right,  it  forms  a  a  granny-knot,"  than  which 
there  is  no  worse  or  more  uncertain  knot  made,  and  yet 
nine  persons  out  often  tie  a  u  granny-knot."  The  novice 
will  do  well  to  study  this  common  knot,  and  learn  to  tie 
it  correctly.  It  is  sometimes  used  for  tying  the  lengths  of 
a  leader,  in  which  case,  as  also  with  the  single  water-knot, 
the  ends  should  be  cut  off  closely,  and  neatly  whipped  with 
fine  sewing  silk  and  varnished. 

Fig.  11  is  the  form  of  knot  generally  used  by  manufac- 
turers of  leaders,  or  casting  lines,  for  tying  together  the  gut- 
lengths  ;  it  is  a  very  simple  knot  to  tie,  though  it  looks 
somewhat  difficult  in  the  figure,  and  in  the  way  that  I 
have  seen  some  attempt  it,  is  a  difficult  knot.  I  have 
drawn  the  two  lengths  of  different  colors,  one  white,  the 
other  dark,  so  that  the  construction  of  the  knot  can  be 
more  easily  seen.     The  ends  of  two  gut-lengths  are  passed 

by  one  another,  or  in  other  words  lapped,  sufficiently  to 
24 


282  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

allow  of  their  being  tied  by  a  single  hitch  and  drawn 
tightly,  just  like  tying  a  single  knot  in  a  double  string 
(as  in  fig.  1).  Usually  the  knot  is  made  double  by  pass- 
ing the  ends  of  the  gut  through  twice,  instead  of  but  once, 
in  tying ;  that  is  by  simply  tying  what  is  known  as  a 
"surgeon's  knot"  (for  ligating  arteries)  with  a  double 
thread.  The  short  ends  are  then  trimmed  off  closely.  If 
a  leader  is  made  with  loops  for  attaching  drop-flies,  this  is 
the  best  knot  to  use  in  making  the  leader  itself,  being, 
like  fig.  10,  secure  and  unyielding. 

Where  knots  like  figs.  10  and  11  are  used  in  construct- 
ing the  leader,  and  no  loops  are  provided  for  attaching 
droppers,  the  latter  must  be  secured  by  a  half-hitch,  just 
above  a  knot  in  the  leader,  as  shown  in  figs.  10  and  11, 
which  is  a  very  good  plan.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind, 
that  in  tying  lengths  of  gut  together,  or  in  tying  loops  or 
knots  in  gut-snells,  the  ends  must  first  be  soaked  in  water 
until  quite  soft  and  pliable ;  this  must  also  be  observed  in 
bending  or  tying  a  hook  on  a  gut-snell. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

HOOKS. 

"  For  in  the  Prophet  Amos,  mention  is  made  of  fish-hooks ;  and  in  the  hook 
of  Job,  which  was  long  before  the  days  of  Amos,  for  that  book  is  said  to  have 
been  written  by  Moses,  mention  is  made  also  of  fish-hooks,  which  must  imply 
anglers  in  those  times."— Izaak  Walton. 

The  best  fish-hooks  are  made  in  England,  that  country 
supplying  the  world  with  hooks  of  all  sizes  and  styles,  for 
all  kinds  of  fishing.  The  town  of  Redditch  has  been 
famous  for  its  fish-hooks  for  at  least  two  centuries.  There, 
are  located  the  celebrated  makers,  Harrison,  Hemming, 
Alcock,  and  others,  whose  familiar  names  are  almost  sy- 
nonymous with  hooks  and  needles,  both  articles  being 
usually  made  by  the  manufacturers  mentioned. 

The  following  brief  account  of  the  process  of  making 
fish-hooks  will  doubtless  prove  interesting  to  most  of  my 
readers.  It  is  an  extract  from  a  letter  in  the  Forest  and 
Stream,  written  by  Miss  Sara  J.  McBride,  of  Oswego,  New 
York,  the  well-known,  skillful  tyer  of  artificial  flies ;  and 
whose  writings  are  as  charming  and  attractive  as  her 
artistic  imitations  of  the  insect  world.  The  letter  is  one 
descriptive  of  a  recent  visit  to  the  celebrated  factory  of 
Alcock,  at  Redditch,  England: — 

And  this  is  Alcock's !  How  familiar  the  name !  What  a  host  of 
reminiscences  rise  as  we  enter  the  doors — "Round  Bend  Kendall," 
"  Kirby,"  "  Sneck  Bend,"  "Alcock's  Best ;  "  all  spring  up  like  phan- 
tom forms.    Through  the  kindly  courtesy  of  Mr.  Alcock  we  were 

(283) 


284  BOOK   OF  THE   BLACK   BASS. 

shown  through  the  different  apartments  and  saw  the  various  manip- 
ulations the  wire  taken  from  the  coil  undergoes,  until  the  delicately- 
pointed,  japanned  hook  is  ready  for  the  market.  In  one  corner  of  a 
room  there  was  a  large  pair  of  upright  scissors;  with  a  quick  snap 
two  hundred  or  more  pieces  of  the  required  length  were  cut  from  a 
bundle  of  wire;  six  to  ten  of  these  pieces  are  taken,  held  firmly 
against  an  iron  bar,  and  an  incision  made  with  a  sharp  knife,  for  the 
barb.  Next  the  filer  takes  each  one  separately  with  a  pair  of  pliers, 
holds  it  in  a  vise,  and  with  a  few  deft  movements  of  a  file,  the 
embryo  hook  is  pointed.  Now  they  are  bent  on  different  forms. 
This  is  the  christening  period.  They  come  forth,  Sproat,  Limerick, 
O'Shaughnessy,  Kirby,  Kendall,  Sneck  Bend,  Hollow  Points,  and 
Round  Points.  The  hardening  process  is  the  next  in  order.  As  we  enter 
this  department  our  nostrils  are  assailed  by  a  fearful  stench  of  burn- 
ing fish-oil.  We  would  like  to  retreat — an  instant's  consideration — 
we  decide  to  ignore  the  olfactory  nerves  and  keep  on.  Here  we  are 
shown  rows  of  ovens,  all  filled  with  pans  of  burning,  blazing  hooks. 
They  are  kept  in  this  fiery  furnace  from  fifteen  to  twenty-five  minutes, 
then  taken  and  thrown  into  the  bath  of  oil.  We  were  informed  they 
formerly  used  water  for  cooling,  but  now  they  considered  oil  the  best. 
True  to  Yankee  instinct,  I  queried  why.  The  workman  did  not 
enter  into  a  learned  discussion  on  the  molecular  construction,  or 
atomic  properties  of  steel,  and  the  consequent  differentiation  of  the 
particles  in  cooling,  as  a  Boston  girl  might  have  done,  but  with  a 
wise  nod  and  a  firm  pressure  of  the  lips  said,  "The  oil  is  the  best." 
I  thought  the  oil  was  used  to  keep  visitors  from  intruding.  The 
hooks  taken  from  the  oil  are  quite  brittle.  To  remedy  this  they  are 
reheated.  During  this  process,  which  lasts  but  a  few  minutes,  they 
are  stirred  briskly  in  sand. 

We  next  visited  the  scouring  room.  Here  were  eight  small  barrels, 
all  filled  with  hooks  and  fine  sand,  revolving  and  turning  round  and 
round  with  a  deafening  clash  and  clang.  In  this  room  the  workmen 
escaped  quizzing.  The  noise  was  too  much  for  me.  Now  for  the 
finishing  touches* — the  japanning.  The  japan  is  a  black,  tarry  liquid 
made  in  Birmingham,  the  composition  of  which  seems  to  be  a  trade 
secret,  as  I  failed  to  learn  it.  Two  coats  of  japan  are  applied ;  they 
are  heated  moderately  in  an  oven  and  thoroughly  mixed  after  each 
heating. 


hooks.  285 

In  the  wareroom  we  are  shown  immense  quantities  of  hooks,  all 
sizes,  done  up  in  packages  of  thousands  and  tens  of  thousands,  ready- 
to  be  shipped  to  all  parts  of  the  world.  Here  is  the  small  delicate 
hook  for  France,  so  diminutive  that  the  rude  scale  of  inches  has  to 
be  laid  aside  and  only  the  French  milimeter  can  do  it  justice  ;  hooks 
for  Canada,  United  States,  Australia,  and  New  Zealand  ;  triple  hooks, 
double  hooks,  hooks  flattened,  hooks  ringed,  hooks  headed,  and  hooks 
eyed.     All  kinds  of  hooks  for  all  kinds  of  fish. 


The  most  approved  hooks  for  Black  Bass,  are  the  Sproat, 
O'Shaughnessy,  Dublin  Limerick,  Cork  Shape  Limerick, 
Round  Bend  Carlisle,  or  Aberdeen,  and  Hollow  Point 
Limerick ;  they  are  best  in  the  order  named,  and  those 
made  by  Harrison  &  Son,  and  T.  Hemming  &  Son,  excel 
all  others. 

There  are  fish-hooks  and  fish-hooks,  and  to  the  uniniti- 
ated one  hook  is  as  good  as  another ;  all  they  can  see  in  a 
hook,  is  the  fact  that  it  has  a  shank,  a  bend,  and  a  bearded 
point.  But  to  the  angler  this  contracted  view  is  not  suffi- 
cient. There  are  many  styles  of  shank,  numerous  forms 
of  bend,  and  various  ways  of  fashioning  the  barb  and  point, 
all  of  which  are  of  the  highest  practical  importance.  Some 
hooks  are  made  for  general  service,  while  others  are  formed 
exclusively  for  particular  kinds  of  fish,  or  for  special 
methods  of  angling.  'The  fish-hook  of  to-day  is  not  es- 
sentially different  from  that  used  by  the  ancient  Greeks 
and  Romans,  to  the  casual  observer ;  but  to  the  practiced 
eye,  the  hooks  now  produced,  for  form,  temper,  and 
strength  have  never  been  equaled  in  the  history  of  the 
world. 

The  form,  quality,  and  general  excellence  of  hooks,  as 
now  made,  is  the  result  of  the  competitive  skill  and  great 
experience    of  the  manufacturers  of  Redditch,    England, 


286  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

whose  energies  and  resources  have  been  directed  in  this 
peculiar  channel  for  nearly  two  hundred  years;  and,  as 
might  be  inferred,  as  between  the  hooks  of  the  first-class 
makers,  there  is  but  little  choice,  so  far  as  quality  and 
workmanship  are  concerned. 

There  is  no  implement  of  the  craft  that  is  so  universally 
kept  in  stock  at  the  small  stores  and  shops  throughout  the 
country  as  the  fish-hook;  and  these  hooks,  as  a  rule,  are 
of  very  inferior  quality,  as  might  be  inferred  when  we  take 
into  consideration  their  cheapness,  notwithstanding  the 
fact  that  they  must  net  the  dealer  at  least  fifty  per  cent, 
profit,  or  he  would  not  sell  them. 

While  the  average  angler  is  inclined  to  use  heavier  rods, 
and  stronger  lines,  than  are  actually  necessary,  he  does  not 
seem  to  be  so  much  impressed  with  the  importance  of 
strength  in  a  fish-hook,  but  accepts  those  of  the  small 
dealers  mentioned,  with  a  blind  faith  that  a  hook  is  a 
hook,  and  that  one  is  as  strong  as  another,  if  of  the  same 
sized  wire ;  and,  morover,  he  recognizes  but  two  forms  of 
hooks,  the  Kirby,  or  side-bend,  and  the  straight,  or  more 
or  less  rounding-bend. 

Now  there  are  no  fallacies  so  great  as  these,  for  the  hook 
is  of  the  most  vital  importance  to  the  angler,  and  he  should 
obtain  the  very  best  to  be  had,  both  in  form  and  quality. 
Fish-hooks,  in  themselves,  being  of  so  comparatively  small 
a  price,  it  is  the  most  insane  idea  of  economy  to  purchase 
any  but  those  of  the  very  best  quality.  The  most  approved 
form  of  bend  and  barb,  should  also  be  taken  into  serious 
consideration. 

The  highest  grades  of  English  hooks,  like  English  gun- 
barrels,  are  thoroughly  tested  by  causing  them  to  sustain  a 
strain,  twice  or  thrice  as  great  as  they  are  usually  put  to 


hooks.  287 

in  actual  service,  and  the  extra  care  and  manipulation,  and 
the  superior  stock  used  in  the  construction  of  such  hooks, 
make  their  cost  somewhat  higher;  but  this  extra  amount 
is  money  well  expended,  for  the  angler  can  rely  upon  them 
with  the  utmost  confidence,  provided  they  are  the  product 
of  the  best  makers ;  there  is  but  one  thing  left  to  decide 
his  choice  among  such  hooks,  viz.,  the  peculiar  bend  or 
form  given  to  the  hook,  of  which  there  are  several  that 
are  good  enough.  I  might  add,  that  all  first-class  hooks 
are  japanned,  or  black,  and  that  a  blued  hook  is  always  of 
an  inferior  quality. 

As  regards  the  shape  and  bend  of  a  hook,  my  first 
choice  for  Black  Bass  angling  is  the  *  Sproat  Bend,"  and 
the  next  best  form,  in  my  opinion,  is  the  "O'Shaughnessy." 
In  general  form  and  bend  the  two  hooks  are  identical,  but 
their  difference  consists  in  the  form  of  barb,  and  direction 
of  the  point.  In  the  latter  peculiarities,  the  Sproat  is 
fashioned  after  true  scientific  principles,  being  a  central- 
draught  hook ;  that  is,  the  short,  squarish,  or  somewhat 
angular  barb,  terminates  in  an  abrupt  point,  which,  if  con- 
tinued upward,  would  intersect  a  line  drawn  from  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  shank  and  continuous  with  it.  In  other 
words,  the  direction  of  the  point  of  the  hook  is  towards 
the  end  of  the  shank. 

When  the  Sproat  hook  is  tied  on  a  snell,  and  the  point 
of  the  hook  is  held  against  the  ball  of  the  thumb,  and 
traction  made  on  the  snell,  the  direction  of  the  point  of 
the  hook  is  on  the  same  plane,  or  in  the  same  direction  or 
axis  as  the  line  of  the  snell,  thus  constituting  what  is 
termed  a  central-draught  fish-hook.  The  wire  of  the 
Sproat  is  a  trifle  smaller  than  the  O'Shaughnessy,  which 


288  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 


SPKOi 

VTBENI 

>, 

1 

i 

o:sh 

V3 

AUfiHNES! 

V!) 

5Y» 

VD 

1 

A! 

3ERDEEN. 

j 

cr 

S$ 

kj 

b 

Ci 

sii 

a 

Cj 

o 

hooks.  289 

is  another  advantage.  The  latter  hook  has  a  long  and 
somewhat  hollow  point,  whieh  is  curved  outward. 

The  Sproat  Bend  I  regard  as  the  very  best  hook  manu- 
factured. I  first  commenced  its  use  ten  or  twelve  years 
ago,  and  have  since  used  no  other.  Its  appearance  is 
somewhat  against  it,  but  it  is  like  "a  singed  cat."  By 
the  side  of  a  delicate,  blued,  gracefully-shaped  Aberdeen, 
it  looks  black,  and  rather  clumsy,  with  its  short  barb  and 
peculiar  bend,  but  it  means  "  business."  Its  temper  is 
just  right,  and  when  you  strike  a  fish  it  goes  right 
through  any  part  of  the  mouth,  never  springing  out,  and 
never  disappointing  you.  I  have  had  the  Aberdeen  so 
soft  as  to  completely  straighten  and  pull  out,  and  so  brittle 
as  to  break  like  a  pipe  stem,  but  the  Sproat  Bend  has  yet 
to  fail  me.     For  staying  qualities  it  is  perfection  itself. 

The  "  Dublin  Bend,"  or  Dublin  Limerick,  as  it  is  some- 
times called,  and  the  "  Dublin  Limerick  Forged,"  are  ex- 
cellent hooks,  and  are  identical  in  form  and  bend  with 
the  O'Shaughnessy  hook,  the  only  difference  consisting  in 
the  caliber  of  the  wire,  which,  in  the  latter,  is  a  trifle 
heavier.  The  Forged  Dublin  Limerick  has  the  wire 
flattened  by  hammering  or  forging;  it  is  a  remarkably 
strong  hook. 

The  "  Cork-Shape  Limerick,"  has  an  almost  round  bend, 
with  a  straight  shank,  and  a  long  straight  point,  which  is 
parallel  with  the  shank  in  its  direction,  and  a  very  good 
hook,  being  of  rather  smaller  wire  than  the  Sproat. 

The  "  Carlisle  "  hooks  are  made  of  very  small  wire,  and 

are  very  delicate  and  attractive  to  the  eye,  but  for  Black 

Bass  fishing  I  do  not  admire  them,  though,  until  I  came 

across  the  Sproat  hook,  I  used  the  round   bend  Carlisle 

(Aberdeen)   altogether.     Still,  manv  anglers  prefer  them 
25 


290 


BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 


1. 

Triple  hook. 

2.  Lip  hook. 

3. 

Double  fly-hook 

4. 

Dublin  Bend 

5.  O'Shaughnessy. 

6. 

Chestertown. 

7. 

Limerick. 

8.  Cork  Shape. 

9. 

Sproat. 

10. 

Aberdeen. 

11.  Kirby  Carlisle. 

12. 

Gravitation. 

13. 

Kinsey. 

14.  Sneck  Bend. 

HOOKS.  291 

on  account  of  the  small  wire,  which  is  not  so  apt  to  injure 
the  minnow,  but  I  might  say  here,  that  if  a  minnow  is  put 
on  with  care,  it  need  not  be  injured  to  a  greater  extent, 
even  with  the  Forged  Dublin  Bend  hook,  than  with  the 
Carlisle.  The  round-bend  Carlisle,  or  Aberdeen  hook,  has 
a  perfectly  round  bend,  and  a  long  straight  shank;  the 
barb  is  long,  with  the  point  curving  outward. 

The  "Hollow  Point  Limerick"  is  the  last  hook  that  I 
will  mention,  favorably  ;  it  is  a  very  old  form  of  hook, 
and  is  still  a  great  favorite  with  many,  notably  the  veter- 
ans of  the  angle,  whose  experience  with  this  hook  dates 
back  to  the  heyday  of  youth.  The  form  of  the  Limerick 
is  well  known ;  it  has  a  .straight  shank,  and  a  very  abrupt 
bend,  with  a  long,  straight,  and  hollow  point. 

The  Kirby  Carlisle,  the  Kirby  Limerick,  and,  in  fact, 
all  hooks  with  the  "  Kirby "  or  side-bend  I  can  not  rec- 
ommend for  any  kind  of  angling.  It  is  the  worst  possible 
crook  that  can  be  given  to  a  fish-hook,  being  both  unsci- 
entific and  impracticable. 

The  needle-pointed,  or  hook  without  a  beard  or  barb, 
has  been  recommended  for  fly-fishing,  but  it  will  not  an- 
swer for  the  Black  Bass.  So  long  as  the  fish  remains  in 
the  water,  and  a  proper  tension  of  line  is  maintained  by  the 
angler,  it  holds  as  well  as  any  other  hook,  but  when  the 
fish  leaps  from  the  water  in  its  struggles  to  free  itself,  like 
the  Black  Bass,  there  is  a  great  liability  of  its  shaking  out 
such  a  hook. 

Artificial  flies,  tied  on  extremely  small  barbless  and 
needle-pointed  hooks  with  a  circular  bend,  have  been  used 
in  Japan  for  centuries,  and  while  such  hooks  may  d6  for 
the  Brook  Trout,  and  fishes  closely  allied  to  it  in  habits, 
they  are  totally  unsuitable  for  the  Black  Bass,  or  any  fish 


292 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


Kirby,  or  Side-bend  Hooks. 
(Wm.  Mills  &  Son.) 


Edgar  Patent  Barbless  Hooks. 
(Wm.  Mills  &  Son.) 


hooks.  293 

that  makes  such  desperate  efforts  to  get  away,  when 
hooked. 

The  Edgar  patent  barbless  hook,  manufactured  by  Will- 
iam Mills  &  Son,  is  made  upon  a  very  different  principle, 
and  is  all  that  the  inventor  claims  for  it.  This  hook, 
while  having  no  barb,  has  a  "keeper"  which  securely 
holds  the  fish  after  it  is  hooked,  rendering  it  impossible 
for  it  to  escape,  even  witli  a  slack  line.  It  is  the  only 
"  patent "  fish-hook  that  has  any  real  merit,  though  it  seems 
to  me  like  taking  too  much  advantage  of  a  fish,  and  is 
likely  to  foster  and  encourage  a  careless  and  shiftless  style 
of  angling.  Still  it  will  no  doubt  become  quite  a  favorite 
hook  with  many.  To  my  mind  the  great  charm  of  angling 
consists  in  using  a  proper  judgment  (born  of  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  fish  and  its  habits)  in  presenting  the 
bait,  and  the  exercise  of  skill  and  science  in  hooking, 
playing,  and  landing  it. 

The  Edgar  hook  is  hand-made,  composed  of  good  and 
reliable  wire,  and  for  fresh  water  fishing  is  made  in  several 
sizes,  and  numbered  from  1  to  10,  No.  1  being  the  small- 
est. For  Black  Bass,  the  proper  sizes  are  Nos.  4,  5,  and  6 
for  bait-fishing,  and  Nos.  2  and  3,  for  fly-fishing. 


CHAPTER    XIV. 

ARTIFICIAL  FLIES. 

"  To  frame  the  little  animal,  provide 
All  the  gay  hues  that  wait  on  female  pride ; 
Let  nature  guide  thee.    Sometimes  golden  wire 
The  shining  bellies  of  the  fly  require ; 
The  peacock's  plumes  thy  tackle  must  not  fail, 
Nor  the  dear  purchase  of  the  sable's  tail. 
Each  gaudy  bird  some  slender  tribute  brings, 
And  lends  the  growing  insect  proper  wings: 
Silks  of  all  colors  must  their  aid  impart, 
And  every  fur  promote  the  fisher's  art."— Gay. 

Fly-Fishing  and  the  art  of  making  artificial  flies 
dates  back  at  least  to  the  ancient  Greeks  and  Romans. 
During  the  palmy  days  of  the  Roman  Empire,  the  rod, 
line,  hook,  and  artificial  fly  were  well  known.  Noel  de  la 
Morini6re  tells  us  that  the  lines  were  generally  made  of 
horsehair,  single,  double,  and  plaited;  and  according  to 
^Elianus  the  hair  was  colored  in  different  ways.  The 
fishing-rod  was  chosen  with  reference  to  the  supposed  weight 
of  the  fish  to  be  caught,  and  the  resistance  it  could  offer. 
The  hooks  were  of  copper  or  iron,  and  coated  with  tin. 
The  art  of  making  flies  of  feathers  and  other  materials  has, 
perhaps,  never  been  carried  further  in  our  own  time,  even 
in  England  itself.  It  is  possible  that  the  riational  love 
for  fly-fishing  was  introduced  into  Britain  by  the  Romans. 

It  is  with  some  degree  of  trepidation  that  I  approach  the 
subject  of  artificial  flies,  for  I  am  afraid  that  I  hold  some 
(294) 


ARTIFICIAL   FLIES.  295 

very  heretical  notions  on  the  subject.  But  of  one  fact  I 
am  positively  convinced,  and  that  is,  that  there  is  a  good 
deal  of  humbug  in  this  matter,  as  evidenced  in  the  many 
fine-spun  theories  and  hair-splitting  arguments  that  are 
advocated  and  advanced  (pertaining  to  the  construction 
and  use  of  artificial  flies)  by  some  anglers,  but  which  the- 
ories do  not  hold  good  in  practice, 

In  England,  more  especially,  do  anglers  proceed  to  ex- 
tremes as  theorists  in  the  matter  of  artificial  flies  for  Trout 
fishing.  They  seem  to  be  divided,  principally,  into  "  col- 
orists,"  or  those  who  think  color  of  paramount  importance 
to  form,  and  "  formalists,"  or  "entomologists,"  who  main- 
tain that  form  is  every  thing,  and  profess  to  imitate  the 
natural  fly,  in  its  proper  season,  in  every  particular  of 
form  and  tinting.  But  there  is  no  evidence  that  one  class 
is  more  successful  than  the  other,  as  anglers.  On  the  other 
hand  are  the  followers  of  Mr.  PennelPs  system,  or  plan, 
who  confine  themselves  to,  and  advocate  the  employment 
of,  but  three  "  typical  "  flies — green,  brown,  and  yellow 
palmers,  or  "  hackles  " — and  claim  that  they  are  sufficient 
for  all  practical  purposes,  and  can  be  made  available  for 
different  waters  and  seasons,  by  increasing  or  diminishing 
the  size  of  the  flies,  as  circumstances  seem  to  demand. 
While  the  adherents  to  this  latter  theory  are  fully  as  suc- 
cessful, from  all  accounts,  as  those  who  have  a  list  of  nearly 
a  thousand  named  flies  to  choose  from,  and  enjoy  the  sat- 
isfaction of  having  reduced  the  perplexing  matter  to  a  de- 
lightful simplicity,  and  of  obviating  the  troubles  of  a  re- 
peated changing  of  the  cast  of  flies  as  practiced  by  othets 
— they  must  sometimes  feel  a  regret  deep  in  their  hearts 
for  casting  down  and  sweeping  away  their  idols  and  cher- 
ished traditions,  and  to  a  certain  extent  the  poetry  of  fly- 


296  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

fishing,  by  their  iconoclastic  though  sensible  opinions  and 
practices. 

Where  fish  are  plentiful  and  in  a  "  biting  mood/'  almost 
any  fly,  be  it  never  so  rudely  tied,  and  of  the  least  possible 
resemblance  to  any  thing  in  the  insect  creation,  will  be 
successful,  even  if  clumsily  cast ;  on  the  contrary,  there  are 
times  when  the  best  made  flies,  cast  by  the  most  skillful 
artists,  are  necessary  to  induce  a  rise.  Between  these  ex- 
tremes must  we  look  for  rules  for  our  general  guidance, 
and  without  occupying  further  space  with  arguments,  pro 
and  con,  it  will  be  sufficient  to  say  that  there  are  certain 
general  rules  which  apply  to  the  character  of  the  fly  to  be 
used  at  certain  times,  and  which  rules  are  the  result  of,  and 
founded  upon,  the  experience  and  observations  of  fly-fish- 
ers for  many  generations  past. 

These  rules,  so  far  as  they  apply  to  Black  Bass  fly-fish- 
ing, are  few  and  simple  : — 

1.  Flies  should  be  small,  rather  than  large,  the  average 
Trout-fly  being  usually  large  enough. 

2.  On  bright  days,  and  with  clear,  low,  or  fine  water, 
flies  should  be  quite  small,  and  of  subdued,  dark,  or  neu- 
tral tints. 

3.  For  cloudy  days,  and  high,  turbid,  or  rough  water, 
larger  and  brighter  flies  should  be  used. 

4.  For  very  dark  days,  or  from  sunset  until  dark,  or  on 
moonlight  evenings,  gray  or  whitish  flies,  of  good  size, 
should  be  employed. 

I  shall  not  go  into  an  entomological  description  of  flies 
and  their  counterfeits,  for  it  is  neither  requisite  nor  advis- 
able, so  far  as  Bass  flies  are  coucerned.  For  those  who 
feel  an  interest  in  this  subject,  however,  I  can  recommend, 
cheerfully,  the  several  fine  works  published  in  England  on 


ARTIFICIAL  FLIES.  297 

the  construction  of  Trout  and  Salmon  flies ;  among  the  best 
of  which  are  Ronald's  "  Fly-Fisher's  Entomology,"  and 
PennelPs  "  Modern  Practical  Angler." 

I  will  merely  state  that  the  majority  of  artificial  flies 
are  of  two  kinds,  and  are  intended  to  represent  the  perfect 
winged  insects  of  certain  orders,  and  the  larvae  of  others; 
thus,  most  Trout-flies  are  the  pretended  imitations  of  some 
of  the  species  of  the  orders  Diptera  and  Neuroptera,  the 
former  comprising  the  two-winged  insects,  as  the  gnats, 
mosquitoes,  midges,  etc.,  and  the  latter  the  four-winged 
insects,  as  the  May-flies,  dragon-flies,  etc.  The  larval 
form  of  fly  is  supposed  to  represent  a  caterpillar,  and  is 
called  a  "  hackle,"  or,  more  correctly  a  "palmer."  It  must 
be  borne  in  mind  in  this  connection  that  an  artificial  fly, 
when  wet,  presents  a  much  different  appearance  from  the 
same  fly  when  dry,  and  our  flies  should  be  tied  with  refer- 
ence to  this  contingency. 

The  term  "hackle"  is  likely  to  cause  some  confusion  in 
the  mind  of  the  new  hand,  if  not  explained ;  for  it  is  sus- 
ceptible of  several  meanings,  as  used  by  anglers  and  fly- 
tyers.  The  proper  meaning  of  the  word  is  a  "feather" 
from  the  neck  or  saddle  of  the  cock,  and  known  as  a 
"neck-hackle,"  or  a  "saddle-hackle,"  as  the  case  may  be. 
These  hackle-feathers  are  used  to  imitate  the  legs  or  feet 
of  an  artificial  fly;  and  as  one  variety  of  fly  consists  only 
of  a  body  with  a  hackle  wound  spirally  around  this  body, 
from  one  end  to  the  other,  this  form  of  fly  has  come  to  be 
known,  in  this  country,  at  least,  as  "a  hackle,"  though,  as 
stated  before,  the  proper  name  is  "palmer,"  and  it  is  de- 
signed to  imitate  a  caterpillar,  for  it  is  only  a  body  bristling 
with  "legs." 

Then  there  is  the  "hackle-fly,"  which  is  a  fly  with  body, 


298  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

wings,  and,  perhaps,  a  tail,  and,  in  addition,  a  hackle- 
feather  tied  on  at  the  shoulder,  to  represent  the  legs ;  and 
most  flies  are  made  in  this  way,  though  a  few,  notably, 
some  salmon-flies,  have,  in  addition  to  wings,  tail  and 
feelers — the  entire  body  wound  with  a  hackle,  like  a  pal- 
mer. This  is  known  as  a  "combination-fly,"  and,  like 
all  salmon-flies,  does  not  pretend  to  imitate  any  thing  in 
nature. 

It  is  not  my  intention  to  give  any  instruction  in  the  art 
of  fly-tying,  nor  do  I  deem  it  at  all  expedient,  for  it  is  an 
art  that  can  not  be  taught  by  written  directions,  without 
the  aid  of  explanatory  cuts  and  diagrams,  and  even  then 
in  but  a  moderate  degree.  The  best  way  for  one  to  ob- 
tain an  insight  into  the  mysteries  of  the  art,  is  to  care- 
fully dissect  and  take  apart  the  flies  of  the  best  makers, 
for  in  the  taking  apart  one  can  acquire  more  or  less  of  the 
modus  operandi  of  the  putting  together. 

The  most  approved  hooks  for  bass-flies  are  the  Sproat, 
O'Shaughnessy,  Dublin  Limerick,  Cork  Shape  Limerick, 
and  Hollow  Point  Limerick.  I  consider  them  best  in  the 
order  named,  though  the  O'Shaughnessy  is  thought  by 
many  to  be  the  best.  It  is  the  same  in  all  respects  as  the 
Dublin  Limerick,  except  that  it  is  a  little  heavier  in  wire, 
and  it  differs  from  the  Sproat  only  in  the  barb,  the  latter 
having  a  shorter  barb,  with  the  point  straight,  or  pointing 
toward  the  extreme  end  of  the  shank,  forming  a  true 
center-draught  hook.  The  barb  of  the  O'Shaughnessy  is  a 
little  longer,  and  the  point  is  turned  slightly  outward. 
But  any  of  these  hooks  will  give  good  satisfaction.  They 
are  made  in  the  best  manner,  and  of  the.  best  material,  by 
R.  Harrison  Bartleet  &  Co.,  successors  to  Richard  Harrison 
&  Co.,  and  T.  Hemming  &  Son,  of  Redditch,  England. 


ARTIFICIAL   FLIES.  299 

The  most  suitable  sizes,  for  bass-flies,  are  Nos.  2,  3,  4  and 
5,  the  last  being  the  smallest  that  should  be  used  under 
ordinary  circumstances,  though,  for  the  smallest  flies,  Nos. 
6  and  7  may  be  employed.  These  numbers  apply  to  all 
of  the  hooks  named  above. 

Flies  may  be  tied  on  a  silk-worm  gut-snell  several 
inches  in  length,  or  may  have  simply  a  small,  short  gut- 
loop.  Those  with  loops  can  be  used  as  " stretchers"  or 
tail-flies;  but  when  used  as  "droppers"  or  bob-flies,  they 
must  be  attached  to  the  leader  by  a  half  length  of  gut,  say 
four  inches  long. 

Many  "trout-flies"  are  used,  and  with  good  effect  in 
Black  Bass  fishing,  for  really  the  form  and  color  of  the 
fly  does  not  seem  to  make  much  difference  with  the  Bass; 
he  does  not  seem  so  "fastidious,"  as  it  is  termed,  in  his 
choice  of  flies.  Most  of  the  "general"  trout-flies  are 
taken  as  patterns  for  bass-flies,  as  the  Coachman,  Pro- 
fessor, Soldier,  Grizzly  King,  Queen  of  the  Water,  King 
of  the  Water,  Ibis,  Kingdom,  Quaker,  etc.,  and  all  of  the 
palmers  or  "hackles." 

As  every  angler  will  become  partial,  sooner  or  later, 
to  certain  flies,  and  adopt  them  as  favorites  to  the  exclu- 
sion of  others,  I  deem  it  unnecessary  to  allude  to  but  few, 
except  in  a  general  way ;  and  those  that  I  shall  particular- 
ize are  such  as  I  have  used  many  times  with  most  gratify- 
ing results. 

I  have  had  more  uniform  success,  day  in  and  day  out, 
with  the  black,  brown,  red,  yellow,  and  gray  hackles 
(palmers),  than  with  the  winged-flies;  though  some  of 
the  latter  I  have  employed  with  excellent  success  for  high 
or  rough  waters,  and  those  with  light-colored  or  white 


300 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


No.  1.    Polka.  No.  2.    Coachman.       No   3.    Hackle. 

No.  4.    Bumble  Bee.    No.  5.    Abbey.  No.  6.    Grizzly  King. 


ARTIFICIAL   FLIES.  301 

wings  can  not  be  surpassed  for  twilight-fishing,  or  for  very 
gloomy  days. 

The  following  flies,  tied  for  me  by  C.  F.  Orvis,  of  Man- 
chester, Vermont,  expressly  for  Florida  waters,  I  found 
very  taking  at  suitable  times : 

McLeod. — Body,  emerald  green,  with  gold  twist;  tag, 
yellow  and  red  floss ;  wings,  dark  mottled  brown ;  tail, 
green  drake,  with  red  ibis  and  mottled  yellow;  hackle, 
yellow ;  antennae  or  feelers,  scarlet. 

Imperial. — Body,  red,  with  silver  twist;  tag,  silver; 
tail  (whisk),  red  and  white;  hackle,  black  and  white; 
wings,  large,  grayish  white,  bordered  with  black;  feelers, 
scarlet. 

Green  and  Gold. — Body,  emerald  green,  gold  twist; 
tag,  scarlet ;  tail,  white  and  red ;  hackle,  yellow ;  wings, 
olive  green. 

La  Belle. — Body,  pearly  blue,  silver  twist;  tag,  red 
and  gold;  hackle,  blue;  wings,  pure  white;  tail,  red  and 
white. 

White  and  Ibis. — Body,  pearl,  gold  tinsel;  tag,  peacock 
herl ;  tail,  red  and  white ;  wings,  white  and  scarlet ;  tag, 
red ;  hackle,  white  and  scarlet. 

Royal  Coachman. — Body,  scarlet,  and  peacock  herl;  tail, 
pin-tail  duck ;  hackle,  brown  ;  wings,  white. 

Mr.  Orvis  also  tied  the  next  two  flies,  from  patterns 
furnished  by  myself,  and  which  have  for  years  been 
favorite  flies  with  me,  when  winged  flies  are  at  all  ad- 
missible. As  I  am  the  originator  of  them,  I  have  named 
them  Oriole  and  Polka.  They  are  totally  unlike  any 
thing  in  nature  or  art,  but  the  Bass  seem  fond  of  them, 
nevertheless.  The  Polka  has  some  general  resemblance  to 
the  Abbey. 


302 


BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 


.Large  and  Small  Bass  Flies. 
(A.  B.Shipley  &  Son.) 


Flies  on  Edgar's  Barbless  Hooks. 
(Wm.  Mills  &  Son.) 


ARTIFICIAL    FLIES.  303 

Oriole. — Body,  black,  with  gold  tinsel;  hackle,  large, 
and  black ;  wings,  bright  yellow ;  tail,  mixed  black,  and 
white. 

Polka. — Body,  scarlet,  gold  twist;  hackle,  red;  wings, 
black  with  white  spots  (guinea  hen  or  woodpecker) ;  tail, 
brown  and  white,  mixed. 

The  flies  which  follow  are  part  of  an  assortment  tied 
by  Abbey  &  Imbrie,  and  have  been  remarkably  and  un- 
usually successful  with  me,  whenever  winged  flies  were 
called  for: 

Professor. — Body,  yellow ;  hackle  (legs),  golden  brown  ; 
tail,  scarlet  ibis ;  wings,  yellow,  mottled. 

Queen  of  the  Water. — Body,  dark  yellow,  gold  tinsel ; 
hackle,  red ;  wings,  mallard,  mottled. 

Grizzly  King. — Body,  green  ;  hackle,  gray  ;  tail,  red  ; 
wings,  pin-tail  duck  or  mallard. 

Soldier. — Body,  scarlet ;  hackle,  red  ;  wings,  gray. 

Montreal.  —  Body,  red;  hackle,  scarlet;  wings,  wild 
turkey. 

Governor  Alvord. — Body,  peacock  herl ;  hackle,  red  ;  tail, 
red  ibis;  under  wings,  brown,  upper  wings,  drab. 

Seth  Green. — Body,  green,  with  yellow  stripe;  hackle, 
red;  wings,  brown  (woodcock). 

Abbey. — Body,  scarlet,  gold  twist ;  hackle,  red ;  tail, 
golden  pheasant ;  wings,  pin-tail  duck. 

Ferguson. — Body,  yellow,  gold  twist;  hackle,  green; 
tail,  peacock,  yellow  and  scarlet;  wings,  yellow  and 
scarlet,  and  wild  turkey. 

Kingdom. — Body,  white,  striped  with  green ;  hackle, 
red ;  wings,  woodcock  (brown). 

Gold  Spinner. — Body,  orange,  gold  tinsel ;  hackle,  light 
red ;  wings,  gray. 


304  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

Captain. — Body,  gray,  and  peacock  herl ;  hackle,  red ; 
tail,  scarlet,  green  and  wood-duck ;  wings,  gray. 

Ibis. — Body,  scarlet  mohair,  silver  twist;  tail,  hackle, 
and  wings  of  the  red  ibis. 

The  following  flies  are  also  good  ones,  some  being  great 
favorites  with  certain  anglers: 

Reuben  Wood. — Body,  white,  with  red  head;  hackle, 
brown;  wings  and  tail,  rayed  feathers  of  mallard. 

Dr.  Fowler. — Body,  white  ;  tail,  scarlet ;  hackle,  scarlet 
and  white ;  wings,  red  ibis  and  white. 

Green  Drake. — Body,  white,  ribbed  with  black ;  hackle, 
ginger;  tail,  dark;  wings,  mottled  green  and  yellow. 

Gray  Drake. — Body,  dark  gray ;  hackle,  gray ;  tail, 
dark;  wings,  gray  (mallard). 

Brown  Drake. — Body,  golden  brown ;  hackle,  brown ; 
tail,  dark  brown ;  wings,  golden  brown. 

Holberton. — Body,  orange,  gold  tinsel ;  hackle,  peacock 
herl  and  scarlet;  tail,  wood-duck  and  scarlet;  under 
wings,  red  ibis  and  yellow;  upper  wings,  peacock  and 
wood-duck. 

Shoemaker.  —  Body,  alternate  rings  of  salmon  and 
gray ;  hackle,  light  red ;  tail,  wood-duck ;  wings,  mallard 

(gray)- 

Superior. — Body,  dark  claret;  hackle,  brown;  tail,  blue 
macaw ;  wings,  wild  turkey. 

General  Hooker. — Body,  alternate  yellow  and  green 
rings ;  hackle,  red ;  tail,  wood-duck ;  wings,  tail  feathers 
of  ruffed  grouse. 

Quaker. — Body,  gray;  hackle,  yellow;  wings,  horned 
owl's  wing. 

King  of  the  Water. — Body,  scarlet,  gold  tinsel  ;  hackle, 
red ;  wings,  bright  mottled,  mallard. 


ARTIFICIAL    FLIES.  305 

Green  Mantle. — Body  and  hackle,  bright  green ;  wings 
and  tail,  mottled,  mallard. 

Henshall. — Body,  peacock  herl ;  hackle,  white  hairs  from 
deer's  tail;  tail,  two  or  three  long  fibers  of  peacock-tail 
feathers;  wings,  light  drab  (dove). 

Oconomowoc. — Body,  creamy  yellow  ;  hackle,  white  and 
dun  (deer's  tail);  tail,  ginger;  wings,  cinnamon  (wood- 
cock). 

The  White  Moths,  or  Millers,  are  excellent  flies  for  moon- 
light evenings,  or  at  dusk.  They  may  be  pure  white,  or 
all  white  with  yellow  body,  or  all  white  with  gray  wings. 
The  bodies  should  be  made  full  and  fluffy. 

The  hackles j  or  palmers,  are  made  with  various-hued 
bodies,  as  black,  green,  red,  or  yellow,  or  peacock  herl, 
with  either  black,  red,  brown,  yellow  or  gray  legs.  A 
pure  white  hackle  is  very  killing  about  dark.  A  most 
excellent  hackle  is  made  from  the  hairs  of  a  deer's  tail, 
somewhat  in  the  fashion  of  the  "  bob,"  so  extensively  used 
in  Florida  and  Texas. 

The  three  "typical"  hackles  of  Mr.  H.  Cholmondely- 
Pennell,  and  which  he  uses  to  the  exclusion  of  all  other 
flies,  are  described  as  follows: 

Green. — Dark -green  body ;  very  dark-green  hackle  for 
both  legs  and  whisk. 

Brown. —  Body,  dark  orange;  fiery  or  cinnamon-brown 
hackle  for  legs  and  whisk. 

Yellow.  —  Body,  golden  yellow;  darkish  golden-olive 
hackle  for  legs  and  whisk. 

These  flies  are  admirable  for  Black  Bass,  however  they 
may  be  for  Trout,  and  the  angler  who  carries  but  a  lim- 
ited assortment  in  his  fly-hook  should  include  these  "hack- 
les," in  various  sizes ;  they  will  not  disappoint  him. 
26 


306  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

As  I  have  described  quite  enough  for  the  beginner,  and, 
perhaps,  too  many,  I  will  only  allude  to  some  by  name, 
which  will  often  be  found  equal  to  the  above,  and,  for 
some  waters,  superior : 

Bumble  Bee,  Jungle  Cock,  Hoskins,  California,  Moose-r 
head,  Widow,  Academy,  Blue  Jay,  Page,  Yellow  Sally, 
Blue  and  Drab,  Pheasant,  Raven,  Claret,  Tippulium, 
Davis,  Tanner,  White  and  Green,  Motley,  Premier,  Black 
and  Tan,  Black  and  Gold,  Purple  Bass,  Fire  Fly,  Little 
Egg,  Gray  Coflin,  Brown  Coflin,  Sand  Fly,  Stone  Fly, 
Hawthorn,  Dark  Mackerel,  etc.,  etc. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  angler  has  quite  an  extensive 
list  to  choose  from,  for  most  of  the  flies  named  are  kept  in 
stock  by  our  best  dealers.  As  a  rule,  the  smallest  bass- 
flies  should  be  selected  for  general  fishing;  and  those  of 
subdued  tints  will  be  found  the  most  successful,  saving  on 
the  exceptional  occasions  already  referred  to.  As  has 
been  already  mentioned,  most  of  the  flies  named  are  pat- 
terned after  trout-flies  of  the  same  names;  and,  while 
some  of  the  latter  are  large  enough,  quite  a  number  are 
too  small,  and  must  be  enlarged  somewhat  for  bass-flies. 

But  there  are  flies,  and  enough,  to  suit  those  of  every 
taste,  even  should  the  angler  be  so  fastidious  and  dainty  as 
"  Ye  Sunberry  Fisher,"  as  described  by  Punch : 

"Ye  Sunberrye  fysher  has  flies  of  all  feathers, 
For  all  sorts  of  seasons,  in  all  sorts  of  weathers. 
Flies  when  ye  Springtide  is  blustrie  and  showerie, 
Flies  when  ye  Summer  is  grassie  and  bowerie, 
Flies  when  ye  Autumn  is  golden  and  grainie, 
For  hot  weather,  cold  weather,  mistie,  or  rainie. 
Red-spinner,  palmer,  black  peacock  and  gray, 
Yellow  dun,  golden  dun,  March  brown,  and  May, 
Sand-fly  and  stone-fly,  and  alder  and  gnat, 
Black  midge  and  marlow  bug — all  round  his  hat." 


CHAPTER  XV. 

ARTIFICIAL  BAITS. 

"And  therefore  I  have,  which  I  will  show  to  you,  an  artificial  minnow  that 
will  catch  Trout  as  well  as  an  artificial  fly ;  and  it  was  made  by  a  handsome 
woman  that  had  a  fine  hand,  and  a  live  minnow  lying  by  her."— Izaak 
Walton. 

Trolling-Baits — Spoon-Baits. 

The  most  commonly-used  trolling-bait  for  Black  Bass 
is  the  spoon-bait  or  trolling-spoon.  It  is  now  made  of 
all  shapes,  and  many  sizes;  but  all  are  made  upon  the 
same  general  principle,  and  are  merely  variations  of  the 
original  trolling-spoon,  which  was  fashioned  like  the 
bowl  of  a  spoon,  a  single  hook  being  soldered  to  one  end, 
and  a  hole  drilled  in  the  other  end  for  attaching  the  line. 

By  trailing  or  trolling  such  a  spoon  at .  the  end  of  a 
line  from  a  moving  boat,  it  revolves  gracefully  beneath  the 
surface  of  the  water,  the  burnished  surfaces  flashing  at  each 
revolution,  and  proves  quite  an  effective  lure. 

Manufacturers  vie  with  each  other  in  producing  novel 
shapes  and  so-called  improvements,  but  there  is  nothing 
better  than  the  original  spoon-bowl  with  a  single  hook. 
The  double  and  triple  hooks,  usually  attached  to  the  mod- 
ern spoons,  are  liable  to  be  crushed  and  broken  by  the 
jaws  of  a  large  fish,  if  hooked  in  a  position  favorable  to 
this  contingency. 

Trolling-spoons  are  all  made  with  a  concave  and  a  con- 
vex surface ;  the  latter  surface  being  brightly  polished  or 

(307) 


308 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 


ARTIFICIAL   BAITS.  309 

burnished,  while  the  former  is  generally  painted,  and  usu- 
ally of  a  red  color.  They  are  made  of  tin  or  brass,  and 
often  plated  with  nickel,  silver  or  gold;  but  so  long  as 
spoon-baits  are  brightly  burnished,  it  matters  not  what 
the  material  is,  for  the  Black  Bass  is  not  a  judge  of 
metals,  but  will  grab  at  any  thing  bright  and  in  mo- 
tion. 

The  depending  hook  or  hooks  may  be  plain,  or  dressed 
with  a  tuft  of  feathers  or  braid,  called,  by  courtesy,  a 
"fly;"  but  these  fanciful  additions,  while  pleasing  to  the 
angler's  eye,  do  not  enhance  the  "taking"  qualities  of 
the  lure,  for  it  is  the  flashing  and  glancing  of  the  revolv- 
ing spoon  that  attracts  the  fish;  and  it  can  not  be  made 
more  effective  by  these  ornamental  appendages,  or,  as  I 
have  sometimes  seen,  by  the  addition  of  a  live  minnow, 
or  a  strip  of  fat  pork! 

One  or  two  brass  swivels  should  always  be  attached  to 
the  spoon-bait  or  line,  to  prevent  twisting  or  kinking. 
Particular  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  hooks  of  troll- 
ing-spoons,  for  many  of  them  are  of  inferior  quality, 
though  the  American  spoons  are,  as  a  rule,  furnished 
with  better  hooks  than  the  English  baits  of  the  same 
grades. 

As  a  rule,  most  persons  use  too  large  spoons  for  Black 
Bass,  using  generally  Pickerel  baits.  For  the  Black  Bass, 
the  spoon  should  be  no  larger  than  the  bowl  of  an  ordinary 
sized  tea-spoon,  for  trolling  with  the  hand-line;  and  when 
trolling  with  the  rod,  they  should  be  still  smaller. 

Abbey  &  Imbrie's  new  Fluted  Spoon-Bait  is  a  very 
finely  finished  and  attractive  bait ;  it  is  of  the  same  shape 
as  the  original  spoon,  but  with  a  fluted  section,  which  adds 
very  much  to  its  attractiveness  when  spinning;  the  hooks 


310 


BOOK   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 


1.  Oval. 


Trolling-Spoons  for  Hand-line. 
(J.  H.  Mann.) 
2.  Perfect  Kevolving. 


3.  Kidney  0 


ARTIFICIAL  BAITS. 


311 


Spoons  for  Hod  Trolling. 
(J.  H.  Mann.) 


1  and  2.  Egg. 


3  and  4.  Kidney. 


312  BOOK    OF   THE  BLACK    BASS. 

are  of  good  quality  and  reliable.  It  is  made  in  a  number 
of  sizes  for  different  species  of  fish  ;  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  are 
the  best  sizes  for  Black  Bass.  This  firm  also  manufactures 
a  spoon  of  shell  or  mother-of-pearl,  which  is  a  beautiful 
and  effective  bait,  almost  too  pretty  to  use  for  such  a  pur- 
pose. The  proper  sizes  to  employ  are  those  which  corre- 
spond with  the  sizes  above  given,  of  their  fluted  spoon, 
viz :  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4.  They  also  make  Skittering  Spoons 
of  both  pearl  and  metal. 

J.  H.  Mann,  of  Syracuse,  New  York,  manufactures  a 
line  of  superior  trolling  baits  ;  the  best  grades  are  carefully 
finished  and  thoroughly  reliable,  with  good  hooks  attached. 
For  hand  trolling,  his  Perfect  Revolving  Spoon,  No.  20, 
with  controlling  link;  Oval,  No.  16;  Kidney  Shape,  No. 
6 J ;  and  Egg,  No.  3J,  are  all  good  baits.  For  rod  trolling, 
his  Trout  Spoons,  Egg,  No.  1 ;  Kidney,  Nos.  2  and  3,  are 
all  that  can  be  desired. 

The  Improved  Trolling  Spoons  of  L.  S.  Hill  &  Co., 
Grand  Rapids,  Michigan,  are  articles  of  real  merit.  They 
are  made  in  the  semblance  of  a  minnow,  the  spoon  being 
supported  by  a  spiral  spring,  held  in  position  by  a  "  U " 
shaped  guide,  and  readily  yields  to  pressure.  It  finds  its 
proper  circle  according  to  the  speed  given  it,  and  revolv- 
ing either  way  prevents  the  line  from  twisting  so  much  as 
with  some  other  spoons.  Nos.  1  and  1J  are  the  proper 
sizes  for  Black  Bass. 

Other  trolling-spoons  or  baits  are  made  in  fanciful  shapes, 
and  variously  styled  minnows,  propellers,  spinners,  etc., 
but  are  no  better,  and  many  of  them  not  so  good  as  those 
above  mentioned ;  for  the  nearer  a  spinning  spoon-bait 
approaches  the  original  spoon,  already  referred  to,  the 
more  practical  and  useful  it  becomes. 


ARTIFICIAL  BAITS. 


313 


Pearl  Minnow. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


j'MSw^Z 


Hill's  Improved  Trolling  Baits. 
(L.  S.  Hill  &  Co.) 


27 


314 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 


Flexible  Protean  Minnow. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


Artificial  Flexible  Minnow. 
(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


Caledonian  Minnow. 
(Chas.  F.  Orvis.) 


Jointed  Metal  Minnow. 
(Abbey  &  Imbrie.) 


artificial  baits.  315 

Artificial  Minnows. 

Artificial  minnows  for  trolling,  spinning,  or  casting,  are 
made  of  metal,  glass,  and  rubber,  large  and  small,  and 
gilded,  silvered,  or  painted  in  attractive  ways.  Some  of 
them  are  quite  successful  as  baits,  while  others  are  com- 
paratively worthless.  They  are  made  both  in  our  own 
country  and  in  England,  and  as  their  numbers,  and  styles, 
and  forms  are  constantly  increasing,  I  do  not  deem  it  ad- 
visable to  particularize  or  give  special  descriptions. 
While  I  have  experimented  with  many  of  them,  I  do  not 
employ  them  in  angling  for  the  Black  Bass. 

For  trolling  or  spinning,  none  of  them  are  so  effective 
as  the  spoon-baits;  while  for  casting,  they  are  not  to  be 
compared  with  the  natural  minnow,  alive  or  dead.  I  will 
merely  name  some  of  those  that  are  best  known,  and  more 
generally  used :  Caledonian,  Phantom,  Flexible,  Jointed, 
Devon,  Protean,  Shadow,  Pectoral,  Unique,  Professor, 
Metal,  Glass,  Pearl,  Silver,  and  Gilt  minnows,  and  the 
Dace,  Gudgeon,  Trout,  and  Kill  Devil. 

Artificial  Insects,  etc. 

Artificial  insects,  as  bees,  grasshoppers,  crickets,  beetles, 
May-flies,  dragon-flies,  and  likewise  artificial  frogs,  craw- 
fish, hegramites,  shrimps,  worms,  etc.,  are  now  made  which 
resemble  the  original  creatures  very  closely.  They  are  to 
be  used  in  surface  fishing,  in  the  same  way  as  artificial  flies, 
and  must  be  kept  in  constant  motion,  otherwise  the  Bass 
soon  discover  the  deception ;  but  if  skillfully  used,  they 
are  often  quite  successful  baits.  They  certainly  have  the 
recommendation  of  cleanliness  and  general  convenience  as 
compared  with  their  original  prototypes. 


316 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


Artificial  Helgramite. 
(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


Artificial  Insects. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


Artificial  Crawfish. 
(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


artificial  baits.  317 

The  Bob. 

Of  all  baits  or  lures  used  iu  Black  Bass  angling,  one  of 
the  rudest  in  structure,  the  most  nondescript  in  appearance, 
yet  one  of  the  most  effective  and  killing  in  actual  practice, 
is  the  "  bob  "  of  the  extreme  Southern  States. 

It  has  been  in  use  in  Florida  for  more  than  a  century, 
and  was  first  described  by  that  quaint  old  naturalist,  Ber- 
tram, in  1764.  His  description  and  method  of  using  it,  are 
identical  with  the  "  bob  "  and  its  use  at  the  present  day  in 
Florida,  Louisiana,  and  Texas. 

The  "bob"  is  composed  of  a  triple  hook,  or  three  hooks 
tied  back  to  back,  and  invested  with  a  portion  of  a  deer's 
tail,  in  the  manner  of  a  large,  bushy,  hackle ;  often  inter- 
mixed with  red  and  white  feathers,  or  strips  of  scarlet 
cloth.  It  forms  a  tassel  or  tuft,  somewhat  similar  to  the 
so-called  triple  hook  "fly"  attached  to  most  trolling  spoons. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

NATURAL  BAITS. 

"And,  good  master,  tell  me  what  baits  more  you  remember."— Izaak 
Walton. 

Minnows. 

Among  anglers,  the  term  minnow  is  used  to  express  any- 
small  fish  used  for  bait,  whether  adult  fish  of  certain  fami- 
lies, or  the  young  of  others.  But  the  term  properly  be- 
longs to  the  family  Cyprinid^e,  which  comprises  numer- 
ous genera,  and  some  of  the  genera  are  composed  of  many 
species. 

The  most  generally  diffused  species  are  Luxilis  cornutus, 
the  common  shiner;  Semotilus  corporalis,  the  common 
chub;  and  Ceratichthys  biguttatis,  the  horned  chub.  The 
shiner  is,  by  all  odds,  the  best  bait  for  the  Black  Bass,  be- 
ing quite  silvery,  as  its  name  implies,  and  shows  well  in 
the  water.  It  is  not  so  hardy,  or  long-lived,  on  the  hook, 
as  the  chub  ;  but  on  account  of  its  white  and  silvery  ap- 
pearance it  is  especially  desirable  for  turbid  or  rough  water, 
and  on  cloudy  or  dark  days,  though  it  is,  for  that  matter, 
a  good  bait  at  all  times. 

The  chubs  are  good  bait  on  bright  days  with  clear  and 
still  water ;  they  have  rather  tough  mouths,  endure  the 
hook  well,  and  are  rather  more  lively  than  shiners,  and  on 
these  accounts  are  preferred  by  many  anglers. 

The  young  of  some  of  the  species  of  Catostomidce  (suck- 
(318) 


NATURAL   BAITS.  319 

ers),  are  also  very  good  baits  on  sunny  days,  with  clear  and 
low  water;  their  tough,  leathery,  and  projecting  lips  are 
well  adapted  for  the  hook.  They  are  quite  hardy  and 
lively. 

The  young  of  Perca  americana  (yellow  perch),  are  ex- 
cellent baits  on  ponds  and  lakes,  early  or  late  in  the 
season ;  especially  if  the  spinous  dorsal  fin  be  clipped  off 
with  a  sharp  knife,  or  a  pair  of  scissors.  They  show  well 
in  the  water,  and  often  prove  an  attractive  lure  during 
the  seasons  mentioned. 

As  a  rule,  good-sized  minnows  should  be  employed,  say 
from  three  to  five  inches  long.  The  large  minnows  are 
livelier,  more  hardy,  and  live  much  longer  on  the  hook 
than  the  small  ones.  A  half-pound  "Bass  will  take  the 
largest  minnow  as  easily  and  as  readily  as  the  smallest 
one,  so  there  is  no  fear  of  using  minnows  too  large.  It  is 
true,  that  at  times,  the  largest  Bass  seem  to  take  to  the 
smallest  minnows,  but  on  these  exceptional  occasions,  they 
are  off  their  feed,  to  a  certain  extent;  for,  usually,  the 
largest  Bass  takes  the  largest  minnows. 

In  baiting  with  the  minnow,  the  hook  should  be  entered 
through  the  lower  lip  and  out  through  the  nostril ;  if  this 
is  carefully  done,  the  minnow  will  live  a  comparatively 
long  time.  Sometimes,  with  small  minnows,  the  hook  is 
passed  out  through  the  socket  of  the  eye,  care  being  taken 
not  to  injure  the  eye-ball.  Another  excellent  way,  espe- 
cially with  large  minnows,  is  to  pass  the  hook  through  both 
lips,  the  lower  one  first,  and  out  through  the  upper  one. 
When  minnows  are  hooked  in  either  of  these  ways,  a  dead 
one  is  often  as  good  as  a  live  one,  for  the  moving  of  the 
line  causes  them  to  move  in  a  natural  manner.  Where 
the  water  is  without  a  current,  as  on  ponds  or  lakes,  and 


t320  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

where  the  minnows  are  quite  small,  they  may  be,  for  still 
fishing,  but  under  no  other  circumstances,  hooked  just 
back  of  the  dorsal  fin,  and  just  above  the  backbone.  But 
in  hooking  a  minnow  in  this  way,  the  angler  should  bear 
in  mind  the  injunction  of  Father  Izaak,  in  reference  to 
hooking  the  live  frog:  use  him  as  though  you  loved  him. 
Chubs  and  suckers  should  always  be  hooked  through  the 
lips,  which  are  comparatively  tough. 

An  excellent  method  for  affixing  the  minnow  to  the 
hook,  in  still-fishing — for  it  will  not  answer  at  all  for 
casting — and  one  that  will  well  pay  the  angler  for  the  extra 
time  and  trouble  involved,  is  as  follows : 

"Take  a  piece  of  cotton  thread  about  a  foot  long,  tie  the 
middle  of  it  tight  under  the  barb  of  the  hook ;  now  take 
the  minnow  in  the  left  hand,  lay  the  hook  on  its  side,  the 
barb  up  by  the  shoulder  of  the  bait,  with  the  shaft  along 
the  belly ;  now  pass  the  thread  over  the  shoulder  and 
around  under  the  fish,  and  tie  the  shaft  of  the  hook,  then 
pass  the  thread  along  the  shaft  until  under  and  behind  the 
back  fin,  then  tie  tightly  around  the  shaft  of  the  hook,  then 
pass  the  thread  on  each  side  of  the  fish  up  to  the  back,  just 
behind  the  back  fin,  and  tie  with  a  bow  knot.  This  fastens 
the  bait  securely  without  hurting  it,  and  you  will  have  as 
lively  a  bait  as  ever  used  for  still-fishing." 

The  angler  can  not  be  too  careful  of  his  minnows.  The 
water  in  the  bucket  should  be  frequently  changed,  without 
waiting  for  them  to  appear  at  the  surface  to  breathe — the 
usually  accepted  indication  to  change  the  water — for  their 
vitality  and  strength  are  already  impaired  when  this  takes 
place,  and  many  of  them  can  not  be  revived  afterwards. 
When  available,  especially  in  very  hot  weather,  a  piece  of 
ice  should  be  placed  on  the  top  of  the  minnow  pail,  and 


NATURAL   BAITS.  321 

covered  with  a  woolen  cloth.  A  little  salt,  added  to  the 
water  in  the  pail,  is  very  beneficial  and  adds  to  the  preser- 
vation of  minnows. 

It  is  a  good  plan,  when  practicable,  to  use  two  minnow- 
buckets,  one  of  which,  containing  most  of  the  minnows  as 
a  reserve,  should  be  sunk  in  the  water,  and  a  few  minnows 
taken  out,  as  needed,  for  the  bucket  in  use.  In  this  way 
the  entire  stock  can  be  utilized  in  good  condition. 

In  carrying  minnows  to  any  distance,  they  should  not  be 
too  much  crowded  in  the  pail ;  fifty  minnows  is  enough  for 
a  five-gallon  bucket.  When  more  than  this  number  is  re- 
quired, additional  pails  should  be  provided.  A  handful 
of  water-weeds  in  the  pail  will  prevent  the  minnows  from 
being  so  much  injured,  as  they  otherwise  would  be,  when 
conveyed  over  rough  roads. 

When  it  is  not  practicable  to  allow  of  a  frequent  chang- 
ing of  the  water,  the  latter  may  be  oxygenized  or  aerated 
by  inserting  a  rubber,  or  other  tube,  well  toward  the  bot- 
tom of  the  pail,  and  pumping  air  through  it  by  means  of 
a  rubber  bulb,  such  as  is  attached  to  a  pump-syringe.  It 
is  worse  than  useless  to  blow  through  such  a  tube  with  the 
mouth ;  for  the  breath,  being  deprived  of  its  oxygen  in 
the  lungs,  carbonic  acid  gas  takes  it  place,  which  is  poi- 
sonous to  the  minnows;  yet  I  have  frequently  seen  this 
done  by  individuals,  who  erroneously  supposed  that  they 
were  freshening  the  water,  because  of  the  numerous  bub- 
bles produced. 

The  Helgramite. 

The  larva  of  the  horned  corydalis  {Corydalis  cornutd), 
an  insect  belonging  to  the  order  Neuroptera,  is  variously 


322  BOOK    OF  THE   BLACK    BASS. 

called  "  helgramite,"  "  dobson,"  "  grampus/'  M  dobsell," 
"hellion,"  " kill-devil/'  "crawler/'  and  other  euphonious 
names.  The  male  of  the  perfect,  winged-insect  has  long 
antennae,  or  horns,  from  which  its  specific  and  common 
names  are  derived. 

It  exists  for  several  years  in  the  larval  state,  when  it 
is  generally  known  as  the  "  helgramite/'  being  a  curious, 
flattened,  and,  to  most  persons,  a  repulsive-looking  worm, 
growing  to  a  length  of  two  or  three  inches,  and  about  a 
half  inch  in  width.  It  has  a  head  and  pincers  resembling, 
somewhat,  those  of  a  beetle;  has  six  legs  along  the  thorax; 
while  the  body  is  composed  of  a  number  of  rings,  to  which 
are  attached  fringes  bearing  some  likeness  to  small  legs; 
the  body  terminates  in  two  short  appendages,  or  tails,  on 
each  of  which  are  two  small  hooks.  The  color  is  a  dark, 
dirty,  brown. 

The  helgramite,  by  means  of  its  hooks  and  pincers, 
clings  readily  and  tenaciously  to  different  objects,  and 
hides  securely  under  rocks,  bowlders,  driftwood,  logs,  etc., 
even  in  swift-running  streams.  They  may  be  found  cling- 
ing to  the  decaying  timbers  of  old  dams  and  bridges,  and 
in  the  crevices  of  submerged  stone-work  at  these  places. 
They  are  found  on  the  "riffles"  of  streams,  under  the 
bowlders  and  flat  stones,  and  may  be  taken  in  these  situa- 
tions with  the  minnow-net,  by  stretching  the  latter  across 
the  foot  of  the  riffle;  when  the  stones  above  the  net  are 
turned  over,  the  helgramite,  being  thus  disturbed,  curls 
himself  into  a  ball  and  drifts  into  the  net. 

They  can  be  found,  in  fact,  hiding  under  almost  any 
submerged  object  in  the  shallow  portions  of  streams. 
They  feed  upon  decaying  wood  and  vegetation,  and  other 
substances.     They  can  be  kept  alive  for  almost  any  length 


NATURAL   BAITS.  323 

of  time,  in  a  vessel  half  filled  with  wet  pieces  of  rotten 
wood,  and  damp  aquatic  vegetation.  In  this  way  the  angler 
can  always  have  a  ready  supply  of  bait  on  hand. 

The  helgramite  is  hooked  by  inserting  the  point  of  the 
hook  under  the  cap  or  shell  that  covers  the  neck,  from 
behind  forward,  and  bringing  it  through  next  to  the  head. 
It  is  a  capital  bait  for  the  Black  Bass,  especially  when  the 
Bass  are  found  on  the  riffles  or  rapids,  and  in  shallow 
water. 

The  Crawfish. 

The  crawfish  (Cambarus),  sometimes  called  crayfish  and 
crab,  is,  in  some  localities,  and  at  certain  seasons,  a  good 
bait,  especially  when  casting  its  shell,  when  it  is  called  a 
"  peeler,"  or  a  "  shedder."  The  crawfish  exists  wherever 
the  Black  Bass  is  found,  in  greater  or  less  quantities.  In 
waters  where  it  is  very  abundant  it  forms  an  excellent  and 
killing  bait. 

"  Distinct  species  live  in  the  mountain  streams  and  in  the 
springs  at  their  sources.  Some  frequent  the  marshes  of 
the  lowlands  (both  the  fresh  and  salt  marshes),  either  near 
the  streams,  or  adjacent  to  the  bays,  sounds,  or  ocean. 
Some  occur  beneath  stones  in  rivers,  creeks,  or  branches; 
in  the  muddy  basis ;  beneath  stones  in  the  rapids ;  among 
grass  and  weeds  in  more  quiet  places,  and  in  coves;  under 
shelving  grassy  banks ;  in  holes  at  the  bottom  of  ponds, 
lakes,  dams,  and  mill-races.  Others  bore  holes  in  the 
meadows,  6r  even  in  the  hill-tops  near  water;  and  in 
bringing  up  the  mud  and  clay  from  their  tube-like  holes, 
pile  it  as  a  chimney  at  the  entrance.  These  species  at 
particular  times  place  a  plug  of  clay  in  the  orifice  of  the 


324  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

chimney  and  seal  themselves  in  for  a  certain  length  of 
time.  Still  others  reside  in  the  drains  and  mud  of  the 
rice-fields  and  plantations  of  the  South,  and  sometimes 
burrow  through  the  embankments,  allowing  the  water  to 
flood  the  region." 

The  crawfish  is  used  as  a  bait  for  the  Black  Bass  only 
in  still-fishing,  when  it  serves  a  good  purpose.  In  its 
usual  state  it  should  be  hooked  through  the  tail,  but 
"  peelers "  may  be  hooked  through  the  head  or  body. 
They  may  be  kept  alive  a  long  time  in  damp  aquatic  grass, 
moss,  or  weeds. 

Grasshoppers  and  Crickets. 

Grasshoppers  and  crickets  are  at  times  very  taking  baits. 
They  should  be  used  as  surface  baits  entirely,  and  should 
be  employed  only  when  a  brisk  breeze  is  blowing,  and  on 
the  windward  side  of  the  water ;  for  it  is  at  such  times 
that  they  are  blown  into  the  water,  and  the  Bass  are  then 
on  the  look  out  for  them.  The  water,  also,  being  broken 
into  ripples  by  the  breeze,  enhances  the  angler's  chances 
of  success.  These  insects  should  be  hooked  through  the 
upper  part  of  the  thorax  or  body,  small  hooks  being  used. 

Frogs. 

On  marshy  streams  and  ponds,  young  frogs  are  some- 
times used  for  baits,  with  good  success,  in  still-fishing. 
They  may  be  hooked  through  the  lips,  or  through  the  skin 
of  the  back.  They  should  be  of  small  size,  and  kept  in 
pretty  constant  motion,  as  they  are  inclined  to  bury  them- 
selves in  the  mud,  or  hide  under  stones,  on  the  bottom, 


NATURAL   BAITS.  325 

or  crawl  out  upon  objects  on  the  surface,  if  left  too  long 
to  their  own  devices. 

Salt  water  shrimps,  when  they  can  be  procured,  are 
good  baits  for  Black  Bass,  alive  or  pickled,  that  is,  pre- 
served in  salt  or  strong  brine. 

I  have  seen  Black  Bass  caught  with  cut  bait,  and  even 
the  humble  "  wum ;"  but  the  angler  who  is  reduced  to 
such  severe  straits,  is  more  to  be  pitied  than  envied.  It 
would  be  in  better  taste  to  offer  pork  to  a  Mussulman,  or 
pdte  de  foie  gras  to  a  tramp. 


) 


326 


Book  of  the  black  bass. 


Holberton  Ply-Book. 

(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

MISCELLANEOUS   IMPLEMENTS. 

"  My  rod  and  my  line,  my  float  and  my  lead, 

My  hook  and  my  plummet,  my  whetstone  and  knife, 
My  basket,  my  baits,  both  living  and  dead, 

My  net  and  my  meat,  for  that  is  the  chief: 
Then  I  must  have  thread,  and  hairs  green  and  small, 
With  mine  angling-purse,  and  so  you  have  all." 

— Izaak  Walton. 

The  Fly-Book. 

Among  the  necessary  adjuncts  to  the  fly-fisher's  outfit 
is  the  fly-book,  whose  pages,  well-filled,  are  more  interest- 
ing to  the  angler  than  the  best  written  pages  of  classic 
lore,  poetry,  or  fiction.  Fly-books  are  now  made  of  many 
patterns  and  sizes,  and  of  various  grades  of  quality  and 
material.  They  are  constructed  of  calf-skin,  pig-skin, 
Morocco,  or  Russia-leather,  with  parchment  leaves  for 
holding  the  flies.  Those  with  the  "  Hyde,"  or  metal-clip, 
for  keeping  the  flies  separate  and  at  full  length,  are  the 
best  and  most  satisfactory,  for  obvious  reasons.  They  are 
made  in  various  lengths,  from  five  to  seven  inches;  and 
of  a  capacity/  for  holding  from  three  dozen  to  a  gross 
of  flies. 

There  is  nothing  neater,  better,  or  more  substantial  in 
this  line  than  Abbey  &  Imbrie's  "Southside"  fly-book. 
It  is  made  of  Russia-leather,  with  strap  and  patent  clasp ; 
has  double  parchment  leaves,  well-stitched,  and  is  provided 

(327) 


328 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


Creel,  or  Fish-Basket. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Sou.) 


Minnow-Seine. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


MISCELLANEOUS   IMPLEMENTS.  329 

with  the  metal-clip,  and  two  leaves  of  heavy  porous  cloth 
for  drying  wet  flies.  It  is  also  furnished  with  large  pockets, 
and  compartments  for  leaders,  and  snelled  hooks.  It  has 
a  capacity  for  one  hundred  flies,  and  is  made  of  a  uniform 
quality,  which  is  of  the  highest  grade. 

The  "  Holberton  "  fly-book,  of  Conroy,  Bissett  &  Mai- 
leson,  is  one  similar  in  style  and  construction,  and  is  a 
first  rate  article.  The  price  of  this  book  depends  on  the 
material  used  in  its  construction,  its  capacity  for  a  greater 
or  less  number  of  flies,  and  the  length  of  the  book.  One 
holding  four  dozen  flies  is  large  enough  for  all  practical 
purposes  in  Black  Bass  angling. 

Creel,  or  Fish-Basket.  • 

For  fly-fishing,  or  bait-fishing,  when  wading  a  stream 
or  fishing  from  the  bank,  a  creel  is  very  useful  and  con- 
venient for  holding  the  angler's  catch.  Fish  are  preserved 
in  much  better  shape,  condition  and  appearance  by  its  use, 
and  it  is  altogether  more  satisfactory  than  the  shiftless 
way  of  "  stringing "  the  Bass,  and  allowing  them  to  be- 
come water-soaked  and  flabby,  by  immersing  the  "string" 
in  the  warm  and  shallow  water  near  the  shore,  or  even 
by  "  towing  "  them  after  the  angler,  if  wading. 

For  Black  Bass,  the  largest  Trout-creels  will  answer 
every  purpose/;  say  Nos.  3  or  4,  having  a  capacity  of 
twenty  or  twenty-five  pounds.  The  shoulder-strap  should 
be  leather  or  webbing,  with  a  shoulder-pad,  to  prevent 
cutting  or  bruising  the  shoulder. 

Fish-baskets  or  creels  should  always  be  well  washed, 
and  carefully  dried  after  use,  to  keep  them  clean  and 
sweet.  When  washing  them,  a  little  carbonate  of  soda  or 
28 


330  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


Folding  Canvas  Creel. 
(Abbey  &  Imbrie.) 


Canvas  Creel,  Folded. 


MISCELLANEOUS    IMPLEMENTS.  331 

carbolic  acid  should  be  added  to  the  water  to  destroy  the 
"ancient  and  fish-like  smell." 

A  new  and  very  desirable  article  in  this  way  is  the 
"  Patent  Folding  Canvas  Creel,"  devised  and  made  by 
Abbey  &  Imbrie.  It  is  constructed  of  water-proof  canvas, 
and  is  capable  of  being  folded  into  a  small  and  compact 
package.  When  in  use  it  has  flexible  ribs  for  keeping  it 
in  shape,  which  are  rendered  practicable  by  the  light 
metal  stretcher,  which  also  serves  to  fasten  down  the  top. 
Around  the  lower  edge  is  a  row  of  holes,  with  brass  eye- 
lets, for  the  purpose  of  ventilation  and  drainage.  It 
answers  the  purposes  of  its  construction  admirably.  Size 
C  is  best  adapted  for  Black  Bass  fishing,  it  being  esti- 
mated to  hold  twenty  pounds. 

The  Landing-Net. 

For  boat  fishing,  the  landing-net  should  have  a  long 
handle,  which  is  best  when  made  in  two  pieces,  with  a 
strong  brass  ferrule  joint.  It  should  be  as  light  as  possible, 
and  on  this  account  bamboo  cane  is  the  very  best  material 
for  the  handle.  The  rim  or  ring  should  be  ten  or  twelve 
inches  in  diameter,  of  brass,  solid  or  folding;  the  latter 
are  the  most  portable  and  convenient,  and  are  made  with 
two  or  more  hinge  joints.  The  net  should  be  deep,  and 
of  a  tolerably  coarse  mesh ;  linen  is  the  most  durable 
material,  though  cotton  will  answer. 

For  fishing  from  the  bank,  or  for  wading  the  stream,  a 
short-handled  Trout-net  is  to  be  preferred,  as  it  is  more 
easily  carried  and  answers  every  purpose  better  than  the 
long-handled  net.  Those  with  oval,  wooden  rims  are  the 
lightest,  and  are  as  good  as  any.     The  long-handled  net 


332 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 


Short-Handled  Landing-Net. 
(A.  B.  Shipley  &  Son.) 


Long-Handled  Landing-Net. 
(Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson.) 


MISCELLANEOUS    IMPLEMENTS.  333 

will  answer  here  by  using  but  one  joint  of  the  handle. 
There  should  be  a  blunt  hook,  or  ring,  at  the  end  of  the 
handle  for  attaching  to  the  creel-strap,  so  as  to  leave  both 
hands  free  for  casting,  and  playing  the  fish. 


Minnow-Seines  and  Nets. 

For  catching  minnows  for  bait-fishing,  the  most  expe- 
ditious way  is  to  use  a  linen  or  cotton  minnow-seine,  from 
three  to  five  feet  wide,  and  from  five  to  fifteen  feet  long. 
These  seines  can  be  purchased  mounted  or  unmountecf. 
The  mountings  consist  of  cork  and  lead-lines,  with  their 
floats  and  sinkers,  and  two  handles  or  brails.  The  mesh 
should  be  quite  fine. 

A  very  simple  and  convenient  contrivance  for  the  same 
purpose — and  much  similar  to  one  used  by  myself — is  thus 
described  by  a  gentleman  of  Baltimore,  Maryland,  in 
"  Forest  and  Stream  : " 

As  I  hear  so  many  fishermen  complaining  that  they  can  not  get 
a  net  suitable  to  catch  minnows,  that  is  easily  carried,  I  thought  it 
might  be  of  service  to  the  fishing  fraternity  in  general  if  I  were  to 
describe  a  net  of  my  own  invention  that  is  easily  carried  in  the 
pocket,  can  be  adjusted  in  a  minute,  and  has  never  failed  to  pro- 
vide me  with  plenty  of  minnows.  I  take  a  bung  or  round  block  of 
wood  of  two  and,  one-half  to  three  inches  in  diameter,  and  bore  four 
holes  opposite  to  each  other  in  the  edge  of  it.  I  then  insert  a  piece 
of  umbrella-rib,  about  twelve  to  fourteen  inches  long,  in  each  hole. 
The  holes  must  be  made  deep  and  small  enough  for  the  wire  to  fit 
tight.  The  paragon  wire  is  the  best.  I  leave  the  end  of  the  rib 
that  has  the  little  eye  in  it  outside.  I  then  lay  the  bung  and  wires 
on  a  square  piece  of  mosquito-netting,  and  stretch  it  and  sew  it 
firmly  at  the  four  corners  to  the  eyes  in  the  ribs.  In  the  center  of 
the  bung  I  put  a  screw-eye,  and  in  the  center  of  the  mosquito-net 
sew  a  piece  of  string,  leaving  ends  about  eight  inches  long.     Any 


334 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 


Patent  Adjustable  Float. 
(Bradford  &  Anthony.) 


Brass  Box  Swivels. 


2  3*5 

Patent  Adjustable  Sinkers. 
(Bradford  &  Anthony.) 


MISCELLANEOUS   IMPLEMENTS  335 

straight,  stiff  stick  picked  up  on  the  shore  serves  as  a  handle,  being 
made  fast  to  the  net  by  a  strong  piece  of  twine  through  the  screw- 
eye,  and  with  a  piece  of  bread  tied  in  the  net  with  the  string,  and 
perhaps  a  small,  flat  stone  to  make  it  sink,  it  is  ready  to  catch  min- 
nows. They  will  come  over  the  net  for  the  bread,  and  when  it  is 
raised  up  quickly  the  resistance  of  the  water  causes  it  to  belly,  and 
the  minnows  will  not  get  out.  When  bait  enough  has  been  taken, 
I  pull  the  wires  out  of  the  holes,  drop  the  bung  into  the  net,  and  roll 
it  up  on  the  wires. 

Another  very  simple  and  effective  device  for  the  same 
purpose  is  thus  described  by  a  well-known  angler,  of 
Nashville,  Tennessee,  in  the  "Chicago  Field:" 

This  simple  contrivance  astonishes  all  who  see  it,  because  they 
naturally  ask  the  question,  how  it  was  that  no  one  ever  thought 
of  it  before?  A  globe  of  wire  netting  split  in  two,  fastened  at  the 
bottom  by  hinges,  and  attached  to  a  stick  by  strings  from  the  top — 
this  is  the  whole  affair,  save  a  small  place  in  the  center  for  bait. 
The  two  hemispheres  are  so  arranged  as  to  open  partially  from  their 
own  weight,  if  allowed  to  touch  bottom ;  or_  they  can  be  separated 
by  pulling  one  of  the  strings  above  mentioned.  As  minnows  are 
generally  found  in  shallow,  clear  water,  it  is  easy  to  see  when 
enough  have  entered  the  trap,  to  close  and  draw  it  out.  This 
invention  does  away  entirely  with  seining,  and  the  disagreeable 
necessity  of  wading  in  the  water.  The  pole  or  stick  upon  which 
the  trap  is  hung  may  be  made  of  any  desired  length,  and  jointed, 
thus  permitting  the  entire  apparatus  to  be  packed  in  a  small  space. 
Those  of  our  Nashville  anglers  who  have  seen  it  are  of  the  opinion 
that  nothing  eke  will  be  used  for  catching  minnows,  once  they  be- 
come known. 

Floats,  or  Corks. 

The  float  should  never  be  used  when  it  can  be  dispensed 
with,  as  it  is  detrimental  to  good  casting,  and  is  always  in 
the  way.  It  becomes  necessary,  however,  in  shallow 
streams,  where  the  bottom  is  covered  with  snags,  roots, 


336  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

weeds  and  other  obstacles,  and  may  be  used  in  still-fishing, 
where  crawfish,  frogs  or  helgramites  are  used  as  bait ;  but, 
when  used,  it  should  be  as  small  as  possible,  consistent 
with  the  weight  of  the  sinker  required,  and  should  be  em- 
ployed for  the  sole  purpose  of  keeping  the  hook  away  from 
the  bottom,  and  not  as  an  object  of  intense  and  constant 
observation  to  indicate  a  bite. 

An  egg-shaped,  oval,  long  or  barrel-shaped  cork-float 
may  be  used :  or,  still  better,  perhaps,  a  swan-quill  or  por- 
cupine-quill float  may  be  employed  with  advantage,  in  sit- 
uations referred  to  above. 

The  best  of  all,  however,  and  the  only  real  improvement 
ever  made  in  fishing-floats,  is  the  "  Patent  Adjustable  En- 
ameled Float."  This  handy  article,  instead  of  the  usual 
ring  and  quill  slide,  has  spiral  rings  of  wire  at  each  end 
of  the  float,  for  ready  attachment  or  detachment  to  or  from 
the  line  without  removing  the  bait  or  hook.  The  attach- 
ment is  made  in  a  moment  to  any  portion  of  the  line;  and, 
when  attached,  can  be  moved  up  or  down  the  line  at  will, 
and  will  remain  stationary  wherever  placed.  These  floats 
are  hollow,  quite  light,  and  well  finished.  To  those  an- 
glers who  are  partial  to  the  use  of  a  float,  it  is  an  inven- 
tion of  great  merit  and  advantage. 

The  Swivel. 

A  brass  box-swivel  should  always  be  employed  in  bait- 
fishing  for  Black  Bass.  It  prevents,  in  a  great  measure, 
the  twisting,  kinking  and  snarling  of  the  line,  so  annoying 
to  the  angler.  In  rod-fishing,  the  smallest  sizes — Nos.  5 
or  6 — are  large  enough  ;  and,  usually,  no  additional  weight 
or  sinker  will  be  required.     The  line  should  be  made  fast 


MISCELLANEOUS  IMPLEMENTS.  337 

to  one  ring,  and  the  snell  of  the  hook  attached  to  the 
other.  In  trolling,  two  swivels  can  be  used  with  advan- 
tage— one  attached  to  the  snell  of  the  hook  or  spinner, 
and  the  other  attached  to  the  line  some  two  or  three  feet 
above.  In  trolling  with  the  hand-line,  larger  swivels  may 
be  used — as  Nos.  2  or  3.  Brass  swivels  should  always  be 
used,  as  they  do  not  rust,  a  strong  objection  to  steel  swivels. 
When  sinkers  are  used  in  addition,  they  should  be  attached 
about  a  foot  above  the  swivel. 

Sinkers. 

Generally,  in  Black  Bass  angling,  no  sinker,  in  addition 
to  the  swivel,  is  necessary,  the  latter  being  heavy  enough 
to  keep  the  live  bait  beneath  the  surface.  But  there  are 
cases  and  times  when  the  sinker  is  brought  in  requisition ; 
for  example,  when  the  minnows  used  for  bait  are  large  and 
strong  and  keep  on  the  surface,  or  where  the  stream  is  quite 
rapid  or  current  swift. 

When  the  ordinary  ringed-sinker  is  used  without  a 
swivel,  the  line  should  be  tied  in  one  ring,  and  the  snell 
of  the  hook  looped  in  the  other.  The  smallest-sized 
sinker  is  usually  heavy  enough,  though  sometimes  a  larger 
size  is  necessary.  Buckshot  or  small  bullets  should  not  be 
used  when  the  oval  sinker  can  be  had,  as  they  offer  too 
much  resistance  to  the  water,  and  often  cause  the  line  to 
twist  or  kink. 

The  "Patent  Adjustable  Sinker/'  with  spiral  rings  like 

the  adjustable  float,  is  the  best  form  of  sinker  to  use,  and 

should  take  the  place  of  the  old-fashioned  ringed  leads. 

The  simplicity  and  effectiveness  of  the  device  by  which 

they  can   be   put  on  and  taken  off  the  line,  without  dis- 
29 


338 


BOOK   OF    THE   BLACK    BASS. 


MISCELLANEOUS    IMPLEMENTS.  339 

turbing  hook  or  bait,  should  receive  the  approval  of  all  an- 
glers, and  render  their  adoption  universal.  They  insure 
neatness  and  dispatch,  qualities  not  to  be  despised  in  angling. 

Clearing-Ring. 

The  hook,  in  angling,  often  becomes  fast  or  foul  in 
snags,  roots,  rocks  or  grass,  and  frequently  is  thereby  lost 
or  broken,  to  the  disgust  of  the  angler.  By  the  employ- 
ment of  a  clearing-ring  the  hook  can  almost  invariably  be 
easily  detached  from  these  obstructions  without  damage. 
These  are  rings  made  expressly  for  the  purpose,  composed 
of  brass  or  iron,  with  a  hinge  to  admit  of  their  being 
readily  adjusted  to  the  line.  The  method  of  using  them 
is  as  follows : 

The  ring  is  opened  at  the  hinge  and  the  line  encircled, 
when  the  ring  is  again  closed,  and  allowed  to  run  down 
the  line  to  the  point  of  obstruction;  the  weight  of  the  ring 
detaches  the  hook,  when  it  is  drawn  up,  a  hand-line  being 
attached  to  the  ring  for  this  purpose.  If  the  hook  is  very 
firmly  fastened  to  the  root  or  snag,  the  ring  is  raised  a  few 
feet  by  its  cord  and  allowed  to  drop  suddenly,  when  its 
weight  will  usually  clear  the?* hook.  A  very  good  substi- 
tute for  the  clearing-ring,  and  one  easily  obtained,  is  the 
ordinary  bar  of  lead,  used  for  making  bullets.  A  hole  is 
bored  in  the  flat  bar,  through  which  the  hand-cord  is  fast- 
ened. "When  used,  the  bar  is  bent  around  the  fishing-line, 
forming  a  ring,  and  is  very  easily  attached  or  detached. 

Disgorgees. 

Very  often  a  Bass  is  hooked  in  the  gullet,  and  some- 
times  in  the  stomach,  though    the    angler   should   never 


340  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

allow  him  to  gorge  the  bait  to  this  extent.  It  is  best  to 
strike  quickly,  so  as  to  hook  him  in  the  mouth.  In  the 
event  of  the  Bass  swallowing  the  hook,  is  is  necessary  to 
cut  out  or  tear  out  the  hook,  and  often  at  the  cost  of 
scratching  or  lacerating  the  angler's  fingers ;  and  espe- 
cially is  this  apt  to  be  the  case  when  a  Pickerel  or  Pike- 
perch  is  thus  hooked,  their  long  and  sharp  teeth  being  as 
sharp  as  needles. 

To  avoid  this  unpleasant  feature,  a  disgorger  is  very 
handy  and  efficacious.  It  consists  of  a  stout  piece  of 
wire,  six  or  eight  inches  in  length,  with  one  end  flat- 
tened ;  in  this  flat  end  a  notch  is  filed,  with  cutting  or 
sharp  edges,  when,  by  pushing  this  sharp  notch  along  the 
hook,  the  latter  is  easily  detached  or  cut  out. 

A  very  convenient  tool  is  made  by  Abbey  &  Imbrie, 
No.  48  Maiden  Lane,  New  York  City,  and  designed 
especially  for  this  purpose,  a  cut  of  which  is  here  pre- 
sented, which  explains  itself.  In  addition  to  the  dis- 
gorger, it  has  a  strong,  sharp  blade,  which  can  be  made 
available  for  many  purposes,  not  the  least  of  which  is  to 
kill  the  fish  as  soon  as  caught,  by  severing  the  spinal  cord 
at  the  junction  of  the  head  and  body.  This  should 
always  be  done  by  the  humane  angler,  for  two  good  and 
sufficient  reasons :  It  immediately  puts  an  end  to  the  suf- 
fering of  the  fish,  and  keeps  the  flesh  firm  and  in  good 
condition. 

Minnow-Pails. 

To  the  bait-fisher  for  Black  Bass,  the  proper  form  of 
bait-can  is  quite  an  important  item.  There  are  two  gen- 
eral styles,  one  for  boat-fishing,  and  one  for  stream-fishing. 

The  best  plan  for  a  minnow-bucket  for  boat-fishing,  and 


MISCELLANEOUS    IMPLEMENTS.  341 

where  a  large  pail  can  be  utilized,  is  to  have  two  pails,  one 
fitting  within  the  other.  This  form  of  pail  is  generally 
and  conveniently  made  as  follows: 

The  outer  bucket  is  of  heavy  tin,  and  made  round,  with 
a  capacity  of  from  two  to  five  gallons ;  a  stout  wire  bail  or 
handle  is  attached,  with  a  wooden  or  tin  hand-piece.  The 
inner  bucket  is  also  made  of  tin,  to  fit  somewhat  loosely 
in  the  outer  one;  but  the  top  of  this  bucket  should  be  an 
inch  below  the  top  of  the  outer  pail.  It  has  an  opening, 
fitted  with  a  lid  on  top,  through  which  the  hand  can  be 
readily  inserted ;  and  has  a  tin-hasp  and  loop  for  fastening 
securely.  In  addition,  there  is  a  flat  tin-handle,  in  the 
form  of  an  arch,  on  the  top  of  the  lid,  by  which  the  inner 
pail  can  be  easily  lifted  out. 

The  inner  pail  is  freely  perforated  on  the  top,  bottom 
and  sides,  so  that,  upon  raising  it,  the  water  leaves  it 
rapidly,  and  a  minnow  can  thus  be  readily  selected. 
Whenever  necessary,  the  inner  pail  can  be  taken  out,  the 
top  securely  fastened  by  the  hasp  and  loop,  and  the  pail 
sunk  in  the  water  to  revive  the  minnows,  while  the  angler 
is  taking  his  lunch  or  siesta.  Both  pails  should  be  well 
painted,  inside  and  out.  Sometimes  the  lower  half  of  the 
inner  pail  is^formed  of  copper  or  galvanized  iron  wire- 
gauze. 

For  fishing  in  a  stream,  where  the  angler  is  a-foot,  a  much 
smaller  and  lighter  bucket  must  be  used,  on  the  score  of  por- 
tability and  general  convenience.  In  this  case,  the  bucket 
is  made  single,  usually,  and  of  an  oblong  or  oval  shape, 
to  admit  of  its  being  more  readily  carried.  It  is  fitted 
with  a  handle  or  bail,  and  the  top  is  soldered  in,  an  inch 
or  two  below  the  rim  of  the  bucket;  and  this  top  only  is 
perforated.     There  is  also  a  lid  in  the  top,  which  is  usually 


342 


BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 


MISCELLANEOUS   IMPLEMENTS.  343 

secured  by  a  bolt  of  stout  wire.  A  double  pail,  the  inner 
one  being  made  principally  of  copper  or  galvanized  iron 
wire-cloth,  would  be  vastly  more  convenient,  without  add- 
ing much  to  the  weight. 

The  English  style  of  bait-kettle  is  made  single,  with 
perforated  top,  and  is  formed' round  but  tapering,  being 
broad  at  the  bottom,  and  narrow  at  the  top.  Sometimes 
they  are  made  square,  with  the  top  formed  of  woven  wire- 
cloth. 

Mr.  J.  C.  Hitchcock,  of  Oconomowoc,  "Wisconsin,  has 
patented  and  manufactures  a  very  convenient  minnow- 
bucket  for  boat-fishing.  The  outside  bucket  is  of  heavy 
tin,  oval  in  shape,  and  is  divided  into  two  compartments 
by  a  central  partition.  One  of  these  compartments  is  a 
double-walled  refrigerator  for  holding  ice  and  the  angler's 
luncheon,  while  the  other  contains  an  inner  minnow- 
bucket  composed  principally  of  heavy  copper  wire  gauze; 
there  is  an  attachment  for  aerating  the  water,  which,  with 
the  coldness  imparted  to  it  by  the  ice  chamber,  keeps  the 
minnows  lively  and  strong. 

Wading  Pants  and  Stockings. 

Wading  pants  or  stockings,  rubber  boots  or  leggins,  are 
indispensable  to  the  angler's  comfort  and  well-being  in 
stream-fishing,  either  for  fly-fishing  or  bait-fishing.  Rub- 
ber hip-boots  have  been  much  used  for  this  purpose,  but 
they  do  not  wear  well,  and  are  heavy  and  clumsy.  Mack- 
intosh and  luster  wading-pants  and  leggins  are  now  fur- 
nished at  a  moderate  price,  and  are  much  to  be  preferred, 
being  light  and  very  serviceable.  They  are  made  with 
stocking  feet,  in  which  case  a  pair  of  brogans,  or  old  shoes, 
must  be  worn,  and  this  is  much  the  best  plan  for  wading. 


344 


BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


Leather  Rod  and  Reel  Cases. 

(Thomson  &  Son.) 


MISCELLANEOUS    IMPLEMENTS.  345 

They  are  also  furnished  with  boots  attached,  with  cork  or 
rubber  soles,  and  are  very  durable. 

No  stream -fisher's  outfit  is  complete  without  these  con- 
veniences, which  are  now  made  by  the  Goodyear  Rubber 
Manufacturing  Company,  perfectly  reliable,  waterproof, 
and  fully  equal  to  the  best  English  goods.  The  Mackin- 
tosh goods  of  this  Company  are  formed  with  a  layer  of  solid 
rubber  between  two  outer  layers  of  stockinet,  or  other 
light  and  porous  cloth,  rendering  them  light,  pliable,  proof 
against  cracking  or  breaking,  and  thoroughly  waterproof. 

Rod  and  Reel  Cases. 

Leather  cases  for  the  rod  and  reel  are  very  convenient 
and  desirable  articles,  especially  for  the  angling  tourist. 
A  good  and  highly-prized  rod  or  reel  should  have  the  best 
care;  and  a  rod,  especially,  is  liable  to  serious  injury  when 
protected  only  by  a  common  canvas  cover. 

Thompson  &  Son,  301  Broadway,  New  York  City,  the 
well  known  manufacturers  of  sportsmen's  goods,  make  a 
specialty  of  leather  rod  and  reel  cases.  They  are  made  of 
heavy  bridle  leather,  with  handle,  and  if  required,  a  pad- 
lock. The  rod  cases  are  made  to  hold  one  or  more  rods. 
To  the  angler  who  delights  in  completeness  of  outfit,  I  can 
cheerfully  recommend  these  useful  articles.  They  will  be 
duly  appreciated  by  any  angler  who  has  ever  made  an  ex- 
tended trip  to  the  woods,  lakes,  or  streams  by  the  usual 
modes  of  conveyance. 


PART  THIRD. 


ANGLING  AND  FLY-FISHING. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  ANGLING. 

"You  are  assured,  though  there  be  ignorant  men  of  another  belief,  that  an- 
gling is  an  art,  and  you  know  that  art  better  than  others ;  and  that  this  truth 
is  demonstrated  by  the  fruits  of  that  pleasant  labor  which  you  enjoy,— when 
you  purpose  to  give  rest  to  your  mind,  and  divest  yourself  of  your  more  seri- 
ous business,  and  (which  is  often)  dedicate  a  day  or  two  to  this  recreation."— 
Izaak  Walton. 

In  the  days  of  good  old  Father  Izaak  Walton,  angling 
was,  as  stated  by  him  in  the  title  of  his  famous  book,  the 
"contemplative  man's  recreation."  While  this  is  no  less 
true  in  our  own  day,  the  art  of  angling  has  extended  its 
sphere  of  usefulness  by  becoming,  not  only  the  recreation 
of  the  contemplative  man,  but  of  the  active,  stirring,  over- 
worked business  and  professional  man,  as  well.  While  in 
the  comparatively  slow-coach  days  of  the  quaint  Walton 
it  was  rather  a  recreation  of  choice,  it  has,  in  this  age  of 
steam  become,  in  a  measure,  one  of  necessity. 

The  American  idea  of  rest  and  recreation  seems  to  have 
been  based  upon  the  Mosaic  law  of  resting  on  the  seventh, 
or  last  day  of  the  week.  A  man  must  first  gain  a  com- 
petency, and  rest  afterwards,  even  if  it  took  seven  times 
seven  years  to  gain  the  first  condition — wealth — for  then, 
only,  would  he  be  entitled,  or  in  a  proper  condition  to 
enjoy  his  otium  cum  dignitate. 

In  the  rapid  race  for  wealth  and  distinction,  men  labor, 
night  and  day,  with  mind  and  muscle,  especially  during 

(349) 


350  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

the  seasons  of  business  activity.  But  too  often,  alas,  they 
labor  in  vain,  and  find  that  the  "  bubble  reputation,"  or 
the  "wealth  that  sinews  bought,"  has  in  a  moment  been 
swept  away,  after  years  of  toil  and  anxiety.  Or,  if  they 
make  their  footing  sure,  they  find,  too  often,  that  the  re- 
sult has  only  been  attained  at  the  expense  of  a  permanent 
impairment  of  health,  for  which  the  dearly  bought  treasure 
is  but  a  sorry  recompense;  and  the  oft-imagined  and  fondly 
looked  for  goal,  of  a  life  of  peace  and  quiet  and  the  en- 
joyment of  the  hard-earned  competency,  has  been  realized 
to  be  one  of  short  continuance,  or  of  long  bodily  suffering. 

To  keep  pace  with  the  rapid  strides  of  trade  and  traffic, 
as  much  labor  is  now  performed  in  one  day,  as  was 
formerly  done  in  a  week.  Consequently,  between  the 
busy  seasons,  or  "  heats,"  in  this  race  for  wealth  and  place, 
men  find  it  absolutely  necessary — not  so  much  from  choice, 
as  necessity — to  rest  and  recuperate,  and  build  up  the  ex- 
hausted energies,  the  tired  brain  and  relaxed  muscles,  and 
to  gird  up  the  loins  for  renewed  efforts. 

The  necessity  being  acknowledged,  the  question  then 
arises :  in  what  way  can  this  rest  and  recreation  of  the 
muscular  and  nervous  tissues  of  the  body  be  best  attained  ? 
When  men  think  of  rest  and  relaxation,  their  thoughts 
turn  naturally  to  the  woods,  to  the  fields,  to  running  streams 
and  quiet  lakes,  or  the  sea-shore.  If  it  is  simply  a  Sunday 
stroll,  their  steps  naturally  and  irresistibly  lead  them  to 
green  fields,  or  the  river  side ;  or  a  drive  along  the 
country  road  with  its  hedges,  and  birds,  and  crossing 
brooks.  If  it  is  a  day's  holiday,  it  must  be  a  picnic  in 
the  grand  old  woods,  and  near  a  lake,  or  stream,  or  at 
least  a  babbling  rill.  The  very  idea  of  perfect  rest  is  as- 
sociated with  mossy  banks  and  cool  sparkling  waters.     It 


THE   PHILOSOPHY   OF    ANGLING.  351 

is  doubtful  if  there  is  a  sweeter  line  in  human  language,  or 
one  more  expressive  of  perfect  bliss,  of  lasting  peace,  of 
complete  rest,  of  true  happiness,  of  quiet  contentment,  than 
that  of  the  Psalmist :  "  He  maketh  me  to  lie  down  in 
green  pastures  :  he  leadeth  me  beside  the  still  waters." 

But  the  question  :  where  can  rest  be  found  ?  has  already 
been  answered  in  the  crowds  of  tired  pilgrims — they  are 
called  pleasure-seekers,  but  they  are  looking  for  rest — who 
are  seen  each  summer-time  wending  their  ways  by  rail  and 
steamer,  to  the  mountains,  to  the  sea-shore,  to  the  Adiron- 
dacks,  to  the  Great  Lake  region,  to  the  wilds  of  Maine 
and  Canada,  to  the  charming  streams  and  lakelets  of  Wis- 
consin, Michigan,  and  Minnesota,  or  simply  to  "the 
country" — any  place,  in  fact,  is  their  Mecca,  where  may  be 
found  rest  and  quiet,  green  fields,  green  hills,  green  trees, 
and  clear,  cool  water. 

Then,  the  season  for  angling,  coming  as  it  does  during 
the  midsummer  vacation,  in  the  pleasantest  weather  and 
during  the  lull  in  active  business  matters,  presents  at  once 
the  means  and  the  opportunity  for  enjoyment  and  rest,  for 
recreation  and  peace.  Horace  Greeley  once  said  to  the 
writer,  that  he  had  been  for  years  eagerly  looking  forward 
to  the  time  when  he  could  lay  down  his  pen,  for  a  few 
days,  and  "go  a  fishing;"  but  that  time  never  came  dur- 
ing his  busy  life.  His  dreams  of  a  brief  season  of  what  he 
considered  the  very  essence  of  rest  and  contentment,  were 
never  realized — he  died  a  martyr  to  an  overworked  brain. 

Rest  and  recreation  to  the  active  mind  does  not  mean 
mere  idleness,  or  as  it  is  more  poetically  expressed  :  dolce 
far  niente;  this,  to  many,  would  be  more  irksome  than  the 
hardest  work.  Many  men  have  a  horror  of  going  into 
the  woods,  to  the  wilderness,  to  the  lakes,  or  the  sea-shore, 


352  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

because  there  is  nothing  to  do,  nothing  to  occupy  their 
minds,  nothing  to  save  them  from  ennui  after  the  novelty 
wears  off.  The  busy,  active  man  can  secure  rest  only  by 
diverting  the  muscular  and  nervous  energies  in  new  and 
unaccustomed  channels.  This  may  be  accomplished,  in  a 
measure,  by  cards,  chess,  music,  reading,  etc.,  as  purely 
intellectual  recreations;  while  riding,  driving,  boating, 
yacthing,  archery,  shooting,  etc.,  furnish  ample  means  for 
muscular  skill  and  exercise ;  but  angling  brings  into  play 
both  the  mental  and  physical  capacities.  To  be  a  good 
angler  requires  good  judgment,  much  patience,  rare  skill, 
a  full  share  of  endurance,  and  a  lively  imagination;  the 
latter  quality  is  not  absolutely  essential,  but  it  helps 
mightily  when  "luck"  is  bad,  and  on  it  depends  the  aes- 
thetic and  poetical  features  of  the  art. 

But  the  persons  who  are  disposed  to  "  take  time  "  to 
indulge  in  these  or  similar  recreations,  in  our  country,  are 
quite  limited.  In  England,  it  is  considered  part  of  a  gen- 
tleman's education  to  know  how  to  ride,  to  row,  to  shoot, 
to  sail,  and  to  cast  a  fly,  and  he  is  the  better  for  it,  mor- 
ally, physically,  and  intellectually.  In  our  own  country  it 
is  too  often  considered  "  a  waste  of  time "  to  acquire  or 
practice  these  manly  and  healthful  accomplishments.  Our 
girls  may  learn  music,  and  dancing,  and  painting,  as  means 
and  acquirements  necessary  to  the  securing  of  a  husband, 
but  any  attempt  on  the  part  of  our  boys  to  learn  any  of 
the  manly  sports,  in  a  regular  and  systematic  way,  must  be 
frowned  down  as  opposed  to  all  our  ideas  of  thrift  and 
economy,  and  a  gross  misuse  of  "  time."  What  we  need 
is  more  muscular  Christianity ;  we  would  then  have  sounder 
minds  in  sounder  bodies. 

A  few  weeks  taken  from  the  fifty-two  composing  the 


THE   PHILOSOPHY    OF    ANGLING.  353 

year,  and  devoted  to  angling,  shooting,  boating,  or  "camp- 
ing out,"  would  not  be  missed  in  the  long  run  from  the 
business  man's  calender,  but,  on  the  contrary,  would  return 
an  interest,  which,  though  it  could  not  be  computed  by 
any  rate  of  per  centage,  would  be  sensibly  felt  and  realized 
in  a  clearer  brain,  a  stronger  body,  and  a  better  aptitude 
for  business.  The  clergyman  would  acquire  broader  views 
of  humanity,  and  preach  better  sermons.  The  physician 
would  better  appreciate,  and  oftener  prescribe,  Nature's 
great  remedies,  air,  sunshine,  exercise,  and  temperance. 
The  lawyer's  conscience  would  be  enlarged,  and  his  fees 
possibly  contracted.  The  poet's  imagination  would  be 
more  vivid;  the  artist's  skill'  more  pronounced.  Nerve 
would  keep  pace  with  muscle,  and  brawn  with  brain. 

I  have  purposely  avoided  any  allusion  to  the  Gipsy 
blood  inherent  in  our  veins,  or  the  savage  traits  yet  man- 
ifest in  our  flesh,  and  their  liability  to  crop  out,  as  evi- 
denced in  our  love  for  Nature  and  Nature's  arts.  I  do 
not  look  at  it  in  that  light.  I  claim  that  the  more  en- 
lightened and  civilized  a  nation  becomes,  the  more  it  is 
interested  in  the  works  of  Nature  and  her  laws;  that  the 
more  progress  we  make  in  the  arts  and  sciences,  and  all  the 
achievements  of  a  high  state  of  civilization,  and  the  more 
artificial  and  advanced  we  become  in  our  ideas  of  living — 
the  more  readily  we  turn  for  rest  and  enjoyment,  for  rec- 
reation and  real  pleasure,  to  the  simplicity  of  Nature's 
resources 

"  Knowing  that  Nature  never  did  betray 
The  heart  that  loved  her." 

Angling  is  an  art,  and  it  is  not  beneath  the  dignity  of 

any  one  to  engage  in  it,  as  a  recreation.     It  is  hallowed 

by  "Meek  Walton's   heavenly  memory,"  and   has   been 
30 


354  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

practiced  and  commended  by  some  of  the  best  and  truest 
and  wisest  men  that  ever  lived;  for,  as  Father  Izaak  says: 
"  It  is  an  art,  and  an  art  worthy  the  knowledge  and  prac- 
tice of  a  wise  man."  Did  the  art  of  angling  require  an 
apologist,  I  could  here  produce  evidence,  in  precept  and 
example,  of  good  and  wise  men  of  all  ages,  from  the  days 
of  the  Fishers  of  Galilee  down  to  the  present  time,  up- 
holding and  commending  the  moral  tendencies  and  the 
healthful  influences  of  the  art  of  angling,  and  its  virtue 
of  making  men  better  physically,  intellectually,  and  spirit- 
ually. 

"O,  sir,  doubt  not  but  that  angling  is  an  art,"  says 
Piscator  to  Venator,  "  is  it  not  an  art  to  deceive  a  Trout 
with  an  artificial  fly  ?  A  Trout  that  is  more  sharp-sighted 
than  any  hawk  you  have  named,  and  more  watchful  and 
timorous  than  your  high-mettled  merlin  is  bold?" 

Is  it  not  an  art  to  glide  stealthily  and  softly  along  the 
bank  of  a  stream  to  just  where  the  wary  Bass  or  timid 
Trout  is  watching  and  waiting,  ever  on  the  alert  for  the 
slightest  movement,  and  keenly  alive  to  each  passing 
shadow;  to  approach  him  unawares;  to  cast  the  feathery 
imitation  of  an  insect  lightly  and  naturally  upon  the  sur- 
face of  the  water,  without  a  suspicious  splash,  and  without 
disclosing  to  his  observant  eyes  the  shadow  of  the  rod  or 
line;  to  strike  the  hook  into  his  jaws  the  instant  he  un- 
suspectingly takes  the  clever  ruse  into  his  mouth ;  to  play 
him,  and  subdue  him,  and  land  him  successfully  and  artis- 
tically with  a  willowy  rod  and  silken  line  that  would  not 
sustain  half  his  weight  out  of  the  water?  Is  not  this  an 
art  ?     Let  the  doubter  try  it. 

"  Doubt  not,  therefore,  sir,  but  that  angling  is  an  art," 
says  Walton,  "  and   an  art  worth   your    learning.      The 


THE   PHILOSOPHY   OF   ANGLING.  355 

question  is,  rather,  whether  you   be   capable  of   learning 
it?" 

Exactly  so,  Father  Izaak ;  the  question  is,  not  merely 
"to  be  or  not-to  be,"  but  whether  one  is  "capable"  of 
learning  it ;  for  though  any  one  may  become  a  bait-fisher, 
it  is  not  every  one  that  can  learn  the  fly-fisher's  art ;  for, 
continues  Walton,  "he  that  hopes  to  be  a  good  angler, 
must  not  only  bring  an  inquiring,  searching,  observing 
wit,  but  he  must  bring  a  large  measure  of  hope  and 
patience,  and  a  love  and  propensity  to  the  art  itself;  but 
having  once  got  and  practiced  it,  then  doubt  not  but 
angling  will  prove  to  be  so  pleasant,  that  it  will  prove  to 
be,  like  virtue,  a  reward  to  itself." 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH. 

"  So  I  have  observed,  that  if  it  be  a  cloudy  day,  and  not  extreme  cold,  let 
the  wind  sit  in  what  quarter  it  will,  and  do  its  worst,  I  heed  it  not."— Izaak 
Walton. 

To  seek  to  know  all  the  conditions,  positive  and  hypo- 
thetical, qualifying  and  exceptional,  which  govern  the 
"  biting "  of  fish,  is  about  as  vain  and  discouraging  a 
pursuit  as  the  search  for  the  philosopher's  stone. 

To  know,  positively,  before  leaving  one's  office,  counting- 
house,  or  workshop  for  a  day's  outing,  that  it  is  the  day 
of  all  others  of  the  season,  and  that  the  phase  of  the  moon, 
the  conditions  of  sky  and  atmosphere,  the  direction  and 
force  of  the  wind,  and  the  temperature  and  condition  of 
the  water  are  just  right  to  insure  success,  and  to  know  just 
what  bait  or  fly  to  use,  and  in  what  portion  of  the  stream 
to  fish,  under  these  conditions;  implies  a  state  of  knowl- 
edge that  can  never  be  attained  by  ordinary  mortals ;  and 
though  we  are  created,  "  little  lower  than  the  angels,"  it 
involves  a  pursuit  of  knowledge  under  such  extreme  diffi- 
culties, that  even  prescience  and  omniscience  are  but 
ciphers  in  the  total  sum,  for  it  leaves  out  the  most  im- 
portant factor  in  the  calculation — the  fish  itself. 

Yet   it  is  in  just  this  hope  of  reducing  the   matter  to 
the   certainty  of  a   mathematical   proposition,  that   some 
anglers  are   continually  puzzling  their    own   brains,   and 
taxing  the  patience  of  their  angling  friends. 
(356) 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.      357 

They  imagine  that  fish,  somehow,  form  an  exception  to 
the  rest  of  the  animal  creation,  and  are  governed  in  their 
feeding,  or  "biting,"  by  certain  laws,  as  unchanging  as 
those  of  the  Medes  and  Persians;  and  that  these  immutable 
laws  have  an  outward  expression  in  certain  states  and 
conditions  of  weather  and  water;  and  that  it  is  only  nec- 
essary to  ascertain  the  peculiar  combination  of  wind, 
weather  and  water,  under  which  fish  feed,  nolens  volens, 
to  be  able  to  effect  their  capture  easily. 

The  glorious  uncertainty  attending  the  "  biting"  of  fish, 
even  at  apparently  favorable  times,  has  been  observed  for 
ages,  and  has  invested  the  gentle  art  with  a  glamour,  and 
an  air  of  mystery,  in  which  the  element  of  chance,  or 
luck,  is  a  prominent  feature.  The  angler  wending  his  way 
homeward  is  accosted  at  every  turn  with  the  interrogatory 
of,  "What  luck?"  while  "fisherman's  luck"  has  become 
an  universal  synonym  of  failure. 

Many  anglers,  in  lieu  of  more  cogent  reasons,  have 
conveniently  relegated  this  whole  question  to  "  luck," 
and  have  ceased  to  trouble  themselves  much  about  it, 
taking  the  good  with  the  bad,  in  a  spirit  of  calm  phi- 
losophy or  in  meek  submission  to  the  inevitable. 

Even  while  engaged  in  solitary  angling,  so  conducive 
to  quiet  meditation,  the  habits  and  idiosyncrasies  of  fish 
do  not  often  occupy  our  thoughts,  but  other  and  wholly 
irrelevant  themes.  And  even  with  all  the  information 
that  can  be  obtained,  by  close  and  careful  observation  of 
the  habits  of  fishes,  and  the  nature  of  their  surroundings, 
there  is  still  left  much  to  be  explained,  and  some  things 
that  seem  to  be  beyond  our  comprehension,  which  we 
might  safely  leave  to  chance  or  luck,  until  we  understand 
them  better. 


358  BOOK   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

And  perhaps  it  is  best  so,  for  there  has  ever  been  a 
delightful  uncertainty  attending  the  angler's  art,  and 
therein  lies  one  of  its  chiefest  charms ;  for  while  it  stim- 
ulates the  angler  to  renewed  effort,  it  consoles  him  in 
defeat.  The  pleasures  of  anticipation  have  ever  exceeded 
those  of  fruition,  and  ever  will  while  "  hope  springs  eternal 
in  the  human  breast." 

The  angler  spends  the  evening  before  his  "day's  fish- 
ing" in  overhauling  his  tackle;  polishing  the  ferrules  of 
his  trusty  rod ;  oiling  his  reel ;  looking  for  weak  places  in 
his  line;  arranging,  lovingly,  his  leader,  hooks  and  flies; 
and  finds  enthusiastic  enjoyment  in  the  examination  of 
his  treasures,  and  in  pleasant  retrospective  and  prospective 
reveries  in  connection  therewith. 

He  retires  with  contented  mind,  and  an  innate  conscious- 
ness of  unbounded  success  on  the  morrow,  and  dreams  of 
arching  rod  and  leaping  fish,  of  mossy  banks  and  mur- 
muring streams,  of  cool  shadows  and  spicy  breezes;  and 
when  morn  hath  "with  rosy  hand  unbarr'd  the  gates  of 
light,"  he  sallies  forth  with  buoyant  footsteps,  his  breast 
swelling  with  fond  anticipation,  and  in  that  happy  and  ex- 
pectant state  of  mind  known  only  to  lovers  of  the  angle. 
,  Perhaps  he  returns  at  close  of  day,  weary  and  footsore, 
and  with  an  almost  empty  creel;  what  matter?  All 
through  the  lovely  day  his  spirits  have  never  flagged ;  his 
last  cast  was  made  with  even  more  hope  and  confidence 
than  the  first.  And  even  though  his  creel  be  empty, 
his  heart  is  filled  with  the  music  of  the  birds,  the  purl- 
ing of  the  stream,  the  fragrance  of  the  flowers,  and,  above 
all,  with  love  for  his  Creator;  and  it  has  set  him  thinking 
of  that  eternal  stream  of  time  clothed  with  everlasting 
groves  of  never-changing  green. 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.      359 

And,  then,  the  day  has  simply  been  an  "unlucky"  one 
for  fishing;  yesterday  was  no  doubt  a  "good  day,"  and 
to-morrow  will  be  better.  He  finds  consolation  in  ac- 
counting for  his  "ill-luck,"  and  can  easily  see  a  reason 
for  it  in  some  peculiar  phase  of  the  water,  the  wind,  or 
the  weather. 

Now,  while  it  is  not  wholly  a  matter  of  luck,  on  one 
hand;  and  while,  on  the  other,  it  is  useless  to  expect  to 
obtain  an  invariable  law  in  respect  to  the  "  biting "  of 
fish,  there  are  many  things  that  we  can  learn  by  intelli- 
gent observation. 

It  involves  no  great  comprehension  of  the  sciences  of 
ichthyology,  meteorology,  hydrography,  entomology  and 
botany,  as  professed  by  some,  nor  of  the  mysteries  and 
hocus-pocus  of  the  art  as  practiced  by  others;  for  there 
is  often  as  little  reason  in  the  repeated  change  of  a  cast 
of  flies  by  the  scientific  fly-fisher,  as  in  spitting  on  the 
bait  by  his  humbler  brother;  yet  both  have  unbounded 
faith  in  their  respective  methods,  and  probably  faith  has 
as  much  to  do  with  successful  angling  as  any  one  attribute. 

But  why  do  fish  eagerly  take  the  bait  one  day,  and 
utterly  refuse  it  the  next,  when,  apparently,  all  other  con- 
ditions are  equal?  This  is  a  poser,  and  has  baffled  ob- 
servant anglers  for  ages,  and  will,  in  all  probability,  never 
be  solved  satisfactorily.  As  a  short  cut  to  its  solution,  it 
might  be  said,  that  they  were  hungry  one  day,  but  not  so 
the  next.  Certainly  a  very  reasonable  conclusion  if  it 
were  sustained  by  fact,  which  it  is  not,  if  we  judge  hun- 
ger by  its  usual  manifestations ;  for  fish  seem  to  bite  best 
on  a  full  stomach,  and  often  refuse  the  proffered  bait  on 
an  empty  one;  this  fact  is  patent  to  all  observant  anglers, 
and  I  have  proved  it  in  many  instances. 


360  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

But  let  us  begin  at  the  beginning. 

The  great  problem  of  life  with  fishes  seems  to  be  to  eat 
and  avoid  being  eaten.  Very  well.  Now,  which  is  the 
controlling  influence  in  a  fish's  mind — if  he  has  any,  per- 
haps, in  deference  to  authority,  we  had  better  call  it  in- 
stinct— his  desire  to  eat,  or  his  desire  of  self-preservation? 
Now,  right  here,  may  be  involved  the  fundamental  prin- 
ciple governing  this  whole  question  of  a  fish's  "biting." 

Let  us  see.  That  fish  can  abstain  from  solid  food  for 
an  indefinite  period,  procuring  some  nourishment  from  the 
water  they  breathe,  as  in  confinement,  during  hibernation, 
and  during  the  breeding  season,  is  well  known,  and  needs 
no  corroborative  evidence  here. 

That,  when  they  do  feed,  and  the  supply  of  food  is 
abundant,  they  completely  gorge  themselves — some  even 
ejecting  the  contents  of  their  stomachs  to  enjoy  the  grati- 
fication of  refilling  them — is  also  an  authenticated  fact. 

When  their  stomachs  are  thus  filled  and  gorged  with 
food,  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that,  like  other  preda- 
cious animals,  they  remain  listlessly  about  their  haunts, 
or  retire  to  some  secluded  retreat,  to  digest  it  at  their 
leisure;  and,  during  the  process  of  digestion,  refuse  to 
notice  their  usual  food ;  for  I  have  frequently  observed 
Black  Bass  remain  motionless  for  hours,  except  a  slight 
movement  of  the  fins,  utterly  regardless  of  the  schools 
of  minnows  that  were  swarming  about  them,  and  this  at  a 
season  when  they  usually  "  bite "  the  best. 

Now,  this  alternate  feasting  and  fasting  may  be  a  nec- 
essary habit,  to  enable  fish  to  meet  the  exigencies  of 
spawning,  hibernation  (in  some),  and  the  vicissitudes  of 
the  element  in  which  they  live,  and  the  abundance  or  lack 
of  food  at  certain  times. 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.       361 

Streams  are  often  rendered  turbid  by  heavy  rains,  and 
lakes  and  ponds  by  what  is  termed  "working"  or  "blos- 
soming." At  such  times  fish  can  not  see  well  enough  to 
find  their  food  or  discern  their  enemies,  and  consequently 
lie  secure  in  their  hiding-places.  When  the  water  be- 
comes clear,  they  again  venture  forth  to  eat  and  be  eaten. 

Then,  heavy  and  continued  rains,  violent  winds,  and  the 
change  of  season,  aifect  the  food-supply  of  fishes,  and,  con- 
sequently, the  fishes  themselves.  These  various  causes  make 
fish  seem  capricious  in  their  time  and  manner  of  feeding. 

Then,  again,  while  all  the  conditions  may  be  favorable 
for  their  feeding,  they  may  be  deterred  from  seeking  their 
food  by  a  fear  of  enemies;  and  only  venture  forth  when 
the  cause  of  such  fear  has  disappeared,  or  their  qualms  of 
stomach  overcome  their  prudence. 

But  little  can  be  learned  in  this  respect  from  fishes  that 
are  confined  in  aquaria,  or  from  those  that  are  artificially 
cultivated,  for  these  unnatural  conditions  presuppose  a 
change  in  their  habits. 

We  know  that  fish,  in  their  native  waters,  are  quite 
timid,  and  ever  on  the  alert  for  danger — a  footstep  on 
the  bank,  or  a  shadow  cast  suddenly  on  the  water,  will 
cause  them  to  hastily  skurry  away. 

No  food,  however  tempting,  can  entice  them  so  long  as 
there  is  an  appearance  of  danger,  and  their  caution  is 
then  set  down  as  eccentricity. 

Now,  all  this  may,  or  may  not,  be;  but  it  is  as  reasona- 
ble as  any  other  theory ;  and  this  habit  of  alternate  feast- 
ing and  fasting,  for  a  longer  or  a  shorter  time,  will  ex- 
plain, in  some  measure,  many  of  the  features  in  regard  to 
the  uncertainty  of  "biting"  in  fishes  of  inland  waters. 

As  before  stated,  there  is  much  that  can  be  learned  by 

31 


362  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

closely  observing  the  habits  of  fish,  the  character  of  their 
haunts,  and  the  nature  and  variety  of  their  food ;  so  as  to 
enable  the  angler  to  know,  so  far  as  can  be  known,  when 
and  where  to  find  the  fish  at  certain  seasons,  or  at  differ- 
ent stages  of  the  water;  when  they  are  most  inclined  to 
"bite;"  and  to  know,  approximately,  what  bait  to  use. 

This  information  can  be  acquired  in  no  other  way  but 
by  patient  and  continued  observation ;  and,  without  it,  all 
is  guess-wTork.  It  is  just  as  essential  to  the  angler  to 
know  where  to  fish,  as  to  know  how.  If  he  has  a  fair 
knowledge  of  the  habits  of  game-fish,  he  can  at  once 
seek  out  the  most  likely  places,  on  lake  or  stream,  by 
seeming  intuition. 

Black  Bass  are  found  at  different  localities  in  the  same 
wTaters,  at  different  seasons,  and  frequently  shift  their 
quarters  many  times  during  the  same  season,  depending 
on  the  nature  and  locality  of  their  food ;  the  influences  of 
wind  and  weather,  condition  of  the  water,  etc. 

Thus,  early  in  the  season,  they  will  be  found  on  streams 
in  shallow  water,  just  below  the  rapids,  or  "riffles/'  where 
the  water  is  warmest,  feeding  on  helgramites  and  other 
larvae,  Crustacea,  minnows,  etc.  As  the  water  gets  warmer, 
they  resort  to  stiller  water,  under  overhanging  trees,  and 
feed  upon  the  surface  when  the  insects  and  flies  appear. 
Still  later,  they  seek  greater  depths,  adjacent  to  shelving 
banks,  gravelly  shoals  and  rocky  ledges,  seeking  min- 
nows, mollusks,  etc. 

They  may  be  found  one  day  in  water,  say  ten  feet 
deep,  and  the  very  next  day  be  seen  in  the  shallowest 
water  near  shore.  I  will  mention  a  striking  instance  of 
this  kind: 

On  one  occasion,  I  went  in  company  with  a  party  of 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.      363 

expert  anglers  to  Upper  Nemahbin  Lake,  near  Delafield, 
Wisconsin.  My  companion  was  Captain  B.,  Chief  of  Po- 
lice of  Milwaukee  City;  and  he  exhibited  considerable 
impatience  and  concern  because  of  the  other  boats  start- 
ing ahead  of  us  over  the  favorite  fishing-ground;  but  I 
saw  that  the  three  other  boats  were  proceeding  over  this 
ground — where,  on  the  preceding  day,  I  had  taken  a  fine 
lot  of  Bass — without  getting  so  much  as  "a  bite." 

We  followed  in  their  wake,  casting  right  and  left  along 
the  edge  of  the  bulrushes,  but  in  vain ;  until,  finally, 
we  reached  the  end  of  the  line  of  rushes,  at  the  inlet  of 
the  lake.  Mr.  B  was  discouraged,  but  I,  on  the  contrary, 
was  elated — for  I  had  observed  the  dorsal  fins  of  numer- 
ous Bass  in  the  shallow  water  between  the  rushes  and  the 
shore ;  and  I  had  observed,  further,  that  the  Bass  were 
feeding  on  insects  and  flies  which  were  being  blown  into 
the  water  by  a  brisk  wind. 

I  proposed  fishing  back  over  the  same  ground  to  the 
evident  disgust  of  the  Captain  But  I  began  casting  be- 
tween the  bulrushes  and  the  shore,  in  the  shallow  water 
under  the  lee  of  the  bank,  and  fastened  to  a  large  Bass  at 
almost  the  first. cast.  The  Captain  followed  my  lead;  and, 
on  arriving  at  our  original  starting-point,  a  few  hundred 
yards  distant, .we  had  taken  fifteen  fine  Bass.  The  three 
boats  had  made  the  entire  circuit  of  the  lake,  and  the  six 
anglers  in  them,  fishing  on  the  usual  grounds,  had  not, 
altogether,  taken  half  as  many  fish,  when  they  joined  us 
for  luncheon. 

In  lacustrine  waters,  Black  Bass  first  appear  in  the 
shallowest  portions,  where  the  water  is  warm,  and  feed 
upon  Crustacea,  mollusks,  etc.,  retiring  to  deeper  water  as 
the  season  advances.     When  the  patches  of  rushes  and 


364  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

other  aquatic  plants  are  well  grown,  they  will  be  found 
near  them,  feeding  on  the  minnows  and  small  fry  which 
congregate  there.  When  the  ephemeral  flies  of  early 
summer  appear,  the  Bass  will  then  be  found  where  these 
are  most  numerous;  and  they,  at  this  time,  feed  at  the 
surface. 

I  was  once  fly-fishing  for  Bass  in  the  Neenah  Channel, 
at  the  outlet  of  Lake  Winnebago,  Wisconsin.  The  stream 
was  quite  swift,  with  a  rocky  bottom,  and  the  surface  was 
covered  with  May-flies,  upon  which  the  Bass  were  feed- 
ing. I  was  enjoying  royal  sport,  using  a  cast  of  two 
brown  hackles,  and  frequently  fastened  a  fish  to  each  fly. 

A  boat-load  of  rustic  anglers,  with  tamarack-poles  and 
short  lines,  seeing  my  success,  dropped  down  abreast  of 
me,  and  anchored  within  fifty  feet  of  my  boat.  They 
were  using  small  minnows  for  bait,  with  heavy  sinkers  on 
their  lines,  which,  of  course,  carried  the  bait  to  the  bot- 
tom, where  were  feeding  schools  of  White  Bass  (Roocus 
chrysops).  As  I  took  only  Black  Bass  from  the  surface, 
they  caught  nothing  but  White  Bass  at  the  bottom.  They 
could  not  understand  it,  and  I  did  not  enlighten  them, 
for  I  had  no  desire  to  see  my  pet  fish  "yanked  out"  by 
tamarack-poles  and  tow-strings.  I  left  them,  shortly,  in 
the  glory  of  "  snaking  out " — as  they  called  it — the  un- 
fortunate White  Bass,  wondering,  meanwhile,  why  they 
could  not  catch  Black  Bass  like  "  that  other  fellow." 

But  do  we  really  know  any  of  the  conditions  favorable 
or  unfavorable  for  angling?  We  are  told  that  fish  will 
not  bite  when  the  water  is  rendered  high  and  turbid  by 
freshets ;  during  a  thunder-storm,  with  heavy  rain  ;  on 
dark,  cold  days,  with  a  blustering  East  wind;  and  on 
bright,  still  and  hot   days,  when  the  water  lies  unruffled, 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.      365 

like  a  burnished  mirror.  If  this  be  so,  it  is  extremely- 
fortunate,  and  we  can  apply  the  rule  of  exclusion  here, 
and  at  once  dismiss  all  such  occasions  from  further  con- 
sideration ;  for  I  take  it  for  granted  that  the  reader  has 
no  desire  to  "go  a-fishing"  at  such  times. 

Fortunately,  again,  the  season  for  angling  is  during 
pleasant  weather,  in  Spring,  Summer  and  Autumn  ;  and  I 
have  always  observed  that  the  pleasantest  days  for  the  an- 
gler's comfort,  were  usually  the  most  propitious  and  suc- 
cessful days  for  angling. 

It  matters  little,  for  bait-fishing,  whether  the  day  be 
bright  or  cloudy,  or  whether  the  wind  is  in  the  East,  West, 
North,  or  South,  so  long  as  it  is  a  pleasant  wind,  and  is 
not  too  raw  and  chilly.  I  have  had  "good  luck  "with 
the  wind  in  either  quarter,  and  from  a  gentle  breeze  to 
half  a  gale  ;  on  days  that  were  hot,  bright,  and  cloudless, 
as  well  as  on  those  that  were  cloudy  and  rather  cool. 

To  be  sure,  it  makes  some  difference  as  to  the  character 
of  the  waters;  the  pleasantest  days  are  best  for  small 
streams  and  shallow  waters,  while  the  mere  unlikely  days 
would  better  suit  lakes  and  deep  waters ;  though  in  either 
case,  the  pleasantest  days,  in  all  respects,  are  the  best. 

The  fish  in  deep  waters  are  not  so  easily  affected  by  the 
vicissitudes  of  weather,  as  those  in  waters  of  shallow  depth. 
As  exceptional  cases  I  might  add  that  I  have  had  as  good 
success  with  a  reefing  east  wind,  or  a  half-gale  from  the 
north-west,  on  lakes  of  good  depth,  as  at,  seemingly,  the 
most  favorable  times. 

Once,  on  La  Belle  Lake,  at  Oconomowoc,  Wisconsin,  I 
went  fishing  when  the  wind  was  blowing  quite  fresh  from 
the  West.  I  proceeded  to  the  lower  end  of  the  lake,  some 
three  miles,  when  the  wind  suddenly  hauled  around  to  the 


366  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

north-west,  blowing  great  guns,  and  causing  the  "  white- 
caps  "  to  roll  furiously.  It  was  impossible  to  make  head- 
way against  it,  so  I  was  compelled  to  anchor,  which  I  did 
in  a  bight  of  bulrushes,  in  water  from  ten  to  twelve  feet 
deep,  but  near  a  gravelly  bar.  Here  I  took,  in  a  little 
more  than  two  hours,  twenty-five  Black  Bass,  which  after- 
wards turned  the  scales  at  seventy-five  pounds.  I  have 
always  considered  this  catch  as  being  one  of  the  best  I 
ever  made.  On  my  return,  owing  to  the  high  wind  and 
heavy  sea,  it  was  all  I  could  do  to  keep  my  boat  from 
swamping. 

On  another  occasion,  on  Oconomowoc  Lake,  I  fished  at  a 
rocky  bar,  which  divided  the  lake  into  two  portions.  The 
wind  was  blowing  a  half-gale  from  the  East,  and  quite 
cool ;  the  shallow  water  on  the  bar  was  churned  and  tossed 
into  billows  of  seething  foam  by  the  high  wind,  enabling 
me  to  fish  in  water  but  a  foot  or  two  in  depth  ;  and  in  a 
short  time  I  took  nine  Bass,  the  smallest  of  which  weighed 
four  pounds.  I  was  then  forced  to  relinquish  my  sport,  as 
I  had  "  run  out  "  of  minnows. 

Again,  on  Genesee  Lake,  in  the  same  locality,  I  once 
made  a  good  catch  under  peculiar  circumstances.  On  this 
occasion  I  was  "frogging,"  as  this  lake,  at  that  time, 
was  famous  for  the  quantity  and  quality  of  its  bull-frogs. 
After  spearing  a  "  good  mess  "  of  greenbacks,  I  was  stand- 
ing on  a  sand-bar,  which  divides  the  lake  into  two  parts 
during  low  water,  and  was  idly  watching  the  waves  rolling 
up  on  the  bar,  which  were  being  driven  with  great  fury 
by  a  strong  south-west  wind.  I  chanced  to  see  several 
Black  Bass,  evidently  feeding  in  the  surf;  and  I  then  be- 
gan devising  ways  and  means  for  their  capture. 

Near  by,  was  a  water-logged  boat,  in  which  I   saw  a 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.      367 

tamarack  pole,  and,  upon  investigation,  I  found  that  there 
was  a  short  line  and  hook  attached.  My  plans  were  soon 
formed.  I  went  to  a  small  hole  of  water,  that  I  had  pre- 
viously observed,  which  was  left  after  the  drying  up  of  the 
outlet  of  a  marsh  at  the  lower  end  of  the  lake,  and  in 
which  I  had  seen  a  great  many  small  minnows,  an  inch  or 
two  long.  Dipping  up  a  lot  in  my  handkerchief,  I  took 
it  by  the  corners  and  proceeded  along  the  shore,  dipping 
up  water  occasionally  to  keep  the  bait  alive.  On  the  bar 
I  scooped  a  hole  in  the  sand  for  the  bait,  filled  it  with 
water  and  went  to  fishing.  The  novelty  of  the  situation, 
and  my  curiosity  as  to  the  result  of  the  experiment,  quieted 
my  conscience  and  justified  the  employment  of  such  prim- 
itive measures.  Baiting  the  hook,  I  waded  into  the  surf 
as  far  as  I  could  with  ordinary  boots — for,  being  early  in 
the  season>  the  water  was  quite  cold — I  was  soon  pulling 
out  the  Bass,  and  took  in  this  manner,  with  a  short  pole 
and  six  feet  of  line,  fifteen  splendid  Bass. 

In  angling,  it  may  be  safely  accepted  as  a  truism,  that 
any  wind  is  better  t^an  no  wind ;  a  gale  being  better  than 
a  perfectly  still  day,  especially  when  the  water  is  clear. 
The  reason  for  this  is,  that  the  surface  of  the  water  being 
agitated  and  ruffled  by  the  breeze,  the  fish  are  not  so  apt 
to  see  the  angler. 

An  east  wind  is  popularly  regarded  as  an  unfavorable 
wind  for  fishing,  but  it  is  not  necessarily  so.  The  opinion 
is  of  English  origin,  for  in  the  humid  climate  of  Great 
Britain  an  east  wind  is  exceedingly  raw,  chilly,  and  disa- 
greeable, and  is  held  to  be  productive  of  all  manner  of 
evils,  being  particularly  dreaded  by  sufferers  from  rheuma- 
tism, neuralgia,  or  gout.  The  anglers  of  England,  of 
course,  share  in  this  common  detestation  of  an  east  wind, 


368  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

and  this  prejudice  is  clearly  shown  by  British  writers  on 
angling,  from  whom  most  of  our  ideas  on  fishing  were 
formerly  derived. 

But  it  is  only  after  such  a  wind  has  prevailed  for  several 
days,  so  as  to  lower  the  temperature  of  inland  waters,  that 
it,  in  any  way,  affects  the  "  biting "  of  fish.  This,  no 
doubt,  is  often  the  case  in  Great  Britain,  and  has  led  to  the 
erroneous  supposition  that  an  east  wind,  under  any  and'all 
circumstances,  is  most  unfavorable  for  the  angler;  and  this 
idea  has,  to  a  great  extent,  been  tacitly  accepted  to  apply 
to  our  own  country  as  well. 

But  unless  the  fish  have  an  inherited  traditionary  re- 
membrance of  that  "remarkable  east  wind  "  which  divided 
the  waters  of  the  Red  Sea  and  enabled  Moses  and  his  fol- 
lowers to  pass  over  dry-shod,  which  causes  them  to  be- 
come suspicious  of  every  east  wind  that  blows,  I  can  not 
conceive  how  it  affects  their  feeding,  except,  as  stated  be- 
fore, when  it  has  been  of  sufficiently  long  continuance  to 
cool  the  water. 

Along  the  Atlantic  coast  of  the  United  States  an  east 
wind  is  generally  held  to  be  unpropitious  for  fishing ; 
but  in  this  case  post  Jwc  is  mistaken  for  propter  hoc;  in 
other  words,  the  effect  is  mistaken  for  the  cause.  After  an 
unusually  long  series  of  east  winds,  or  easterly  gales,  the 
tides  are  much  affected  thereby,  and  rise  much  higher,  and 
spread  over  more  extensive  surfaces.  The  fish,  as  a  matter  of 
course,  take  advantage  of  this  state  of  affairs,  and,  accord- 
ingly, extend  their  range  in  quest  of  food,  being  rewarded 
by  great  quantities  of  Crustacea,  mollusks,  etc.,  which  be- 
fore were  inaccessible  on  account  of  the  shallow  water. 
At  such  times,  the  fish  are  not  found  on  their  usual  feed- 
ing grounds  in  the  tideways,  and  hence  has  arisen  the  er- 
roneous idea  that  they  do  not  feed  during  an  east  wind. 


CONDITIONS   WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.      369 

Many  bait-fishers  have  an  abiding  faith  in  the  signs  of 
the  Zodiac  in  influencing  the  biting  of  fish ;  believing  that 
when  the  "  sign"  is  in  the  feet  (Pisces),  and  also  just  before 
and  after,  encroaching  on  the  domains  of  the  legs  (Aquarius), 
and  head  (Aries),  that  fish  feed  better  than  at  other  times. 
They,  of  course,  always  remember  the  successful  occasions 
at  these  periods,,  but  soon  forget,  or  imagine  some  satis- 
factory reason  for,  the  failures;  and  thus  their  superstitious 
belief  seldom  weakens. 

The  moon,  likewise,  is  supposed  by  many  to  influence 
the  feeding  of  fish.  In  Florida,  the  opinion  is  very  preva- 
lent among  hunters  and  fishermen,  that  deer,  fish,  and 
other  animals  feed  principally  when  the  moon  is  above  the 
horizon,  night  or  day,  particularly  at  moon-rise,  moon- 
south,  and  moon-set.  This  belief  also  obtains  in  other 
sections  of  our  country,  and  the  adherents  to  the  theory 
are,  withal,  so  consistent,  that  their  faith  can  not  be  shaken 
by  repeated  failures,  and  they  seldom  hunt  or  fish  except 
when  the  "  moon  is  right." 

While  I  am  not  a  believer  in  the  theory  of  the  moon's 
influence  over  terrestrial  objects,  I  am  not  prepared  to  say 
that  there  is  nothing  whatever  in  the  moon  affecting  the 
feeding  of  fish  j  for  while  fish  certainly  feed  much  at 
night,  they  seem  to  feed  more  especially  on  moonlight 
nights.  Still,  I  do  not  attribute  this  fact  to  any  influence 
possessed  by  the  moon,  beyond  the  light  it  affords,  to  enable 
the  fish  to  find  their  prey.  I  have  often  observed  that 
during  the  season  of  "full-moon,  fish  were  more  apt  to  be 
sluggish  and  off  their  feed  during  the  day  time;  and  this 
I  have  always  attributed  to  the  fact,  that  they  did  their 
feeding  mostly  at  nights,  at  such  times.  Many  anglers 
only  fish  from  the  last  quarter  until  the  new  moon. 


370  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

A  perfect  day  for  fishing,  might  be  described  as  a  warm, 
pleasant  day,  with  a  balmy,  invigorating  breeze ;  a  mellow 
sunlight,  not  too  bright,  produced  by  a  somewhat  hazy  at- 
mosphere, or  by  drifting  clouds;  when  the  season  has 
been  neither  too  wet  nor  too  dry ;  such  a  day  as  makes  it 
a  pleasure  for  one  to  breathe,  and  inhale  with  delight  the 
odors  and  fragrance  of  forest,  field,  and  stream. 

Not  a  day  that  produces  a  feeling  of  exquisite  languor, 
and  disposes  to  delicious,  dreamy  reveries,  like  the  stimu- 
lant effect  of  an  opiate ;  but  a  day  when  the  atmosphere 
seems  filled  with  some  indescribable  aerial  stimulant,  that 
acts  upon  the  brain,  nerves,  and  circulation  like  sparkling 
wine ;  that  rouses  the  energies  and  spurs  the  nerves,  pulses, 
and  muscles  to  action ;  such  a  day  as  makes  one  desire  to 
laugh,  to  sing,  to  leap,  to  caper,  to  race  through  the  mead- 
ows, to  indulge  in  sudden  impulses,  in  short,  to  make  one 
feel  a  boy  again. 

Such  a  day,  when  the  water  is  semi-transparent  or  trans- 
lucent, and  of  such  a  temperature  when  it  is  most  pleasant 
to  bathe  in — such  a  day,  I  say,  is  sure  to  be  a  satisfactory 
one  to  the  angler,  and  the  fish  will  be  pretty  sure  to  bite. 

On  a  day  such  as  I  have  just  described,  I  once  made  my 
largest  catch  of  Black  Bass,  though  I  have  always  been 
opposed  to  "  big  catches/'  on  principle ;  for  I  hold  that 
when  the  sole  object  in  angling  is  to  catch  fish  as  long  as 
they  will  "  bite,"  the  proceeding  leaves  the  province  of 
sport,  and  degenerates  into  pot-fishing,  or,  what  is  worse, 
useless  and  unjustifiable  slaughter;  much  in  the  same  way 
that,  when  an  unprincipled  merchant,  during  the  war,  took 
unfair  advantage  of  certain  circumstances,  and  sold  goods 
at  an  advance  of  five  hundred  per  cent.,  and  who,  when 
afterwards  boasting  of  the  fine  per  centage  of  profit  real- 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.  371 

ized,  was  told  by  a  plain-spoken  old  gentleman  that  the 
transaction  passed  the  limits  of  per  centage,  and  entered 
the  bounds  of  petit  larceny. 

But  as  an  honest  confession  is  good  for  the  soul,  I  will 
relate  the  incident  referred  to  :  I  was  fishing  in  Okauchee 
Lake,  Wisconsin,  in  company  with  two  friends  from  Cin- 
cinnati, on  a  really  perfect  day  in  July.  We  had,  unfor- 
tunately, a  bountiful  supply  of  fine  minnows  for  bait,  and 
after  we  had  taken  more  than  enough  fish,  I  proposed  to 
stop;  but  my  friends,  to  whom  the  experience  was  new? 
could  not  be  induced  to  relinquish  the  exciting  sport,  so  I 
continued  fishing,  under  protest,  and  we  took  during  the 
day  one  hundred  and  fifty-three  Bass,  and,  with  shame  do 
I  confess  it,  more  than  one-half — I  am  afraid  to  say  just 
how  many  more — fell  to  my  rod. 

In  justice,  however,  but  not  as  a  redeeming  feature,  I 
will  state  that  the  fish  were  not  wasted,  but  a  hundred  fine 
Bass  were  packed  in  ice  and  expressed  to  friends  in  Cin- 
cinnati, and  the  balance  were  distributed  among  the  hotels 
of  Oconomowoc. 

I  always  look  back  upon  this  circumstance  with  regret, 
though  I  have  done  penance  for  the  transaction,  many  a 
time  and  oft,  since,  by  stopping  at  a  dozen  Bass,  when  I 
might  have  taken  twice  the  number. 

Some  anglers  tell  us  that  fish  will  not  bite  before  a  rain  ; 
others  say  they  will  not  take  a  bait  during  a  rain ;  and  still 
others  affirm  that  it  is  useless  to  fish  after  a  rain.  Now, 
while  there  is  a  grain  of  truth  in  each  of  these  opinions, 
yet  if  we  blindly  accept  all  of  them  and  endeavor  to  follow 
them,  we  shall  have  no  further  use  for  our  fishing-tackle. 

I  do  not  think  that  rain,  ficr  se,  has  any  influence  what- 
ever upon  the  feeding  offish.     It  is,  of  course,  impossible 


372  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

for  us  to  judge  in  this  matter  by  a  comparison  with  terres- 
trial creatures ;  but,  fishes  being  inhabitants  of  the  watery 
element,  it  is  not  reasonable  to  suppose  that  a  rain  makes 
any  difference  with  them  at  all — at  the  time — though  they 
profit  or  not,  by  the  subsequent  rising  and  roiling  of  the 
water,  more  or  less,  according  to  circumstances. 

The  multitudes  of  insects  which  are  said  to  be  beaten 
down  from  the  overhanging  trees  and  from  the  air,  into 
the  water,  during  a  shower  of  rain,  must  be  taken  cum 
grano  sahs;  for  insects,  like  most  other  mundane  creatures, 
know  enough  to  "  come  in  out  of  the  wet."  We  really 
find  no  more  insects  floating  on  the  water  during  a  rain, 
than  at  other  times,  though  it  is  true  that  many  are  col- 
lected and  swept  by  rains  from  the  surface  of  the  ground, 
and  washed  into  the  streams  by  swollen  brooks  and 
branches;  but  with  the  insects,  go,  also,  the  washings, 
debris,  and  particles  of  soil  to  discolor  and  thicken  the 
streams,  so  that  the  fish  may  really  fast  in  the  midst  of 
plenty,  not  being  able  to  see  the  sudden  influx  of  food  by 
reason  of  the  turbidity  of  the  water:  and,  again,  it  is  doubt- 
ful if  fish  feed  much  on  dead  insects 

The  fish,  however,  on  the  other  hand,  are  enabled  to  ex- 
tend their  range  in  foraging  for  food,  during  seasons  of 
high  water,  when  the  water  has  cleared  sufficiently  to 
allow  them  to  discover  it. 

I  have  noticed  that  fish  usually  bite  better  just  before  a 
shower ;  especially  if  the  weather  be  murky  and  warm,  and 
I  think  this  can  be  accounted  for  in  this  way :  It  is  gen- 
erally quite  calm,  for  a  longer  or  shorter  time  previous  to 
a  summer  shower,  and  the  water  being  still,  the  fish  do 
not  bite,  as  they  see  the  angler  too  distinctly — and  this  is 
why  some  have  said  that  it  is  not  a  good  time  to  fish  before 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.      373 

a  rain — but  immediately  preceding  the  shower,  a  brisk  breeze 
usually  springs  up,  rippling  the  water,  and  it  is  at  this 
time  that  fish  seem  to  become  possessed  with  a  sudden  im- 
pulse to  feed,  not  on  account  of  the  impending  rain,  how- 
ever, as  many  suppose,  but  because  the  angler  is  hid  from 
view  by  the  ruffling  of  the  water.  Sometimes  this  breeze 
accompanies  the  rain,  and  at  other  times  follows  the  rain, 
and  in  either  case  the  fish  will  bite  best  while  the  breeze 
continues.  When  a  shower  is  followed  by  a  calm,  fish,  of 
course,  will  not  bite,  in  clear  water,  and  as  this  often  hap- 
pens, it  follows  that  some  anglers  hold  to  the  opinion  that 
they  never  bite  after  a  rain. 

I  have  tried  to  impress  the  reader,  all  through  this 
chapter,  with  the  importance  of  keeping  out  of  sight  of  the 
fish  as  much  as  possible,  for  herein  lies  the  greatest  secret 
of  success  in  angling;  and  fish  will  be  found  to  bite  better, 
always,  when  conditions  are  such  as  to  favor  the  screening 
of  the  angler  from  their  ever-watchful  eyes,  and,  when,  at 
the  same  time,  the  water  is  sufficiently  clear  to  enable 
them  to  discern  the  bait  on  or  beneath  the  surface. 

In  fly-fishing,  especially,  must  this  caution  be  exercised 
to  its  fullest  extent,  for  the  casts  being  necessarily  much 
shorter  than  in  bait-fishing,  the  angler  is  more  liable  to  be 
seen ;  and  herein  lies  the  foundation  of  the  opinion,  enter- 
tained by  many,  that  Black  Bass  are  more  uncertain  to 
rise  to  the  fly  than  the  Brook  Trout.  I  hold  that  Black 
Bass,  during  the  proper  season,  will  rise  as  readily  to  the 
fly,  under  the  same  conditions,  as  the  Trout. 

But  the  fact  is,  that  while  the  Bass  is  as  wary  as  the 
Trout,  he  is  not  so  timid.  The  Trout  darts  awray  at  the  first 
glimpse  of  the  angler,  while  the  Bass  will  hold  his  ground, 
though  ready  to  depart  unceremoniously   when    occasion 


374  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

calls,  eyeing  the  angler  meanwhile,  and  entirely  ignoring 
his  best  skill,  though  he  cast  his  feathery  lures  never  so 
lightly  and  naturally.  The  Bass  is  too  knowing  to  be 
taken  in  by  any  such  deception  so  long  as  he  sees  the  an- 
gler at  the  other  end  of  the  rod ;  hence,  more  caution  is 
really  necessary  in  fly-fishing  for  Black  Bass  than  for  the 
Brook  Trout. 

In  regard  to  the  best  time  of  day  for  angling,  there  is 
not  much  choice,  and  it  is  governed  a  good  deal  by  the 
season  of  the  year,  the  temperature  of  the  water,  and  by 
the  character  of  the  day  itself,  though,  as  a  rule,  fish  are 
sluggish  and  oif  their  feed  during  the  middle  of  the  day, 
with  a  bright  and  warm  sun,  say  from  noon  until  three 
o'clock,  except  early  and  late  in  the  season,  when  the  water 
is  still  cold,  when  the  middle  of  the  day  is  often  the  best 
time. 

For  bait-fishing,  on  small  streams,  the  early  morning 
hours,  about  sunrise,  are  often  the  best ;  though  on  large 
streams  and  lakes  there  is  nothing  gained  by  early  fishing, 
as  the  fish  do  not  bite  well  until  the  sun  is  several  hours 

high. 

The  latter  part  of  the  afternoon,  until  sundown,  is  often 
the  best  part  of  the  day  for  the  angler.  On  cloudy  days, 
however,  the  middle  of  the  day  is  often  the  most  favorable, 
especially  if  the  weather  is  rather  cool. 

For  fly-fishing,  the  early  morning  hours  succeeding  sun- 
rise, and  from  an  hour  or  two  before  sunset  until  dark,  or 
with  a  nearly  full  moon,  even  later,  will  be  found  the  best 
hours  for  filling  the  creel. 

Of  course,  all  of  these  times  must  be  governed  by  con- 
ditions of  the  wind,  weather,  and  water,  whether  favorable 
or  not;  for  no  matter  what  the  hour  of  the  day,  it  will  be 


CONDITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  BITING  OF  FISH.      375 

the  most  successful,  when  other  conditions  are  most  favor- 
able, and  approach  more  nearly  to  the  "  typical "  day  for 
angling,  as  described  in  this  chapter,  the  most  prominent 
features  of  which  are  pleasant  weather,  translucent  water, 
and  a  fresh  breeze. 

Thunder,  and  electrical  conditions  of  the  atmosphere,  I 
leave  out  of  the  account  altogether,  as  we  have  no  means 
of  judging  of  the  influence  of  so  subtile  an  agent  as  elec- 
tricity on  the  finny  tribe ;  nor  have  I  ever  observed  any 
peculiar  effect  on  fishes  from  these  causes,  though  great 
stress  is  often  laid  by  some  anglers  on  the  influence  of  an 
atmosphere  surcharged  with  electricity,  whatever  that  may 
mean  ;  but  it  is  no  more  reasonable  to  suppose  that  fishes 
would  be  disturbed  by  electrical  conditions  of  the  air,  than 
terrestrial  animals  would  be  inconvenienced  or  otherwise  by 
electric  conditions  of  water. 

But,  notwithstanding  all  of  our  patient  and  careful  ob- 
servations of  the  habits  of  fish,  their  food  and  their  sur- 
roundings, and  our  study  of  the  various  conditions  of 
wind,  weather,  and  water,  there  will  be  days  and  days  in 
the  experience  of  every  angler,  when  the  fish  will  utterly 
refuse  to  bite ;  and  this  on  such  days  as  the  most  finished, 
practiced,  and  observant  angler  would  pronounce  exceed- 
ingly favorable  in  every  particular.  At  such  times  one  is 
forcibly  reminded  of  the  analogy  existing  between  the  will 
of  woman  and  the  "biting"  of  fish,  as  related  in  the 
familiar  lines  : — 

"  For  if  she  will,  she  will,  you  may  depend  on 't ; 
And  if  she  won't,  she  won't;  so  there's  an  end  on't." 

Every  Black  Bass  angler  has  seen — where  the  water  was 
clear  enough  for  observation — the  Bass  seize  his  minnow 


376  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

through  seemingly  mere  caprice,  and,  instead  of  attempting 
to  gorge  it,  would  take  it  gingerly  by  the  tail,  toy  with  it, 
and  finally  eject  it,  or  spit  it  out,  as  it  were;  and  this  would 
be  repeated  several  times  in  succession,  or  until  the  an- 
gler's patience  became  exhausted,  when,  while  unjointing 
his  rod,  he  would  muse  upon  the  waywardness  of  fish  in 
general,  and  would  be  convinced  that  Solomon  never  went 
a-fishing,  or  he  Avould  have  added  another  item  to  the 
four  things  too  wonderful  for  his  ken,  or  at  least  have  sub- 
stituted "  the  way  of  a  fish  with  a  bait,"  for  the  less  puz- 
zling proposition  of  "  the  way  of  a  man  with  a  maid." 


CHAPTER    XX. 

THE  BLACK  BASS  AS  A  GAME  FISH. 


"  He  is  a  fish  that  lurks  close  all  winter ;  but  is  very  pleasant  and  jolly  after 
mid-April,  and  in  May,  and  in  the  hot  months."— Izaak  Walton. 


Those  who  have  tasted  the  lotus  of  Salmon,  or  Trout 
fishing,  in  that  Utopian  clime  of  far  away — while  reveling 
in  its  aesthetic  atmosphere,  and  surrounded  by  a  misty  halo 
of  spray  from  the  waterfall,  or  enveloped  by  the  filmy 
gauze  and  iridescent  haze  of  the  cascade — have  inscribed 
tomes,  sang  idyls,  chanted  paeans,  and  poured  out  libations 
in  honor  and  praise  of  the  silver-spangled  Salmon,  or  the 
ruby-studded  Trout,  while  it  is  left  to  the  vulgar  horde  of 
Black  Bass  anglers^&o  stand  upon  the  mountain  of  their 
own  doubt  and  presumption,  and,  with  uplifted  hands, 
in  admiration  and  awe,  gaze  with  dazed  eyes  from  afar 
upon  that  forbidden  land — that  terra  incognita — and  then, 
having  lived  in  vain,  die  and  leave  no  sign. 

It  is,  then,  with  a  spirit  of  rank  heresy  in  my  heart; 
with  smoked  glass  spectacles  on  my  nose,  to  dim  the  glare 
and  glamour  of  the  transcendent  shore ;  with  the  scales  of 
justice  across  my  shoulder — M.  salmoides  in  one  scoop  and 
M.  dolomieu  in  the  other — I  pass  the  barriers  and  confines 
of  the  enchanted  land,  and  toss  them  into  a  stream  that 
has  been  depopulated  of  even  fingerlings,  by  the  dilettanti 
32  (377) 


378  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

of  Salmon  and  Trout  fishers;  for  I  would  not,  even  here, 
put  Black  Bass  in  a  stream  inhabited  by  Salmon  or  Brook 
Trout. 

While  watching  the  plebeian  interlopers  sporting  in  an 
eddy,  their  bristling  spines  and  emerald  sides  gleaming  in 
the  sunshine,  I  hear  an  awful  voice  from  the  adjacent 
rocks  exclaiming:  "Fools  rush  in  where  angels  fear  to 
tread  !  "  Shade  of  Izaak  Walton  defend  us !  While  ap- 
pealing to  Father  Izaak  for  protection,  I  quote  his  words : 
"Of  which,  if  thou  be  a  severe,  sour  complexioned  man, 
then  I  here  disallow  thee  to  be  a  competent  judge." 

Seriously,  most  of  our  notions  of  game  fish  and  fishing 
are  derived  from  British  writers;  and  as  the  Salmon  and 
the  Trout  are  the  only  fishes  in  Great  Britain  worthy  of 
being  called  game,  they,  of  course,  form  the  themes  of 
British  writers  on  game  fish.  Americans,  following  the 
lead  of  our  British  cousins  in  this,  as  we  were  wont  to  do 
in  all  sporting  matters,  have  eulogized  the  Salmon  and 
Brook  Trout  as  the  game  fish  par  excellence  of  America, 
ignoring  other  fish  equally  worthy. 

While  some  claim  for  the  Striped  Bass  a  high  place  in 
the  list  of  game  fish,  I  feel  free  to  assert,  that,  were  the 
Black  Bass  a  native  of  Great  Britain,  he  would  rank  fully 
as  high,  in  the  estimation  of  British  anglers,  as  either  the 
Trout  or  the  Salmon.  I  am  borne  out  in  this  by  the 
opinions  of  British  sportsmen,  whose  statements  have  been 
received  without  question. 

W.  H.  Herbert  (Frank  Forester)  writing  of  the  Black 
Bass,  says :  "  This  is  one  of  the  finest  of  the  American 
fresh  water  fishes;  it  is  surpassed  by  none  in  boldness 
of  biting,  in  fierce  and  violent  resistance  when  hooked,  and 
by  a  very  few  only  in  excellence  upon  the  board." 


THE   BLACK    BASS   AS   A   GAME    FISH  379 

Parker  Gilmore  ("Ubique")  says:  "I  fear  it  will  be 
almost  deemed  heresy  to  place  this  fish  (Black  Bass)  on 
a  par  with  the  Trout;  at  least,  some  such  idea  I  had 
when  I  first  heard  the  two  compared ;  but  I  am  bold,  and 
will  go  further.  I  consider  he  is  the  superior  of  the  two, 
for  he  is  equally  good  as  an  article  of  food,  and  much 
stronger  and  untiring  in  his  efforts  to  escape  when 
hooked." 

In  a  recent  issue  of  the  London  "Fishing  Gazette" 
(England),  Mr.  Silk  advertises:  "Black  Bass  (Grystes 
nigricans),  the  gamest  of  American  fish.  300  for  sale 
(just  arrived),  length  from  3  to  5  inches;  6  months  old. 
Price,  10s.  ($2.25)  each." 

Now,  while  Salmon  fishing  is,  unquestionably,  the  highest 
branch  of  piscatorial  sport;  and  while  Trout  fishing  in 
Canada,  Maine,  and  the  Lake  Superior  region  justifies  all 
the  extravagant  praise  bestowed  upon  it,  I  am  inclined  to 
doubt  the  judgment  and  good  taste  of  those  anglers  who 
snap  their  fingers  in  contempt  of  Black  Bass  fishing,  while 
they  will  wade  a  stream  strewn  with  brush  and  logs,  catch 
a  few  Trout  weighing  six  or  eight  to  the  pound,  and  call 
it  the  only  artistic  angling  in  the  world !  While  they  are 
certainly  welcome  to  their  opinion,  I  think  their  zeal  is 
worthy  of  a  better  cause. 

The  Black  Bass  is  eminently  an  American  fish,  and  has 
been  said  to  be  representative  in  his  characteristics.  He 
has  the  faculty  of  asserting  himself  and  making  himself 
completely  at  home  wherever  placed.  He  is  plucky,  game, 
brave  and  unyielding  to  the  last  when  h'ooked.  He  has 
the  arrowy  rush  and  vigor  of  the  Trout,  the  untiring 
strength  and  bold  leap  of  the  Salmon,  while  he  has  a  sys- 
tem of  fighting  tactics  peculiarly  his  own. 


380  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

He  will  rise  to  the  artificial  fly  as  readily  as  the  Salmon 
or  the  Brook  Trout,  under  the  same  conditions;  and  will 
take  the  live  minnow,  or  other  live  bait,  under  any  and 
all  circumstances  favorable  to  the  taking  of  any  other  fish. 
I  consider  him,  inch  for  inch  and  pound  for  pound,  the 
gamest  fish  that  swims.  The  royal  Salmon  and  the 
lordly  Trout  must  yield  the  palm  to  a  Black  Bass  of  equal 
weight 

That  he  will  eventually  become  the  leading  game  fish 
of  America  is  my  oft-expressed  opinion  and  firm  belief. 
This  result,  I  think,  is  inevitable  ;  if  for  no  other  reasons, 
from  a  force  of  circumstances  occasioned  by  climatic  con- 
ditions and  the  operation  of  immutable  natural  laws,  such 
as  the  gradual  drying  up,  and  dwindling  away  of  the  small 
Trout  streams,  and  the  consequent  decrease  of  Brook  Trout, 
both  in  quality  and  quantity ;  and  by  the  introduction  of 
predatory  fish  in  waters  where  the  Trout  still  exists. 

Another  prominent  cause  of  the  decline  and  fall  of  the 
Brook  Trout,  is  the  erection  of  dams,  saw-mills  and  fac- 
tories upon  Trout  streams,  which,  though  to  be  deplored, 
can  not  be  prevented;  the  march  of  empire  and  the 
progress  of  civilization  can  not  be  stayed  by  the  honest, 
though  powerless,  protests  of  anglers. 

But,  while  the  ultimate  fate  of  the  Brook  Trout  is  sealed 
beyond  peradventure,  we  have  the  satisfaction  of  knowing, 
that,  in  the  Black  Bass  we  have  a  fish  equally  worthy, 
both  as  to  game  and  edible  qualities,  and  which,  at  the 
same  time,  is  able  to  withstand,  and  defy,  many  of  the 
causes  that  will,  in  the  end,  effect  the  annihilation  and  ex- 
tinction of  the  Brook  Trout. 

Mr.  Charles  Hallock,  the  well-known  author,  angler, 
and  journalist,  says: — 


THE   BLACK    BASS   AS   A    GAME   FISH.  381 

No  doubt  the  Bass  is  the  appointed  successor  of  the  Trout :  not 
through  heritage,  nor  selection,  nor  by  interloping,  but  by  fore- 
ordination.  Truly,  it  is  sad  to  contemplate,  in  the  not  distant 
future,  the  extinction  of  a  beautiful  race  of  creatures,  whose  at- 
tributes have  been  sung  by  all  the  poets;  but  we  regard  the 
inevitable  with  the  same  calm  philosophy  with  which  the  astronomer 
watches  the  burning  out  of  a  world,  knowing  that  it  will  be  suc- 
ceeded by  a  new  creation. 

As  we  mark  the  soft  vari-tinted  flush  of  the  Trout  disappear  in 
the  eventide,  behold  the  sparkle  of  the  coming  Bass  as  he  leaps  into 
the  morning  of  his  glory !  We  hardly  know  which  to  admire  the 
most — the  velvet  livery  and  the  charming  graces  of  the  departing 
courtier,  or  the  flash  of  the  armor-plates  on  the  advancing  warrior. 
No  doubt  the  Bass  will  prove  himself  a  worthy  substitute  for  his 
predecessor,  and  a  candidate  for  a  full  legacy  of  honors. 

No  doubt,  when  every  one  of  the  older  States  shall  become  as 
densely  settled  as  Great  Britain  itself,  and  all  the  rural  aspects  of 
the  crowded  domain  resemble  the  suburban  surroundings  of  our 
Boston ;  when  every  feature  of  the  pastoral  landscape  shall  wear  the 
finished  appearance  of  European  lands;  and  every  verdant  field 
be  closely  cropped  by  lawn-mowers  and  guarded  by  hedges ;  and 
every  purling  stream  which  meanders  through  it  has  its  water- 
bailiff,  we  shall  still  have  speckled  Trout  from  which  the  radiant 
spots  have  faded,  and  tasteless  fish,  to  catch  at  a  dollar  per  pound 
(as  we  already  have  on  Long  Island),  and  all  the  appurtenances 
and  appointments  of  a  genuine  English  Trouting  privilege  and  a 
genuine  English  "  outing." 

In  those  future  days,  not  long  hence  to  come,  some  venerable 
piscator,  in  whose  memory  still  lingers  the  joy  of  fishing,  the  brawl- 
ing stream  which  tumbled  over  the  rocks  in  the  tangled  wildwood, 
and  moistened  the  arbutus  and  the  bunchberries  which  garnished 
its  banks,  will  totter  forth  to  the  velvety  edge  of  some  peacefully- 
flowing  stream,  and  having  seated  himself  on  a  convenient  point  in 
a  revolving  easy  chair,  placed  there  by  his  careful  attendant,  cast 
right  and  left  for  the  semblance  of  sport  long  dead. 

Hosts  of  liver-fed  fish  will  rush  to  the  signal  for  their  early  morn- 
ing meal,  and  from  the  center  of  the  boil  which,  follows  the  fall  of 
the  handsful  thrown  in,  my  piscator  of  the  ancient  days  will  hook  a 


382  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

two-pound  Trout,  and  play  him  hither  and  yon,  from  surface  to 
bottom,  without  disturbing  the  pampered  gormands  which  are 
gorging  themselves  upon  the  disgusting  viands ;  and  when  he  has 
leisurely  brought  him  to  hand  at  last,  and  the  gillie  has  scooped 
him  with  his  landing-net,  he  will  feel  in  his  capacious  pocket  for 
his  last  trade  dollar,  and  giving  his  friend  the  tip,  shuffle  back  to 
his  house,  and  lay  aside  his  rod  forever. 

Rev.  Myron  H.  Reed,  an  enthusiastic  angler,  who  fol- 
lows the  example,  in  a  double  sense,  of  those  disciples, 
who,  being  fishermen  of  the  waters,  became  also  fishers 
of  men,  ventures  this  prediction  : — 

This  is  probably  the  last  generation  of  Trout  fishers.  The  chil- 
dren will  not  be  able  to  find  any.  Already  there  are  well-trodden 
paths  by  every  stream  in  Maine,  in  New  York  and  in  Michigan.  I 
know  of  but  one  river  in  North  America  by  the  side  of  which  you 
will  find  no  paper  collar  or  other  evidences  of  civilization  ;  it  is  the 
Nameless  River. 

Not  that  Trout  will  cease  to  be.  They  will  be  hatched  by 
machinery,  and  raised  in  ponds,  and  fattened  on  chopped  liver,  and 
grow  flabby  and  lose  their  spots.  The  Trout  of  the  restaurant  will 
not  cease  to  be.  He  is  no  more  like  the  Trout  of  the  wild  river 
than  the  fat  and  songless  reed-bird  is  like  the  bobolink.  Gross 
feeding  and  easy  pond-life  enervate  and  deprave  him. 

The  Trout  that  the  children  will  know  only  by  legend  is  the  gold- 
sprinkled,  living  arrow  of  the  Whitewater — able  to  zig-zag  up  the 
cataract,  able  to  loiter  in  the  rapids — whose  dainty  meat  is  the 
glancing  butterfly. 

But  is  the  Black  Bass  worthy  to  succeed  and  supersede 
the  speckled  beauty  of  the  cool  mountain  streams,  as  the 
game-fish  of  American  waters  ?     Let  us  see — 

Reader,  go  with  me 
This  perfect  morning  in  the  leafy  June, 
To  yon  pool  at  the  gurgling  rapid's  foot — 
Approach  with  caution ;  let  your  tread  be  soft ; 


THE   BLACK   BASS   AS   A   GAME   FISH.  383 

Beware  the  bending  bushes  on  the  brink ; 
Touch  no  branch,  nor  twig,  nor  leaf  disturb, 
For  the  finny  tribe  is  wary. 

Best  we  here,  awhile. 
Behold  the  scene !     Above — the  ripple, 
Sparkling  and  dancing  in  the  morning  sun. 
At  your  feet — the  blue-eyed  violet,  shedding 
Sweet  perfume,  and  nodding  in  the  breeze. 
The  red-bird,  ablaze,  and  with  swelling  throat 
Chants  loud  his  song,  in  yonder  thick-set  thorn. 
The  dreamy,  droning  hum  of  insects'  wings, 
Mingles  with  the  rustling  of  the  quivering  leaves. 
On  the  gravelly  shoal,  in  the  stream,  below — 
Sleek,  well-fed  cattle  contented  stand, 
Beneath  the  spreading  beech. 

Across  the  narrow  stream, 
Leans  a  giant  sycamore,  old  and  gray, 
With  scarr'd  arms  stretching  o'er  the  silent  pool ; 
And  gnarl'd  and  twisted  roots  bared  by  the  wash 
And  ripple,  for,  lo  these  hundred  years. 
The  bubbles  of  the  rapid  play  hide  and  seek 
Among  their  arching  nooks. 

Beneath  those  bare  roots, 
"With  watchful  eye,  proud  monarch  of  the  pool, 
A  cunning  Bass  doth  lie,  on  balanced  fin, 
In  waiting  for  his  prey. 

Now,  with  supple, 
Yielding  rod,  and  taper'd  line  of  silk ; 
With  mist-like  leader,  and  two  small  flies — 
Dark,  bushy  hackles  both — I  make  a  cast. 
With  lengthen'd  line  I  quickly  cast  again, 
And  just  beneath  the  tree  the  twin-like  lures 
As  light  as  snow-flakes  fall,  and  gently  linger, — 
Half-submerged, — like  things  of  life,  obedient  still 
To  slightest  tension  of  line  and  rod. 

Look  !    Saw  you  that  gleam 
Beneath  the  flood  ?    A  flash — a  shadow — 


384  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

Then  a  swirl  upon  the  surface  of  the  pool  ? 
My  hand  responsive  to  the  sudden  thrill, 
Strikes  in  the  steel ;  the  wary  Bass  is  hook'd. 
With  light'ning  speed  he  darts  away  toward  his 
Ark  of  refuge — his  lair  beneath  the  roots. 

The  singing  reel, 
And  hissing  line,  proclaim  him  almost  there, 
When  I  "  give  the  butt."     The  faithful  rod, 
In  horse-shoe  curve,  now  checks  his  headlong  flight. 
Egad !  he  tugs  and  pulls  right  lustily ; 
But  still  the  barb  is  there.     The  rod  now  bending 
Like  a  reed,  resists  the  tight'ning  strain,  and 
Turns  him  in  his  course. 

In  curving  reaches, 
Back  and  forth,  he  darts  in  conscious  strength ; 
Describing  arcs  and  segments  in  the  shadows 
Of  the  ruffled  pool.     Ha  !  nobly  done ! 
With  a  mighty  rush  he  cleaves  the  crystal  flood, 
And  at  one  bound,  full  half  a  fathom  in 
The  realm  above,  he  takes  an  serial  flight; 
His  fins,  extended  with  bristling  points ; 
His  armor,  brightly  flashing  in  the  sun ; 
Shaking,  in  his  rage,  his  wide-extended  jaws, 
To  rid  him  of  the  hook. 

Gracefully,  now,  I  lower 
The  pliant  rod,  in  courtesy  to  the  brave ; 
The  line,  relieved  of  steady  strain,  baffles 
The  wily  Bass ;  the  hook  holds  fast  and  firm. 
Back  he  falls  with  angry  splash,  to  the  depths, 
For  friendly  aid  of  snag,  or  stone,  or  root 
Of  tree — for  thus,  my  friend,  he  oft  escapes, 
By  fouling  line,  or  hook.     But,  he  never  sulks ! 
Not  he ;  while  life  remains,  or  strength  holds  good, 
His  efforts  are  unceasing. 

Now  up  the  stream — 
Now  down  again — I  have  him  well  in  hand ; 
Reeling  in,  or  giving  line ;  fast  and  slow, — 


THE   BLACK   BASS   AS   A    GAME   FISH.  385 

High  and  low, — the  steady  strain  maintaining; 
The  good  rod  swaying  like  a  rush,  as  he 
Surges  through  the  flood. 

Another  leap ! 
Ye  gods,  how  brave !     Like  a  lion  shaking 
His  shaggy  mane,  he  dives  below  again. 
Did  you  mark,  my  friend,  his  shrewd  intent, 
As  he  fell  across  the  line  ?    If  he  then 
Had  found  it  stretched  and  tense,  his  escape 
Was  surely  made.     But  the  tip  was  lowered ; 
And  with  yielding  line,  the  hook  still  held  him  fast. 

Now,  truly,  friend,  he 
Makes  a  gallant  fight !     In  air,  or  water, 
All  the  same,  his  spiny  crest  erect, 
He  struggles  to  the  last.     No  sulking  here ; 
But  like  a  mettl'd  steed,  he  champs  the  bit, 
And  speeds  the  best  with  firm-held,  tighten'd,  rein. 
Now  down  the  stream,  he's  off  again,  like  shaft 
From  long-bow  swiftly  sped — his  last  bold  spurt — 
The  effort  cost  him  very  dear ;  his  strength 
Is  ebbing  fast. 

In  decreasing  circles 
Now  he  swims,  and  labors  with  the  tide. 
As  I  reel  the  line,  he  slowly  yields, 
And  now  turns  up  his  breast-plate,  snowy  white — 
A  vanquish'd,  conquer'd  knight. 

Now,  my  friend, 
The  landing-net;  'neath  the  surface  hold  it, 
With  firm  and  cautious  hand.     There,  lift  him 
Gently  out ;  and  as  gently  lay  him  down. 
His  bright  sides  rival  the  velvet  sward,  in 
Rich  and  glossy  green. 

See  the  great  rent 
The  hook  hath  made  !     How  easily  'tis  withdrawn! 
You  marvel  how  I  held  him,  safe?     By  the 
Equal  and  continued  strain  of  willowy  rod, 
And  ever  faithful  reel. 
33 


386  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

Valiant,  noble  Bass ! 
Fit  denizen  of  the  brawling  stream !     Thy 
Last  fight  is  ended — thy  last  race  is  run  ! 
Thy  once  lov'd  pool  'neath  the  sycamore's  shade, 
Thy  fancied  stronghold  'neath  its  tangled  roots, 
Shall  know  thee  no  more. 

Place  him  in  thy  creel; 
Lay  him  tenderly  on  a  bed  of  ferns, 
Crisp,  green  and  cool  with  sparkling,  morning  dew- 
A  warrior  in  repose ! 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

FLY-FISHING. 

"  And  now,  scholar,  my  direction  for  fly-fishing  is  ended  with  this  shower, 
for  it  has  done  raining."— Izaak  Wai/ton. 

Artificial  fly-fishing  is  the  most  legitimate,  scien- 
tific and  gentlemanly  mode  of  angling,  and  is  to  be  greatly 
preferred  to  all  other  ways  and  means  of  capturing  the 
finny  tribe.  It  requires  more  address,  more  skill,  and  a 
better  knowledge  of  the  habits  of  the  fish  and  his  sur- 
roundings than  any  other  method. 

Fly-fishing  holds  the  same  relation  to  bait-fishing  that 
poetry  does  to  prose ;  and,  while  each  method  will  ever 
have  its  enthusiastic  admirers,  only  he  who  can  skillfully 
handle  the  comely  fly -rod,  and  deftly  cast  the  delicate  fly, 
can  truly  and  fully  enjoy  the  aesthetics  of  the  gentle  art. 
As  the  lover  naturally  "drops  into  poetry"  to  express  the 
ardent  fleelings  of  his  soul,  "with  a  woful  ballad  made 
to  his  mistress'  eyebrow,"  so  the  real  lover  of  nature  and 
the  finny  tribe  as  naturally  takes  to  fly-fishing,  and  finds 
liquid  poems  in  gurgling  streams,  and  pastoral  idyls  in 
leafy  woods. 

A  friend  in  Texas,  to  whom  I  sent  a  bass-fly  (an  Abbey), 
and  who  had  never  seen  a  "  fly  "  before,  enthusiastically 
declared  it  to  be  "a  fish-hook  poetized,"  and  thought  that 
a  "  Black  Bass  should  take  it  through  a  love  of  the  beauti- 
ful, if  nothing  else."  Not  only  the  fly,  but  every  imple- 
ment of  the  fly-fisher's  outfit  is  a  materialized  poem. 

(387) 


388  BOOK   OF  THE   BLACK    BASS. 

Fly-fishers  are  usually  brain-workers  in  society.  From 
time  immemorial  the  fraternity  has  embraced  many  of  the 
most  honored,  intellectual  and  cultured  members  of  the 
liberal  professions  and  arts.  Along  the  banks  of  purling 
streams,  beneath  the  shadows  of  umbrageous  trees,  or  in 
the  secluded  nooks  of  charming  lakes,  they  have  ever 
been  found,  drinking  deep  of  the  invigorating  forces  of 
nature — giving  rest  and  tone  to  overtaxed  brains  and 
wearied  nerves — while  gracefully  wielding  the  supple  rod, 
the  invisible  leader,  and  the  fairy-like  fly. 

Oh!  how  the  sluggish  pulses  bound,  the  deadened  nerves 
thrill,  and  the  relaxed  muscles  quicken,  responsive  to  the 
inspiration  of  the  electric  rise  of  the  gamey  denizens  of  the 
stream ;  and  oh,  how  the  buried  forces  of  life  are  resur- 
rected, renewed  and  strengthened  by  the  hopes,  and  fears, 
and  struggles,  of  the  contest  which  follows !  And  when 
at  last  the  brave  beauty  has  been  lovingly  deposited  in 
the  creel,  the  restored  angler  feels  that  he  has  won  a 
double  victory;  for,  in  the  death  of  the  fish,  he  sees  re- 
newed life  for  himself. 

But  the  true  fly-fisher,  who  practices  his  art  con  amove, 
does  not  delight  in  big  catches,  nor  revel  in  undue  and 
cruel  slaughter.  He  is  ever  satisfied  with  a  moderate  creel, 
and  is  content  with  the  scientific  and  skillful  capture  of  a 
few  good  fish.  The  beauties  of  nature,  as  revealed  in  his 
surroundings — the  sparkling  water,  the  shadow  and  sun- 
shine, the  rustling  leaves,  the  song  of  birds  and  hum  of 
insects,  the  health-giving  breeze — make  up  to  him  a  meas- 
ure of  true  enjoyment,  and  peace,  and  thankfulness,  that  is 
totally  unknown  to  the  slaughterer  of  the  innocents,  whose 
sole  ambition  is  to  fill  his  creel  and  record  his  captures  by 
scores;  and  wTho  realizes  naught  in  his  surroundings  but 


FLY-FISHING.  389 

the  hot  sun,  slippery  rocks,  baffling  winds,  and  the  annoy- 
ance of  overhanging  trees  and  bushes.  The  time  is  com- 
ing when  such  an  angler  will  receive,  as  well  as  merit,  the 
scorn  and  contempt  of  all  good  and  true  disciples  of  the 
gentle  art. 

Rigging  the  Cast. 

By  a  reference  to  the  chapters  devoted  to  the  imple- 
ments of  angling,  the  reader  will  obtain  a  full  description 
of  those  used  in  fly-fishing,  which  are  the  fly-rod,  the  click- 
reel,  the  tapered  fly-line,  the  leader,  the  fly,  the  fly-book, 
the  creel,  the  landing-net,  and  the  useful  adjuncts,  for 
stream-fishing,  of  wading-pants  or  stockings ;  and,  by 
referring  to  the  pages  on  knots,  the  following  directions 
for  rigging  the  cast  will  be  rendered  more  intelligible : 

A  few  snelled  Sproat  or  O'Shaughnessy  hooks  should  be 
carried  in  the  fly-book,  to  use  with  such  natural  baits  as 
grasshoppers,  beetles  or  dragon -flies,  in  case  the  artificial 
fly  does  not  prove  successful.  They  are  to  be  used  in  the 
same  manner  as  artificial  flies. 

The  beginner  being  now  provided  with  all  the  tools,  it 
is  in  order  to  put  his  rod  together,  attach  reel,  reel-line, 
and  cast  of  flies,  and  proceed  to  business.  In  rigging  the 
cast,  if  the  leader  is  provided  with  loops  at  each  end,  and 
also  loops  for  drop-flies,  proceed  as  follows :  To  the  small 
end  of  the  leader  attach  the  stretcher  or  tail-fly  by  passing 
the  loop  of  the  leader  through  the  loop  of  the  snell  and 
over  the  fly,  then  draw  together.  Three  or  four  feet  from 
the  tail-fly  attach  the  dropper,  or  bob-fly,  in  the  same  man- 
ner; that  is,  put  the  loop  of  the  snell  over  the  loop  of  the 
leader,  and  push  the  fly  through  the  latter  loop  and  draw 
tight ;  or,  if  the  leader  is  not  furnished  with  loops  for  this 


390  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

purpose,  slip  a  knot  of  the  leader  (about  three  or  four  feet 
from  the  tail-fly)  apart,  and,  after  making  a  round  knot  in 
the  end  of  the  snell  of  the  fly,  put  it  through  the  opened 
knot  of  the  leader  and  draw  together;  this  will  hold  firm, 
and  the  dropper-fly  will  stand  at  right  angles  from  the 
leader. 

If,  however,  the  gut-lengths  of  the  leader  are  tied  by 
hard,  close  knots,  instead  of  the  slip-knot  or  double 
water-knot,  then  the  snell  of  the  dropper  must  be  attached 
close  to  and  above  a  knot  of  the  leader,  by  a  single  knot 
or  half-hitch,  a  round  knot  having  previously  been  made 
in  the  end  of  the  snell,  to  prevent  the  half-hitch  from 
working  loose ;  this  is  probably  as  good  and  safe  a  way  as 
any. 

The  cast  is  now  ready,  for  I  do  not  advise  the  use  of 
more  than  two  flies.  If,  however,  the  angler  wishes  to 
employ  three,  the  third  fly,  or  second  dropper,  must  be 
attached  three  feet  above  the  first  dropper,  and,  in  this 
case,  the  leader  should  be  nine  feet  long.  But  the  begin- 
ner will  have  all  he  can  attend  to  with  a  six-feet  leader 
and  two  flies.  The  leader  having  been  previously  straight- 
ened by  soaking  in  water,  or  rubbing  with  India-rubber 
(the  former  method  is  to  be  preferred),  and  attached  to  the 
reel-line,  the  angler  is  now  armed  and  equipped  as  the  law 
directs,  and  ready  for 

Casting  the  Fly. 

Casting  the  artificial  fly  is  performed  by  two  principal 
motions,  a  backward  and  a  forward  one.  The  former  is 
to  throw  the  flies  behind  the  angler,  and  the  latter  is  to 
project  them  forward  and  beyond.      That  is  all  there  is 


FLY-FISHING.  391 

in  it.  These  are  the  main  principles  involved,  and  the 
first  or  backward  motion  is  merely  preparatory  to  the 
second  or  forward  one,  the  latter  being  the  most  im- 
portant. 

But  the  style  and  manner  of  making  these  two  motions 
are  all-important;  for  upon  the  correct,  skillful,  and,  I 
might  say,  scientific  performance  of  them,  depends  the 
success  of  the  angler.  The  main  objects  of  the  two  mo- 
tions are,  first,  to  get  the  line  and  cast  behind  the  angler 
in  a  straight  line,  without  lapping  or  kinking;  and,  sec- 
ond, to  project  the  line  forward  without  snapping  off  the 
tail-fly,  casting  it  perfectly  straight,  without  confusion,  and 
causing  the  flies  to  alight  before  the  line,  without  a  splash, 
and  as  lightly  as  the  natural  insect  dropping  into  the  water. 
This  can  only  be  done  by  the  novice,  with  a  short  line, 
about  the  length  of  his  rod,  and  he  should  not  attempt  a 
longer  cast  until  he  is  perfect  in  this.  When  he  can  lay 
out  his  short  line  perfectly  straight  before  him,  without  a 
splash,  every  time,  he  can  then  venture  further. 

But  we  are  getting  along  too  fast;  we  must  go  back  to 
first  principles — the  two  motions. 

The  backward  and  forward  movements  are  each  made 
in  about  the  same  length  of  time,  but  while  the  former  is 
a  single  movement,  the  latter  is  a  double  one;  that  is,  it  is 
divided  into  two  motions,  or  parts ;  though  these  two  for- 
ward motions  are  made  in  the  same  length  of  time  as  the 
backward  movement. 

J .  will  now  try  to  explain  these  movements  more  ex- 
plicitly, with  the  aid  of  the  annexed  cuts  and  diagrams. 

The  prospective  fly-fisher  having  his  rod,  reel  and  cast 
in  readiness,  stands  near  the  bank  of  the  stream,  with  a 
clear  space  of  fifteen  or  twenty  feet  behind  him.     Having 


392 


BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


FLY-FLSIITNG.  39g 

the  line  about  the  length  of  his  rod,  to  begin  with,  he 
takes  the  hook  of  the  tail-fly  between  his  left  thumb  and 
forefinger  and  stretches  the  line  taut;  then,  by  waving 
the  rod  slightly  backward  over  the  left  shoulder,  and  at 
the  same  time  releasing  his  hold  of  the  tail-fly,  the  line 
straightens  out  behind  him,  the  right  elbow  meantime 
being  held  close  to  the  body,  as  the  backward  movement 
is  made  with  the  wrist  and  forearm  entirely.  The  position 
of  the  right  hand  during  this  portion  of  the  cast  is  with 
said  hand  grasping  the  rod  just  above  the  reel  (the  reel 
being  at  the  extreme  butt,  and  on  the  under  side  of  the 
rod),  and  with  the  reel  and  palm  of  the  hand  toward  the 
angler,  the  thumb  looking  toward  his  right  shoulder  (see 
figure  1). 

When  the  line  and  leader  are  on  a  straight  line  behind 
him,  which  the  beginner  must  learn  to  judge  and  time  ex- 
actly, without  looking  behind  him,  he  brings  the  rod  for- 
ward with  a  gradually  increasing  rate  of  speed,  until  the 
rod  is  slightly  in  advance  of  him,  say  at  an  angle  of  fifteen 
degrees  off  the  perpendicular;  then,  for  the  first  time,  the 
right  elbow  leaves  the  body,  and,  at  the  same  time,  the 
rod  is  turned  in  the  hand  in  the  opposite  direction  (see 
figure  2);  that  is,  with  the  back  of  the  hand  toward  the 
angler,  so  that,  at  the  end  of  the  cast,  the  reel  is  below  the 
rod,  while  the  back  of  the  hand  is  upward,  and,  without 
stopping  the  motion  of  the  rod,  the  right  arm  is  projected 
forward  to  its  full  extent,  and  on  a  line  with  the  shoulder 
(see  figure  3).  This  is  the  second  part  or  motion  of  the 
forward  movement,  and  consists  in  merely  following  the 
direction  of  the  flies  with  the  tip  of  the  rod,  so  as  to  ease 
their  rapid  flight,  and  allow  them  to  descend  without  con- 
fusion, and  to  settle  upon  the  water  noiselessly,  and  with- 


394  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

out  a  splash.  Thus  we  see  that  the  backward  movement 
is  in  one  time  and  one  motion,  and  the  forward  movement 
in  one  time  and  two  motions,  as  the  military  have  it,  or 
according  to  the  following  formula  of  time : 

1.  J  =  2.  («)  j  (6)  J. 

No.  1  represents  the  backward  throw,  in  one  motion,  in 
the  time  of  a  half  note.  No.  2  represents  the  forward 
cast,  in  one  time  and  two  motions,  a  and  b,  in  the  time 
of  two  quarter  notes.  This  is  not  to  be  understood  as 
fishing  by  note,  but  the  relative  time  of  making  the  dif- 
ferent motions  in  casting  the  fly  approaches  very  nearly 
that  of  the  formula  given.  This  is  better  explained  by  a 
reference  to  the  foregoing  cuts;  where  figure  1  repre- 
sents the  backward  throw,  and  figure  2  represents  the 
first  part  or  motion  («),  and  figure  3  the  second  part  or  mo- 
tion (6),  of  the  forward  cast. 

Sometimes  these  movements  are  made  straight  back- 
ward and  forward  over  either  shoulder,  or  over  the  head; 
but  the  best  way  is  to  make  the  backward  movement  over 
the  left  shoulder,  and  the  forward  over  the  right  shoulder, 
the  line  thus  describing  an  oval  or  parabola.  By  this 
method  the  flies  are  not  so  apt  to  be  whipped  off',  and  it  is, 
withal,  more  graceful,  more  en  regie. 

The  following  diagram  represents  the  arcs  described  by 
the  tip  of  the  rod  and  the  flies : 


i 


f   *• 


FLY-FISHING.  395 

O  is  supposed  to  be  the  angler,  and,  as  we  are  looking 
down  upon  him  from  above,  it  represents  his  hat.  The 
dark  line,  a  b  c,  is  the  curve  described  by  the  tip  of  the 
rod  in  the  backward  and  forward  movements  of  the  cast — 
back  over  the  left  shoulder,  and  forward  over  the  right; 
while  the  dotted  curved  line,  d  e  /,  is  the  approximate  arc 
described  by  the  tail-fly,  leaving  the  water  at  d,  and  alight- 
ing, by  a  lengtheued  cast,  at  /.    . 

By  studying  these  diagrams  in  connection  with  the  in- 
structions given,  the  theory  and  mechanical  principles  will 
soon  be  mastered  by  the  novice.  He  should  then,  by  as- 
siduous and  patient  endeavor,  make  a  practical  application 
of  these  principles,  and  become  tolerably  proficient  in  cast- 
ing the  fly,  before  he  attempts  to  venture  near  the  haunts 
of  the  Bass. 

But  various  ways  of  casting  come  into  play  at  certain 
times,  and  under  peculiar  circumstances;  and  the  rod  will 
be  held  more  or  less  to  one  side  or  the  other,  or  more  ver- 
tically, as -particular  circumstances  or  emergencies  demand. 
For  the  novice  must  remember  that  there  are  trees  and 
bushes,  and  rocks  and  winds,  to  contend  with  in  fly-fish- 
ing; and,  moreover,  as  he  becomes  proficient,  he  will 
choose  his  own  style  of  casting,  for  no  two  anglers  cast 
the  fly  exactly  alike. 

However,  all  methods  of  overhead  casting  are  but  varia- 
tions or  modifications  of  the  mode  just  described ;  and 
the  particular  circumstances  calling  for  them  will  natu- 
rally suggest  their  necessity,  use,  or  advantages  to  the 
angler  as  he  becomes  more  expert,  and  gains  in  knowl- 
edge by  practical  experience.  It  is  hardly  necessary, 
therefore,  or  even  advisable,  to  allude  more  particularly 
to   other  ways  of    overhead   casting,  as  it  would,  in  my 


396  BOOK    OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

opinion,  tend  more  to  confuse  than  to  enlighten  the  be-i 
ginner. 

Then  there  is  the  sidewise  cast,  where  the  line  is  not 
thrown  behind  the  angler  at  all,  but  to  one  side  or  the 
other.  This  style  of  casting  is  practiced  with  a  short 
line,  on  very  narrow  waters,  or  where  the  banks  of  the 
stream  are  thickly  clothed  with  tall  grass  or  bushes,  and 
where  there  is  not  sufficient  clear  space  for  throwing  the 
line  behind  the  angler. 

In  this  mode  of  casting,  the  angler,  instead  of  facing 
the  stream,  turns  one  side  or  the  other  toward  the  water, 
and  casts  by  throwing  the  line  landward,  over  the  grass  or 
bushes,  to  the  right  or  left,  as  the  case  may  be ;  and,  when 
the  line  has  unfolded  in  a  straight  line,  to  cast  toward  the 
water  by  an  opposite  sidewise  cast.  In  all  other  respects, 
the  management  of  the  cast  must  approach,  as  nearly  as 
possible,  the  regular  overhead  cast. 

Another  method  of  casting  that  occasionally  comes  into 
play  is  "  switching."  This  mode  is  very  useful  where 
high  banks,  trees  or  bushes  render  the  overhead  and  side- 
wise  cast  impracticable;  though  it  admits  of  but  a  very 
short  line  being  used,  shorter  than  in  the  sidewise  cast. 

Switching  is  performed  by  raising  the  arm  and  rod  to 
their  fullest  extent,  vertically,  thus  drawing  the  flies  close 
to,  and  in  front  of,  the  angler;  then,  by  a  quick,  smart, 
circling  motion  of  the  rod,  the  flies  are  projected  forward, 
or  laterally,  as  the  angler  may  wish.  The  forward  motion 
is  much  like  striking  with  a  whip  or  switch,  and  is  more 
easily  imagined  than  described. 

We  will  now  presume  that  the  tyro  has  perfected  him- 
self in  casting  a  short  line,  and  can  throw  his  tail-fly  into 
his  hat  nearly  every  time  at  a  distance  of  fifteen  feet;  and 


FLY-FISHING.  397 

right  here  let  me  say,  beware  of  the  angling  brag  who 
declares  that  he  can  cast  his  tail-fly  into  a  glass  of  water 
at  fifty  feet  every  time !  It  can't  be  done.  Also  fight 
shy  of  the  long-range  fisher  who  insists  that  he  can  cast 
a  hundred  feet  with  ease !  It  can't  be  done.  The  long- 
est cast,  with  a  single-handed  rod.  I  ever  saw,  without 
"loaded"  flies,  was  eighty-one  feet,  and  I  believe  the 
longest  on  record  is  Seth  Green's  eighty-six  feet;  while 
at  the  last  (1880)  tournament  held  by  the  New  York  State 
Sportsman's  Association,  seventy  feet  won  the  first  prize. 
When  the  beginner  can  cast  his  fly  into  his  hat,  eight 
tintes  out  of  ten,  at  forty  feet,  he  is  a  fly-fisher;  and,  so 
far  as  casting  is  concerned,  a  good  one. 

But  let  us  go  back  to  our  tyro,  who  has  now  become 
proficient  with  the  short  line,  for  it  is"  time  to  lengthen 
his  cast,  which  is  done  in  this  way :  After  casting  and  rov- 
ing his  flies  on  the  surface  by  zigzag,  jerky  motions,  to  the 
left  or  right,  and  without  provoking  a  rise,  he  pulls  oif 
from  the  reel  with  the  left  hand  three  or  four  feet  of  line; 
and,  lifting  his  rod,  slowly  at  first,  by  a  gradually  increas- 
ing motion,  lifts  the  leader  and  flies,  and  throws  them 
backward  over  the  left  shoulder,  as  before  described.  The 
resistance  of  the  leader  and  flies,  before  they  leave  the 
water,  takes  the  extra  length  of  line  from  the  rod,  and  it 
is  unfolded  behind  the  angler  into  a  straight  line,  when  he 
casts  it  forward  over  the  right  shoulder. 

In  this  way  the  line  is  lengthened  at  every  cast,  if  nec- 
essary, until  the  maximum  or  desired  distance  is  reached. 
But  the  angler  should  never  let  his  flies  touch  the  ground 
behind  him ;  but  must  so  time  the  movement  as  to  propel 
the  line  forward  at  exactly  the  right  moment  to  prevent 
this. 


398  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

Another  caution :  The  angler  should  never  attempt  to 
cast  his  flies  by  main  strength,  for  this  will  accomplish 
nothing  but  confusion ;  it  takes  but  little  force  to  retrieve 
or  cast  the  flies  with  a  well-made,t  springy  and  pliant  rod. 
The  rod,  moreover,  must  never  be  carried  back  over  the 
shoulder  to  a  distance  exceeding  an  angle  of  fifteen  degrees 
off  the  perpendicular,  for  the  backward  throw  is  really  ac- 
complished by  the  time  the  rod  is  in  a  vertical  position, 
and  this  might  be  said,  also,  to  a  certain  extent,  in  regard 
to  the  forward  movement  or  cast  proper;  for  by  the  time 
the  rod  is  fifteen  degrees  off  the  perpendicular  in  the  other 
direction  (in  front),  the  main  part  of  the  cast  is  made,«and 
the  second  part  of  the  forward  movement  is  only  to  follow 
the  flies  with  the  point  of  the  rod,  to  ease  their  flight,  as 
before  mentioned  *  this  latter  part  of  the  forward  cast  can 
no  more  aid  or  extend  the  flight  of  the  flies  than  "  push- 
ing n  on  the  reins  can  increase  the  speed  of  your  horse. 

I  have  now,  in  the  fewest  words  possible,  and  in  the 
simplest  manner,  endeavored  to  explain  the  "  mystery  "  of 
casting  the  fly,  and  I  trust  the  beginner  will  be  able  to 
understand  it.  It  is  almost  impossible  to  describe  the  art 
clearly  and  satisfactorily  by  mere  words.  One  hour  with 
a  good  fly-fisher  will  teach  the  novice  more  than  a  hun- 
dred written  pages.  I  have  purposely  omitted  many  little 
details  of  nicety  and  precision,  which  would  only  tend  to 
magnify  the  supposed  difficulties  of  casting,  and  create 
doubt,  confusion,  and  a  lack  of  confidence,  in  the  mind  of 
the  beginner  in  the  noble  art  of  fly-fishing. 

General   Instructions. 

It  is  useless  to  cast  for  Black  Bass  from  high  elevations 
near  the  water,  as  a  bold  bank,  a  projecting  rock,  a  dam, 


FLY-FISHING.  399 

etc.,  under  ordinary  circumstances ;  for  the  angler  must 
remember  that  the  most  commanding  situation  for  seeing 
the  fish  also  furnishes  the  best  facilities  for  being  seen  in 
return,  and  vice  versa.  In  fishing  from  a  boat,  it  must  be 
kept  in  deep  water,  while  long  casts  are  made  in-shore, 
toward  the  feeding  grounds.  We  should  never  fish  with 
the  sun  at  our  back,  or  in  such  a  position  as  to  throw  the 
shadow  of  our  rod  or  person  upon  the  water. 

From  what  has  been  said  in  the  chapter  on  the  "  condi- 
tions governing  the  biting  of  fish,"  it  will  be  apparent  that 
it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  there  be  a  breeze  sufficient 
to  ruffle  the  surface  of  the  water.  It  is  perfect  folly  for  the 
angler  to  cast  his  flies  upon  a  smooth  surface,  if  the  water 
is  clear  enough  for  fishing.  A  gale  is  better  than  no  wind 
at  all,  and  it  does  not  matter  from  what  direction  the  wind 
blows,  if  the  condition  and  temperature  of  water  are  right. 
A  good  breeze  is  the  angler's  best  ally,  for  by  rippling  the 
water  it  breaks  the  line  of  sight,  to  a  great  extent,  between 
him  and  the  fish. 

The  angler  should  endeavor  to  cast  his  flies  as  lightly 
as  possible,  causing  them  to  settle  as  quietly  as  thistle- 
down, and  without  a  splash.  After  casting,  the  flies  should 
be  skipped  or  trailed  along  the  surface  in  slightly  curving 
lines,  or  by  zigzag  and  tremulous  movements,  occasionally 
allowing  them  to  become  submerged  for  several  inches 
near  likely-looking  spots.  If  the  current  is  swift,  allow 
the  flies  to  float  naturally  with  it,  at  times,  when  they  can 
be  skittered  back  again,  or  withdrawn  for  a  new  cast. 
Two  or  three  times  are  enough  to  cast  over  any  one  spot, 
when  a  rise  is  not  induced. 

"When  Bass  are  biting  eagerly  and  quickly,  whipping  the 
stream  is  to  be  practiced,  that  is,  the  casts  are  to  be  often 


400 


BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


Fly-fishing— Landing  the  Bass. 


FLY-FISHING.  401 

and  rapidly  repeated,  first  to  one  side,  then  the  other,  al- 
lowing the  flies  to  settle  but  a  moment.  In  casting  and 
manipulating  the  flies,  the  line  must  be  ever  taut;  for 
often  a  Bass  will  thus  hook  himself,  which  he  never  does 
with  a  slack  line. 

Striking  and  Playing. 

The  angler  should  strike  by  sight,  or  by  iouch  ;  that  is, 
he  should  strike  the  moment  he  sees  the  rise  ;  for  the  Bass 
has  either  got  the  fly  in  his  mouth,  has  missed  it,  or  has  al- 
ready ejected  it,  when  the  rise  is  seen ;  it  very  seldom 
happens  that  the  rise  is  seen  before  the  fly  is  reached  by  the 
fish.  The  angler  must  also  strike  at  the  moment  he  feels 
the  slightest  touch  or  tug  from  the  fish,  for  often  the  Bass 
takes  the  fly  without  any  break  at  the  surface,  especially 
if  the  flies  are  beneath  the  surface. 

Striking  is  simply  a  twist  of  the  wrist,  or  half-turn  of 
the  rod,  either  upward  or  downward  (upward  with  stiffish 
rods,  and  downward  with  very  willowy  ones),  which  is  suf- 
ficient to  set  the  hook  if  the  rod  and  line  maintain  a  proper 
state  of  tension  ;  but  when  the  careless  Angler  has  a  slack 
line,  and,  consequently,  a  lifeless  rod,  he  must  necessarily 
strike  by  a  long  upward  or  side  sweep  of  the  rod,  called 
"yanking;"  and  should  he  succeed  in  hooking  the  fish, 
the  chances  are  that  it  will  shake  the  hook  out  again  before 
the  slack  can  be  reeled  up. 

The  tip  of  the  rod  must  always  be  held  upward,  so  that 
the  rod  constantly  maintains  a  curve  Avith  the  line ;  and 
never,  under  any  circumstances  must  the  rod  point  in  the 
direction  of  the  flies  after  they  reach  the  water,  for  this 
allows  the  direct  strain  of  the  fish  to  come  upon  the  line 
34 


402  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

or  leader.  When  a  Bass  is  hooked,  he  must  be  killed  on 
the  rod;  the  rod  must  stand  the  brunt  of  the  contest;  the 
more  pliable  and  springy  the  rod,  the  less  likelihood  of  its 
breaking,  for  a  stiff  rod  is  more  easily  fractured  than  a 
flexible  one.  Give  the  Bass  more  line  only  when  he  takes 
it;  make  him  fight  for  every  inch,  aud  take  it  back  when 
you  can;  hold  him  by  the  spring  of  the  rod,  and  do  not 
hesitate  to  turn  the  butt  toward  him  to  keep  him  away  from 
weeds,  rocks,  ^nags,  or  other  dangerous  places;  this  will 
bring  him  up  with  a  round  turn,  and  is  called  "giving 
the  butt." 

Do  n't  be  in  a  hurry  to  land  him ;  the  longer  he  resists, 
the  better  for  your  sport;  take  your  time  and  only  land 
him  when  he  is  completely  exhausted  ;  for  if  he  is  well 
hooked,  and  the  proper  tension  of  rod  and  line  maintained, 
he  can  not  get  away ;  on  the  other  hand,  if  he  is  tenderly 
hooked,  the  more  gingerly  he  is  handled  the  better. 
Therefore,  never  be  in  a  hurry,  and  never  attempt  to  force 
matters  ;  always  keep  a  bent  rod  and  taut  line ;  if  the  Bass 
breaks  water,  the  best  plan  is  to  lower  the  tip,  so  as  to 
slack  the  line,  and  immediately  raise  the  rod  and  tighten 
the  line  when  he  strikes  the  water  again,  for  if  he  falls  on 
the  tightened  line  he  is  most  sure  to  escape;  this  is  one 
of  his  most  wily  tricks. 

Eemarks,  Hints,  and  Advice. 

It  has  been  doubted  by  some  that  the  Black  Bass  will 
rise  to  the  fly,  or  at  best  that  they  are  uncertain  in  their 
modes  and  times  of  doing  so,  as  compared  wTith  the  Brook 
Trout.  These  doubts  are  mostly  raised  by  those  who  an- 
gle for  the  Black  Bass  in  precisely  the  same  way  as  for  the 


FLY-FISHING.  403 

Brook  Trout,  upon  the  supposition  that  the  two  fish  are 
identical  in  habits  and  instincts.  But  while  their  habits 
of  feeding  are  very  similar — both  feeding  on  the  bottom, 
in  midwater,  or  on  the  surface,  on  Crustacea,  larvae,  min- 
nows, insects,  etc. — they  differ  greatly  in  other  habitual  feat- 
ures and  idiosyncrasies. 

The  Black  Bass  will  rise  to  the  fly  as  readily,  under  any 
and  all  conditions,  as  the  Brook  Trout,  when  fished  for 
understanding^,  and  under  proper  precautions.  There  are 
times,  seemingly  favorable,  when  neither  Bass  nor  Trout 
will  rise  to  the  fly. 

One  reason  why  the  Bass  is  thought  to  be  uncertain  in 
rising  to  the  fly  is  this:  While  he  is  fully  as  wary  as  the 
Trout  he  is  not  so  timid.  A  Trout  darts  incontinently 
away  at  the  first  glimpse  of  the  angler,  and  is  seen  no 
more  ;  but  the  Bass  will  retire  but  a  short  distance,  and 
as  often  will  stand  his  ground,  and  on  balanced  fins  will 
watch  the  angler  vainly  casting  his  " brown  hackle"  or 
"  coachman "  over  him,  perhaps  laughing  in  his  sleeve 
(shoulder  girdle)  at  his  discomfiture.  The  truth  of  the 
matter  is,  the  Bass  is  not  uncertain,  but  he  is  too  knowing 
to  be  deceived  by  his  flies,  so  long  as  the  angler  is  in 
sight. 

Fish  are  more  suspicious  regarding  objects  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  water  than  of  those  beneath.  I  have  often 
demonstrated  this,  causing  them  to  skurry  away,  by  hold- 
ing a  long  stick  immediately  over  them, above  the  surface; 
while  I  could  introduce  the  same  stick  underneath  the 
water  and  even  prod  a  fish  with  it,  without  alarming  it 
much.  This  is  why  more  caution  is  necessary  in  fly-fish- 
ing than  in  bait-fishing  ;  the  bait  in  one  instance  being  on 
the  surface,  and  in  the  other,  beneath.     If  a  Black  Bass,  in 


404  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

rushing  to  the  surface  for  the  fly,  sees  the  angler,  he  at 
once  stops  in  his  course,  and  thenceforth  the  daintiest  flies, 
never  so  deftly  thrown,  will  be  cast  in  vain  while  the  an- 
gler remains  in  view. 

In  a  recent  issue  of  the  London  Field  appeared  an  arti- 
cle, written  by  the  able  editor  of  that  valuable  paper, 
Francis  Francis,  Esq.,  on  the  frightening  of  Brook  Trout 
by  the  flashing  and  reflections  of  a  varnished  fly-rod, 
when  wildly  waved  by  the  angler  in  casting,  and  which,  at 
first  sight,  would  seem  to  be  plausible  enough ;  but  upon 
mature  consideration,  and  with  all  due  deference  to  so  emi- 
nent an  authority  as  Mr.  Francis,  I  am  convinced  that 
there  is  not  much  in  it,  and  that  instead  of  proving  the 
matter  he  seems  to  be  rather  begging  the  question. 

The  theory  of  angling,  like  the  theory  of  medicine,  is 
rather  an  uncertain  subject,  and  opposite  positions  can  be 
taken  and  seemingly  maintained  upon  almost  any  question 
of  either  science,  until  the  crucial  test  of  practical  experi- 
ence proves  their  truth  or  falsity.  The  fact  is,  that  fish 
are  not  frightened  by  flashes  of  light  or  the  reflections  of 
bright  objects,  but,  on  the  contrary,  are  attracted  by  them; 
any  one  who  has  ever  fished  by  torchlight,  or  trolled  with 
a  bright  metal  spoon,  can  testify  to  this,  and  there  is  a 
method  of  fishing  practiced  by  the  Chinese,  by  means  of  a 
board  painted  white  and  attached  to  a  boat  at  such  an  an- 
gle as  to  reflect  the  light  of  the  moon  upon  the  wTater, 
when  the  fish,  attracted  by  this,  jump  upon  the  board  as 
the  boat  is  moved  along. 

That  fish  are  not  much  disturbed,  if  at  all,  by  the  flash- 
ing of  a  polished  fly-rod  per  se,  can  be  easily  proven  by 
any  one  who,  being  securely  hid  behind  a  clump  of  bushes, 
can  wave  his  rod  as  "  wildly  "  as  necessary  without  alarm- 


FLY-FISHING.  405 

ing  them  to  an  extent  to  frighten  them  away  or  prevent 
their  biting ;  indeed,  the  unnatural  shaking  or  disturbance 
of  a  bush  near  the  brink,  by  the  careless  angler,  will 
alarm  the  denizens  of  the  stream  more  than  the  most  highly- 
varnished  and  brightly-mounted  rod  ever  made,  when 
waved  over  the  stream  by  an  angler  who  keeps  himself  hid 
from  view ;  and  herein  lies,  to  my  mind,  the  key  to  this 
whole  matter. 

It  is  the  angler  who  scares  the  Trout,  and  not  his  rod ; 
and  this  probably  applies  with  more  force  to  the  compara- 
tively narrow  and  open  streams  of  Great  Britain  than  to 
the  more  extensive  waters  of  our  own  country ;  this  view 
seems  more  probable  in  connection  with  the  fact  that  Mr. 
Francis  advises  casting  sideways  instead  of  overhead,  which 
method  could  only  be  practiced  successfully  on  narrow 
streams,  for  sideway  casts  are  necessarily  short  ones,  and 
would  not  answer  at  all  for  most  of  our  waters.  There 
are  situations,  however,  when  the  sideway  cast  can  be 
used  advantageously,  and  is  used  occasionally  by  all  good 
fly-fishers. 

The  main  rules  to  be  observed  in  fly-fishing  I  conceive 
to  be  these  :  on  narrow  streams  to  keep  entirely  out  of 
sight,  and  on  open  waters  to  make  long  casts;  in  either 
case,  the  fish,  not  seeing  the  angler,  will  not  be  alarmed 
at  the  flashing  of  the  rod ;  the  finer  the  water  the  greater 
the  caution  that  must  be  used  on  the  one  hand,  and  the 
longer  must  be  the  cast  on  the  other. 

Mr.  Francis  does  not  offer  any  remedy  for  the  varnished 
rod,  but  merely  suggests  that  it  might  answer  to  paint  it 
sky-blue,  or  a  dull,  smoky  tint,  without  polish;  but  this, 
I  know,  will  not  do.  I  have  seen  rods  that  had  the  var- 
nish scraped  off  and  were  painted  a  delicate  pea-green,  to 


406  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

harmonize  with  the  foliage  of  Trout  streams,  and  I  have 
seen  the  bark  left  on  alder,  elm,  and  tamarack  poles  when 
used  in  bait-fishing,  but  they  were  not  more  successful 
than  the  varnished  rod. 

Split  bamboo  and  other  jointed  rods  must  of  necessity  be 
varnished  to  preserve  their  elasticity  and  beauty.  Think 
of  a  delicate  split  bamboo  tip  coated  with  sky-blue  paint ! 
The  very  thought  is  heresy,  and  an  offense  against  the 
eternal  fitness  of  things  that  would  make  even  the  spots 
on  a  Brook  Trout  blush  more  deeply  crimson.  American 
split  bamboo  rods  are  the  finest  made  rods  in  the  world, 
and  the  numerous  foreign  orders  received  by  the  manufac- 
turers folly  attest  this  fact,  and  show,  moreover,  that  they 
are  duly  appreciated  abroad,  as  well  as  at  home,  highly 
varnished  and  flashing  though  they  be. 

There  is  one  feature  of  this  subject  that  is  peculiarly 
gratifying  to  me,  and  I  heartily  thank  Mr.  Francis  for  the 
article  in  question.  It  concedes  the  fact  that  fish,  having 
eyes,  can  see,  and  are  not  the  near-sighted  dupes  that  most 
writers  would  have  us  believe ;  this  concession  could  not 
be  put  in  a  stronger  light  than  by  the  assertion  that  they 
are  frightened  at  the  flashing  of  a  varnished  rod,  and  that 
a  rod,  therefore,  should  be  rendered  as  nearly  invisible  as 
possible  by  painting  it  a  sky-blue  or  cloud  color.  But  if 
this  were  done,  what  a  quantity  of  brash  wood  and  poor 
workmanship,  and  what  a  multitude  of  sins  of  omission 
and  commission  would  this  sky-blue  mantle,  like  charity, 
cover ! 

When  fish  are  frightened  at  a  fishing-rod  at  all,  it  is 
when  its  shadow  is  suddenly  cast  upon  the  water — which 
all  prudent  anglers  are  very  careful  to  avoid  doing,  espe- 
cially on  small  streams — and,  viewed  in  this  light,  a  sky- 


FLY-FISHING.  407 

blue  rod  has  not  even  a  fancied  advantage  over  the  most 
highly-polished  one. 

The  most  important  rule,  then,  to  be  observed,  first,  last, 
and  all  the  time  in  fly-fishing,  is:  Keep  out  of  sight  of  the 
fish;  this  is  the  first  and  great  injunction;  "  and  the  sec- 
ond is  like  unto  it:"  Keep  as  quiet  and  motionless  as  pos- 
sible. "On  these  two"  laws  depends  all  your  success  in 
fly-fishing.  Let  your  necessary  movements  be  deliberate 
and  methodical,  avoiding  all  quick,  sudden,  or  energetic 
motions.  Fish  see  and  hear  much  better  than  we  give 
them  credit  for.  To  keep  out  of  the  fish's  sight  we  must 
be  screened  by  such  natural  objects  as  bushes,  trees,  rocks, 
etc.,  or  by  keeping  well  back  from  the  brink  and  making 
long  casts.  In  wading  the  stream  it  is  also  necessary  to 
make  long  casts.  The  latter  is  the  best  plan  of  fishing  a 
stream,  as  the  angler,  being  so  near  the  water,  is  not  so  apt 
to  be  seen. 

It  is  best,  always,  to  fish  down  stream,  even  with  the 
wind  against  one,  for  fish  always  lie  with  head  up  stream, 
and  will  be  more  apt  to  see  your  flics.  The  current  will, 
moreover,  take  your  flies  down  stream,  and  so  keep  your 
line  taut.  It  is  also  easier  to  wade  down,  than  up  stream. 
Many  other  reasons  might  be  given,  but  these  will  be  suffi- 
cient. Cast  just  below  ripples  and  rapids,  over  eddies  and 
pools,  along  the  edges  of  weed  patches,  under  projecting 
banks  and  shelving  rocks,  near  submerged  trees  or  drift- 
wood, off  gravelly  shoals,  isolated  rocks  and  long  points  or 
spurs  of  land ;  it  is  useless  to  fish  long,  deep,  still  reaches 
of  water. 

The  most  favorable  time  for  fly-fishing  for  Black  Bass 
is  during  the  last  hours  of  the  day,  from  sundown  until 
dark,  and  also  on  bright  moonlight  evenings.     On  streams, 


408  BOOK   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

an  hour  or  two  following  sunrise,  in  warm  weather,  is 
quite  favorable.  On  dark,  cloudy,  and  cold  days  the 
middle  hours  are  best.  Bright  sunny  days,  especially  in 
hot  weather,  are  not  favorable  to  fly-fishing,  except  in 
quite  cool,  shady,  and  breezy  situations.  In  short,  the  best 
conditions  are  a  mellow  or  dusky  light,  a  good  breeze,  and 
translucent  water;  while  the  most  unfavorable  are  a  bright 
sun,  a  still  atmosphere,  and  a  smooth  and  glassy  surface, 
with  the  water  either  very  fine  or  very  turbid. 

And  now,  in  concluding  this  portion  of  my  subject,  let 
me  say  a  parting  word  to  the  beginner:  Cast  a  straight 
line ;  keep  it  taut ;  strike  upon  sight,  or  touch ;  kill 
your  fish  on  the  rod ;  take  your  time.  It  is  better  to  cast 
a  short  line  well,  than  a  long  one  bunglingly.  Should 
you  cast  your  fly  into  a  branch  of  a  tree  overhead,  or  into 
a  bush  behind  you,  or  miss  your  fish  in  striking,  or  lose 
him  when  hooked,  or  crack  off  your  tail-fly,  or  slip  into  a 
hole  up  to  your  armpits — keep  your  temper;  above  all 
things  do  n't  swear,  for  he  that  swears  will  catch  no  fish. 
Remember,  yours  is  the  gentle  art,  and  a  fly-fisher  should 
be  a  gentleman. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

CASTING  THE  MINNOW. 

"And  as  to  the  rest  that  concerns  this  sort  of  angling,  I  shall  wholly  refer 
you  to  Mr.  Walton's  direction,  who  is  undoubtedly  the  best  angler  with  a 
minnow  in  England."— Charles  Cotton. 

Next  to  fly-fishing,  casting  the  minnow  is  the  most  ar- 
tistic mode  of  angling  for  the  Black  Bass.  To  obtain  all 
of  the  pleasure  and  sport  embodied  in  this  style  of  fishing, 
none  but  the  best  and  most  approved  tackle  should  be  em- 
ployed, which  should  approach,  in  its  general  features  of 
elegance  and  lightness,  the  implements  used  in  fly-fishing. 

A  faithful  study  of  the  conformation,  habits,  and  idiosyn- 
crasies of  game  .fish  should  be  the  first  consideration  of  the 
true  angler ;  though  the  average  angler  usually  contents 
himself  with  a  superficial  knowledge  of  the  ways  and  means 
of  capturing  and  killing  the  finny  tribe,  a  big  catch  being 
the  height  of  his  piscatorial  ambition.  While  good  tackle 
is  essential  to  success,  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  habits 
of  the  fish  is  a  sine  qua  non,  without  which  no  one  can  be- 
come an  expert  and  successful  angler. 

Apropos  of  this  might  be  mentioned  the  old  and  hack- 
neyed story  of  the  rustic  youth  with  alder  pole,  twine  string, 
and  worm  bait,  and  the  soi-disant  angler  with  split  bamboo 
and  well-filled  fly-book,  who  indulged  in  a  day's  fishing 
on  the  same  stream,  with  the  result  of  a  "big  string"  for 
35  (409) 


410  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

the  boy,  and  one  poor  fingerling  for  the  disgusted  sports- 
man. The  boy  understood  the  "  true  inwardness  "  of  the 
Trout,  in  which  matter  the  discomfited  citizen  was  lament- 
ably ignorant,  and  relied  entirely  upon  his  splendid  rig  for 
success. 

Where  Black  Bass  are  plentiful,  as  in  the  quiet  ponds 
and  lakes  of  Western  New  York,  Northern  Indiana,  Mich- 
igan, Wisconsin,  and  Minnesota,  at  the  Thousand  Islands 
of  the  St.  Lawrence,- and  in  the  extreme  South,  the  merest 
tyro,  who  can  throw  his  bait  twenty  feet  from  the  boat, 
can,  when  the  Bass  are  in  a  biting  mood,  show  a  big  catch, 
though  he  may  necessarily  have  failed  to  land  two  out  of 
every  three  fish  hooked.  But  on  small  rivers,  where  the 
angler  casts  to  the  right  and  left  and  across  the  stream 
from  the  banks,  and  while  wading  the  shallows  and  bars, 
and  the  Bass  are  shy,  educated,  and  fully  up  in  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  stream  in  its  windings,  eddies,  pools,  and  rapids, 
the  highest  skill  and  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  habits 
of  the  fish  are  indispensable  to  a  full  creel;  and  this,  at  the 
same  time,  constitutes  the  pleasure  and  perfection  of  Black 
Bass  angling. 

But  bear  in  mind,  that  sticking  the  butt  of  a  long  rod 
in  the  bank,  and  then,  while  reclining  under  the  shade  of 
some  umbrageous  tree,  enjoying  a  pipe  or  the  latest  novel 
while  waiting  an  hour  for  a  bite,  is  not  angling,  but 
simply  loafing,  and  attempting  to  obtain  Bass  under  false 
pretenses. 

Casting  the  minnow  is  quite  an  art,  as  much  so  as  casting 
the  fly ;  indeed,  I  think  there  are  more  good  fly  casters 
than  good  casters  of  the  live  minnow.  Mediocrity  in  both 
methods  of  angling  is  readily  acquired,  but  great  excellence 
and  perfect  skill  are  rarely  attained  in  either.     The  two 


CASTING   THE    MINNOW.  411 

methods  are  essentially  and  practically  different,  and  re- 
quire implements  and  tools  commensurate  with  this  differ- 
ence. 

While  the  fly-rod  is  willowy  and  long,  the  minnow-rod 
is  short  and  comparatively  stiff;  the  fly-line  is  rather  heavy 
and  of  large  caliber  as  compared  with  the  minnow-line, 
which  should  be  as  fine  and  light  as  possible,  consistent 
with  strength.  The  artificial  fly  is  cast  by  the  weight  of 
the  fly-line  and  suppleness  of  the  rod,  while  the  weight  of 
the  bait,  and  swivel  or  sinker,  give  the  necessary  momentum 
for  casting  the  minnow.  The  fly  is  usually  cast  overhead, 
directly  in  front  of  the  angler,  while  the  minnow  can  only 
be  cast,  for  any  great  distance,  to  one  side  or  the  other,  or 
obliquely,  by  underhand  casting. 

Minnow  Tackle. 

The  Minnow  Rod. — The  rod  for  casting  the  live  min- 
now should  be  shorter  and  stiffer  than  the  fly-rod,  but  of 
about  the  same  relative  weight;  for  it,  like  the  fly-rod,  is 
a  single-handed  rod.  It  should  be  from  eight  to  nine  feet 
long.  Eight  and  a  quarter  feet  is  the  standard  length 
that  I  have  advocated  for  many  years,  though  the  manu- 
facturers, in  order  to  suit  all  tastes,  now  make  this  style 
of  rod  from  eight  to  nine  and  a  half  feet  long.  It  should 
weigh  from  eight  to  ten  ounces,  no  less  and  no  more.  It 
should  be  well  balanced,  with  a  stiffish  back,  to  insure  good 
casting,  but  pliable  enough  to  respond  to  the  slightest 
movement  of  the  fish.  Most  of  the  bend  and  play  should 
be  in  the  upper  two-thirds  of  the  rod,  which  bend  should 
be  a  true  arch,  and  not  a  horse-shoe  curve,  as  is  often  seen 
in  a  poorly-constructed  and  weak-backed  rod.     The  best 


412  BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 

material  for  a  rod  of  this  character  is  an  ash  butt  and 
lancewood  second  and  third  pieces,  the  latter  being  usually 
known  as  the  tip.  The  reel-seat  should  be  from  six  to 
eight  inches  from  the  extreme  butt,  and  no  more,  for  this 
rod  must  be  used  with  the  hand  alone,  and  should  not  ex- 
tend under  the  elbow  for  support,  like  the  old-fashioned 
long  and  heavy  rods.  It  should  have  light  standing  guides 
instead  of  rings. 

The  Reel. — The  multiplying  reel  is  the  only  one 
adapted  to  casting  the  minnow,  and  it  should  be  the  very 
best  one  made.  It  should  run  as  rapidly  and  smoothly  as 
possible,  and  multiply  from  two  to  four  times.  The  best 
is  the  "  Frankfort "  reel  —  sometimes  variously  styled 
"Meek,"  "Milam,"  or  "Kentucky"  reel  —  though  the 
very  best  of  other  good  makers  will  answer  well. 

The  improved  Black  Bass  reels  of  Abbey  &  Imbrie,  and 
Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson,  referred  to  in  the  chapter  on 
reels,  are  excellent  implements. 

The  Reel  Line. — First  and  foremost  among  the  suit- 
able lines  is  the  smallest  size,  G,  or  No.  5,  plaited  raw  silk 
line.  It  should  be  braided  hard  and  close,  and  tinted  or 
parti-colored.  Where  the  Bass  are  exceptionally  large, 
size  F,  or  No.  4,  may  be  used,  though  the  smaller  or  finer 
the  line  the  better,  for  a  gut  leader  can  not  be  used  in 
casting  the  minnow,  and  longer  casts  can  be  made  with 
the  finest  lines.  The  proper  length  for  a  reel-line  is  fifty 
yards. 

The  boiled  silk  braided  line  is  next  best,  but  it  is  not  so 
closely  plaited,  usually,  as  the  raw  silk-line,  and  conse- 
quently absorbs  more  water,  which  is  detrimental  to  casting. 
When  it  is  as  hard  braided  as  the  raw  silk-line  it  is  about 
as  good. 


CASTING   THE   MINNOW.  413 

Next  in  order  is  the  braided  linen  line  ;  the  smallest  size, 
G,  or  No,  5,  is  the  only  size  to  be  used,  and  that  is  rather 
large. 

The  last,  though  with  some  not  the  least,  in  point  of 
merit,  is  the  relaid  Japanese  sea-grass  (so-called)  line, 
which  is  made  of  raw  silk,  and  in  some  respects  is  a  better 
line  than  any  mentioned,  being  of  smaller  caliber,  very 
hard  twisted,  and  absorbing  less  water  when  new.  But 
being  a  twisted  line,  it  is  apt  to  kink  where  much  casting 
is  practiced  ;  were  it  not  for  this  detestable  quality  it  would 
rank  all  other  lines  for  bait  fishing,  as  the  smallest  size, 
No.  1,  is  just  the  right  caliber.  I  am  trying  to  induce  the 
manufacturers  to  braid  a  line  of  this  same  size,  especially 
for  Black  Bass  angling,  and  shall  probably  succeed. 

Twisted  silk,  linen,  or  cotton  lines  should  never  be  used 
in  this  mode  of  angling,  as  their  kinking  propensities  will 
ruffle  the  temper  of  the  mildest-mannered  angler. 

Hooks. — The  hook  beyond  comparison,  for  Black  Bass 
fishing,  is  the  Sproat.  It  is  a  true,  central-draught  hook, 
and  tempered  just  right.  It  has  a  short  barb,  with  cutting 
edges,  which  will  go  right  through  any  part  of  a  fish's 
mouth.  The  next  best,  in  the  order  named,  are  the 
O'Shaughnessy,  Dublin  Bend,  Cork  Shape,  and  round 
bend  Carlisle  (Aberdeen).  These  hooks  are  all  numbered 
about  alike,  and  the  most  suitable  sizes  are  Nos.  1,  1-0, 
2-0,  and  3-0.  Hooks  should  be  tied  on  gut-snells,  single 
or  double,  good  single  gut  being  best.  Where  pickerel 
abound,  the  gimp-snell  may  be  used. 

Swivels. — A  brass  box  swivel  of  the  smallest  size  should 
always  be  used,  and  often  it  will  be  heavy  enough  without 
an  additional  sinker. 

Sinkers. — Ringed   sinkers,  or  what  is  still  better,  the 


414  BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 

patent  adjustable  sinker,  with  spiral  wire  rings  for  readily 
attaching  and  detaching  to  or  from  the  line,  are  the  only 
kinds  to  use,  when  they  are  found  necessary. 

Floats. — The  float  should  never  be  used  in  casting  the 
minnow  if  it  can  possibly  be  dispensed  with.  It  is  always 
in  the  way,  and  long  casts  can  not  be  made  when  it  is  em- 
ployed. In  still  fishing  it  may  be  used,  and  with  advan- 
tage, especially  where  helgramites  or  crawfish  are  used  as 
bait.  The  patent  adjustable  float  with  spiral  rings,  is  an 
article  of  real  merit,  as  it  is  well  made  and  can  be  attached 
or  removed  in  a  moment. 

ElGGINO   THE    CAST. 

In  rigging  the  cast  for  the  minnow,  the  reel  must  be 
placed  underneath  the  rod,  on  a  line  with  the  guides. 
Many  anglers  use  the  reel  on  top,  but  this  is  essentially 
wrong.  The  weight  of  the  reel  naturally  takes  it  under  the 
rod,  where  it  balances  better  and  enables  the  rod  to  be 
held  more  steadily;  the  strain  of  the  line  also  falls  upon 
the  guides,  which  insures  a  more  perfect  working  of  the 
rod.  Both  click  and  multiplying  reels  should  always  be 
used  underneath;  they  are  intended  to  be  so  used,  and  it 
will  be  found  far  the  best  way  when  one  becomes  accus- 
tomed to  this  plan. 

The  reel  then  being  underneath,  the  line  is  rove  through 
the  guides  and  a  box-swivel  tied  on  the  end ;  to  the  other 
ring  of  the  swivel  is  looped  the  snell  of  the  hook.  The 
hook  is  then  passed  through  the  lower  lip  of  a  good-sized 
minnow — from  three  to  four  inches  long — and  out  at  the  nos- 
tril; or  if  the  minnow  is  smaller,  out  at  the  socket  of  the 
eye.     If  the  minnow   is   carefully  hooked,  it  will   live  a 


CASTING   THE    MINNOW  415 

comparatively  long  time.     If  a  sinker  be  required  in  ad- 
dition to  the  swivel,  it  should  be  placed  a  foot  above  it. 


Making  the  Cast. 

Now  reel  up  the  line  until  the  sinker,  or  swivel,  as  the 
case  may  be,  is  at  the  tip  of  the  rod,  and  we  are  ready  to 
make  a  cast,  which  I  will  now  endeavor  to  explain  with 
the  aid  of  the  annexed  diagram  and  cuts : 


In  the  diagram,  A  represents  the  angler;  we  are  sup- 
posed to  be  looking  down  upon  him  from  above,  so  that 
only  his  hat  and  rod  are  visible.  He  is  facing  B.  The 
angler  now  wishes  to  make  a  cast  to  the  left,  X  being  the 
objective  point  to  which  he  desires  to  cast  the  minnow, 
some  twenty  yards  distant.  He  grasps  the  rod  immedi- 
ately below  the  reel  with  the  right  hand,  with  the  thumb 
resting  lightly  but  firmly  upon  the  spool,  to  control  the 
rendering  of  the  line;  the  right  arm  is  extended  down- 
ward, slightly  bent,  with  the  elbow  near  the  body,  and 
with  the  extreme  butt  of  the  rod  nearly  touching  the  right 
hip;  the  thumb  and  reel  are  upward,  inclining  slightly 
toward  the  left ;  the  tip  of  the  rod,  or  rather  the  minnow, 
just  clears  the  ground  or  surface  of  the  water;  the  position 
of  the  rod  is  now  in  the  direction  of  the  line  A  C,  inclin- 


416 


BOOK   OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 


CASTING   THE    MINNOW.  417 

ing  toward  the  ground  or  water,  making  an  angle  of  about 
30  deg.  with  the  line  of  the  shoulders,  X  Z  (the  inclination 
of  the  rod  is  shown  fully  in  figure  4) ;  this  is  the  situation 
at  the  beginning  of  the  cast. 

Now  for  the  cast :  The  angler  turns  his  face  toward  X, 
the  objective  point,  without  turning  his  body;  he  now 
inclines  his  body  in  the  direction  of  C,  advancing  the  right 
foot  and  bending  the  right  knee  slightly,  and  makes  a 
sweeping  cast  from  the  right  to  the  left,  and  from  below 
upward,  across  the  body  diagonally,  until  the  rod-hand  is 
at  the  height  of  the  left  shoulder,  and  the  arm  and  rod 
extended  in  the  direction  of  A  D,  with  the  tip  of  the  rod 
inclining  upward,  as  shown  in  figure  5. 

The  movement  of  the  right  hand  is  almost  in  a  straight 
line  from  a  point  near  the  right  hip  to  a  point  near  the 
left  shoulder;  the  motion  in  casting  is  steady,  increasing 
in  swiftness  toward  the  end  of  the  cast,  and  ending  with 
the  " pitching"  of  the  bait — instead  of  a  violent  jerk — 
somewhat  similar  to  the  straight  underhand  pitching  of  a 
base-ball. 

In  making  the  cast,  the  right  elbow  should  touch  the 
body,  sweeping  across  it,  and  only  leave  it  at  the  end  of 
the  cast,  making  the  forearm  do  the  work.  At  the  end  of 
the  cast,  the  reel  and  thumb  are  upward,  and  the  rod  forms 
an  angle  of  30  deg.  with  the  line  of  the  shoulders  X  Z, 
and  the  minnow,  instead  of  following  the  direction  of  the 
rod  A  D,  as  some  might  suppose,  will,  from  the  slight 
curve  described  by  the  rod  during  the  cast,  diverge  toward 
the  left,  and  drop  at  X,  when  the  thumb  should  immedi- 
ately stop  the  reel  by  an  increased  pressure. 

Casting  to  the  right  is  just  the  reverse  of  the  above 
proceeding.      The    angler    being    in    the    same    position, 


418 


BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 


CASTING    THE   MINNOW.  419 

brings  the  right  hand  across,  and  touching  the  body,  to  a 
point  in  front  of  the  left  hip,  the  thumb  and  reel  upward, 
but  inclining  toward  the  body,  and  the  rod  extending  in 
the  direction  of  the  line  A  D,  with  the  tip  downward,  as 
shown  in  figure  6 ;  he  now  turns  his  face  in  the  direction 
of  the  objective  point  Z,  inclines  his  body  and  advances 
his  left  foot  in  the  direction  of  D ;  and  makes  a  cast  from 
left  to  right,  from  below  upward,  and  ends  the  cast  with 
the  right  arm  and  rod  fully  extended  in  the  direction  of 
the  line  A  C,  as  shown  in  figure  7,  while  the  minnow 
takes  its  flight  toward  Z.  This  is  a  back-handed  cast, 
and  is  somewhat  analogous  to  the  pitching  of  a  quoit. 

In  making  either  cast  the  body  should  sway  slightly  and 
simultaneously  with  the  rod  arm,  in  the  direction  of  the 
cast,  to  add  force  and  steadiness ;  but  on  no  account  must 
the  cast  be  made  by  "  main  strength,"  for  it  requires  but 
slight  muscular  exertion  to  cast  forty  yards;  and  on  no 
account  must  the  rod  be  carried  further  toward  the  line 
X  Z  than  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees,  otherwise  the  bait 
will  be  thrown  behind  the  angler.  Particular  care  must 
be  taken  to  give  the  bait  an  upward  impulse  as  it  leaves 
the  rod. 

The  first  cast  that  the  beginner  makes  will  be  likely  to 
throw  the  bait  behind  him,  for  reasons  just  given.  He 
should,  by  all  means,  begin  by  making  short  casts,  and 
lengthen  them  as  he  perfects  himself  by  experience  in 
managing  the  reel  and  controlling  the  cast.  While  but  a 
few  yards  of  line  can  be  cast  directly  in  front  of  the  be- 
ginner, he  should  practice  casting  at  various  angles  with 
the  line  X  Z,  to  the  left  and  right.  He  should  avoid  over- 
head casting,  for  that  is  the  pot-fisher's  method  of  throw- 
ing a  bait,   and    is    not   only  an  awkward,   but   a  very 


420  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

inefficient  style  of  casting  the  minnow,  and  must  not  be 
practiced  except  where  the  reel  is  dispensed  with,  as  in  one 
mode  of  still-fishing. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  cast  the  thumb  presses  firmly 
upon  the  spool  of  the  reel,  until  just  before  the  tip  of  the 
rod  gains  its  greatest  extent  or  elevation,  when  the  press- 
ure is  to  be  slightly  relieved,  so  as  to  permit  the  release 
of  the  line,  and  allow  the  minnow  to  be  projected  in  the 
direction  of  the  cast.  The  exact  time  to  lessen  the  press- 
ure of  the  thumb  and  start  the  minnow  on  its  flight,  is 
almost  a  matter  of  intuition,  which  can  hardly  be  ex- 
plained ;  however,  the  proper  time  is  soon  learned  by 
practice,  in  which  event,  the  "  Avrinkle  "  comes  to  be  per- 
formed by  the  angler  automatically,  or,  as  it  were,  uncon- 
sciously. 

The  entire  cast  must  be  made  so  steadily  and  so  regu- 
larly, and  the  rod  held  so  firmly  at  the  end  of  the  cast,  as 
to  prevent  entirely  any  undue  swaying  or  bending  of  the 
rod,  in  order  that  the  line  may  follow  the  direction  of  the 
minnow  in  its  flight,  smoothly  and  evenly,  and  untram- 
meled  and  unretarded  by  any  vibratory  motions  of  the 
rod.  I  trust  I  make  myself  understood  here,  for  this  is 
the  most  essential,  and,  at  the  same  time,  the  most  difficult 
feature,  or  portion,  of  the  cast  to  explain,  or  acquire. 

The  thumb  must  be  thoroughly  educated  to  control  the 
rendering  of  the  line  during  the  cast,  and  this  can  only 
be  accomplished  by  continual  and  patient  practice,  in  train- 
ing the  thumb  to  apply  just  the  requisite  amount  of  uni- 
form pressure,  to  prevent  the  overrunning  of  the  line,  or 
back-lashing  of  the  spool. 

The  beginner  should  make  up  his  mind,  in  the  first  place, 
to  keep  his  temper,  and   to   exhibit  no  impatience  at  the 


CASTING   THE    MINNOW.  421 

frequent  slipping  of  his  thumb,  and  the  consequent  snarl- 
ing and  tangling  of  his  line.  The  more  calmly  and  phi- 
losophically he  views  these  annoyances  and  perplexities, 
the  sooner  will  he  overcome  the  difficulties  and  become 
au  fait  in  the  management  of  the  reel.  The  best  in- 
struction I  can  give  him  is  to  make  the  pressure  of  the 
thumb  gentle,  but  firm  and  uniform,  during  the  flight  of 
the  minnow,  and  to  stop  the  revolving  spool  the  moment 
the  bait  alights  on  the  water,  by  a  stronger  pressure. 

These  directions  are  as  brief,  plain  and  explicit,  as  it  is 
possible  to  make  them ;  they  embody  the  main  principles 
involved,  and  the  novice,  by  a  careful  and  practical  appli- 
cation of  them,  can,  by  perseverance,  soon  become  a  good 
caster  of  the  live  minnow. 

Genekal  Instkuctions. 

If  fishing  from  a  boat,  on  a  lake  or  large  pond,  the 
angler  proceeds  in  his  boat  on  the  outside,  or  deep  water 
side,  of  the  fishing  grounds,  and  casts  in  toward  the  feed- 
ing grounds,  the  oarsman  rowing  along  rapidly  or  slowly, 
or  holding  the  boat  stationary,  as  circumstances  demand. 
The  boat  being  in  deep  water  the  fish  are  not  so  apt  to 
see  it,  which  is  a  great  advantage.  The  angler  can  cast  in 
any  direction  and  to  any  distance,  greater  or  lesser,  within 
the  length  of  his  line,  as  he  may  desire.  He  can  cast 
astern  and  proceed  as  in  trolling,  or  cast  to  either  side,  or 
forward,  and  by  reeling  in  the  line  keep  the  bait  in  mo- 
tion. It  can  readily  be  imagined  how  expert  casting  has 
so  great  an  advantage  over  any  other  method  of  bait- 
fishing,  and  that  when  once  acquire^  it  will  never  be 
relinquished  for  any  other  mode. 


422 


BOOK   OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 


Bait-Fishing— Playing  the  Bass. 


CASTING   THE   MINNOW.  423 

When  a  Bass  is  hooked  the  boatman  should  pull  at 
once  for  deep  water,  for  the  better  management  of  the  fish, 
and  to  prevent  its  taking  refuge  among  weeds,  rocks, 
snags,  etc.  In  deep  water  the  fish  has  better  play  and 
more  room,  and  the  angler,  having  fewer  difficulties  to  en- 
counter, enjoys  more  thoroughly  the  ensuing  contest  and 
final  capture  and  landing  of  his  prey. 

If  fishing  from  the  banks  of  a  stream,  the  angler  should 
keep  as  near  the  level  of  the  water  as  possible,  or,  still 
better,  he  should  wade  the  stream  when  practicable.  He 
should  cast  below  the  riffles,  near  gravelly  bars,  sub- 
merged roots  or  snags,  weed  patches  and  projecting  rocks 
in  the  bed  of  the  stream,  and  under  shelving  rocks  on 
the  banks,  etc.  After  striking  a  Bass,  he  should  lead  him 
into  deeper  water  if  possible,  or,  at  all  events,  away  from 
dangerous  places. 

After  casting  the  minnow,  and  it  alights  at  a  favorable 
spot,  it  should  be  left  for  a  longer  or  a  shorter  time,  depend- 
ing on  the  nature  of  the  water  fished,  and  upon  the 
abundance,  scarcity,  and  mood  of  the  Bass.  As  the  line 
slackens,  it  should  be  slowly  reeled  until  the  entire  line  is 
retrieved.  Sometimes,  when  fish  are  plentiful  and  biting 
eagerly,  it  is  best  to  make  frequent  casts,  reeling  in  rapidly 
after  each  cast,  especially  in  rather  shallow  water,  so  as  to 
give  a  rapid  swimming  motion  to  the  bait. 

When  the  Bass  takes  the  bait,  the  angler  should  let  him 
have  it  from  two  to  ten  seconds,  according  to  the  mood  of 
the  fish.  If  he  bites  eagerly  and  wickedly,  the  angler 
may  hook  him  at  once  ;  but  if  he  seems  shy,  off  his  feed, 
and  inclined  to  toy  with  the  bait,  let  him  have  it  a  few 
seconds,  and  give  him  line  as  he  takes  it,  keeping  the 
thumb  upon   the  spool  as  a  drag,  however,  so   as  to  feel 


424  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK   BASS. 


Bait-Fishing— Giving  the  Butt. 


CASTING   THE   MINNOW.  425 

every  motion  of  the  fish.  At  the  proper  time  the  angler 
should  check  him  by  a  stronger  pressure  of  the  thumb, 
when,  if  the  Bass  pulls  strongly  and  steadily,  and  seems 
inclined  to  run  away  with  the  bait,  he  should  be  hooked  at 
once  by  a  slight  "  twist  of  the  wrist,"  but  not  by  a  violent 
jerk,  or  by  "yanking"  the  rod. 

If,  however,  upon  checking  the  Bass,  he  gives  several 
tugs  or  a  succession  of  slight  jerks,  it  is  better  to  let  him 
run  a  few  seconds  longer,  for  he  has  the  bait  crosswise  in 
his  mouth  and  does  not  feel  the  steel;  finally,  when  he 
pulls  steadily,  hook  him  as  before  described.  The  Bass 
should  never  be  given  time  to  gorge,  or  swallow  the  bait. 

From  the  time  a  Bass  first  "bites"  until  he  is  in  the 
landing-net,  he  should  never  be  given  an  inch  of  slack 
line,  under  any  circumstances.  The  rod  must  be  held  by 
the  butt,  with  the  thumb  upon  the  reel,  or,  if  the  rod  is 
held  in  the  left  hand,  the  line  must  be  held  against  the 
rod,  by  the  forefinger,  which  encircles  it,  and  thus  acts  as 
a  drag.  The  Bass  is,  of  course,  hooked  by  the  right,  or 
rod  hand,  and  the  rod  is  held  in  that  hand  so  long  so  the 
Bass  is  inclined  to  pull  steadily,  or  take  line;  but  as  soon 
as  he  shows  a  disposition  to  "let  up,"  or  turn  toward  the 
angler,  the  rod  must  be  taken  in  the  other  hand,  so  as  to 
leave  the  right  hand  free  to  use  the  reel.  The  Bass  should 
be  made  to  feel,  constantly,  the  spring  of  the  rod,  which 
should  always  maintain  a  curve,  by  the  tip  being  held  in  an 
elevated  position.  The  Bass  should  fight  for  every  inch 
of  line,  and  the  angler  should  take  it  again  whenever  pos- 
sible.    The  fish  must  be  killed  on  the  rod. 

Should  the  Bass  break  water,  with  a  long  line,  merely 

let  the  rod  straighten  as  he  falls  back,  so  as  to  slacken  the 

line  (but  it  should  be  recovered   immediately  when    he 
36 


426  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK   BASS. 

strikes  the  water),  for  if  the  Bass  falls  across  a  taut  line 
he  is  almost  sure  to  tear  the  hook  out.  If  he  breaks 
water  with  a  short  line,  the  rod  may  be  elevated  so  as 
to  keep  the  line  above  him,  following  him  back  as  he 
falls  into  the  water. 

If  there  is  danger  of  the  Bass  getting  to  the  weeds, 
or  to  the  protection  of  snags,  roots,  rocks,  etc.,  he  must 
be  stopped  at  all  hazards.  If  the  rod  is  a  good  one,  and 
pliable,  the  angler  must  not  hesitate  to  give  him  the  butt ; 
this  will  bring  him  up  standing,  with  no  danger  to  a  first- 
class  rod;  but  if  the  rod  is  a  stiff  one,  turning  the  butt  to 
him  will  be  most  sure  to  break  it;  in  this  case  it  is  best 
to  keep  the  Bass  away  from  dangerous  places  by  main 
strength,  and  the  natural  bend  of  the  rod.  If  fishing 
from  a  boat,  great  caution  must  be  used  to  prevent  the 
Bass  from  running  under  it,  as  he  will  be  sure  to  do  if  he 
has  the  opportunity ;  and  should  he  succeed,  the  rod  must 
be  quickly  passed  around  the  stern  or  bow,  and  the  thumb 
at  once  released  from  the  reel  so  as  to  allow  the  line  to 
run  out  as  rapidly  as  possible,  otherwise  a  broken  rod  is 
the  result. 

When  the  fish  is  thoroughly  exhausted,  he  should  be 
landed,  and  not  before.  Most  anglers  attempt  to  land 
their  fish  too  soon,  thus  curtailing  their  sport  and  endan- 
gering their  tackle.  The  landing-net  should  be  held 
several  inches  beneath  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  held 
perfectly  still,  when  the  angler  should  bring  the  fish  over 
it;  then  the  net  should  be  lifted  quickly,  and  with  one 
motion.  The  angler  must  never,  himself,  nor  allow  his 
assistant'  to,  frighten  the  fish  by  lunging  at  it  with  the 
net,  in  attempting  to  secure  it.  More  fish  are  lost  in 
clumsy  endeavors  to  land  them,  than  in  any  other  way. 


CASTING    THE   MINNOW.  427 

The  angler  should  never  be  in  too  great  a  hurry  to  land 
his  fish ;  for  if  he  is  well-hooked  he  can  not  get  away, 
while  if  he  is  hooked  in  a  thin  or  weak  part  of  the  mouth, 
there  is  a  greater  necessity  that  he  should  be  gingerly 
played  and  tenderly  handled,  until  he  is  completely 
"  tuckered  out,"  and  turns  up  his  belly  to  the  sun.  There 
is  never  any  thing  gained  by  too  great  a  hurry  in  Bass 
fishing.  On  the  contrary,  "the  more  haste  the  less  speed," 
is  a  maxim  particularly  applicable  to  this  case. 

In  reeling  in  the  line,  whether  playing  a  fish  or  re- 
trieving the  line,  it  should  be  guided  on  the  spool  of  the 
reel  by  the  left  middle  finger,  when  the  reel  is  underneath 
the  rod  (as  it  always  should  be),  or  by  the  left  thumb 
when  the  reel  is  used  on  top ;  it  should  be  reeled  on  regu- 
larly from  left  to  right,  and  from  right  to  left,  like  sewing- 
cotton  on  a  spool.  This  prevents  that  "  bunching,"  or 
piling,  and  the  subsequent  tangling  and  snarling  of  the 
line,  so  common  with  beginners  and  careless  anglers.  It 
is  just  as  easy  to  reel  the  line  correctly,  and  in  regular 
and  uniform  coils  or  turns,  as  to  bunch  it,  if  the  novice 
begins  right;  after  the  habit  is  once  acquired,  he  does  it 
automatically  or  mechanically. 


CHAPTER   XXIII. 

STILL-FJSHING. 

"And  if  you  rove  for  a  Perch  with  a  minnow,  then  it  is  best  to  be  alive, 
you  sticking  your  hook  through  his  back-fin;  or  a  minnow  with  the  hook 
in  his  upper  lip,  and  letting  him  swim  up  and  down,  about  mid-water 
or  a  little  lower,  and  you  still  keeping  him  to  about  that  depth  by  a 
cork."  — Izaak  Walton. 

Still-fishing  is  the  most  universal  mode  of  angling 
for  the  Black  Bass.  As  the  name  implies,  it  consists  in 
throwing  in  the  baited  hook,  and  waiting  patiently  for  "a 
bite,"  the  angler,  meanwhile,  keeping  himself  and  rod  as 
still  as  possible.  Fly-fishing  is  surface  fishing;  casting 
the  minnow  is  both  surface  and  mid-water  fishing;  while 
still-fishing  combines  mid-water  and  bottom  fishing.  In 
fly-fishing  and  casting  the  minnow  the  bait  is  kept  in 
pretty  constant  motion,  while  in  still-fishing  the  bait  is 
left  to  itself,  or  "still,"  for  a  longer  or  shorter  time. 
Still-fishing  on  streams  is  best  practiced  from  the  banks, 
while  on  lakes  or  large  ponds  a  boat  is  necessary. 

Tackle. 

Still-fishing  is  often  practiced  without  a  reel,  and  some- 
times without  a  rod,  a  hand-line,  merely,  being  used. 
When  no  reel  is  employed,  the  rod  should  be  quite  long 
and  light ;  the  best  being  a  cane  pole,  from  twelve  to  fif- 
teen feet  in  length.  When  the  reel  is  used  (as  it  always 
(428) 


STILL-FISHING.  429 

ought  to  be)  the  rod  recommended  for  casting  the  minnow 
is  the  best,  though  most  still-fishers  prefer  a  longer  rod, 
say  from  ten  to* twelve  feet,  as  they  are  not  proficient  in 
casting. 

The  length  of  the  line  for  still-fishing  depends  upon  the 
character  of  the  rod.  Where  no  reel  is  employed,  it  should 
be  of  about  the  same  length  as  the  rod;  when  the  angler 
uses  a  reel,  but  is  indifferent  at  casting,  a  line  of  twenty- 
five  yards  is  sufficient ;  but  when  the  regular  minnow-rod 
is  used  by  a  good  caster,  fifty  yards,  as  in  casting  the 
minnow,  should  be  used.  The  line  in  each  instance  being 
the  same  as  recommended  for  casting  the  minnow,  except 
where  no  reel  is  used,  when  the  smallest  size  twisted  silk 
line,  No.  1,  is  the  best. 

Still-fishers  usually  employ  the  float  and  sinker,  and 
they  may  be  used  or  not,  according  to  circumstances; 
though  one  of  the  chiefest  delights  of  the  still-fisher  is  to 
watch  the  maneuvers  of  his  float.  Where  the  stream  is 
shallow  and  full  of  snags,  or  the  bottom  covered  with  moss 
or  grass,  a  float  is  necessary ;  and  where  the  current  is 
quite  swift,  or  the  water  deep,  a  sinker  must  be  used  to 
keep  the  bait  beneath  the  surface. 

Baits  and  Baiting. 

While  a  minnow  is  the  best  bait  for  casting,  other  baits, 
as  the  helgramite,  crawfish,  frog,  cricket,  grasshopper,  etc., 
are  as  good,  and  sometimes  better,  for  still-fishing.  As  a 
rule,  the  bait  that  is  the  most  plentiful  in  the  waters  fished, 
will  be  found  the  most  successful.  The  helgramite  is  a 
capital  bait,  either  early  or  late  in  the  season,  when  the 
Bass  are  on  the  ripples  or  in   shallow  water.     It  is  a  flat, 


430  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

dark,  repulsive-looking  worm,  some  two  or  three  inches 
long,  and  a  half-inch  wide  (the  larva  of  the  horned  cory- 
dalis),  and  is  found  under  bowlders,  flat»stones,  decaying 
timbers,  etc.,  in  shallow  streams.  It  is  variously  called 
helgramite,  dobson,  hellion,  kill-devil,  grampus,  crawler, 
etc.,  and  is  best  hooked  by  passing  the  hook  under  the 
cap  covering  the  neck,  from  behind  forward,  bringing  the 
hook  out  next  to  the  head. 

The  crawfish,  especially  when  casting  its  shell — when  it 
is  called  "peeler"  or  "shedder" — is  a  good  bait.  In  its 
usual  state,  it  is  best  hooked  through  the  tail ;  peelers  can 
be  hooked  through  the  head  or  body.  Grasshoppers, 
crickets,  frogs,  etc.,  are  used  with  varying  success  in  still- 
fishing,  and  sometimes  the  humble  "  wum." 

General  Instructions. 

As  the  still-fisher  never  casts  his  bait  very  far,  it  is 
highly  important  that  he  keep  as  still  and  motionless  as 
possible ;  and,  if  in  a  boat,  must  avoid  striking  the  same 
with  his  feet,  his  rod,  or  the  oars,  as  such  sounds  are  heard 
very  distinctly  by  the  fish.  He  should  fish  toward  the 
sun,  so  as  to  keep  his  shadow  behind  him.  He  should 
keep  his  line  as  taut  as  possible,  with  his  thumb  always 
upon  the  spool  of  the  reel  (if  he  uses  one),  and  as  the  line 
becomes  slack,  should  reel  it  in. 

In  fishing  a  lake  or  pond,  the  still-fisher  anchors  his 
boat  in  a  favorable  spot,  which  should  be  in  rather  deep 
water,  just  off  a  shoal  or  bar,  ledge  of  rocks,  or  point  of 
land,  or  near  beds  of  rushes  or  lily-pads,  so  as  to  fish 
between  the  boat  and.  the  feeding-grounds,  that  is,  be- 
tween deep  and  shallow  water,  and  near  enough  to  cast 


STILL-FISHING.  431 

his  bait  quite  up  to  the  haunts  of  the  Bass,  above- 
mentioned,  whenever  necessary. 

If  his  minnows  are  lively  and  strong,  and  carefully 
hooked,  it  is  advisable  not  to  make  frequent  casts,  but 
rather  to  suffer  the  bait  to  remain,  so  long  as  it  keeps 
in  motion,  for  a  lively  minnow  will  attract  a  Bass  any- 
where within  thirty  feet,  in  tolerably  clear  water.  If 
helgramites  or  crawfish  are  used  for  bait,  they  must  be 
kept  gently  moving,  at  times,  by  the  rod. 

The  management  of  hooking,  playing,  and  landing  a 
Bass  is  just  the  same  as  described  in  the  preceding  chap- 
ter, except  where  a  reel  is  not  used,  in  which  case  the 
Bass  should  be  killed  on  the  rod,  all  the  same,  though 
the  angler  must  use  a  great  deal  of  judgment  in  man- 
aging his  rod,  to  thoroughly  enjoy  the  sport,  which  is 
considerable  where  the  rod  is  long,  slender,  and   light. 

He  should  lead  his  fish,  at  once,  into  deep  water,  where 
he  must  be  held  until  tired  out.  He  should  be  kept  in 
mid-water,  not  suffered  to  go  to  the  bottom,  nor  encour- 
aged to  approach  the  surface.  He  should  lead  him  to 
and  fro,  to  the  left  and  right,  whenever  possible,  for  by 
keeping  the  fish  in  constant  motion  it  soon  tires  him  out, 
and  subserves,  to  some  extent,  the  purposes  and  uses  of  a 
reel. 

In  still-fishing  a  stream,  the  angler  should  stand,  or  sit, 
as  near  the  level  of  the  water  as  possible,  never  fishing 
from  a  bold  bank  or  other  elevation,  unless  well  screened 
from  the  observation  of  the  fish.  He  should  keep  quiet 
and  still,  when  he  may  possibly  be  mistaken  for  a  stump 
or  other  inanimate  object.  He  should  leave  his  bait  in 
the  water  as  long  as  possible,  only  moving  it  occasionally, 
by  slow,  cautious  and  gentle  manipulations,  and  in  every 


432  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

other  respect  remember  that  he  is  "still-fishing,"  and 
govern  himself  accordingly;  for  too  much  caution  can  not 
be  exercised  in  this  mode  of  angling. 

The  noisy  "fishing  party,"  which  indulges  in  loud  talk- 
ing, shouting,  and  laughter,  and  has  a  "good  time  "  gen- 
erally, no  doubt  thoroughly  enjoys  itself  in  its  own  way, 
but  will  take  but  few  fish ;  it  is  the  "  lone  fisherman  "  who 
is  always  successful,  for  obvious  reasons. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

TROLLING. 

"  And  then  yon  are  to  know  that  your  minnow  must  be  so  put  on  your 
hook  that  it  must  turn  round  when  'tis  drawn  against  the  stream.— Izaak 
Walton. 

Trolling  with  the  Rod. 

Trolling  with  the  rod,  and  with  the  artificial  fly,  the 
live  minnow,  or  the  spoon  for  bait,  is  capital  sport ;  and  is 
a  very  popular  style  of  angling  in  the  lakes  and  lakelets 
of  the  North-west.  It  is  more  en  regie  than  still-fishing, 
and  is,  besides,  more  exciting  sport,  possessing  advantages 
over  the  latter  method  in  several  respects. 

The  angler  can  fish  with  a  long  line,  even  though  he  be 
indifferent  at  casting;  for,  as  the  boat  moves  along,  the 
line  can  be  pulled  off  from  the  reel,  yard  by  yard,  with 
the  hand,  while  the  resistance  of  the  bait,  or  leader,  in  the 
water,  takes  it  from  the  rod.  The  bait,  being  in  constant 
motion,  is  more  likely  to  be  seen  and  taken  by  the  fish 
than  in  still-fishing;  while  the  great  length  of  line  takes 
the  bait  so  far  from  the  boat  as  to  remove  or  quiet  any 
suspicions  or  apprehensions  of  danger  on  the  part  of  the 
wily  Bass. 

Then  the  boat,  not  being  anchored,  as  in  still-fishing, 

the  boatman   can   favor  the   angler   in   many  ways  when 

playing  or  landing  his  fish.     Then,  again,  in  moving  over 

so  much  and  so  great  a  variety  of  ground,  the  angler  is 

37  (433) 


434  BOOK   OF   THE   BLACK    BASS. 

more  apt  to  find  where  the  Bass  are  feeding,  and  thus  to 
know  just  the  character  of  the  ground  and  depth  of  water 
to  try  successfully  on  each  particular  occasion.  And,  lastly, 
it  secures  a  constant  change  of  location,  and  adds  enough  of 
the  spice  of  variety  to  satisfy  the  most  impatient  angler. 

The  minnow  casting-rod,  previously  described,  is  the 
one  best  adapted  to  this  or  any  other  mode  of  bait- 
fishing,  though  any  light  and  pliable  rod,  not  exceeding 
ten  or  eleven  feet  in  length,  will  answer,  and  even  the  fly- 
rod  can  be  utilized  here.  A  stiff  and  unyielding  rod 
should  not  be  used,  for  the  sudden  and  violent  "  bite " 
of  the  Bass,  in  this  method  of  angling,  with  the  rod  ever 
bent,  and  taut  line,  would  be  very  likely  to  break  it,  un- 
less the  rod  were  of  the  hoop-pole  pattern. 

The  only  lines  admissible  here  are  the  braided  raw  or 
boiled  silk-line,  and  the  braided  linen-line ;  twisted  lines 
can  not  be  used  at  all  on  account  of  their  kinking.  The 
caliber  should  be  a  size  larger  than  recommended  for  cast- 
ing the  minnow,  which,  in  silk-lines,  would  be  sizes  E,  or 
No.  3,  and  F,  or  No.  4:  and,  in  linen  lines,  F,  or  No.  4, 
and  G,  or  No.  5.  The  length  should  be  from  fifty  to 
seventy-five  yards. 

It  is  best  to  use  a  leader  from  six  to  nine  feet  long,  with 
either  flies,  the  minnow,  or  spoon.  The  float  should  not 
be  used.  One  or  two  swivels  are  necessary;  but,  usually, 
no  sinker  is  required. 

If  artificial  flies  are  used  for  the  troll,  a  gut-leader,  nine 
feet  in  length,  and  three  flies,  may  be  employed ;  or,  a 
twelve-feet  leader,  and  four  flies,  as  preferred  by  some. 
The  flies  should  be  placed  about  three  feet  apart  on  the 
leader.  An  attractive  combination  of  varieties  in  the  flies 
should  be  observed. 


TROLLING.  435 

A  very  good  assortment  would  be  a  "General  Hooker" 
for  the  tail-fly,  a  "Coachman"  for  the  first  dropper,  a 
"Grizzly  King"  next,  and,  lastly,  if  four  are  used,  an 
"Abbey."  Another  good  troll  would  be  a  "Professor" 
for  tail-fly,  a  "Montreal"  next,  the  third  a  "Brown 
Hackle,"  and,  last,  a  "Ferguson."  But,  of  course,  other 
flies  will  be  used  by  the  angler,  as  found  more  attractive 
and  killing ;  for  different  waters  often  require  different 
flies,  in  trolling,  as  well  as  in  fly-fishing. 

Three  split  shot,  No.  1,  should  be  placed  at  equal  dis- 
tances along  the  leader,  so  as  to  keep  the  flies  submerged 
from  one  to  three  feet  below  the  surface.  The  boat  should 
be  propelled  quite  slowly  in  trolling  with  flies,  so  as  to 
permit  their  sinking  to  the  proper  depth,  and,  likewise, 
to  enable  them  to  be  easily  seen  by  the  fish. 

If  the  first  Bass  hooked  takes  an  upper  fly,  by  playing 
him  judiciously  and  cautiously,  one,  or  even  two,  addi- 
tional Bass  may  often  be  induced  to  take  the  lower  flies, 
though  I  do  not  advise  this  plan  with  a  light  rod;  one  at 
a  time  will  afford  better  sport,  and  last  much  longer. 

If  a  spoon-bait  is  to  be  the  lure,  only  the  smallest 
sizes,  as  fly-spoons,  or  trout-spoons,  should  be  employed. 
Usually  no  sinker  will  be  needed ;  but  one  or  two  swivels 
should  always  be  used — one  next  to  the  spoon,  and  the 
other  several  feet  above  it.  In  trolling  with  the  spoon, 
the  boat  should  move  at  a  sufficient  rate  of  speed  to  cause 
the  spoon  to  revolve  rapidly  a  foot  or  two  beneath  the  sur- 
face of  the  water. 

In  trolling  with  the  live  minnow,  but  one  hook  should 
be  used.  Give  a  wide  berth  to  the  English  abominations 
known  as  spinning-tackle,  gangs,  traces,  etc.,  consisting  of 
from  three  to  a  dozen  hooks  arranged  in  groups  of  three, 


436  BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

with  singb  hooks  for  impaling  the  minnow;  these  contriv- 
ances are  intended  for  Pike-fishing,  and  should  never  be 
used  for  the  Black  Bass.  A  single  hook  is  sufficient  for 
all  purposes.  The  minnow  may  be  hooked  through  the 
lips  ;  or,  perhaps,  the  best  way  for  trolling,  is  to  pass  the 
hook  through  the  mouth  and  out  at  the  gill-opening,  then 
carry  it  back  and  insert  it  just  behind  the  dorsal  fin — a 
needle,  armed  with  a  strong  thread,  is  then  passed  through 
the  lips  of  the  minnow,  and  tightly  tied  to  the  snell,  this 
obviated  the  use  of  the  lip-hook;  a  minnow  will  spin  as 
well  hooked  in  this  way,  as  with  the  most  approved  spin- 
ning-tackle. 

The  angler,  with  his  boatman,  in  trolling  with  the  rod, 
proceeds  in  a  boat  over  the  fishing-grounds,  with  from 
thirty  to  fifty  yards  of  line  out.  The  rod  must  be  held 
with  the  tip  elevated,  so  as  to  keep  the  rod  constantly 
curved,  and  the  thumb  should  be  applied  to  the  spool  of 
the  reel,  so  as  to  be  ready  at  any  moment  for  the  violent 
iiish  of  the  Bass,  for  he  bites  very  wickedly  at  the  moving 
bait.  The  fish  must  be  hooked  at  once,  though  he  often 
fastens  himself.  If  the  angler  has  a  long  line  out,  he 
must  reel  in  his.  fish  as  soon  as  possible,  until  he  has  him 
within  proper  bounds,  when  he  can  kill  him  at  his  leisure. 
The  manipulation  of  the  Bass  after  he  is  hooked  is  just 
the  same  as  described  in  .the  chapter  on  casting  the  min- 
now, to  which  the  reader  is  referred. 

It  is  useless  to  troll  in  deep  water,  far  from  shore ;  it 
should  only  be  practiced  in  water  from  three  to  ten  feet 
deep,  following  the  trend  of  the  shore,  as  far  as  possible, 
where  the  proper  conditions  exist,  which  are  given  in  a 
previous  chapter. 


TROLLING.  437 

Trolling  with  the  Hand-line. 

Trolling  with  the  hand-line  is  a  very  tame  and  simple 
mode  of  angling;  in  fact,  is  the  most  simple  method  prac- 
ticed, there  being  no  skill,  whatever,  requiiei  in  luring  or 
in  manipulating  the  Bass  after  he  is  hooked.  It  is  a  very 
questionable  style  of  sport,  at  best ;  and,  considered  in  this 
light,  is  exceedingly  flat,  and  savors  strongly  of  pot-fishing. 
It  is  indulged  in  on  lakes,  ponds  and  broad  rivers,  mostly 
by  boys,  and  those  unfortunates  who  can  not,  or  will  not, 
learn  to  handle  the  rod. 

With  a  good  breeze  and  a  fast-sailing  boat,  trolling  for 
Blue  Fish,  Sea  Trout,  Spanish  Mackerel,  and  other  marine 
fishes,  with  hand-line  and  squid,  is  fine  sport;  but,  on  the 
bosom  of  a  quiet  lake,  trolling  for  Black  Bass,  with  hand- 
line  and  spoon,  is  a  cruel  pastime,  and  a  wanton  destruc- 
tion of  a  noble  fish.  It  is  only  excusable  when  in  camp- 
ing out,  without  suitable  tackle,  and  when,  like  the  boy 
digging  at  the  tenantless  woodchuck  hole,  one  is  "out  of 
meat,"  which,  in  Southern  parlance,  constitutes  "a  ground- 
hog case,"  in  which  event,  perhaps,  the  end  justifies  the 
means. 

The  necessary  tackle  for  this  mode  of  angling  consists 
of  a  strong  hand-line  of  linen  or  cotton,  from  fifty  to 
seventy-five  yards  long;  braided  lines  are  to  be  preferred, 
as  they  do  not  kink.  The  line  should  be  large  enough  to 
prevent  cutting  the  hands,  and,  at  the  same  time,  to  with- 
stand the  dead  strain  of  a  lively  fish.  Sizes  C,  or  No.  2, 
and  D,  or  No.  3,  are  the  best  and  most  suitable. 

Any  of  the  numerous  revolving  spoon-baits,  or  spinners, 
will  answer  with  or  without  the  so-called  "fly,"  or  tuft  of 
feathers,  or  braid;  for  the  bright  metal  spoon  is  what  lures 


438  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

the  Bass,  and  it  can  not  be  made  more  attractive  for  hand- 
trolling  by  the  addition  of  feathers,  braid,  etc. 

Abbey  &  Imbrie's  New  Fluted  Spoon,  No.  4;  J.  H. 
Mann's  Perfect  Revolving)  No.  20,  Oval,  No.  16,  Kidney, 
No.  CJ,  and  Egg,  No.  3J;  and  L.  S.  HilPs  Improved 
Spoon,  Nos.  1J  and  2,  are  all  excellent  trolling-baits  for 
hand-lines. 

The  ordinary  original  tin  or  brass  spoon,  with  single 
hook  soldered  on,  is  about  as  good  as  any  of  the  later 
inventions.  A  single  hook  is  certainly  preferable  to  the 
groups  of  two  or  three,  usually  attached  to  spoon-baits ; 
the  latter  often  being  crushed  or  broken  by  the  jaws  of  a 
large  fish. 

Small  spoons  are  more  successful  than  large  ones,  for 
Black  Bass.  In  the  absence  of  a  spoon-bait,  the  floor  of 
the  mouth  of  the  Pickerel,  cut  into  the  semblance  of  a  fish, 
is  tough,  white  and  glistening,  and  is  a  good  substitute;  a 
similar  strip,  cut  from  the  belly  of  the  Dog  Fish,  also 
answers  a  good  purpose.  One  or  two  swivels  should 
always  be  used  with  trolling-bait ;  a  sinker  is  seldom  nec- 
essary. 

With  this  simple  outfit,  early  in  the  season,  before  the 
aquatic  weeds  and  grasses  are  fully  grown,  this  mode  of 
fishing  is  quite  successful.  The  method  of  procedure  is 
as  follows: 

The  angler  sits  in  the  stern  of  the  boat,  and,  while  the 
oarsman  rows  at  a  moderate  rate  of  speed  along  and  over 
the  feeding-ground,  he  runs  oiF  forty  to  sixty  yards 
of  line;  the  spoon,  revolving  gracefully  beneath  the  sur- 
face, proves  an  effective  lure.  A  violent  jerk  on  the  line 
announces  the  fact  that  an  unfortunate  Bass  has  "  hooked 
himself;"  often  he  will  leap  into  the  air,  vainly  endeavor- 


TKOLL.TNG.  4,39 

ing  to  shake  the  glittering  deception  from  his  jaws,  but 
his  efforts  usually  only  serve  to  fix  the  several  hooks  more 
firmly  in  his  mouth,  and,  provided  he  does  not  crush  them, 
or  tear  them  out  and  escape,  he  is  "hauled  in,"  hand  over 
hand,  by  muscle  and  main  strength,  without  a  single 
chance  for  his  life — dragged  to  an  ignoble  death  by  a 
hand-line  and  spoon.  This  may  do  for  the  Pickerel ; 
but,  oh,  gentle  reader,  an'  you  love  me,  spare  the  Bass 
this  indignity ! 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

SKITTERING  AND  BOBBING. 

"  Then,  if  you  get  a  grasshopper,  put  it  on  your  hook,  with  your  line  about 
two  yards  long ;  standing  behind  a  bash  or  tree,  where  his  hole  is,  and  make 
your  bait  stir  up  and  down  on  the  top  of  the  water."— Izaak  Walton. 

Skittering. 

"Skittering"  is  best  practiced  with  a  long  and  light 
natural  cane-rod,  from  twelve  to  fifteen  feet  long,  and  a 
strong  line  of  nearly  the  same  length.  No  reel  is  used, 
for,  like  "  bobbing,"  this  mode  of  fishing  is  only  success- 
ful in  grassy  and  weedy  situations,  where  the  water  is 
comparatively  shallow,  notably,  in  the  lagoons  and  bayous 
of  the  extreme  South,  and  where  the  fish  must  be  landed 
as  soon  as  possible  after  being  hooked.  To  the  end  of 
the  line  is  attached  a  small  trout-spoon,  or  the  skitter- 
ing-spoon,  which  is  still  smaller,  being  the  smallest  re- 
volving spoon  made. 

The  modus  operandi  is  as  follows :  The  angler  stands  in 
the  bow  of  the  boat,  which  is  paddled  or  poled  by  the 
boatman  as  noiselessly  as  possible,  just  outside  of  or  along 
the  channels  of  clear  water,  among  the  patches  of  rushes, 
lily-pads  or  bonnets.  The  angler,  by  means  of  the  long 
rod  and  short  line,  skitters  or  skips  the  spoon  along  the 
surface  of  the  water  with  a  jerky  or  vibratory  motion, 
(440) 


SKITTERING    AND    BOBBING.  441 

causing  it  to  spin  and  glance  close  up  to  the  edges  of  the 
weeds,  where  it  is  viciously  seized  by  the  Bass,  who  has 
been  lying  in  wait  among  the  water  lettuce,  or  under  the 
broad  pads  of  the  water-lily,  for  just  such  an  opportu- 
nity. 

The  angler  has  now  no  time  to  loose,  but  must  rapidly 
draw  the  Bass  along  the  surface  of  the  water  to  the  boat, 
into  which  he  must  be  lifted  at  once,  for  he  is  as  good  as 
gone  if  he  gets  below  the  surface,  among  the  weeds ;  nor 
must  the  Bass  be  allowed  to  leap  into  the  air  with  so  short 
a  line,  but  he  must  be  dragged  quickly  along  the  surface, 
with  his  head  above  the  the  water,  until  the  line  can  be 
taken  hold  of  close  to  the  hook,  or  the  finger  hooked  in 
the  gill-opening,  and  the  fish  dextrously  lifted  over  the 
side  of  the  boat. 

In  such  situations,  skittering  is  exciting  sport,  and  is 
not  without  its  attractions.  The  bright  glancing  spoon, 
the  expert  and  skillful  management  of  the  rod,  the  mighty 
rush  and  splash  of  the  Bass  as  he  snaps  up  the  shining 
bauble,  and  his  subsequent  lashing  and  floundering  as  he 
is  irresistibly  drawn  toward  the  boat,  vainly  endeavoring 
to  get  either  in  or  out  of  the  water,  and  the  final  adroit 
manner  of  landing  him,  go  far  toward  making  this  a  legiti- 
mate sport,  as  it  undoubtedly  is,  in  the  localities  mentioned, 
inasmuch  as  reel-fishing  can  not  be  practiced  for  reasons 
before  given. 

Bobbing. 

"  Bobbing  "  is  another  style  of  angling  peculiar  to  the 
section  of  country  just  mentioned,  and  though  it  can  not 
be  regarded  as  so  artistic  or  legitimate,  it  is  far  more  kill- 


442  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

ing  tlian  skittering.  It  is  a  mode  of  fishing  especially* 
adapted  to  the  waters  of  the  Gulf  States,  where  it  is  much 
practiced.  The  implements  for  bobbing  are  few  and  sim- 
ple, consisting  merely  of  a  strong  rod  from  ten  to  twenty 
feet  in  length,  two  .or  three  feet  of  stout  line,  and  the 
"  bob,"  heretofore  described  in  Chapter  XVII. 

I  can  not  describe  this  method  of  angling  better  than 
to  quote  from  Bartram,  who  wrote  of  the  "  Trout "  (Black 
Bass)  of  Florida  and  the  way  of  taking  them  with  the 
bob,  in  1764,  as  follows: — 

"They  are  taken  with  a  hook  and  line,  but  without  any 
bait.  Two  people  are  in  a  little  canoe,  one  sitting  in  the 
stern  to  steer,  and  the  other  near  the  bow,  having  a  rod 
ten  or  twelve  feet  in  length,  to  one  end  of  which  is  tied  a 
string  line,  about  twenty  inches  in  length,  to  which  is 
fastened  three  large  hooks,  back  to  back.  These  are  fixed 
very  securely,  and  tied  with  the  white  hair  of  a  deer's  tail, 
shreds  of  a  red  garter,  and  some  parti-colored  feathers,  all 
which  form  a  tuft  or  tassel  nearly  as  large  as  one's  fist, 
and  entirely  cover  and  conceal  the  hooks ;  that  is  called  a 
"  bob."  The  steersman  paddles  softly,  and  proceeds  slowly 
along  shore  ;  he  now  ingeniously  swings  the  bob  back- 
wards and  forwards,  just  above  the  surface  and  sometimes 
tips  the  water  with  it,  when  the  unfortunate  cheated  Trout 
instantly  springs  from  under  the  reeds  and  seizes  the  ex- 
posed prey." 

I  have  many  times  seen  the  bob  used  in  Florida  just  as 
described  by  Bartram  more  than  a  century  ago,  and  it  is 
just  as  effective  to-day  as  it  was  then.  If  there  is  any 
thing  in  the  notion  of  certain  angling  authorities,  that  fish 
after  a  time  become  educated  or  accustomed  to  certain  ar- 
tificial baits,  as  flies,  etc. — becoming   first  suspicious,  and 


SKITTERING    AND    BOBBING.  443 

finally  refusing  them  altogether,  then  the  Black  Bass  of 
Florida  must  be  very  dull  of  comprehension,  must  have 
sadly  neglected  their  educational  privileges  and  opportuni- 
ties, or  else  the  said  "  theory,"  like  many  another  from 
"  across  the  herring  pond,"  originated  in  the  fertile  brain 
of  some  unfortunate  angler  to  account  for  an  empty 
creel. 


CHAPTER    XXVI. 


CONCLUDING  REMARKS. 


There  is  a  right  way,  and,  per  contra,  a  wrong  way,  to 
do  every  thing.  I  have  endeavored  in  the  preceding  pages 
to  point  out  the  right  way  of  doing  things  pertaining  to  an- 
gling, but  I  feel  that  my  duty  would  be  but  half  accom- 
plished, did  I  not  give  some  advice  relative  to  the  proper 
use  and  care  of  fishing  tackle,  before  taking  leave  of  my 
reader.  I  am  the  more  impelled  to  do  this  from  the  fact 
that  I  have  seen  so  many  fine  and  elegant  rods,  reels,  and 
lines  improvidently  ruined,  through  sheer  carelessness,  in 
most  instances,  and  through  ignorance  in  others. 

Every  angler  should,  himself,  look  after  the  welfare  of 
his  tackle,  and  not  trust  it  to  the  care  of  guides,  boatmen, 
or  servants.  Every  true  angler  should  do  this,  con  amore, 
as  every  true  sportsman  should,  himself,  clean  his  gun  and 
feed  his  dogs  at  the  close  of  a  day's  shooting,  or  every  true 
sailor,  himself,  snug  and  stow  his  boat  when  the  anchor  is 
dropped.  As  a  good  workman  is  known  by  his  jealous 
care  and  skillful  use  of  his  tools,  so  is  a  good  angler  known 
by  the  way  he  uses  and  handles  his  tackle,  a  good  sports- 
man by  the  way  he  uses  and  handles  his  gun  and  dogs, 
and  a  good  sailor  by  the  way  he  uses  and  handles  his  boat. 
It  is,  therefore,  essential  that  the  new  hand  should  know 
the  right  way,  to  avoid  the  wrong  way ;  not  only  on  the 
(444) 


CONCLUDING    REMARKS.  445 

score  of  the  fitness  of  things,  but  on  the  score  of  economy,  for 
more  tackle  is  hopelessly  ruined  by  a  lack  of  proper  care, 
than  by  the  most  severe,  though  judicious,  use. 

Care  of  the   Rod. 

The  right  way  to  "joint  up,"  or  put  a  rod  together,  is 
to  take  the  joints,  or  pieces,  from  the  case,  remove  the 
plugs,  or  stoppers,  and  put  them  in  the  pocket ;  then  attach 
the  reel  to  the  butt,  and  see  that  it  fits  firmly  and  securely, 
and  will  not  be  likely  to  work  loose  ;  next  wipe  the  male, 
or  inside  ferrules  of  the  joints,  to  insure  their  being  dry, 
clean,  and  bright;  then  the  tip  and  second  piece  are  to 
be  put  together  first,'  and  the  butt  last.  Be  particular  in 
"jointing  up,"  to  place  the  standing  guides,  or  rings,  on  a 
straight  line  with  the  reel  (there  are  usually  small  marks 
or  punctures  on  the  male  and  female  ferrules  as  a  guide), 
and  in  fitting  the  joints,  do  so  by  inserting  the  smaller,  or 
male  ferrule  into  the  larger,  or  female  ferrule,  and  push 
home  firmly,  but  gently,  and  be  very  careful  to  avoid  a 
twisting,  or  screwing  motion,  especially  with  split  bamboo 
rods,  for  this  is  not  only  liable  to  warp  the  ferrules,  but 
also  to  separate  the  strips  of  such  a  rod.  After  the  rod  is 
properly  jointed  up,  place  the  butt  end  carefully  on  the 
ground,  reeve  the  line  through  the  guides,  or  rings,  and 
bring  it  down  and  tie  it  to  one  of  the  bars  of  the  reel  by  a 
single  bow-knot,  until  ready  to  attach  the  cast  of  flies,  or 
the  swivel  and  hook. 

The  wrong  way  to  joint  up  a  rod,  and  I  will  describe 
it  as  I  have  seen  it  done,  many  times,  is  to  put  the  butt 
and  second  piece  together  first;  then  drop  the  butt  end  on 
the  ground  and  shove  it  to  one  side,  or  behind  you,  and 


446  BOOK    OF  THE   BLACK    BASS. 

then  put  the  tip  on — the  rod  swaying  and  bending,  in  the 
meantime,  rendering  this  somewhat  difficult  to  do,  but 
which  is  finally  accomplished  by  twisting  or  screwing  it 
on,  the  butt  boring  a  hole  in  the  ground,  the  while — and 
in  case  no  one  has  stepped  on  your  rod  (which  I  have 
seen  done  more  than  once),  hold  the  rod  perpendicularly, 
and  settle  the  joints  by  tamping  the  butt-end  on  a  stone,  or 
piece  of  wood.  The  reel  is  yet  to  be  adjusted  ;  to  do  which 
you  may  either  rest  the  tip  on  the  ground  in  front  (using 
it  as  a  boring  instrument  in  this  instance),  or  hold  the  rod 
horizontally  with  the  butt  against  the  pit  of  the  stomach, 
to  the  great  danger  of  some  one  stumbling  over  your  rod, 
or  of  your  striking  it  against  a  tree  or  rock  while  endeav- 
oring to  ship  your  reel ;  and  yet — "  tell  it  not  in  Gath  " — 
I  have  seen  this  very  scene  played  over  and  over  again 
by  those  who  called  themselves  anglers;  and  so  they  were, 
in  the  aggregate,  or  on  the  whole,  but  not  in  detail.  To 
hold  the  rod  across  the  body,  sitting  or  standing,  or  per- 
pendicularly, while  adjusting  the  reel,  is  just  as  awkward 
and  unsafe. 

Remember,  then,  to  remove  the  plugs  and  put  them  in 
the  pocket — you  will  have  them  then  whenever  you  unjoint 
your  rod,  for  the  separated  joints  should  never  be  left  a 
moment  without  the  plugs  in  the  female  ferrules ;  in  this 
way  you  will  preserve  the  proper  shape  of  the  ferrules,  and 
your  rod  will  always  go  together  and  come  apart  easily, 
provided  you  keep  them  clean  and  smooth.  Then,  ship 
the  reel;  then  put  the  smaller  joints  together  first,  and  the 
butt  piece  last. 

The  right  way  to  "  unjoint,"  or  take  apart,  the  rod  (I 
will  spare  the  reader  the  infliction  of  a  description  of  the 
wrong  way)  is  first  to  remove  the  leader,  or  swivel  and 


CONCLUDING    REMARKS.  .  447 

hook,  reel  the  line  dn  the  spool  slowly — I  say  slowly,  for 
I  have  seen  the  tip  of  a  rod  snapped  off  while  the  wet 
line  was  being  reeled  rapidly,  or  in  a  hurry,  by  its  catch- 
ing in  one  of  the  rings,  or  el i aging  in  a  eoil  around  the 
tip.  The  reel  is  next  to  be  unshipped,  and  the  rod  wiped 
perfeetly  dry;  all  sand,  dirt,  or  fish-scales  must  be  care- 
fully rubbed  off,  and  especially  must  the  ferrules  be 
rendered  clean  and  bright,  to  prevent  any  foreign  substance 
getting  into  them  when  the  rod  is  being  unjointed,  for  the 
smallest  particle  of  grit  or  sand  may  spoil  the  fitting  of  the 
rod.  The  rod  must  now  be  taken  apart  in  the  reverse 
order  in  which  it  was  put  together;  the  butt  first,  and  the 
smaller  joints  last ;  in  unjointing,  pull  the  joints  apart  by 
using  gentle  and  steady  force,  in  a  straight  line,  with  the 
hands  close  to  the  ferrules,  when  they  will  separate  read- 
ily. Be  particular  about  this,  for  I  have  seen  an  angler 
with  the  joint  against  his  breast,  his  hands  widely  separa- 
ted, pulling  on  the  two  pieces  in  a  curved  line,  as  if  he 
would  bend  the  rod  around  his  body,  which  proceeding 
had  a  greater  tendency  to  strain  and  warp  the  ferrules  than 
to  separate  them. 

Having  separated  the  joints  of  the  rod,  the  plugs  are 
next  to  be  inserted,  and  the  reel  unshipped.  Examine 
each  joint,  or  piece,  and  if  bent,  or  warped,  straighten  it 
carefully,  and  place  them  in  the  case,  large  end  down;  in 
tying  the  case,  tie  it  loosely,  otherwise  you  may  bend  the 
small  joints.  Never  put  your  rod  away  in  a  damp  case ; 
should  it  be  wet,  dry  it  thoroughly  after  reaching  home. 

When  the  rod  is  put  together,  never  stand  it  in  a  corner, 
or  lean  it  with  the  tip  resting  against  any  thing ;  better 
lay  it  down  flat.  In  putting  a  rod  away  after  the  season, 
it  should  be  laid  on  a  shelf,  or  in  a  flat  box.     It  should 


448         .   BOOK  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 

be  kept  in  a  cool  room,  of  uniform  temperature,  and 
never  in  a  room  heated  by  a  furnace  or  a  stove.  A  drv 
atmosphere  will  cause  the  joints  to  shrink,  and  the  ferrules 
to  become  loose,  while  a  damp,  or  constantly  changing  at- 
mosphere will  cause  them  to  twist  and  warp.  The  wrappings 
of  the  guides,  rings,  or  hand-piece  should  be  frequently 
looked  to,  when  in  use,  and  the  rod  should  be  varnished 
once  or  twice  during  the  season.  Coach  varnish  is  good, 
but  the  best,  perhaps,  is  a  saturated  solution  of  shellac  in  al- 
cohol ;  it  should  be  put  on  quite  thin  and  evenly,  and  one  or 
two  coats  applied  as  may  be  needed,  using  a  soft  rag  or 
sponge;  it  soon  dries  and  is  perfectly  waterproof.  In 
Izaak  Walton's  day  rods  were  painted,  and  he  gives  minute 
directions  for  preparing  the  sizing,  the  paint,  and  the  man- 
ner of  applying  them.  Wood,  to  preserve  its  elasticity, 
must  be  protected  from  the  changes  of  the  atmosphere. 

Care  of  the  Reel. 

A  fine  reel  should  receive  as  much  care  as  a  watch,  so 
far  as  this  can  be  done,  consistently,  with  its  use.  It  should 
never  be  laid  on  the  sand  or  bare  ground,  or  exposed  in 
any  way  to  favor  the  introduction  of  sand  or  grit  into  the 
working  parts.  When  not  in  use  it  should  be  kept  in  a 
box,  or  in  a  buckskin  or  chamois  bag.  At  the  beginning 
and  end  of  each  season  it  should  be  carefully  taken  apart, 
cleaned  and  oiled.  After  use,  it  should  be  always  wiped 
clean,  and  rubbed  with  an  oiled  rag  or  chamois  skin. 

A  first-class  reel  will  last  an  angler  his  life-time,  with 
proper  care.  Especially  is  a  multiplying  reel  to  be  wrell 
cared  for,  as  it  is  more  complicated,  and  has  more  gearing 
than  a   click    reel.     The   screw  that   holds  the    movable 


CONCLUDING    REMARKS.  449 

handle  to  the  crank  should  be  frequently  noticed,  to  see 
that  it  is  firmly  screwed  in,  otherwise  it  may  come  out  in 
casting,  and  both  screw  and  handle  be  lost.  On  this  ac- 
count, this  screw  should  never  be  oiled.  The  drag,  alarm, 
click — or  by  whatever  name  the  "brake  "  of  a  multiplying 
reel  may  be  known — should  be  used  only  when  really  nec- 
essary, and  as  seldom  as  possible,  for  its  frequent  use  wears 
out  the  gearing  of  the  reel. 

See  that  the  reel  fits  your  rod  perfectly  and  tightly,  so 
there  will  be  no  shaking,  wabbling  or  coming  loose  during 
a  severe  strain.  If  the  reel-plate  fits  the  rod  too  loosely, 
place  strips  of  parchment  or  card-board  between  the  plate 
of  the  reel  and  the  groove  of  the  rod,  until  the  reel- 
band  will  just  slip  over  the  plate  and  hold  it  firmly. 
If  the  reel-plate  is  too  long,  or  too  thick  for  the  reel-seat 
of  the  rod,  one  or  the  other,  or  both,  must  be  cut  to  fit ; 
at  all  events,  see  that  your  reel  fits  its  seat  firmly  and 
securely. 

Always,  if  you  can,  use  the  reel  "  underneath,"  with  the 
handle  to  the  right  side,  when  reeling  the  line ;  and  always 
turn  the  crank,  in  reeling,  "away"  from  you,  or  in  the 
direction  that  the  hands  of  a  watch  move.  It  may  seem 
unnecessary  to  mention  this  latter  precaution,  but  I  have 
known  it  to  be  used  the  contrary  way.  When  angling, 
and  the  fly  or  bait  is  in  the  water,  never,  for  a  moment,  lay 
the  rod  down  with  a  turn  of  the  line  around  the  crank  of 
the  reel  to  serve  as  a  drag,  for  I  have  several  times  seen 
both  rod  and  reel  jerked  overboard,  and  irretrievably  lost, 
by  just  such  inexcusable  carelessness  and  stupidity,  and 
the  savage  "  bite  "  of  a  big  fish. 
33 


450  BOOK    OF    THE    BLACK    BASS. 


Care  of  the  Line. 

The  line  should  be  thoroughly  dried,  always,  after  use. 
This  injunction  is  of  the  highest  importance  to  the  angler. 
The  entire  line — not  merely  the  portion  that  may  have 
been  used — should  be  stretched  between  two  trees,  or 
around  pegs  or  nails  driven  up  for  the  purpose,  and  ex- 
posed to  the  sun  and  air;  or,  if  at  night,  or  if  the  day  be 
damp,  it  should  be  coiled  around  the  back  of  a  chair,  and 
placed  near  the  fire.  I  can  not  impress  the  necessity  of 
this  care  too  strongly  on  the  beginner,  for  he  will  see  so 
many  bad  examples  in  those  who  ought  to  know  better,  but 
who  habitually  put  away  the  reel  and  wet  line,  to  the  ever- 
lasting injury  of  both,  because  it  is  "too  much  trouble/7 
or  they  are  "too  tired,"  to  perform  their  bounden  duty  of 
drying  their  lines;  such  men  are  "pot-fishers,"  and  will 
stand  their  rods,  jointed,  up  in  a  corner  all  night.  They 
are  on  a  par  with  the  "pot-hunter"  who,  after  a  hard 
day's  tramp,  permits  his  dogs  to  go  supperless  to  bed,  and 
his  gun  to  remain  foul  until  morning. 

Silk-lines  are  especially  liable  to  mildew  and  rot  if  put 
away  damp  or  wet.  Even  waterproof  lines  should  have  a 
good  airing  after  use,  or  they  will  retain  more  or  less  damp- 
ness, which,  in  the  end,  will  work  their  destruction.  After 
drying  a  line,  it  should  be  rubbed,  or  reeled  through  a 
woolen  cloth,  to  remove  any  sand,  grit  or  mildew.  The 
economy  of  this  whole  matter  is  one  thing,  and  its  ex- 
pediency another;  the  value  of  a  line  may  be  a  small 
affair,  but  the  breaking  away  of  a  good  fish  through  a 
defective  line  is  a  serious  event.  I  once  knew  a  good 
fellow,  but  a  poor  angler,  who,  after  a  day's  fishing,  care- 


CONCLUDING    REMARKS.  451 

fully  dried  a  fifty-cent  handkerchief  for  fear  it  would  mil- 
dew, while  he  left  a  three-dollar  line,  wet,  on  a  twenty- 
dollar  reel  and  a  thirty-dollar  rod,  standing  in  the  corner 
all  night,  because  he  was  "going  a-fishing  again  in  the 
morning." 

The  line  should  be  thoroughly  tested  at  the  beginning 
of  the  season,  during  its  whole  length;  and,  if  not  found 
fully  up  to  the  standard,  should  be  discarded.  It  should 
also  be  tested,  occasionally,  during  the  season ;  in  fact,  the 
better  way  is  to  test  it  always  before  using  it.  A  line  that 
will  sustain  a  dead  weight  of  two  pounds  is  strong  enough, 
if  used  with  a  pliant  rod,  and  no  other  should  be  used 
for  Black  Bass  angling.  By  examining  and  testing  the 
line,  always ,  before  using  it,  it  may  save  much  morti- 
fication, and  many  a  fish.  Though  you  can  not  loose  a 
fish  by  the  breaking  of  the  line — for,  as  Father  Izaak 
says,  "no  man  can  lose  what  he  never  had" — you  can 
lose  your  temper  under  such  trying  circumstances,  which 
is  worse. 

It  would  be  useless  to  give  any  directions  for  water- 
proofing lines,  for  it  is  a  very  difficult  thing  to  do  well; 
and,  moreover,  prepared  lines  are  now  so  cheaply  and-  well 
made,  that  it  will  pay  the  angler  to  buy  them,  if  he  wants 
waterproof  lines.  If  a  line  loses  its  color  or  tint,  it  can 
be  soaked  in  strong  green  tea,  or  a  weak  solution  of  indigo, 
to  be  afterward  well  dried.  To  take  the  kink — so  far  as  it 
can  be  done — out  of  laid  or  twisted  lines,  let  them  out  their 
full  length,  and  draw  them  loosely  through  the  water,  with- 
out hook  or  sinker,  from  the  stern  of  a  boat  as  it  is  rowed 
along;  to  be  then  stretched  and  dried.  Never  use  a  reel- 
line  with  a  knot  in  it ;  better,  by  far,  make  some  boy  happy 
by  giving  it  to  him  to  catch  Perch  and  "Sunnies." 


452  book  of  the  black  bass. 

Care  of  other  Tackle. 

Artificial  flies  should  be  closely  looked  after,  summer 
and  winter,  to  preserve  them  from  their  worst  enemy — the 
moth.  When  put  away  for  the  winter,  see  that  the  fly- 
book,  or  other  receptacle,  is  perfectly  clean;  dust  out  the 
leaves  and  pockets  before  putting  the  flies  in.  See  that 
the  flies  are  perfect  in  feather  and  snell  j  reject  all  that 
are  much  worn  or  seem  moth-eaten,  and  those  which  have 
worn,  frayed  or  otherwise  imperfect  snells.  Place  patch- 
ouly,  or  gum  camphor,  wrapped  in  paper,  in  the  pockets 
and  between  the  leaves,  and  inclose  the  wThole,  securely,  in 
cotton  cloth. 

Leaders  should  be  carefully  looked  to,  and  only  those 
that  are  perfect  retained.  Imperfect  ones  may  be  utilized 
for  snells.  Hooks  should  be  kept  sharpened,  and  free 
from  rust;  it  is  a  good  plan  to  wipe  them,  after  use,  with 
an  oiled  rag;  those  that  are  rusted  should  be  thrown 
away.  All  tackle,  in  short,  should  be  kept  neat  and 
clean.  It  is  a  great  pleasure  to  the  angler  to  overhaul 
his  tools  and  tackle  several  times  during  the  winter,  to 
see  that  every  thing  is  all  right.  A  little  attention  to 
these  details,  and  a  following  of  the  advice  given  in  this 
chapter,  will  more  than  pay  the  angler  for  the  price  of 
this  book,  and  may  inculcate  habits  of  order  and  econo- 
my in  the  novice,  which  will  certainly  promote  his  pleas- 
ure and  happiness,  and  may  save  him  many  a  dollar,  if 
applied  to  other  walks  in  life. 

Parting  Words. 
And   now,  in   taking  leave  of  the  angler — or  he  wh 


o 


CONCLUDING    REMARKS.  453 

has  mentally  resolved  to  become  an  angler,  and  who  has 
followed  me  through  the  pages  of  this  book — I  do  so  with 
regret;  for  it  has  been  to  me  a  labor  of  love  to  describe, 
in  my  way,  the  methods  and  the  delights  of  angling.  It 
has  revived  the  memory  of  many  happy  hours,  spread  over  * 
many  years  of  checkered  sunshine  and  shadow.  The 
bright  pages  in  the  book  of  memory  stand  out  like  the 
flashing  stream  in  the  bright  sunlight,  while  the  sorrows 
are  hid  in  the  deep  shadows  of  its  thickly-wooded  glens. 
"With  thee  conversing  I  forget  all  time."  I  live, 
again,  in  scenes  forever  past,  but  never  to  be  forgotten; 
with  rod  and  reel,  again  I  wander  along  the  upland  streams, 
among  the  cedars  and  chinkapins,  and  on  the  tide-waters 
and  salt-marshes  of  "My  Maryland;"  on  Long  Island's 
sea-girt  shore ;  on  the  broad  bosom  of  the  St.  Lawrence, 
with  its  clusters  of  emerald  isles,  and  on  the  charming 
lakes  of  the  Empire  State ;  among  the  low  green  hills  of 
"the  valley,"  the  broom-sedge  of  the  "  Piedmont"  section, 
and  on  the  broad  bays  of  the  "  Old  Dominion ; "  in  the 
coves  and  bights  of  the  stormy  Huron,  the  treacherous 
Michigan,  and  the  great  inland  sea,  Superior,  with  its 
crystal  waters  and  great  hills,  crowned  by  the  scarlet 
banners  of  the  mountain  ash  ;  by  the  pine-clad  rivers  of 
the  "  Old  North  State ; "  along  the  rocky  streams  of  Ken- 
tucky and  Tennessee,  flecked  with  the  roseate  tassels  and 
snowy  disks  of  the  redbud  and  dogwood ;  among  the 
moss-covered  rocks  of  the  highland  rapids,  and  under  the 
fragrant  magnolia  and  feathery  cypress  of  the  silent  estu- 
aries of  the  "  Palmetto  State  "  and  Georgia ;  on  the  clear, 
sparkling  lakelets  of  Wisconsin,  glinting  and  dancing 
amid  fields  of  golden  grain  and  broad  green  pastures,  or 
hiding  in  sheltered  nooks,  among  the  tamaracks  and  black 


454  BOOK    OF   THE    BLACK    BASS. 

birches ;  on  the  broad  Susquehanna,  the  blue  Juniata, 
and  among  the  hemlocks  and  maples  of  the  Pennsylvania 
hills;  under  the  moss-draped  live-oak  and  stately  palm, 
amid  the  orange-groves  and  myrtles,  the  mangrove  and 
sea-grape,  on  the  sluggish  streams,  the  broad  lagoons,  and 
among  the  coral-reefs  and  sunny  keys  of  Florida;  under 
the  cool  beeches  and  broad  sycamore,  the  graceful  elms 
and  lofty  eottonwood,  of  the  quiet  streams  of  Ohio,  Indi- 
ana, Illinois  and  Missouri;  in  the  cold,  crystal  streams, 
gliding  among  the  everlasting  hills,  clothed  with  tangled 
forests  of  balsam  and  pine,  in  Michigan.  It  has  taken 
me  back  even  to  the  days  of  lang  syne,  when,  with  a  bit 
of  cock's  hackle,  tied  on  a  pin-hook,  and  a  willow  wand 
for  a  rod,  I  first  essayed  the  angler's  art,  and  made  sad 
havoc  among  the  minnows,  chubs  and  "gudgeons." 

I  can  only  hope  that  the  reader  will  experience  as  much 
pleasure  in  perusing  the  foregoing  pages,  as  I  have  done 
in  penning  them ;  and  he  will  please  remember,  that, 
though  he  may  differ  with  me  on  each  and  every  page,  I 
wiil  not  quarrel  with  him;  but,  should  we  ever  meet,  as 
brothers  of  the  angle,  in  some  sequestered  spot  on  lake 
or  stream,  Ave  will,  while  smoking  the  pipe  of  peace,  talk 
the  matter  over  cooly,  calmly  and  dispassionately.  But 
he  may  rest  assured,  that,  though  all  roads  lead  to  Rome, 
and  though  there  are  many  ways  of  catching  a  Bass — I 
have  traveled  some  of  the  roads,  and  tried  most  of  the 
ways — if  he  faithfully  follows  in  my  footsteps,  he  will 
never  regret  it,  and  never  have  cause  to  wish  he  had  tried 
the  other  way. 

And  now  I  leave  you,  with  this  injunction  ;  and,  though 
I  have  mentioned  it  before,  I  do  so  at  parting,  that  it  may 
be  the  more  impressive : 


concluding  rem  auks.  455 

Always  kill  yotr  fish  as  soon  as  taken  from 
the  water;  and  ever  be  satisfied  with  a  moder- 
ate creel. 

By  so  doing,  your  angling  days  will  be  happy,  and  your 
sleep  uniisturbel;  and  you,  and  I,  and  the  fish  we  may 
catch,  can  say,  with  the  sweet  singer  of  Israel : 
"  The  lines  are  fallen  to  me  in  r  leasant  places." 


THE   END. 


INDEX 


SCIENTIFIC  HISTORY  OF  THE  BLACK  BASS. 


Agassiz,  Prof.  Louis,  15,  26,  34,  56. 

Aplesion,  24,  35. 

Aplites,  24,  35. 

Baird  &  Girard,  15,  27,  34. 

Black  Bass,  Scientific  History  of,  11. 

Bodianus  achigan,  13,  23,  33,  36,  45. 

Bosc,  M.,  12,  22. 

Calliurus,  24,  35,  42,  57. 

Calliurus  punctulatus,  13,  24, 25, 35. 

Centrarchus    fasciatus,    14,   15,   26, 
27,  28. 

Centrarchus  obscurus,  14,  26,  28,  33. 

Chronological  Catalogue  of  Species, 
81. 

Cichla,  25. 

Cichla  fasciata,  13,  25,  33,  56. 

Cichla  floridann,  14,  25,  34. 

Cichla  minima,  14,  25,  33. 

Cichla  variabilis,  13,  44,  53,  57. 

Cichla  ohiensis,  14,  25,  33. 

Contrasted  Differential  Characteris- 
tics, 18. 

Cope,  Prof.  E.  D.,  15,  28,  55. 

Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  14,  25,  34, 
43,  50,  51. 

DeKay,  Dr.  Jas.  E.,  14,  26,  33. 

Dioplites,  24,  35. 

Dioplites  nuecensis,  15,  16,  29. 

Dioplites  salmoides,  16. 

•Dioplites  treculii,  16,  34. 
39 


Dioplites  variabilis,  16,  34. 
Etheostoma,  24. 
Etheostoma  calliura,  24,  33. 
Garlick,  Dr.  T.,  15,  27,  34. 
Generic  characterizations,  68. 

Aplesion  Raf.,  71. 

Aplites  Raf.,  70. 

Calliurus  Raf.,  68,  69. 

Dioplites  Girard,  72. 

Dioplites  Raf.,  70. 

Etheostoma  Raf.,  70. 

Grysteini  Bleeker,  75. 

Grystes  Agassiz,  72. 

Grystes  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  71. 

Gryztes  Giinther,  73. 

Grystes  Holbrook,  72. 

Grystes  Swainson,  71. 

Huro  Bleeker,  75. 

Huro  Cuvier  &  Valenciennes,  71. 

Huro  Gun  t her,  73. 

Huro  Swainson,  71. 

Lepomis  Raf.,  69. 

Mieropterus  Bleeker,  75. 

Mieropterus  Gill,  73. 

Mieropterus  Jordan,  75. 

Mieropterus  Lac,  68. 

Mieropterus  V.  &  B.,  76. 

Nemocampsis  Raf.,  70. 

Generic  Description  of  Mieropter- 
us, 67. 
Gill,  Prof.  Theo.,  15, 18, 30, 34,47,48. 
Girard,  Dr.  Chas.,  15,  27. 
Goode,  Prof.  G.  Brown,  16,  30,  35. 
Giinther,  Dr.  Albert,  28,  39. 

(457) 


458 


INDEX    TO    SCIENTIFIC    HISTORY. 


Grystes,  14,  15,  22,  26,  27,  28,  35,  39. 
Grystes  fasciatus,  27,  28,  56. 
Grystes  megastoma,  15, 27,  28,  29,  34. 
Grystes  nigricans,  15,  27,  28,  56. 
Grystes  nobilis,  15,  27,  29,  34. 
Grystes  nuecensis,  15,  27,  28,  34. 
Grystes  salmoides,  14,  26,  28,  42,  49, 

50,  53,  54,  56. 
Grystes  "salmoneus,':  27,  57. 
Holbrook,  Dr.  J.  E.,  45,  55. 
Hum,  26,  35,  39. 
Huro  nigricans,  14,  25,  26,  28,  29, 

30,  34,  49,  56. 
Jordan,  Prof.  D.  S.,  16,  30,  31,  36, 

39,  40,  50,  52,  54. 
Kirtland,  Dr.,  15,  34. 
Labre  salmoide,  12,  62. 
Labrus  salmoides,  12,  22,  26,  29,  33, 

36,  37,  43,  50,  51,  52,  53,  54. 
Lacepede,  Count,  11,  12,  22,  32,  51. 
Le  Labre  salmoide,  62. 
Leporais,  24,  35. 
Lepomis  achigan,  15. 
Lepomis  flexuolaris,  13,  24,  33. 
Lepomis  pallida,  13,  24,  33,  45. 
Lepomis  notata,  13,  24,  33. 
Lepomis  salmonea,  13,  24,  33. 
Lepomis  trifasciata,  13,  24,  33. 
Le  Micropore  dolomieu,  60. 
Le  Sueur,  Chas.  A.,  13,  25,  33,  34. 
Micropore  dolomieu,  60. 
Micropterus,  12,  16,  24,  29,  35,  38, 

42,  46,  57,  65. 
Micropterus,  synonymy  of,  65. 
Micropterus  achigan,  15,  28. 
Micropterus    dolomieu,  12,  16,  22, 

33,  35,  38,  41,  45,  49,  50,  51,  52, 

53,  54,  57,  84. 
Micropterus     dolomieu     Lacepede, 

synonymy  of,  84. 


Micropterus  dolomieu  Lac,  Specific 

descriptions  of,  86. 
Micropterus  fasciatus,  28. 
Micropterus  floridanus,  16,  30,  35. 
Micropterus   nigricans,   15,  28,  30, 

31,  34. 
Micropterus  nuecensis,  16,  38,  40. 
Micropterus  pallidus,  16,  30,  31,  35, 

37,  40,  47. 
Micropterus    salmoides,  15,  16,  30, 

31,  37,  38,  40,  47,  49,  57. 
Micropterus  salmoides,  (Lac.)  Hen- 
shall,  synonymy  of,  110. 
Micropterus  salmoides  var  achigan, 

16,  36. 
Micropterus  salmoides  var  salmoides, 

16,  36. 
Micropterus  variabilis,  16,  38,  48. 
Morphological,  28. 
Morphology  and  Nomenclature,  65. 
Nemocampsis,  24,  35. 
Nomenclature,  29. 
Nomenclature  and  morphology,  65. 
Notes  on  Fishes  from  Florida,  39. 
Notes   on  Typical  Fishes  in  Paris 

Museum,  41. 
On  Species  Micropterus,  Gill,  18. 
Rafinesque,  C.  S.,  13,  23,  33. 
Scientific  History  of  Black  Bass,  11. 
Scientific  Names  of  Black  Bass,  31. 
Specific  Descriptions  of  M.  dolomieu 
Lac,  86. 
Bodianus  achigan  Raf.,  87. 
Calliurus  punctidatus  Raf.,  87. 
Centrarchus  fasciatus  DeKay,  98. 
Centrarchus  fasciatus  Giinther,  105. 
Centrarchus  fasciatus  Kirtland,  97. 
Cent rarchu-s fasciatus  Roosevelt,  105. 
Centrarchus  fasciatus  Htorer,  101. 
Centrarchus    fasciatus  Thompson, 

103. 
Centrarchus  obscurus  DeKay,  100. 


INDEX    TO   SCIENTIFIC   HISTORY. 


459 


Centrarchus  obscurus  Giinther,  105. 

Centrarchus  obscurus  Storer,  101. 

Cichla  fasciala  Kirtland,  97. 

Cichla  fasciata  Le  Sueur,  90. 

Cichla  minima  Kirtland,  97. 

Cichla  minima  Le  Sueur,  93. 

Cichla  ohiensis  Kirtland,  97. 

Cichla  ohiensis  Le  Sueur,  92. 

Etheostoma  calliura  Raf.,  90. 

Grisles  salmoiedcs  Herbert,  104. 

Grystes  fasdatus  Agassiz,  101. 

Grystes  fasciatus  Putnam,  106. 

Grystes  nigricans  Garlick,  104. 

Grystes  nigricans  Norris,  105. 

Grystes  salmoides  Cuv.  &  Val.,  93. 

Grystes  salmoides  DeKay,  98. 

Grystes  salmoides  Storer,  101. 

Grystes  salmoides  Jardine,  96. 

Grystes  salmonoides  Giinther,  105. 

Lepomis  achigan  Gill,  103. 

Lepomis  flexuolaris  Raf.,  8S. 

Lepomis  notata  Raf.,  89. 

Lepomis  salmonea  Raf.,  89. 

Lepomis  trifasciata  Raf.,  88. 

Micropterns  dolomieu  Lac,  86. 

Mieroplerus  fasciatus  Cope,  107. 

Micropterns  salmoides  Gill,  107. 

Micropterns  salmoides  Hallock,  109. 

Mici-opterus  salmoides  Jordan,  109. 

Micropterus  salmoides  Uhler  &  Lug- 
ger, 108. 
Synonyms  of  Micropterus,  65. 
Synonyms  of  M.  dolomieu  Lac,  84. 
Synonyms  of    M.  salmoides  (Lac.) 
Henshall,  110. 


Synopsis  of  Species  of  Micropteras, 
82. 

Specific  Descriptions  of  M.  sal- 
moides (Lac.)  Henshall,  113. 

Cichla  floridana  Le  Sueur,  113. 
Diopliles  nuecensis  Girard,  125,  126. 
Grisles  nigricans  Herbert,  129. 
Grystes  megastoma  Garlick,  125. 
Grystes  nigricans  Agassiz,  121. 
Grystes  nobilis  Agassiz,  121. 
Grystes  nuecensis  Baird  &  Girard, 

121. 
Grystes  salmoides  Hoi  brook,  122. 
Grystes  salmoides  Norris,  130. 
Huro  nigricans  Cuv.  &  Val.,  114. 
Huro  nigricans  DeKay,  119. 
Huro  nigricans  Giinther,  126. 
Huro  nigricans  Jardine,  115. 
Huro  nigricans  Richardson,  116. 
Huro  nigricans  Storer,  120. 
Labrus  salmoides  Lac,  113. 
Lepomis  pallida  Raf.,  113. 
Microplenis  nigricans  Cope,  130. 
Micropterus  nigricans  Gill,  130. 
Micropterus  pallidus  Goode  &  Bean, 

132. 
Micropterus  pallidus  Jordan,  132. 

Vaillant,  Dr.  Leon,  38,  40,  48,  53. 
Vaillant    &    Bocourt,    15,    16,   34, 

37. 
Varieties  of  small-mouthed   Black 

Bass,  16,  36. 


INDEX  TO  LIFE  HISTORY  AND  ANGLING. 


Aerating  water,  190. 

Angling,  as  an  art,  353. 

Angling,  best  season  for,  365. 

Angling,  effect  of  wind  on,  366. 

Angling,  philosophy  of,  349. 

Angling,  time  of  day  for,  374. 

Artificial  baits,  307. 

Artificial  flies,  294. 

Artificial  flies,  care  of,  452. 

Artificial  insects,  315. 

Artificial  minnows,  315. 

Ash,  for  rods,  197. 

Baits  and  Baiting,  429. 

Baits,  artificial,  307. 

Baits,  natural,  318. 

Bamboo,  for  rods,  200. 

Bass,  black,  as  a  game  fish,  377. 

Basswood,  for  rods,  199. 

Bethahara,  for  rods,  198. 

Biting  of  fish,  Conditions  governing 

the,  356. 
Black  Bass  as  a  food  fish,  185. 
Black  Bass  as  a  game  fish,  377. 
Black  Bass  bait-rods,  207. 
Black  Bass  fly-rod,  229. 
Black  Bass  rods,  difference  in,  209. 
Boat  fishing,  421. 
Bobbing,  441. 
Bob,  the,  317. 

Breeding  of  Black  Bass,  162. 
Calcutta  bamboo,  200. 
Cane,  200. 
Capture  of  the  Bass,  382. 

Care  of  lines,  450. 

(460) 


Care  of  reel,  448. 

Care  of  rod,  445. 

Care  of  tackle,  452. 

Cast,  rigging  the,  389,  414. 

Casting-lines,  273. 

Casting,  overhead,  394. 

Casting,  sideways,  396. 

Casting  the  fly,  390. 

Casting  the  fly,  general  instructions, 
398. 

Casting  the  minnow,  409,  415. 

Casting  the  minnow,  general  instruc- 
tions, 421. 

Causes  of  color  in  fishes,  147. 

Cedar,  for  rods,  198. 

Chubs,  318. 

Clearing  ring,  339. 

Click  reel,  238. 

Coloration  of  the  Black  Bass,  145. 

Coming  Black  Bass  rod,  211. 

Common  names  of  Black  Bass,  142. 

Concluding  remarks,  444. 

Conditions  governing  the  biting  of 
fish,  356. 

Corks,  335. 

Corydalis,  horned,  321. 

Crawfish,  323. 

Creel,  329. 

Crickets,  324. 

Details  of  split  bamboo  rod,  228. 

Depth  of  water  for  fishing,  362. 

Differences  in  color,  136. 

Differences  in  game  qualities,  140. 

Differences  in  fins,  138. 


INDEX   TO   LIFE   HISTORY. 


461 


Differences  in  mouth,  138. 

Differences  in  scales,  138. 

Dimensions  of  the  Henshall  rod, 
215. 

Disgorgers,  339. 

Diversities  in  habits,  139. 

Dobson,  322. 

Dublin  bend  hook,  289. 

Extinction  of  brook  trout,  380. 

Fish  basket,  329. 

Fish  hooks,  283. 

Fishing  lines,  252. 

Fishing,  perfect  day  for,  370. 

Fishing  reels,  237. 

Fishing  rods,  195. 

Fishing,  still,  428. 

Flies,  artificial,  294. 

Flies,  rules  for  using,  296. 

Floats,  335,  414. 

Fly-books,  327. 

Fly,  casting  the,  390. 

Fly,  management  of,  399. 

Fly-fishing,  387. 

Fly-fishing,  caution  in,  403. 

Fly-fishing,  lines  for,  265. 

Fly-fishing,  main  rules  in,  405,  407. 

Fly-fishing,  remarks,  hints  and  ad- 
vice, 402. 

Fly-fishing,  rigging  the  cast,  389. 

Fly-fishing,  striking  aud  playing, 
401. 

Food  and  growth,  164. 

Forest  and  Stream  rod,  211. 

Frogs,  324. 

Game  fish,  Black  Bass  as  a,  377. 

General  and  Specific  features,  135. 

General  instructions  in  casting  the 
fly,  398. 

General  instructions  in  casting  the 
minnow,  421. 


!  General  instructions  in  still-fishing, 

430. 
j  Geographical  distribution,  154. 
Giving  the  butt,  402,  426. 
i  Grass  hoppers,  324. 
Greenheart,  for  rods,  198. 
Growth  of  Bass  164,  167. 
j  Gut,  silkworm,  270. 
I  Habitat  of  Black  Bass,  135.. 
Habits  of  Black  Bass,  162. 
Hackle  flies,  297. 
Hand-lines  for  trolling,  267,  437. 
Hatching,  162. 
Hearing,  sense  of,  181. 
Helgramite,  321. 
Henshall  rod,  212. 
Hibernation,  170. 
Hickory,  for  rods,  199. 
Home-made  rod,  221. 
Hooks,  283. 

Hooks  for  bait-fishing,  413. 
Hooks,  sproat,  287. 
Hooks,  various  kinds  of,  290. 
Hooking  minnows,  319. 
Hooking  the  bass,  423. 
Hornbeam,  for  rods,  199. 
How  hooks  are  made,  283. 
How  lines  are  made  253. 
How  gut  is  made,  270. 
Influence  of  age  on  color,  152. 
Influence  of  breeding  on  color,  153. 
Influence  of  food  on  color,  149. 
Influence  of  light  on  color,  152. 
Influence  of  water  on  color,  151. 
Influence  of  season  on  color,  151. 
Influences  which  govern  the  biting 

of  fish,  356. 
Injunction,  parting,  455. 
Insects,  artificial,  315. 
Intelligence  and  special  senses,  175. 


462 


INDEX    TO    LIFE    HISTORY. 


Introduction  of  Bass  in  new  waters, 

154. 
Knots,  279. 

Lancewood,  for  rods,  197. 
Landing-nets,  331. 
Landing  the  Bass,  402,  426. 
Last  injunction,  455. 
Leaders,  273. 

Lengthening  the  line  in  casting,  397. 
Lines,  care  of,  450. 
Lines,  fishing,  252. 
Lines,  for  bait-fishing,  258,  412. 
Lines  for  fly-fishing,  265. 
Lines  for  hand-trolling,  267. 
Lines,  how  made,  253. 
Lines,  rod,  2G3. 
Mackintosh  pants,  343. 
Mahoe,  for  rods,  199. 
Making  the  cast,  415. 
Maple,  for  rods,  199. 
Markings  of  Bass,  146. 
Materials  for  rods,  196. 
Minnows,  318. 
Minnows,  artificial,  315. 
Minnows,  care  of,  320. 
Minnow,  casting  the,  409. 
Minnow  nets,  333. 
Minnow  pails,  340. 
Minnow  rod,  212,  411. 
Minnow  seine,  333. 
Minnow  tackle,  411. 
Multiplying  reels,  243. 
Natural  baits  318. 
Nests  of  Black  Bass,  163. 
Net,  landing,  331. 
Net,  minnow,  333. 
No  reel,  250. 

On  stocking  inland  waters,  185. 
Origin  of  split  bamboo  rod,  201. 
Parting:  words,  452. 


Perch,  for  bait,  319. 

Philosophy  of  angling,  349. 

Pigment  cells,  148. 

Playing,  in  bait-fishing,  425. 

Playing,  in  fly-fishing,  401. 

Position  of  reel  on  rod,  251. 

Potomac,  stocking  the,  157. 

Rapid  growth  of  Bass,  165. 

Reels,  237. 

Reel,  care  of,  448. 

Reel  cases,  345. 

Reel,  click,  238. 

Reel  lines,  bait  fishing,  258. 

Reel  lines,  fly-fishing,  265. 

Reel,  management  of, -420. 

Reel,  multiplying,  243,  412. 

Reel,  position  on  rod,  251,  414,  449. 

Reeling  the  line,  427. 

Remarks,  hints  and  advice  in  fly- 
fishing, 402. 

Rigging  the  cast  in  bait-fishing,  414. 

Rigging  the  cast  in  fly-fishing,  389. 

Rods,  195. 

Rod,  bait,  207. 

Rod,  care  of,  445. 

Rod,  coming  Bass,  211. 

Rod,  Cuvier  Club,  224. 

Rod,  for  casting  the  minnow,  411. 

Rod,  Forest  and  Stream,  211. 

Rod,  Henshall,  212. 

Rod,  home-made,  221. 

Rod,  how  to  joint,  445. 

Rod  lines,  263. 

Rod,  materials  for,  196. 

Rod,  origin  of  split  bamboo,  201. 

Rod,  split  bamboo  minnow,  225. 

Rod,  split  bamboo,  how  to  make, 
226. 

Rod,  Welles,  223. 

Rules  for  using  flies,  296. 


INDEX   TO    LIFE    HISTORY. 


463 


Seine,  minnow,  333. 

Sense  of  hearing,  181. 

Sense  of  sight,  176. 

Shiners,  318. 

Silkworm  gut,  270. 

Sinkers,  337,  413. 

Skittering  and  bobbing,  440. 

Snells,  275.  v 

Snoods,  275. 

Spawning,  162. 

Split  bamboo  minnow  rod,  225. 

Split  bamboo  rod,  origin  of,  201. 

Split    b:imboo    rods,    lengths    and 

weights  of,  207. 
Spoon-baits,  307,  435, 437. 
Sproat  hook,  287. 
Still-fishing,  428. 
Still-fishing,  b:iits  for,  429. 
Still-fishing,    general    instructions. 

430. 
Still-fishing,  tackle,  428. 
Stocking  new  waters,  187. 
Stream  fishing,  423. 
Striking,  401,  425. 
Successful  flies,  299. 
Switching,  396. 
Swivels  336,  413. 


Tackle,  care  of,  452. 

Tackle  for  still-fishing,  428. 

Thumbing  the  reel,  420. 

Transporting  bass,  189. 

Trolling,  433. 

Trolling  lines,  267. 

Trolling  Spoons,  307. 

Trolling  with  flies,  434. 

Trolling  with  hand-line,  437. 

Trolling  with  fly-spoon,  439. 

Trolling  with  minnow,  435. 

Trolling  with  rod,  433. 

Typical  rod,  213. 

Varnished  rod,  fish  not  frightened 

by,  404. 
Various  causes  affecting  biting  of 

fish,  356. 
Voracity  of  Black  Bass. 
Wading  pants  and  stockings,  343. 
Wasahba,  for  rods,  198. 
Weight  of  Black  Bass,  169. 
Welles  Rod,  223. 
Whipping  with  the  fly,  399. 
Will  the  black  bass  rise  to  the  fly, 

403. 
Words,  parting,  452. 


CONROY,  BISSETT  &  MALLESON, 


MANUFACTURERS  OF 


FINE  FISHING  TABK&E, 

65  Fulton  Street,  H.  Y.  Factory,  Brooklyn,  E.  D. 


SEND  FOR  NEW  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE.  Price  15c. 


THE  CELEBRATED  HENSHALL  BLACK  BASS  ROD. 

Ash  and  Lance-wood,  2  tips  and  tip-case ;  S\  to  9  ft.  long ;  "Weight, 

9  to  10  oz.;  German  silver  mountings , $15  00 

Brass  mountings 12  °° 

The  same  as  the  above  of  Six-Strip  Hexagonal  Split  Bambo3, 

Waterproof,  German  silver  ferrules  25  00 

Or  with  our  New  Bronze  mountings 18  00 

See  Catalogue  for  other  Black  Bass  Rods. 


THE  CELEBRATED  KENTUCKY  REEL,  No.  3,  $14.00;  No.  4,  $15.00. 

Our  new  nickeled  4-ply  Black  Bass  Keel,  adjustable  click  and  drag— 
a- good  substitute  for  the  Ky.  Keel.  No.  3J,  $9.00;  No.  4,  $7.50;  JN  o.  5,  $6.00. 

See  Catalogue  for  other  Special  Black  Bass  Reels. 

fSee  next  page."] 
[1]  L  ' 


Cincinnati,  October,  28,  1880. 
Messrs.  Conroy,  Bissett  &  Malleson, 

New  York  City. 
Gentlemen: 

Your  favor  of  the  26th  and  the  "Rod"  came  to  hand  to-day. 

The  Rod  is  about  perfect  in  length,  proportion,  and  weight — the  great 

essentials — for  a   Black   Bass  Minnow  Rod.     I  am   more  than  pleased 

with  it.     Its  action,  I  am  sure,  will  be  in  harmony  and  keeping  with  its 

other  good  qualities,  and  I  will  soon  give  it  a  practical  test.     The  finish 

and  style  is  first-class 

I  must  compliment  you  upon  the  production  of  so  handsome  and 
serviceable  a  rod,  for  serviceable  it  must  prove,  from  the  excellent  char- 
acter of  the  timber  and  mountings. 

I  will  write  you  further  in  a  few  weeks,  after  trying  it 

Yours  very  truly, 

J.  A.  HENSHALL. 

"W.   HUNTINGTON, 

Wilton,  cozrsnsr. 

MANUFACTURER  OP 

FINE   HAND-MADE    FISHING   RODS. 

HORNBEAM    A    SPECIALTY. 

SEND  FOR   CIRCULAR. 


The  "Sea  and  Eiver  Fishing"  and  "Fish  Culture"  Departments  of 
the  Forest  and  Stream  are  in  charge  of  Fred.  Mather.  The  weekly 
issues  are  replete  with  entertaining  Sketches  of  Angling  Excursions  and 
Sporting  Travel;  Practical  Hints  and  Helps  for  Anglers;  Directions  to 
Fishing  Resorts,  and  instructions  in  Fish  Culture.  Other  Departments 
treat  of  Gun,  Rifle,  Game,  Kennel,  and  Natural  History. 

A  Journal  for  Gentlemen  and  their  Families. 

Always  able,  bright,  readable!     Has  hundreds  of  correspondents  and 
thousands  of  friends.     Heading  and  advertising  pages  clean.     Winning 
golden  opinions.     Growing  in  worth  and  favor. 
Weekly,  $4.00  per  year  ;  specimen  copies  free. 

FOREST  AND  STREAM  PUBLISHING  COMPANY, 
No.  39  Park  Row,  New  York,  N,  Y, 

[2] 


THE  AMERICAN  FIELD! 

The  Sportsman's  Journal, 


AXD  RECOGNIZED  AUTHORITY  OX 

ALL  SPORTING  MATTERS. 

DEVOTED     TO     THE 

Dog,  Gun,  Rifle,  Fish,  and  Fishing, 

AND  ALL  LEGITIMATE  SPORTS  OF  THE  FIELD. 
EA.OH     NUMBER,     ILLUSTRATED. 

A  Weekly  Chronicle  of  all  Sporling  Evenls. 

One  Year, $4  00 

Six  Months, 2  00 

Three  Months,        -       -       -       -       -       -     1  00 

Clubs  of  Three  or  More,  one  year,  to  any  Address,    -    $3  each. 

SPECIMEN  COPIES  SENT  ON  RECEIPT  OF  TEN  CENTS. 
Published  so  as  to  reach  Subscribers  Every  Saturday. 

THE  AMERICAN  FIELD  PUBLISHING  CO.,  Proprietors, 

155  and  157  Dearborn  Sheet  CHICAGO,  ILL 

N.  ROWE,  "  Mohawk,"  Editor  and  Manager, 

W 


HANOYER 

ON 

The  Law  of  Horses. 

A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Law  of  Horses :  embracing 
the  Law  of  Bargain,  Sale,  and  Warranty  of  Horses 
and  other  Live  Stock;  the  Rule  as  to  Unsoundness  and 
Vice,  and  the  Responsibility  of  the  Proprietors  of 
Livery,  Auction,  and  Sale  Stables,  Innkeepers,  Vet- 
erinary Surgeons,  and  Farriers,  Carriers,  eir-~ 
Second  edition,  revised  and  greatly  enlarged,  R  / 
M.  D.  Hanover. 

8vo.    Law  Sheep.    $4.00. 

In  this  work  the  author  has  chiefly  sought  to  investigate  the 
principles  which  constitute  the  Law  of  Warranty  in  the  sale  of 
horses,  and  to  present  them  in  a  clear  and  concise  form. 

Contracts,  Frauds,  Carriers,  Negligences,  and  other  branches, 
of  the  law  have  also  been  treated  of,  so  far  as  they  relate  to  horses 
and  other  live  stock.  The  rule  as  to  unsoundness  and  vice  in 
horses,  and  the  responsibility  of  innkeepers,  livery-stable  keepers, 
and  others  having  the  care  of  horses,  have  been  carefully  presented. 

The  aim  of  the  author  has  been  to  afford  assistance  to  the  law- 
yer, and  at  the  same  time  to  enable  the  unprofessional  reader  to 
gain  a  general  acquaintance  with  the  law  on  the  subject.  He  has 
also  given  full  notes  of  the  decisions  of  the  American  and  En- 
glish courts. 

"  This  is  a  little  book  that  will  prove  useful  to  that  large  class  of  persons, 
lawyers  and  others,  interested  in  horses.  The  arrangement  is  good,  and 
the  law  well  and  clearly  stated." — Albany  Law  Journal. 

"  It  is  invaluable  to  those  interested  in  the  subject  of  which  it  treats.  It 
should  take  its  place  as  an  authority  in  every  law  library."— Legal  Gazette. 

"  Such  a  work  as  this,  in  which  the  law  relating  to  live  stock  is  carefully 
collated  and  arranged,  and  presented  in  a  popular  form  which  non-profes- 
sional readers  could  understand,  has  long  been  needed,  and  we  believe  this 
work  will  be  generally  sought  after  by  all  who  deal  in  this  description  of 
property." — National  Live  Stock  Journal. 

"Very  many  of  the  little  lawsuits  in  county  courts  arise  from  fraud  or 
imposition  in  selling  or  swapping  horses.  In  this  book  we  have  a  perfect 
encyclopedia  of  the  law  and  custom  on  these  questions."— Rural  New 
Yorker. 

ROBERT  CLARKE  &  CO 

Law  Publishers,  Booksellers,  Importers, 
[4]  CINCINNATI 


JULY,  1881. 


HISTORICAL  AND  MISCELLANEOUS 

PUBLICATIONS  OF 

ROBERT   CLAEKE   &  CO 
CINCINNATI,  O. 


Alzog  (John,  D.  D.)     A  Manual  of  Universal  Church  History. 

Translated  by  Rev.  T.  J.  Pabisch  and  Rev.  T.  S.   Byrne.     3 

vols.     8vo.  15  00 

Anderson  (E.  L.)     Six  Weeks  in  Norway.     18mo*  1  00 

Andre   (Major)     The    Cow   Chace;    an   Heroick   Poem.      8vo. 

Paper.  75 

Antrim  (J.)     The  History  of  Champaign  and  Logan  Counties, 

Ohio,  from  their  First  Settlement.     12mo.  1  50 

Ballard  (Julia  P.)  Insect  Lives;  or,  Born  in  Prison.  Illus- 
trated. Sq.  12mo.  1  00 
Bell  (Thomas  J.)     History  of  the  Cincinnati   Water  Works. 

Plates.  8vo.  In  press. 

Benner  (S.)     Prophecies  of  Future  Ups  and  Downs  in  Prices: 

what  years   to  make  Money  in   Pig   Iron,  Hogs,  Corn,  and 

Provisions.     2d  ed.     24mo.  1  00 

Bible  in  the   Public   Schools.      Records,   Arguments,   etc.,   in 

the  Case  of   Minor  vs.    Board  of  Education  of  Cincinnati. 

8vo.  2  00 

Arguments  in  Favor  of  the  Use  of  the  Bible.  Separate. 
Paper.  50 

Arguments  Against  the  Use  of  the  Bible.  Separate.  Paper.  50 
Biddle  (Horace  P.)     Elements  of  Knowledge.     12mo.  1  00 

Biddle  (Horace  P.)     Prose  Miscellanies.     12mo.  1  00 

Binkerd  (A.  D.)     The  Mammoth   Cave  of  Kentucky.     Paper. 

8vo.  50 

Bouquet  (H.)      The  Expedition  of,  against  the  Ohio  Indians  in 

1764,   etc.      With    Preface   by   Francis   Parkman,   Jr.      8vo. 

$3  00.     Large  Paper.  6  00 

Boyland  (G.  H.,  M.  D.)     Six  Months  Under  the  Red  Cross  with- 

the  French  Army  in  the  Franco-Prussian  War.     12mo.       1  50 


2  Historical  and  Miscellaneous  Publications  of 

Brunxer  (A.  A.)     Elementary  and  Pronouncing  French  Reader. 

18mo.  00 

Bruxxer  (A.  A.)      The  Gender  of    French   Verbs  Simplified. 

18mo.  25 

Burt  (Rev.  N.  C,  D.  D.)  The  Far  East;  or,  Letters  from  Egypt, 

Palestine,  etc.     12mo.  1  75 

Butterfield  (C.  W.)     The  Washington-Crawford  Letters;  being 

the  Correspondence  between  George  Washington  and  William 

Crawford,  concerning  Western  Lands.     8vo.  1  00 

Butterfield  (C.  W.)     The  Discovery  of  the  Northwest  in  1634, 

by  John  Nicolet,  with  a  Sketch  of  his  Life.     12mo.       In  press. 

Clark  (Col.  George  Rogers)  Sketches  of  his  Campaign  in  the 
Illinois  in  1778-9.  With  an  Introduction  by  Hon.  Henry 
Pirtle,  and  an  Appendix.     8vo.     $2  00.     Large  paper.        4  00 

Coffix  (Levi)  The  Reminiscences  of  Levi  Coffin,  the  Reputed 
President  of  the  Underground  Railroad.  A  Brief  History  of 
the  Labors  of  a  Lifetime  in  behalf  of  the  Slave.  With  Stories 
of  Fugitive  Slaves,  etc.,  etc.     12mo.  2  00 

Constitution'  of  the  United  States,  Etc.  The  Declaration  of 
Independence,  July  4,  1776;  the  Articles  of  Confederation, 
July  9,  1778;  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States,  Sep- 
tember 17,  1787;  the  Fifteen  Amendments  to  the  Constitution, 
and  Index;  Washington's  Farewell  Address,  September  7, 
1796.     8vo.     Paper.  25 

Craig  (N.  B.)  The  Olden  Time.  A  Monthly  Publication,  devoted 
to  the  Preservation  of  Documents  of  Early  History,  etc. 
Originally  Published  at  Pittsburg,  in  1846-47.  2  vols. 
8vo.  10  00 

Drake  (D.)  Pioneer  Life  in  Kentucky.  Edited,  with  Notes 
and  a  Biographical  Sketch,  by  his  Son,  Hon.  Chas.  D.  Drake. 
8vo.     $3  00.     Large  paper.  6  00 

DuBreuil  (A.)  Vineyard  Culture  Improved  and  Cheapened. 
Edited  by  Dr.  J.  A.  Warder.     12m o.  2  00 

Ellard  (Virginia  G.)  Grandma's  Christmas  Day.  Illus.  Sq. 
12mo.  1  00 

Family  Expense  Book."  A  Printed  Account  Book,  with  appro- 
priate Columns  and  Headings,  for  keeping  a  Complete  Record 
of  Family  Expenses.     12mo.  50 

Finley  (I.  J.)  and  Putnam  (R.)  Pioneer  Record  and  Remin- 
iscences of  the  Early  Settlers  and  Settlement  of  Ross  Countv, 
Ohio.     8vo.  2  50 

Fletcher  (Wm.  B.,  M.  D.)  Cholera:  its  Characteristics,  History, 
Treatment,  etc.     8vo.     Paper.  1  00 

Force  (M.  F.)  Essays  :  Pre-Historic  Man — Darwinism  and  Deity 
— The  Mound  Builders.     8vo.     Paper.  75 


Bohert  Clarke  t£-  Co.,  Cincinnati,  Ohio.  3 

Force  (M.  F.)  Some  Early  Notices  of  the  Indians  of  Ohio.  To 
What  Race  did  the  Mound  Builders  belong.    8vo.    Paper.      50 

Freeman  (Ellen.)  Manual  of  the  French  Verb,  to  accompany 
every  French  Course.     16mo.     Paper.  25 

Gallagher  (Wm.  D.)  Miami  Woods,  A  Golden  Wedding,  and 
other  Poems.     12mo.  In  press. 

Giattque  (F.)  The  Election  Laws  of  the  United  States:  with 
Notes  of  Decisions,  eic.     8vo.     Paper,  75c. ;  cloth,  1  00 

Grimke  (F.)  Considerations  on  the  Nature  and  Tendency  of 
Free  Institutions.     8vo.  2  50 

Griswold  (W  )  Kansas:  her  Resources  and  Developments;  or, 
the  Kansas  Pilot.     8vo.     Paper.  50 

Groesbeck  (W.  S.)  Gold  and  Silver.  Address  delivered  before 
the  American  Bankers'  Association,  in  New  York,  September 
13,  1878.     8vo.     Paper.  25 

Hall  (James.)  Legends  of  the  West.  Sketches  illustrative  of 
the  Habits,  Occupations,  Privations,  Adventures,  and  Sports 
of  the  Pioneers  of  the  West.     12mo.  2  00 

Hall  (James.)  Romance  of  Western^  History;  or,  Sketches  of 
History,  Life,  and  Manners  in  the  West.     12mo.  2  00 

Hanover  (M.  D.)  A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Law  of  Horses, 
embracing  the  Law  of  Bargain,  Sale,  and  Warranty  of  Horses 
and  other  Live  Stock ;  the  Rule  as  to  Unsoundness  and  Vice, 
and  the  Responsibility  of  the  Proprietors  of  Livery,  Auction, 
and  Sale  Stables,  Inn-Keepers,  Veterinary  Surgeons,  and  Far- 
riers, Carriers,  etc.     8vo.  4  00 

Hart  (J.  M.)  A  Syllabus  of  Anglo-Saxon  Literature.  8vo. 
Paper.  50 

Hassaurek  (F.)  The  Secret  of  the  Andes.  A  Romance. 
12mo.  1  50 

The  Same,  in  German.     8vo.     Paper,  50c. ;  cloth.  1  00 

Hassaurek  (F.)  Four  Years  Among  Spanish  Americans.  Third 
Edition.     12mo.  1  50 

Hatch  (Col.  W.  S.)  A  Chapter  in  the  History  of  the  War  of 
1812,  in  the  Northwest,  embracing  the  Surrender  of  the 
Northwestern  Army  and  Fort,  at  Detroit,  August  16,  1813,  etc. 
18mo.  1  25 

Hayes  (Rutherford  B.)  The  Life,  Public  Services,  and  Select 
Speeches  of.  Edited  by  J.  Q.  Howard.  12mo.  Paper,  75c; 
cloth,  1  25 

Hazen  (Gen.  W.  B.)  Our  Barren  Lands.  The  Interior  of  the 
United  States,  West  of  the  One-Hundredth  Meridian,  and 
East  of  the  Sierra  Nevada.     8vo.     Paper.  50 


4  Historicol  and  Miscellaneous  Publications  of 

Henshall  (Dr.  James  A.)  Book  of  the  Black  Bass:  comprising 
its  complete  Scientific  and  Life  History,  together  with  a  Prac- 
tical Treatise  on  Agling  and  Fly  Fishing,  and  a  full  description 
of  Tools,  Tackle,  and  Implements.     Illustrated.     12mo.     3  00 

Horton  (S.  Dana.)     Silver  and  Gold,  and  their  Relation  to  the 

Problem  of  Resumption.     8vo.  1  50 

Horton  (S.  Dana.)     The  Monetary  Situation.     8vo.     Paper.     50 

Housekeeping  in  the  Blue  Grass.  A  New  and  Practical  Cook 
Book.  By  Ladies  of  the  Presbyterian  Church,  Paris,  Ky. 
12mo.     12th  thousand.  1  50 

Howe  (H.)  Historical  Collections  of  Ohio.  Containing  a  Col- 
lection cf  the  most  Interesting  Facts,  Traditions,  Biographical 
Sketches,  Anecdotes,  etc.,  relating  to  its  -Local  and  General 
History.     8vo.  6  00 

Hunt  (W.  E.)  Historical  Collections  of  Coshocton  County,  Ohio. 
8vo.  3  00 

Huston  (R.  G.)  Journey  in*  Honduras,  and  Jottings  by  the  Way. 
Inter-Oceanic  Railway.     8vo.     Paper.  50 

Jackson  (John  D.,  M.  D.)  The  Black  Arts  in  Medicine,  with 
an  Anniversary  Address.  Edited  by  Dr.  L.  S.  McMurtry. 
12mo.  1  00 

Jasper  (T.)  The  Birds  of  North  America.  Colored  Plates,  drawn 
from  Nature,  with  Descriptive  and  Scientific  Letterpress.  In 
40  parts,  $1  00  each ;  or,  2  vols.  Royal  4to.  Half  morocco, 
$50  00 ;    Full  morocco,  60  00 

Jordan  (D.  M.)      Rosemary   Leaves.      A  Collection  of  Poems. 

18mo.  1  50 

Keller  (M.  J.)    Elementary  Perspective,  explained  and  applied 

to  Familiar  Objects.     Illustrated.     12mo.  1  00 

King  (John.)  A  Commentary  on  the  Law  and  True  Construc- 
tion of  the  Federal  Constitution.     8vo.  2  50 

King  (M.)     Pocket-Book  of  Cincinnati.     24mo.  15 

Klippart  (J.  H.)   The  Principles  and  Practice  of  Land  Drainage. 

Illustrated.     12mo.  1  75 

Law  (J.)     Colonial   History  of  Vincennes,  Indiana,  under   the 

French,  British,  and  American  Governments.     12mo.         1   00 

Lloyd  (J.  U.)  The  Chemistry  of  Medicines.  Illus.  12mo.  Cloth, 
$2  75;  sheep,  ^  3  25 

Longwouth  (N.)  Electra.  Translated  from  the  Greek  of  Sopho- 
cles.    12mo.  1  50 

McBride  (J . )  Pioneer  Biography :  Sketches  of  the  Lives  of  some 
of  the  Early  Settlers  of  Butler  County,  Ohio.  2  vols.  8vo. 
$6  50.     Large  paper.     Imp.     8vo.  1 3  00 


Robert  Clarke  &  Co.,  Cincinnati,  Ohio.  5 

McLaughlin  (M.  Louise.)  China  Painting.  A  Practical  Manual 
for  the  Use  of  Amateurs  in  the  Decoration  of  Hard  Porcelain. 
Sq.     12mo.     Boards.  75 

McLaughlin  (M.  Louise.)  Pottery  Decoration:  being  a  Practical 
Manual  of  Underglaze  Painting,  including  Complete  Detail  of 
the  author's  Mode  of  Painting  Enameled  Faience.  Sq.  12mo. 
Bds.  1  00 

MacLean.  (J.  P.)  The  Mound  Builders,  and  an  Investigation  into 
the  Archaeology  of  Butler  County,  Ohio,    lllus.    12mo.         150 

MacLean  (J.  P.)  A  Manual  of  the  Antiquity  of  Man.  Illustrated. 
12mo.  1  00 

MacLean  (J.  P.)  Mastodon,  Mammoth,  and  Man.  Illustrated. 
12mo.  60 

Mansfield  (E.  D.)  Personal  Memories,  Social,  Political,  and 
Literary.     1803-43.     12mo.  2  00 

Manypenny  (G.  W.)  Our  Indian  Wards:  A  History  and  Dis- 
cussion of  the  Indian  Question.     8vo.  3  00 

Matthews  (Stanley.)  A  Summary  of  the  Law  of  Partnership. 
For  the  Use  of  Business  Men.     12mo.  1  25 

May  (Col.  J.)  Journal  and  Letters  of,  relative  to  Two  Journeys 
to  the  Ohio  Country,  1788  and  1779.     8vo.  2  00 

Mettexheimer  (H.  J.)  Safety  Book-keeping;  being  a  Complete 
Exposition  of  Book-keepers'  Frauds.     12mo.  1  00 

Minor  (T.  C,  M.  D.)  Child-Bed  Fever.  Erysipelas  and  Puer- 
peral Fever,  with  a  Short  Account  of  both  Diseases.    8vo.   2  00 

Minor  (T.  C,  M.  D.)    Scarlatina  Statistics  of  the  United  States. 

8vo.     Paper.  50 

Montana  Historical  Society.    Contributions.    Vol.1.    8vo.    3  00 

Morgan  (Appleton.)  The  Shakspearean  Myth;  or,  William 
Shakspeare  and  Circumstantial  Evidence.     12mo.         In  press. 

Name  and  Address  Book.  A  Blank  Book,  with  printed  Head- 
ings and  Alphabetical  Marginal  Index,  for  Recording  the 
Names  and  Addresses  of  Professional,  Commercial, and  Family 
Correspondents.     8vo.  1  00 

Nash  (Simeon.)      Crime  and  the  Family.     12mo.  1  25 

Nerinckx  (Rev.  Charles.)  Life  of,  with  Early  Catholic  Mis- 
sions in  Kentucky;  the  Society  of  Jesus;  the  Sisterhood  of 
Loretto,  etc.     By  Rev.  C.  P.  Maes.     8vo.  2  50 

Nichols  (G.  W.)  The  Cincinnati  Organ;  with  a  Brief  Descrip- 
tion of  the  Cincinnati  Music  Hall.     12mo.     Paper.  25 

Ohio  Valley  Historical  Miscellanies.  I.  Memorandums  of  a 
Tour  Made  by  Josiah  Epsy,  in  the  States  of  Ohio  and  Ken- 
tucky, and  Indiana  Territory,  in  1805.  II.  Two  Western  Cam- 
paigns in  the  War  of  1812-13:  1.  Expedition  of  Capt.  H.  Brush, 


6  Historical  an  I  Miscellaneous  Publications  of 

with  Supplies  for  General  Hurl.  2.  Expedition  of  Gov.  Meigs, 
for  the  relief  of  Fort  Meigs.  By  Samuel  Williams.  III.  The 
Leatherwood  God:  an  account  of  the  Appearance  and  Preten- 
sions of  J.  C.  Dylks  in  Eastern  Ohio,  in  1828.  By  R.  H.  Taney- 
hill.     1  vol.     8vo.     $2  50.     Large  paper,  5  00 

Once  A  Year;  or,  The  Doctor's  Puzzle.     By  E.  B.  S.     16mo.  1  00 

Phisterer  (Captain  Frederick.)     The  National  Guardsman:  on 

Guard  and  Kindred  Duties.     24mo.     Leather.  75 

Physician's  Pocket  Case  Record  Prescription  Book.  35 

Physician's  General  Ledger.     Half  Russia.  4  00 

Piatt  (John  J.)  Penciled  Fly-Leaves.  A  Book  of  Essays  in 
Town  and  Country.     Sq.     16mo.  1  00 

Poole  (W.  F.)  Anti-Slavery  Opinions  before  1800.  An  Essay. 
8vo.    Paper,  75c. ;  cloth,  1  25 

Practical  receipts  of  experienced  house-keepers.  By  the  ladies 
of  the  Seventh  Presbyterian  Church,  Cin.     12mo.  1  25 

Prentice  (Geo.  D.)      Poems  of,  collected  and  edited,  with  Bio- 
graphical Sketch,  by  John  J.  Piatt.     12mo.  2  00 
Quick  (R.  II.)     Essays  on  Educational  Reformers.     12mo.   1  50 

Ranck  (G.  W.)  History  of  Lexington,  Kentucky.  Its  Early 
Annals  and  Recent  Progress,  etc.     8vo.  4  00 

Reemelin  (C.)  They  Wine-Maker's  Manual.  A  Plain,  Practical 
Guide  to  all  the  Operations  for  the  Manufacture  of  Still  and 
Sparkling  Wines.     12mo.  1  25 

Reemelin  (C.)     A  Treatise  on  Politics  as  a  Science.     8vo.     1  50 

Reemelin  (C.)  A  Critical  Review  of  American  Politics.  8vo, 
In  Press. 

Rives  (E.,  M.  D.)  A  Chart  of  the  Physiological  Arrangement  of 
Cranial  Nerves.  Printed  in  large  type,  on  a  sheet  28x15 
inches.     Folded,  in  cloth  case.  50 

Robert  (Karl).  Charcoal  Drawing  with  out  a  Master.  A  Com- 
plete Treatise  in  Landscape  Drawing  in  Charcoal,  with  Les- 
sons and  Studies  after  Allonge.  Translated  by  E.  H.  Apple- 
ton.      Illustrated.     8vo  1  00 

Roy  (George).  Generalship;  or,  How  I  Managed  my  Husband. 
A  tale.     18mo.     Paper,  50c;  cloth,  1  00 

Roy  (George).  The  Art  of  Pleasing.  A  Lecture.  12mo. 
Paper.  25 

Roy  (George).     The  Old,  Old  Story.     A  Lecture.    1 2mo.  Paper.  25 

Russell  (A.  P.).     Thomas  Corwin.     A  Sketch.     16mo.   In  Press. 

Russell  (Wm.)  Scientific  Horseshoeing  for  the  Different  Dis- 
eases of  the  Feet.     Illustrated.     8vo.  1  00 


Robert  Clarke  &  Co.,  Cincinnati,  Ohio.  7 

Saylkr  (J.  A.)  American  Form  Book.  A  Collection  cf  Legal 
and  Business  Forms,  embracing  Deeds,  Mortgages,  Leases, 
Bonds,  Wills,  Contracts,  Bills  of  Exchange,  Promissory  Notes, 
Checks,  Bills  of  Sale,  Receipts,  and  other  Legal  Instruments, 
prepared  in  accordance  with  the  Laws  of  the  several  States; 
with  Instructions  for  drawing  and  executing  the  same.  For 
Professional  and  Business  Men.     8vo.  2  00 

Sheets  (Mary  R.)  My  Three  Angels:  Faith,  Hope,  and  Love. 
With  full-page  illustrations  by  E.  D.  Graiton.  4to.  Cloth. 
Gilt.  5  00 

Skinner  (J.  R.)  The  Source  of  Measures.  A  Key  to  the  Hebrew- 
Egyptian  Mystery  in  the  Source  of  Measures,  etc.     8vo.      5  00 

Smith  (Col.  James).  A  Reprint  of  an  Account  of  the  Remark- 
able Occurrences  in  his  Life  and  Travels,  during  his  Captivity 
with  the  Indians  in  the  years  1755,  '56,  '57,  '58,  and  '59,  etc. 
8vo.     $2  50.     Large  paper,  5  00 

Stanton  (H.)     Jacob  Brown  and  other  Poems.     12mo.  1  50 

St. Clair  Papers.  A  Collection  of  the  Correspondence  and  other 
papers  of  General  Arthur  St. Clair,  Governor  of  the  Northwest 
Territory.  Edited,  with  a  Sketch  of  his  Life  and  Public  Ser- 
vices, by  William  Henry  Smith.  In  Press. 

Strauch  (A.)  Spring  Grove  Cemetery,  Cincinnati:  its  History 
and  improvements,  with  Observations  on  Ancient  and  mod- 
ern Places  of  Sepulture.  The  text  beautifully  printed  with 
ornamental,  colored  borders,  and  photographic  illustrations. 
4to.     Cloth.     Gilt.  15  00 

An  Svo  edition,  without  border  and  illustrations.  2  00 

Stitder  (J.  II.)  Columbus,  Ohio:  its  History,  Resources,  and  Pro- 
gress, from  its  Settlement  to  the  Present  Time.     12mo.      2  00 

Taneyhill  (R.  H.)  The  Leatherwood  God:  an  account  of  the 
Appearance  and  Pretensions  of  Joseph  C.  Dylks  in  Eastern 
Ohio,  in  .1826.     12mo.     Paper.  30 

Ten  Brook  (A.)  American  State  Universities.  Their  Origin  and 
Progress.  A  History  of  the  Congressional  University  Land 
Grants.  A  particular  account  of  the  Rise  and  Development  of 
the  University  of  Michigan,  and  Hints  toward  the  future 
of  the  American  University  System.     Svo.  2  00 

Tilden  (Louise  W.)  Karl  and  Gretchen's  Christmas.  Illustrated. 
Square  12mo.  75 

Tilden  (Louise  W.)  Poem,  Hymn,  and  Mission  Band  Exercises. 
Written  and  arranged  for  the  use  of  Foreign  Missionary  Soci- 
eties and  Mission  Bands.     Square  12mo.     Paper.  25 

Trent  (Capt.  Wm.)  Journal  of,  from  Logstown  to  Pickawillany. 
in  1752.      Edited  by  A.  T.  Goodman.     8vo.  2  50 


8  Historical  and  Miscellaneous  Publications., 

Tripler  (C.  S.,  M.D.)  and  Blackman  (G.  a,  M.D.)  Handbook  for 
the  Military  Surgeon.     12mo.  1  00 

Tyler  Davidson  Fountain.  History  and  Description  of  the 
Tyler  Davidson  Fountain,  Donated  to  the  City  of  Cincinnati, 
by  Henry  Probasco.     18mo.     Paper.  25 

Vago  (A.  L.)  Instructions  in  the  art  of  Modeling  in  Clay. 
With  an  Appendix  on  Modeling  in  Foliage,  etc.,  for  Pottery  and 
Architectural  Decorations,  by  Benn  Pitman,  of  Cincinnati 
School  of  Design.     Illustrated.     Square  12mo.  1  00 

VanHorxe  (T.  B.)  The  History  of  the  Army  of  the  Cumberland ; 
its  Organization,  Campaigns,  and  Battles.  Library  Edition. 
2  vols.  With  Atlas  of  22  maps,  compiled  by  Edward  Ruger. 
8vo. Cloth,  $8  00;  Sheep,_  $10  00;  Half  Morocco,  $12  00. 
Popular  Edition.  Containing  the  same  Text  as  the  Library 
Edition,  but  only  one  map.     2  vols.     8vo.     Cloth.  5  00 

Vexable  (W.  H.)  June  on  the  Miami,  and  other  Poems.  Second 
edition.     18mo.  1  50 

Voorhees  (D.  W.)  Speeches  of,  embracing  his  most  prominent 
Forensic,  Political,  Occasional,  and  Literary  Addresses.  Com- 
piled by  his  son,  C.  S.  Voorhees,  with  a  Biographical  Sketch 
and  Portrait.     8vo.  5  00 

Walker  (C.  M.)  History  of  Athens  County,  Ohio,  and  inci- 
dentally of  the  Ohio  Land  Company  and  the  First  Settlement 
of  the  State  at  Marietta.  ^  $6  00.     Large  Paper.     2 

vols.     $12  0U.     Popular  Edition.  4  00 

Walton  (Gr.  E.)  Hygiene  and  Education  of  Infants;  or,  How 
to  take  ca1  e  of  Babies.     24mo.     Paper.  25 

Ward  (Durb  n).  American  Coinage  and  Currency.  An  Essay 
read  before  the  Social  Science  Congress,  at  Cincinnati,  Mav 
22,  1878.     8vo.     Paper.  10 

Webb  (F.)  and  Johnston  (M.  C.)  An  Improved  Tally-Book,  for 
the  use  of  Lumber  Dealers.     18mo.  50 

Whittaker  (J.  T.,  M.  D.)  Physiology;  Preliminary  Lectures. 
Illustrated.     12mo.  *1  75 

Williams  (A.  D.,  M.  D.)  Diseases  of  the  Ear,  including  Neces- 
sary Anatomy  of  the  Organ.     8vo.  3  50 

Young  (A.)     History  of  Wayne  County,  Indiana,  from  its  First 

•    Settlement  to  the  Present  Time.     8vo-  2  00 


CHIEF  OF  SMALL-MOUTH  BLACK  BASS. 

Editor  Forest  and  Stream: 

Last  evening,  as  I  was  walking  up  town  from  the  post 
office,  I  noticed  a  crowd  of  people  collected  on  one  of  the 
principal  streets  of  our  village,  and  as  I  neared  the 
gathering  a  horse  and  carriage  issued  from  it,  and  in  the 
driver  I  recognized  Mr.  L.  D.  Boynton  of  Green's  Bridge. 
When  Mr.  Boynton  saw  me  he  pulled  up  his  horse,  and 
putting  his  hand  under  the  carriage  seat  produced  and 
held  up  to  view  a  monster  black  bass  of  the  small- 
mouthed  species.  In  reply  to  my  inquiry  he  said  that  the 
bass  weighed  8|lbs.,  and  had  been  weighed  by  people 
that  he  named  and  that  I  knew;  then  he  drove  on,  leav- 
ing behind  only  the  image  of  the  great  fish  in  my  mind's 
eye. 

Proceeding  up  the  street  to  verify  the  weight  of  the 
bass,  I  met  Mr.  Chas.  H.  Hitchcock,  who  asked  if  I  had 
weighed  the  fish,  and  if  not,  why  not.  Two  hours  would 
take  me  to  Gieen's  Bridge  and  back,  allowing  time  to 
weigh  the  bass  and  get  its  pedigree;  therefore,  Mr.  Hitch- 
cock and  I  took  a  car  and  were  duly  delivered  at  our  des- 
tination, where  the  bass  was  found  on  exhibition  and 
intact.  I  put  the  big  fellow  on  a  set  of  counter  scales 
and  he  balanced  91bs. :  but  I  found  that  the  scales  did  not 
balance.  Other  scales  were  produced  and  tested,  and  at 
81bs.  lOoz.  the  bass  in  the  scoop  balanced  the  scale  beam. 
From  nose  to  joining  of  caudal,  measuring  with  a  tape, 
following  the  contour  of  the  body,  the  distance  wasl8in.; 
to  folk  in  caudal.  24|in.:  to  extremity  of  caudal,  25in. 
The  girth  was  lSfin. 

I  sail  to  Mr.  Boyntou  that  I  would  like  to  see  the  fish 
opened,  eviscerated  and  again  weighed,  to  which  he  at 
once  consented.  1  cut  U  open,  took  out  the  gills  and  vis- 
cera, and  again  weighed  it,  when  the  scales  marked  Tibs. 
s,>z.  The  gilis  and  viscera  we!  rhed  lib.  ioz.,  and  the 
missing  ounce  and  a  half  of  *  por  the  shrinkage 

between  the  dressed  and  undressed  fish  will  be  seen  to 
have  been  lib.  2oz. — consisted  of  lost  blood  and  bits  of 
intestines  rubbed  out  when  washing  the  abdominal! 
cavity.  In  the  stomach  of  the  bass  was  a  partly  digested 
yellow  perch  which  in  that  condition  weighed  about  five 
ounces.  I  have  been  thus  particular  about  the  eviscera- 
tion and  weighing  before  and  after  the  operation,  be- 
cause it  has  been  a  matter  of  dispute  how  much  a  big 
bass  loses  by  dressing.  I  have  the  records  of  a  number 
of  bass  dressed  and  undressed,  and  the  shrinkage  is  less 
than  is  generally  supposed. 

This  giant  bass  was  caught  in  Long  Pond  (Glen  Lake), 
four  miles  from  this  village,  with  perch  bait.  Long  Pond, 
not  unknown  to  the  columns  of  Forest  and  Stream,  has 
produced  and  given  up  more  large  specimens  of  the 
small-mouth  bass  than  any  water  in  the  United  States, 
but  the  very  big  ones  show  up  about  as  often  as  a  comet. 

Mr.  Hitchcock  procured  of  Mr.  Boynton  the  bass  with 
whose  person  I  have  been  so  familiar  in  this  letter,  and 
to-morrow  he  will  send  it  to  Mr.  W.  S.  Banta,  33  Pine 
street,  New  York  city,  and  possibly  it  may  be  seen  there. 

( I  LIENS  FALLS,  X.  Y.,  Aug.  19.  A.    N.  CHENEY. 


LOAN  DEPT 

-~r^pe^edh— _      "Mediate  recall. 


nter-library| 


MAY    4  1967 


xtttztt 

rculation  j 


General  Lihraro 


GENERAL  LIBRARY  -  U.C.  BERKELEY 


BQQOaMMDbB 


